Experience in a Book - Jag

EXPERIENCE
IN A
BOOK
Help For The Jaguar XJ-S Owner
by
Kirby Palm
Updated: May 21, 2009
EXPERIENCE IN A BOOK
Help for the Jaguar XJ- S owner
by Kirby Palm
Compiled by an XJ-S owner, Experience in a Book is a unique type of automotive resource providing the sort of how-to
information not found in either owner’s handbooks or repair manuals. The information provided includes maintenance
tips, common problems, suggested modifications, and some sources for parts. The book is not intended to replace a
repair manual, but rather to complement it.
This is not a small pamphlet; the book is 739 pages when printed with a 10-point proportionally-spaced font, and
includes quite a few illustrations and schematics. It grows as more information becomes available.
Experience in a Book may be downloaded, free of charge, from the World Wide Web at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/
Yes, you read right: This whole thing is free. If you have a computer, internet access, and a printer, all it costs you is the
effort to log on and download plus the paper and ink to print. There are no catches; this is a hobby, not a profit-making
enterprise.
This book -- along with a great deal of other Jaguar-related stuff -- is also available on the Nine Lives CD-ROM. There
are links to online ordering from the URL provided above, or you can order it directly from:
Coltrane Productions
PO Box 932
Morgantown, WV 26507
The cost is $2 plus shipping, and shipping is $0.97 in the US, $1.20 to Canada, $1.66 to Mexico, or $3.40 to the rest
of the world.
Experience in a Book is a work in progress and is revised when new information becomes available. If you have learned
something about your XJ-S that the rest of us should know, please visit:
http://www.jag-lovers.org
and log on to the xj-s@jag-lovers.org or v12-engine@jag-lovers.org e-mail discussion lists and post your discoveries
there. Most of the contents of this book came from these discussions.
CONTENTS
THE JAGUAR XJS.......................................................................................................................................................1
SHOPPING FOR A USED XJS..................................................................................................................................13
GENERAL...................................................................................................................................................................15
Repair Manuals...................................................................................................................16
ENGINE.......................................................................................................................................................................32
Leaks..................................................................................................................................39
PCV System.........................................................................................................51
Fault Diagnosis...................................................................................................................53
ENGINE WORK..............................................................................................................................58
Top.......................................................................................................................59
Front.....................................................................................................................89
Bottom.................................................................................................................97
Performance Upgrades......................................................................................................103
Intake Upgrades.................................................................................................107
Other Modifications..........................................................................................................113
IGNITION SYSTEM......................................................................................................................118
Lucas Ignition (up to 1989)...............................................................................................126
Vacuum Advance...............................................................................................131
Centrifugal Advance...........................................................................................137
Lucas Opus Mark 2 (pre-1982)..........................................................................147
Lucas Constant Energy Ignition (1982-89).........................................................153
Marelli...............................................................................................................................159
XJRS................................................................................................................................172
Distributorless Ignition......................................................................................................173
COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................................173
Overheating -- Causes.......................................................................................................178
Fans..................................................................................................................................214
Post-Shutdown Cooling....................................................................................................228
FUEL SYSTEM..............................................................................................................................232
Fuel Fires..........................................................................................................................232
Fuel Odors........................................................................................................................234
Fuel Lines.........................................................................................................................238
Fuel Tank and Filler..........................................................................................................244
Hess & Eisenhardt Convertible...........................................................................249
Surge Tank and Fuel Pickup -- Pre-1992..........................................................................250
Fuel Pump.........................................................................................................................254
1992-on Fuel System........................................................................................................257
Vapor Recovery System....................................................................................................259
Hess & Eisenhardt Convertible...........................................................................263
Throttle Linkage, Idle Speed Adjustment..........................................................................264
Electronic Fuel Injection...................................................................................................273
D-Jetronic...........................................................................................................284
Cold Start Injectors..............................................................................286
Digital P..............................................................................................................289
Cold Start Injectors..............................................................................306
Early 3.6 AJ6 Engines.........................................................................................307
XJRS..................................................................................................................307
Fault Codes.......................................................................................................................307
Passing Emissions Tests....................................................................................................309
Fuel System Upgrades.......................................................................................................310
AIR INJECTION............................................................................................................................312
i
EXHAUST SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................315
DRIVETRAIN............................................................................................................................................................324
BORG-WARNER MODEL 12.......................................................................................................324
GM400............................................................................................................................................325
ALTERNATIVE TRANSMISSIONS............................................................................................339
TRANSMISSION MOUNT...........................................................................................................342
Borg-Warner.....................................................................................................................344
GM400.............................................................................................................................344
DRIVESHAFT................................................................................................................................348
FINAL DRIVE................................................................................................................................349
SUSPENSION & STEERING...................................................................................................................................354
Front Suspension...............................................................................................................362
Steering.............................................................................................................................373
Rear Suspension................................................................................................................384
Rear Swingarm Outer Pivot................................................................................390
Wheels and Tires...............................................................................................................403
BRAKES....................................................................................................................................................................418
Master Cylinder/Reservoir/Booster...................................................................................433
Front Brakes.....................................................................................................................435
Inboard Rear Brakes.........................................................................................................437
Handbrake..........................................................................................................447
TWR Rear Brakes..............................................................................................451
Outboard Rear Brakes.......................................................................................................452
Handbrake..........................................................................................................452
ABS Brakes......................................................................................................................453
Teves Mk III ABS system..................................................................................455
Teves Mk IV ABS System.................................................................................461
ABS System Removal.........................................................................................462
BODY.........................................................................................................................................................................464
Water Leaks......................................................................................................................466
Hess & Eisenhardt Convertible.............................................................484
INTERIOR.................................................................................................................................................................485
CLIMATE CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................493
Common Features.............................................................................................................493
Compressor & Freon Circuit...............................................................................499
R-12 Substitutes.................................................................................................517
Delanair MkII (up to 1987)...............................................................................................530
Delanair MkIII (1987-On).................................................................................................544
ELECTRICAL...........................................................................................................................................................551
Relays...............................................................................................................................562
Starting Circuit..................................................................................................................566
Starter...............................................................................................................................569
Alternator..........................................................................................................................572
Installing a GM Alternator..................................................................................576
Battery..............................................................................................................................584
Fuses and Fuse Blocks......................................................................................................587
Instrument Panel...............................................................................................................590
Instruments and Gauges......................................................................................591
Hess & Eisenhardt Convertible.............................................................595
Warning Lights...................................................................................................596
Trip Computer..................................................................................................................601
Windows...........................................................................................................................603
ii
Mirrors..............................................................................................................................613
Locks................................................................................................................................615
Windshield Wipers............................................................................................................617
Lucas Solenoid-Park...........................................................................................622
Lucas Reverse-Park............................................................................................625
Electrolux...........................................................................................................629
Windshield and Headlight Washers...................................................................................629
Light Bulbs.......................................................................................................................632
Headlights.........................................................................................................................639
Four Round Headlights -- US through 1991.......................................................649
Cibies with two H1 bulbs -- non-US through 1980.............................................652
Cibies with one H4 bulb -- non-US 1981-91.......................................................653
DOT-approved Carello -- US 1992-on...............................................................655
E-code Carello -- non-US 1991-on.....................................................................656
Fog/Driving Lights............................................................................................................661
Horn.................................................................................................................................663
Radio................................................................................................................................664
Antenna.............................................................................................................................667
Miscellaneous Interior Stuff..............................................................................................670
Cruise Control...................................................................................................................671
STORAGE..................................................................................................................................................................682
MODIFICATIONS....................................................................................................................................................684
WEIGHT REDUCTION/RELOCATION.......................................................................................684
COLD WEATHER.........................................................................................................................685
LPG.................................................................................................................................................686
WHERE TO FIND HELP, PARTS, ETC................................................................................................................690
NEW PARTS..................................................................................................................................692
USED/REBUILT PARTS...............................................................................................................697
SPECIALTIES................................................................................................................................698
Interiors............................................................................................................................698
Body.................................................................................................................................701
Restoration/Rebuilding......................................................................................................703
Exhaust.............................................................................................................................705
Electrical...........................................................................................................................705
Steering/Suspension/Final Drive........................................................................................708
Wheels..............................................................................................................................709
Miscellaneous....................................................................................................................710
PERFORMANCE/MODIFICATION.............................................................................................713
ACCESSORIES..............................................................................................................................721
PUBLICATIONS & PERIODICALS.............................................................................................722
MODELS........................................................................................................................................724
INTERNET SOURCES..................................................................................................................725
CLUBS........................................................................................................................................................................730
HERITAGE CERTIFICATE....................................................................................................................................731
The door locks are electric, so they are discussed under Electrical. However, the handles themselves are discussed
under Body.
Cover design: Glen MacDonald
iii
I live in the US. This book has been distributed worldwide, and upon rereading and editing I constantly notice
comments I have made that have a distinctly US bias, like how such-and-such part can be found at the local Walmart. I
have made the decision that I will leave the book this way, rather than trying to qualify each of these instances for all the
people in various parts of the globe. Those in other countries will know better than I how the advice given will apply in
their area.
The XJ-S is sold in countries where they drive on the wrong side of the road, so there are left hand drive (LHD) and
right hand drive (RHD) models. To minimize confusion, in this book the location of an item will nearly always be
described as being on the left side or right side of the car -- meaning left or right as viewed sitting in the car facing
forward. The terms “driver’s side” or “passenger’s side” will only be used to describe the location of items that switch
sides between LHD and RHD models, such as steering column, pedals, glovebox, fuseboxes, etc.
Please note that I have made the decision not to cover the six-cylinder AJ6/AJ16 engines in this book in any detail (there
are a few minor exceptions). Since it is the same engine that is in the XJ40/X300, it shouldn’t be too much trouble to
find information on this engine elsewhere. The parts of this book covering non-engine items should still be of some
value to owners of AJ6/AJ16-powered XJ-S’s.
I also make no effort to cover features unique to the XJ12. Owners of such cars would probably be well advised to
acquire both this book and Jim Isbell’s book on the XJ6 (see http://www.jag-lovers.org) and use the parts of each that
apply. There will still be some shortcomings -- neither will properly cover the carburetor setup on the early XJ12, for
example -- but the owner is still likely to benefit greatly from both books.
DISCLAIMER
My own car is a 1983 XJ-S H.E.. Understandably, this book is likely to be more complete and accurate for similar
vintage cars than for the early (B-W tranny, non-H.E.) cars or the newer (ABS, revised bodywork, 6.0 liter) cars. It also
cannot be expected to accurately cover the differences of cars sold in countries other than the US.
While most of the information (both from my own experience and that sent in from others) has been verified on my car,
obviously I cannot be responsible for the applicability to other XJ-S’s. I am not associated with Jaguar, and have no
means for verifying configurations of other cars. Therefore, the XJ-S owner should take advice accordingly and
determine for himself if it applies to his car and will serve his purposes.
It should also be understood that an owner performing even minor work on his own car can affect his warranty. If there
is any doubt whether or not the item in question is covered under warranty, the owner is advised to take it to his dealer
prior to doing any work himself. If the owner is told by the dealer that the item is not covered, then the owner can make
his own informed decision how to proceed.
Finally, an owner making changes to his car is responsible for making sure he is not violating emissions laws or safety or
other regulations applicable where he lives and drives. There have been a few comments made in this book about
regulations in various areas, but they are to be taken as general info, not legal advice.
iv
IS THIS A REFERENCE BOOK?
Many XJ-S owners may consider this book reference material, and don’t bother to look at it until they need to work on
something or spend some money on the car. Unfortunately, sometimes the money spent could have been saved if they
had read about how to avoid problems in the first place! And, yes, sometimes the money saved can amount to
thousands of dollars; both the Lucas and later Marelli ignition systems have faults that can cost you an engine or even
the entire car in very short order.
Hey, it’s up to you; it’s your car, your time, and your money. However, I highly recommend you read this book!
Jaguars are not drive-it-and-forget-it cars; they demand a certain amount of awareness on the part of the owner, and
reading this book cover-to-cover will go a long way toward making the owner aware of his car -- and possibly save him
loads of $$$ in the future, as well as making Jaguar ownership a more pleasant experience.
If you cannot be convinced, at a minimum please read about the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ordering manuals and catalogs starting on page 16.
Hot shutdowns on page 34.
Centrifugal advance mechanism seizure (pre-Marelli ignition) beginning on page 137.
Reread the discussion of centrifugal advance mechanism seizure beginning on page 137.
If you still haven’t overhauled the distributor by this point, reread the discussion of centrifugal advance mechanism
seizure again. In fact, keep rereading it until that distributor has been overhauled. Am I getting through yet?
Relocation of ignition amp (pre-1983 models), page 148.
Catalytic convertor meltdowns on page 161 (Marelli ignition cars; if you have a car with Marelli ignition, do not fail
to read this section!).
Shortcomings of the cooling system, recommendations, and “How hot is too hot?”, starting on page 173.
Advice on using cooling system sealers on page 189.
Fan cracking on page 214.
Engine fires on page 232.
Fuel sump pickup problems on page 251.
Fuel pump power supply concerns on page 255.
Soft shifts on page 337.
Replacing the steering rack bushings on page 375.
ABS brake testing (on cars so equipped) on page 454.
Radius arm mount rust problems on page 464.
Brake fluid level switch problems on page 596.
Saving the stereo from water damage on page 665.
v
THE JAGUAR XJ-S
WHAT’S IN A NAME?: First and foremost, it’s high time to quit abusing the name “Jaguar”. It does not rhyme with
“quagmire”! According to Jim Isbell: “At a recent Jag Club meeting they showed a video of the history of Jaguar from
the Swallow to the present. I was most interested to see how the owners and perpetrators of the Jaguar company
pronounced it. There were several old voice interviews and I listened very carefully every time one of them spoke. The
pronunciation I got from those interviews was: Jag-u-wer. I think the people who invented it must know how to
pronounce it.”
The name of the car that this book addresses is the “XJ-S” -- or, at least that was the name. Up until 1982 the dash
actually had its own part number, since the four characters on the back end of the car were four separate pieces; through
the rest of the 80’s, the four characters on the back of the car were a single badge, but the hyphen was still apparent.
Since the badge on the car itself has to be considered the ultimate authority, up until 1991 anyone referring to the car as
an “XJS” was in error. This was a very common error, since XJ6 and XJ12 do not have dashes in the names and it was
commonly assumed that this was normal Jaguar naming convention. Unfortunately for anyone trying to keep such
things straight, even the folks at Jaguar were guilty of this error, as evidenced in several of their brochures and manuals.
According to Paul Skilleter’s book “Jaguar XJS: A Collector’s Guide”, when the bodywork was revised for the 1991
model year the name of the car was officially changed to “XJS” to emphasize the change.
I will also mention what a “Daimler” is. Daimler was a British automobile company that was bought out by Jaguar in
1960. However, Gottlieb Daimler also founded a German automobile company that merged with Benz & Cie. in 1926
forming Daimler-Benz AG (later DaimlerChrysler, still later Daimler AG). The Mercedes manufacturer registered the
name Daimler in the US, so Jaguar cannot use the name in the US even though the former British company by that name
belongs to them. Daimler-Benz always called its cars Mercedes (after somebody’s girlfriend many decades ago), so
there are no cars known as Daimlers sold in the US.
While the British Daimlers were originally a distinct line of automobiles, eventually they became variations on Jaguars.
Regarding the cars covered by this book, the Jaguar XJ12 was also sold as the Daimler Double Six in some countries,
with detail differences including a distinctive fluted grille.
S TYPE: From “Great Marques - Jaguar” by Chris Harvey:
The S type saloon
There was a considerable demand for a more luxurious version of the compact saloon,
and Lyons decided to combine the major improvements of the Mark X with the established
features of the Mark 2, once the Daimler had been launched. The result was the Jaguar S
type saloon introduced in 3.4-litre and 3.8 litre forms in September 1963. These cars were
similar to the Mark 2 in most dimensions and running gear, except that they had the new
independent rear suspension.
The S type (no hyphen) and most other lines of Jaguar saloon were discontinued when the XJ6 was introduced in 1968.
In a shameless attempt to capitalize on William Lyons’ glory of years past, Ford/Jaguar introduced a new S-type (with
hyphen) in 1998. David Berman says, “The S-TYPE is related to the Lincoln LS6/8. This is known as the DEW98
platform.”
So why is all this discussion in a book on the XJ-S? Because some people insist on referring to the XJ-S as an “S-type”.
Makes sense; the rolling phallic symbol known as the E-type in Europe and elsewhere was marketed as the XKE or XKE in the US, so it naturally follows that Jaguar’s marketing department must be similarly misguided regarding the XJ-S.
Connoisseurs of the E-type sometimes get huffy if you are so base as to refer to their cars as XKE’s, so people may
actually think they are using the more proper term for the XJ-S when they call it an S-type.
1
So, how common is this error? Believe it or not, it spread to the marketing department at Jaguar again! The 1981 XJ -S
sales brochure said:
Jaguars have always been distinguished by a special grace of form and a rare poise in
motion. Yet even among the legendary Jaguars of the past, this new S-type stands out.
The XJ-S does what Jaguars have always done -- only better. It is quick and responsive,
stable at speed, silent in motion and notably luxurious.
Despite the disinformation tactics of those goobers, it’s really not proper to refer to an XJ-S as an S-type; the mid-60’s
car was an upscale compact saloon, and even the 1998 knockoff appears to follow along that same theme. The XJ-S is
clearly in an entirely different class.
VIN NUMBER DECODING: There are two different VIN numbering schemes for the Jaguar XJ-S. All cars have a
VIN number stamped into the sheet metal dead center in front of the hood seal, and this VIN corresponds to the scheme
described below, based on input from Richard Mansell, William Noorloos, and Paul Skilleter’s book.
Position 1-3 denotes manufacturer
SAJ = Jaguar
Position 4 denotes marque
J=Jaguar
D=Daimler
5th is model
N=XJ-S
S=XJR-S
T=Special edition
6th is class
A=baseline
J=Japan
K=Japan with airbag
L=Canada
M=Canada with airbag
V=USA spec with manual belts
W=USA spec with driver airbag
Y=USA spec with passive belts.
7th is body type
C=Cabriolet
D=Convertible
E=Coupe
F=2+2 Convertible
2
8th is engine type
B=3.6 4VB
C=3.6 4VC or 3.6 4Y
D=3.6 4VD or 4.0 4Y
E=3.6 4VE
K=5.3 F
S=6.0
V=5.3 A
W=5.3 B
X=5.3 C
Y=5.3 D
Z=5.3 E
9th is Transmission and steering
3=Auto RHD
4=Auto LHD
7=manual RHD
8=manual LHD
10th is model or year change
A=XJ-S original spec
B=HE coupe
C=AJ6 coupe and convertible
D=V12 convertible
E=facelift (1992-)
except for USA, Canada and Korea where from 1981 the 10th letter indicates year of build starting with
B=1981. Skip the letter I, so J=1988.
11th is emission control equipment
(up to 1987: manufacturing plant, C=Browns Lane)
12th-17th are the vehicle’s unique number.
Andrew Stott says, “My car is UK spec, pre-HE, made in 1979, D-Jetronic. The VIN is JNAEW1AC101185. One
confusing thing is that the character in the VIN that denotes the transmission and steering is a '1' and according to the
books it should be a '7' as it is a manual RHD car. In Skilleter's XJ-S Collectors Guide, he gives details of the last
production XJ-S manual. It was made in 1979 and had a VIN of JNAEW1AC1018xx; this would suggest that the '1' in
the transmission character position is valid for a RHD manual car.”
Now, if you have a US-spec car, there is a tag within the left edge of the windshield that carries a totally different VIN
number. This VIN corresponds to the following scheme, from the “MOTOR import car crash estimating guide” for the
US:
1st-3rd Position - Manufacturers Code
SAJ=Jaguar, United Kingdom
3
4th Position - Model Line
A=XJ6
A=Vanden Plas
C=Sovereign
F=XJ6
H=XJ6, Sovereign
K=Vanden Plas
M=Majestic
M=XJ12
N=XJ-S/XJSC
P=XJR/Sport
S=Jagsport
T=Rouge/Classic
5th Position - Class/Restraint
A=Passive Seat Belt (87-89)
T=Driver Air Bag w/Passive belt
V=Active Seat Belt
W=Driver Air Bag (90-95)
X=Driver & Pass Airbag
Y=N. American Spec (83-87)
Y=Passive Seat Belt (89-93)
6th Position - Body Style
1=4 door sedan
2=2+2 Convertible
3=2 door Cabriolet
4=Convertible
5=2 door coupe
7th Position - Engine Code
0=5.3l 12 cyl, Calif.
1=4.0l 6 cyl, Supercharged
2=4.2l 6 cyl, Calif.
3=4.2l 6 cyl
3=6.0l
5=3.6l 6 cyl low compression
6=3.6l 6 cyl high compression
7=4.0l 6 cyl
8=5.3l 12 cyl
9=4.0l 6 cyl
8th Position - Transmission & Steering
4=Automatic (LHS)
8=Manual (LHS)
9th Position - Check Digit
4
10th Position - MODEL YEAR
D=1983
E=1984
F=1985
G=1986
H=1987
J=1988
K=1989
L=1990
M=1991
N=1992
P=1993
R=1994
S=1995
11th Position - Assembly Plant
C=Browns Lane, England
12th-17th Position - Production Sequence Number
Alex Dorne had a US-spec car shipped to Sweden, and reports that the process included removing the VIN tag at the
left side of the windshield -- possibly to avoid confusion between this VIN and the one under the hood. He was allowed
to keep the windshield tag. Also, the VIN under the hood also appears on the aluminum panel inside the trunk, just to
the right of the latch. He postulates that this may have been stamped as part of the Swedish import procedures as well.
ACTIVE SEAT BELTS? They don’t look very active. Peter Cohen clarifies: “It means that if you are not "active" and
"actively" fasten your seat belt, it ain't gonna be fastened. As opposed to "Passive" seat belts that are motor mouse
driven.”
WHAT’S IN A YEAR?: Now that you have deciphered your VIN and know for sure what year your XJ-S is, do you
really know what year your XJ-S is? If you live in the US, perhaps you’ve noticed that each model year seems to appear
several months before the year itself, which certainly makes it doubtful that the car was actually built in the year it’s
purported to be. Apparently, the “model year” is a term that varies from country to country, and -- of course -- the US
has the least rational definition. Peter Cohen says, “For those interested in trivia, here's how it works: In the US a given
model year can only be manufactured to be offered for sale on a single January 1st. That's the only rule. This can result
in the following (more or less true) example: A certain 1996 model of vehicle began manufacture in December 1994,
was put on sale 2 January 1995 and continued to be sold as a 1996 model until September 1996 (although legally they
could have been sold until 31 December 1996). This is not to say that one that remained unsold on 1 January 1997
would have become a 1997. It is the date that it is intended to be sold as a "current" model that the regulation applies
to. So, that's what happens when marketing types run amok.
“I find it particularly galling when you go to buy a used car. You will be asked the same price for a 4 year old car as for
a 5 year old car. You don't know what you are buying unless and until you remember to check the manufacture date,
and even then it probably won't help your bargaining position.
“On US spec vehicles, the certification label should say something like "This vehicle meets all US specifications...in
effect for model year 19xx." IMHO, that is what year a US spec car is, regardless of the manufacture date or what's on
the title.
“When you get outside of the US, "year" becomes too simplified of a question. I don't think that non-North American
spec cars come labelled with month/year of manufacture. In England, cars are referred to by their registration letter,
which changes on 1 August each year. So a leftover model becomes next years' car by virtue or having the newer
5
registration letter.”
John Littler adds, “In Oz, date of manufacture is required on the ADR compliance plate. We have a nice simple system
where a car made in ’88 is an ’88 model.”
Unfortunately, this MY hogwash can’t help but cause some inconsistencies in this book. For example, one person’s
quote might describe a fix on his ’88 when somewhere else it’s made clear that the problem shouldn’t even exist past
1987. There is simply no way to correct such things in everyone’s direct quotes, although whereever possible attempts
are made to clarify which configuration a quote is intended to reflect. In general, if this book states that something
applied to a particular range of model years, please allow about one year of leeway before deciding whether or not it
applies to your car.
XJ12 STYLES: For the benefit of those XJ12 owners who read this book, I am including some info on the various
different cars that have all been called an XJ12. The following is courtesy of B.J. Kroppe: “XJ12s were made in Series
III body style until 1992 (yes, alongside XJ40 6-cylinder models). XJ12s in XJ40 body style were made for one year.
Whether it was only one-half of a year or a full year, it was 1994. XJ12s in X300 body style were made from 1995 1997, when the V12 engine was retired from production.
Series I XJ12 5.3l
Series II XJ12 5.3l
Series III XJ12 5.3l
XJ40 XJ12 6.0l
X300 XJ12 6.0l
XJ-S 6.0l
1972 - 1974
1974 - 1979
1979 - 1992
1993.25 - 1995
1995 - 1997
1993.5 - 1997
“Note there were no XJ40 5.3l cars produced.”
Steve Lipscombe explains why the Series III XJ12 continued long after the XJ40 was introduced: “The first XJ40 was
certainly designed with a narrow engine bay to prevent the British Leyland management forcing the Rover V8 unit on
them. Later, when privately owned, they redesigned the bay to take the V12. This was before the Ford takeover and
the X300.”
CABRIOLET: David L. French, a US owner, describes the Cabriolet: “It has the body profile of the convertible that
was made later but has a 3-piece removable hardtop. T-tops up front and a fully removable hardtop on the rear. Totally
factory made.”
Since the Cabriolet lacks the buttresses of the coupe, it stands to reason that the body isn’t as stiff in that area. Jaguar
apparently addressed that problem by adding “ladders” underneath the rear suspension. Julian Mullaney reports: “The
ladder brace was fitted to Cabrios from the factory. Quite crude looking. You can easily spot it on a cabrio just looking
from the side. I think it connects the chassis with steel bars fore and aft of the diff. It passes under the diff. The ladder
frame does not connect to the subframe, it is definitely a chassis stiffener.”
The Cabriolet was apparently offered in 1986-87-88 model years. David King says, “There were at least 1900
Cabriolets shipped to the US and all were V12s even though it looks as if in the rest of the world the AJ6 was the more
common engine for the Cabrio. There were a total of 5014 Cabriolets built during their production run: 5013 Jaguars
and a one-off Daimler.”
HESS & EISENHARDT CONVERTIBLE: The XJ-S was designed in an era that never expected to see a convertible
again; they were expected to be outlawed for safety reasons. For many years, the only way to get an XJ-S convertible
was to hire one of many aftermarket customizing outfits to cut the roof off your coupe. By the mid-80’s the expected
ban on convertibles had failed to materialize and convertibles were making a comeback, so Jaguar responded by
contracting with Hess & Eisenhardt in Cincinnati, Ohio to make convertibles from coupes to be sold as new cars at the
Jaguar dealerships. After two years, the response had been so good that Jaguar began making its own convertibles at
6
the factory, and continued until the end of XJ-S production.
Mike Cogswell elaborates: “The H&E's were built in '87 and '88 (my '88 is one of the last, possibly the last). The H&E
is easily spotted by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The small oval Hess & Eisenhardt badge on each side behind the front wheel well.
The top folds down flat, the later factory convertible tops are pretty high when folded.
The H&E has four window rocker switches. Early ones are separate, later ones in a single gang of
four.
The factory convertible has a small, ugly <grin> hump in the sheet metal on the side right behind the
doors. This covers the tops of the rear quarter windows, which don't fully retract.
“There are many other differences, but those are some of the most obvious.”
David Johnson adds, “The top also looks better than the regular convertible because it is fabric, not a plastic.” This may
be true for only some of the H&E tops, though. Another owner says, “I figure they had the tops made in California by
Robbins.”
Supposedly the building the H&E’s were made in burned down, but H&E is still in business making limousines and other
things.
Of course, the nickname H&E is only too likely to cause confusion with the H.E. used to describe the V12 engine with
the Michael May-designed heads.
If you own an H&E or would like to know more about them, Johnson is the guy to talk to. He operates an e-mail
discussion list dedicated to the H&E and serves as a clearinghouse for available information. His phone number is +1
303-708-1850, you can send him e-mail at david@davemjohnson.com, or you can visit his web site at
http://www.davemjohnson.com/.
LISTER: Lister is the name of an outfit that became famous for building racing “specials” powered by Jaguar XK
engines in the late 50’s. Brian Lister withdrew from the racing scene in 1959 when one of his drivers was killed in a
Formula 2 race, but the Lister name reappeared in the mid 80’s in a modified form of the XJ-S. Peter Cohen describes a
1988 Lister XJ-S he looked at: “The car had a V12 with a 5 speed manual gearbox, as well as all trim in body color (no
chrome, no stainless, no black rubber or vinyl), as well as suspension modifications. The car also has some "ground
effects" type body cladding.”
Brian Schreurs refers to a Road & Track article on the Lister: “It states that US versions got no engine upgrades, but
outside-US versions were tweaked considerably. It received a 5-speed from Getrag, the same used in BMW's 7-series at
that time, and also significant improvements to handling at no cost in ride.”
Of course, when Jaguar started offering its own JaguarSport models, the market for such aftermarket modifications
dropped. For the 90’s, Lister was building a fire-breathing monster called the Storm powered by a highly souped up 7+
litre Jaguar V12, and was competing in the major endurance races against Vipers and the like.
TWR: Stands for Tom Walkinshaw Racing, an organization with considerable success racing Jaguars in Europe.
Walkinshaw’s team won the James Hardie 1000 in Australia (better known as the Bathurst 1000) in 1985 in an XJ-S,
after an ignominious effort in 1984 in which the engine stalled on the starting grid and the car was creamed by a Camaro
coming from behind.
TWR modified customers’ XJ-S’s for street use until the formation of JaguarSport -- see below.
1988 LE MANS: Jaguar won the 24 hours of Le Mans! Brian Schreurs says, “The original XJR-S of 1988 was
considered the 'Le Mans Celebration' model. The first 100 were grey in color, had special badging, and a build number
plate. Otherwise they were built to the same specs as any other XJR-S.”
7
John Goodman elaborates: “Early '88, all tungsten grey, 15" speedline "bottletop" alloys and body spoiler kit, slight
suspension upgrade. A limited edition to commemorate Le Mans races.”
JAGUARSPORT: John Goodman: “It was set up in the late eighties, a joint venture between Jaguar and TWR Group,
sadly disbanded in '93-'94, all the tech people now work for Aston Martin. Remember, in the late eighties Jaguar was on
a high, winning race cars and everyone hyped up over the XJ220 (till they found out it had a poxy V6!). Obviously
Jaguar wanted to promote their racing pedigree... Enter Tom Walkinshaw who had been modifying Jaguars to special
order.
“Standard XJ-S's and XJ40's were taken from the Coventry production line and modified at the new JaguarSport plant in
Bloxham (near Banbury in the Cotswold hills England). This is the same plant that assembled the XJ220 and race cars.
This plant now makes the Aston Martin DB7.
“The very low volume production run of JaguarSport 6.0L engines were expensive to produce. Jaguar upped the cc of
the last of the standard Jaguar XJ-S's and XJ12's with a different uprated 6.0L engine and 4 speed autos, this is
reportedly not the same 6.0L as the JaguarSport unit; I do not know the difference, output is similar at 335 bhp, but
retains Marelli ign.
“The JaguarSport XJ40's '88-'92 (both 3.6 and 4.0L models were made, no US versions) were more heavily modified,
special cams and cyl heads.”
Richard Mansell adds: “The first JaguarSport cars were modified at Kidlington, the home of the TWR Jaguar racing
team. JaguarSport moved to Bloxham a year or two later. Cars to be modified were delivered there minus bumpers but
trimmed to JaguarSport spec.
“Owners with standard cars could have them modified to JaguarSport spec under the FAB scheme (Fitted At
Bloxham).”
Nathaniel Musselman says, “I tried to call JagSport in UK, but the number is answered as Aston Martin.”
XJR-S: Richard Mansell: “Some of the many mods included on the original XJR-S's were: 11% stiffer front springs,
20% less compliant rear radius arm bushes, specially valved Bilstein shocks. They were shod with 15" x 7.5" Speedline
wheels. Later on the wheels were widened by 0.5" and different tyres specified. Various suspension mods were made
along the way too. The original paint colours available were - Signal Red, Regency Red, Black, Solent Blue, Silver
Frost and Brooklands Green. The only other colour mentioned for the early cars is Tungsten Grey which was used on
the first 100 XJR-S's sold as Le Mans specials.
“In theory a real XJR-S will have the letter S as the 6th character of the VIN.”
John Goodman: “The Le Mans model changed or rebadged to the XJR-S in '88 until October '89 when the XJR-S was
more heavily modified with uprated engine (6.0L), autobox, all new uprated suspension, and similar "bottletop" wheels
but 8" wide and 16" diameter. Except for the spare which is still 15" with a temporary speed limited tyre!! Could be
because the 245/55 tyres don't fit the wheel well in the trunk; more likely it is because the wheels have different offsets
and different size tyres (225/50 front), so you would need two spares! Or risk mismatched wheels; at least with this it
has a bright orange label on it clearly showing the speed restriction and a warning to change as soon as possible.
“Surprisingly there is no rear anti-roll bar fitted, do not know about the '92's. I do know that TWR spent a lot of time
perfecting the setup for its intended market, i.e. it must retain its Jaguar qualities and handle better, it was never meant to
be a track car. The Lister modified cars were more for the race track feel. Similarly the Sportspack equipped 3.6
manual was designed for another market, it had to feel like it was sporty even if the ride was uncharacteristic for a Jag.
“The XJR-S continued in the new body shape with even more revisions until the introduction of the last of the
"standard" XJS's with the 6.0L/4 speed auto. A dark blue was introduced for the '92 cars and a nice metallic silver/pink,
but you could probably have any Jaguar colour off the production line.
“The genuine JaguarSport XJR-S 6.0 may be identified by the red "JaguarSport V12" badge on the inlet manifolds at a
8
quick glance. Officially these came out in Sept '89. I think all 6.0L engine numbers must start with 8W01****** (mine
does anyway)
“The '88 XJR-S and Sept '88 limited edition Celebration model XJR-S were all standard 5.3. However, TWR converted
a few cars to special order before it changed over to JaguarSport. Some were just cosmetic with standard engines and
some had various engine mods up to 7.2L but the most common was 6.1L and apparently more V12 saloons were
converted than XJ-S's.
“As TWR rebuilt customers' own cars/engines (not necessarily new ones either) then I would guess that the engine no.
relates to the original 5.3 that the car started with. But, I believe there should be a bronze identification plate
somewhere on the engine indicating a genuine TWR engine.
“Should you be lucky enough to actually have an early pre production XJR-S 6.0 it could be some sort of hybrid, may
not have all the mods.
“First look in the boot, the ECU is very obviously different, for a start it's mounted on the left of the fuel tank. There are
two injector power resistors on the L/H inner front wing instead of the usual one of the standard V12 and the air boxes
are also totally different from the standard car, everything else looks the same.
“On the road they are magic! Not harsh, but very good handling. The GM 400 auto box has modified shift speeds and
are quicker in changing, and less reluctant to kick-down into 1st. The steering racks have reduced assistance and appear
to turn faster. The suspension/spring set up is unique to the 6.0L, not the same as the sport spec. option.
“The '92 cars had more power than the pre-facelifted version, went from 318 to 338 BHP with cat exhausts. The BHP
increase is quite small but the engine has a lot more torque.
“US spec: Only 50 coupes and 50 convertibles imported '93 -'94, all were red or black.... So are very rare. Easily
identified by special steering wheel and JaguarSport logo on the seat headrests. Special 6.0L engine (338 bhp) with
Zytek ignition/injection and sequential injection, special reprogrammed GM400 shift speeds, special springs/ bilsteins
(not the same as the sport spec option on the standard cars), 8" wide special alloys with different offsets for front and
rear and an odd mix of rubber, 245/55 rear 225/50, front revalved power steering rack 30% stiffer, twin in tank fuel
pumps. Also, revised more efficient electric cooling fan, revised ducted cold air intakes for the manifolds and a few
other bits! It's not just plastic body mouldings and badges as you thought!!!
“You can order the XJR-S product support manual publication no S-80, unfortunately only available in the USA.
Around $25, but it looks like a dealer service manual.
“The only downside to these cars are the special ECU and distributor. Very expensive and the average Jag dealer knows
little about them! They can be repaired however if sent to the Zytek factory here in the UK. All the other engine
sensors are std. XJS. JaguarSport parts are easily available, I have had no difficulty.”
“Any Jag dealer should be able to give you a print out of all the JaguarSport parts (a few hundred). Apart from the
engines, revised GM400 shift settings, injection/ignition, suspension, bodykit and minor interior changes the rest of the
parts are the same.
“JaguarSport has been disbanded, I have horrendous trouble trying to get technical information for my F.I. problem
(minor problem). However, I have had no trouble in the availability of "JaguarSport" parts.
“US dealers did have, may still have, a technical help hotline to Jaguar UK for all XJR-S queries.”
Goodman adds that “There are full parts lists for all JaguarSport bits on the XJR-S web pages.”
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/xjrs/index.htm
SPORTSPACK: John Goodman: “The SportsPack has nothing to do with JaguarSport. In fact I believe it is standard
on most of the 3.6L coupe XJ-S's (not sure on US cars) and an option on the V12 and 3.6 convertible. Jaguar assumed
the 3.6 5 speed would appeal to the sporty driver! Basically it is harsher springs and dampers, rack bushes and a sporty
steering wheel; I think the cross spoke alloys with 235/60 tyres were part of the package at first but were later offered
9
separately. Ride is quite knobbly; it does not include the re-valved steering rack of the XJR-S 6.0L, which has yet again
different springs/ bilsteins (which also appears lower) and has a far smoother ride than a V12 with the SportsPack
option.”
Richard Mansell: “It was introduced by Jaguar as standard on the 3.6 in Sep 1987 and comprised of 43% uprated front
springs, 3% uprated rear springs, uprated Boge shocks all round, increased diameter front anti-roll bar, rear anti-roll bar
re-introduced, reduced assistance power steering, stiffer rack bushes and Pirelli P600 235/60 VR tyres on the lattice
wheels.
“The SportsPack, a variation of the one on the 3.6, was introduced on the V12 in Dec 1989. Judging by the parts
manual the front suspension is different, I guess because of the extra weight of the V12. The rear springs and shocks are
the same as the 3.6. The rear radius arm and anti roll bar is from the 3.6.
“The sports suspension became available in the US in Feb 1993.
“The later 5 volume workshop manual has a table of shift points for the standard gearbox and one for the SportsPack
gearbox.”
“The twin coachlines along the side of the car were two tone as part of the SportsPack although from VIN 144700 (3.6)
and VIN 148782 (V12) this became standard.
“The sports seats were originally only available as part of the SportsPack.”
1990 LE MANS: Jaguar won again! Mansell: “The second Le Mans Special Edition was introduced at the
Birmingham (UK) Motor show in September 1990 to celebrate the TWR XJR-12 win. Based on a standard car, the 280
models built had quad headlights, 16" lattice wheels, sports suspension, full Autolux leather interior, high-contrast
walnut veneer, a four spoke leather steering wheel and Wilton carpets. The stainless steel sill plates had a 'Le Mans V12'
motif along with the limited edition serial number.
North America did not receive the Le Mans but had their own Classic Collection instead. Along with unique paint
colours, magnolia leather with contrasting piping, leather gearshift knob, charcoal toned leather steering wheel they also
had gold boot and bonnet badges.”
Goodman: “Just a standard XJ-S with SportsPack and spoilers.”
Brian Schreurs says, “There were 280 built for the world. No breakdown on Federal vs. ROW.”
1990 ROUGE EDITION: Brian Schreurs says, “It is a special trim package; no structural changes.”
CALIFORNIA, 1991: Peter Cohen says, “Here in California, there were no 1991 XJ-S’s. The dealers sold 1990
models all through 1991, until the 1992 model came out. I thought that was just the way it was until 1994 when I came
across an actual 1991 Federal model. Now I realize that there are 1991 XJ-S’s all over, just not in California.”
1993, US MARKET: Enrico Campelli says, “For 1993 the standard XJ-S V12 was dropped for USA market and was
only available as XJR-S version, coupè or convertible. 50 coupè and 50 convertible were produced, finished only either
in Signal Red or Jet Black.”
Charlie Randle disagrees. “The US 1993 year XJR-S series were manufactured in a limited edition of 50 Convertibles
and 50 Coupes featuring a serialized plaque on the Dash. The 6.0 engine had the Zytek Engine Management system and
the old 3 speed slushamatic transmission. However, the colors were not limited to black and red. I have seen a Silver
coupe and a Silver convertible here in North Florida, both of which seemed to cycle through the dealer's used car lot
fairly often as the Zytek system was hard to maintain and a frequent problem according to the dealer.”
Steve Gallant cleared up the discrepancy by reporting that, in addition to the 100 red and black cars, there were 4 silver
10
“press” cars (three coupes and one convertible). “Believed to be not part of the 100 since they do not have the silver ID
plate on the console.” He adds: “Red cars have a cream leather interior, black and silver have a black leather (charcoal)
interior. The '94 and later Jaguar 6.0L XJS' have nothing to do with these cars”
Jaguar offered the 4.0 XJ-S in the US in 1993 while the V12 engine was being reworked.
INSIGNIA EDITION: Brian Schreurs says, “Insignia was a limited edition special order. The differences were:
The wood veneer in any colour.
The leather colour any which you wanted.
Piping on the seats.
Insignia Alloy wheels.
Boot fabric was different, thick flannel.”
John Goodman adds, “Not sure about the numbers produced but certainly not more than 100-200, documented
information is very scarce. Mechanically a standard XJS, but with the option at the time to choose a wide range of wild
pearlescent non-standard body colours and customised interior colours/fabrics, including I believe the option of different
wood veneers or grey stained (like the XJ sports sedans). UK market had the quad headlights as well.
“Basically, whatever the customer wanted Jaguar would try to do it! Some colours were quite tame, some wild! All the
mechanical bits are standard so no maintenance worries. May have the option of the sports suspension kit as well;
depends, I think, on country.”
Richard Mansell: “The Insignia options were available by special order from October 1992 and it basically allowed you
to personalise your car with a range of different finishes. The Jaguar sales catalogue from around that period says:
"Like all Jaguars, the latest XJ-S models provide a comprehensive wealth of equipment and appointments as
part of their standard specification; there is no question of providing just a basic car and then charging extra
for virtually every desirable refinement. As a result, the list of items shown here as being optional at extra cost
is quite small. Nevertheless, there is one important development which must be mentioned. This is 'Insignia',
a service carried out by the craftsman of Jaguar Special Vehicle Operations. Under this service they offer:
Stunning, exclusive paint colours
Soft, semi-aniline all-leather interiors, uniquely styled and trimmed in a range of special colours
A choice of natural or tinted wood veneers to compliment and enhance the chosen paint and trim colours"
Mansell mentions that Jaguar Special Vehicle Operations “built the Daimler DS420 Limousine and other specials.”
WEIRD CONVERSIONS: Lots of Jaguars end up converted or modified, especially in the early years when
convertibles weren’t available from the factory. If you have something you can’t identify, Peter Cohen suggests: “The
answer should lie on your doorpost. US federal law requires that a company that modifies a vehicle (such as a
motorhome or convertible conversion) affix a label to the vehicle that says something to the effect of:
"Modified by:___________ Date:_____________
This vehicle conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards in effect on date of manufacture shown
above"
or something like that.
“This should tell you who did the conversion, and, if you are lucky, it will tell you where they are located.”
11
PRODUCTION NUMBERS: John Ratcliff provided these numbers from “a 60-page supplement to the June 95 edition
of Classic and Sports Car, called ‘60 Years of Jaguar - A Celebration’.”
XJ12
XJ12 SII
XJ Coupe (5.3)
XJ-S
XJ12 SIII
XJ-S H.E.
XJ-S Cabriolet
1972-73
1973-79
1975-77
1975-81
1979-92
1981-91
1983-88
XJ-S 3.6 coupe
XJ-S V12 convertible
XJR-S
XJS (4.0, 5.3, 6.0)
V12 saloon (XJ40)
XJ6/XJ12 (facelift)
1983-91
1987-91
1988-93
19911993-94
1994-
3228
16,010
1855
14,890
15,918
46,895
1143 (3.6)
3864 (5.3)
9979
12,771
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
HORSEPOWER: Brian Schreurs: “According to my library, these are the various horsepower/torque ratings:
British-spec pre-HE 5.3L V12: 285@5500/294@3500
Federal-spec pre-HE 5.3L V12: 244@5250/269@4500
British-spec 5.3L V12 HE: 299@5500/318@3000
Federal-spec 5.3L V12 HE: 262@5000/290@3000
British-spec 3.6L 6-cyl: 225@5300/240@4000
British-spec AJ6 4.0L 6-cl: 223@4750/277@3650 (to summer 1994)
Federal-spec AJ6 4.0L 6-cyl: 219@4750/273@3650 (to summer 1994)
British-spec AJ16 4.0L 6-cyl: 241@4700/282@4000 (to present)
Federal-spec AJ16 4.0L 6-cyl: 237@4700/282@4000 (to present)
(no difference in market noted) 6.0L V12: 308@5350/355@2850
12
SHOPPING FOR A USED XJ-S
If you are considering the purchase of a used XJ-S, there is one very important thing to do: Insist upon having a
compression check performed -- by an independent mechanic, if possible. On a V12, one or two bad cylinders can easily
go unnoticed on a test drive if you aren’t familiar with how the Jaguar should drive.
If any cylinders read lower than the rest by more than 10% or so, be aware that an engine overhaul will cost thousands.
You will probably decide to pass on the car unless it is really cheap and you plan on engine work anyway.
Note that it is unusually difficult to pull the spark plugs on this car, so a compression check will involve a couple hours
labor on the part of your mechanic. Money well spent.
Mike McGaw suggests that, if the car has ABS brakes, special attention be paid to their condition. Apparently some
owners, upon learning how much it will cost them to repair their ABS brakes, decide that the solution is to disconnect
the warning indicators and sell the car. This is liable to lead to a very expensive and a very dangerous situation indeed.
There is a diagnosic process described under "Accumulator Testing" on page 457 that is easily performed and will go a
long way toward instilling confidence in the condition in the system.
One other noteworthy comment regards mileage. If properly maintained, the Jaguar can easily pass 200,000 miles
before any major renovation is needed. So, the prospective Jaguar buyer would be well advised to pay a little less
attention to what the odometer says and a little more attention to the completeness of the maintenance records.
As far as everything else on the car is concerned, it’s pretty much the same as buying any other car. Bodywork and
repainting are always expensive, and are more so on a Jaguar. Rust is always a call for concern. Apparent bodges or
slipshod repairs are signs of trouble.
If you’re really a careful shopper, read this entire book first. It will give you a really good idea what pitfalls to look for
in a used car.
Don Marlin notes that you can check out the Kelley Blue Book WWW page at:
http://www.kbb.com/
Or, of course, you could actually buy a Kelley Blue Book. There is another similar product by the National Automobile
Dealers Association (NADA). Both come in both a consumer and a dealer version.
Mike Wilson adds another source of value estimation:
CPI Value Guide
P.O. Box 3190
Laurel, MD. 20709
1-800-972-5312
RELIABILITY CONCERNS: Is the Jaguar XJ-S a reliable automobile? I think that, based on a review of any of the
available statistics, the short answer would have to be no. However, the real reasons for the poor reliability record are
probably not those commonly offered. It’s not really the fact that the engine has 12 cylinders, although this does affect
the cost of repairs.
There are really two basic reasons for the poor reliability record. The first is that there were a few minor glitches in the
design of particular components, which is not all that unusual in automobile design, but while most automakers try to
correct such problems in a timely manner Jaguar apparently allowed many of these problems go unaddressed for
decades. This is arguably because Jaguar was suffering management problems as well as financial problems for a
considerable portion of the production life of this car.
The second reason is a long and shameful history of consistently incompetent service from Jaguar dealers, specialists,
13
and everyone else offering to work on these cars. Obviously, when a common problem becomes apparent in the design
of a car, competent service providers would determine the corrective action necessary and offer such repairs to owners.
But, as noted in many places in this book, service providers have not helped and have even exacerbated many problems,
and apparently continue to do so to this day!
Fortunately, the problems of the design of the XJ-S are all minor and easily corrected, which can render the car very
reliable indeed. When looking for a used car, make sure to select one that hasn’t already been seriously damaged by
poor maintenance (notably overheating), and then promptly read the page titled “IS THIS A REFERENCE BOOK?” at
the front and check through all the items listed. Be sure to actually take the corrective actions recommended; don’t just
read about them!
Some prospective owners are reportedly even scared off by the size of this book! As the author I’m clearly biased, but
I’d suggest that anyone who spent more than ten years compiling information on a Chevrolet Camaro or Ford Mustang
or any other model that’s been offered for more than 20 years would end up with a book at least as hefty as this one!
DURABILITY: Durability is really a different concept than reliability. Reliability is all about a car’s tendency to quit
and leave you stranded or cost you money, while durability is about how long you can drive the car before it’s worn slap
out and needs to be completely renovated or replaced. The two concepts are often confused, and in fact are somewhat
related; as individual components wear out and break down, they render the car unreliable. But when talking about true
durability, the Jaguar XJ-S is a standout among automobiles. One being worn to the point of requiring renovation is
almost unheard of. If the car has the problems noted in this book addressed and the owner replaces items such as rubber
seals, belts and hoses, and normal wear items on a timely basis, the Jaguar XJ-S could easily be considered a car to last a
lifetime. There may be a few other cars with comparable durability, but one that’s this much fun to drive is truly rare!
The one notable exception to the car’s durability is probably the original paint. The paint used up until at least the mid80’s was lousy, usually fading, crazing, and otherwise looking really terrible. If such a car hasn’t been repainted already,
purchasers should probably budget about $3000 for a complete strip and repaint as part of bringing such a car up to
acceptable condition. The 90’s cars supposedly used better paint.
14
GENERAL
GETTING SERVICE: Keeping your Jaguar in good working order is like anything else: If you want it done right, do it
yourself. Doing as much of your own maintenance as possible is highly recommended, based on experiences shared on
the online discussion lists (many of which are related in this book). You might be thinking, “Yeah, but wouldn’t I be
better off hiring somebody with a lot of experience working on these cars?” The answer: You’re holding all the
experience you’re ever likely to need. That’s why the book was so named.
Nevertheless, there will be owners who don’t want to get dirty, or don’t have the time, or don’t have the tools, or don’t
have a garage, or for whatever other reason would simply prefer to pay someone else to work on their car than do it
themselves. There’s nothing wrong with such a strategy; it simply must be made clear that such a decision should not be
made with the expectation that the car will get better service. More convenient, maybe; quicker, quite possibly. But a
long history of experiences with Jaguar dealers, specialists, mechanics, and the like indicate that the XJ-S owner should
expect more problems if he takes his car somewhere for service than if he maintains it himself using this book as a guide.
That said, some guidelines on finding a good mechanic: First, note that the XJ-S has been out of production for some
time now, and Jaguar dealerships are not likely to be all that enthused about working on it. Some dealers might be lucky
to even have a mechanic on staff that was there when these cars were built, and all the newer mechanics will have been
trained on the current models rather than the older models. When you pull into a dealer for service, don’t be surprised if
the only enthusiasm displayed towards you and your car comes from a salesman anxious to talk you into trading in that
old pile of junk on a brand new whatever.
With a car such as the Jaguar XJ-S, you will invariably be far better off finding an “enthusiast” -- a guy who loves these
cars and loves to work on them. Even if he works in a dilapidated shack, you’re likely to be much happier with his work
than you would taking the car to a shiny dealership that doesn’t care about your car.
Of course, enthusiasts can be hard to find. One excellent idea would be to ask other Jaguar owners who they take their
cars to. If there is a Jaguar club in the area, ask them. Finally, if there simply are no enthusiasts in your area, consider
finding out where the nearest one is anyway; even if you don’t take your car that far away for oil changes and the like,
there may come a day when you need someone to call who can really help.
Striking out totally in the enthusiast search, your next best option would be to simply find a good independent mechanic.
If he’s willing to tackle a Jaguar, he will probably be capable of fixing most of the problems likely to crop up; it’s not
that different from other cars. If you do a little reading in this book before you go, quite likely the two of you can get
started in the right direction towards getting your problems sorted.
I’d like to suggest that you simply make a copy of this book and give it to your mechanic to help him work on your car,
but experience shows that this doesn’t work very well. Many mechanics seem to consider it an insult that you would
suggest that he needs help from a book. Others apparently can’t read. And almost none of them are inclined to put that
kind of time into learning about Jaguars, especially since they have never seen a book like this one and are unaware
anything of the sort exists. So, perhaps you might offer a copy, or perhaps just discuss your car with him and if he asks
how come you know so much you can tell him about it. If you happen to find a mechanic who expresses an interest in
the book, I’d suggest you have a keeper; if he actually reads a significant portion of it, he will be the best mechanic
you’re likely to find.
Meanwhile, if you will read this book, you will find yourself far better able to judge whether or not a mechanic is up to
snuff on the Jaguar XJ-S. You will become an informed consumer.
PARTS REPLACEMENT STRATEGIES: For those obsessed with keeping their cars in original condition, obviously
only original parts will do. The suggestions throughout this book are for those who simply want their cars to run and to
minimize cost and grief in the process.
Experienced British car enthusiasts will agree that most of their reliability problems come from two sources: Non15
metallic parts and Lucas electrics. This is especially true for Jaguars, where the rest of the car is generally excellent.
Rumors abound as to why the rubber and plastic parts on British cars tend to crap out so soon. One rumor says there is
a law in Britain requiring the use of natural rubber rather than the far superior synthetic elastomers. Whatever the cause,
the Jaguar owner is well advised to replace the original Jaguar seals, hoses, belts, etc., with non-British substitutes
whenever feasible.
It has been suggested that the various vinyl and rubber protectants on the market, such as STP Son Of A Gun, can be
used to help many rubber components last longer. Sandy Gibbs: “When I owned a TR8 I had many of the same
problems regarding engine heat and rubber components. I found Armor All and Son of a Gun were useless unless
applied every three or four days (if you drive the car much). What did work was brake fluid, of all things. You have to
soak the part in question pretty well then rub the fluid in. Let the part dry before running the car. This procedure may
have to be repeated two or three days in a row but then the rubber is revitalized, after that one need only repeat the
procedure every two or three months. The key here is keeping the brake fluid off anything but the rubber part. This
process works on nearly any rubber part except, for some reason, tires.”
Lucas has been called the “Father of Darkness”. Contrary to popular opinion, Lucas did not invent darkness -- they
merely perfected it to a fine art! The owner is well advised to replace Lucas electrical components with alternative
products when feasible. It should be noted that many of the electrical parts on a Jag are not really Lucas; the “Jaguar”
stereo is probably made in Japan, and many of the EFI components are Bosch relabelled as Lucas.
Other than electrical and non-metallic parts, Jaguar components are typically excellent, and most are reasonably priced.
Whether it is better to replace a broken item with the Jaguar original or a substitute must be decided on an individual
basis. A good general rule is: If the original failed of its own accord, it might be better to try another source. But if the
failure was secondary (due to something else failing first), the Jaguar parts may very well be the best there are;
substitutions are in order only where the prices of the originals are unreasonable.
Regarding rebuilt parts, Randy Wilson says, “There are many companies out there that rebuild to a price, replacing only
the “common” failure part. Their attitude is it’s cheaper to only replace the one part and let the consumer figure out
which units need more work than it is to full rebuild and test every unit. This is true with electrical, a/c, steering gear,
and other things. The real sad part is these unscrupulous clowns often drive the reputable rebuilders out of the market
by the price difference. Rebuilds are a pain. The cheap ones are no bargain. And just buying an expensive one is no
guarantee. It may be a thorough rebuild, or it may be a cheap one that your vendor is making a killing on.”
REPAIR MANUALS: For a listing of sources for manuals, see “PUBLICATIONS AND PERIODICALS” starting on
page 722.
As mentioned on the flyer page, this book is not intended to substitute for a proper repair manual; you will need to buy
one if you intend to do any work on the car. In general, there appear to be three to choose from: an XJ- S Repair
Operation Manual from Jaguar intended for owners, a set of XJ-S Service Manuals from Jaguar intended for dealers
and authorized mechanics, and a Haynes manual. The Jaguar publications come in several varieties for different model
years, while the Haynes has been published in only one version.
The XJ-S Repair Operation Manual (commonly referred to as “the ROM”), is expensive (around $100) and mediocre;
not only is it somewhat difficult to follow, it is also fraught with errors. Nevertheless, it’s still probably the best choice
here.
From the introduction of the XJ-S until 1982, Jaguar offered a basic ROM, part no. AKM 3455, ©1975. This edition
does not cover the GM400 automatic transmission.
With the introduction of the H.E. in 1982, Jaguar issued an addendum titled Jaguar XJ-S H.E. - Supplement to the
Repair Operation Manual, part no. AKM 3455/S1, ©1982, commonly known as “the H.E. Supplement”. They also
issued an updated edition of the ROM, AKM 3455 Ed 3 “incorporating H.E. Supplement”, ©1982. Understandably, the
H.E. Supplement included in Ed 3 is identical to the Supplement available as a separately bound volume. Ed 3 does
cover the GM400 automatic transmission, though.
16
In 1984 part no. AKM 3455 Ed 4 was issued; this apparently represents the last correction and update to the ROM
itself, even though rather than incorporate the H.E. data into the main part of the manual it continued to feature an H.E.
supplement. From 1984 on, the ROM was updated solely by the addition of supplements; “Ed 4” comes with
Supplement A only, “Ed 4/2” (©1989) comes with Supplements A & B, and “Ed 4/3” (©1995) comes with
Supplements A, B, and C:
A
B
C
1979 - 1984
1984 - 1988 1/2
1988 1/2 - on
H.E.
Lucas 'P', cabriolet from VIN 112586, 30 pages
6.0 litre, 4-speed A/T, ABS, new body, convertible, 168 pages
Physically, the ©1975 ROM and ©1982 Supplement came as separate softcover books with off-white covers, while in
the Ed 3 and Ed 4 versions Jaguar incorporated the manual and supplements into a single binding. John M. Smith has
the Ed 4 printing, and somehow got a hardbound copy: “Pre-H.E. sections in white pages. H.E. supplement at rear in
green pages.” Steve Draper reports on his Ed 4/2: “It is a single softbound volume.” Chris Carley got the Ed 4/3, “One
book soft bound in Jag green. Each supplement has black edge at the beginning page with heading so you can flick
through & see it.”
Supplement A in the Ed 4 books is apparently quite similar to the ©1982 separately-bound H.E. Supplement, even
though the ©1982 Supplement is 63 pages while Supplement A is 74 pages. The pages must be counted by hand since
neither of these supplements have sequentially numbered pages. This book contains many references to the ©1982
Supplement, since the author owns a copy; readers should generally presume that the references apply equally well to
Supplement A.
Unfortunately, when you actually try to buy a repair manual, you not only may have trouble telling which version you’re
getting -- you may have trouble telling if it’s a ROM! For some reason, many booksellers have an aversion to actually
listing the title as clearly printed on the front of the book. Rather than offering an XJ- S Repair Operation Manual, they
will call it an “Official Shop Manual”, “Official Jaguar Repair Manual”, or whatever other name they can dream up to
confuse the customer. In general, if the price is in the $80-$120 range, you can assume it’s the XJ- S Repair Operation
Manual, but it never hurts to ask to make sure before shelling out the cash.
Also note: With some bookstores, if you tell them what year car you have, you may get only what they think you need;
this author has an ’83, and ended up with the ©1975 edition ROM and the ©1982 Supplement. While this may be
considered acceptable, a later ROM is always better since they still contain the earlier info; the Ed 4 is clearly an
improvement over the ©1975 ROM even if you own a mid-70’s XJ-S simply due to the corrections incorporated. And
there is always the possibility that you may decide to upgrade some part of your car with the parts from a later car. Just
about the only reason to accept an earlier ROM is if you find a clearance price.
Note that if you have the GM400 transmission, you will want to insist upon the Ed 3 or Ed 4 edition; the ©1975 ROM
covers only the Borg-Warner, and the ©1982 Supplement doesn’t help. The Ed 4 edition covers the GM400 quite
thoroughly, as described by Patrick MacNamara: “My ROM AKM 3455 Ed 4 has an extensive chapter on removal,
fault finding and overhaul for the GM 400. It also contains everything on the BW except removal. Interestingly, the
table of contents lists both transmissions and all related chapters as the same for both (ie 44.00.00 is data and description
for the GM, while 44.00.00 is hydraulic flow charts for the BW). You just have to make sure you are looking at the
correct chapter 44 in the text as there are two.”
If you happen to get stuck with the ©1975 ROM and wish to work on your GM400 automatic transmission, your best
bet would be to get a separate repair manual for the tranny. Andrew Kalman suggests How To Work With And Modify
The Turbo Hydra-matic 400 Transmission by Ron Sessions, Motorbooks International, 1987, 224 pages, 300
illustrations; ISBN 0-89738-267-8. Kalman says: “It seems quite complete, with a historical overview, basic
maintenance, operation, overhaul, modifications and speed tuning.” This book is highly recommended by many; for
example, Mark Johnson says, “If Kirby had compiled a book on transmissions, this would be it.” How’s that for an
endorsement!
Of course, you will still lack instructions on how to remove and reinstall the GM400 in an XJ-S, but you can pretty
much make that up as you go along (with help from the transmission mount info starting on page 342 in this book) -- or
you could just buy a Haynes manual, described below. The Sessions book plus the Haynes manual will still be cheaper
17
than buying another ROM to get the GM400 info.
Your second repair manual option is to purchase the XJ- S Service Manuals, which come as sets of several volumes
each. If you thought the Repair Operation Manual was expensive, the series of XJ- S Service Manuals ought to be
good for a major coronary: Several hundred bucks a set. On top of that, you may end up having to buy more sets than
you anticipated; while the later edition ROM’s contain all the info on earlier cars, the multi-volume Service Manuals do
not. Richard Mansell: “Now that I have the manuals in my hot little hands it appears to be more complicated than I
thought. The pre-H.E. to 87-88 manuals (JJM 10 04 06) appear to be based around the pre-H.E. with extra sections to
cover the differences between these and the H.E. (pretty logical so far). The new manuals, up to 91, (JJM 10 04 06-20)
come in 5 volumes rather than the earlier 4 but only appear to cover the additions since the earlier manuals for the 5.3
plus a random selection of the original information. Oh, and it covers the 4.0 engine too. In other words, if you have an
’89 to ’91 5.3 and you want to know about the new ignition, etc., you will need both sets as the later volume set refers
to many sections that only exist in the earlier set; e.g. under the heading “Cylinder heads overhaul” it says:
Remove left and right hand cylinder heads, see 12.29.01.
Where is 12.29.01? Only in the earlier set! Since the five-volume set costs more than the earlier one, I assumed it
would be a complete guide to the later cars. Wrong!
“The only thing of great value in the five-volume set that is not in the four is the Marelli ignition.
“Each set comprise of hardback green ring bound folders with a white growler and the words Service Manual on the
front. The copyright of the first manual is 1988. JJM 10 04 06-20 has the copyright date of 1991.
“I understand that there are add-ons, JJM 10 04 06-201 and 202 that cover models ’92 to ’96. 6.0L engine plus other
changes.” The H. D. Rogers web site (page 712) confirms this, and reiterates that these later manuals are not standalone either -- if you have a ’92-on car you will need all of these sets to cover it.
Robert Woodling says, “I have purchased both the factory four-volume set and the Repair Operation Manual. The
four-volume set in some instances provides better detail while the ROM provides a better step-by-step approach.”
Before buying the multi-volume Service Manuals, you might want to consider the CD-ROM mentioned below. In fact,
you might have to; Keith Lumsdaine says, “As of December 2000, the official Jaguar Workshop Manual part number
JJM 100406 20 for the 1991-on cars is no longer available, as Jaguar have now [Feb 2001] issued it with the
Supplements JJM100406 201 & JJM 100406 202 in CD-ROM form.”
The only XJ-S repair manual made by anyone other than Jaguar is a Haynes manual, Jaguar XJ12 & XJS. This was
manual #478 in Haynes’ old numbering scheme, and is #49015 in their new numbering scheme -- but it’s the same book
either way. It’s a lot cheaper than the Jaguar publications (under $20), cheap enough you might as well pick one up
even if you plan on buying the Jaguar books anyway. It’s based on portions of the factory manuals with some photos of
a teardown of a Daimler Double Six added. This repair manual is referred to simply as “the Haynes manual” throughout
this book.
Classic Motorbooks catalogs list a Haynes manual titled Jaguar 12-Cylinder 1972-85, but this is actually the same book
-- Classic Motorbooks simply cannot bring themselves to list the correct title.
The Haynes manual benefits from some recall and technical bulletin info that does not appear in the Jaguar manuals. It
includes some basic procedures for the GM400 automatic, including a removal/reinstallation procedure, but no overhaul
info. It only covers up to 1985, so owners of later cars will not get any info on the ABS brakes, Marelli ignition, etc.,
and would therefore be better advised to get the Repair Operation Manual with suitable supplements.
Gross errors in the ROM as well as the Haynes are addressed in this book, since the author owns both books; it is
suggested that owners mark all corrections in their manuals as they read about them.
REPAIR MANUALS -- 6-CYLINDER XJ-S’S: The Jaguar XJ- S Repair Operation Manual, AKM 3455, does not
cover the 6-cylinder engines at all, nor their respective transmissions. Gerda Kennedy of Bookspeed (page 722) says,
“There is a separate manual for the XJS 6-cylinder 3.6 and 4.0” and that Bookspeed can provide it. The part number is
AKM 9063. Unfortunately, Walter Petermann counters: “I picked up the AKM 9063. It only covers the 3.6.
18
Copyright date is 83.” That explains that; 1983 is when the AJ6 engine was introduced, so obviously the book won’t
contain the 4.0 AJ16 engine or even the EFI system that was introduced in 1988 with the XJ40.
Petermann goes on to describe the publication: “There's 9 'booklets', about 30-45 pages each. The complete manual is
AKM 9063, but each book has its own number e.g. AKM 9063/1../2 etc.
Book 1:
Book 2:
Book 3:
Book 4:
Book 5:
Book 6:
Book 7:
Book 8:
Book 9:
intro, general specs, engine tuning data, jacking, lubricants, maintenance, service tools.
Engine
emission control, fuel system, cooling system, manifold & exhaust
Clutch, manual gearbox
Propellor (?), final drive
Steering, front suspension, rear suspension, brakes, wheels & tires
Body
Air conditioning
windscreen wipers & washers, electrical, instruments
“The AKM 9063 is now discontinued.”
Note that AKM 9063 does cover the 8CU electronic fuel injection system used on the early AJ6, which never appeared
in any other Jaguar and therefore may be a bit difficult to get info on elsewhere.
Even if you have a later 6-cylinder car, buying AKM 9063 might still make more sense than buying a V12 ROM.
Perhaps you might choose to buy AKM 9063 along with another book -- such as an XJ40 (1988-94 XJ6) manual -- that
covers the later engine configurations (the XJ40 and the ‘88-on 6-cyl XJ-S have the same engine and transmission).
XK’s Unlimited (page 697) offers a book called the Jaguar XJ6 Workshop Manual -- Owners Edition: “Covers 1988 to
1994, 180 pages. This is an "Owners Edition" manual, meaning it is a boiled-down version of the full factory manuals
and covers the maintenance and repair projects most likely to be tackled by an owner.” The good news is that it’s only
about forty bucks. A Haynes manual might also be a consideration; see below.
There apparently is a later Jaguar publication that covers the 6-cylinder XJ-S. XK’s Unlimited offers a book titled XJ- S
3.6/XJ- SC 3.6/XJ-S 4.0 Service Manual, number 11-0252D (which may be an XK’s number rather than a Jaguar
number). It’s priced at a little over $100, indicating it may be the equivalent of a ROM.
If you’re interested in the multi-volume XJ-S Service Manuals described above, Richard Mansell indicates that they do
cover the 6-cylinder engines.
If you have a 6-cylinder XJ-S, the Haynes manual #478/49015 will be no help with the engine or transmission at all.
However, you could opt to buy the Haynes #478/49015 to cover the rest of the car and Haynes manual #49011, Jaguar
XJ6 1988 thru 1994: Automotive Repair Manual, ©1997 (thanks to Loudon Seth for this info) for information on the
engine and transmission, as well as the later IRS with outboard brakes. Or, you could supplement the Haynes
#478/49015 with the Jaguar XJ6 Workshop Manual -- Owners Edition described above. Either combination of two
books should cover most of what you need to know, with the notable exception of the 8CU EFI system used on the
1983-87 3.6 cars.
REPAIR OPERATION MANUALS -- XJ12, DAIMLER DOUBLE SIX: This book is on the XJ-S, but I’ll be a nice
guy and list what little I know about Repair Operation Manuals for saloons as well. John Littler reports that for Series
I/II cars, Jaguar issued one manual for the XJ12 and another for the XJ6, but starting with the Series III they issued a
single manual to cover both.
Regarding the S I/II manual, Littler says, “Jaguar XJ12, Daimler Double Six, Repair Operations Manual. Publication
Part No. E190/4. Copyright 1979. Covers Series 1 and 2 (of which the only significant difference are carbs vs. EFI and
the swap to GM400 halfway through the S2 model run - not the start contrary to common belief.)”
“Series 3 Service Manual - 3 items listed on first page:
Service Manual complete, AKM 9006 Edition 2
Service Manual Book 14, AKM 9006/15 Ed. 2
19
Service Manual Binder, AKM 9006/B Ed.2
“Copyright 1985. Covers both XJ6 and XJ12 series 3; the XJ12 has both H.E. and Pre-H.E. sections although they
aren't particularly differentiated. The S3 manual I have doesn't seem to cover the late XJ12 S3's (1987-92). It covers P
and D Jetronic but there's no mention made about the later ECUs.”
ADDING YOUR OWN BINDER: If you get a softbound ROM -- or any other manual from Jaguar or the UK in
general -- and decide to tear it apart, holepunch it, and put it in a 3-ring binder, you will find that it is a metric sized book
and won’t fit in a US-standard 8½” x 11” binder. If you’re in Europe that’s no problem, but here in the US you may
find it a bit of a challenge. Better office supply stores sell metric “A” size binders, but you’ll also need to get the proper
4-hole punch.
Another option is to drop into a Wal-Mart and buy a photo album intended for the Kodak Advanced Photo System;
these albums are quite a bit larger than standard notebooks yet retain the standard 3-hole pattern. Having a 3-hole
punch with an adjustable paper stop is a plus, so you can adjust the stop to center the holes on the longer pages. Just
throw the photo sleeves out, although the section dividers are nice, you’ll wanna keep them to separate the manual from
the supplements and the like. These photo albums have the added benefit that they are really nice quality; this author
even found one with a dark green, gold, and black cover that looks like it could have come from Jaguar.
PRIMERS: If you are new to automotive tinkering, you should buy one of the many books on the market explaining
general procedures for car repair. While this book is written to be as clear as possible, it is not intended as a primer and
no efforts are made to explain standard auto repair procedures. For example, this book may describe in great detail how
a particular electrical component has a history of shorting out at a particular spot, but it will not provide any instructions
on how to use a VOM to track down a short. Quite the contrary, the reader is expected to know how to do things like
track down a short, so problems that are easily isolated and corrected may not even be mentioned.
PARTS BOOKS: Jaguar also makes parts books. Many owners suggest these books are more helpful to the mechanic
than the repair manual; they contain exploded views of just about everything which are often easier to understand than
the step-by-step text in the ROM or Service Manual. And it helps to know the part number of what you need when
placing a parts order by phone, since the names of Jaguar parts are often confusing and mercurial.
Stephen Wood describes the parts book for the early XJ-S: “Jaguar Parts Manual, RTC-9109-B, for the XJ-S, 1976 to
1982, pre-H.E. cars.”
This author owns the one for the next generation: “Jaguar Parts Catalogue, XJ-S H.E. and XJ-S V12”, RTC9888CE,
August 1987. Note that the title might be misleading; this parts book does not cover the pre-H.E. cars. The title
probably reflects the fact that the H.E. badge on the car was replaced with a V12 badge starting with VIN 125020 even
though otherwise it’s still the same car with the same engine. This book covers models from the introduction of the
H.E. engine through the mid-1980’s -- which should be kept in mind when using it, remembering that “up to” really
means “from the introduction of the H.E. up to” and “from” really means “from this point until 1987.”
Richard Mansell reports on the next edition after that: “...the Jan ’87 to late-’89 parts book (RTC9900CA). IMHO 1
this is laid out a lot better than the earlier parts manuals as it has a description for each item on the same page as the
pretty picture. If you have an ’87 to ’89 3.6 or 5.3 XJ-S this guide is well worth getting, especially to aid reassembly.”
He has a point about the layout since RTC9888CE has no descriptions at all on the page with the illustration but rather
has the descriptions listed in the back under the part number.
JAGUAR BOOKS ON CD: The Jaguar Daimler Heritage Trust (page 691) offers several of the repair manuals and
parts catalogues described above on CD-ROM. Compared to the paper publications, these CD’s are dirt cheap: £12.77
1
IMHO is an Internet abbreviation for “in my humble opinion”.
20
+ 17.5% VAT (£15 even) each plus £2.50 shipping, which adds up to about $25 each or so. If you’re outside Europe
you’re not supposed to have to pay VAT but they charge it anyway and so far nobody has called them on it. Tony
Bailey says, “e-mail Julia Simpson at the JDHT on <jsimps16@jaguar.com> with credit card number and other details.
If you are worried about the security of using plaintext e-mail, Julia's telephone number is +44 (0)24 76 202141, and her
fax number is +44 (0)24 76 405581.” Of course, you could always write a letter.
There are several CD-ROM’s of interest to the Jaguar XJ-S owner. The first is titled XJ- S to 1987 - Original edition
Service & Parts catalogues, part number JHM 1114. This disc contains:
JJM 10 04 06
AKM 3455
RTC 9109B
RTC 9889CA
RTC 9888CE
Service Manual (4-volume)
Repair Operation Manual (Ed 3 with H.E. Supplement)
XJ-S Parts Catalogue
XJ-S 3.6 Parts Catalogue
XJ-S H.E. Parts Catalogue
1988
1982
January 1977
November 1985
August 1987
Plus some photos, a JDHT brochure, etc. The Ed 3 ROM included doesn’t cover 83-on cars, but hopefully the Service
Manual will cover most anything in the pre-88 cars that isn’t in the Ed 3 ROM.
The second CD-ROM is XJS post 1987 - Workshop Service Manual, part number JHM 1127. This disc contains:
JJM 10 04 06/20
Amendment No. 1
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Service Manual (5-volume)
March 1991
August 1993
August 1993
January 1995
Amendment No. 1 was originally issued as four packages of pages; you’re supposed to whip out your Volumes 1
through 4, pull out old pages and replace them with new pages. Of course, you can’t do that when all the pages are on a
CD-ROM. Good luck keeping this straight when looking things up. Printing out the tables of contents might help.
Apparently if you want a parts book for a 90’s car, you’re SOL.
George Balthrop says, “JHM-1146 is the current offering from JDHT.”
There is another CD-ROM that might interest some readers: JHM 1122 covers the SIII XJ12.
Early versions of JHM-1114 and JHM-1127 were formatted using a software package called ScanFile, which is
unsearchable. Really, it’s only presenting scans of the paper; it doesn’t recognize the data on it and therefore cannot sort
or search it. The only way to find anything is basically the same way you’d find it in the paper version: you have to
display the table of contents pages, find a listing that looks like it might contain the info you’re looking for, display that
page, read it, get frustrated, return to the table of contents, try to figure out where the Brits hide information, etc., etc.
Note that JHM 1127 has a later release of ScanFile than JHM 1114. If you buy both, install the later release and use it
to view both discs.
Nope, these CD’s reportedly won’t run on a Mac. The savings over buying the printed versions would probably pay for
a real computer, though.
It doesn’t help that whoever put these packages together didn’t do the best job. Some collections start with the table of
contents, completely omitting the title page and the copyright date. Sometimes they make up names; the four packages
in Amendment No. 1 are called “Supplements” for some reason.
Reportedly there are later releases of these CD-ROM’s that use better formatting.
There is also a JHM 1123. According to George Balthrop it's called a "Supplementary Information CD" and "contains
Model Information as well as Electrical Technical Guides for the various models, with component location information."
Besides ordering directly from JDHT, Craig Sawyers says you can get them “...from a small number of appointed UK
dealers and specialists - JDHT have only appointed 10 of these. The best one to go for IMHO is Martin Robey Ltd on
(+44) 2476 386903. They export too, so no problem there (One of their quoted phone numbers is (+44) 7000 ROBEY
SALES so it could be worth trying that from the US).
Don't bother looking at their website at
http://www.martinrobey.co.uk - it is pretty useless and also doesn't mention JDHT parts.”
21
JHDT says, “Please note that these CDs are generated by Jaguar Classic Parts at Unipart House and that we simply retail
them. In principle therefore, the same CDs should be available at the same price from all the Jaguar Classic Parts
outlets, whether Jaguar dealers or independent approved specialists.”
Apparently the US dealers think you need to pay more -- much more -- than $25 for this info. Don Lundquist says, “I
tried to order from local Jag dealer (JHM1127)... Price quoted was $123.37.” JDHT responds: “Originally these CDs
were being retailed in the USA by Jaguar dealers at far too high prices. However, it has now been agreed that they will
be available through all Jaguar dealers in the USA at the cost of $25.00. We have accordingly been asked by Jaguar
Classic Parts to cease accepting orders from the USA, since we want to give the US dealers a fair chance. Any US
customer who either has difficulty ordering a CD from a local dealer or is still being quoted the old price should contact
Jaguar Classic Parts on +44 (0)1865 383358, or e-mail Brian_North@unipart.co.uk.” There are already reports that the
US dealers insist on adding fees to that $25.
Even if you’d prefer the paper versions, it will undoubtedly prove cheaper to buy these CD-ROM’s and print the books
in entirety on your trusty inkjet. They print just fine -- although they want to print to metric-size paper and will try to
make one page into two when printing on 8½ x 11. The part on the second page is usually just a blank half inch.
TECHNICAL GUIDES: Richard Mansell reports that there is a CD produced by Jaguar (not JDHT) called Jaguar
Services Technical Guides & Focus Series 1998-1999, Issue 1, December 2000. The part number is
S TECH CD1
He lists the contents:
FOCUS SERIES
S 58
XJ-S Engine Performance (1981-88 MY w/ Lucas Ignition)
S 64
1989-91 MY XJS Coupe & Convertible Body Enhancement
S 70
Electrical System Batteries and Charging Second Edition
S 73
Sedan Power Hydraulic System
S 91
1993-94 AJ6 4.0L Engine Management System OBD I Diagnostic Guide
TECHNICAL GUIDES
JTP
425/1 Air Conditioning System HFC Refrigerant Retrofit
XJ6/VDP/XJ12 SEDAN RANGE 1988-94 MY
1988
MY Sedan Range Introduction
S 63
1989 MY XJ6 3.6 Model Year Update
S 66
1990 MY Sedan Range Model Year Update
S 69
1991 MY Sedan Range Model Year Update
S 78
1993 MY XJ6 Sedan Range Model Year Update
S 81
1994 MY XJ12 Sedan Technical Introduction
XJ6/VDP/XJR/XJ12 SEDAN RANGE 1995-97 MY
JJM 101512/50 1995 MY Technical Guide XJ6 & XJ12 Range Introduction JJM
22
181512/55 1995 MY Technical Guide XJ6 & XJ12 Range Supplement 1 JJM
181512/57 1996 MY Technical Guide XJ6 & XJ12 Range (Long Wheel Base
Sedan) JJM 181599/60 1996 MY Technical Guide XJ Sedan & XJS Ranges 1996
MY Update
XJS RANGE
--
1986-88 MY Hess & Eisenhardt Convertible Repair Operation Manual
--
1988 MY XJS Model Year Update S 60
1989 MY XJS Model Year
Update S 60/SUPP 1989 MY XJS Model Year Update Supplement (Marelli
Ignition) S 61
XJ-S Convertible Technical Introduction S 67
1990
MY XJS Model Year Update JJM 101506/01 1990 XJS Convertible Technical
Guide S 71
1992 MY XJS Technical Introduction S 79
1993 MY XJS
Model Year Update S 80
XJR-S Product Support S 83
1994 MY XJS
Model Year Update S 92
1995 MY XJS Model Year Update JJM 101506/52
1995 MY XJS Update from VIN 198335 JJM 181599/60 1996 Technical Guide
Sedan & XJS 1996 MY Update
XJ8/VDP/XJR
JJM 181512/80 1998 MY Technical Guide V8 XJ Series Sedan 1998 MY
Introduction JJM 181518/90 1999 MY Technical Guide XJ and XK Series 1999
MY Update
XK8
JJM 181514/70 1997 MY Technical Guide XK8 Sports Coupe and Convertible
Introduction JJM 181515/70 1997 MY Technical Guide AJ-V8 Engine and
5HP24 Transmission Introduction JJM 181518/90 1999 MY Technical Guide XJ
and XK Series 1999 MY Update
OWNER’S HANDBOOK: Owners who don’t have an owner’s handbook might want to get one. However, note that
insisting on the proper one for your model year XJ-S might not work; apparently Jaguar published a single edition of the
handbook intended to suffice for multiple model years without change. For example, the owner’s handbook for the
1983 model year is titled “XJ-S H.E. HANDBOOK” and is publication part no. AKM 9045, 2nd Edition -- no model
year evident. The copyright date is 1981. Ask for the one with the most recent copyright date before your model year.
If you have trouble finding a handbook from a bookseller, ask at junkyards and similar places that might be parting out a
car of the same year as yours.
SCHEMATICS: See page 551 for info on available wiring diagrams and "electrical guides" -- invaluable on this car.
23
MAIL ORDER CATALOGS: To those just getting started with the XJ-S, take this bit of advice: Order at least two
mail-order catalogs immediately. Turn to page 692, look through the list of new parts suppliers, and start calling until
you have a couple of catalogs coming in the mail. You will want to have such catalogs on hand even if you never order
any parts just so you can tell when some unscrupulous repair shop is trying to rape you on parts costs.
OTHER BOOKS: Richard Mansell suggests: “For XJ-S fans there is a book by Paul Skilleter called Jaguar XJS: A
Collectors Guide (ISBN 0-947981-99-3). It is full of pretty pictures (nearly 200) of XJ-S’s and variants. There is a fair
bit of history detailing specification changes, etc., covering a total of 144 pages.
“Appendix A lists the technical specifications model by model.
“Appendix B lists the location of the chassis/VIN numbers and explains what each bit of the VIN means.
“Appendix C lists launch dates and prices.
“Appendix D is a fairly detailed list of production changes by date chassis and/or engine number.
“Appendix E lists annual production numbers.
“Appendix F lists performance figures.
“If you are into XJ-S’s it is well worth a look.” Skilleter’s book is published by Motor Racing Publications Ltd., Unit 6,
The Pilton Estate, 46 Pitlake, Croydon CRO 3YR, UK, ©1996.
Victor Naumann recommends Publication #S-58, XJ- S Engine Performance. “It has photos and diagrams of ignition
and fuel systems, all the controls and switches and a good section on maintenance procedures, setting throttle plates and
linkage and checking the potentiometer etc.”
Jaguar XJS Gold Portfolio 1975-1988, compiled by R. M. Clarke, is a collection of road tests, specifications,
comparisons, and reports on racing and other modifications. It is published by Brooklands Book Distribution Ltd.,
“Holmerise”, Seven Hills Road, Cobham, Surrey, UK.
John T. Horner suggests “There is a brochure type booklet written by Jaguar when the V12 was introduced and which is
sometimes still available: Genesis of the Jaguar V12. It has a good official summary of the history and specifications as
well as beautiful color overlay drawings of an engine cutaway. I think Bookspeed in the UK may still offer it.” This
author has acquired a copy of this book; it isn’t much from a maintenance standpoint, but it cannot be beat for instilling
an appreciation of one of the finest automotive engines ever designed, providing a concise history and background of the
engine’s development. From an XJ-S owner’s standpoint, the worst thing about the book is that it truly applies to the
original Jaguar V12 introduced in the Series III E-type; many of the details changed by the time most XJ-S’s were built.
The engine shown in the book has carburetors, a canister-type oil filter mounted under the front end of the sump, an oilto-coolant oil cooler, an oil pan that is no wider than the bottom of the block, an alternator mounted backwards so it
sticks out the front of the engine, etc.
Bookspeed’s address is on page 722. Genesis of the Jaguar V12 is also available from Classic Motorbooks, page 723.
Lawrence Buja recommends Jaguar Driver Technical Tips by Bob Bate, ©1990, R.G. Bate Publishing, 501 Cleveland
St., Birkenhead, Merseyside, England. “Technical Tips is a huge collection of tech articles published in the Jaguar
Driver Club magazine by a professional Jaguar mechanic. It is about 500 pages long and covers an immense range of
topics all related to the real-world operation, diagnosis and repair of Jaguar automobiles.” Makoto Honjo adds, “Bob
does advertise on the JDC, whose flier I sought for a lead. Well, turns out that Jaguar Driver Technical Tips is his
private and is available through him at GBP40 (hey, you've got to pay for quality). You can call him at phone +44-151653-6765 for a copy.”
TECHNICAL PAPERS: In the US the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) maintains a collection of technical
papers. Paper #720163, by Walter T. F. Hassan of Jaguar Cars Ltd., Div., British Leyland Motor Corp., is a quite
24
detailed engineering study of the development of the Jaguar V12. Of course, the paper predates such later developments
as the H.E. Bob Weisickle points out that SAE papers can be ordered from:
http://www.sae.org/
but note that they only offer recent papers online; older papers don’t even show up in a search! You’ll have to call SAE
at +1 (724) 776-4970 Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Eastern time to get older publications.
In the UK there is a similar paper titled “Jaguar V12 Engine - Its Design and Background”, also by Hassan, from the
Technical, Administrative and Supervisory Section of the Amalgamated Union of Engineering Workers (AUEW-TASS),
Onslow Hall, Little Green, Richmond, Surrey.
Roger Bywater says “there is also a similar Institute of Mechanical Engineers paper by Harry Mundy from about the
same time (1972).”
SERVICE RECORDS: Chad Bolles: “...just go to any dealer’s service dept., give them the serial no. of your car; they
can pull it up on the computer and give you the available history.”
FUEL ECONOMY: Keeping an eye on fuel consumption is an excellent way to monitor your car’s condition. Since
EPA ratings are generally unreliable in the real world, it is helpful to know what kind of fuel consumption the XJ-S
should have:
miles/US gal
miles/Imp. gal.
litres/100km
XJ-S H.E.:
everyday:
highway:
16-18
18-20
19-22
21-24
13-15
12-13
Pre-H.E.:
everyday:
9-12
11-14
20-26
12
16-18
14
19-22
20
13-15
6.0:
everyday:
highway:
For those who like to do their own converting, there are 0.83267 Imperial gallons in a US gallon, 3.7854 litres in a US
gallon, and 1.609344 kilometers in a mile.
The values for the pre-H.E. are based on fewer reports, but those reports were fairly consistent; apparently the H.E.
really was a huge improvement in fuel efficiency over the previous design! Note that reportedly the difference only
occurs under light (street) use; with harder running or racing the economy difference diminishes.
The values for the 6.0 are likewise based on fewer reports but the reports were consistent; since the cars are of more
recent vintage and have electronic controls less subject to variation or misadjustment, you’d expect them to be
consistent. It’s perhaps surprising that these cars don’t get better economy than they do, especially considering the
improved transmission and the longer stroke engine. Perhaps the 6.0 drivers have their foot in it more than the 5.3
drivers!
Of course, the standard disclaimer: “Your mileage may vary.” But you know if you are driving harder or under worse
conditions than the average driver, and if you think your fuel mileage is worse than it should be you should immediately
investigate the causes. Many of the common causes also result in major engine damage if left uncorrected.
Jim Isbell was doubtful, but now is a believer: “The O 2 sensors were changed. The results were fantastic. The around
town mileage has increased from 12 MPG (US gallon) to 17 MPG on the first tank after the change.”
Unfortunately, there is one other reported reason for bad city mileage. “B emission” (UK and Europe spec) H.E.’s have
a timer that disables the vacuum advance for 15 minutes after startup if the coolant was below 45°C when started. If
25
you drive 15 minutes to work, park there 8 hours, and drive 15 minutes home, you are always operating on retarded
timing and will get something around 12 mpg. See page 135.
Note also that some areas require the use of “oxygenated fuels”, sometimes just during particular seasons. Oxygenated
fuels result in far worse fuel consumption in any car.
THREADS: The British invented the inch/foot system of measurement, so most of the fasteners on the pre-1984 XJ-S
are English fine thread (UNF or National Fine), available in any hardware store in the US. Jaguar and other British cars
extensively use fine threads, as opposed to the coarse threads (SAE or National Coarse) normally used on American
cars. Coarse threads are sometimes used in aluminum parts, because aluminum is too soft for effective use of fine
threads.
In 1984, many of the fasteners within the engine itself changed to metric sizes. Notably, just about every 5/16” stud
appears to have changed to M8, according to David Johnson. Many of the 1/4” threads changed to M6.
Thanks to a continuing effort towards metric standards, there are metric fasteners in other parts of the car as well -- even
in the pre-1984. Many of the subcomponents, such as the alternator, air conditioner compressor, and stereo are made
with metric threads. Later cars seem to have more and more metric threads. Mike Morrin says, “The nuts holding the
wiper blades are the only metric fasteners I have found on my 1975 car.”
WHITWORTH/BSF: There are, unfortunately, a couple of places where obsolete British standards such as BSF or
Whitworth are found on the XJ-S. See the discussions on the crank damper retaining bolt on page 89, the surge tank
vent connection on page 254, the main power terminals on the firewall on page 558, and the battery terminals and holddown nuts on page 586. Also note that page 12 of the Haynes manual lists wrench sizes for such oddities. Most of the
BSF/Whitworth wrench sizes don’t correspond to anything in SAE or metric sizes; supposedly, Mr. Whitworth decided
to size his bolt heads so that the length of a flat on one side of the hex was some nice even number.
Keep in mind that BSF and Whitworth wrench sizes are the diameter of the bolt, not the dimension across the flats on
the head. And, for some reason, the wrench that fits a BSF bolt seems to fit the next smaller size bolt in Whitworth.
To learn more about British non-standard standards, David Littlefield suggests visiting this WWW site:
http://www.team.net/sol/tech/whitworth-hist.html
Craig Sawyers: “At least here in the UK you can get spanners and sockets from the local tool store that are correct.”
Actually, you can obtain Whitworth tools in the US and presumably other countries; it just takes more looking. Jeb
Boyd says Snap-On has Whitworth tools. David Littlefield suggests British Tools and Fasteners; see page 710. A
search of the WWW should turn up an assortment of mail-order sources.
Note: with the exception of the crank bolt (for which wrench options are discussed on page 89), all of the
Whitworth/BSF wrench sizes used in the XJ-S seem to be the same size: 1/4” Whitworth/5/16” BSF. Hence, it might be
good advice for the XJ-S owner/mechanic to obtain one wrench. The entire Whitworth set is not needed.
TORQUE UNITS: Torque, or twisting force, is specified as an amount of force applied at a radius. In the English
system of measurement force is typically given in pounds or ounces, and radius (distance) in either feet or inches. The
first point of confusion arises because units of mass are also called pounds. As a result, it is increasingly preferred to
speak of pounds force or pounds mass instead of simply pounds. The abbreviation for pounds force is “lbf.” The f does
not stand for feet, and lbf. does not stand for foot-pounds. Readers are encouraged to beat this into their hard skulls
until it sinks in; reading “lbf.” and thinking “foot-pounds” is a good recipe for disaster with this car and this ROM.
The torque value is the amount of force applied times the radius. Twenty pounds applied at a radius of 18 inches is 360
inch-pounds or thirty foot-pounds. Hence, the terms for force and the terms for distance are written sequentially
(doesn’t matter which order, really). Sometimes a hyphen is used, which in this author’s opinion makes things clearer,
but as expected that means that Jaguar chooses not to use a hyphen. In the XJ-S ROM, foot-pounds are written as “lbf.
26
ft” and inch-pounds are written as “lbf. in” That last one, if you’re not paying attention, looks like foot-pounds followed
by the word “in” -- especially if it’s word-wrapped and the “in” is at the beginning of the next line. If you make a
mistake here, you will overtighten something by a factor of 12.
Lacking a hyphen may be confusing, but at least it’s technically correct. Putting a slash between the terms, such as lbf./ft
or lbf./in indicates pounds force divided by feet or inches, and this is most definitely incorrect when used to indicate units
of torque; lbf./ft or lbf./in are units of spring rate, not torque. Unfortunately, Jaguar is reportedly guilty of this error -not just once or twice, but throughout entire manuals. The XJ-S ROM uses correct terms, but Peter Cohen reports “I
don't have the ROM. I have the 4 volume service manual. They use the term "lbf/in".” Loudon Seth says, “The SIII
ROM uses (incorrectly) the form lbf/in or lbf/ft throughout.”
STUDS: Jaguar studs sometimes have fine threads on both ends, and are therefore difficult to find locally. Most studs
in the US have coarse threads on one end and fine on the other. You can, of course, order studs from a Jag mail order
outfit -- sometimes they’re even reasonably priced. If you want to get on with the job and not wait on the mail,
however, you can find a very long stud or bolt at your local auto parts store on which the fine threaded end by itself is
longer than the entire Jaguar stud (many Jaguar studs are rather short). Simply cut the end off and dress up the threads.
Thread the sawn end into the part, leaving the factory-made threads for assembly.
SPIRAL GROOVE WASHERS: The V12 engine is covered with an unusual type of 5/16” washer, C30075/2, that has
a spiral serration pattern on it and is slightly dished. This washer serves the purposes of both a flat washer and a lock
washer. While the serrations may help prevent nuts and bolts from unscrewing, the real locking feature is the dishing; it
makes the washer springy, keeping tension on the fastener.
David Johnson found an acceptable substitute for the spiral groove washers: “I found at Pep Boys an 8MM spring
washer. It's part number is 153-0800. They are in the racks of boxed hardware.” Note these washers don’t look much
like the spiral groove washers; they have no serrations and are sprung the other way -- they’re not dished, they’re wavy.
They are dirt cheap, though. If you find an auto parts store with a Dorman hardware case, Dorman sells essentially the
same type wavy 8mm washer as part number 436-008. They are also available at Lowe’s as Pik-A-Nut part number
792694. Nobody seems to sell wavy spring washers in SAE sizes, but 8mm will fit perfectly on 5/16” bolts.
The V12 also uses a few 1/4” spriral groove washers. A 6mm wavy spring washer (153-0600 at Pep Boys, 436-006 in a
Dorman case) will fit a 1/4” bolt perfectly and serve well.
Note that it is always recommended to use some sort of flat washer whenever a bolt head or nut tightens down onto
aluminum. If you find any places on your engine where a fastener is tightened onto aluminum without a flat washer, it is
recommended that you provide a flat washer.
Conversely, lock washers are only required in certain places. For example, the head studs require no locking feature
because the tension on the stud is carefully applied with a torque wrench and the designers have ensured that the
assembly will never allow the stud to become untensioned in operation. As a general rule, lock washers are required on
short bolts or studs but not required on longer ones because the longer fasteners provide enough stretch to absorb
vibrations and thermal transients without ever going completely slack.
PHILLIPS? THINK AGAIN!: Greg Meboe says, “All Phillips-looking screws on English cars are Pozidriv screws.
(The Japanese radios do use real Phillips screws.) The two standards are different, and once I bought a set of Pozidriv
screwdrivers I found life much easier. The practical difference is quite noticeable. The impressed angle, impression
depth and drive spline widths are different between a Pozidriv and Phillips head design. Using the correct Pozidriv
screwdrivers, I've even had consistent luck removing Pozidriv screws which appeared nearly rounded due to years of
Phillips-buggering by misinformed mechanics.
“A Pozidriv screwdriver will not fit in or drive a Phillips screw. The drive lugs are generally too wide.
“Snap-On, Mac and others sell Pozidriv screwdrivers, but most Americans don't know they exist (I didn't for many
27
years). I've found Pozidriv #2 bits for the cordless screwdriver at Home Depot for a few bucks. Most Pozidriv screws
on our cars are #2, while door striker mounts and seat mounts are #3.” The big flush-head screws at the back end of the
diagonal struts in the engine compartment are Pozidriv #4.
Peter Cohen adds, “From the look of several Pozidriv screws on my car (removed only by Jaguar dealer personnel, while
under warranty), the dealer tool is a chisel.”
You can learn all about Pozidriv at http://www.phillips-screw.com/.
Sometimes Phillips screwdriver bits are marked “No.2” or “P2” while Pozidrive bits are marked “PZ.2” (using size 2 as
the example). Other companies mark their Phillips as “#2” and their Pozidriv as “P2”. The marking on the packaging
can be similarly confusing; the popular idea is to indicate tip types with a little symbol within a circle, but some
companies show the Phillips with a + within a circle and the Pozidriv as an 8-point symbol within a circle while others
show the Phillips as the + within a circle and the Pozidriv as an × within a circle -- basically the same as the Phillips
symbol only rotated 45º. Forget about the markings and simply look for the telltale ridges down the center of each flute,
which may be difficult to make out through the bubble packaging.
Apparently, Phillips Screw has the name “Pozidriv” trademarked, so some other toolmakers make tools to fit Pozidriv
screws while carefully avoiding the illegal use of the name. Easypower Corporation of Chicago makes screwdriver bits
described as “Positive Drive Phillips”, and in fine print says “will fit Pozidriv screws”. Easypower also makes
screwdriver bits called “Octo Driv”, apparently their own trademark, but indiscernable from Pozidriv. All of
Easypower’s bits that fit Pozidriv screws are marked “EZP.1”, “EZP.2”, or “EZP.3”.
Oddly enough, one place to look for Pozidriv screwdriver bits is in a Dollar Tree store. Occasionally they offer a little
plastic container with about 20 gold-tinted screwdriver bits, all for $1, and the bits include Pozidriv bits in sizes 0, 1, 2,
and 3. They may be cheap, but I haven't broken one yet.
You'll still need to find a #4, considerably more difficult because it's too big to be made as a standard screwdriver bit.
Craig Sawyers says, "If you're going mail order, try Farnell 267-030 (200mm blade length, No 4 Posidriv), or 108-494
(203mm blade length, No 4 Posidriv/Supadriv)." Another suggestion is to check Snap-On, not for their 3/8" square
drive #4 Pozidriv bit, but rather for the replacement tip for that Pozidriv bit. Evidently when the tip gets boogered up
you're supposed to drive a roll pin out and replace the tip itself, but the tip itself is actually all you need! You can just
drive it with a box end or a socket that fits the hex body of the tip itself.
Note that Posidriv is not the same thing as “anti-slip”. Phillips screwdrivers described as anti-slip are regular Phillips
screwdrivers with tiny ridges on the tip to supposedly keep the bit from slipping.
Meboe is quite right about all of the Phillips-looking screws being Pozidriv; the little screws on the taillight lenses, the
big screws holding the mirrors on, the small screws holding the ignition pickup in the distributor, everything is Pozidriv.
However, if your car has had any work done that may have involved replacing screws, chances are (in the US, anyway)
that the replacement screws are Phillips. So, you may need both types of screwdriver to work on the car. You could
closely inspect each screw before choosing a screwdriver, but that’s a pain and strains the eyes. Instead, proceed as
follows: Assume all screws are Pozidriv until you find a screw that the Pozidriv screwdriver won’t even fit into, then
pick up the Phillips.
Charlie Randle reports that the facelift cars replace many of the Pozidriv screws with Torx screws. One example is the
large bolt on the diagonal braces under the hood: "I checked the fender struts in the '94's engine bay and they are Torx
#50." With any luck, perhaps owners of facelift cars don't need a set of Pozidriv drivers at all -- but owners of earlier
British cars certainly do, and shouldn't hesitate to acquire a set.
LOCKING WIRE AND TOOLS: Several places on the XJ-S call for locking wire, safety wire, siezing wire, whatever
you call it -- notably on the braking system and IRS. You can buy suitable plain steel wire anywhere, even at Wal-Mart.
Of course, you want it to look nice, so you want stainless steel wire. Many places sell one size of SS wire, 19 gauge,
which is actually about right for most purposes. Note that you need a soft alloy for this job; many types of SS wire, such
as fishing leader wire, are too hard for lockwiring.
28
If you want to get fancier, specialty stores sell stainless steel, inconel, or monel wire in various gauges along with
“lockwire pliers”. Lockwire pliers are a specialized tool with a latch that holds the jaws clamped down on the wire and a
spiral slider that spins the pliers with a simple pull. Lockwire pliers are popular with aircraft mechanics who may be
applying lockwire from sunup to sundown, but for XJ-S purposes they are not really justified; you can do the few
lockwiring jobs found on this car in a couple of minutes with regular pliers.
The theory of lockwire is simple enough, but aircraft mechanics and FAA inspectors will tell you that its use requires a
specific technique and careful application to ensure the intention is achieved: Safety. Applying lockwire requires a bolt
head with a hole drilled crossways through it; sometimes two holes are provided just to allow the choice of whichever
one lines up the best. Often it’s the fact that the bolt heads have such holes that tells you that lockwire might be a good
idea in this location. Insert the wire through the head of the bolt, wrap one end around one side of the bolt head and
underneath the other end, and twist them together in the direction that is likely to keep the wire around the side of the
bolt head instead of flipping off the top. On a right-hand-threaded bolt, the end wrapped around the head should wrap
to the right, and the two leads should be twisted to the right. Twist enough wire to reach a second bolt head and insert
one of the wires through that one, wrap the other wire around the head (this wrap will actually be to the left, since you
are going the other direction), and twist the ends together on the other side (a left twist this time). The twisted section
between the bolt heads doesn’t need to be in tension, but there shouldn’t be much slack in it. The twisted section should
come to a hole on the right side of each head (looking at each from the other), so the two bolt heads and the twisted
strand form a Z pattern. If done correctly, the wire between the bolt heads as well as the wraps around the bolt heads
themselves are arranged so that neither bolt can turn in the loosening direction without stretching the wire. Finally, clip
off the excess wire and bend the tip of the last twisted section back on itself to keep from snagging yourself on it when
working in the area.
If you happen to be lockwiring a single bolt, you will need to tie the other end of the lockwire down to something nearby
to effectively prevent the bolt from loosening. If you happen to be lockwiring three bolts, you can tie all three together
by simply continuing on past the second to the third. If you happen to be lockwiring bolts that are pretty far apart, you
may choose to tie each to something nearby rather than to each other, or to wrap the wire onto something in between
rather than leaving a long span unsupported; vibrations may cause a long section of wire to wiggle, eventually breaking
off.
If any of this is unclear, you can probably drop in on any aircraft maintenance shop and pick up a few pointers. It is
rather important that you get it right, obviously.
If you decide you’d like more safety than was originally provided for, you can drill lockwire holes in bolt heads that
don’t come with them. This is popular in racing, and some racing venues actually have specific requirements for things
that must either be lockwired or provided with tabwashers or self-locking nuts.
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND: Since the XJ-S has many bolts and studs threaded into aluminum, be sure to keep a
supply of anti-seize compound on hand. The stuff is a goop with tiny particles of soft metal in it -- usually copper,
nickel, or silver. As threaded items are screwed together, these soft metal particles get crushed between the threads;
later, after time, heat, and electrolysis have caused all the metals involved to fuse together, this layer of soft metal can
easily be sheared by unscrewing without damaging the parent parts. Use it anytime steel is threaded into aluminum, to
prevent galvanic corrosion from seizing it up. It also works great on exhaust manifold studs. The fact is, many
experienced mechanics (including the author of this book) swear by the stuff, buy it in one-pound cans at better
hardware stores (auto parts shops usually carry it only in small tubes) and use it on everything with threads.
An old toothbrush works great to apply anti-seize compound to threads. You only need to apply enough to give the
parts the color of the anti-seize compound; no need to pile it on, it’ll just come off as the parts are screwed together
anyway.
Anti-seize compound seems to work well on post-and-nut electrical connections, too. This is probably because the
metal particles help make a more secure connection. Be careful not to cause shorts with it, though.
Note that anti-seize compound is not a lubricant, and should never be used on moving parts.
29
SO YOU FORGOT TO USE ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND LAST TIME: Steve Hammatt describes a product to get
stuck bolts loose: “The division is called National Chemsearch and the product is called “YIELD” and is quite
unbelievable in loosening rusted nuts, bolts, etc. Their number is 1-800-527-9919. Their salesmen are everywhere
including (believe) even in Russia!
“The key is to use a true penetrating product that has a lubricant, plus time. Leave it on for at least an hour, then return
and proceed.”
Other folks swear by Liquid Wrench, and even WD-40 has its admirers. Whatever is used, allowing adequate time to
soak in is always required.
Heating a bolt with a torch is also suggested as a method for loosening, but obviously it’s a good idea to wipe the
penetrating oil away first. It also is a good idea to replace the bolt/nut, since the heating may destroy the temper.
SILICONE SEALANTS: Apparently, some silicone sealants can corrode metal parts. Jan Wikström says: “To quote
the famous Castrol ad, silicones ain’t silicones. Some leave a residue of acetic acid as they cure, which is a very weak
acid but could conceivable harm bare metal. The trick is to buy “neutral-cure” silicon.”
Ed Mellinger says: “Silicone sealant isn’t permitted in most aircraft applications for this reason (among others). Two
neutral-cure silicones I know of are Dow Corning 3140 and 3145; one’s an adhesive and one’s a thinner “coating”, but
I’m not sure either is designed to be an engine gasket so buyer beware. Warning... they are priced like aircraft parts too!
“In the “among others” category is the tendency of silicone to squeeze out in a bead and then peel off in strings...
possibly into your engine oil on its way to a bearing! This definite no-no is the most cited reason I’ve heard against use
of silicone in, er, sensitive areas.”
SEALS: If you’re shopping for parts and find you have a choice of seals, Richard Griffiths suggests “use a seal with an
outward facing second lip to prevent dirt getting under the sealing lip.”
If you put a new shaft seal in and there is a bad shaft surface for it to ride on, the new seal won’t last long -- but
replacing the shaft, or removing it for machining, is likely to greatly increase the cost and effort involved. Griffiths and
others point out that there is an easier fix: Thin sleeves that can be slid over the original shaft and held in place with
adhesives. Mike Morrin mentions “the "CR SPEEDI-SLEEVE" which is just this device. Their US number is 1-800882-0008. Their range suits shafts from 0.472" to 8.00".” Brian Schultetus: “These sleeves are almost as old as dirt
and available at any good bearing supply. Since these are basically universal listed by shaft size and width, no application
will be listed as a rule. There are two types of these made; stainless steel are best, the other versions I've seen were
chrome plated and had a tendency to disturb or break the chrome loose when installed. The plated ones I've seen came
from Silver Seal.”
DRIVE-ON RAMPS: The need to get under a car is inevitable, and for those of us who don’t have access to a garage
with a lift, drive-on ramps appear to be a good solution -- cheap, easy to use, and sturdy enough to hold a 4000-lb
Jaguar without dropping it on its owner. However, most ramps appear to have been designed for cars from another era,
and the spoiler pushes them away long before the front tires get near them. Patrick Krejcik provides a solution: “I got
the $17.95 specials, and all I had to do was to put a 2x6, about 18-24 inches long on each ramp to lengthen the slope. I
used a nail in the end of the 2x6, bent it and stuck it in a hole about half way down the original slope, and made the slope
longer and more shallow.”
If you wanna get fancier, Mike Wilson says that Griot’s Garage (page 711) offers a “ramp extension kit”.
CHECKING FOR CRACKS: Jan Wikström provided this “backyard Magnaflux test” for checking for cracks in steel
30
parts: First, the area needs to be clean and smooth, so polishing may be required first. Allow a large, powerful
horseshoe magnet to latch on to the part across the area to be checked. Now dribble kerosene with iron powder
(collected from grinder) over the area; any crack will show up clearly.
31
ENGINE
H.E. VS. NON-H.E.: The H.E. (High Efficiency) engine, with 11.5:1 compression (12.5:1 outside the US) and a swirl
combustion head designed by Porsche expert Michael May, was introduced in July 1981 and indicated by the letters
“H.E.” on the back of the car in place of the former “V12” emblem. In 1986, the H.E. emblem was unceremoniously
dropped and a V12 emblem was used once again, but the H.E. combustion chamber design continued to be used in all
Jaguar V12 engines until it ceased production.
If you have an engine laying around and need to know which it is, the trick is to look at the spark plugs. The plugs on
the pre-H.E. tilt forward or rearward and are relatively easy to replace. The plugs on the H.E. tilt toward the centerline
of the engine just enough to make them a real pain to get a socket on.
ENGINE NUMBERS: The engine number is stamped on the top rear center of the block just forward of the joint with
the GM400 transmission bellhousing, but it is typically hard to find because it is covered with grime. Paul Hackbart
sends this tip: “Take your oil dipstick out and get on the passenger side of car. You can stick it through near the oil
pressure sender and scratch away until you see it. Just make certain you clean it off afterwards.”
The XK’s Unlimited catalog includes a guide of engine numbers for the XK 6-cylinder and the V12. It provides the
following info on the V12:
7S1001>
7P1001>
7P4000>
7P25001>
7P?>
8S1001>
8S18001>
E-type Series III
XJ12 Series I
XJ12 Series II
XJ12 Series II
XJ12 Series III
XJ-S
XJ-S H.E.
3/1971-2/1975
1972-73
1973 (Carbs)
1974-79 (EFI)
1979-8?
up to 1980
1981-87
For more detail on XJ-S engines, Richard Mansell sends this helpful data from “The XJ-S Collectors Guide”:
8S4551
8S5203
8S6454
8S7017
8S8632
8S10195
8S11262
8S13094
8S16401
8S17194
8S18001
Feb 76
Oct 76
Apr 77
Nov 77
May 78
Oct 78
Oct 78
Nov 80
Nov 80
Jul 81
Canister type oil filter introduced
Revised EFI
Modified fuel pump
GM400 introduced
Stronger manual trans selector shafts
Modified air filter box to stop blowing off!!
Ignition amplifier re-located
Twin V groove water pump pulley introduced
Digital P injection introduced*
Sump plug relocated
HE Introduced
Most changes after this are listed by VIN number but the following are listed too:
32
8S24175
8S26992
8S27297
8S31737
8S41339
8S41344
8S44227
8S44317
8S45527
Metric threaded cylinder heads
Piston spec modified
Inlet manifold modified to remove holes for cold start injectors
Modified drive plate
Spark plugs changed from B6EFS to BR7EFS
Sump oil baffle plate changed
Water pump bearing size increased
Full flow oil cooling replaces relief flow
GM400 revalved, modified sump pan
* Apparently the November 1980 introduction of Digital P is incorrect, as Ron Kelnhofer owns a Digital P car built in
June 1980. His engine number is 8S17116SB, which does not conflict with the data in the listing, so perhaps only the
date is incorrect.
5.3 vs. 6.0 LITER: The Jaguar V12, from its introduction in the E-type MkIII up to 1993, has been a 5.3 liter engine
(326 c.i.), with a bore of 90 mm and a stroke of 70 mm.
Engines are often described by the relationship of bore to stroke. When the bore equals the stroke, the engine is
described as “square”. Early gasoline engines tended to have long strokes and small bores, described as “under-square”.
Racing engines have evolved to having the bore larger than the stroke, or “over-square”. The Jaguar V12 was designed
to reestablish Jaguar’s eminence as a world-beater in the racing community (and prior to the fuel crisis of the early 70’s),
hence the considerably over-square design. It was quite successful in this regard, still winning LeMans races in the late
80’s.
The popularity of over-square engines in racing is actually somewhat artificial. Most racing programs divide competition
into classes based on engine displacement. An over-square design provides the most power for a given displacement,
since it permits higher RPM and provides room for large valves. However, these priorities do not translate well to street
use. Over-square engines tend to be heavy for their displacement; a larger displacement engine of comparable size and
weight can be constructed with a nearly square configuration. The over-square layout also results in larger surface areas
in the combustion chamber, which absorb combustion heat and reduce fuel efficiency. And while the design provides
excellent power at high RPM, it tends to lack torque at lower RPM; since people like their engines to be turning slowly
when cruising on the freeway, an over-square engine can seem anemic under these operating conditions.
Ford suspended production of the V12 for 1993, and reintroduced it in 1994 as a 6.0 liter (366 c.i.). More than merely
an engine enlargement, the change made the V12 much less over-square, since the change was entirely an increase in
stroke; the new engine has a 90 mm bore and a 78.5 mm stroke. This would tend to make the engine much more
suitable for street use. It remains more over-square than most engines, and hence can provide excellent performance at
high RPM, but is more tolerant of stop-and-go driving conditions and tall final drive ratios. The Michael May-designed
H.E. combustion chambers remain in use in the larger engine, while the compression ratio has been reduced to 11.0:1.
Tom Walkinshaw Racing (TWR) was offering 6.0 litre engines much earlier. According to Richard Mansell, “TWR
started making ‘sporty’ XJ-S’s in 1984. One of the options then was a 6.0 litre engine.” John Goodman reports that
TWR also made 6.2 and 6.4 litre versions, and maybe even a 6.7.
Later on the JaguarSport XJR-S also had a 6.0. Mansell: “When JaguarSport officially started producing the XJR-S in
1988 only a 5.3 litre engine was available. It was not until mid-89 that the 6.0 litre was introduced as standard. This
was then discontinued in 1993 as by then the standard XJ-S now had a 6.0 litre engine.”
Note, however, that the 1993-on updated engine has a lot of other features these earlier engines lacked, such as a revised
bolt pattern for connecting the GM400 transmission.
WHAT’S IN A REDLINE?: Some people, probably accustomed to American pushrod V8’s, feel that the 6500 RPM
redline marked on the tach is really aggessive and far too high for an engine this big for everyday use. Nothing could be
farther from the truth; this is not an American pushrod V8, it’s an OHC V12 with an unusually short stroke. Roger
33
Bywater, who worked in the engine development department at Jaguar when this engine was designed, provides a more
realistic understanding of just what that 6500 RPM redline is all about: “6500 r.p.m. is certainly safe and 7000 would
not be a cause for concern. In fact I know of basically standard 5.3 V12s cobbled together with second hand bits being
taken to near 8000 in race cars without suffering any problems at all. On the other hand an elderly engine does deserve a
certain amount of respect. I expect the one thing that would result is that the timing chain and tensioner would start to
show signs of distress a bit sooner if subjected to continual high r.p.m. In reality, there is not much point in revving a
standard V12 beyond 6000 because it will be running out of breath anyway and therefore won't be making much power.
“The real problem taking these engines to 6000 and above is that the GM 400 torque converter distorts under centrifugal
loads so that the blading can make contact creating fine metallic particles which then cause accelerated wear of the
transmission. A way around this is to use a furnace braized converter which is more rigid and able to tolerate the higher
r.p.m. without distorting so much.”
END OF AN ERA: The final Jaguar V12 engine was built April 17, 1997.
HOT SHUTDOWNS: It is never a good idea to shut down an engine immediately after running it hard; it is always
better to run it at reduced power for a few minutes first to let it “cool down”. This has nothing to do with the
temperature reading of the coolant; the problem lies with parts within the engine that get much hotter at full load than at
low load, and can be subjected to high thermal stresses if the transition from high load to off is too sudden.
This problem is especially serious in the case of the Jaguar XJ-S. Several problems the car seems to have, including
vapor locks, distributor seizings, and ignition amplifier failures, may be exacerbated by hot shutdowns. The underhood
temperatures may skyrocket after a hot shutdown, and Jaguar is known to have had underhood temperature problems
during development of this car.
Whenever you are driving the car hard, always drive the car leisurely for a few minutes before shutting it off. If you are
forced to shut the engine off after running hard -- having a mechanical problem, for example -- at least open the bonnet
to allow the heat to rise out of the engine compartment, providing some convective cooling.
See page 228 for tips on improving post-shutdown cooling.
KNOCKING/PINGING/PINKING/DETONATION/WHATEVER: Regardless of what you call that sound, it ain’t
good for an engine. A brief description of what’s going on: When an engine is running properly, the fuel/air mixture
within the cylinder is ignited by the spark plug and the flame front grows continuously and spreads throughout the
combustion chamber until the entire charge has been burned. However, while this is going on, the piston is moving
upwards towards the head, compressing the charge and thereby heating it. In the most severe cases of knocking, the
compression causes the charge to self-ignite before the spark plug even fires. The result is that the entire charge ignites
at once, rather than the gradual ignition of the flame front moving through the charge. This “explosion” has been likened
to hitting the piston with a hammer. It can damage the piston, connecting rods, and the bearings in both ends of the con
rods.
What usually happens is less severe, however. The spark plug fires well before the piston reaches the top of its stroke,
so the flame front has begun its travel while the compression is still in progress. Since the burning charge is expanding, it
is compressing the unburned charge into the far corners of the combustion chamber. The combined effects of the piston
rising and the flame-induced pressure causes the remaining portions of the charge to self-ignite. The actual amount of
charge exploded in this fashion can vary anywhere from a tiny portion to the entire charge, so knocking can be either
severe or barely detectable.
There are many factors that contribute to knocking. The most notorious is compression ratio; the higher the
compression ratio, the more likely it is for the charge to be detonated. Another key issue is the octane of the fuel, which
is a measure of how hot it must be before it self-ignites; the higher the octane, the hotter the mixture must get before it
will burn. And ignition timing is a factor, since lighting the mixture earlier will cause more of the charge to be burned
34
before the piston gets to TDC and therefore increase the peak pressure.
Other factors include the intake air temperature, the fuel temperature, and cylinder wall and head temperatures. EGR,
which puts some inert gases into the mixture, makes it harder to ignite and therefore reduces the tendency to knock.
Also, there are some minor details that can complicate the issue; sharp edges in the combustion chamber can act as
“glow plugs” and ignite the charge prematurely. Carbon deposits can increase the compression ratio, as well as provide
glowing embers to preignite the charge.
Knocking can be difficult to detect on the Jaguar V12. All those little cylinders mean that each knock is small, and all
that sound deadening built into the car keeps the driver from hearing much of anything in the engine compartment.
Basically, if you can hear it at all, you might need to be concerned. On the other hand, Mike Wilson reports: “I asked
the local Jaguar rep and he had the audacity to say that "All Marelli cars ping". He said it was even in the owners
manual! So, I came home and read mine and sure enough, there it was in black and white! It said that a small amount of
pinging was normal and if it happens on flat roads under no load, to see your dealer for further assistance.”
If something needs to be done about pinging, the usual reactions include changing to better octane fuel or retarding the
timing. On the later XJ-S with Marelli ignition, you can’t adjust the timing by just rotating the distributor, so a jumper
was provided that can be pulled to put the system onto a more retarded map when needed. Even if we try to buy good
fuel, occasionally we always seem to get a tankful of real crap, and this jumper is a handy fix to get us to the next fillup.
Joe Ziehl shares some experience: “My mechanic told me to first try a higher octane fuel because while retarding the
timing may help, the preignition might be caused by something other than spark plugs, such as carbon in cylinders or on
pistons. He also recommended that I treat the gasoline and run the car hard for a few days. This made a significant
improvement in the pinging.”
Jeff Elmore reports: “I had been getting some slight pinging under medium acceleration after the car had warmed up. I
had tried many things, including checking the timing, high octane gas, etc. Then I tried the temperature at the
thermostats. It was 213°F on one side and 203°F on the other. I just changed the thermostats and topped off the
coolant (almost half a gallon low), and the pinging is gone. The car now runs better as a result, with my guess being that
a lower CWT sensor means more fuel and power.”
Andrew Stott reports: “Autocar magazine had an XJ12 HE on long term test and in their 12,000 mile report (May 8
1982) they had quite a bit about the knocking noise and clouds of smoke at around 4,000rpm in 1st following a couple
of weeks of gentle, town driving. Apparently, the Jaguar engineers discovered this quite early on in the development of
the May heads and ran special endurance tests to highlight any problems, none were found.
“In their 36,000 mile report (April 9 1983) Autocar actually had one of the heads removed and found nothing at all
amiss, not the slightest suggestion of pinking damage, and no measurable ovality or wear in the bores. There are
pictures in the report. They also ran performance tests and found the car to be just as it was at 12,000 miles.
“Both these reports are in the Brooklands book on the XJ6 & XJ12 Series III (1979-1985), ISBN 0 946489 98X.”
The experience on the internet discussion lists indicate there is one sure-fire cure for knocking: the Italian Tune-Up. Get
the car fully warmed up, then while cruising along at about 60 mph, move the shifter into 2 and punch it. Hold the pedal
to the metal until somewhere close to redline, then let off and coast back to 60 -- and repeat. The first time or two, the
car will show its displeasure by stumbling and blowing great clouds of black smoke out the rear. After a few such
accelerations, the car will react much better to being punched, even feeling as though it is anxious to do it again, and
there will be no trace of smoke. Owners consistently report there is no longer any trace of engine knock either, and the
car runs better all around.
Obviously, an Italian Tune-Up wouldn’t be a good idea if the engine has serious mechanical faults such as fuel supply
problems, overheating problems, etc. It also wouldn’t be good to run it through a speed trap.
People think I’m makin’ this stuff up about the Italian Tune-Up. Bill de Creeft provides a quote from a British car
magazine after the HE engine came out: “...if one runs the car for not less than a working week of relatively gentle
driving, typically commuting with no longer journeys between, then, once properly warm, accelerates flat out, the engine
goes through a period between 4500 and 5000 rpm of loud detonation accompanied by pale but noticeable exhaust
smoke. You learn, after the first rather frightening occasion, to keep your foot down regardless, to accelerate through
35
the knocking which, together with the smoke, stops and doesn't return until after the next period of town running.
Jaguar,and Michael May, say that in gentle driving or with a lot of cold starts and short journeys combustion deposits
build up in the head and on the valves. On hard acceleration these deposits heat up and burn, causing detonation but
clearing, as they burn off into smoke. Jaguar says that in tests they conducted before the engine's launch (in July '81) in
which such deposit-induced detonation was sustained artificially for long periods of hard running, showed no sign of
piston or head damage.”
OCTANE: ...ain’t octane. If only things were simple. John Littler picked the following explanation up from an internet
discussion; I presume that ULP stands for UnLeaded Petrol and PULP stands for Premium: “The US does things
differently to the rest of the world (I bet you've heard that before!). In Australia the octane reported at the pump is the
RON (research octane number). There is also another octane that you never hear about called MON (motor octane
number). The MON is determined in a similar way, but under more severe conditions (so it yields a lower number). In
the US they report AKI (anti knock index) which is an average of MON and RON.
“The ratings for ULP and PULP are typically:
ULP
PULP
MON
82.5
86
RON
91
95.5
AKI
87 approx
91 approx
You can see that the US 91 is actually our PULP. This is the US mid-grade (also the main grade in Europe). They also
have a premium grade which has an AKI of 93 or a RON of about 98.”
Littler adds his own editing to this snippet: “I wish it were true that the US had a mid-grade rated at 91 AKI/95 RON.
Then it would be suitable for my Jag which requires 95 RON. Unfortunately the US mid-grade is only 89 AKI/94 RON,
so I have to pay for the 93 AKI/98 RON Super-Unleaded. If the Jag had a knock sensor I would risk trying the 94
octane stuff, but it doesn't, and the dealer has warned me to always use 98.
“BTW, prior to 1973 the US reported octane as RON like the rest of the world.”
UNLEADED FUEL: XJ-S owners in the US have been using unleaded fuel for decades, but many owners in other
countries are only recently facing the prospect of leaded fuel being no longer available. Since some of their owner’s
handbooks specify the use of “Four Star” leaded fuel only, they are understandably concerned.
Addressing this concern, Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering (and formerly with Jaguar Engine Development) wrote an
excellent article for Jaguar World magazine (see page 723), Vol 10 No 3, January/February 1998, page 42. Some of
the high points are summarized here.
There are two reasons for concern regarding the use of unleaded fuel: Octane and valve seat lubrication. Valve seat
lubrication is simply not an issue in the Jaguar XJ-S; every engine the car has ever been built with has an aluminum head
with hardened valve seat inserts, and the part numbers for these parts are the same for US-spec models always intended
to run on unleaded fuel. If you have shoehorned in a Chevy engine old enough to have a cast iron head with no inserts
and designed to require leaded fuel, well, shame on you.
Octane is another story. The US-spec engines have lower compression ratios to run on lower octane fuel. To be able to
run the high compression engines on lower octane fuel, either the compression ratio will need to be lowered or the
timing will need to be retarded. If the engine is being rebuilt anyway, lowering the compression ratio (different pistons,
thicker head gaskets, machining the combustion chamber, whatever) may be workable, but most people will prefer to
simply retard the timing. Bywater suggests that there’s very little difference between a high compression engine with
retarded timing and a low compression engine with advanced timing anyway.
With the Lucas ignition systems, retarding the timing is simply a matter of turning the distributor to a new setting.
Bywater says that for the 95 octane unleaded that will be available in the UK and Europe, about three degrees should do
it, although as many as five may be necessary for older cars with a lot of carbon buildup. On Marelli ignition cars,
retarding the timing only requires pulling a jumper to switch the ignition ECU to a more retarded timing map.
36
UNLEADED FUEL -- AJ6 ENGINE: If you own an early (‘83-87) AJ6-engined car with the Lucas 8CU EFI, you can
retard your timing by simply turning the distributor. However, if you have a later (‘87-on) 3.6 with the 9CU engine
control system, the ignition timing is controlled electronically and not so easy to change. According to Bywater’s
article, there are two options: You can remount the crankshaft position sensor using the mount from the later 4.0 AJ6
engine, or you can remove the crank pulley and reposition the toothed rotor by drilling new mounting holes.
John Littler says, “Well, for around $50US you can get a little gizmo from a number of vendors which then gives you a
dial to advance or retard the stock timing by up to about 5 degrees either way (does it on the fly so it just takes 1 degree
off whatever the ECU says etc). Definitely available from Summit (MSD and Crane), also available in Oz from two
other suppliers as well. Lastly, seeing as I believe the AJ6 use Delco ECU's (is that right?), then a copy of the Kalmaker
software will let you change anything you want on the EPROM.”
THE DANGERS OF RUNNING LEAN: Most people tend to think of their car’s fuel system as an on/off proposition:
either you’ve got fuel, or you don’t -- and if you don’t, it won’t run, so you’ve gotta fix it. There is, however, a third
possibility that bites the Jaguar V12 owner only too often, and that is running lean.
Running lean is no big deal if you’re driving gently; in fact, there are modern automobiles designed for “lean burn”
operation, which means that at light throttle they can operate quite a ways leaner than stochiometric in order to optimize
fuel economy. But running hard -- in any gasoline engine, Jaguar, lean burn, whatever -- with an air/fuel ratio leaner
than stochiometric is just asking for engine damage. A Jaguar V12 that has been running lean for a year but has never
seen full throttle is probably as good as new, but hold that pedal to the metal for 30 seconds and a couple of new pistons
will probably be needed.
Why am I making a big deal out of this? After all, the XJ-S has EFI, which should provide reliable fuelling at all throttle
conditions. The later models even have oxygen sensors that will correct for either lean or rich conditions on the fly.
Why worry? Well, there’s plenty to worry about. If the fuel pump or other parts of the fuel system aren’t up to par, the
EFI system may provide correct fuelling under normal driving conditions, but when floored the fuel supply can’t keep up
-- and the engine runs lean just when it is most dangerous! And, horror of horrors, there are absolutely no warnings that
you’re in trouble; everything on the dash looks just great, the engine sounds just dandy, and the car has plenty of pep -right up until it starts missing on a couple of cylinders because the pistons are toast.
If you ever intend to explore the lower half of the pedal travel on the Jaguar V12 (and who doesn’t? Why else would
you own the car?), it is recommended that you install air/fuel ratio indicators, which are commonly available; they are
very popular with performance enthusiasts for exactly the same reason: they provide a warning before it’s too late.
These indicators operate off the signal of a regular oxygen sensor. If your car doesn’t have oxygen sensors, you can
purchase generic sensors (the heated type are recommended), and it’s a simple matter to have bosses welded into the
exhaust downpipes to install them. If your car already has oxygen sensors, there’s no need to install more; the indicators
will read the signal from the existing sensors without interfering with EFI operation.
Both Jeg’s (page 717) and Summit (page 720) offer LED air/fuel indicators, and they’re even reasonably priced. You’ll
probably want two indicators, since you have two oxygen sensors -- or perhaps you can rig a switch to read one sensor
and then the other with a single indicator. The indicators usually feature three colors of LED. If the engine is running
near stochiometric mixture, LED’s near the center of the display are lit, and they are usually green. The rich and lean
sides of stochiometric are usually red and yellow LED’s, but some indicators have red as rich and some have red as lean;
make sure you understand that it is lean that means trouble, whichever color the LED’s are.
When the engine is running in closed-loop mode (warmed up, light throttle), the indicators should be reading green.
When floored, the ECU goes into open-loop mode, which means it should run richer than stochiometric. A rich
indication when floored is OK. If the gauge ever starts to read on the lean side of stochiometric while you have your
foot in it, lift your foot now and investigate problems in the fuel system before you romp on it again.
Air/fuel indicators can help you spot a lot of ills, including totally unheard-of problems not covered in this book. You’ll
be able to monitor how your fuel system is working at all times and notice when something goes wrong.
37
The May 1996 issue of Skinned Knuckles has an article, “Oxygen Sensors & Air/Fuel Ratio” by Hugh Poling, in which
the author points out the limitations of air/fuel indicators that use a conventional oxygen sensor for input. Some A/F
indicators have three LED’s, indicating lean, stochiometric or rich. Others have more than three, apparently indicating
different degrees of lean or rich; according to Poling, these indicators are wired so that particular voltages from the
oxygen sensor light up particular LED’s. The indicators Poling objects to are the ones that are actually marked with
different Lambda values; “From the SAE Transaction pertaining to oxygen sensors, this relationship of voltage to LED
markings is bogus...Since the standard oxygen sensor covers a very narrow range of only a few percent around
stochiometric, this labeling is fraudulent.” In other words, an LED indicator connected to a conventional oxygen sensor
is quite reliable at indicating whether you are running lean or rich, but do not rely on it to tell you how lean or rich.
Note that there are instruments on the market that can provide accurate indications of mixture within the lean or rich
ranges, but you’ll know if you buy one -- they are very expensive, and they do not use a conventional oxygen sensor for
a signal.
OIL CHANGING: If you buy an oil drain pan from the local auto parts store, slide it under the Jag, and open the plug
in the sump, you may be in for a messy surprise. The Jag V12 will drain around 11 US quarts of oil, and this is more
than the capacity of many conventional oil drain pans. Either be sure to get a really big pan, or figure out how to drain
the sump into two pans.
Here’s an idea: Get one of those plastic oil drain tubs that features a spigot to pour the oil into bottles without a funnel.
When the tub is sitting on the floor, the spigot acts as a spillover; if too much oil is drained into the tub, it’ll come out
the spigot rather than spilling over an edge. With the tub sitting under the engine, set another container under the
spigot. Your total drain capacity hence becomes the total of both tubs.
A disposable aluminum turkey broiling pan works great for that second pan. If it doesn’t fit neatly under the spigot as is,
it’s not difficult to mangle the edge a bit to allow it to sit right.
OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT: The oil filter on the Jaguar XJ-S mounts nearly vertically, the way they all should; the
dirt stays in the filter as it’s being removed. Considering the position, you can do your engine a favor by filling the new
filter with oil prior to installing it. When you start up, you will get pressure that much sooner. There are also reports
that prefilling may help protect the element itself from rupture when the engine is started. You will find it helpful to use
a small screwdriver or some such to poke through the smaller holes in the base of the filter and push open the flap a little
to provide a vent while trying to pour oil in the center hole. And be patient; it takes a minute or two for oil poured into
the center hole to soak through the element and fill the outer chamber.
It has been noticed that some filters for the XJ-S are different from others. Some are very large, extending almost level
with the bottom of the pan. Others are of conventional size. Some have a series of flats around the bottom edge to fit
the socket-type filter wrench that goes on the end, and some don’t. Since you can’t get to this filter from the side, it is
recommended you get a filter wrench that can be used from the end, and make sure the filters you purchase can be
removed with your wrench. The socket-type filter wrench works well and is cheap, but requires the series of flats on the
filter. There are also coil type and strap type filter wrenches that will work on most any filter; note that the coil type
cannot be used to tighten the filter.
Peter Cohen says, “I have found that if I hand tighten them as much as I can with one hand with the little bit of leverage
available down there, I am able to hand remove them as well.” Peyton Gill adds, “I got a box of disposable latex rubber
gloves (used in the medical industry). They provide additional grip and make hand removal and installation much easier
plus keep your hand clean when the oil runs down the filter. These things are cheap and can be bought at drugstores. It
really makes a big difference applying torque.”
Cohen provides some part numbers listed for earlier XJ-S's: "Fram PH2931 is correct, and I have used them for years
on my 1989 XJS. Purolator L30255 is the new numbering scheme that replaces L3255. (They just stuck in a zero for
some reason.)"
Dave Hernt reports that later spec filters fit better: "Both the PH2995 and L30381 are the filters specified for the 6.0L
38
V12. Same threads and gasket, just shorter. I have installed a Purolator L30381. Similar to the L30255, but a tad
shorter. Goes in easy. It seemed to me that the L30255 was not going to go in without a hammer. Also tried a Fram
PH2995, it fits."
OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT -- EARLY CANISTER TYPE: Until sometime in 1976, the XJ-S came with a canister
filter assembly. Not only does this make it more difficult to change, but more care must be taken to make sure
everything is working properly. Mike Morrin had a problem with a non-replaceable bypass valve that sits in the bottom
of the canister: “I noticed that the bypass valve was actually about half way open!! This is presumably not good for
filtration efficiency. On dismanting the bypass valve, it became apparent that the alloy valve body had been strained,
probably by someone tightening up the filter assembly with something not seated correctly. I was able to straighten and
reassemble the valve, and it looks like it should work as good as new.”
OIL ADDITIVES: Don’t use any. The quintessential article on the subject is “Snake Oil! Is That Additive Really A
Negative?” by Fred Rau, ROAD RIDER, August 1992, Pg 15. Transcripts of this article appear in literally dozens of
places on the WWW, any search should find one. A couple such places include:
http://www.performancemotoroil.com/truth_about_oil_additives.html
http://www.carbibles.com/snakeoil.html
For those who feel compelled to spend more money on oil than merely following the manufacturer’s recommended
change intervals, the following options are suggested:
1.
Install a bypass filter system -- see page 115.
2.
Change oil more often. In fact, changing oil ridiculously often using el cheapo oil is a very workable
plan, but some consider it environmentally unwise. It’s also a lot of work.
3.
Use synthetic oil. Tests have indicated that synthetic oil coming out after the recommended change
interval is often better than new regular oil.
4.
Change the filter more often. They’re cheap, and indications are they get plugged and begin
bypassing long before the scheduled oil change interval.
On my car, I change the oil according to Jaguar’s recommended interval (6000 miles), use synthetic oil (Mobil 1, 15W50), and change the filter every 3000 miles.
Leaks
SEALING SUBSTANCES: If you would prefer that your Jaguar not leak oil, the first thing you must get through your
thick skull is to ignore all guidance on sealants and gasket dressings provided in the official Jaguar publications. Most of
their callouts are obsolete, many were wrong the day they were printed, and -- let’s face it -- Jaguar has absolutely no
credibility regarding leak prevention. To top it all off, Jaguar manuals and TSB’s have a nasty habit of calling for some
esoteric product that’s only available in industrial quantities via special order. Forget the Jaguar sources and follow the
guidance in this book instead.
Note that “gasket dressing” and “sealant” are two different things; a gasket dressing is used to help a gasket seal
properly, while a sealant is used where there is no gasket. Nobody is strict about the use of these terms, but the wise
mechanic will note how a product is intended to be used and avoid trying to use products for applications they are not
suited for.
It’s easy to get all wrapped up in which sealant or dressing is “the best”, but all you really care about is that it doesn’t
leak. There are many products that will fill that bill for any particular application. Being readily available locally in small
39
quantities is a big plus. Here are some simple guidelines:
If it’s a gortex gasket, don’t use any substances on it; assemble it dry.
If it’s a paper gasket, use a gasket dressing such as Hylomar on both sides.
If the joint involves two close-fitting metal surfaces with no gasket, use a sealant such as Loctite 518.
Those guidelines will cover almost everything that needs sealing in the Jaguar XJ-S. There are a couple of special cases,
though. The sides of the rear main bearing cap require a gap-filling sealant that can be injected; for this, copper silicone
sealant works well although it’s not particularly easy to squeeze into the slots (the top of the rear bearing cap should be
sealed with Loctite 518). The threads on the sandwich plate bolts with their heads inside the sump should be sealed with
Permatex #2 non-hardening sealant. The head gaskets and exhaust manifold gaskets are metal sandwiched around a
fibrous core and should be assembled dry.
GASKET DRESSINGS: As noted above, Hylomar is readily available and works just fine. Hylomar is a blue goo that
never hardens. Jaguar mistakenly specified Hylomar for use as a sealant in gasketless joints, which is a large part of why
these cars leak; it eventually gets blown out of such locations.
On gaskets, Greg Fronczak of Jag Services prefers a Toyota sealant, part number 023500102. This is a black substance.
Chad Bolles suggests a non-hardening sealer from a GM dealer, part no. 1050026.
Roger Homer suggests a Caterpillar product. “I’m not sure of its official name/number but I just go into the local
Caterpillar dealer and ask for a tin of Cat Red.” Bolles and Homer recommend these last two products primarily
because of ease of disassembly later; the gaskets easily peel off the metal parts with no need for scraping.
SEALANTS: As noted above, Loctite 518 is readily available and works just fine. Everything that Loctite makes with a
number starting with 5 is a sealant, though, and many of them will work in the Jaguar V12. Loctite 573 and 574 have
both been used successfully between the tappet blocks and the heads. Steve Cranswick likes Loctite 5900 Flange
Sealant. None of these are likely to be as easy to find as 518, though.
For those who can’t seem to find Loctite 518, Karl Nelson says, “Permatex is now a division of Loctite, and Permatex
51813 is the same thing as Loctite 518. Permatex 51813 is widely available at NAPA stores, and is advertised as
Anaerobic Flange Sealer.”
Joe Bialy adds, “The '13' in 51813 signifies the size of the package the 518 comes in. For instance, IIRC, 51845 is a
caulking gun sized package of 518.”
Loctite’s not the only source for sealants. James Teston points out that Hernon makes similar products, and there’s a
Loctite/Hernon cross-reference list on the www at
http://hernon.com/crossref.htm
SEALANTS VS. OXYGEN SENSORS: You should look for an indication that a sealant is “oxygen sensor safe”
before using it anywhere on an engine fitted with oxygen sensors. Apparently some silicone sealants will emit something
that gets in the oil and eventually into the exhaust and ruins the oxygen sensors.
LEAKY GASKETS: One of the improvements Ford made to the Jaguar product line after they purchased the company
was that they “Fordified” the gaskets and seals for the V12. While all of the old style gaskets look like plain paper of
various thicknesses, the new gaskets are often “Gortex” (teflon) sandwiched around metal foil. This upgrade is
explained in Technical Service Bulletin #12-35 dated 8/92, which states that engines were fitted with these gaskets from
the factory starting with engine #8S86317SA. All of the upgraded gaskets fit the older engines, so whenever engine
work is being done it would be wise to use the newer gaskets.
40
Redesigned gaskets, along with the new part numbers:
Old P/N
EAC6337
EAC7251, GEG560
C29428, TJM536
C29429, TJM537
EAC7048, GTG130
EAC7047, GTG129
C29626, C36542
C36020
C29485
EAC7252
C30344
C33921, GEG688
C33280
Oil Filter Housing
Oil Pan Gasket
Cam Cover Gasket, Right
Cam Cover Gasket, Left
Thermostat Housing, Right
Thermostat Housing, Left
Water Pump Gaskets
Water Pump Elbow
Valley Cover
Sandwich Plate Gasket
Coolant Manifold Gaskets
Exhaust Manifold Gaskets
Throttle Body Gaskets
New P/N
EBC 9624
EBC 9623
EBC 9628
EBC 9627
EBC 8330
EBC 8331
EBC 9629, EBC 9630
EBC 9636
EBC 9631
EBC 9637
EBC 9634
EBC 10199
EBC 9635
There are more, I just don’t have all the part numbers.
The original valley cover gasket was a piece of thin paper, and the new one is a piece of thin Gortex -- black on one side,
red on the other. This one isn’t sandwiched around metal foil; it’s really flexible, it even comes all crumpled up in a bag.
Offhand it wouldn’t appear to make any difference which way is up, but the TSB specifies that it should be installed with
the black side towards the block. If you install the valley cover while the heads are off, trim the edges of this gasket
wherever they protrude out from under the cover to make sure they don’t interfere with head gasket seating.
Richard Francis indicates the gasket between the water pump and the timing chain cover is also rubbery, no metal. He
also says the water pump elbow gasket “was not Gortex; it was black/red material again, though not paper, not metal,
and really not that rubbery either.” The TSB says that the water pump elbow gasket should be installed with the black
side towards the block.
The TSB clarifies that all of the Gortex and Gortex sandwich gaskets should be assembled dry; no dressing should be
used. It also specifies replacement bolts; “Revised bolts have flanged heads to prevent loosening. Do not use a washer
on revised (flanged) bolts.” The TSB only mentions replacement bolts for the oil sump, sandwich plate, and cam covers.
See the cam cover sealing discussion starting on page 60 for more ideas on this bolt replacement. Also see the
discussion on sandwich plate bolt sealing on page 48.
This author ordered a set of thermostat housing gaskets by the above part numbers, and received paper gaskets. They
are black paper and kinda thin, while the older style is thicker red paper. The only other difference I can see is that the
outside edge of the newer 3-bolt cover gasket lacks the bulge at one corner, so it can fit on in any of three orientations.
I have been told that Gortex sandwich gaskets do exist for the thermostat covers, but part numbers are unknown.
The original coolant manifold gaskets were apparently very thin paper and later versions were really thick pink
cardboard; the EBC 9634 gaskets are Gortex/metal sandwiches, and are pretty thin. There are 12 used on the engine,
although because some are used under the coolant headers and others are used under blank-off plates they may be listed
in catalogs as 8 needed in one place and 4 in another. Note that the steel blank-off plates tend to distort with stress and
time, especially if they’ve been holding down the thick paper gaskets; prior to reinstalling, it’d be a good idea to run a
flat file across the bottom to make the surface flat again.
A single design gasket is used on both sides of the throttle body, between the air filter housing and the throttle body and
between the throttle body and the intake manifold, so you need a total of four. The EBC 9635 gasket is a Gortex/metal
sandwich and has 7 bolt holes in it; four in a rectangular pattern, two more at 10 and 4 o’clock for the hidden bolts that
hold the throttle body to the intake manifold, and a single loop that can either point straight up or straight down
depending on which way you flip it. The TSB says they should be installed with the tab pointing downwards. The tab
serves no purpose on the ’83, and can either be cut off or left in place to hang out the edge of the assembled joint.
Mike Morrin says, “The top gasket set is Jaguar P/N JLM12229, and has all of the new style gaskets.”
41
The new gaskets should be widely available. Be sure to check the part number or description of the gasket as some
parts people may try to give you the old style to get rid of old stock. Given the proclivity of the pre-Ford Jaguars to
leak oil, using the older paper gaskets -- regardless of how cheap you got them -- would be a poor decision.
Richard Francis ordered a rebuilt water pump in 2006. “Surprised at getting paper gaskets (plate to block and water
inlet spout) with my rebuilt water pump from a reputable vendor, I called their president. He explained that while 1000's
are sold each year, this is first time any customer asked to have the Gortex gaskets packaged with the part. Challenging
him, he offered to make this recommendation to the outsourced company who actually rebuilds and packages the part
for the customer. Wasn't TSB 12-15 issued in 1992?
“One disadvantage here, which may cause me to return this part, is that it is safe to say that the pump to plate gasket is
paper as well.
“Of course, if you want the paper gaskets...otherwise put the Gortex in the same order.
INTAKE MANIFOLD GASKETS: During the Ford gasket upgrade, the 12 individual intake manifold gaskets C43354
or AJM687 were replaced with two gaskets; each serves all six ports on one bank. The part number is NNA-3020BA.
The original gaskets were either a very hard thick cardboard or an embossed metal piece, and the new gaskets are a
really thick, soft cardboard.
If you happen to have a pre-H.E., these new intake manifold gaskets pose a problem. Peter Smith reports that the
sections of gasket between the intake ports interfere with installation of the vertical spark plugs used on the pre-H.E..
He also reports that the 12-piece gaskets are NLA. If you have a pre-H.E., here’s a plan: set some 5/16” bolts on the
floor standing on their heads and set one of the new gaskets down over them. Set the intake manifold over it, using the
bolts to align the gasket with the manifold. Use a marker to mark the outline of the manifold onto the gasket. Then take
a pair of stout scissors or sheet metal shears and cut that single gasket into six individual gaskets, throwing away the
sections between intake ports. Let’s face it, any portion of the gasket that isn’t pinched between the manifold and the
head is useless, it won’t hurt anything to cut it away.
The spark plugs on the H.E. are canted inward and are a PITA to install, but the 2-piece gaskets don’t make it any more
difficult. Nonetheless, it still might be a nice idea to cut the gaskets into six pieces and discard the useless sections
between ports; it results in a cleaner appearance in the vee, an area that’s too cluttered already.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD GASKETS: The original exhaust manifold gaskets are sort of a metal/asbestos/metal
sandwich with dimpled surfaces, and the newer ones are the same stuff except that they have added a collar around the
center opening. This is a significant improvement; the earlier gaskets tend to erode from the exhaust passage outward.
DRY PAPER GASKETS: For the few places where paper gaskets are still used on the XJ-S, Walt Osborn of Vintage
Jaguar (page 697) sends this tip: “When paper gaskets are stored for a certain period of time, they shrink and become
hard and brittle. If you are in a hurry, just dip in warm water and pat it dry with a paper towel or shop rag. Keep doing
it until it fits. If you have a little time put it in a plastic bag with a slightly damp rag. The gasket will usually reconstitute
overnight. Once it is okay, remove the rag and seal the bag until ready for use.”
PARTS BOOK CONFUSION: At the rear end of each intake manifold is an opening covered by a throttle linkage
support plate and a triangular cover with hose connections for the crossover pipe, all held to the manifold with three
bolts. It is plainly obvious that this assembly requires two gaskets, one between the manifold and the throttle linkage
support plate and one between the throttle linkage support plate and the triangular cover. The August 1987 Jaguar Parts
Catalogue shows this assembly on page 1C-15L and 1C-15R, but it shows only one gasket, EAC2650. It indicates two
required, but all the other quantities shown on the page are per-car numbers, so one could conclude that it means one
per manifold. Worse, many other sources, such as the catalogs from the mail order outfits, base their listings on this
parts catalog and repeat this error. Ignore all this misinformation and order two EAC2650 gaskets per side, four total.
42
LEAKY SEALING WASHERS: Copper sealing washers work just fine -- once. The work-hardening properties of
copper are rather extreme; when fully annealed pure copper is very soft indeed, but just bend or deform it a little bit and
it gets very hard very suddenly. Copper sealing washers are intended to exploit this very feature; as the components are
tightened down on them, they initially crush to form a good seal and then promptly get hard. If you try to reuse one,
you almost might as well use a steel washer for sealing.
Craig Sawyers points out you can reuse copper washers if you anneal them. “Heat it up to cherry red in a flame (just a
plumbing gas burner will do, or even the stove) and let it cool slowly. It will then be as soft as putty, and will tighten
nicely without too much torque to give a good seal.” Hanging the washers with little pieces of wire makes it easy to use
a torch on them. Believe it or not, a butane cigarette lighter will work -- but you’ll need to hold it on the washer a while,
so it’s best to have one of those long charcoal grille lighters that won’t burn your thumb. Obviously, if the copper
washers are boogered up, it’d be a good idea to file them flat before use.
Is it important to let it cool slowly? Nope! In fact, it’s better to dunk it in water. Martin Lappin says, “Unlike steel, the
copper will also stay soft if you quench it in cold water. The advantage of this is it removes the oxide scale from the
surface.” You simply cannot quench copper fast enough to cause it to harden, at least not without special equipment;
dunking it in water isn’t fast enough. If you don’t dunk it, you’ll have to sand the washer lightly after it cools to get the
oxide off.
So why am I wasting space in this book to tell you how to save a few cents by reusing copper washers? Because you
need to start annealing new washers. Sawyers: “They are supplied as stamped from sheet copper. In other words they
are in half-hard anneal. I always heat treat new washers to put them in a state of soft anneal. Try it and you'll see what I
mean.”
By annealing each time, you can apparently reuse copper seals as many times as you like. People who use copper head
gaskets in competition find this a very appealing prospect. For a ten cent washer, though, you’ll probably want to
replace them nearly every time anyway just because they eventually get pretty mangled.
XK’s Unlimited (page 697) offers something called a Stat-O-Seal washer. It’s an alloy washer with a rubber ring around
the ID. They come in 1/8” increments. Michael Neal says, “The drain plug washer for the S3 XJ6 and XJ-S can be
replaced with the transmission cooler line banjo bolt seal from an XJ40, EBC4896. This is a neoprene-lined washer that
is reusable.” You don’t really have to seek out Jaguar parts sources, though; these type sealing washers are now
commonly available in auto parts stores.
You can also assemble your own homemade equivalent with an O-ring and a flat washer. For example, to seal a 1/2
fitting you could slide on a 1/16” thick O-ring with a 1/2” ID and a flat washer with a 5/8” ID so it fits around the Oring. Ideally, the flat washer should be just a bit thinner than 1/16”. When you tighten down the fitting, first it contacts
the O-ring and starts to compress it but then sits hard on the flat washer preventing you from overcompressing the Oring. The O-ring ends up fully trapped within the flat washer so it can’t blow out regardless of pressure. Such
assemblies provide a reliable seal, and you can easily gather the parts to assemble one to fit any application. You can
even put together really tiny versions if needed. And for optimum durability, you can opt for Viton O-rings (see below).
For the specific application of an oil drain plug, auto parts stores now offer a plug that has a built-in rubber seal under
the head. It looks like a stubby washer-faced bolt, except the washer face is made of rubber. Obviously, if the rubber
gets chewed up, you need to replace the entire plug.
The rubber-lined washer, the O-ring and flat washer, and the rubber-sealed drain bolt are all excellent sealing methods as
long as the application doesn’t get too hot for the rubber. The rubber will also deteriorate in a decade or so. Where
things get hot or you need it to seal longer than a decade, the copper washer is the way to go. Now, let’s move on to
bad ideas:
If you find any aluminum sealing washers, throw them away. They cannot be reused. In fact, they’re not all that great
the first time.
Fiber washers work fine once or twice as long as you don’t overtighten them, but eventually they tend to split open -and not necessarily while you’re tightening them; they may crack open later when you’re 100 miles from home. They
43
are also generally unsuitable for high-pressure applications, although some fittings address this by enclosing the fiber
washer within a recess to prevent it from blowing out.
Auto parts stores offer plastic sealing washers; sometimes they are packaged with a replacement oil drain plug.
Sometimes they have circular ribs on them, apparently to improve sealing. Sometimes they have a little flag hanging off
one side, apparently to stick out the side of the joint and tell you there’s a plastic sealing washer in there. These things
work for low-pressure applications such as an oil drain plug, but don’t use them on any line that holds pressure. You
must be careful while installing; you can overtighten them and squeeze them right out of the joint, especially if there’s a
little oil involved. In general, you’d be well advised to just throw them away.
LEAKY O-RINGS: The O-rings available at your local parts store are probably as good as the Jaguar originals -- which
is to say not worth a damn. Whenever an O-ring is encountered during disassembly of the V12, it invariably is hard and
brittle and has long since ceased sealing properly. Viton O-rings are the recommended upgrade, although you might not
find them in your local auto parts store; you might need to visit a good industrial supply place to find them. They are
often brown to distinguish them from normal O-rings, but they can also be found in black or any of several other colors.
The price is always an indicator, though; they cost several times as much.
Andy Hutchinson reports: “Looked at my book today. It would seem the choice of "elastomers" (posh for rubber) is
Nitrile, Flurocarbon or Flurosilicon. Viton is Flurocarbon. Excellent hot and chem resistant. Not so good cold.
Flurosilicon is good at both ends but not very tough (fixed surfaces only). Nirtrile is a good all rounder and I suspect the
standard material. Rubber, silicone, neoprene, etc. are dogs.” As long as you’re not building Space Shuttle solid rocket
boosters, that lack of cold performance of Viton may be acceptable; on the Jag V12, it’d be preferable to leak only in
freezing weather than to leak all the time!
Viton O-rings can be ordered from McMaster-Carr (page 711).
LEAKY BANJO FITTINGS: Banjo fittings require two sealing washers. The copper washers used to seal the banjo
fittings at the back end of the tappet blocks are really thin, only about .010” thick. This is too thin for reliable sealing, so
chances are pretty good that these banjo fittings will leak right after assembly.
If your local auto parts store has a rack of red cards titled “Help!”, it probably has a package of sealing washers that are
the correct diameter for these fittings but a lot thicker: Part number 66272, labelled “Brake Hose Bolt Washer”. It says
they are ID 25/64” and OD 5/8”. These washers are about 1/16” thick and will seal just fine -- but will aggravate
another problem.
Craig Sawyers pointed out that the alignment of the cross hole in the banjo bolt doesn’t line up with the channel inside
the collar as well as might be hoped -- see Figure 1. The collar is about 13/32” thick, with the channel right in the
middle, but the cross hole in the bolt is located only about 5/32” from the underside of the head -- and the thickness of
the sealing washer between the bolt head and the collar makes this misalignment even worse. The drawing at left
includes a 1/16” thick copper washer, and the two passages barely overlap. Jaguar’s fix: those really thin sealing
washers described above.
A better fix is pretty easy, though: using a Dremel or some such, lengthen the opening on the cross hole in the bolt in the
direction of the threaded end (basically, enlarge the chamfering in that direction). This will help the oil flow to the
camshafts even if the original thickness washers are used. Ideally you will want to extend the edge of the cross hole to
about 5/16” or 8mm from the underside of the bolt head.
44
Figure 1: Banjo Bolt Modification for Better Flow
Craig Sawyers came up with a slightly different mod: “I added a single extra 2.5mm diameter hole (ie not all the way
through, just until it entered the axial drilling) with a centre line 6.7mm from the sealing face. that puts it entirely in the
channel in the oil feed line.”
Now that you’re practiced at this modification, do the same thing to the banjo bolt at the top right of the radiator -- see
page 187.
If you’d prefer, Ron Kelnhofer (page 718) offers a custom banjo bolt to replace the OEM item. He includes a pair of
copper sealing washers with each bolt that are 0.031” thick -- thicker than the OEM washers and thick enough to seal
properly, but only half as thick as the Help! items described above. Kelnhofer located the cross hole in his banjo bolt
correctly for his 0.031” sealing washers; if either the thin OEM washers or the thicker Help! washers were used with it
the cross hole would still line up better than the OEM banjo bolt with the OEM thin washers, but nevertheless Kelnhofer
suggests you use the washers he designed it for to ensure optimum flow.
He also made his banjo bolt a little longer. “1.015'' long overall. The bolt was lengthened only an amount equal to the
change in the washer thicknesses.” It is therefore not a solution for the stripped banjo bolt hole problem described
below. “The reason behind this is that with the limited amount of space between the head and the firewall, I wanted to
keep it as short as possible but still permanently address the real issue, leaking. I could have made them longer but
actually can't see a real benefit as far as sealing is concerned by doing so. As far as stripping the head threads, my feeling
is that it isn't really a problem if one uses common sense in tightening the bolt.”
Kelnhofer’s banjo bolt is made of stainless steel. You can look at a pic of this bolt at
http://neptune.spacebears.com/cars/engr/banjoeng.html
When tightening banjo bolts, be sure to hold the collar on the oil line still. Failure to do so will allow the turning of the
bolt to twist the collar and bend the tubing.
STRIPPED BANJO BOLT HOLES: The banjo bolts thread into the back ends of the tappet blocks only about 0.35”.
That’s not much thread engagement for screwing 3/8” bolts into soft aluminum, and combined with the fact that the
banjo fittings often leak at assembly due to the thin copper washers, it’s only too common that a mechanic tightens them
too many grunts trying to stem a leak and winds up stripping out the threads in the tappet block. This will require many
pints to get over since it would normally require removing the tappet block to helicoil, and removing the tappet block
requires removing the camshaft, and removing the camshaft requires fiddling with the timing chain tensioner -- see page
64.
Modifying the banjo bolt and using thicker copper washers, as described above, will solve the sealing problems and
45
make it unnecessary to go cranking on that banjo bolt so hard -- but it also means that there are even less threads
engaged, so being judicious about tightening is highly recommended.
Nick Johanssen and Craig Sawyers report that the Jaguar Enthusiasts’ Club (page 730) offers longer banjo bolts. “A
get-you-out-of-trouble idea for a temporary way of avoiding the removal of the cylinder head if the original bolt's thread
strips. This bolt has extra threads to take up with the deeper threads always present, but not always made use of.” He
means avoiding removing the tappet block rather than the cylinder head of course, but it’s still a task to avoid.
Of course, it might not be a bad idea to install the longer banjo bolts before the threads strip.
Note: the JEC banjo bolts are nice and long, but the cross hole is still in the wrong place. Before installing, you will
need to modify them per the guidelines above.
There are also questions about the quality of these parts. Sawyers says, “the thread had been made with a worn die. It
was as rough as a badger's backside, and was too large (like a nut wouldn't go on with just fingers). So I had to run a
3/8 UNC die down it - curling out a spiral of extra metal in the process.” Considering the soft aluminum tappet blocks
these things screw into, finding such a die and chasing those threads is certainly prudent.
Classic Jaguar of Austin, Texas also offers longer banjo bolts, part number C5846L (the L is for Long). They’re
supposedly about 3/16” longer than the OEM banjo bolts. No word on whether the cross hole is correctly located or
whether the quality is any better than the JEC items. They might actually be the JEC parts, just kept in stock on this side
of the pond.
Some people have suggested simply making new banjo bolts from normal bolts; just drill one hole axially down the
length of the bolt and another crossways. Sawyers: “The head of a standard 3/8 UNC bolt is 9/16AF. The banjos are
5/8AF - the increase in AF size for the head gives a larger land for the copper washer to seat.” IOW, it might work, but
you’ll have less sealing surface under the head. Perhaps better to just buy the correct items -- unless you can find 3/8”
UNC bolts with oversize heads.
Note that there is at least one report of longer banjo bolts being too long and bottoming in the threads before tightening
down on the sealing washers, thereby causing a massive leak. It’s all a function of how deep the hole was threaded.
Hence, if installing a longer banjo bolt, it is recommended that it be trial installed without sealing washers first to make
sure it’ll screw in far enough. If they bottom too soon, the solution is obvious: shorten them a bit. Meanwhile, if you
ever have the tappet blocks off, check the threads and if they’re not tapped plenty deep, go ahead and tap them deeper
while you can.
Things are tight back there, and problems may arise trying to get the longer banjo bolts in place with the engine in the
car. Trying to get them in between the firewall and the fitting on the oil line is probably not going to work. Rather,
gently bend the oil line upward until it clears the back end of the tappet block, insert the long banjo bolt with one sealing
washer around it, then gently bend it back to the proper position. Use a length of dental floss to hold the second sealing
washer in place, get the banjo bolt started, then cut the dental floss and pull it out.
This will work, but obviously you don’t want to do it a dozen times; eventually the tube will crack and you will need a
new one. To ease the stress on the tube, you could unscrew the banjo bolt from the oil pressure sender pedestal or
unbolt the pedestal itself, which will allow moving the oil feed manifold around much more easily. This will allow
moving the ends out from behind the tappet blocks more easily -- and if you’re coordinated, you might consider putting
the banjo bolts into the fittings for both tappet blocks at the same time rather than bolting one down and then bending
the tube to install the second. Alternatively, you might do the right bank first -- it’s the hard one -- and then you may be
able to get the left one together without even having to move the oil line around.
LEAKY OIL PRESSURE SENDER CONNECTIONS: The connection at the block at the rear center of the V is a
larger banjo bolt. For this fitting, Help! number 66265, “Brake Hose Bolt Washers” are a perfect fit. They are described
on the package as ID = 33/64”, OD = 45/64”. These same seals fit the bolts that hold the heat shields to the exhaust
manifolds -- see page 317.
The seal on the oil pressure sending unit itself is not the same size as on the banjo fitting. The sending unit fitting is the
46
same diameter as many common oil drain plugs, though, so it is easy to find a suitable seal in an auto parts store. Note,
however, that if you’re buying a new sending unit, it will usually come with a new sealing washer.
LEAKY OIL PRESSURE SENDER: When searching for sources of oil leaks, don’t overlook the oil pressure sending
unit itself, C46272. The unit can fail internally and oil comes seeping out of the electrical connector, a sure sign of
trouble since there isn’t supposed to be any oil within the electrical components in this unit. The author’s car had this
problem, and the gauge was still working just fine. The only solution is to replace it. A sender with silicone sealant
around the connector is a sure sign that an incompetent mechanic has been involved.
For more on this sender, see page 56.
LEAKY OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: The oil pressure switch, which operates the warning light, is right next to the oil
pressure sender -- and is even more notorious for leaking oil out through the electrical connection. The only solution is
to replace it, but that’s not difficult because the thread is standard and there are lots of cars that use very similar pressure
switches. David Johnson says, “I screwed one from a Chevy in. The new one was a two wire type, so I simply
connected one side to ground and it works fine.”
OIL LEAKS AT FILTER HEAD ASSEMBLY: Peter Smith says “The oil would gather around the top of the filter less
than a minute after starting the engine. I eventually took the head assembly off and found a blanking bolt fitted to the
rear which had a failed fibre sealing washer. Replaced it with a copper washer - no more leaks. I had to take the head
assembly off to see the bolt but when you know it’s there it may be possible by feel.”
OIL LEAKS AT CAM COVER/HALF MOON SEAL: Discussed on page 60.
OIL LEAKS AT TAPPET BLOCK: Discussed on page 70.
OIL LEAKS AT TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER ACCESS COVER: Before going any farther, please read the
warning about having the cam covers off on page 59; the same warning about dropping parts inside applies here.
The access to the timing chain tensioner latch is via an opening on the timing chain cover, forward of the right bank and
just above the support for the belt-driven fan. The purpose of this access is for locking or releasing the tensioner during
overhauls; there is no need for periodic adjustment, as the tensioner is self-adjusting.
The rubber plug always seems to get hard and crumbly. People with the new one in hand sometimes assume there has
been a material change, since the new one is soft and pliable while the old one appears to be Bakelite. Looking at the
ears on the new one can also lead one to believe that it’s a push-and-turn type of cover, like a radiator cap. No such
luck; it’s a simple round hole, and the ears are supposed to be flexed to get it in and out. The old one will probably have
to be removed in pieces. If a piece or two falls down inside, don’t worry about it, they’re too soft to do any serious
damage. They’ll probably just come out in the next oil change; it’s definitely not worth further disassembly.
Mark Jackson says, “Managed to get the hardened rubber bung out the hard way with wood screws and a home made
tool made out of 1/8" round which I levered with a screw driver via a nut on the chain cover!”
Note that this is an opening into the crankcase and should be well sealed to prevent oil vapor leakage, as well as to keep
the PCV system working properly to minimize oil leaks elsewhere. Chad Bolles suggests “...apply a thin coat of GM
Gasket Sealing Compound part no. 1050026 (stuff never gets hard) and press in the new plug and you are good to go.”
Jim Isbell didn’t like how much grief was required getting the plug out after it had dried up, and determined it wouldn’t
happen again. “I have cut the tabs off of the rubber plug that fills the adjustment hole for the chain tensioner. I have
47
made a simple aluminum “L” shaped piece that fits under a water pump bolt and holds the plug so it won't fall out.”
If desired, the opening may be plugged with a compressible rubber type freeze plug. This may even be preferable to the
original plug, since it will make a reliable airtight seal. Be sure that the plug does not interfere with the timing chain or
the operation of the tensioner.
It isn’t too difficult to make an aluminum plug for this hole with provision for fitting an O-ring for sealing. Figure 2
shows a design.
Figure 2: Timing Chain Tensioner Access Hole Plug
One such plug was machined by Ron Morse and successfully tested on the author’s car; you can see a picture of this
installation at
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/TensionerPlug.html
Note that, even though this plug fits snugly in the hole when fitted with a proper Viton O-ring (#210), it lacks any
positive retention and therefore might blow out if pressure builds in the crankcase for some reason. Since you don’t
want to lose it after paying to have it made, something similar to Isbell’s little tab under a water pump bolt is in order to
make sure it stays put. The threaded hole in the center is to aid in removal when you actually want to get it out; just
screw in a 1/4” screw and use it to pull or pry on.
If you don’t want to make your own, Ron Kelnhofer (page 718) has some for sale. His are very similar to the
illustration shown except that he has added a retention scheme, a checkball that can be engaged to grip the side of the
opening so a separate tab under a bolt head is not necessary. You can see a picture of his plug at
http://neptune.spacebears.com/cars/engr/tension.html
OIL LEAKS AT SANDWICH PLATE BOLTS: The bolts that hold the sandwich plate to the bottom of the block are
threaded into holes that open at the top to the outside of the block; if you used bolts that were too long, the ends of the
bolts would stick up through the flange and be visible from outside the engine. This arrangement was no problem with
the oil pan used on the SIII E-Type, since the bolt heads were likewise visible from outside the engine and the gasket
would seal between the pan and the block inboard of the bolt holes, so the bolts themselves would remain dry. When
the sandwich plate configuration was introduced in the XJ12 and XJ-S, however, a widened oil pan was provided at the
rear end of the engine and the heads of some of the bolts holding the sandwich plate to the block are completely
enclosed within the pan. These same bolts also hold a baffle tray in place, but since everything is inside the crankcase,
48
no gaskets are used.
The result is that oil can seep into the space surrounding the bolts and then upward through the threads and come out on
the outside of the block. Not good. If the sandwich plate had been introduced with the V12 at the outset, they probably
would have made the holes in the block “blind holes” so oil couldn’t leak through; this was done in several other places,
as though someone was thinking about it at the time.
Jaguar apparently figured out the problem -- in 1994. That’s the date of Technical Service Bulletin 12-53, which
describes a simple fix: Drain the oil, remove the oil pan, remove the guilty bolts, clean the oil off the bolts and out of the
threaded holes, apply a thread sealant to the bolt threads, and reassemble. This is a snap, and well within the capabilities
of anyone capable of changing their own oil -- and is convenient to do during an oil change, and won’t even add much
time to the job.
The TSB specifies that “Loctite Primer” be applied to the hole threads. Apparently Loctite primers are essentially
acetone- or hepatone-based cleaners. You can use plain acetone on a swab to clean the threads well enough for a thread
sealant to work.
For sealing, the TSB specifies that Loctite 545 be applied to the bolt threads. Note that 545 would mean a sealant, not
to be confused with Loctite 600-series products that are threadlockers. Earl Huff found that Loctite 545 was an
industrial product not generally available to the home mechanic, so he called Loctite for advice: “After learning what I
intended to use the stuff for, the very helpful fellow I spoke with said that Permatex silicone RTV sealant or even the #2
sealant would probably work just as well.” This author used #2 for this job and it worked well.
The TSB indicates that there are 9 bolts involved on the XJ-S but only 7 bolts on the XJ12. It’s unknown where they
got these numbers or why they would be different; on this author’s ’83, there are 8 bolts that required sealing.
The TSB mentions that the bolts and gasket involved were upgraded after engine 8S 86317 (or 8W 10641 on XJR-S
cars), so if your engine is earlier than these numbers you’re supposed to replace the bolts and use the newer style gasket
EBC 9623 when reassembling.
It’s probably not the same bolts that need upgrading and sealing. There are two types of bolts on and within the oil pan
on a pre-metric engine (pre- 8S24175): 5/16”-18 Grade 5 bolts 1-3/4” long with spiral groove washers that go through
the sandwich plate into the block, and 5/16”-18 washer-faced bolts 3/4” long that thread into the sandwich plate itself.
The bolts that need sealing are the 1-3/4” ones with heads within the sump. The 3/4” screws have the dreaded
triangulated threads that strip out holes in aluminum, so these bolts were probably the subject of that upgrade.
Chances are good that the bolt upgrades are similiar to that for the cam cover (see page 60), so using the same strategies
for non-Jaguar bolts described there would probably work here as well. You’ll need nineteen 5/16”-18 bolts 3/4” long.
Grade 5 hex head bolts would work well, Grade 8 even better. Since you probably won’t have washer-faced heads,
you’ll need washers as well -- the 8mm spring washers described on page 27 will work nicely.
Although it’s probably not necessary, you could also replace the 1-3/4” Grade 5 bolts with Grade 8’s. You’ll need
fifteen. Finding 1-3/4” Grade 8 bolts is not always easy, so let me make it easier for you: get 2” bolts instead. They fit
better. You can reuse the spiral groove washers.
Of course, you might also consider replacing all the bolts you can get to on the front half of the sandwich plate that
aren’t associated with the oil pan. On a pre-metric engine these are 5/16”-18 bolts 1” long and there are eighteen of
them, but you probably won’t want to try to get to four that are above the crossmember for the front subframe.
On metric engines, all of these bolts are probably 8mm instead of 5/16” and the lengths are multiples of 5mm. It’s
probably the same number of bolts of each length, though. Remember that metric class 8.8 is roughly equal to Grade 5
and metric class 10.9 is roughly equal to Grade 8.
When sealing and/or replacing bolts that hold the sandwich plate to the block, it’d be a good idea to do one at a time
since you don’t want to disturb the upper gasket.
SANDWICH PLATE GASKETS: If you’re doing the job described above to seal the sandwich plate bolts, it makes
49
sense to buy just the lower gasket. If you’re addressing gasket leaks, one could argue that replacing the lower without
replacing the upper is a waste of time. Of course, replacing the lower with the engine in the car is easy, replacing the
upper is not. You could argue that replacing just the lower is worth a try, and if it doesn’t work you can go back and do
them both and buy a second lower gasket.
When you have the stamped sheet steel pan off, set it down right side up and clean up the flat upper surface. Inspect the
holes closely. If they seem to be dished upward a bit from the bolt tension, set the ball end of a ball pein hammer in the
hole and whack it with another hammer. The metal around the hole should end up slightly dished downward. When
you tighten the bolts down the area will be pulled back flat, but compression will be applied more uniformly over the
area of the gasket.
As a point of information: Jaguar didn’t provide a sandwich plate between block and oil pan just to maximize leakage.
The sandwich plate is structural; bolting it to the block makes the block assembly more rigid. Rigidity is very important;
when an engine operates at high power, the pulses at alternating cylinders can cause the block to twist and flex. This can
misalign the main bearings holding the crank and cause them to get wiped out. When a block is thick cast iron it might
be rigid enough for everyday use, but when you’re designing a long V12 block made of aluminum and intended for high
performance work, you need to do what you can to maximize structural rigidity.
Craig Sawyers provides actual specs:
Torsional stiffness in lbft/degree
Bare block: 5445
Block with cylinder liners and sump: 40,830
Heads, block and sump: 111,700
“Now admittedly this was the original Series III E-Type engine, in which the sump was a large and deep aluminium
casting. However, I believe that the general principle still holds: the sandwich plate is indeed structural.”
Unfortunately, Jaguar may have dropped the ball here. If the sandwich plate is structural, the joint between block and
sandwich plate needs to transmit shear loads. It should therefore have close-fitting dowels, probably a half dozen, to
unite the block with the sandwich plate structurally. It doesn’t, however, so only the bolts (which fit too loosely in the
holes for transmitting shear loads) and the gasket itself hold the two parts united. The shear loads can be expected to be
hard on the gasket, and putting a thick cork gasket in here in place of the thin OEM gasket would probably be a serious
mistake. Reportedly a Ford engineer once opined that this joint will always be inherently prone to leakage.
SEALING THE DIPSTICK TUBE: The dipstick tube just slides into a tube on the crankcase and is held in place by a
bracket bolted to the top of the head. It’s not sealed. Of course, it’d be a nice idea to seal it; the fewer leaks, the better,
and even if the dipstick itself doesn’t seal perfectly (although it just might -- it is a decent design) it’d be a lot harder for
oil to find its way all the way to the top of the tube than to leak out right there at the bottom.
Some ideas for sealing this thing: You might apply a sealant to the end of the tube before sliding it back in. Or, you
might fit a small O-ring around the tube before installing it, and make sure that the bracket arrangement holds the tube
firmly so it applies a little compression onto the end of the fitting on the crankcase. Of course, Viton is preferred. Or, if
you can get your hands in there, you could slide a piece of hose over the joint and clamp it on both sides of the joint.
OIL IN AIR INTAKES: Robert Dingli explains the oil that always seems to collect in the air filter housings and around
the butterflies: “What you are noticing is probably a mixture of a small amount of engine oil that has been forced out as
a vapour from the crankcase by blowby gas which has then condensed within the inlet manifold. You may also get some
residual fuel (usually the heavier fractions) leaving an oily film. This is normal even for new engines but will tend to get
worse as the engine wears.
“On engines which have the inlet manifold sloping down from the head, there is usually quite a puddle sitting in the
plenum. The first time I noticed this was when one of the vacuum lines became blocked. It turned out to be the line
which connects to the underside of the plenum. I have since re-routed that line and plugged the connection. Whenever I
50
remove the plug, a thick deep red oily mess dribbles out. The red colour is obviously the remnants of petrol (leaded
petrol in Australia is coloured red) which has run down into the plenum after the engine has been stopped. The lighter
fractions tend to evaporate when the engine is next heated.
“Very occasionally, I have been known to pour a small amount of petrol into the plenum to dissolve the goo and then
drain from the lowest point.”
FREEZE PLUGS: Apparently a US-only misnomer; English-speaking countries reportedly properly call them “core
plugs”. Some US parts places call them “expansion plugs”. Alex Dorne clarifies, “I can tell you that the freeze plugs are
not meant to rescue the block if the coolant freezes. Due to the casting process they were necessary to make mantling
of the block possible.” Of course, that doesn’t mean they won’t pop out when the coolant freezes! However, in warmer
climates the most common failure is rust-through.
If you need to replace these plugs for whatever reason, you will find several versions available, including simple steel or
brass cup-shaped plugs and copper or rubber assemblies with a bolt through the center for compressing the plug to
expand it into the opening. Dorne: “Most common material seems to be steel for automotive use but when working in
the marine business I found out that copper is used on “factory built” marine engines to prevent corrosion problems
when fresh water cooled.
Note that the original plugs are concave side out, but replacements are installed the other way. “Installing the plugs is a
piece of cake (if the block is out of the vehicle, of course). Place the plug in its seat, convex side out, hold a ball ended
hammer in the center of the plug, give it a hit with a second hammer. This flattens the plug and increases the diameter a
little bit. I think it’s a good idea to use some non-hardening sealant on the seat before placing the plug.”
If the cupped plug is a little too tight to install, it is a simple matter to make it a little smaller. Set the plug in a large
socket or box end wrench, put a steel ball (or the head of a ballpien hammer) in the center and hit it with a hammer.
Since the Jaguar V12 has an open-top deck design, there is little reason for other casting openings and there are no plugs
on the side of the block. There is one plug on the rear end of each bank, within the bellhousing. On the head, there are
three 7/8” plugs on the exhaust side, four 7/8” plugs on the intake side (visible within the V), and one 1-3/8” plug at the
back end.
PCV SYSTEM: The way a typical PCV system works is pretty simple: A scheme is provided that draws fresh air into
one side of the crankcase and out the other side and into the engine intake. This serves at least three purposes: First
(and foremost to emissions regulators) it prevents the vapors gathering in the crankcase from escaping into the
atmosphere. Second, it provides fresh air inside the crankcase rather than yucky fumes, some of which may be corrosive
or explosive. Third, the suction causes a slight vacuum within the crankcase, which causes leaks to leak air in rather
than oil out. For these benefits, there are essentially zero disadvantages other than the minimal cost of the components.
There once was a concern about effects on fuel mixture, but when carburetors were superceded by EFI that concern
evaporated.
Unfortunately, this all describes a typical PCV system -- not the one in the Jag. Rather than the flow-through scheme of
a typical system, the V12 has only one opening into the crankcase. This vent is connected to a chamber built into the
LH air filter housing. The chamber has a fairly large opening into the air filter housing itself. The PCV valve is also
connected to this chamber. Flow-through ventilation of the crankcase is clearly not possible. It’s doubtful such a system
will apply a significant vacuum to the crankcase, other than when the LH air filter is plugged up. The only objective it
will achieve is pollution control; vapors cannot escape the crankcase without going either into the air intake or into the
inlet manifold.
LEAK CONTROL VIA PCV: In the July 1999 issue of Jaguar Driver magazine, Crispin Hales relates a story about a
V12 E-type that had been converted from the original Zenith-Stromberg carburetors to SU’s by a previous owner. The
car leaked oil badly, and one by one all the leaks were corrected except for the rear main seal. After procrastinating for
51
years about fixing the rear main seal, it finally occurred to Hales that perhaps the PCV system was at fault. Sure enough,
whomever had converted the car to SU’s had removed the PCV system in entirety. Simply installing a new PCV system
caused the rear main seal to stop leaking.
It’s unknown what the PCV system on the SIII E-type looks like, but it wouldn’t appear that the system on the XJ-S
would help reduce leaks this well. Of course, you should fix the leaks! But perhaps it’d be nice to achieve the leak
reduction benefits of a typical PCV system on this V12.
It would be easy enough to make this system work like a typical PCV system: remove the PCV valve from the chamber
on the LH air filter housing and plug that hole, leaving the crankcase vent connected to the air filter housing via the
chamber. Install the PCV valve into the crankcase itself. That way, the PCV valve will draw air from the LH air filter
housing into the crankcase through the metal mesh, through the crankcase, and through the PCV valve into the intake
manifold.
Of course, there’s no hole to connect the PCV valve to! You’ll have to make one. As far away from the existing vent
as possible is good, but not essential. You want to avoid any place where there’s a lot of oil splatter that the PCV might
suck up, but most engines put it right in the valve cover so installing it in the RH cam cover should work just as well. If
you’re good, you can drill a hole in the cam cover that’s the same size as the hole in the chamber where the PCV valve
was originally installed so you can install the same valve in the same grommet.
Other options would be to find a way to connect it to the plug for the timing chain tensioner or to a half moon seal.
Either way would avoid cutting on expensive metal parts.
Remember that you’re not bound by the original PCV valve. A check through the selection of PCV valves and
grommets in an auto parts store may generate some ideas. Some PCV valves have a 90° fitting on them, which might be
helpful.
If you manage to install the PCV valve somewhere in the right rear area of the engine, note that you should be able to
take the tube connecting both intake manifolds to the PCV valve off and turn it around backwards and reinstall it,
providing a ready connection to the right rear. Of course, you can just connect up some hoses to the same fittings and
route them anywhere. Connecting to both manifolds is probably good, since you want to have the same effect on
mixture on both banks.
Obviously, it is of considerable importance that the owner take care to maintain the integrity of the crankcase
containment; an opening into the crankcase will not only cause an oil leak at that location, but it will also allow air to
enter and reduce the effective vacuum in the crankcase and thereby cause oil leaks elsewhere. A classic location for such
a leak on the Jaguar V12 is the timing chain tensioner cover (see page 47), but any opening into the crankcase will do it.
Make sure your dipstick is seated properly, make sure your oil fill cap has a good gasket under it, etc., etc.
PCV FOR WORN ENGINES: In the course of maintaining a slight vacuum in the crankcase, the PCV system must
deal with whatever leaks exist to allow air into the crankcase as well as blowby from the piston rings. With a very worn
engine, the piston ring blowby may overpower the PCV system even if all the crankcase openings are properly plugged.
The EPA doesn’t really care as long as the air intake to the crankcase comes from the air filter housing; when the vapors
overpower the PCV, the excess comes out into the air filter housing and gets pulled into the engine anyway. It just
makes the inside of the air filter housing grungy. The systems the EPA don’t like are the ones with a vented oil filler,
where the excess vapors get blown all over the engine compartment and out the bottom of the car.
Of course, you might not care for the oil leaks that result when the PCV system is overpowered. It has been suggested
that, even though an engine rebuild at this time is prudent, the addition of a second PCV system may help keep the oil
leakage to a minimum until you can schedule enough time for an overhaul. Back in the days of carburetors, adding a
second PCV system would have been troublesome because you would have to figure out how to get enough fuel into
the engine at idle when all that intake air was bypassing the carburetor venturis. However, with EFI you really don’t
have anything to worry about; just install it and the EFI system will meter the fuel accordingly. You may have to adjust
the idle speed screw a bit. Note that the piston/ring wear rates on the Jaguar V12 are so low that if you are considering
this band-aid fix on an engine with less than 200,000 miles, you are advised to look for damage or leaks elsewhere first.
52
PCV VALVE: The genuine Jaguar PCV valve is part number C 44231, and the valve itself is stamped E7 AC 3848.
This thing costs about $40. That’s extortionate.
Kelly Spongberg says, “I replaced ours with a generic jobber one made for older Ford V8 engines. It is exactly the same
size, and seems to work fine.”
A quick review of the selection of PCV valves at a local auto parts store revealed that it may be difficult to find a PCV
valve that won’t fit the Jaguar V12. There are a couple that appear nearly identical, such as the Fram FV202. There are
a bunch more that are the same shape except they have a hose barb on the outlet end -- but since that end gets jammed
into the grommet in the chamber on the LH air filter housing, you won’t see it and it’ll work fine. There are yet a few
dozen other PCV valves that appear the same as these except that they have an “F connector” on them that allows the
connection of two hoses; you can just pull the F connector off and install it in the Jag. There are even “generic” PCV
valves that come with a selection of F connectors; throw all the connectors away and use the PCV valve as is.
Of course, there may be a good reason why there are dozens of PCV valves available that all appear interchangeable:
they may have different innards, like different springs or port sizes so they flow differently at different operating
conditions. Dave Osborne bought a valve that was visually nearly identical to the Jag valve for $3. However, when
installed the idle was 100 RPM lower than before. Apparently the Jag valve has a stronger spring in it that holds the
valve a bit open at idle, while the Ford valve has a weaker spring and is totally closed off at idle.
Big deal? Perhaps not. You can simply readjust the idle. And, considering the way the PCV system works on this car,
it’s questionable if the PCV valve does anything of value anyway.
Fault Diagnosis
MISFIRE: With 12 cylinders, some people might not even detect a misfire. An easy way to check -- as well as to tell
which bank is acting up -- is to fold a dollar bill in half and hold it over an exhaust pipe outlet and listen to the flapping
that results; a misfire is usually obvious. Steven Draper adds, “According to the most recent Jaguar Repair Information
Periodical, the official procedure is to use a one hundred dollar bill and send it to the dealer for evaluation.
Unfortunately, the bill cannot be returned.”
COMPRESSION CHECK: First, a brief description of how to properly perform a compression check on any car: The
battery and starter must be in good condition. All of the spark plugs should be removed. Power to the ignition system
should be disconnected, since an electronic ignition system may be damaged trying to fire with the spark plugs
disconnected. And the throttle should be held at least part way open, usually by jamming something in the linkage. On a
car with EFI, it would also be helpful to disconnect the power to the EFI system or fuel pump to prevent fuel flow.
With a compression gauge fitted to one spark plug hole, the engine should be turned on the starter through several
compression strokes, until the reading stabilizes at a peak value.
On the XJ-S, it would be most helpful to have the type of compression gauge that screws into the spark plug hole and
has a lengthy hose. Trying to hold the press-in-place type on this engine is not easy. Also, since the A/C compressor
usually has to be removed to get at the front plugs, you will probably have to run the test with a dangling drive belt; try
to position it so there is no tension on it, and the crank pulley can turn within it without driving it.
On the US-spec pre-H.E. engine, the readings typically will be about 130-150 psi. The US-spec 5.3 liter H.E. engine has
11.5:1 compression, and will read about 200-220 psi. Note that readings will be lower at high elevations.
Keep in mind, however, that the absolute values are not as important as the relationship between them. There are
dozens of factors that could affect the absolute values (including the calibration of your gauge), so if your readings are
53
all a little higher or lower than the above, don’t worry about it. But they should all be nearly the same; one significantly
lower than the others is not a good sign.
If one cylinder reads low, it is customary to add a couple tablespoons of motor oil into that spark plug hole and test it
again. In theory, the oil will temporarily seal bad piston rings but won’t seal a burned valve, so this test may indicate the
level of disassembly needed. Of course, the oil probably won’t seal a burned piston or a hole in a cylinder liner, so the
results are best taken with a grain of salt. Either way, the head has to come off.
LEAKDOWN TEST: The leakdown test is gaining in popularity among mechanics, who feel that it gives a better
indication of the actual quality of the sealing of the compression chamber than the compression check. To perform a
leakdown test, compressed air at a known pressure (usually 100 psig) is fed through a device with an orifice in it and
into a cylinder via the spark plug hole. The pressure downstream of the orifice is measured, and the leakdown rate is
calculated as the percent which the pressure dropped across the orifice. If the leakage out of the cylinder is very low,
the pressure after the orifice will be very close to the pressure before the orifice, and the percent of pressure lost will be
low. If the compression chamber has big gaping openings in it, the main restriction in the flow will be the orifice itself,
and the pressure after the orifice will be closer to ambient -- and therefore the percentage lost will be much higher.
When performing this test, it will be necessary to lock the crank still. The air pressure in the cylinder will try to turn the
crank to BDC, but at BDC one of the valves is likely to be cracked open, making your leakdown readings meaningless.
Try to lock the crank somewhere between halfway up on the compression stroke and halfway down on the power
stroke.
Note that, when doing such a test on the Jaguar V12, it’d be a good idea to take the oil filler cap off the left cam cover.
We wouldn’t want a well-sealed crankcase (hah!) to cause unwarranted favorable readings. Also, just in case there’s a
leak in a head gasket, the radiator cap should be removed to prevent pressure buildup in the cooling system.
Kyle Chatman points out that if the leakdown test finds excessive leakage in a cylinder, it might be possible to determine
whether the leakage is from the rings, the exhaust valve, or the intake valve by listening closely at the oil filler cap, the
air intakes, or the exhaust pipe outlets. And a bad head gasket might cause bubbles in the coolant (especially if it’s the
center cap that was removed) or other motion in the coolant level.
It’s entirely possible that the leakdown test is highly regarded simply because it gives results in percent. It should be
pointed out, however, that the percent has no real basis and is entirely dependent upon the size of the orifice in the test
device -- and Randy Wilson says “and there is no such thing as a standard orifice size.” In order to be able to compare
the results of one leakdown test against another, it would be necessary to confirm that the orifices used were the same
size and had exactly the same flow characteristics and that the same air pressure was used for the tests.
Wilson adds: “Next question is: How much air leakage is acceptable? This all depends on how big the cylinder is. The
bigger the bore, the more ring area there is to leak by. Typically, the valves are bigger, too. Here we could really use a
percent of leakage vs. base volume, but our tester is effectively measuring finite volume of flow.”
There are other concerns involving leakdown tests. For one thing, since the engine does not turn during the test, it really
only gives an indication of the leakage at one piston position. While this is usually adequate, it may fail to identify
certain types of problems such as localized damage on a cylinder wall. Perhaps the careful mechanic could slowly turn
the engine over by hand while doing the leakdown test, and watch the gauge for variance in the readings.
The leakdown test does have the advantage, however, that if a mechanic is using the same leakdown tester at the same
pressure all the time, he can get a real good idea of just what condition cars are in. While compression readings will
always vary from car to car, the percentage readings from his trusty leakdown tester should give very consistent
indications on cars in similar condition regardless of compression ratio or other variables.
HEAD GASKET CHECK: Michael Neal suggests two methods of checking the integrity of the head gaskets. First,
remove the rubber hood that connects the PCV system to the engine just forward of the oil filler cap, and look inside it.
Milky deposits are an indication that water is getting into the oil, usually a sign of trouble.
54
For a more definite check, Neal recommends removing the spark plugs, pressurizing the cooling system to 15 psi, and
leaving it overnight. Then have someone turn the starter while watching the spark plug holes. Mist (or worse, a solid
stream of water) coming out of a plug hole means it’s time for engine work.
Of course, pressurizing the cooling system usually calls for a special tool. It basically is an adapter radiator cap and a
hand pressure pump; Stant is the common manufacturer and it runs $60 to $70. In a pinch you could tee into the small
hose on the center fill pipe and apply pressure.
TAPPET NOISE: Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering and formerly with Jaguar engine development, says, “In fact a
recognised source of tappet noise on the V12 is excessive side clearance of the tappet in the aluminium carrier allowing
it to ‘rattle about’. Remember the XK used cast iron tappet sleeves and they expand and contract at the same rate as the
tappet so the clearance remained more or less constant. This does not happen on the V12 and the minimum diametral
clearance is set by the need for a top size (high limit of tolerance band) tappet to not jam in a bottom size carrier bore at
minus 40 degrees in a Canadian Winter. The other extreme of a bottom size tappet in a top size bore could well be quite
sloppy when fully warm and the way the cam moves it around can be very critical. Cam profile, tappet clearance, side
movement, rotation and rock-over at peak lift, as well as valve seating geometry, all come into what is actually quite a
complex phenomenon. For the record the range of diametral tappet clearances involved run from about 0.0005” to
about 0.002” at room temperature. I wonder how many engine builders have even thought about measuring such
things?”
OIL PRESSURE: An oil-fed sleeve bearing, such as used in the main and connecting rod bearings of automobile
engines, is an excellent device -- much more so than most people understand. When the parts are rotating, the parts ride
up on a film of oil, much like skimboarders skim easily across very shallow water and seem to coast forever. When
operating properly, the metal parts do not touch each other, and there is essentially zero wear. The friction is entirely
within the film of oil.
This system doesn’t work at a standstill, however, the same way the skimboarder will sink to the bottom when he stops
moving. The entire reason engine bearings have a soft, replaceable surface is because they must ride on this surface for a
very brief time at startup, before oil is pumped to the bearings and before the bearings establish a film to ride on. The
hard steel surface of the crankshaft should slide on the soft bearing with very little wear on either, but startups still
account for the vast majority of normal bearing wear.
The shearing action of the oil tends to heat it somewhat; there is very little heat generated from shear, however, and
many cars get by without oil coolers. The main cause of heating of the oil is by contact with hot parts, notably the
bottom surface of the pistons.
The pistons are likewise supposed to skim up and down the cylinders on a similar film of oil. It doesn’t work nearly as
well, though, since the piston stops at each end of its travel for an instant, and because there is a less positive flow of oil
to this area.
This system also does not work very well for the contact between the camshaft and the followers. This is because the
contact area is a very thin line rather than a broad area. If one of the two parts were as soft as the crankshaft bearings
are, the force at the contact point would quickly tear it up. In the Jaguar V12, these parts are immersed in oil during
operation. This ensures they are adequately lubricated, even during startup since the oil stays there, but it also generates
more heat churning the oil.
There are two primary bearing failure modes in any engine that result from lubrication problems. The first and most
easily understood is excessive wear and damage due to lack of lubrication. The second is bearing overheating due to
insufficient cooling oil flow. These two are very different; in the latter case, the bearing may have enough lubrication to
prevent wear, but gets hot enough to melt the soft bearing material because the same oil is staying in there and getting
hotter and hotter, rather than cool oil flowing through.
All engines tend to display a drop in oil pressure at idle; the pump moves less oil when the engine is turning slower, but
the openings through which the oil flows are the same size no matter what the engine speed. The Jaguar V12 is no
55
exception, and sometimes shows lower oil pressure when hot and idling, especially when it has a few miles on it. The
V12, when running on all cylinders, can idle very slowly, causing even lower pressure. This causes many XJ-S owners
to panic, and some to take poorly conceived countermeasures.
There is no magic value for oil pressure. The only real need for any pressure at all is to get oil to all points in the engine,
and this would only require a couple psi. Oil pressure is monitored simply to insure there is oil flow, which is essential.
If your car has always had low pressure at idle when hot, and it gradually over the years gets a little lower, don’t worry
about it. If it suddenly has much lower pressure than it used to, you may have a damaged bearing that is allowing oil to
flow through too fast; the cause should be investigated. If your car suddenly has no oil pressure at all, stop immediately,
do not drive it one more minute until the problem is located and corrected. Many motorists fail to understand the
importance of this, so I will emphasize: If the red light on the dash comes on indicating that you have no oil pressure, it
is not good enough to “take the next exit.” You should pull over immediately, possibly even shutting the engine off
while still moving. A towing fee, and even an illegal parking ticket, is a minor expense compared to an engine
replacement, which is the inevitable result of driving with no oil pressure.
Do not add oil thickeners to your oil. While these may increase the indicated oil pressure at idle when hot, they do no
real good and can do considerable harm. In particular, when cold the oil may be so thick that very little flows and most
of the output of the oil pump is wastegated through the pressure relief valve. While there is good pressure, there is little
flow to the bearings, and they may fail due to lack of cooling flow before the engine and the oil warm up. This is also a
good reason not to run the engine too hard until it is fully warmed up.
OIL PRESSURE SENDER: The oil pressure sender on the pre-’92 XJ-S is notorious for leaking; see page 47. It’s also
fairly well known for electrical maladies. Tom Mackie says, “My oil pressure sender is getting flaky. I connected an
ohmmeter and found that rather than nice varying resistance readings, it sometimes goes open. Which makes me
wonder how accurate this particular unit has been all along.”
If the connector on top is loose, Mike Morrin provides some insight: “The connector moving around is due to some
little plastic pegs broken inside, and will cause the sender to read low. You can uncrimp the top and get inside to glue it
down.” Since uncrimping is difficult, others suggest cutting right through the circumference of the can to get the top
off, fixing the innards, and putting the top back on with aluminum tape or JB Weld or some other mechanical means.
Ed Sowell provides electrical data to aid diagnosics: “Here are the measurements from my sender and gauge, for what
it's worth:
Oil pressure sender (markings: PTR 1001/10/EC 700kn/m2, 29-7 Part #46272):
Engine off: 350 ohms
Cold engine idle: 80 ohms ( I believe the oil pressure is about 60-70 psig under these conditions)
Oil pressure gauge:
290+ ohms = 0 psig
55 ohms = 50 psig
10 ohms = 100 psig
short to ground = off top of scale.”
I’d like to be able to tell you what commonly available sending unit can be used for a substitute, but I can’t; nobody’s
worked one out yet. The pre-’92 Jaguar V12 uses a 0-100 psi oil pressure gauge while Jaguar 6-cylinder cars use a 0-80
psi gauge, so senders from other Jags won’t work. Before trying a sender from any other car, make sure it has the 0100 psi range. Electrical oil pressure gauges with 0-100 psi ranges are very common as aftermarket items, though, so
perhaps the sender from one of those will work. Summit (page 720) and Jeg’s (page 717) offer many such gauges, or
you can probably find a fair selection in a local auto parts store or speed shop. Unfortunately, the senders are often
included with the gauge itself rather than sold separately, but you still might get off cheaper than buying the Jag part
even throwing the gauge away.
There are two issues that must be addressed to get an aftermarket sender to work. The first is physically installing it.
56
The threads on the bottom of the OEM sender are BSPP (see the section on the radiator drain plug on page 195), while
the generic senders typically have 1/8” NPT fittings. You could buy a BSPP fitting and plumb a line to a remotelymounted sender -- or just opt to replace the entire pedestal. It’s possible the pedestal from the ‘92-on cars would work,
or you could actually just make one from a block of aluminum. If you don’t mind how it looks, you can simply plug the
hole in the original pedestal by cutting off the bottom of the OEM sender, putting a bolt through the center, and
screwing it back into the hole, and then tee off the fitting for the oil pressure switch (standard 1/8” NPT) to connect up a
sender with NPT threads.
The second concern is finding a sender with the correct pressure vs. ohmage response. Unfortunately, neither Summit
nor Jeg’s provide such data; if you can’t find such specs or talk a local shop into letting you check one out with a tire
pump and a VOM, you may just have to take the risk and buy one to see what their electrical characteristics are.
For now, your best option may be to shop around the mail order places for the OEM part, since prices on this item seem
to vary widely and it sometimes can be found for a quite reasonable cost.
If you have the ‘92-on with round gauges, you are in worse trouble. Read about steady oil pressure below.
REPLACING THE OIL PRESSURE SENDER: Julian Mullaney says, “Use a crow's foot and several thin extensions.
It is a superb test of dexterity and patience, but I did it. To install the new one, I attached it to a coat hanger and started
the thread that way.”
Stefan Schulz says, “Have you tried a plumber's tool called a basin wrench ? GBP5 at the nearest DIY store.”
Craig Sawyers says, “What I did was undo the banjo bolt that links the camshaft oil feeds to the back of the alloy
pedestal that holds the oil pressure sender. Then I undid the two 7/16" af bolts that hold the pedestal down and took the
pedestal plus oil pressure sender out as a unit. Changed the sender, and reversed (as they say) the removal procedure.
Made it all very easy, when originally it looked damned near impossible. The Jag ROM and Haynes were less than
useless.”
REALLY STEADY OIL PRESSURE: Bill Letter reports: “Today the kitty went in for a number of "adjustments", the
most important of which was to determine why my oil pressure gauge always reads 58 psi at idle (hot or cold). On my
last visit to the same dealer for the same problem, I was told that the gauge was working fine and according to Jaguar
Spec. Today I was shown a TSB that explained that Jaguar changed the oil pressure senders on the XJ12 Sedan and
XJS V12 (in 1996) to a new type which is actually not a sender at all. It seems (according to the dealer) that numerous
customer complaints of their oil pressure gauge reading too low (less than 25 psi) when hot at idle caused Jaguar to
discontinue manufacturing the oil sender and instead replace it with an oil switch which acts like an idiot light (when
there is more than 7 psi pressure it will always read 'ON' or in my case 58 psi, when there is less than 7 psi oil pressure it
will read 'OFF' or zero psi). So it was explained to me that the updated oil switch was installed in my car last year.
“It is Jaguar TSB Number 15-13 dated 06/95 and covers all cars with V-12 engines and some AJ16 engines on the XJS
(MY '95 on). They removed the senders and installed a simple switch because of customer complaints that the needle
would read lower oil pressure when hot at idle!”
You may have difficulty trying to undo this “upgrade” since the real sender is officially NLA. Gregory Wells of
Coventry West, Inc. explains in detail: “The sender issue is confined to '88-on XJ40 cars and '92-on XJ-S with 4.0L,
5.3L, and 6.0L engines (VIN 179737 onwards). Jaguar has superceded all sender numbers (viz. DBC4418, DBC5513,
DAC7879, DAC11141, LMD5640AB) to JLM20791, which looks like the old C42200 (now superceded to
LHD5642AA) switch for the oil pressure light on the Series III cars. Included in the bag with the sender is a small
harness which seems to only have a resistor in it. If one orders any of the above five part numbers from Jaguar, a
JLM20791 will be supplied. I've checked the '88-92 XJ40 fiche, the '93-94 XJ40 fiche, the '87-91 XJ-S fiche, and the
'92-on XJ-S fiche and they all show gauge sender part numbers that eventually supercede to the on/off sender p/n.”
However, if you’re persistent, you may be able to find a dealer or supplier that has some of the real senders in old stock.
Note that none of this seems to apply to the pre-’92 XJ-S.
57
There are two things to note regarding the ’92-on senders vs. the pre-’92 senders that may be relevant: First, the
pre-’92 sender (C46272) has BSPP threads and requires a sealing washer, while the ’92-on sender has the same tapered
pipe thread that the oil pressure switch has (1/8” NPT). Second, the oil pressure gauge on the pre-’92 dash is the
vertical indicator with a 0-100 psi range while the ’92-on dash has a round gauge with a 0-80 psi range. Together this
may mean that a standard Ford oil pressure sender might work in this car.
ENGINE WORK
ENGINE OVERHAULS: If you take your XJ-S to a disreputable dealer with major engine problems, they may tell you
that a fine machine like this cannot be rebuilt, and try to charge you $10,000 to put in a new engine. Of course, one of
the features that make this a fine engine is that it can be rebuilt. It is not a disposable engine; all wear items can be
replaced. Even the cylinder liners can be easily replaced, so there is no need for boring and honing or for oversize
pistons. Of course, if you’ve overheated the engine and warped the block, or you’ve had a major engine fire, you will
definitely need a new motor.
If the engine has to be rebuilt but you aren’t up to the task yourself, you may find it challenging to find a mechanic you
feel is competent to do the job. Fortunately, if you live in the US, there may be an alternative to taking your chances
with the local grease monkeys or a Jaguar dealer: Crow Engineering, 1-800-537-4146. This is a very interesting
business run by a British guy named Stewart Plant who apparently spends a few months each year in the US. By
appointment, he and an assistant will drive to your house and rebuild your engine in your garage. He arrives in a panel
van with all the tools and parts needed and will typically finish the task in a week or so. He and his assistant sleep in the
van; the only accommodation they ask from you is to use your shower. Their services are not cheap, but they’re
undoubtedly cheaper than paying a dealer for a new engine -- and you’re more likely to be told why your engine was
damaged and how to avoid it happening again.
Rebuilding by the home mechanic is not out of the question. It’s imposing at first; the engine compartment is crammed
quite full. But with this book, a repair manual of some sort, a good set of tools, and time and patience it can be done -and the money saved will probably be enough to pay for that good set of tools! The biggest disadvantage of going this
route is usually the time involved; typically, a mechanic will disassemble the engine, figure out what parts he needs, order
the parts, and then wait, and wait, and wait for the parts to show up -- only to find out that a few of them are incorrect
and must be returned and reordered. And, of course, on reassembly he will figure out what he forgot to order. As a
result, even though only a week or two of actual labor may be involved, the car may be scattered all over the place for a
couple of months or more.
If you decide to tackle such a teardown, note that the V12 weighs something like 700 pounds as it is pulled from the car.
You don’t want to be working with flimsy hoists or engine stands; obtain the heavy-duty stuff, perhaps even items
intended for trucks.
ENGINE ASSEMBLY LUBE: When an engine is first started after assembly is when much of the wear occurs -- in the
several seconds it takes before oil pressure and flow to the bearings is established. To counter this problem, there is a
product called “Penrite Camshaft & Engine Assembly Lube”. This is made specifically for use on all plain bearings
(mains, big ends, etc.) as well as on cams, when assembling a rebuilt engine. It claims to withstand loadings “greater
than 200000 p.s.i.”, which is almost 100 tons per sq. inch. It is an Australian product, but equivalents may be available
in other countries.
Another idea is to simply fill the freshly-rebuilt engine with oil through the galleys instead of the filler cap, thereby lubing
all the bearings before it ever turns over. All you need is a pressure vessel capable of holding at least 3 or 4 quarts with
a tire valve at the top and a hose out the bottom with a selection of fittings that will thread onto the oil filter fitting.
After reassembly, you thread the thing onto the oil filter fitting, put new oil in the tank, close it up, and apply compressed
air to the tire valve. The pressure will blow the oil into the galleys and on into the bearings. After enough oil has been
blown in to establish steady oil flow through the system, the feed is cut off before the tank empties and blows air into the
58
galleys. Then install a new filter and add the rest of the oil necessary the normal way to establish the proper level in the
crankcase prior to startup.
Andrew Holley describes what he did with a motorcycle engine: “What I did was get hold of an old fire extinguisher,
the water/stored pressure type. Has about a 15 litre capacity; the handle has a tyre valve built into it with pressure gauge
as well. After draining and cleaning, filled it with oil and attached the hose via a suitable fitting to one of the oil cooler
lines. With about 60 psi of air in the tank, it forced the oil through all the passageways. Simple and effective.”
Tom Amlie: “Prelubing a rebuilt engine is sometimes difficult, but in this case it was easy. There is a pipe plug on the
little pedestal that holds the oil pressure sender and the idiot light switch. As best I could tell, it was 1/8 NPT. Got a
cheap ($13) plastic garden sprayer and cut the hose to match 1/8 pipe. Put 8 quarts through it. Worked great.”
You might want to use a good assembly lube and pre-oil the engine before startup. Blowing oil into the galleys will do
wonders for reducing wear in bearings and cam followers during that first startup, but you won’t get any oil on the
cylinder walls until the crankshaft is spinning. So having a good assembly lube on the cylinder walls is a good idea.
Engine Work -- Top
MANIFOLD CROSSOVER PIPE HOSES: On the author’s ’83, the intake manifold crossover pipe is connected to the
manifolds with a short, straight piece of 1” hose at each side. However, sometime before ’89, the assembly was changed
so that pieces of hose with 45º bends are required. A cursory look at the two assemblies leads one to believe that the
parts themselves are in fact unchanged, and the later cars were merely assembled with elbow hoses to relocate the
crossover pipe higher across the back of the engine. This might actually be helpful in making condensation drain out of
the crossover pipe back into the manifolds rather than into the vacuum line to the ECU, which really messes things up.
If you have the earlier straight hoses and need to replace them, it’s obviously pretty easy to find pieces of 1” hose. As
for the later parts, Jeff Elmore says, “The dealer quoted me $22 apiece for these three inch long, 7/8-1" diam hoses with
a 45 degree bend in it. Bennett Auto Supply had a Goodyear coolant bypass hose that fit perfectly for $2.62 apiece.
Part number #gyy 63064.”
Whatever you fit, note that the vacuum inside these parts is considerable, and long unsupported sections of rubber hose
will be sucked flat. With the earlier design with straight hoses, it appears to be sufficient to merely be sure to insert the
hoses far enough onto the fittings that there is only a short area of hose that doesn’t have fittings within it. If you must
have longer sections, you may need to insert a piece of wire coiled like a spring to hold the hose round, or perhaps just a
short section of tubing.
RUNNING WITHOUT AIR FILTER HOUSINGS: Frank Perrick points out that if the engine is to be started without
the air filter housings bolted on, the bolts themselves must be screwed in. The bolts that hold the air filter back plate
onto the butterfly housings actually go all the way through the housings and are threaded into the intake manifold. If
these bolts are left out, the holes provide a major butterfly bypass and the engine will overrev.
CAM COVER WORK: If you need to get down to the cam covers or beyond, Victor Naumann sends this awesome tip:
Remove the PCV crossover manifold, fuel rail and injectors, air injection manifolds, both fuel pressure regulators, the
ignition amplifier, the intake manifold crossover pipe, both butterfly housings, and both intake manifolds as one piece.
Be sure to disconnect the butterfly return springs before lifting.
CAM COVERS OFF?: If you remove the cam covers for any reason that is not intended to involve further disassembly
of the engine, it cannot be reiterated too many times that every bolt, nut, tool, or whatever that is in this vicinity should
have a string tied to it with the other end tied to your finger. If a metal part falls down into the timing cover while
you’re fiddling around, see the section on timing cover removal on page 93. Peter Smith suggests “I shove a big rag
59
down the timing cover on each side to catch the bolts if they fall. I find this to be a nerve-racking part of the job - if the
damned things fall in it can really test your sense of humour!”
The repair manuals provide complete instructions for timing chain disengagement and camshaft removal, except they
neglect to remind you that you might want to measure the valve clearances before disconnecting the timing chain and
removing the cams. The assembly must be together to make the measurements, so measuring before disassembly will
save you having to slap it back together to measure it later. Of course, if you plan on reseating valves and the like, the
measurements won’t do you any good anyway.
You might be able to replace the timing chain without removing anything beyond the RH cam cover. See page 95.
CAM COVER DECORATION: Some of us think those Jaguar decals on the cam covers are not in keeping with the
general class of this automobile. One suggestion is to remove the decals and attach some brass insignias with screws -making sure not to cause a leak. Might even find just the right key fob to use.
A suggestion from Steve Averill: “If you want to find something a little better looking that the Jaguar decal on the valve
cover, why not either get it photo etched or alodyned? That’d be more apropos than sticking on something that’d
probably wind up looking “tacked on” & you could pick any pattern that appeals to you.”
If you have them off anyway and have a milling machine at your disposal, you might consider skimming the top of the
ribs, leaving the black paint in the grooves between the ribs. It’ll really make it look snazzy.
CAM COVER GASKET/HALF MOON SEAL: This joint is one of the most notorious sources of oil leakage on the
Jaguar V12, although it’s possible some of that blame is misdirected; between the tappet block leaking (see page 70) and
the banjo fittings leaking (see page 44), sometimes it’s hard to be sure just how much of the oil is actually coming from
the cam cover gasket or the half moon seal.
Many owners are surprised that the cam cover gasket is a thin piece of cardboard (or, later, a thin Gortex sandwich),
expecting to see a thick layer of cork or some such. The thick layer of cork is typical on engines with stamped steel
valve covers, but the cam covers on the Jaguar V12 are a quality aluminum casting with precision machined mating
surfaces. A thin gasket should seal just fine. Of course, the original cardboard gasket won’t, but it’s not because it isn’t
thick enough; it’s because it’s a cheap cardboard gasket.
Most of the newfangled gaskets introduced by Ford are only moderately expensive, but the Gortex sandwich cam cover
gaskets are obscenely expensive. Apparently as a result, some of the mail order places continue to stock the old paper
versions. There is irony in that, since Ford updated nearly all the gaskets wholesale whether they were notorious for
leaking or not but the ones that probably needed the update the most were the cam cover gaskets.
Also involved in this joint is the half moon seal, a semicircular rubber plug used at the back end of the tappet block to fill
an opening made while machining the cam bearing journals. This plug is set in the opening, the cam cover gasket is set
on top of it, and the cam cover is installed to hold them both in place.
There is an inherent problem with this combination of gasket and half moon seal. In this author’s opinion as an engineer,
a reliable sealing of the cam cover is not possible when assembling as Jaguar intended -- even using the later gortex
gaskets. A gasket -- any gasket -- will only seal properly when securely compressed between two hard surfaces. Above
the half moon seal the cam cover gasket is not compressed; the rubber plug does not provide a hard surface for the cam
cover to press the gasket against. Instead, the rubber plug merely deforms a little, leaving the gasket locally
uncompressed. It’s no surprise that leaks are common. The most common leak path may actually be between the
gasket and the cam cover above the half moon seal, rather than around the half moon seal itself.
To effect a reliable seal, we will be departing from Jaguar's instructions for installing the cam covers. I will suggest three
different methods. The first -- and cheapest and simplest and quickest -- method is to use the OEM rubber half moon
seal but omit the cam cover gasket entirely. Seal the entire kit 'n kaboodle with Loctite 518, including all the way
around the rubber half moon seal, and bolt the cover on. The rubber half moon seal will therefore be sealing against
metal both top and bottom, and should work fine. Likewise, Loctite 518 should provide a reliable seal in the joint
60
between the machined aluminum tappet block and the machined aluminum cam cover. This method should keep the
cam covers sealed until the rubber half moon seal rots and falls to pieces, which should actually be a good long time.
The other two methods involve providing a rigid surface for the cam cover gasket to be compressed against, and then
use the Gortex cam cover gaskets. Paper cam cover gaskets are not recommended, period.
John Napoli says, “I figured it was better to fill them than to play games with those silly seals. Anyway, I filled the half
moons up with Marine Tex. I clamped wood on both sides, faced with wax paper, and positioned so that the goo stood
proud of the mounting face. After it set, I filed it down flush. Seems to have worked. I buy Marine Tex at marine
supply stores.” If you have the cam covers off anyway, you might want to go ahead and pull the camshafts and the
tappet blocks so you can do this job on the bench. Marine Tex dries hard, hard enough to serve as a base for
compressing the cam cover gasket properly. JB Weld might be an acceptable substitute, available in most auto supply
houses. Napoli points out that the only reason you would ever need this opening again is for boring out the cam bearing
journals to an oversize, and if this is necessary then it won’t be difficult to use the boring machine to remove all the
Marine Tex. After completion of the reboring, you’ll probably want to install some more Marine Tex!
Edwin Hyatt did this job: “Used two old credit cards and a couple of miniature C clamps on the outside and inside of
the U and piled the JB on. Filed flat the next day.”
Bob Gallivan: “After you mix up the JB Weld use a hair drier to heat it up until it flows easily then fill the halfmoon
spot, may even want to heat the tappet block in that area to help any air to escape.”
The mold-in-place idea will probably only work with the tappet blocks out of the car. When they are on the engine, they
are held at an angle, so you’ll have trouble getting the JB Weld to stay in the recess while it sets up. Of course, you
could jack up one side of the car 30 degrees and fill one side at a time!
John Ashcroft went a slightly different route: “Got some body filler and filled an egg cup to the top, pressed the old
seals in to just under surface; when filler was hard, removed h/moons, perfect female mould. Mixed up some JB weld,
heated with heat gun and poured into mould. Removed from mould after 24hrs. and they are perfect, even have the little
groove for some Ultra Copper RTV, just have to dress the top so it is flush with tappet block. Checked the fit with
prussian blue, had to file just a fraction of what was left of the ridges.”
The third method is a more difficult and expensive but esthetically pleasing route. This author designed some aluminum
plugs to replace the rubber half moon seals, and Ron Morse was kind enough to fab up a set for testing the idea. Figure
3 shows an updated design.
61
Figure 3: Aluminum Half Moon Seal
There are no tolerances shown on the drawing, so a description of which dimensions are critical is called for. The
1.0625” diameter fits very snugly in the opening, and the opening itself is rather precisely machined as a cam bearing
journal diameter. It might be acceptable to make this diameter a hair smaller, but it cannot be any larger or it won’t
fit in the hole.
The 0.531” height dimension is critical, since it locates the platform for the cam cover gasket to be compressed
against. This dimension should be held even if the 1.0625” dimension varies.
The .430” width is necessary to fit around the boss on the tappet block. This dimension can be made larger, but if
made smaller it can make the part difficult to install. Since the width of the boss was not held to tight tolerances by
Jaguar, if possible you should measure it before having this plug made and widen that .430” dimension even more if
necessary.
Apply a coating of Loctite 518 or 573 or 574 to the curved mating surfaces before installing the plug. Don't apply
sealant to the flat top surface; the gasket will seal against this surface, and Gortex gaskets should be installed dry.
Or, you could consider installing the plugs with JB Weld or Marine Tex. Getting them out later might prove to be a
challenge, but they shouldn’t ever need to come out.
If you don’t want to make these aluminum plugs, Ron Kelnhofer (page 718) has some for sale.
Using aluminum half moon plugs and Gortex gaskets should keep the cam covers sealed until the sun burns out. Of
course, if you have to remove the covers later for valve adjustment, you'll need new Gortex gaskets -- and those
suckers are pricey.
It is not recommended that you attempt to use the aluminum half moon seals with no cam cover gaskets. The height
of the flat surface of the aluminum half moon seal would need to be very precise indeed to seal properly with no
gasket.
It has been suggested that it may be simplest to just heliarc weld the openings in the tappet block shut and machine
the gasket surface. There is no way I would recommend this, though; the distortion likely to result from such
welding would surely compromise the seal between the tappet block and the head as well as play havoc with the
alignment and concentricity of the cam bearing journals and tappet holes.
CAM COVER BOLTS: Once we’ve addressed the shortcomings of the half moon seal, we still have other problems to
deal with. Neal says, “New bolts are also necessary. Unfortunately these parts are only carried by the dealer.”
62
Before ordering bolts, determine whether your engine requires SAE bolts or metric bolts. Judging from the 1988 Jaguar
Parts Catalogue, the change from SAE to metric took place with engine number 8S24175. The part number for the new
metric cam cover bolts is FS-106251/J.
The replacement of the bolts may not be as much due to the excellence of the new bolts as to the lousiness of the old
bolts. The original bolts -- both SAE and metric -- have a “triangulated” thread that presumably helps it to drive into the
aluminum housing, but probably is also very effective at boogering the aluminum threads up. Martyn Sandbrook says, “I
recognise these as "taptite" screws. We used to use these in the telecoms industry way back in the seventies. They are
like selftappers but they "form" a thread rather than cut one and are supposed to be better. You don't see them these
days. I thought they were junk when I first came across them. Seems strange to be using them in a leak-critical area as
they only grip on the outer lobes once the thread has been formed and won't take much tightening torque.”
If you’d rather not pay Jaguar prices here and seek other sources for bolts, note that 7/16” hex heads will not do, you
can’t get a wrench or socket on it; either 3/8” (or smaller) hex head, socket head (allen wrench drive) or Torx drive bolts
will be necessary. And you might want to look at the access before you select bolt head styles, since you may want to
retorque them a while after replacement. Of course, buying el cheapo grade-zilch bolts (like most slotted head screws) is
not a good idea; not only will they rust pretty badly, they may not hold enough tension to keep the cam cover gasket
from leaking.
An alternative bolt that would work on SAE threaded engines was found at a Home Depot in their “specialty fasteners”
rack. It is called a “serrated flange bolt”; it has a 3/8” hex with a washer face and a row of serrations around the bottom
of that washer face. The biggest problem will be finding enough of them to do the job; often such racks in hardware
stores only contain a half dozen or so.
Another alternative SAE bolt: This author bought a box of 1-1/4” “alloy steel” 1/4”-20 “socket head cap screws” from
a local industrial fastener supplier -- less than $20 for a box of 100. These fasteners are jet black. Strength is not a
problem, alloy steel cap screws are stronger than Grade 8.
The original SAE bolts were 1” long, so replacing them with 1-1/4” bolts provides enough length for some washers
under the heads (and perhaps for thicker gaskets, if you find something non-OEM). There’s no problem with bolts being
too long, since the end just comes out the back side of the flange on the tappet block. Using the longer screws also
makes use of all the threads available in the tappet block, including the ones at the bottom end that haven’t been worn by
the lousy OEM screws.
If you need M6 socket head or flange bolts, finding them locally may be more troublesome -- at least here in the US.
Craig Sawyers says, “Well, here in the UK, the challenge is to find non-metric SS screws!” Again, going with slightly
longer screws than the OEM 25mm items -- perhaps 30mm -- might be a good idea.
Dave Oxenreider says, “I found a whole slew of 18-8 stainless steel socket head cap screws in both metric and English in
the McMaster-Carr catalog. Averaging about $25 per box of 100.” Joe Bialy opted for non-stainless (no good reason
for stainless here, actually): “Part #91290A332 for $7.34” See page 711.
Another source would be Barnhill Bolt; see page 710.
If you have a local Grainger outlet (page 711), the Grainger catalog doesn’t seem to list any suitable M6 socket head
screws but they carry “button head socket screws” which use a smaller Allen wrench but will work. The box of 100
screws 30mm long is stock number 3L184 and costs less than $20.
On the other hand, if your cam covers need M6 screws, it might not need screws with unusual heads. The typical
generic locally-available M6 screw has a 10mm hex head. It appears that a 10mm socket will actually fit in the recess,
making the search for socket heads or flange bolts unnecessary.
An idea that might work with either 7/16” or 10mm hex head screws: If you can find some sleeves with a length of
perhaps 10mm, 1/2”, or 15mm, you could use them together with screws that are proportionately longer (40mm, 1-3/4”,
or 45mm) which would raise the location of the hex head enough to enable you to get a socket on it with less trouble. A
cursory inspection of this author’s engine indicates you certainly wouldn’t want to go any longer than 15mm -- you’d
start interfering with the bottom of the intake manifold. There is a spot at each end of each manifold where a bolt hole
boss is provided (holds fuel pressure regulator at the front, other stuff at rear) and it might actually help to grind away a
63
bit at the bottom of this boss. No reason not to, although it might not be that helpful either. The bigger problem is with
the center runner of both the front three and the rear three runners on each bank, which go right over a cam cover bolt.
Any taller than 15mm would most assuredly cause interference here.
If you can avoid interference, having the heads up higher might actually make it possible to retorque these bolts without
pulling the manifolds off! It wouldn’t be easy by any stretch, but it might be possible.
With the socket head cap screws, the author used split ring lock washers and flat washers. As noted on page 27, flat
washers are always recommended when a bolt head or nut sits on aluminum. (Note: TSB 12-35 specifically prohibits
the use of washers under the special Jaguar bolts in this location. Put that down as a fundamental disagreement between
their engineers and this engineer -- and note that this engineer’s cam cover bolts haven’t come loose and the gaskets
don’t leak, claims which several other owners report cannot be made about the official Jaguar assembly procedure.)
This author found some very suitable flat washers on a bubble card in a Wal-Mart: They are size 12, also known as
3/16”. If you ask for 1/4” flat washers, you get washers that fit so loosely on the screw that it looks like a socket head
might pull through the hole! Also, the OD of the standard 1/4” washers are bigger than the flat area on the cam covers,
so you’d have to cut them down to get them in. Conversely, these #12 washers fit perfectly on a 1/4” bolt and are the
correct OD for the cam cover flats. Make sure you find cheap #12 washers; better quality ones might have closer
tolerances and not fit a 1/4” bolt.
Should you use lock washers? This author thinks so; after all, they can’t hurt. Craig Sawyers replaced his cam cover
gaskets with new paper gaskets, and they shortly began to leak; when he went back in there, he found the bolts loose.
Why? Well, maybe it’s because the paper gaskets compress and relax the tension on the bolts, and therefore switching
to the Gortex sandwich gasket is the fix; or it may be because these bolts are simply too short to stay tight without lock
washers (see page 27) or some other retention scheme. The situation is rife with opinions, but note that it’s really hard
to retorque these fasteners without removing the intake manifolds. This is not a place to save money or weight; if it
might help avoid problems, do it.
You can buy enough flat washers and lock washers to do this job for less than two bucks total.
Another type washer that will work on the cam covers is the 1/4” spiral groove washer used in a couple other places on
the V12 -- if you can find a supply of them. These washers serve as both a flat washer and lock washer in one. Also, the
6mm wavy spring washers mentioned on page 27 as a substitute for the spiral groove washers will work nicely.
There is one other benefit to going with longer screws with spacers. Longer screws have more “stretch” when tightened
to a particular torque, and therefore hold tension better and are less likely to vibrate loose. It might still be a good idea
to include lock washers, but providing yet another scheme to help keep tension on those cam cover gaskets can’t hurt.
The spacers might omit the need for flat washers, depending on the wall thickness of the spacers and therefore how well
they distribute load onto the aluminum face.
As always, be sure to use anti-seize compound on the threads when assembling.
TSB 12-35 specifies that the cam cover bolts be torqued to 9.5-11.5 N-m (7-8.5 ft-lb). They didn’t mention whether
this was for the later metric bolts or the earlier SAE bolts, but hopefully it won’t make much difference. It’s also
probably a good spec whether you’re using their special bolts or some of the generic substitutes described above. It’s
not really a place where torque is critical, however; just tightening until they feel tight should be good enough.
TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER: To replace the tensioner requires removal of the timing cover which would put this
section under “Engine Work -- Front”. However, the problems occur when retracting the tensioner, which is usually
done when removing the cams or the heads -- so it’s here in the “Engine Work -- Top” section.
There are few design features of the Jaguar V12 as poorly conceived as the material the arch of the timing chain
tensioner is made of. If you manage, on your first try, to retract the tensioner and reengage it successfully without
breaking this arch, you should consider yourself lucky. The arch apparently works well when new but gets brittle with
age or heat, and an old one can be broken very easily. Michael Neal, who works on Jaguars every day, says “I’ve
become so paranoid of old tensioners, my failure rate has been very high as of late. I’m not too surprised though, most
of the cars have been approaching ten years old. I’ve been as careful as possible, knowing exactly what I was doing, and
64
have watched the damn thing crack on one of the pivots.” Obviously, if you have the timing cover off for other reasons
and the tensioner is intact but has a few years on it, it may be advisable to replace it anyway.
The problems may have to do with the V12’s proclivity towards overheating. Craig Sawyers says, “The V12 chain
tensioner is, according to the technical article that was published when the V12 was launched in the early '70s, made
from molydisulphide-loaded nylon. Just looking up the spec for something else, I found that Nylatron GS is just such a
material. All the characteristics that are listed makes this a sensible choice for the tensioner blade, apart from a
continuous working temperature of 100°C maximum, with maximum non-continuous temp of 145°C.
“I'll wager that embrittlement of the blade is due to a combination of the oil environment and overheating. I have only
the evidence of one piece of information: My engine had never overheated, and the blade, although grooved where the
chain had worn it, was still flexible after 160,000 miles.”
Other engines have arched timing chain tensioners in which the arch itself is made of spring steel. It would seem a
simple matter to design a replacement arch for the Jaguar V12 tensioner made of spring steel, thereby eliminating the
fracture problems permanently; if noise or wear is a concern, the spring steel arch could be faced with Teflon or some
such. However, despite more than two decades of trouble with this piece of crap, apparently neither Jaguar nor any
aftermarket companies have opted to offer an improved part.
You can see what this tensioner looks like at
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/tensioner.html
For those without access to the www I will attempt a description of the tensioner, since it is well hidden and its
configuration may not be apparent until it is too late. Basically, the tensioner consists of a plastic arch that the timing
chain slides over top of on its way from the crankshaft sprocket to the right side cam sprocket. This is the slack side of
the chain, so it’s the proper place to put the tensioner. Between the legs of this arch is a spring that pulls the legs
together, making the arch steeper and taller and therefore taking up slack in the chain. The end of the arch nearest the
crankshaft is located by a pin on the block, while the end near the cam sprocket has a steel foot attached that is free to
slide up and down on the inside of the housing as the arch changes shape.
Alongside the spring is a latching assembly that consists of a rod that is attached near the pinned end of the arch and
passes through a hole in a rocking latch attached to the steel foot on the other end of the arch. The aforementioned
spring is actually attached to this rocking latch, slightly off center, so that it not only applies tension to the chain but also
causes the latch to rock in the CW direction (as viewed from the front of the car facing rearward). This assembly serves
two purposes: First, the rod going through the hole in the rocking latch makes a very effective one-way lock; the rod
can easily slide in the direction that allows the tensioner to take up slack, but it cannot back up and allow more slack.
Second, when the mechanic has manually retracted the tensioner, a step at the end of the rod provides a catch for
holding the tensioner in retracted mode while working on the car.
When removing the camshafts or the heads, the tension on the chain must be disengaged. However, the chain is not
removed; the sprockets are simply unbolted from the camshafts and supported in place by special brackets provided for
the purpose. The heads are removed in this state, leaving the chain and sprockets hanging there in mid-air.
Before proceeding, please reread the warning on having the cam covers off on page 59. Also, don’t do anything until
you’ve read through this entire section and the following section on disaster avoidance and understood them.
To retract the tensioner requires a pair of tools collectively known as Jaguar tool JD.50. One tool is inserted from the
top of the engine where the cam cover has been removed, underneath the cam sprocket, and hooks onto a hole in the
steel foot at the top end of the tensioner; this tool is for pulling the tensioner back to the disengaged position, and has a
handle shaped to rest against the top of the sprocket for leverage. The other tool is inserted through an access hole in
the front of the timing cover and is used to manipulate the rocking latch. The rocking latch has a slot in it, 3/16” wide
by a little over 1/2” long and roughly parallel to the chain line, for inserting this tool.
Improvising both tools is fairly easy. For the first tool, a sturdy hook is required; a standard battery hold-down bolt may
be a good place to start, but you’ll need to trim the hook as shown in Error: Reference source not found in order for it
to fit the hole in the tensioner properly. Robert Louis Woodling says, “I used a long hanger for a peg board...” Adding
a lever that rests on top of the sprocket isn’t too hard, you can even make it out of wood; just drill a 1/2” hole near the
65
center of a 1” x 2” board about a foot long, insert the battery hold-down bolt through it, and put a fender washer and a
wing nut on the end. The hole needs to be about 1/2” to allow the battery hold-down bolt to tilt relative to the board.
Alternatively, Thomas E. Alberts says “I tried the lever style tool like the manuals show and didn’t like it much. I made
one with a long 3/8” bolt (~12in) and a steel tube (~1.5in dia). I formed a hook by grinding away most of the bolt head,
padded one end of the tube and put it against the valve cover mating surface and with a washer and a nut on the
threaded end and the bolt running through the tube and into the chain tensioner, I was able to gently apply the required
tension. It worked well.”
For the rocking latch tool, it appears that a common screwdriver may be used if you can get it in there. A better idea
may be a standard “brake tool”, the lever used to turn the star wheel on self-adjusting drum brakes. You might also
check to see what you have in tire irons, especially those intended for bicycles. And of course, one of those right-angle
screwdrivers might work, especially if you can find a large one. You should note, however, that while these items may
get the job done, none of them are likely to work smoothly enough for you to get a good idea of what you are doing to
that tensioner by feel.
You can easily make a more suitable tool: Buy a piece of strip steel 1/8” thick x 1/2” wide (commonly available at
hardware stores), and cut off a piece about 7” long. Then, about 2” from one end, make a sharp bend of something less
than 90 degrees -- see Figure 4. Then cut away one side of the tool -- the side that will be pointed toward the cam cover
opening -- about 3/16” as shown. This is because as you retract the tensioner, the latch moves upward with it and this
side of the tool will contact the edge of the access hole. This contact confuses the “feel” and can leave you wondering if
the tensioner is fully retracted or not.
66
Figure 4: Improvised JD.50 Timing Chain Tensioner Release Tool
Of course, you could avoid having to cut away the side of the lever by simply making it out of 3/8” wide strip steel to
begin with. However, this is not recommended. The portion of the rocking latch above the slot is not very thick, so
having a lever a full 1/2” wide to insert in the slot ensures that the tool contacts the rocking latch near the ends of the
slot. If a narrower tool is used, applying torque to the lever can cause one edge of the tool to push up on this thin
portion of the rocking latch near the center of the span rather than near the edge, greatly increasing the chances of
actually breaking the rocking latch. Breaking this portion off doesn’t really affect the normal operation of the latch, but
it will make it even harder to release, and if that broken portion falls down into the crankcase you’re gonna be upset
about it.
The other feature shown in Figure 4 is a small pin sticking 1/8” up from the surface of the lever. The purpose of this
little pin is to prevent insertion of the tool farther than 1/4” into the rocking latch, where it may get involved with other
parts. A tiny roll pin could be used here, or perhaps a small screw. You can even omit this feature, if you are careful not
to jam that lever in farther than it needs to go.
Bob Gallivan reports: “The drum brake adjusting spoon is the right way to go, just under 1/2" wide, cheap & easy to
drill a hole in for the roll pin stop.”
The actual operation of disengaging the tensioner requires using both tools simultaneously. To begin with, I suggest
using the latch tool by itself to try rocking the latch CCW just to get the feel of it. It will not rock very far, but it
67
shouldn’t take too much force to rock it, and you should be able to feel the spring. Old tensioners always seem to have
bent or damaged rods or latches, and it’s difficult to imagine how the damage occurs other than people applying great
force to this rocking action. You should also note that, if everything is working properly, rocking this latch alone will
have no discernible effect -- no clicks, pops, clangs, or anything else.
Don’t bother testing the other tool by itself. Trust me, you won’t be able to move the tensioner toward the retracted
position without simultaneously rocking the latch CCW -- unless, of course, the tensioner is already broken.
Now, to actually retract the tensioner: First, rock the latch CCW and hold it rocked; it doesn’t need to be held hard
CCW, just so that it is prevented from returning to the CW position. With the latch so held, pull up on the retracting
tool; you should feel it smoothly moving against a fairly stiff spring tension. In order to lock the tensioner in the
retracted position, you will need to pull as far as it will go. At this point, it should suddenly become possible to rock the
latch a bit farther in the CCW direction. While holding the latch firmly in this full CCW position, carefully release your
pull; it should lock in that position. Once it does, you can rest assured it won’t move by itself; you can go on and do
other things.
When it comes time to reengage the tensioner, do not simply trip the latch to restore the tension; the tensioner will
shatter like a dried twig, and you will need several bottles of high-octane elixir to get over it (see the section on timing
cover removal on page 93). Use the special tools to gradually release the tensioner into its normal position. Pull on the
tensioner to remove tension from the latch itself, and use the rocking tool to hold the latch near the center of a rock -not fully CCW nor fully CW, sorta halfway in the middle. While holding the latch mid-rock (and perhaps rocking it back
and forth a little), gradually release the pull; it may take a couple tries before the latch is successfully released and the
tensioner starts moving. Once it does, you may quit fiddling with the rocker altogether, it’ll take care of itself, but
continue to use the puller tool to gradually allow the tensioner to assume its final position.
TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER -- DISASTER AVOIDANCE: Jaguar designed the latch so that the tensioner must be
retracted as far as it can possibly go before it can be locked in the disengaged position. This bends the plastic arch,
normally fairly curved, into a nearly straight shape -- and therefore stresses it far beyond what it normally sees. Even if it
doesn’t break immediately, this stress may start small cracks that cause the tensioner to break shortly after reassembly.
Simple solution: Don’t retract the tensioner! When it comes time to take the sprockets off the camshafts, just do so and
set them on the holders -- allowing the tensioner to take up the slack in the chain. During reassembly, simply use the
latch release tool to hold the latch CCW as you pull the sprockets back up into position on the camshafts. This method
has been tried and works fine.
All this means you will only need one of the two tools shown in Error: Reference source not found -- and since you
won’t ever get near the fully-retracted position, you won’t need to grind the side off the lever.
It is of utmost importance that the latch on the tensioner be rocked CCW in order to allow the tensioner to release the
tension it took up during disassembly. In fact, it’d probably be a good idea to rock that latch on at least two separate
occasions during reassembly. First, obviously, it should be rocked during the reinstallation of each sprocket. Finally,
after the distributor has been reinstalled and there’s no more need to leave the crank in a particular position, the latch
should be held in the CCW position as the crank is turned by hand through a complete turn or two.
Failing to do this reportedly results in a whirring sound from up front when the engine is started. Amazingly, it
apparently does not destroy the tensioner; just realize what you forgot, go back and rock that latch once, it goes “pop”
as the excessive tension on the chain is released, and all is well. Craig Sawyers says, “Precisely what happened to me a
year ago. Saga was that during replacement of skinny washers at oil feed, I stripped the thread in the back to the tappet
block. Tore it off to get an insert put in, and when I got the thing back together there was a worrying whirring noise
from the front of the engine related to the revs. Aargh. But - pulled the rubber plug and stuck a screwdriver in (using a
pice of mirror and a flashlight to see exactly what was going on) and "pop" went the tensioner. All was A-OK after that.
Now during the reassembly process I could've sworn that I'd released it -but obviously not enough.”
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL: The V12 has a cute little bracket just forward of the camshaft sprockets that
68
holds the sprockets (and timing chain) in place during removal of the heads or camshafts. The sprocket hubs have little
stubs to sit on these brackets, and grooves for a clip to secure the sprocket on the bracket.
The clip, also known as tool JD.40, can obviously be improvised with sheet metal or even a normal 1/4” E-clip, perhaps
with a 5/16” flat washer behind it. Note: The size of an E-clip is the size of the shaft it typically fits, not the diameter at
the bottom of the groove it fits in. The diameter at the bottom of an E-clip groove on a 1/4” shaft is about 3/16”, so
that’s the ID of a 1/4” E-clip. The stubs on the front of the cam sprockets are 5/16” in diameter, but they have
exceptionally deep grooves and the OD at the bottom of the groove is about 3/16”, so 1/4” is the correct E-clip size.
Note that if you purchase a “head set” -- a set of gaskets intended to include everything you need when you take the
heads off -- the set will not include the locking plates for the cam sprocket bolts, C33917. You will need four new ones,
so make sure to order them at the same time.
CAMSHAFT TIMING: The repair manual describes how to adjust the camshaft timing; this is just some clarification.
To adjust the camshaft timing, obviously the chain can be moved over one tooth on the sprocket -- an extremely coarse
adjustment. The camshaft sprockets have a splined inner hub that contains the four mounting holes. A circlip can be
removed, allowing the separation of the inner hub from the sprocket, and the hub can be moved over one spline -- a
fairly fine adjustment. However, the hub has an odd number of splines, so rotating the hub 90°, 180°, or 270° will
effectively relocate the four bolt holes in 1/4-spline increments -- an extremely fine adjustment.
The engine is designed so that the crankshaft and the camshaft can be located where desired, the timing chain put in
place and the tensioner activated, and then the mechanic can fiddle around with the sprocket hubs until the bolt holes line
up. Jaguar provides an alignment notch on each camshaft and a special tool for setting the camshaft position. This
special tool, C3993, costs under $20 and is not easily improvised. It is recommended that anyone who has an engine
apart far enough to use one have it on hand.
If the engine in question has a few miles on it, it may even be a good idea to go through the procedure of setting the
camshaft timing while there. Wear in the timing chain will cause the camshaft timing to gradually move. What’s worse,
the timing of the right camshaft will move more than the left.
It is very important that you check the condition of the damper before relying upon it to set camshaft timing -- especially
if it’s a later car with the Bosch alternator, which tend to shear the damper as mentioned on page 91. If the damper
shears while running it may squeal or affect battery charging but otherwise isn’t too serious, but if you rely on the marks
to time the camshafts and the marks are wrong due to a sheared damper you may crunch pistons against valves when
you hit the starter.
TAPPET BLOCK REMOVAL: Sections 12.13.29 and 12.13.30 of the ROM describe how to remove the tappet
blocks, and both procedures end with “Lift off tappet blocks carefully, retrieve tappets and valve adjusting pads.” The
Haynes manual provides a similar procedure. Both make it clear that the tappets must be reinstalled in the same
locations they came out of, but if you yank that tappet block as described I dunno how you’ll avoid having tappets
everywhere. If you have a decent magnet on hand, it might be a better idea to use it to remove the tappets before
unbolting the tappet block from the head. If you don’t have a magnet, you might want to at least use a magic marker to
mark the tappets before disassembly.
Sidetrack: If you need some really good magnets, tear apart a scrapped computer hard drive.
When reinstalling the tappet block, the manuals say you should tighten the bolts and nuts in order, but don’t specify a
torque. Later on, you’ll be installing the bearing caps on the camshaft, and there is a max torque value specified there -9 lbf.ft. or 1,24 kgf.m. Since the nuts are the same size and all actually hold the tappet block to the head, it might make
sense to tighten all of these nuts to the same specified torque. However, the fact that the cam bearing cap torque spec is
a max rather than a range, plus that it’s rather low for a 5/16” nut, indicate that this value is specified in order to prevent
distortion to the soft aluminum bearing caps and probably isn’t valid for the other tappet block fasteners. Hence, it may
make more sense to use torque values specified for other typical 5/16” UNF nuts -- typically 11-13 lbf.ft. or 1,52-1,80
kgf.m. Later, while torquing down the cam bearing caps, you might wanna go back and retorque these other nuts and
69
screws.
The upper row of fasteners on the tappet block are different, though. If the car is a pre-‘84, they are a coarse thread
rather than a fine thread, so the torque values aren’t necessarily equal. The objective should be to achieve the same bolt
tension, but the difference in threads means it will take a different torque to achieve the same tension. Judging from
other similar applications, it appears that coarse thread fasteners should be tightened to a slightly higher torque than fine
thread, so torquing these to perhaps 12-15 lbf.ft would be in order.
They are also socket head cap screws, meaning that it requires an Allen wrench to tighten or loosen them. Loosening is
no problem, but tightening to a specified torque with an Allen wrench is tricky since you can’t put your torque wrench
on it. There are a handful of options, though. First and most properly, you can find a tool that looks like a short hex
key built into a socket so it can be attached directly to a ratchet or torque wrench. These are fairly common, but the size
needed here -- 7/32” -- is not quite so common. Sometimes you need to buy an entire set of these tools to get the one
you need, and you are hereby advised that many such sets don’t have the one you need! Be sure to check before buying.
Discount Auto Parts sells a pack of four such tools on a card labelled “Brake Caliper Hex Bit Set” by Performance Tool,
and one of the four is the 7/32” you need. These are really heavy-duty to fit 3/8” drive ratchets (most of these type tools
fit 1/4” drive ratchets) and have an unconditional lifetime warranty.
Another option is to check for bits for electric screwdrivers. These bits are 1/4” hex shafts about 2” long to fit in the
chuck of an electric screwdriver or drill, and there are all kinds of tips to drive almost anything. If you can find a bit with
a 7/32” hex tip on it, you can put it into the head of the bolt and drive it with a torque wrench connected to a 1/4”
socket. Unfortunately, finding this particular type bit may prove a little difficult.
A third possibility is to cut a piece off the end of your 7/32” Allen wrench, stick it in the bolt head, and drive it with a
torque wrench connected to a 7/32” socket. This makes for a really flimsy assemblage of tools, but it should work OK.
Don’t drop that little hex piece!
From ’84 on, the socket head cap screws are metric and require a 6mm Allen wrench. It might actually be easier to find
a 6mm hex driver that will attach to a torque wrench than a 7/32”, but if not the above ideas will work -- just change the
sizes accordingly. Sam Lysinger reports that you can get a 6mm Allen drive socket from Sears or Snap-On, either
individually or in sets.
These cap screws don’t have any lock washers under the heads, since a lock washer wouldn’t fit down in the hole. This
doesn’t seem to pose a problem, however; there are no reports of these bolts backing out.
Good luck torquing the bearing cap nuts to 9 lbf.ft. with a 150 lbf.ft. torque wrench, which is the only thing available at
most auto parts stores. J. C. Whitney (page 694) offers a torque wrench with a 0-600 in.-lbs. (0-691 cm-kgs.) range,
catalog number 15xx01148. Lysinger reports that NAPA offers four different models of torque wrenches with a 20-150
in-lbs. range ranging from cheap junk to premium, and that Sears also carrys one.
TAPPET BLOCK SEALING: There is no gasket between the tappet block and the head. Although this joint must be
sealed to prevent oil leaks, perhaps Jaguar felt that the camshaft support and the valve clearances would not be secure
enough with a gasket underneath the whole assembly.
So, how do we seal it? The ©1975 ROM, sections 12.13.29 and 12.13.30, says “Smear mating surfaces of tappet block
and cylinder head with Hylomar.” Michael Neal says, “Hylomar is a sealant that does not harden over time. It is still
readily available and is blue in color. It is commonly used to seal the liners into the V12 motor and the cam towers to
the heads. I’ve stopped using it to seal the cam towers because a good blast of carb cleaner or an aggressive steam
cleaning can dislodge it and cause an oil leak that leaks directly onto the exhaust manifolds. Not only does an oil leak
like this make a mess but it also causes the exhaust manifold gaskets to erode.” Note: See page 102 regarding the liner
sealing.
The Haynes manual merely says to use “jointing compound”, perhaps recognizing the shortcomings of Hylomar for this
application. According to Craig Sawyers, his repair manual (Jaguar SIII Service Manual, AKM 9006 Ed 5, ©1988)
“...says to use Loctite 573. I used 574, which the Loctite website (www.loctite.com) has as practically the same stuff.
TWR Jaguar in Oxford (Tom Walkinshaw's dealership, who manufactured the XJ220. I believe they know a thing or
70
two about Jags) use 574.”
A call to Loctite (1-888-LOCTITE or +1-203-571-5100) and a discussion with a tech rep revealed the following: First
off, Hylomar (which is also made by Loctite, under license from Marston Bentley Ltd.) is intended as a gasket dressing,
not to be used without a gasket at all, and is not recommended for this application. As Sawyers says, either 573 or 574
is suitable; the chief difference is in difficulty of disassembly, since 574 will glue the parts together pretty well while 573
is designed to be easier to get apart.
573 is bright flourescent green and 574 is orange -- the stuff itself, not the tube it comes in. Loctite products all seem to
come in red tubes.
Sawyers reports that you’ll need about 50ml to do both banks. 573 in a 50ml tube is Loctite part number 21455 and
574 in a 50ml tube is part number 24018. Unfortunately, neither 573 or 574 is commonly sold in auto parts stores.
Finding it will normally entail calling Loctite at the above number and getting the name and number of a local distributor;
Loctite will not sell it direct. Neither of the substances is cheap, but worse yet you may end up facing a minimum order
requirement of 10 tubes or some such, so you might want to talk your local Jag club into placing an order for the group.
Now, according to Neal, apparently Jaguar has changed its mind again about what to use on the tappet block/head joint
-- perhaps because Loctite 573 and 574 are too difficult to find. “I'm more partial to Loctite 518 which, by the way, is
red. Loctite 518 is a metal to metal sealer and dries to a rubbery texture. It is what Jaguar now recommends for sealing
the cam towers to the heads. Most auto parts stores carry it, just get the big tube.”
Joe Bialy says, “I have a copy of "Loctite Worldwide Design Handbook" 1996/97 edition. 518, 573, and 574 are all
from the same family of gasketing materials. 573 cures slow and fills gaps up to 0.2mm. 518 has moderate cure time,
fills gaps to 0.5mm. 574 is fast curing, good for 0.5mm gaps. They are intended primarily for structurally rigid close
fitting flanges. Being anaerobic, they only cure between the flange faces. Excess material is dissolved in "most fluids"
thus flushed away. "Passages or channels will not be blocked."
“The book makes no mention of Hylomar at all.” Interesting, since Loctite manufactures Hylomar under license.
“I also saw a Jag tech bulletin (#12-51) that now specifies Loctite #518 for the tappet block-to-head joint. It was dated
8/94.”
“Also according to their book for 510 type gasket compounds (509, 510, 518, 573, and 574): "Anaerobics cure rapidly
between metal surfaces...To ensure gasketting success, all fasteners must be torqued to specification immediately (<3
minutes) after assembly". I dunno how you’d torque any assembly to spec within three minutes, especially one with as
many fasteners as the tappet block-to-head joint, especially if you include the cam bearing caps in that spec.
Nevertheless, the substances do seem to provide a good seal.
Steve Cranswick suggests Loctite 5900, as described on page 40. I know, too many recommendations, but the point is:
just about any Loctite 500-series product will probably work here. What won’t work here is Hylomar, which is what is
recommended in the early ROM’s and was probably used at the factory on early cars.
Whatever sealant you end up using, think a little bit before applying it. There is no need to smear it all over everywhere,
and in fact that type of application is not recommended because it can result in air bubbles. Keeping the bead thin might
also help you get it compressed properly with the first few bolts before the sealant sets up. You also don’t want to get
any inside the tappet guides. The instructions on the tube of 573 say to apply a bead to one part only, which makes it
easier to apply than Hylomar; trying to “smear” it onto the head itself would be tricky since all those studs are in the
way. Basically, you need to apply one continuous bead of sealant completely around the edge of the tappet block,
making sure the bead pattern is such that it will always contact a mating surface on the head. Some flat areas on the
tappet block correspond to gaping holes on the head, so a random guess is not acceptable; make very sure you are
applying the bead in the correct place. Pay special attention to the area of the inside corners right behind the cam
sprockets, where the forwardmost cam bearing studs are located; each side of the tappet block requires a slightly
different treatment, and the left bank is a bit different than the right.
Now, think a little more before applying the sealant. Note that the bead should be routed inside of each of the 10 holes
(one row of 6 plus the 4 surrounding the sprocket) for the studs on which the nuts are located outside the cam cover.
Unfortunately, depending on the casting tolerances of your particular tappet block, the amount of surface area just inside
71
the 6 holes may be tiny indeed; you will need to exercise considerable care to make sure that particular location seals
properly when assembled. Also note that the bead must be located outside of the other 20 holes, otherwise oil might get
under a nut, run down a stud and leak out -- a serious potential on the studs that hold the cam bearing caps, since oil is
being fed under pressure between those parts.
If all that wasn’t perfectly clear, I have provided an illustration showing where that bead of sealant should be located; see
Figure 5.
72
Figure 5: Sealing the Tappet Block
73
If you have a pre-’84 car with 5/16” studs, the 4 studs surrounding the cam sprocket have been sealed with cap nuts and
copper washers. However, if the bead of sealant is applied to the tappet block correctly inward of these studs and the
cam cover gasket does its job, there will be nothing within these stud holes to leak. From ’84 on, these 4 studs are
metric and use normal nuts and spiral groove washers with no attempt at sealing the studs, so they must have figured out
it wasn’t necessary.
VALVE CLEARANCES: In order to adjust the valve clearances, you must tear a considerable amount of hardware off
the top of the engine. Also, since adjustment is via shims, the measurements must be made, the assembly torn apart and
the shims removed and replaced, and the gaps checked again after reassembly. The shims themselves cost about $3
each. Having a dealer perform this work reportedly costs over $600, and is probably a reasonable charge considering
the number of hours that will be required. Before doing the work yourself, see the tip on clearing off the top of the
engine on page 59.
The wear rate on this valvetrain is slow, so this adjustment doesn’t need to be done very often. However, when they do
need adjustment, it’s likely because the clearances have closed up! Wear between cam lobes and tappets or between
tappets and valve stems causes the gaps to open up while wear between valves and seats causes gaps to close, and
apparently the latter is predominant in this engine. This means that there won’t be an annoying ticking to tell you that
the valves need adjusting.
If you wish to check clearances, it is recommended that you obtain a set of feeler gauges that has a bend in the blades.
You can’t get a straight blade in there, but sets are available wherein the entire set of gauges and the holder they come in
are bent about 45º in the middle.
A minor tip: The valve adjusting pads come in sizes varying in .001” increments and (the genuine Jaguar parts anyway)
indicated by a letter etched on one side of the pad. As a favor to the next guy who’ll be working on this engine, install
the pads with the letter facing outward (toward the tappet). Years later, the letter will still be legible. If installed with
the letter facing the end of the valve, it will be difficult or impossible to decipher the letter later on.
Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering (and formerly with Jaguar) says, “we knew back in the 1970s that running with the
exhaust valve clearances set at 0.016” gives a slight but measurable gain in mid-range torque and reduced fuel
consumption. Noise is not excessive at this setting because the actual running clearance closes up with the higher
temperature of the exhaust valves compared to the inlets which must be set as normal.
“Anyone wishing to measure a V12 cam, as I have done in the past, will find that the timing quoted for the H.E. occurs
at 0.010” lift whilst the timing at the point at which 0.012” clearance is taken up is an almost unbelievable 36,78/78,36.
The difference in overlap between 0.013” and 0.016” clearances is about 12 degrees so the need to avoid tight
clearances will be obvious and although the extra lift may be insignificant it can profoundly effect the HC emissions
generated, quite apart from the modest effect on torque. In my view the best compromise regarding noise and
performance is to aim for 0.013” for inlets and 0.015-0.016” for exhaust which, because of greater expansion of the
exhaust valve stem, results in a similar true running clearance for both.
“...If mid-range torque could be improved by just opening up the clearances, why did the factory not do it in production?
Well maybe they did (I am not prepared to be more positive than that) - but you will not find any manual telling you so
because the reason for doing it would have been to reduce HC emissions at a critical time, at the risk of introducing
more tappet noise problems.”
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL: First, a bit of clarification: It is possible to remove each head with the camshaft and
tappet block in place, and this may make sense if the reason for disassembly is farther down. This is the procedure
outlined in both the ROM and the Haynes manual. On the other hand, if you plan to work on the tappets or valves
anyway, you might choose to remove the camshaft and tappet block before removing the head. It makes the head
lighter for lifting, and it makes it safer to set down -- there won’t be any valves sticking out the bottom.
The following are a few comments/corrections to the ©1975 ROM, Sections 12.29.11 and 12.29.12, along with
corresponding sections of the Haynes manual:
74
In Section 12.29.11, which is about pulling the B bank head, step 19 deals with moving the transmission dipstick tube
outta the way. The dipstick for the BW tranny is on the B side, but on the cars with the GM400 the dipstick is over on
the A side, so this step needs to be moved to Section 12.29.12. The same thing might be said of step 14 in Chapter 1,
Section 19 of the Haynes manual -- that it should be moved to Section 20 -- but if you have a later car, you should
probably be following the procedures outlined in Chapter 13, Section 3 anyway.
In Section 12.29.12, which is about pulling the A bank head, step 5 says to remove the auxiliary air valve. The AAV is
on the B side, and doesn’t need removal for working on the A head only. The same correction applies to Chapter 1,
Section 20, step 5 in the Haynes manual.
Steps 8 and 12 in section 12.29.11 and steps 10 and 14 in section 12.29.12 instruct you to position the engine at TDC
on cylinder 1A (by using the cam aligning tool on the notches in the camshafts) and then unbolting the sprockets from
the camshafts. You will find this job goes easier if beforehand you rotate the crank one full revolution from that position
(TDC on cylinder 6A, notches on cams pointing downward towards the head) and pull two bolts and one locking plate
off of each sprocket. They’re easier to get to when pointing up than when pointing down. Step 7 of Section 12.13.01
and step 6 of Chapter 1, Section 10 of the Haynes manual hint in this direction without making it as clear as they might.
Both manuals talk about removing heat shields, but beyond the big obvious one on each side don't really clarify what
they're talking about. In all probability they're referring to the heat shield on the downpipe on the LH side as well as the
heat shields around the boots on the power steering rack. The heat shields on the rack need to be removed in order to
deal with the downpipes.
Neither manual even mentions the front exhaust manifolds. It’s probably a matter of choice; they can either come off
with the head or separately. If left attached to the head, they provide a nice handle for grabbing, but they do make the
assembly heavier to lift.
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL -- ENGINE IN CAR: The conundrum facing anyone pulling the heads with the
engine in the car is the fact that the rear exhaust manifold on each side is too close to a portion of the chassis. If the
head is slid up the studs with the rear manifold still bolted to it, it will hit the chassis long before the head clears the
studs. This problem can be addressed in two ways: 1) the rear manifolds can be removed from the head first; or 2) the
motor mounts can be disconnected and the engine moved around until the manifolds clear the chassis as the head comes
off. Sections 12.29.11 and 12.29.12 of the ROM describe the first option. Section 12.29.12 for the A bank head also
describes pulling the starter, which is probably entirely to gain access to the lower nuts on the rear exhaust manifold on
that side; if the head is removed with the rear exhaust manifold attached, the starter does not need to be removed.
If you choose the path of removing the manifolds first, you’ll run into the same problem: the chassis is too close. The
manifold won’t come over its own studs without hitting the chassis first. Of course, sections 30.15.10 and 30.15.11 of
the ROM just list the step-by-step instructions as though each step is easily completed. After all the fun you’ll have
getting a wrench on the nuts on the bottom side of the manifolds, you’ll be just tickled pink to find that you have to undo
the motor mounts and tilt the engine anyway.
This manifold removal problem also has two possible solutions: A) move the engine on its mounts again; or B) unscrew
the studs so the manifold can come out vertically without having to clear the studs. Of course, unscrewing the nuts is
hard enough, unscrewing the studs is likely to be seriously difficult. Here’s an idea: Remove all the nuts first, then back
the manifold up against the chassis so you have a gap between the manifold and the head. Using a thin pair of pliers,
reach between the gap and unscrew the top three studs and then the bottom three studs. This method has the advantage
that you will be gripping the studs near the middle and therefore not boogering up the threads where they’re actually
used. Note that two of the studs on the bottom of each rear exhaust manifold cannot come out through the manifold;
they will either have to be removed with the manifold or the manifold will have to be repositioned -- perhaps downward,
perhaps tilted -- to get those studs out. All the while, keep in mind that you will have to put this manifold back on
somehow.
Clearly, removing the heads by leaving the manifolds on the heads and tilting the engine has its benefits. For one thing,
you can leave the starter alone, there’s no reason to mess with it. This author got his heads off by unbolting the motor
mount on one side, putting a jack under the front of the engine and jacking, causing the engine to rise and tilt. After one
75
head came off, the engine was lowered, the mount reconnected, the other mount unbolted, and the engine jacked back
up so it tilted the other way to remove the other head.
David Johnson says, “It was easier for me to remove both motor mounts and lower the engine to get enough clearance.”
Johnson goes on to say that, even though he pulled the heads with the manifolds still attached, he went the other way on
reassembly. “I did that because I couldn't get 2 nuts off the bottom because some &^%%$ had galled up the threads and
the nut wouldn't come off, and the stud was trapped. Now that I replaced the studs with new, and with the ever-present
anti-seize it was much easier to put it on after.”
Whatever method is used to deal with the exhaust manifolds, make sure to take enough notes to be able to reinstall the
heads and reassemble the car.
Tip: If the tappet block is off, you may find it helpful to unscrew and remove the rear pair of cam bearing cap studs to
ease clearing things while getting the head in and out of the engine compartment.
STUCK HEADS: When you actually get to pulling the head off, if it’s never been off before you’ll probably find it
stuck. In general, being stuck means one of two things: The head and block are glued together at the gasket, or the
studs are stuck in the holes. The difference becomes evident when you actually get it loose: If it was stuck at the
gasket, then once it’s broken loose it slides easily off the rest of the way off the studs. This is typically not the case with
the V12 heads, which have metal-faced gaskets that don’t stick much, but the crud really builds up around the studs
(several of which are immersed in coolant) and makes it difficult to get the head off every bit of the way. You might get
it an inch up and still be having difficulty moving it.
This author will express an opinion here: The stuff plugging the openings around the studs is very likely the Barrs Leaks
that Jaguar recommends putting in the coolant. Heads that have been off before and never exposed to Barrs Leaks again
typically come right off without any more effort than lifting by hand. Of course, rust particles or other deposits in the
coolant might also contribute to the jamming, but careful maintenance of the coolant seems to avoid those problems.
Loren Lingren sends this tip: “With all the nuts removed, try to wiggle the end of each stud by hand. The stuck ones
will not move. Begin soaking each stud with a good penetrating oil. Get several 7/16 SAE nuts (Don’t use the head
nuts unless you have extras) and an air hammer with a tie rod tool attachment. The idea is to vibrate the studs with the
air hammer, protecting the threads with the disposable nuts. Caution must be used not to bend the studs or gouge the
head surface. Continue to apply penetrant as work is done. As the studs loosen, the penetrant will disappear down
between the head and stud. I have used this procedure successfully for several years in removing even the most stubborn
heads, 6 or 12 cyl, without any expensive side effects.”
Other substances suggested for loosening the crud in the stud holes include oven cleaner, alloy wheel cleaner,
phosphoric acid, Nitromors, lemon juice, and Coca-Cola. Dr. Karsten Eller, chemist, says to forget about the oven
cleaner: “Oven cleaner is mainly caustic soda, i. e. NaOH. The sodium hydroxide attacks the protective alumina coating
on the aluminium and also dissolves aluminium metal:
2 Al + 2 NaOH + 6 H2O = 2 Na[Al(OH)4] + 3 H2
“Use of oven cleaner is therefore strongly dissuaded from.”
Eller says acid will be fine, however. Mike Morrin says, “Someone suggested using phosphoric acid (rust killer) as it
dissolves the rust without damaging the aluminium. He also suggested moulding little dams in plasticine to hold the stuff
around the studs.”
Regarding the use of Coke, Craig Sawyers says, “Now here's an interesting connection. Coke contains phosphoric acid
(that is why it rots your teeth).” The stuff worked just great for James Dichter: “You know it's amazing what a little
Coke will do. I'm beginning to wonder if we should be drinking this stuff. I'm also contemplating marketing it under a
different name for the purposes of unsiezing head bolts...”
John Warr says, “Nitromors is not actually acidic - It contains dichloromethane, which will remove most hydrocarbon
based gunge. It plays havoc with the skin however, and the vapour will go across most types of glove.
76
“I think alloy wheel cleaner will do the trick quite well.”
Of course, another fine idea would be to unscrew the studs and take them out. Probably not even worth trying, though;
you can’t get very good access to the studs with the head in place, and they are likely to be trouble to remove -- see the
section on replacing head studs on page 81.
The April 1987 issue of Skinned Knuckles magazine included an article on removing aluminum cylinder heads by Earl
Reynolds. The primary suggestion is citric acid, with an editor’s note mentioning phosphoric acid and Coca-Cola as
well. But the article provides yet another idea: using an electric arc welder to heat the studs. “Attach the rod holder to
the top of the stud and the ground clamp to any other part of the engine block. Run the machine for a minute or two
and the stud will become extremely hot and expand in diameter, crushing the fuzzy corrosion products in the process.
When the stud cools and contracts, a void space is produced between the stud and the cylinder head. One minute with
the heat on and five minutes of cooling the cable down will do the trick.” Note that, since there’s probably no good way
of knowing just how hot the welder got the stud, it’d probably be a good idea to replace all the studs that were heated in
this way just in case they lost strength in the heating. With any luck, the heating also made it easier to unscrew them. It
is suggested that you review the prices of these studs before you choose to attempt this method.
If persuasion fails, use force. Malcolm Scott suggests, “I bolted on to the exhaust studs a heavy metal plate that had
sufficient rise in it so that I could use a hammer. This separated the head from the block and loosened the head from all
studs along the exhaust side. However, two studs near the rear under the inlets were clearly holding things up. On the
HE heads, the inlet tract protrudes over the smaller studs. I put the nuts back on the two offending studs and put solid
packing between the nut and the bottom of the inlet. I then carefully wound the nuts off and the heads pushed off easily.
Because the studs had grown into the head, they would not let go until the head was about 0.5 inch off. This required
loosening of the nuts and adding solid packing (I used other nuts and washers).”
Richard Chapman suggests that you remove the cam so that all the valves are closed, then feed rope into the spark plug
holes on cylinders 1 and 6. Turn the crank over and let the pistons push the head off. Might also work on cylinders 2
and 5.
John Napoli: “There is a technique that we used successfully on much lesser cars. The trick is that you need to try this
before you dissasemble very much. The trick is to loosen as many head nuts as you can access, and then run the engine!!
One good stab of the throttle is usually all it takes. The head quickly 'pops' a bit. Shut it down and then remove the
heads normally. You only need to loosen the nuts a couple of turns, and it often doesn't matter if you can't get to 'em all.
We used to do this on engines where, for whatever reason, we anticipated problems in getting the heads off.”
If nothing else works, John Goodman describes a homemade tool that will get the heads off: “1/2” steel plate slightly
wider and longer than the cyl head. Drill two rows of holes down the centre to line up with the camshaft bearing cap
mounting holes, bolt plate onto camshaft carrier using the existing bearing cap studs. Screw long bolts through threaded
holes in the outside edges of this plate which line up with the cyl head retaining studs, the ends of these long bolts had
“cups” to locate them over the cyl head studs. Next just torque down evenly with a few smacks from a BRO hammer
and the heads come off.” If you have the tappet block off, you might be able to use it as a template to mark where to
drill holes in the plate.
Alternatively, a smaller, more compact set of tools that work essentially the same way as Goodman’s massive plate can
be fabbed up quite easily. First, purchase a length of steel bar 1/2” thick and 1” or 1-1/2” wide and cut two pieces 41/2” long from it. Drill two holes and drill and tap two other holes in each piece as shown in Figure 6. Into those
tapped holes, thread 3/8”-16 bolts that are at least 5 inches long and threaded all the way to the head.
77
1 1/ 2"
1"
1"
1/ 8"
tap 3/ 8"- 16
11/ 32" dia
Figure 6: Head Jacking Tool
If you want, you can use 3/8” fine thread bolts and tap the plate accordingly, or even 8mm metric stuff -- whatever is
easiest to find in your area. You can use threaded rod, but you’ll need to find a way to turn the threaded rod -- weld
a nut onto it, bend it 90º at one end, whatever. If you don’t have a tap or don’t want to bother, you can just drill 3/8”
holes and put nuts on the back side of the plate, but it’ll make the tool a little clumsier to use.
The tappet block should be in place, and you’ll need to remove the bearing caps and the camshaft. If you’ve already
removed the tappet block, just slide it back on; without the tappet block, it’s too easy to bend the studs using this tool.
There are seven pairs of studs for cam bearing caps on each bank; this tool can be used on the 2nd, 3rd, 5th, or 6th pair.
Fit these two plates to the 2nd and 6th pairs and put nuts on to hold them in place. You might need to put some spacers
under the nuts on the studs -- 3/8” nuts work fine.
To begin with, install some generic nuts on the top of each of the four head studs that will be involved, threading them
on only a couple turns. When the jacking screws are inserted into the center of these nuts, the nuts will keep the screws
from walking off the end of the stud. However, when the head has been lifted to the point where these nuts keep it from
coming any further off, you’ll have to stop everything and remove the nuts. Things may be moving well enough by that
point to continue without anything to hold the jacking screws centered, but if not a few small pieces of 7/16” ID tubing
slid over the studs will help -- or maybe some 1/2” nuts. Once the jacking screws enter the holes in the head, there is no
further need for such things, the head itself will hold the jacking screws aligned.
It may be possible to get a mildly stuck head loose with only one tool by fitting it to the 2nd pair of studs, getting that
end loose, then relocating it to the 6th pair and getting that end loose. But since the trouble is likely to be from junk
packed around the studs and will be trouble all the way up, it’ll be a lot easier to make two of these tools and jack both
ends simultaneously.
When jacking, take care not to allow the head to tilt inward or outward; tighten both jacking screws on each tool evenly.
If the head cocks, it just jams worse on the studs.
Note that the weak point on these contraptions is probably the cam bearing studs themselves. Don’t go cranking real
hard; if the head just won’t come loose, find a way to apply more lift elsewhere -- don’t just pull the studs out of the top
of the head. Since they’re only attached to two studs each, these little tools won’t apply the lifting force that Goodman’s
massive plate will, but it should get most heads off. If more force is required, two more plates could be fabbed and
installed on the 3rd and 5th pairs of studs to apply more oomph. You could even fab a fifth plate with no 1/8” offset
78
between the pairs of holes to use on the 4th (center) set of studs.
Matthias Fouquet-Lapar quotes the "XJ-S issue" (Volume 8 Number 3 January/February 1996) of Jaguar World, page
57 :
"Cylinder heads can be a nightmare to lift due to the inter-action of steel studs and alloy heads. However,
Classic Spares do market a tool of their own design that makes light work of the job. Be warned, you will need
it."
See page 693 for Classic Spares. There are also reports that John’s Cars (page 717) offers such a tool.
ONE HEAD OR BOTH? If a valve seat drops in one bank, some people want to know if they can just pull the head
from that bank and leave the other one alone. If the seat only drops a bit but stays in place, you might get away with it.
If the seat actually falls out and breaks up, apparently not. Greg Wells of Concours West says, “If one or more seats has
dropped and shattered, you must pull both heads, as the pieces will always have been tossed into the other head by the
strong intake plenum reversions.”
Aw, c’mon, that’s gotta be BS! The two intake manifolds are completely separate, connected only by a 1” balance pipe.
Parts of a valve seat would have to go through that balance pipe to get to the other side! “That's the only explanation I
can offer. This is not based on supposition but is something I have witnessed several times. The seat pieces in the other
bank (opposite the dropped seat) are pretty small and since the balance pipe is the only connection, I have to assume this
is the case.
“The last one I recall had dropped a single seat on the LH bank. Two of the LH pistons had shard embedded in them;
four of the RH pistons also did. The only seat missing was on the LH side and the broken seat pieces were small, on the
order of 1/8" or so.”
More testimony from Chad Bolles: “Yes, it is possible for broken pieces of valves and seats to end up on the other side
of the engine. Been there done that.”
And Roger Bywater: “What seems to cause it is that if the exhaust valve is unable to seat and if there is a vacuum in the
inlet manifold then exhaust gas will get drawn back out of the exhaust manifold and backflow through the inlet valve
when it opens. At moderately high engine speeds at light throttle this backflow could be quite considerable and might
easily pull debris with it up into the manifold. The good cylinder bank will be pulling better vacuum so there will be flow
across the balance pipe and if circumstances are right then bits will end up making the journey across.
“What seems at first to be impossible is actually not at all unlikely if the car continues to be driven in the damaged state.”
SO YOU HAVE THE HEAD OFF: Be sure and clean up the spark plug threads while you have the head off. One
excellent method is to get a suitable wire brush shaped like a “bottle brush” and screw the brush through the hole.
Places that sell shotgun cleaning tools have an excellent selection of suitable brushes. When clean, the spark plugs
should spin all the way down by hand. You might also want to address any spark plug threads that may be damaged; it’s
easier to install an insert now than later on when the engine is together.
If you have the A bank head off, it is suggested you go through the procedure of setting the location of the timing mark
plate described in the section on ignition timing starting on page 126.
If the block hasn’t been turned upside down in the midst of this job (!), there will be little puddles of coolant surrounding
the liners. Make sure you get this coolant out, and then scrape the bottom of these pockets with something pointy.
You’ll probably find a lot of junk, perhaps looking like sand. It might actually be sand left over from the casting process.
David Johnson says, “I discovered that there was no coolant flow around the last cylinder on my A side! The last liner is
so close to the jacket that yuck had built up to the point that coolant would have had a hell of a time trying to flow
around it. I'd bet only about 1/2 the liner had coolant touching it!” Whatever you find, get it outta there. Small
accumulations probably don’t hurt anything being there, but these pockets may serve a useful purpose in catching new
crud floating around in the cooling circuit, and maybe once they’re full stuff starts plugging the radiator or something.
79
On the bottom of the heads where they come in contact with the gasket, there are several openings for coolant to flow
from the block through holes in the gasket and into the head. One row is round openings, the other row is oblong holes.
Several of these holes may be rimmed with casting flashing; apparently the core meets the form right at the hole, and
there was little effort to clean away the flashing at the factory. When the head is off, take a Dremel and clear away this
flashing to ensure the holes are fully open. Might not be a big deal, but couldn't hurt.
With the Jaguar V12, with just the heads off you might be able to accomplish several things that would require opening
the bottom end on other engines. The first possibility of note is that you can reseal the liners to the block. Use the liner
retainers (or some reasonable facsimiles) to hold 11 liners in place. Turn the crank until the piston in the one
unrestrained cylinder is at the bottom of its stroke, and then continue turning the crank while encouraging the liner to
come up with the piston. When the piston is at TDC but still at the bottom of the liner, the ledge on the side of the liner
that sits on the block will be higher than the head surface. You can then carefully clean the surface on the liner and the
block, apply new sealant, and slide the liner back into place. David Johnson actually used this method to reseal a liner
that had accidentally come loose, and ended up knocking a few more loose just to make sure they were all properly
sealed. In fact, it might not be a bad idea to turn the crank a little with no retainers in place, just to see if any liners are
loose enough to move. Or, succumb to the temptation to reseal them all whether they need it or not. See page 102 for
notes on sealants to use here.
Now we move on into theoretical, since as of this writing the following ideas have not been tried and reported back on;
attempt at your own risk. The next suggestion is that you may be able to replace the liners from above. This is a bit
harder than the resealing idea, since it requires taking each liner completely out. The challenge is getting the piston rings
back into the liners when reassembling, since even with the piston at TDC you’re working in too tight a place to use a
conventional ring compressor. However, you may actually be able to finger the rings into place one at a time. Squeeze
the top ring, slide the liner down on it, and move on to the second ring. John Napoli suggests you might even go ahead
and cut a small taper into the bottom end of the liner before installation to make it easier to get the rings in. Or, you
might be able to fashion a homemade ring compressor that will work in this space, perhaps from a hose clamp and some
shim stock, or maybe from a pair of needlenose pliers and some shim stock.
If that idea works, the next idea should work too: Replacing the piston rings. If you have the liner out and the piston is
flopping around above the opening in the block, it shouldn’t be too difficult to carefully remove the old rings and slip on
some new ones.
I’d like to report that you could even replace the pistons themselves, but reportedly the piston does not come up high
enough for the pin to clear the ledge that the liner sits on.
CLEANING HEAD STUD HOLES: Before reinstalling the head, it is of utmost importance that the holes for the studs
be thoroughly cleaned. Any crud remaining in these holes may be kicked loose when the head is slid down over the
studs and it might fall out the bottom and sit on top of the head gasket while you’re closing it up, and you’ll have a bad
seal.
For cleaning the stud holes, a suitable item would be a wire brush shaped like a “bottle brush”. If you’re real lucky, you
might find one in an auto parts store, and if you’re even luckier it might be somewhere near the correct size. Forget
about luck and visit any sporting goods store or department and look at the tools available for cleaning rifle and shotgun
barrels. Outers and Hoppe’s make cleaning tools involving 3-piece shafts and little copper wire brushes that screw onto
the end for very reasonable prices. Buy one shotgun-cleaning brush assembly and additional interchangeable brass wire
brush attachments for 10, 12, 16, 20, 28, and .410 gauge shotguns, and you’ll be able to clean just about any size hole
you encounter. You can opt for the rifle and pistol cleaning tools as well for cleaning smaller holes yet, but note that the
threads on the brush itself might be different and therefore require either a different rod or an adapter. Also note that
Outers and Hoppe’s shotgun brushes are not interchangeable, so you’ll need to choose one brand for all the brushes you
buy.
As opposed to the items found in an auto parts store with handles that are merely a continuation of the twisted wires that
form the brush itself, the shotgun brush assemblies have a finely machined 3-piece aluminum shaft. Hence, it becomes
quite reasonable to chuck one section of the shaft up in the variable-speed drill and clean those stud holes up in a hurry!
80
REPLACING HEAD STUDS: Some of the head studs on the V12 are immersed in coolant. If the coolant has not been
maintained properly (changed on schedule), some of these studs may get corroded. A small amount of surface corrosion
is no big deal, but large-scale erosion can signficantly reduce the cross-sectional area of the stud -- which is a formula for
blown head gaskets.
Head studs can be thought of as springs. When you tighten the nuts to the specified torque, you are stretching these
springs to a particular load value. Even though parts may expand a little with changes in temperature, the studs are
designed to be long enough that this growth is minor compared to the stretch of the studs so the compressive force on
the head gasket is maintained. But if the shanks of the studs start corroding away, this preload is reduced. And if the
engine is reassembled without replacing such corroded studs, it may prove impossible to apply the specified torque; the
bolt may yield at the narrowed section first.
Peter Hyslop shares experience with these studs: “This applies mainly to old V12 engines (ie >20 years old) with a few
miles on them and which have never been apart:
1) The studs can get stretched if over-torqued by some fool trying to take a short-cut on a head gasket leak ... this is an
unusual degree of incompetence, so never use that mechanic again (and if you did it yourself, give up, there’s no hope
for you).
2) The studs immersed in the coolant can corrode and pit. The others are usually fine.
3) The studs immersed in the coolant can become adherent to the block and become brittle. Some of these studs stand a
reasonable chance of snapping off when you try to remove them ... yes, you read it correctly, the stud will snap before
the aluminium block gives way.
The solution:
- Make sure that you really want to go this far before you start, and are prepared to stick it out when the going gets
tough.
- Leave the studs not in the coolant alone.
- Pull the studs in coolant only if corroded.
- Expect some of the corroded bolts to snap and land you with a big machinists’ bill.
How do I know?...I’m up to my arse in the alligators right now with items two and three above (yup, snap, snap snap)!”
Note that the AJ6 6-cylinder engine used in some XJ-S’s has an entirely different theory in head studs. They are
designed to be tightened until they yield, which provides a very closely controlled amount of compression on the head
gasket -- but requires that the studs be replaced whenever the head is pulled.
VALVE REMOVAL: Jan Wikström says, “The normal generic valve compressor from K-mart will do fine; there's
nothing special about the V12 valves.” Apparently, K-mart is a quality tool source in Australia where Wikström lives;
here in the US, the vast majority of valve spring compressors on the market are either cheap junk, designed specifically
to fit a Chevy and nothing else, or both. Trying to use cheap junk on valve springs can be seriously dangerous; if that
thing snaps loose or breaks while holding the springs fully compressed, it can fire keepers and collars around the room
like bullets.
Some of these pieces of junk are intended to be operated from above only, which may be handy if you are trying to
replace seals without pulling the heads, but these tools try to hook onto the coils directly; they compress part of the
spring rather than the whole length of the spring, and they don’t compress the inner spring at all -- you have to push
down on the tool to get the keepers in and out. And you must hold the valve itself in place by other means, possibly
applying compressed air to a spark plug hole or even inserting some rope and turning the engine around until the piston
pushes it against the valve head.
If you have the head off, Gerald Foster recommends a valve spring compressor sold by Sears. It costs less than $20, is a
81
substantial tool that wraps around the head (like a big C-clamp) to push on the spring and the valve head at the same
time, and is a Craftsman tool with a lifetime warranty.
When using the C-clamp type compressor, you’ll find it helpful to tighten down on the spring a little bit and then give the
top of the spring a little rap with a plastic hammer to pop the collar loose from the keepers. Then you can proceed to
compress the spring further.
VALVE SEAT WORK: It’s why you’re reading this section, right? Well, when replacing the seat, the first thing you
need to get right is the fit. In the General Specifications section of the ROM under “Valve Guides and Seats”, there is a
spec for “Interference fit in cylinder head” of 0.002”-0.006”. This is not for the valve seats -- it’s the spec for the valve
guides. The correct interference fit, 0.003”, is in the ROM, but not here; it’s in section 12.29.18, step 14. It’s followed
by instructions to heat the head before installing.
The ROM also talks about two oversize seats being available, but here in the US good luck finding a machine shop that
cares. The boring tool used to ream the hole in the aluminum and the sintered iron valve seats are both standards of
some sort and they will use their own, not Jaguar’s. If they’re any good at their jobs, they will machine the ID and the
seat area of their insert to the same configuration as the original so you really wouldn’t know the difference unless you
interrogated them about it. It’s not like you have any good reason to insist on genuine Jaguar seats here; those were
genuine Jaguar seats that fell out!
Craig Sawyers talks about the hot/cold fit: “Assuming that the temp difference between the seat and the head is 130°C,
the differential contraction is 10ppm/°C and the seat OD is 1.5 inches, there will be a 1 thou interference under these
conditions. If the seat was chilled in a freezer to -40°C, it would be a precise fit. Cooled to liquid nitrogen, it would just
drop in.
“Machining to give a greater interference than 3 thou may be counterproductive, as the seat would have to be driven
home, and shave the aluminium on the way in, reducing the interference again (to about 3 thou?).”
You need to make sure they cut the seat properly in order to ensure that the valve itself sits the same “depth” into the
head, for two reasons. First, the position of the closed valve greatly affects the combustion chamber volume and
therefore the compression ratio in that cylinder; the farther off it is, the more fiddling somebody’s gonna have to do to cc
the heads to make sure that each cylinder has the same volume. When you see what these guys do to get these volumes
the same, you’ll wish they had seated the valve right. Of course, the correct valve position may be even more important
on the H.E. engine since they are part of the swirl configuration of the head.
The second reason has to do with adjusting the valve clearances. The shims are only available in a limited range of sizes,
and grinding away on the valve stem is a no-no.
VALVE TRIMMING: After the valves and seats have been machined to renew the contact surfaces, the valve will
obviously sit lower in the head. This closes up the valve clearances at the tappets. Jim Cantrell points out: “Often,
people at this point will then cut the valve stem to get the additional clearance. This will then cause the valve stem’s life
to be reduced since the stems are hardened. This hardening only penetrates a few thousandths of an inch and cutting it
off exposes the softer valve material.” The proper solution to inadequate clearance is to replace the valve, the seat, or
both.
SO YOU’RE DOING A VALVE JOB: To many of us, doing a valve job means pulling the heads off the car, taking
them to a machine shop, picking them up later, and bolting them back onto the engine. However, the valves are a prime
place for easy improvements when the heads are off. I will mention a few ideas.
The valve guides are sleeves that are press-fit into the heads, and protrude a little bit into the inlet and exhaust ports. Jim
Isbell suggests that, before you install the valves, you take a hand grinder and grind off the protruding parts of the guides
flush with the surface of the port.
82
The valves and seats on the Jaguar V12 are supposed to be machined with 44½º angles. Most machine shops will
suggest that the seats be “triple cut”, in which additional cuts are made at angles greater and less than 44½º in order to
control the width and location of the contact area. Typical angles for these cuts would be 32º and 60º and the contact
area width should be about 1½ mm wide. Chad Bolles suggests that a similar triple cut on the valves themselves would
be beneficial.
John Milne suggests that, after the valve contact surfaces have been machined, some machinist’s bluing be applied and
the valve trial fit to determine the location of the actual contact on the valve surface. Then, carefully avoiding the
contact area, the inner edge of the machined surface should be blended to form a smooth continuous surface with the
“tulip” shape of the valve. This helps the flow through the valve, since it makes a smooth passage instead of that corner.
It also slightly enlarges the opening, since the smallest flow area when the valve is open is between this inner corner and
the seat. “It’s kinda like getting a little extra valve lift for free.” Blending the inner edges of the machined surfaces of
the seat may have similar benefits.
Of course, every high-performance enthusiast will suggest that you do a little “porting” while you’re in there. This
means carefully enlarging the intake and exhaust passages. In the case of the intake passages on the Jaguar V12,
however, this may produce undesirable results. These intake passages are designed to provide a certain amount of
resonance-induced flow enhancement, and this requires that the flow rates be fairly high. Enlarging the ports makes for
slower flow, which means better flow at high RPM but less boost at low RPM. In other words, enlarging the intake
ports may increase high-speed horsepower at the expense of low-speed torque.
The next automatic suggestion is “polishing”. Quite literally, the passages may be polished using successively finer
abrasive compounds until a mirror finish is achieved. This supposedly will reduce surface friction of the flow.
Before you reinstall the head, Jim Isbell suggests you “cc” it. This means that you measure the volume of each
combustion chamber, and grind a little metal away here and there to make sure they are all the same. This makes for a
smooth running engine. To measure the volume, you can set the heads upside down on a level surface and fill each
chamber with a carefully measured amount of light oil.
Cc’ing must be done after the valves are installed for the final assembly. Clearly, if valves are ground or relocated after
cc’ing, they will sit at a different level than they did before and this would significantly change the volume of the
chamber. And this is the reason that cc’ing is recommended whenever the valves have been redone.
If you happen to be working on a pre-H.E., cc’ing doesn’t apply. The head is flat, so there are no chambers to cc.
TEFLON VALVE STEM SEALS: Michel Carpentier says, “Teflon valve seals are the way to go. They last forever,
plus you can fit them on the exhaust guides as well. Less blow-by, reduced crankcase pressure, no more oil leaks, and
cleaner oil to boot.
“Our engines came from the factory with 24 valves but only 12 valve stem seals. Jaguar probably realized that the
British rubber intake rendition would soon fry on the exhaust side.
“Why would any (effective) exhaust valve seal affect crankcase pressure? When the exhaust valves open, gases gush out
of the combustion chamber with tremendous pressure. Even though the valve itself acts as some sort of an umbrella,
there is still a significant pressure differential between both sides of the exhaust guide. Any clearance between valve and
guide will let exhaust gases into the crankcase area. Jaguar old trade secret to keep engines leaking oil!”
Of course, the decision to switch to Teflon seals, and to install 24 instead of 12, may not be quite that simple. This
author had some discussion on the phone with the rep at Silver Seals about the differences between Teflon valve stem
seals and normal nitrile seals. There is apparently a functional difference: the nitrile seals always leak, and the leakage
allows a small amount of oil down the valve guides to lubricate them. The Teflon items will not leak, so the valve guides
run dry. According to the rep, this is a problem on some cars and not a problem on others. I’m betting it’s not a
problem on the Jag, since it uses good materials on both the valves and guides. Also, the action of the cam on the tappet
applies no sideways load to the valve stem, as there is in any valve train with rockers. Still, recognize that you may be
trading oil burning for faster valve guide wear when you install Teflon seals.
83
Does anyone make Teflon valve stem seals for the XJ-S? Carpentier: “Perfect Circle does, although unwittingly since I
doubt they ever considered Jaguar engines as a possible application for their product. Our valve guide diameter is 0.502
to 0.501 in, that's essentially 1/2" or sixteen (16) thirty secondths of an inch. Valve stem diameter is 0.3092 to 0.3093
in, and that's within 3 thou of 5/16" or ten (10) thirty secondths of an inch. These dimensions are a bit unusual but
luckily match those of the first generation Chrysler Hemi engines. Call Perfect Circle (they are a DANA subsidiary) and
they will tell you: "Yes, we manufacture such Teflon seals, part number D1610, available at any NAPA auto store".
“There is a catch: if you go to NAPA and ask for this reference, they look it up in their computer and tell you it does not
exist (never mind telling them what kind of car it is for...). The last time I was in the US, I finally found a place in Los
Angeles that would order them for me. The seals actually came from a company called Silver Seals Products/Whip-L
Products, Trenton, Michigan, 1-800-521-2936; their reference is DT1610 but the seals carry the Perfect Circle logo.”
This author called that 800 number, and had a set of 24 Teflon valve seals on order in a matter of minutes and in hand in
a week at a cost of less than a dollar each. For those outside the US where an 800 number won’t work, their regular
phone number is +1 (734) 479-2255.
The OEM nitrile seals on the inlet valves are pressed over the valve guide until they snap into a groove around the guide
just above the surface of the head. The exhaust valve guides have no such groove. This turns out to be a non-issue with
the Teflon seals; these seals press fit onto the OD of the valve guide, and therefore do not use the snap groove. While
the OEM seals are a simplistic piece of rubber, the Teflon seals include a metal ring on each diameter to provide a secure
fit on the guide and on the valve stem itself.
Besides the diameters of the guide and stem, there are a few other things to consider whenever fitting a non-OEM valve
stem seal to an engine. In this case, the OD of the base fits within the inner spring just fine. The Teflon seal is a little
taller than the original seal, which makes for a really close fit; the valve lift is 3/8”, and that’s pretty much right where the
valve keepers sit down on the top of the seal’s lip. If you intend to run an aftermarket cam with more lift, you’ll need to
either use the shorter OEM seals or make some other changes, like shortening the keepers or the guides.
Installation is not as simple as with the nitrile seals. Carpentier: “You cannot push them in as you would plain vanilla
seals. With your package you should get a clear and rather flimsy plastic tube closed at one end. Slipped over the valve
stem, it protects the seal as you first push it over the stem end (push with your thumb with a slight rocking motion to get
started) then slide it over the cotter groove. Trim this sleeve so it still covers the groove but does not stay trapped under
the seal when fully home.” Note: on the valve stems, just below the groove, the part number is engraved; might as well
leave the sleeve long enough to cover the number too, just to make sure you don’t damage the seals going over it.
“When you start, remember (24 times!) to put the spring seat first as it does not fit over the seal. This is especially
important as a teflon seal cannot be removed without being destroyed: 1) it is hard to pull it from the guide without
distorting it and 2) as it goes back over the cotter groove, the sealing surface between stem and seal will be damaged.”
Clearly, you need to have the valve in place before installing the seal and you can’t remove it afterward, so make sure
you are actually at the final assembly stage (all lapping completed, etc.) before installing seals.
“Now you need to push the seal over the guide. Use a tube (e.g. a deep socket) with ID greater than the narrow upper
section and a rubber mallet. A first blow will get you over the guide chamfer, then tap it all the way in. Don't hammer
too hard though or the upper portion will shear off as you hit bottom.” Note: this author has done this job, and it’s a lot
easier than it sounds.
EXHAUST FLOW LIMITATIONS: Roger Bywater explains an inherent shortcoming of the H.E. engine: “The small
and pocketed exhaust valves are the real problem and is why all the high performance racing V12s have been based on
the old "flat head" design. Putting big exhaust valves in doesn't help because the chamber walls are so close and leave no
room for flow around the edge of the bigger valve head. In fact if the HE were not of abnormally high compression
ratio, always a useful trick to get a bit more top end power out of an engine that doesn't breathe, it would struggle to
produce the barely adequate power that it gives as standard. You can build an HE to 6 or more litres (we used to do a
6.3 using 98 mm bore and standard crank) but all you really get is more torque low down but not much more power.”
84
SODIUM-COOLED EXHAUST VALVES: Roger Bywater continues about the H.E. head: “As an economy measure
the HE was outstandingly successful (helped by the 2.88 axle) but the severely shrouded position of the exhaust valve
certainly hinders the pursuit of high power and increases the thermal loading the valve is subjected to. To withstand the
rigours of sustained high speeds on German autobahns sodium cooled exhaust valves were introduced on cars for the
European market.
“All but the early European H.E. V12s and also the H.E. headed 2.9 AJ6 engine had sodium filled exhaust valves under
the same part number EAC 7318 for both engines. They were introduced first on the V12 for Germany/Switzerland
then later for UK, etc. I am not aware of any corrosion problem but it would surely be a bigger problem at high
temperatures rather than while standing.
“The valve stem is roughly half filled with sodium which melts and acts as a "cocktail shaker" increasing the rate of heat
transfer from the valve head to the stem.”
HEAD GASKETS: The OEM head gaskets are a metal-fiber-metal sandwich. Payen makes such gaskets. However,
Clough (England) makes head gaskets for the Jaguar V12 that are the opposite: a fiber-metal-fiber sandwich. One
report: “One was extremely difficult to get over the studs - I believe made wrong or shrunk some. It ripped!”
The Jaguar V12 rarely suffers head gasket trouble, which may mean pretty much any head gasket will do the job, but it
also might mean that the OEM gaskets are really good. Try something different at your own risk.
Martin Walker says, “H.E. gaskets don't seem to fit the pre-H.E. heads. I bought a complete H.E. gasket set from a Jag
dealer and had to return it because the coolant passage openings in the head don't all line up properly.”
Can you just cut suitable openings in the gasket? Don Miles: “Don't do it! Don't do it! I repeat again, don't do it!
“What happens is, you allow the internal softer material to rot/crumble and to have a very large edge to escape. Not a
problem to start with if you are one of the crap screen users as it will be prevented from junking the rad. However, when
the soft material crumbles at the 'fire ring' around the cylinder head the 'nip' is reduced and gasket failure follows. On a
race engine with 10:1 or more this can be in 2 weeks. On a normal road V12 it will clearly be longer but this is pretty
immaterial (pun intended) as the loose soft part would have long since junked your engine as it blocks both screens.
Without the screens it will cost you a new rad.
“How do I know this? Don't ask, but we astonished ourselves and changed the offending gasket in 35 mins and won the
race. The other gasket was done later at a more leisurely pace.”
FIDDLING WITH THE TIMING CHAIN: If, for some reason, your timing chain isn’t sitting on the sprocket on the
holding bracket when you put the head on, David Johnson says, “if you have already installed cam, be sure that you take
the moment and hook the cam chain over the bracket meant to hang sprocket on. I looked at it and told myself, "Why
bother? I can simply reach down there and pull it up." Ain't so. The flange and bracket are just this much too close to
squeeze the chain through.”
CYLINDER HEAD NUTS/WASHERS: The thick washers under the 7/16” nuts are quite suitable for the job, and the
thin washers under the 3/8” nuts under the intake ports seem to work well enough. The same thin washers used under
the 3/8” nuts along the exhaust manifold edge of the head don’t cut the mustard, though. They are likely to be “dished”
where the nut has been pressing them down into the soft aluminum of the head. The implication: as the washers distort
and the local area of the head is dished, the tension on the stud is relaxed, reducing compression on the head gasket and
increasing the chances of a head gasket failure.
To improve this situation, one of three tactics is recommended: Replace the washers with thicker washers; replace the
nuts with washer-face nuts that will contact the original washer across most of its surface; or -- as a minimum fix -install two washers under each nut. CarQuest auto parts (and undoubtedly some other better auto parts shops, but
notably not some of the discount or bargain auto parts stores) offers a Dorman “manifold stud washer” number 685-050
85
which is quite suitable for this task. Note that these washers are not found on a bubble card on a rack, but rather in a
case of heavy red and black metal drawers that form the Dorman display -- often found behind the counter. Look in the
drawer labelled “manifold studs”. This washer is about 1/8” thick (like the washers under the 7/16” nuts), fits very
snugly around the 3/8” stud, and has a somewhat larger OD than the flimsy original washer.
With these washers under the original nuts, you can actually feel the difference as you’re torquing them up. It feels
much more solid, attaining the specified torque promptly and securely, rather than feeling mushy.
TORQUING THE CYLINDER HEAD NUTS: The nuts holding the heads to the block, as in other engines, require
careful torquing in progression to ensure proper sealing of the head gasket. However, there are two groups of head nuts
on the Jaguar V12 that cannot be tightened with a socket on the end of an extension, meaning they are difficult to use a
torque wrench on. One such group of nuts is the row of 9/16” nuts on 3/8” studs along the top edge of each head,
within the vee; these are underneath the intake ports. The other group is the row of 11/16” domed nuts on 7/16” studs
just under the tappet block on each side; these would be a snap if you were torquing the head nuts without the tappet
block on there, but with the tappet block in place you can’t get the socket over the nut.
This job calls for a tool called a crowfoot (or crow’s foot) wrench. This tool looks like just the business end portion of a
wrench with a square drive hole for attachment of a ratchet and extension. Since they are useful tools anyway and come
in handy in other hard-to-reach places, it is recommended an entire SAE or Imperial set be purchased. If you wish to
buy only the crowfoot wrenches you need for this job, Sears sells crowfoot wrenches individually. The nut and stud
sizes mentioned above were apparently maintained throughout the life of the Jaguar V12, even when many of the other
fasteners on the engine switched to metric.
There are actually at least three different types of crowfoot wrenches, so you might want to consider your choices before
buying. The most common type looks like the business end portion of an open end wrench, so it can be slid onto the nut
from the side. It operates on only two corners of the nut. The head area must be made fairly broad (like any open-end
wrench) in order to give it adequate strength to prevent it from spreading and rounding off the nut under torque. Sears
Craftsman crowfoot wrenches are this type.
David Johnson suggests that, if you can find a set, buy box end crowfoot wrenches, since the torque applied to the 3/8”
head nuts threatens to spread the 9/16” open end crowfoot and round the corners of the nut. “Mine are from Snap On.”
He’s right about the threat; this author used an open end set successfully, but there was clearly very little strength to
spare. Box end crowfoot wrenches (like other box end wrenches) cannot go on a nut from the side, they must come
down on top.
The third type crowfoot available is halfway between the open end and box end; they look like the business end of a
“flare nut wrench”. In other words, they look like the end of a box end wrench that someone has cut a slot through at
the end. It looks like the crow was pigeon-toed; maybe they should be called pigeonfoot wrenches! They cannot go on
a nut from the side, but they can go onto a bolt (or metal brake line) from the side and then come down on the nut from
above. Most such wrenches are “six point”, meaning they have five points -- the slot takes away one of the six points,
so this type wrench operates on five corners of the nut.
There is another functional difference between the open-end style crowfoot and the flare nut style. The open end style is
symmetrical when looked down on from above; if you flipped it over, it wouldn’t make any difference (except for a
raised area where the square drive attaches). So, you will need to have enough room to turn the nut 60° at a time, slide
the wrench off and move it back to the next flat and go again. But the flare nut style, despite being a six-point style,
offers another option. The square drive attachment is 30° off one flat of the hex, so if you can’t turn the nut the full 60°,
you can take the crowfoot off the end of the square drive extension, flip it over, and turn the nut the next 30°. That
would make for a long, slow job of tightening a nut, but it’d be better than being unable to tighten it at all.
Finally, one more functional difference worth noting. The open end type of crowfoot wrench, like an open end wrench,
can be used while held tilted a bit upward or downward from square on the nut. Since they only contact on two
opposite flats, they can withstand a considerable amount of misalignment during use. With a crowfoot, this means that
you don’t need to be holding the ratchet extension perfectly parallel to the centerline of the bolt or nut, but you can tilt it
away from that centerline or towards it a little bit. The box end or flare nut types of crowfoot, on the other hand, fit
86
very securely on a hex. If misaligned, you won’t even get it on. This can be a blessing or a curse depending on what
you’re doing, but mark my words, whichever type you get you will eventually find a situation where you wish you had
the other.
Although listed third here, the flare nut style crowfoot wrenches are perhaps easier to find than the box end style. John
Robison says, “Here is the link for the set I bought...
http://www.tools-plus.com/hand-tools-pliers-wrenches-wrenches-crow-foot.html
J. C. Whitney (page 694) offers both open end and flare nut style crowfoot wrenches in SAE or metric sets -- for about
$10 a set! Really high quality stuff, obviously.
When using crowfoot wrenches in conjunction with a torque wrench, the crowfoot should always be attached to form a
90° angle with the handle of the torque wrench. The effective lever length of the torque wrench (distance from the
handle to the centerline of the bolt or nut being torqued) is not changed. If the crowfoot is attached in line with the
handle, the lever length is altered, and the torque readings will be inaccurate.
For some reason, some people have arrived at the conclusion that extensions make a difference in torque wrench
readings. They do not; use whatever extensions you need to to get the job done. Swivel joints can make a difference in
torque readings; if you absolutely have to use a swivel joint with a torque wrench, at least attempt to hold it as straight
as possible.
With the 11/16” domed nuts under the tappet block, the box end and the flare nut type crowfoot wrench may cause
trouble. The problem at this spot is that the domed nut is tall and comes up pretty close to the surface of the tappet
block. Since these two types of wrench have to go over the nut to get on, they must be thin enough to fit between the
nut and the tappet block at that point. Craig Sawyers bought an expensive flare nut type -- actually a 12-point flare nut
type -- that didn’t work. By lining up the gap at the end, he could get it on, but as soon as he turned the nut he
effectively trapped the tool; it wouldn’t come off. “If you get one flat of turn on it, it won't come off the nut. If you
back it off slightly so that it clears the nut, you can't get it back on for the next turn. Britool AFC687... This beast is
0.525" thick, and the diameter of the surround to the socket part is 1.275". The open end is 0.57" wide and parallel.
And it is 12-point and was not cheap - I bought this sucker to do up those 11/16" nuts under the tappet block, and was
not pleased when it didn't work out.”
Sawyers found an alternative to the crowfoot wrench for the 11/16” domed nuts: “I ended up getting a friend with a
lathe to turn a shoulder on a standard socket so that it would snug under the tappet block. Worked a treat.” Of course,
cutting on that fancy crowfoot probably would have worked, too, but the socket was cheaper -- and since it worked, the
socket was arguably preferable to the crowfoot for this job. In fact, if you plan to retorque these nuts later, you’ll find
this modified socket vastly preferable. Basically, Sawyers machined the square drive end of the socket down to about as
small as he could get it, leaving the large diameter portion as short as possible. “The part around the socket, 0.935"
diameter (ie, as supplied) and 0.7" to the turned shoulder. The turned down part (where the 3/8" drive fits) is 0.67"
diameter and 0.49" long from the shoulder to the top.” Note that the 0.7” dimension is what’s critical, and the maximum
that will work may actually vary a bit from car to car. If you start with a socket that is too tall, you won’t be able to cut
the shoulder that far down without cutting the socket in half -- but you can shorten it up by simply grinding off the end
of the socket until it goes on.
There are also problems using a crowfoot on the 9/16” nuts. These nuts sit in a ledge cut into the head, but Jaguar
didn’t cut the ledge any deeper than they had to. There’s very little clearance between the points of the nut itself and the
machined surface behind it. This is part of the reason the open end crowfoot threatens to spread; if you put the
crowfoot all the way onto the nut, you can’t turn it very far before the wrench runs hard against that machined surface,
so instead you pull the crowfoot back a little and tighten the nut with the tips of the crowfoot. Using a box end, as
Johnson recommends, will mean it needs to wrap all the way around that nut and therefore must be pretty thin-walled -but box ends are generally pretty thin-walled, especially from companies like Snap-On. The flare nut style may have
more troubles, since the claws of the crowfoot have to be beefier to make up for the loss of strength that comes from
opening a gap at the end, and so may have trouble turning without jamming against the machined surface. It may be
possible to use either box end or flare nut style crowfoot wrenches by fitting them to the upper half of the nut only,
staying above the surrounding metal of the head; since they’re grabbing 5 or 6 points they should still be able to apply
87
adequate torque. Results may vary from casting to casting.
One other solution may be to replace the nuts with new nuts with the same thread but a smaller hex. Make sure they’re
Grade 8 or equivalent; you don’t want cheap, soft steel nuts here.
Martin Karo: “Better than the crowfoot solution, Hazet makes a tool for precisely this purpose. It has 12-point box at
one end; the shank is then bent vertically 90 degrees, and runs up 6 to 8 inches, depending on the size; then another 90
degree bend brings the shank back over the box end, and a 3/8" square drive hole is bored in, directly over the box end.
This clears over-nut obstructions, and the torque values are correct no matter what the wrench angle. I rented one the
last time I replaced a cylinder head, and it worked great. To buy, however, I dunno... if it's a Hazet, you can be sure it
ain't cheap.”
You could, of course, make a wrench that fits Karo’s description. Find a box end wrench that fits the nut, and heat it up
and bend it 90° straight up. Cut the other end off and weld on a socket, any socket, to provide a square drive
connection.
The purpose of torquing head nuts to a specified value is to obtain a certain amount of tension on the studs themselves.
Whether or not the threads on the nuts are lubricated makes a huge difference in how much tension results from a given
torque, as does whether or not the contact between the nut and the steel washer it sits on is lubricated. Unfortunately,
the manuals are not as clear as they might be on whether or not the specified torque is intended to mean with or without
lubrication. In its section on General Fitting Instructions, the ROM does say “Always oil thread lightly before tightening
to ensure a free running thread, except in the case of self-locking nuts.” This makes sense, since tension obtained from
lubricated threads is more consistent than from non-lubricated threads; if the threads aren’t lubricated, there’s no telling
how much tension you’ll end up with. There seems to be little or no official guidance for lubricating the washer face,
though.
This author recommends you lubricate the head stud threads with anti-seize compound; this may not sound like oiling
lightly, but the amount of friction in the threads when installing should be comparable. Plus, the anti-seize compound
will ensure the threads are not damaged when retorquing or removing the nuts later on.
This author also recommends you apply a non-hardening sealant to the contact areas between the washer and the head
and between the nut and the washer on the 7/16” studs only. On ten of the fourteen 7/16” studs per head, these contact
areas seal the coolant circuit; that’s why these nuts are cap nuts, since coolant can’t leak through the threads on a cap
nut (and you thought Jaguar used cap nuts to make it pretty!). While not originally intended as a lubricant, the sealant
will provide a fairly consistent amount of friction between the nut and the washer and therefore a consistent application
of tension to the stud. By using a non-hardening sealant, you hopefully leave open the possibility of retorquing later on
-- although presumably you could retorque by removing the nut completely, applying fresh sealant, and reinstalling.
On the 3/8” studs, apply anti-seize compound between the washer and the nut. You can leave the contact surface
between the washer and the head dry, apply sealant, apply anti-seize compound, whatever, it shouldn’t make any
difference.
Needless to say, if any of the threads on studs or nuts are boogered up enough that the nut won’t spin on freely, they
must be cleaned up or replaced before torquing.
When torquing down the nuts, aim for the low end of the spec range, and be alert for signs of stud yielding: the nut
continues to turn without the torque increasing any more. If the specified torque is attained in a smooth and progressive
manner, there is nothing else to worry about; the head is on and secure, and there is sufficient tension on the studs to
make sure the head gasket will remain sealed. On the other hand, if either the threads or the washer face is assembled
dry, you won’t know how much of your tightening torque was lost there, so you won’t know just how much tension
actually got applied to the stud -- and therefore you won’t know how long your head gasket is going to last.
88
Engine Work -- Front
CRANKSHAFT DAMPER/PULLEY REMOVAL: First note that, contrary to the repair manuals, it is not necessary to
remove the crank pulley to get the water pump off.
Also note that what looks like a bolt head in the center of the crank pulley is actually a hex fixture for turning the engine
by hand. Two smaller bolts must be removed to remove this hex, and the real pulley retaining bolt is underneath. Then
one more note: Since you already have the belts loose or off, you can remove two more small bolts and remove the
pulley from the crank damper entirely. This provides much better access to the big crank damper bolt so you can use a
box end wrench or some such.
What size wrench fits that bolt head? Craig Sawyers: “That damned thread is a 7/8 inch BSF. The AF measurement is
1.300 inches for that thread. I got a 7/8 BSF, 3/4 Whitworth socket to do the job.” See page 26 for more info on
Whitworth/BSF, including ideas on finding tools.
If you can find a 33mm socket, it’ll fit perfectly. Unfortunately, even numbers are the standard in larger sizes, so it’s
pretty hard to find anything closer than 32mm or 34mm. Hard, but not impossible; Jan Wikström says, “I have a cheap
Taiwanese socket set from the flea market; it has every mm size from 12 to 35. There are far more sockets than the ISO
standard sizes, but the odd ones can come in handy.”
Bob Christie says you can get 33mm sockets from MSC.
Apparently 33mm is a common size for truck lug nuts, so that's another avenue of pursuit.
You might want to avoid the smaller drive sizes here. Robert Warnicke says, “I broke two 1/2” drives before I finally
removed the bolt with a pipe wrench.”
If nothing else works, you can use a file or grinder on the hex to make a 1-1/4” or 32mm socket fit. You can just use a
big adjustable wrench (or Warnicke’s favorite, the pipe wrench) to get it loose, but you will still need to find a socket
that fits to carefully torque it during reassembly -- which is of considerable importance, as described in the discussion of
key failures below.
To loosen and retighten the bolt, it is necessary to hold the crank still. You can remove the starter to jam the flywheel,
but that is definitely the hard way. An easier way would be to use the access hole on the left side of the engine, the one
with a rubber plug and intended to provide access to the torque convertor mounting bolts. Michael Neal provides an
even simpler access: Just remove the cover from the bottom of the torque convertor housing.
Of course, on my car I can just put it in 5th gear with the emergency brake on!
Matthias Fouquet-Lapar suggests: “Once you have removed the upper part of the pulley (the one which drives 3 belts),
you can easily use its 2 screws to attach a home-made bar on the damper.” This is perhaps the best method of all, since
pulling this lever and the torque wrench together works really well when trying to carefully torque that bolt up on
installation.
Besides holding the crank still, there’s also the problem of getting the bolt loose. One idea that solves both problems
would be to use an impact wrench -- the way an impact wrench works, the inertia of the crank is all that’s necessary to
hold it still. But there’s not enough room in the car to use an impact wrench, so that will require either pulling the
radiator or the engine.
Shane Mantoszko says “use a good long-handled socket/torsion wrench, put it on the front crank nut, brace it on a
strong part of the engine bay, disconnect the coil, and then turn your ignition key for a few quick bursts, and viola, the
crank nut will be loose...”
Dale Knaus says, “I used what we call a "slug wrench". It is a box end wrench made extra heavy with a striking pad on
the other end. It is made to hit with a hammer to tighten and remove nuts. I borrowed the tool from the industrial plant
where I work; they are probably available from industrial tool supply companies.”
Regardless of how well these methods may work getting the bolt loose, remember that you’ll still need to deal with
89
reinstallation. Since the bolt torque is critical, you’ll definitely need a suitable torque wrench and socket and you’ll
probably need that restraining lever Fouquet-Lapar suggests. All that being true, you might as well go ahead and
acquire those items and see if they’ll get the bolt off to begin with.
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY - SHEARED WOODRUFF KEY: Paul Konitshek, Michael Neal and several others report
that the woodruff keys that align the crankshaft damper/pulley are a known problem area. The keys may become worn
or totally sheared, allowing the pulley to reposition itself around the crank.
The immediate effect of this slippage depends on which ignition system you have. If you have a pre-1989 car with
Lucas ignition, you might not even notice unless things get really bad and start chewing up parts. Neal reports: “It
almost never gets to the point where the pulley comes loose.” If it merely slips, it usually won’t become apparent until
you try to set the ignition timing; the timing marks are now completely wrong, so you’ll get really confused. If you have
the later Marelli ignition system, the damper slipping will immediately screw up the ignition timing since the sensors are
on that damper.
Note that there are two keys used. There is a “split cone” that is similar to those used on industrial pulleys. The pulley
fits onto the outside tapered surface of the cone and is aligned with one key. The cone slides over the crank and is
aligned with another key. When the bolt securing the pulley is tightened to specification, the split cone compresses
securely onto the crank like a collet in a chuck.
Roger Bywater, who was in charge of belt drives for the V12 at Jaguar at one time, explains: “The purpose of the
keyway is purely for location and accurate alignment during assembly. In almost all assemblies of this type the key is not
intended to transmit any torque, indeed it is not strong enough, the friction of the tightened joint is meant to do that.
There must always be some clearance around the key so if the joint comes loose torsional vibes will always fret and
destroy the keyway. Many later engines do not have keyways anywhere, relying only on friction. The Jaguar V8
camshafts are typical with the timing sprockets just placed on the end, timing marks all lined up, and nipped up very tight
with a central bolt - that's it. If they come loose the sprocket can just spin round - only it never happens.
“The answer is to make sure the friction inside and outside the cone cannot fail so the bolt needs to be tight to the point
of yield to keep the whole assembly under tension. Possibly the bolt tightening figure is marginal at the lower tolerance
quoted of 125 ft-lbs so maybe the top figure of 150 ft-lbs should be the rule. In fact the AJ6 manual quotes 203 Newton
Metres (with no tolerance) which equates to 150 ft-lbs for the same size bolt which seems to support this view.” Note
that the threads need to be “lightly lubricated” for the torque readings to be anywhere near correct; this author
recommends anti-seize compound, which will also help get it apart next time.
If the torque is supposed to be transmitted via friction between crank and cone and between cone and damper, obviously
it’d be a good idea not to put any anti-seize compound on those mating surfaces. In fact, you might want to be careful
there’s no oil on them -- although hopefully it’d get squeezed out while torquing.
So, if the torque is supposed to be transmitted via friction, how come the Jaguar V12 has a history of key failures here?
Neal: “It seems only to happen if water has gotten into the nosecone on the crank. The area is always very rusty when
the front pulley is removed. The woodruff key is either broken or eroded away from the rust.” Of course, this area is
exposed to the elements, there’s no keeping water out of it; whether or not these parts rust probably depends on whether
the crank seal is keeping them well oiled. Perhaps they all rust, and Neal only notices the ones that have sheared keys
are rusty because those are the ones he has to work on.
The failure history could be because the engineers at Jaguar screwed up, either underestimating how much torque this
joint would need to transmit or overestimating how much torque the joint could handle. However, it’s entirely possible
that most or all of these failures came from somebody not torquing that damper bolt down adequately. Even presuming
they were torqued correctly at the factory (!), mechanics are always fiddling around in this area -- such as when
replacing a leaky crank seal. Perhaps some of the mechanics are not being as meticulous as they should be in applying
full torque during reassembly. Take a lesson: make very sure you torque that bolt properly! Just zipping it on with an
impact wrench is unacceptable.
Neal: “In some cases the slot in the crank is widened a bit but a new key usually secures it substantially.” If the crank
90
has been boogered up too much by the damper slipping, of course you have to install a new crank. Yeah, right. Even
Bywater himself reassembled an engine with a damaged keyway in one of his AJ6 development cars by “drilling and
pegging” the split cone during installation. “Obviously loctite or similar would create difficulties in any future strip down
so if everything is clean and in good order and fully tight there should be no need for it. Where things are less than
perfect then pragmatism must rule.” It might help if you file the high points off the gouges on the crank and use a new
split cone.
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY - GETTING THE KEY OUT: Sometimes the keys won’t come out, notably the key on the
crank itself. Suggestions include using a pair of angle cutters to grab it and walk it upwards, and using a suitable chisel
to cut under the key to pry it out. The suitable chisel needs to be a hair narrower than the key, and can be made from
old lathe bits or “cut nails”. Cut nails are made from flat stock, giving them a sort of trapezoidal shape, and are really
hard for pounding into masonry. Greg Guillaume: “Here’s what I did: Get a 1” chisel, lay it on the crank,
perpendicular to the crank, up against the key. Then whack away with a hammer on the opposite side of the chisel. The
shape of the chisel is just right so it bites into the key, the 1” width hangs over the end of the crank, and you get a lot of
room to swing the hammer. Of course, the chisel is a little beat up, but it worked great.”
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY - SPLIT CONE PROBLEMS: Dan Jensen says, “The split cone was broken in three places.
Rather than pay $$ for a replacement, I just stuck it back into the damper/pulley with Hylomar sealant and gently
replaced it. It centered properly and has worked great for 35K miles.”
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY - RUBBER DAMPER PROBLEMS: Chris Yewdall owns a ’91 convertible, and started
having noise when operating the roof. “When lowering the roof with the engine running, a squealing noise is heard from
under the hood until the roof is fully lowered. After a few more months/miles the squeal happens most times you start
the car for a few minutes until the revs build up as you drive away. Eventually, the voltage on the battery charge guage
on the dashboard drops to 12V (about 1/4 of the way up the guage) and the battery goes flat. Occasionally, the
alternator will charge normally or just below normal, particularly on a freeway journey.”
Sounds sorta like a loose belt problem, but it wasn’t. After wasting too much money on things like an alternator rebuild,
the problem turned out to be the crank damper itself. When he got the failed part back from the mechanic, he reported
on it: “On inspection, it is the bond between the inner pulley (which keys onto the crankshaft) and the rubber damper
which has failed since the inner pulley rotates freely on the inner surface of the damper. The rubber has hardened to the
point where it has cracked in lines between the inner and outer pulley. It feels more like bakelite or plastic and has no
flex at all. Believe me, it’s not hard to spin the outer by hand.” The other three belts are driven by rigidly-mounted
pulleys but the alternator belt is driven directly from the outer ring of the crank damper, so this rubber breaking loose
causes drive problems for the alternator. A heavy alternator load, such as operating a convertible top, aggravates the
problem.
If you’re having trouble confirming if your damper has sheared, put a mark on the center portion and a mark in line with
it on the outer portion. Run the car for a while, then shut it off and check the marks. If they are no longer aligned, you
need a new damper.
Interestingly, this type failure was apparently unknown on the earlier cars with Lucas alternators driven by V-belts.
Those cars also had Lucas ignition systems, and the timing marks for setting the ignition timing were on the outside edge
of the crank damper. As a result, such a slippage between the inner and outer portions of the damper would have made
correct timing impossible. Most of the cars with the later Bosch 115-amp alternators and ribbed belts (see page 574)
also have Marelli ignition, and the timing is not adjustable -- but is established by a pickup at the front damper. This
pickup senses trigger points attached to the inside portion of the damper, so they are unaffected by slipping of the outer
ring and the engine runs normally.
It’s easy to blame these damper failures on the higher loads imposed by the 115-amp alternator or even on some change
in build quality between the V-belt dampers and the multi-groove dampers, but there is one more possible cause for
91
these failures. As described on page 574, there is a flaw in multi-groove pulley design that results in them slipping and
squealing even when the belt is tight. Obviously, most mechanics will address a squealing problem by tightening the belt
-- and since that won’t fix this problem, they may respond by tightening the bejeezus out of it. An overtightened belt
applies a considerable radial load on the rubber portion of that damper, and this load cycles around the damper as the
crank rotates. It would be logical to assume that such a cyclic load could rip that rubber loose from the metal in a fairly
short while. All owners of Bosch alternators are advised to have that alternator pulley modified at the next convenient
opportunity, and then adjust the belt to a reasonable state of tension.
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT: Peter Cohen points out that the Jaguar repair manual’s procedure for replacing
the front oil seal involves removing the radiator -- which, in turn, supposedly requires depressurizing the A/C freon
circuit. Boy, I hope you read this first! Depressurizing the freon circuit is totally unnecessary to get the radiator out
(see page 197), and if you don’t mind working in tight quarters, taking the radiator out is unnecessary to change the
front oil seal. Matthias Fouquet-Lapar says, “I’ve done this in my garage without pulling the radiator. Once all the beltdriven hardware is removed, there is enough space. I did not even take out the fan shroud.” Brian Sherwood says, “I
replaced mine without pulling the radiator -- not very convenient, but possible. The most difficult parts were: 1.
removing the old seal (finally had to prick a small hole in it, and screwed in a sheet metal screw to pull on), and 2.
getting the pulley bolts thru the lock plate, pulley, and into the crank damper -- can’t see these at all, have to do by feel.”
Tom Amlie had trouble getting the new seal installed in tight quarters. “If I kept trying to do it like the books said, I
would still be at it. Book says to tap the new seal in. Not possible. Go to Home Depot or similar and get a PVC drain
pipe fitting (reducer) to fit the seal. Carve on it until it works. Then use that huge bolt that holds the pulley/damper to
push it in. Works like a charm.”
When you buy the front seal from Jaguar, you get the seal and the spacer sleeve it rides on in one box; this may be a
recent development, apparently a new part number has been issued. Matthias Fouquet-Lapar says, “The new part at
least includes the spacer. The part number is JLM 10613.” However, if you buy a generic seal somewhere else (or
maybe older stock from Jaguar), you’ll probably get just the seal. You can look at the condition of your sleeve and see
if you think this will cause a problem. Peter Smith says, “If the spacer appears worn it can simply be reversed on
refitting because the seal does not ride at the half way point. The new seal will then ride on an unworn part of the
spacer.” Whatever, you will want to take the sleeve out, because the proper order of assembly is to install the seal and
then install the sleeve.
You might also consider putting some sealant between the crank and the spacer prior to installation to prevent oil from
travelling between the crank and the sleeve and leaking out the splits in the split cone under the pulley. There are no
reports of leaks along this path, but if it did leak people would think it was the front seal, so who knows? Maybe it’s a
common leak!
Cohen adds, “When I did my front seal 7 years ago, the collar that came with the seal had to be tapped into place, even
though the old one slid right off. The dealer assured me that that's normal, they loosen up with time. This is not true. I
had to drive the collar off after 7 years and 70,000 miles. It's a good thing the timing cover was off, because I don't
know if I could have gotten a grip on it from the front.” Who knows, maybe Jaguar figured out how the oil was leaking
out so new seals come with a coating on the inside of the sleeve to seal it.
Also of note, illustrations in the repair manual indicate that the sleeve has a keyway, but according to Alex Dorne they
lie; “The sleeve is not keyed.”
V-BELTS: Most V-belts are available in either solid or notched varieties. There is no appreciable difference in strength,
since the strength of all V-belts comes from a layer of cord unaffected by notches. The cord is in the outside edge,
making that part stiff to force the softer, inner portion of the belt into the groove in the pulley.
The notches in the inner surface help the V-belt flex, and are beneficial when the belt must turn around a small pulley. It
is therefore recommended that a notched V-belt always be used for the alternator belt on the XJ-S.
The notches in a belt can cause noise. For this reason, most V-belts use an unevenly-spaced series of notches rather than
92
evenly-spaced because an uneven spacing eliminates whine. For the same reason, cooling fans have unequally spaced
blades and tires have unequally spaced tread patterns.
POWER STEERING PUMP INSTALLATION: Jim Isbell points out that the bolt holding the belt tensioner to the
power steering pump should be installed from the rear to the front. “The bolt, if put in from the back with the nut end
toward the radiator can be removed with the pulley in place. If put in backwards it cannot be removed with the pulley in
place.”
FAN BELT IDLER PULLEY INSTALLATION: Jim Isbell says: “The bolt that connects the adjuster screw to the
idler pulley must be put in from the back with the nut toward the radiator. If this is put in backwards the adjustment
range of the idler is greatly reduced.”
TIMING COVER REMOVAL: If you want to remove the timing cover to replace the front oil seal, don’t waste your
time; the front oil seal presses in from the outside, and Jaguar even provided some prying slots for removing the old one.
See the info on seal replacement on page 92.
If you do need to remove the timing cover, Section 12.65.01 of the ROM lists 13 steps, the first two of which are as
follows:
1.
Remove engine and gearbox assembly from the car.
2.
Remove cylinder heads from the engine.
Fortunately, there is an alternate method. To remove the timing cover with the engine still in the car and the heads in
place, proceed as follows:
1.
Remove the belts, fan and its mounting bracket, A/C compressor front bracket, and all the other
ancillary stuff in the way.
2.
Remove the front crank pulley -- see page 89.
3.
There are three studs threaded into the timing cover that protrude upward through the front edge of
each head. Remove the nuts and washers, then grab the studs with a pair of Vice-Grip pliers and
unscrew them. Note: Some of the studs are trapped and cannot be removed; once these are
unscrewed, merely retain them (with duct tape) in a raised position while the cover is being removed.
Once the cover is off, they can be removed.
4.
Remove the retaining bolts holding the timing cover to the block.
5.
The timing cover is essentially pinched between the heads and the sandwich plate. Michael Neal, who
is a Jaguar mechanic and uses this method regularly, says “I loosen as many of the sandwich plate
bolts near the front as possible. I believe it works out to about 4 or 5 back, going between the
subframe and the motor. I then use a Snap-On medium sized ladyfoot prybar and go in the hole
where the oil cooler adapter bolts onto the sandwich plate. I pry against the bottom of the tube that
the adapter goes into and the inside of the sandwich plate. This pulls down the right front corner of
the sandwich plate and allows some space for the timing cover to move. The prybar over-centers and
locates itself while holding the plate down. It is very important not to pull down too far. The bolt
holes are very prone to cracking and the break will spread out toward the center of the sandwich
plate.” See page 97 if you wish to remove the sandwich plate entirely.
6.
REASSEMBLY: Since your studs were all boogered up by the Vice-Grips, buy new studs with the
same threads but longer. Saw or grind them off until they are 1/4” longer then the originals. Then,
grind flats on this 1/4” to ease the reinstallation and any future disassembly. Be sure to clean up the
threads so the nuts go on easily. Remember to slide the trapped studs in place before installing the
93
timing cover. Be sure to use anti-seize compound on all studs.
7.
Before reassembly, carefully trim the timing cover gaskets flush with the upper corner of the timing
cover.
8.
Since the head gaskets are not being replaced, it is a good idea to apply some sealant to the bottom of
them to help them seal against the timing cover. The only stress on this portion of the head gasket is a
slight crankcase vacuum; the integrity of the head/block seal is unaffected. Make sure to apply sealant
in the corner of the two mating surfaces.
9.
Neal provides this tip for getting the timing cover back in between the heads and sandwich plate: “On
reassembly I use sheets of .003” shim stock on the upper surface of the sandwich plate gasket and the
underside of the front of the head gaskets. You have to trim the stuff to clear, but it prevents damage
to the gaskets and lets the timing cover slide back in easily. The head gaskets are...very prone to
wrinkling if you don’t use the shim stock pieces to slide the cover back in.”
10.
When threading the new timing cover-to-head studs into place, remember there is no reason to tighten
them into the timing cover. As long as they have been threaded in several turns, the nuts will torque
properly. Tightening the studs into the timing cover merely makes them harder to remove next time.
11.
During reassembly, progressively tighten the timing cover bolts along with the nuts on the studs. The
cover must be brought up against the heads as it’s being pulled against the block. Tightening one set
before the others will cause leaks.
Note that if the engine is still in the car but the heads are off for some other reason, the timing cover should be
removable without too much additional trouble, basically following the rest of the steps in the repair manual and
skipping step 5 above. Hence, you might consider going ahead with removing it, replacing the chain and tensioner,
checking out the oil pump, etc., depending on the age and wear on the engine. You might also consider installing the
longer studs as described in step 6 above while you’re there.
TIMING CHAIN DAMPENERS: These are the steel plates mounted alongside the chain along several of the straight
sections between sprockets. The Haynes manual, Chapter 1, Section 42, Step 5, suggests using quick-drying paint to
mark their locations before removal. Craig Sawyers says, “Nice idea, but no dice. Have a look at the bare block and
you will see that the dampers fit onto raised bosses. There is no accessible metal to either paint or scribe a line on to
show the original position of the dampers.”
If you move them, the use of an elaborate (and undoubtedly expensive) special tool JD.38 is required to properly
position them. Advice: Don’t move them!
You already moved them? Sorry, at present I can offer no help. I am including this section to describe what they are
and how they work.
A roller chain is a fairly decent and reliable drive mechanism at low speed. However, 6500 RPM is another story; at
higher speeds, chains can whip, flutter, buzz, and otherwise dance around their path around the sprockets. At certain
resonances, a chain whipping back and forth can cause very high tension stresses, resulting in damage to the chain,
sprockets, camshaft bearings and tensioner.
These plates are designed to prevent this. If the chain is moving smoothly and along a straight line like it should, it
shouldn’t even touch the plates. But if it starts to whip, it hits a plate -- which absorbs the energy of the whip, and
allows the chain to return to a calm motion.
Based on this theory, it would be logical to assume we could just bolt the plates on so that they are immediately adjacent
to the chain without touching it. There are a couple problems with this plan. First, if you follow the official Jaguar
assembly order, the plates must be installed and the timing cover bolted up before the heads are installed, so having the
chain in place -- meaning the tappet blocks, camshafts, and camshaft drive sprockets in position -- is not possible. Of
course, you could always trial fit the heads, tappet blocks, camshafts, sprockets, and timing chain in order to set the plate
positions, then tear it all apart again.
94
On page 93 I describe how to remove the timing cover with the heads on and therefore there may be an opportunity to
adjust the dampers with the chain in place -- although it may be a rare case when the plates need to be positioned but the
heads don’t need to come off.
The second problem is that I’m really not providing enough information for proper positioning. I’m only providing the
theory; presumably, during development of this engine, the optimum positions of these plates were precisely determined,
and they may be far more critical than simply “close to the chain without touching it.” Improper positioning of these
damper plates could be catastrophic, causing a broken timing chain which in turn causes pistons to impact valves in open
position. You see, the real purpose of this section is not to save you effort; it’s to discourage you from assuming the
position of these plates is unimportant, skipping important steps, and causing yourself a great deal of heartache down the
road.
TIMING CHAIN REPLACEMENT: The timing chain in the Jaguar V12 is a conventional double-row roller chain.
Typically, the wear on chains of this type is much more significant than on the sprockets, and usually the chain can be
replaced without replacing the sprockets. This is in sharp contrast to the “silent” timing chains used in many American
V-8’s, where it is customary to replace the timing chain and sprockets as a set.
Another characteristic of typical roller chains is that wear on the sprockets increases with the use of worn chains; if the
chain is renewed regularly, the sprockets can last almost indefinitely. The Jaguar timing chain is so cheap that it is
recommended that it be replaced whenever the engine is disassembled far enough to do so. The sprockets are so
expensive that you will want to do whatever it takes to keep from having to replace them.
In general, the sprockets don’t need replacing unless an inspection shows signs of serious wear -- one side of each tooth
looks different than the other side.
Per Jan Wikström, “According to a Reynolds chain handbook that I mislaid some time back in the seventies, so my
memory may be slightly off here, the way to determine whether a sprocket warrants replacement is to hang the new
chain over the sprocket and apply a strong pull (that’s an Imperial strong pull, not a US strong pull!) in the normal drive
direction. If more than three links ride up noticeably on the teeth, the sprocket is too worn.”
Once you’ve decided to replace the chain, the next question is whether to pay Jaguar prices or simply drop into an
industrial supply store and buy generic chain. You don’t want cheap chain, that’s for sure -- but most industrial supply
stores actually carry really good chain, probably as good or better than the chain sold through Jaguar. Many of these
stores will also happily explain to you why you want a good chain rather than a cheap one and perhaps even show you
examples of each.
When ordering a chain from some parts houses, the chain they offer is a length of generic industrial chain and a master
link to put the ends together. This leads many owners to question whether they want to do this or pay for the Jaguar
part which is a loop without a master. Those aren’t the only choices, actually; if you think a master link is a problem,
that same industrial supply store will offer to make the loop for you. They have the special tool on hand to properly roll
the end of a pin over to make the chain into an uninterrupted loop. And this will still save you perhaps 2/3 of the cost of
the Jaguar part. Remember, Jaguar isn’t fabricating custom chain for this application; the chain they sell was purchased
from an industrial supplier and made into loops.
Some argue that having a master link is a real problem, as though they are weak or some such. They are not weak; they
are typically stronger than the other links. They do, however, have some history in motorcycle applications of failing
catastrophically. This isn’t because they’re weak but rather because they can be taken apart; whatever clip or cotter pin
is used to hold them together can come out and cause the master link to fall out. This is especially a concern on a
motorcycle where running over some brush might knock the clip loose on a master link. There’s also the concern that
some motorcycle mechanics are meatheads who can’t figure out how to get the clip on the master link securely.
Of course, there is little chance of foreign interference in a master link inside the Jaguar V12 block. If you are offered a
chain with master link, simply look over the retention scheme. If it looks like something you could get together and
trust that it won’t fall apart at 6500 rpm, go with it; don’t worry that it’s somehow not as strong as the other links. If it
looks like something that might come apart, consider having the chain permanently made into a loop at the shop rather
95
than risk fiddling with the master link.
Some master links are held together with a clip that slides over one pin and snaps onto the other. There’s no known
history of these coming loose, but the fact that they involve a groove around the end of both pins suggests a possible
improvement: you can simply discard the single clip and install two tiny E-ring clips instead, one on each pin. There’s
little chance that an E-ring clip would come off in use, and both of them would have to come off before the chain breaks.
They are prone to getting dropped during installation, though, so be sure to tie a thread to each one before installing.
Of course, you need to find the correct size chain. Tony Bryant says, “One possible gotcha is the old Brit vs US
standard thing. It appears there are two standards for 3/8" duplex chain: BS288/ISO606/DIN8187 and
ANSIB29.1/ISO606a. The differences are subtle but probably serious. From the Reynolds chain book, the differences
are (BS vs ANSI):
Roller width (i.e. between the inside plates) 5.72mm vs 4.68mm
Roller dia 6.35mm vs 5.08mm
Plate height 8.26mm vs 8.66mm
Plate outer width 1.04mm vs 1.3mm
Pin dia 3.28mm vs 3.59mm
Pin length 23.8mm vs 25.65mm
Breaking force 18500N vs 20000N
“So make sure you get the right chain, or I'm guessing very bad things™ will happen.”
It’s possible to replace the chain by removing only the right side cam cover and without bothering the timing cover at all,
but this requires the use of a master link -- if contemplating, make sure the chain you purchase isn’t already formed into
a loop. Retract the tensioner, then break the old chain on the top of the cam sprocket (grind the end off two pins and
slide a link out) and connect the new chain to the end of the old one with the master link. Have someone turn the
crankshaft slowly while you feed the new chain in and the old chain out, being sure to keep the cam sprocket engaged at
all times. When the master link comes around again, disconnect the old chain and connect the new chain back to itself.
It is highly recommended that the latch on the timing chain tensioner be rocked after, or preferably during, this timing
chain replacement on the chance that the new chain is significantly shorter than the old worn one was and therefore the
tensioner needs to back up a bit to allow it to sit properly.
OIL PUMP CLEARANCES: If you happen to have the Haynes manual, the clearances specified for the oil pump don’t
seem to make sense. So, I will include the values from the ©1975 ROM here:
Driven gear to housing:
< 0.005” (0,127mm)
Drive gear to crescent:
< 0.006” (0,152mm)
End float - both gears:
< 0.005” (0,127mm)
Note that, according to the ROM, all measurements are taken with the pump removed from the engine. Since the
crankshaft is therefore not holding the drive gear in position, it is free to move as far away from the crescent as the
tightness of the gear teeth will permit. It appears a rare case that it will meet the 0.006” limit; 0.040” is more likely!
Despite the clarity of their measurement procedure, it is probable that the specified values represent clearances in place,
with the crank holding the drive gear in its correct location.
Mike Morrin: “I cannot believe the figures in the Jaguar manual. The endfloat on the gears in my pump was over
0.020”. At the time I was rather alarmed, as the engine had by all accounts only done 55,000 miles. I carefully
inspected the old parts for wear, and found that the factory machining marks were still visible on the gears, and the wear
on the pump housing was negligible. This pump must have left the factory with clearances way beyond the published
limits. So I put the old pump back and crossed my fingers. The oil pressure seems OK (when measured with an
96
accurate gauge).
Of course, if endfloat is the only problem, some of us have been known to skim a little metal off the mating surface of
the housing to bring it back down. With a little care, it’s even possible to perform this fix on aluminum housings by
laying a piece of sandpaper on a plate of glass and sliding the housing back and forth on it.
OIL PUMP REPLACEMENT: According to Thomas E. Alberts, the 1992 upgrade of the V12 included a new design
oil pump -- and that the old design oil pumps are no longer available. “The original part number is C38453 or C40177.
That part was officially superseded by EBC3163 which is the pump for 1992 on. EBC3163 is supposed to fit the older
engines but some pieces are required to adapt it. This pump is at least twice as expensive as the earlier version, and the
adapter (they call it a pump collar) is $45 plus some additional bolts are required.”
Engine Work -- Bottom
Note: If you only need to replace piston rings and/or liners, you might not need to do bottom end work on the Jag V12.
See the ideas on page 79.
OIL PAN REMOVAL: The crankcase bottom is actually two pieces, a pan and a sandwich plate. The pan, which exists
only at the rear of the engine, comes off easily enough. However, any hope that this will get you anywhere is quickly
shattered. The crankcase is fully baffled (necessary to prevent foaming, reduce heat buildup and power loss, and insure
proper oil flow to the pickup in a high RPM engine), and there is one baffle the length of the engine that cannot be
removed without removing the sandwich plate.
Contrary to the manual, the sandwich plate can be removed without pulling either the front suspension assembly or the
engine out of the car. It’s a real pain, though, so you might still consider one of those options. To remove the sandwich
plate:
1.
Unbolt the steering rack without disconnecting hoses, steering column or tie rods. Lower the rack a
few inches and let it hang there.
2.
Remove the fan to allow the engine to be raised without hitting the shroud.
3.
Remove the nuts from the two main engine mounts, and use a hoist to lift the front of the engine as
far as possible.
With all this done, the sandwich plate will just barely come out rearward. Putting it back in, with new gasket in place,
will also be a lot of laughs.
While you’re in there, replace all the O-rings you can find, such as those in each end of each oil tube. If they leak they
just leak into the crankcase, but each leak reduces oil flow to the engine. Use Viton O-rings, so you won’t have to go
back in there anytime soon.
OIL PAN/SANDWICH PLATE BOLTS: Technical Service Bulletin 12-35, which introduced the upgraded gaskets
used throughout the engine, also specified new bolts for holding the sandwich plate and the oil sump to the engine. The
explanations given applied to both the sump and the cam covers, so it is probable that the same sort of generic bolt &
washer substitution described at length for installing the cam covers starting on page 60 could also be applied here -although these bolts are a size larger, so the specific parts mentioned won’t do.
See also the notes on TSB 12-53 on page 48 regarding sealing the threads on the sandwich plate bolts with heads inside
the oil sump.
TSB 12-35 specifies a torque of 21-27 N-m (15.5-20 ft-lb) on the sandwich plate bolts and oil sump bolts. No mention
97
of later metric vs. early SAE bolts; hopefully, it’s a reasonable torque for either. It’s also probably a good spec whether
using their special bolts or generic substitutes.
MAIN BEARING REPLACEMENT: If you find yourself needing to replace the main bearings without removing the
crankshaft, the job can be accomplished the same way as most cars: Roll the upper bearing shell around and out. If it’s
difficult, insert a cutoff head from a nail into one of the oil passages of the crank and turn the crank to roll the bearing
around. However, when installing the new bearings, remember that the Jaguar block is aluminum. It is recommended
that the outer leading edge of the bearing shells be smoothed slightly with a file to prevent them digging into the
aluminum when installing.
REAR OIL SEAL: If you think your rear oil seal is leaking, you might want to check again. The rope seal used up to
VIN 160010 has proven to be very reliable indeed; an informal survey of owners on the internet indicated that the rear
oil seal was often blamed for leaks, but the leaks were always later found to come from other sources. The upper mating
surface of the rear bearing cap is one possible source, as Jaguar didn’t see fit to seal it at all -- see Error: Reference
source not found below. The sides of that cap were sealed with “hockey sticks” on early cars, but later assembly
instructions call for injecting silicone instead; apparently the hockey sticks would dry up and harden and start leaking.
Besides these possibilities right near the rear seal, there’s also the half moon seals (page 60), oil pressure sender (page
47), tappet block banjo bolts (page 44), and a host of other items that may be leaking above or around the rear of the
engine and dripping down to look like a rear oil seal leak.
If your rear oil seal is leaking, please see the note on the PCV system on page 51.
REAR OIL SEAL -- UP TO VIN 160010: Up through engine number 8S.66782, the rear oil seal was a “rope seal”, a
chunk of waxy rope crammed into a groove surrounding the crank journal. This is sometimes called the “two-piece
seal” since there’s one piece of rope crammed into the journal on the block to form the upper half and another piece of
rope crammed into the bearing cap to form the lower half.
At first it seems apparent that the upper half of the rear oil seal cannot be replaced without removing the crank.
However, Dick Russ reports that there is a tool called “Sneaky-Pete”, P/N 2700 by the Lisle Company in Clarinda, IA,
that will enable the seal to be replaced without removing the crank. The tool costs only $6 or so and is available at Pep
Boys, AutoZone, etc. It consists of a length of music wire and some tiny grippers that can be used to bite into one end
of the new seal and pull it into place around the crank.
In the March/April 1995 issue of Jaguar Journal, Russ describes in detail how to replace this seal with the crank in
place; the same article is reprised in the December 1995 issue of British Car. It also can be viewed online at:
http://www.terrysjag.com/seal.html
The procedure was developed by Phil Long and not only uses the Sneaky-Pete but also uses the seal from a 1968-78
Ford 460. The reasoning is apparently that the Ford seal is longer than the Jaguar original. After using the Sneaky-Pete
to pull the new seal around the upper half of the crank, the end that has been boogered up by the grippers of the SneakyPete can be simply cut off. If a Jaguar seal is used, the gripper must be carefully removed and the seal backed into the
recess, no easy task.
Russ also suggests that the cap be trial fit and torqued down, and then removed and inspected to make sure none of the
seal is getting in between the joining faces of the cap and block and holding them apart. Any fibers or edges of the seal
interfering with the fit can then simply be cut away before fitting the cap up final.
Note that Long’s 44-step procedure was actually written for the Series III E-type, so a few of the steps need revision to
apply to the XJ-S. For example, steps 6 and 39 deal with the E-type’s oil-to-coolant oil cooler which doesn’t exist on
the XJ-S.
In the September/October 1995 issue of Jaguar Journal, John F. Quilter and John W. Yerger of Jaguar responded to the
98
above procedure, claiming it was not only unacceptable but would invalidate the warranty on the engine. They insist
that the only acceptable method of replacing this seal involves removing the crank so that a special Jaguar tool may be
used to “size” the seal prior to assembly. The seal is not supposed to actually touch the crank at all, but to reside very
close to it. The scroll carved into the crank then feeds inward, preventing oil from going outward. Contact will result in
“burning”, as confirmed by many who have found the white rope seals somewhat charred. Roger Bywater seems to feel
that the big problem is not burning of the seal itself, but burning of the rear main bearing; he says the crank rubbing on
the rope seal gets the metal hot enough to damage the bearing.
Note that the original Jaguar seal is a waxy white rope, while the Ford 460 seal appears to be impregnated with graphite.
Perhaps this helps avoid that burned look -- or camouflages it. There is at least one report of an owner asking for a seal
for a Ford 460 and being handed something in a rubber seal; make sure what you get is in fact a dark-colored piece of
rope. John Holmes says, “The Ford Rope seal is Part #C90Z-6701-A and contains 4 lengths of rope seal. Each one
measures in length 17cm, 11mm by 5.5 mm in cross section. It truly looks like a piece of rope that has been flattened
from a circular cross section. The surface of the pieces are dark grey, presumably with graphite ( it feels to be such ) but
the graphite does not penetrate very much beneath the surface. The rope pieces are quite flexible to the hand.”
If you are concerned about contact between the rope seal and the crank, perhaps a minor revision to the Sneaky-Pete
installation is in order. It shouldn’t be difficult to slip a piece of thin shim stock around the crank before pulling the new
seal into place. This will not only hold the seal away from the crank a few thou and hopefully help the seal form to that
shape much the same way as the special Jaguar tool would, but it also helps protect the crank while installing the seal. A
similar piece of shim stock could be used when trial-fitting the bearing cap to “size” the lower half of the seal, where
Long’s procedure calls for the use of the special Jaguar tool.
Hey, if the engine is under warranty, let the Jaguar mechanics do it their way; it’s their nickel. However, if you’re
paying, I’ll bet you opt for the Sneaky-Pete. Jaguar’s way requires removing the crank, which means pulling the engine
and tearing it apart. Long’s way only requires removing the oil pan and sandwich plate, not easy but possible with
engine and transmission in place -- see page 97.
HOCKEY STICKS: The rear main bearing cap not only holds the bearing shell, it also fills in a rectangular opening in
the rear of the block. It hence must be sealed around its perimeter or oil will leak out of the crankcase. When the Jaguar
V12 was first introduced, the sides of this bearing cap were sealed against the opening in the block with "hockey sticks".
These sticks fit into grooves in the side of the bearing cap, and the "foot" of the hockey stick wrapped around the top
surface of the bearing cap so as to pull the sticks into place with it during installation.
Somewhere along the way, Jaguar realized the error of this scheme and omitted the hockey sticks in favor of simply
injecting some sealant into the groove after the bearing cap was bolted in place. Because there's a gap at the top corner,
just keep squeezing the sealant in until it starts coming out the gap. This sealant injection method should be used on all
5.3 litre Jaguar V12's during a rebuild, even if they originally came with hockey sticks.
Rodney Spratt discovered that the machining of the rear bearing cap changed with the introduction of the injected
sealant. The early bearing caps had little recesses in the upper surface for the feet. Once hockey sticks were no longer
used, there was no longer any reason to machine the little recesses, so they were omitted. You couldn't install a hockey
stick in a later engine if you wanted to.
REAR BEARING CAP UPPER JOINT SEALING: When bolting on the rear bearing cap, think about how the sealing
of the crankcase itself is accomplished. The oil seal theoretically forms a seal around the shaft, and the injection of
silicone sealant effectively seals along the two sides of the bearing cap. However, the top surface of the cap is sealed
only by the metal-to-metal contact. It is suggested that a thin line of sealant be applied to the top of the bearing cap,
starting at the oil seal and ending at the silicone groove on each side, prior to assembly. See Figure 7. Be sure to use
some type of sealant that won’t space the cap away from the block, such as Loctite 518 or perhaps the Loctite 573 or
574 used on the tappet block (see page 70). Note that the sealing of this horizontal joint definitely calls for a different
sealant than the two vertical joints, which need a silicone-type stuff such as RTV.
99
SILICONE GROOVE
APPLY SEALANT
OIL SEAL GROOVE
OIL SLINGER GROOVE
Figure 7: Rear Main Bearing Sealing
100
REAR OIL SEAL -- VIN 160010 ON: According to Phil Bates: “In 1989, starting with engine 7P.02073, Jaguar fitted
a new one-piece rear main bearing oil seal to replace the previous rope type.” That 7P number refers to engines for the
XJ12; for the XJ-S, Greg Wells says “My microfiche shows that the rope seal was used up to engine number 8S.66782
and that the one-piece rear main seal began at engine number 8S.66783.” Jon Jasperson quotes a Jaguar TSB saying
this corresponds to VIN 160010.
The TSB also calls for a new tool, JD 163, for installing or removing this new seal. Replacement of this later type seal
does not require removing the engine or crank, but it does require removing the transmission.
Chad Bolles: “No way to retrofit, already tried that, block was recast. Crank was redesigned also. Seal is about 5-3/8’s
OD and 4-7/16’s ID. Main bearing the same.”
Unfortunately, the newer design seal seems to have its own problems. There have been several reports of it “blowing
out”, creating a massive oil leak. The seal itself appears undamaged (although most people will choose to replace it
anyway after going through the effort of removing the transmission); it apparently simply pops out of its hole. Anyone
with this type of seal who is working in the area -- because it blew out or for other reasons -- would be well advised to
secure that seal. Perhaps a Loctite retention product would help make sure it doesn’t go anywhere, or maybe it’s
possible to add some small screws around the edge to secure it in place.
PISTONS & CYLINDERS: In general, you can buy pistons for the V12, or you can buy cylinders with pistons.
Generally, you cannot buy cylinders alone. Make very sure you don’t need a cylinder before you buy a piston alone.
You cannot get pistons oversized by a few thousandths for reboring cylinders; if the cylinder is worn or damaged, it
must be replaced.
Fortunately, the cast iron used in the cylinders is apparently very hard and wear is usually insignificant in engines with
less than 150,000 miles, in which case the pistons alone can be replaced. If rebuilding, the best policy for saving money
may be as follows: Don’t order parts until the heads are off. Check for a “ring ridge”, the step created about 1/4” from
the top of the cylinder by the wear from the rings. If a ring ridge is detectable, order new cylinders with pistons. If not,
order pistons alone.
The pistons and liners are available in an “A” or “B” size, which differ by a microscopic amount. The difference is a
result of tolerances in manufacturing, and neither is really considered an oversize for the other. Each piston must match
the liner it’s installed in. There is no reason not to ensure that all cylinders within the same engine match, although
differences probably wouldn’t be noticeable.
The alloy piston in the V12 has a couple of steel inserts cast into the inside of the skirt. These inserts are a thermal
expansion control device; they not only help control how much the piston expands when hot, they also help prevent it
from ovalizing, which most pistons normally do due to the geometry of the pin bosses. When the engine goes from cold
to hot, this piston design helps maintain a close tolerance between the piston and the cylinder. This, in turn, reduces ring
leakage, piston/cylinder wear and noise. The fact is, these items make forged aluminum pistons look like lawn mower
parts. The owner seeking to replace the pistons would be hard pressed to find better ones than the originals.
ALUMINUM CYLINDER LINERS: Apparently aluminum cylinder liners are available for the Jaguar V12 from GKN
Squeezeform in the UK. Such use would require the replacement of the pistons as well, since the stock pistons are
designed (via the use of a special alloy, as well as steel expansion-control inserts) for the expansion rate of the stock iron
liners.
Jeffrey Gram contacted Rob Beere Engineering, which reported: “In the 1980’s the Jaguar Group C endurance racers
used aluminum liners. It is actually not pure aluminum but a compound called nickasil or similar. This material is very
light and is treated (don’t know with what). In 1986-1988 the alu-liners were not used anymore for endurance races
since the wear was too big and inferior to cast iron. Apparently this nickasil material has a tendency to pick up material
by which the pick-up process is accelerated and the material wears out quickly. The nickasil was only used on race
engines with frequent liner renewal.”
101
The V8 engine used in the XK8 and XJ8 comes with nickasil cylinders.
PISTON & CYLINDER CLEARANCES: According to Bob Tilley, “Under the Group C TWR build instructions for
the V12, the piston to bore clearances for cylinders 1A through 5A and 1B through 5B is .0045-.005, whereas the
clearance for piston to bore in cylinders 6A and 6B is .0055-.006.”
These absolute values may be of little use to the normal V12 owner, since this is referring to racing engines where the
pistons and the liners are likely to be significantly different than stock. The implications are fairly obvious, however:
The rearmost cylinders are more likely to develop clearance problems due to poor cooling. There is no history of
problems in the street application, but the information is included here for those who might make use of it. Perhaps the
anal-retentive might choose to measure the clearances in their piston/liner sets and put the largest clearances at the back.
PISTON RING END GAPS: Technical Service Bulletin 12-33 is a correction to the piston ring end gap specs given in
the ROM. It says, “Insert the correct piston ring end gap specifications into the XJS Repair Manual, sections 12.17.10,
12.25.26, 12.41.05 and the Piston Ring Data in section 05 (Engine Tuning and Data).” Well, it’s already off to a bad
start; 12.25.26 doesn’t exist at all (at least not in the ©1975 ROM), 12.41.05 doesn’t mention the end gap spec, and
12.17.10 refers to Section 05 -- which is an incorrect reference in both the ROM and the TSB, those specs are in section
04!
Which page in Section 04? Another good question. These pages are printed sideways, evidently copied from some
other document. When you get to the bottom of the left column of page 04-5, proceed to the top of the left column on
page 04-6. When you reach the bottom of that column, proceed to the top of the right column on page 04-5, and then
proceed directly downward through the right column on page 04-6. It will be helpful to mark arrows on these pages to
remember this.
The piston ring specs start at the bottom of the left column on page 04-6 and continue at the top of the right column on
page 04-5. The gaps in question are actually near the top of the right column on page 04-5. Revise as follows: The
spec end gap for the top ring should be 0.016”-0.021”, and the spec end gap for the second ring should be 0.016”0.026”. The spec for the oil ring is not mentioned in this TSB.
TOTAL SEAL PISTON RINGS: Total Seal, Inc., makes a type of piston ring set in which the second ring is a twopiece ring. Effectively, it puts two rings in a single groove with the gaps staggered -- so gases cannot pass either gap.
As a normal ring wears, the gap gets larger and the leakage increases accordingly. With Total Seal rings, the gap is
covered by the second ring, so it won’t leak no matter how much it wears.
Apparently, these rings are highly recommended by just about everyone who has ever used them -- including high
percentages of competitors in several types of racing. Testing shows considerably less leakage even compared to new
conventional rings. Not only will performance improve, but the reduced blowby should result in less contamination of
the oil.
SEALING LINERS TO BLOCK: The liners (cylinders) are slid into openings in the block, and the head is bolted down
on top of them. The upper portion of the liner is thick while the lower “skirt” is thinner, so there is a step on the OD
where it goes from thick to thin. The thick portion of the liner is pinched between the head gasket and the ledge in the
block, with the thinner skirt protruding down inside a bore in the crankcase. The head gasket seals the joint at the top,
while the joint at the ledge at the bottom of the thick portion of the liner is sealed only with a sealant applied when
assembling. There is very little pressure across this joint, but it nevertheless needs to be reliably sealed since there is
coolant above it and the crankcase below. A sealing failure would result in coolant in the oil pan.
The ©1975 ROM, Section 12.41.05 step 74, says to use Hylomar when installing the liners. However, as described in
the discussion on sealing the tappet block to the head on page 70, Hylomar is not recommended by its manufacturer for
metal-to-metal joints since it is supposed to be a gasket dressing and will not harden; it eventually oozes out of joints,
102
allowing them to leak. The ©1975 ROM recommends Hylomar for the tappet block as well, but later editions
recommend Loctite 573 and apparently 574 or 518 will also work.
The liner-to-block joint, like the tappet block-to-head joint, is metal-to-metal. However, the later ROM apparently
never changed its recommendation from Hylomar for the liner installation -- perhaps because any leaks that have
occurred were not obvious and didn’t result in complaints, or perhaps because the liner-to-block joint is a much higher
compressive stress joint than the tappet block joint and therefore may be expected to seal reasonably well regardless of
sealant -- the iron liner will just dig into the soft aluminum block. Regardless, Loctite 573, 574, or 518 should be a
much better choice than Hylomar for sealing the liner-to-block joint.
Joe Bialy points out that the application guidelines for 600-series Loctite products may be confusing. “The Locktite
book specifically states that the 638 family of compounds (603, 620, 638, 641, 648, and 660) will "retain cylinder
liners".” The Jaguar V12 liners are “cylinder liners”, but 600-series Loctite products should not be used here. 600series Loctite products are intended to retain the type of cylinder liners that are pressed into bores in a block. The
Jaguar V12 liners are not pressed into bores; they are slip-fit into openings and securely held in place by the head.
Retention is not an issue; the only necessity is sealing -- which calls for the 500-series products.
Just in case it isn’t clear enough in the ROM: The sealant on the liner-to-block joint should be applied only under the
step on the liner or on top of the ledge in the block, not down the sides of the liner or on the inside diameter of the bore
in the block.
Performance Upgrades
COMBUSTION CHAMBER MODIFICATIONS: With an advanced combustion chamber design, the H.E. engine has
11.5:1 compression and runs on 89 octane unleaded (Unleaded Plus). Almost any mods to the engine internals would
endanger the integrity of this design, and the owner would risk having to lower the compression radically and/or face
buying octane boosters ($$$). His fuel economy would get worse, and if he didn’t do his job right his performance
would get worse, too.
One modification possibly worth considering is to install the European pistons, raising the compression to 12.5:1.
According to Chad Bolles, the only difference in the engine is the piston, which has a slightly different pin bore location.
This change will obviously require higher octane fuel. The European XJ-S H.E. reportedly produces about 30 more HP
than the US version, but much of this is probably in the lack of catalytic convertors and other emission considerations;
Mike Morrin says, “I would estimate that the extra CR alone is worth 5-8HP.”
ENGINE ENLARGEMENT: There are two ways to get more power out of an engine: tune it to obtain more
horsepower per liter, and enlargement to provide more liters. Of the two, enlargement has some definite advantages: if
the horsepower per liter is not changed significantly, the durability may not suffer; the “manners” of the engine,
important in street applications, may remain as stock or even improve; fuel economy may remain nearly unchanged; and
the use of higher octane fuel or octane boosters may not be necessary.
Indications are that the Jaguar V12 has a lot of room for expansion. A 5.3 liter (90mm bore x 70mm stroke) for two
decades, it was enlarged by Jaguar in the early 90’s to 6.0 liter (90mm bore x 78mm stroke). AJ6 Engineering (see page
713) once offered engines bored and stroked in sizes up to 7.1 liter and 405 BHP.
The room for expanding the bore seems to be limited to around 98mm. The stroke, however, can go a long way, and
since it is so over-square to begin with, getting too under-square is not a problem. Bill White (see page 721) has
prepared a Jaguar V12 for use in a 3/4-scale replica of a Spitfire fighter plane. He expanded the bore and stroke to
96mm x 95mm -- almost an inch of additional stroke -- for a displacement of 8.4 liters! This was done without
significant modification to the block, and the stock H.E. heads were used. At 3000 rpm, this engine produces 500 ft-lb
of torque in naturally-aspirated form, and 820 ft-lb when supercharged as it is in the aircraft.
According to White, that isn’t the limit by any means. He reports that an outfit in the UK called Forward Engineering
103
prepares Jaguar V12’s for use in offshore racing boats. They install a spacer 3/4” thick between the block and the head,
and use liners the same amount longer than stock to provide longer cylinders. Longer studs hold the head on, and since
3/4” is the length of a link of the timing chain the addition of four links allows an otherwise completely stock timing
chain scheme to be used. White says the engines so assembled are 9.3 liter, and are very successful at offshore boat
racing.
Changes to the engine displacement require modifying or replacing the EFI. The stock EFI is hard to modify; it has a
fixed (trimmable, but fixed) map for intake manifold vacuum and RPM versus fuel. If the displacement is altered, this
relationship changes. One solution is an aftermarket EFI system that is completely programmable and re-programmable
(see page 310). Most choose to ditch the EFI at this point for carburetors, introducing the problems outlined on page
310. And the emissions inspector will not smile at them.
LOTSA VALVES: There have been experiments to adapt the 4-valve DOHC head from the Jaguar AJ6 engine to the
V12. The cylinder spacing and bolt patterns are the same -- according to Roger Bywater, not because the AJ6 was
derived from the V12, but rather because there was a plan to put the V12’s H.E. head on some versions of the AJ6. If
the DOHC heads are just bolted onto the V12, on one side the intake ports will be on the outside and the exhaust ports
will be toward the center -- not good. So, one of the AJ6 heads must be turned around backwards -- and some
complicated fabrication work is required to get such things as the cam sprockets rearranged. Bill White (page 721) has
worked with this idea, among others.
Steve Averill reports that the Autumn 1988 issue of Jaguar Quarterly has an article on “a 60 valve DOHC V12 that was
under development by Warrior Automotive Research. They expected to achieve 100 bhp/litre in low tune with a 5.8l
engine. The head had 3 inlet & 2 exhaust valves per cylinder.” No word on what’s happened since, but Warrior’s phone
number was given as 061-928 3284 in Cheshire if anyone wants to try a call.
BOOST: There has been at least one experiment in Australia in turbocharging the XJ-S, but the results were apparently
not good. Officially the problems were blamed on the inability to assemble a drivetrain that would handle the 1000+ hp
for more than a few seconds.
Chris Sleeman (also in Australia) reports on a 1998 endeavor: “When I picked up my Daimler Double Six yesterday
from my local Jaguar specialist, he showed me an XJ-S he is working on. It is a '76 model, with a 6.8 Litre Twin Turbo
V12. The motor was built by them, and the customer is apparently going to enter it into the Targa Tasmania in April.
The motor is being dynoed next week, but they say it puts out around 700hp. It is running 0.8 bar of boost at the
moment, and will be using Motec injection.”
Somewhere out there, Bradley Smith is driving around his XJ-S with twin belt-driven Whipple superchargers.
NITROUS: Martin R. Fooks has a nitrous system in his XJ-S: “The Nitrous system was supplied by Trevor Langfield
(page 719) and is a customized “High Power Nitrous” system. Because of the size of the hit to the engine (150BHP)
they installed a progressive controller, which fits neatly in my car where the trip computer used to be. This enables me
to control the way the extra power is delivered to the engine, such as starting power, ending power, time delay and time
from starting level to ending level.
“I am very happy with the Nitrous installation, which really seems to be very smooth on the V12. Trevor’s people have
the computer equipment to work out power and 0-60MPH times and that is where the figures came from. As a side
note, it ran 5.3 seconds 0-60 with a standard TH400 and only 75BHP jets in the NOS system instead of the 150 jets.
“Nitrous got a very bad press in the past, caused mostly by people adding too much power to their engines, or by not
richening the fuel mixture when the NOS was injected. The casualties in my case have been the torque converter and the
rear IRS mounts, which were all bar 1 ripped off.” (See page 402 regarding rear suspension mount weakness.)
“The engine is stock except for the exhaust and intake, and I have had no problems at all with it (unlike the torque
converter).
104
“The builders of my system told me that they do not recommend putting any more than 50-75BHP into your engine
without using a progressive system as avoidable damage to the engine could result.
“Their main concerns with adding 150BHP were not with the engine as they believe it to be a very strong and reliable
item. The standard transmission and torque converter were their main objection to the increase which as it turns out was
well founded.”
“The amount of power provided in total by the NOS system can be changed by installing new jets at an English price of
7 pounds per pair, so if 150BHP proves too much to handle, you can always fit a smaller pair taking very little time and
expense. 200BHP is the maximum obtainable by my kit. My suppliers stated to me that as a rule they do not fit systems
with more than 50% of the original engine power (which is why I’m only using 150 Jets instead of 200). Obviously this
is not the case if you bullet-proof your engine.”
CAMSHAFT REPLACEMENT: Most performance enthusiasts will agree that replacing the camshaft (or camshafts;
the Jag V12 has two, some cars have four) is the most effective way to change the performance of an engine. The entire
personality of a car can be radically altered by merely changing the camshafts.
Chad Bolles reports that Isky makes high performance camshafts for the Jaguar V12.
Rob Beere Racing Services (see page 714) also offers hot cams, as well as tappet shims in extreme thicknesses that may
be necessary for such installations.
Note that any camshaft alterations should be accompanied by an EFI system modification; there will be increased airflow
at wide open throttle, but since the feedback circuit is disabled under those conditions the fuel supply will remain at the
original fixed map with no trim. The engine will therefore run lean at full throttle, a situation that begs for burned
pistons and valves.
There has been some confusion regarding the difference between pre-H.E. and H.E. cams, since published valve timing
data on the two engines seemed to differ. However, Bywater points out that they actually use the same part number
camshafts. “When the V12 was launched the valve timing was quoted in Walter Hassan’s SAE paper 720163 as being
17,59/59,17. When the H.E. version was launched in 1981 the supplement to the manual quoted cam timing as
13,55/55,13. In fact, the same cam profile had been in use since the early 1970s and continued through into the 1990s
under part numbers C42176/7, therefore all EFI V12s were produced with these cams. Now it is not widely known that
for some time the V12 was mildly plagued with excessive tappet noise and in the course of dealing with the problem the
quietening ramps on the cams were altered at least once around 1972-3. I was personally involved in an investigation
into the causes of a spate of tappet noise around 1978 and am not aware of any cam change ever being made to the V12
in production for any other reason than to reduce valve gear noise.
“Measurement of true cam timing is not a straightforward matter and it has been accepted practice to measure from the
point where the quietening ramp ceases and the lift curve proper commences. For those who are not familiar with the
term, a quietening ramp is an area at the flank of the cam where the rate of lift is small, at around 0.0005” per cam
degree, and to be fully effective must extend rather higher than the widest clearance likely to be encountered. The idea is
that any reasonable running clearance found in use it will always be taken up at a predetermined velocity which should
not give rise to noise. If the ramp geometry is changed, as we know happened on the V12, then the timing as measured
at the top of the ramp could also vary and this accounts for the small difference of timing quoted at different times in its
life.”
Mike Cogswell elaborates: “Duration itself can be misleading, since almost nobody measures duration from the instant
the valve leaves the seat until the instant it returns. Instead, duration is commonly measured at some point where there
is noticable flow, albeit typically a very low fit. This is important, since different cam grinders measure duration at
different lift, hence one man’s long duration might be less than another’s short duration. Caveat emptor, as always.”
Bywater again: “It is perhaps of interest to note that over the years Jaguar used virtually identical valve timing on all
their mainstream engines. Consider the following:
SS 2.5 & 3.5 litre
16,56/56,16
105
XK 3.4,3.8,4.2
15,57/57,15
V12
17,59/59,17 (13,55/55,13)
Clearly having found something that worked there was great reluctance to change from it, although the smaller
displacement engines often had softer timing to beef-up the low speed torque as the following examples show:
SS 1.5 litre
10,50/50,10
XK 240 saloon
10,50/50,10 (5/16” lift)
Note also that hot cams might not have the expected effect. AJ6 Engineering (page 713) once offered a milder cam
than stock, and the result was higher mid-range torque and a nearly one full second quicker 0-to-60 time. Bywater
explains: “...we introduced some short duration cams for the V12 back in about 1984. They certainly boosted mid-range
performance, especially appreciated with the 3 speed BW and GM transmissions, but suffered a marketing problem
because they gave slightly less peak power so we eventually discontinued them. We sense that attitudes are changing
and many drivers are realising that a performance gain around 40-70 m.p.h. is far more valuable than adding to a rarely
seen top speed so we may well offer a modernised version of such a camshaft again in the near future.”
TORQUE LINK: When the engine/transmission turns the driveshaft, the reaction is a twisting force trying to tilt the
engine/transmission assembly on its mounts. There are only three mounts, two soft rubber mounts under the engine and
the complicated spring assembly under the tranny. The tranny mount really does little to counter this force; the torque is
entirely taken by the two motor mounts.
Since the mounts are soft, the torque can move the engine around quite a bit. If the car is not stock and producing more
torque than originally intended, the left-side mount may actually be damaged since it is put in tension under extreme
conditions.
A racing trick is to add a fourth connection between the engine and the chassis. By adding a link, torque can be taken
up before the engine moves very far or stresses the mounts too much. Newer FWD cars are usually designed with such
a link, but front-engine/rear-wheel-drive cars typically rely on rubber in tension.
Under torque, the engine twists, which means the top moves to the right, the left side moves up, etc. A link can be
added anywhere that restricts this movement, but it is usually preferable to put it either on the left side of the engine
connecting downward to the chassis, or from somewhere near the top of the engine connecting to the left side of the
compartment. Either of these locations puts the new link in tension (preferable for such parts) and helps keep the motor
mounts in compression (protecting the rubber).
Backyard mechanics have been known to accomplish this fix by bolting a length of chain between the left-side exhaust
manifold and the chassis. Under normal conditions, the chain is slack and does nothing but rattle. When the engine tries
to lift, the chain pulls tight and stops the motion. This method does work, but it is hardly a suitable fix for an XJ-S; the
chain makes too much noise, and the sudden jolt when the chain gets tight is not conducive to an impressive ride.
To do a professional job, a better idea is to install a link made from threaded rod with some rubber bushings (available at
any auto parts store), washers, nuts, and some fabricated brackets to provide holes for the bushings to fit into. Rubber
bushings are essential, since a rigid connection would transmit vibration directly to the chassis. If necessary, shield the
rubber parts from radiant heat from the exhaust system.
Alternatively, the ingenious mechanic may find a way to make a link from one of those FWD cars fit.
It should also be noted that the motor mounts on the XJ-S are not actually between the engine and the chassis, but
between the engine and the front suspension subframe. This provides two layers of isolation between engine vibrations
and the chassis: the motor mounts and the subframe mounts. Hence, adding a torque link from the engine directly to the
chassis would defeat some of this isolation and perhaps expose the occupants to increased noise and vibration. If
possible, it would be preferable to connect the torque link to the subframe as well. Or, use really soft bushings on it.
106
Intake Upgrades
AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT: K&N Engineering, Inc., makes permanent air filters consisting of special fabric
sandwiched between aluminum mesh and treated with oil. They have much less flow restriction than stock paper filters
while providing improved filtration. Tests on race engines show only a slight drop in power compared to no filters at all!
Since these filters are permanent and cleanable, they can even save money in the long run.
The K&N part number is 33-2011 for any V12 XJ-S. Note that stock air filters changed when the ABS brakes were
added; since the housing shifted forward, the blank-off area over the throat had to move rearward. The K&N filters
have no blank-off area, so the same part number fits either application.
Note that the 33-2011 filters will also fit most XJ12’s, but not the last couple of years. The XJ40- and X300-based
XJ12’s (1993-on) went to a remote filter housing similar to that used on the 6-cylinder XJ40 and X300, except that they
have two of them -- one on each side of the car. If your car has air filter housings that are mounted right on the butterfly
housings and uses filters that are 16.5” x 5.75”, you need the 33-2011. If your filters are 8.37” square, you need 332003. The K&N catalog also lists a 33-2579 as fitting some V12’s, but this is apparently an error.
IMPORTANT: The K&N’s look like they can go in either way outward and either end forward, but you must install
them with the flat side towards the butterfly. In other words, install the filter into the cover so it sits flush with the bulk
of the element within the cover, and then install the cover onto the engine. Installing the other way, with the bulk of the
filter nearer the butterfly, can cause the butterfly to get fouled with the filter element. This would be seriously bad,
possibly causing the throttle to jam wide open. The concern is exacerbated with AJ6 Engineering’s enlarged butterflies,
but there’s no reason not to be careful with the OEM butterflies.
Needless to say, if you’ve been running these filters the wrong way around, you should clean them before reinstalling
them correctly. Otherwise you’ll be putting the dirty side of the filter facing the butterfly.
Installed correctly, the K&N’s don’t seem to cause a problem with the OEM butterflies because they are pretty stiff. If
you want to be safe, it is a simple matter to fab a device to positively keep the filter element and the butterfly apart. This
author used stainless steel wire 1/10” (2.5mm) thick from an old radio antenna. Just fashion a loop in the wire to fit over
one of the four bolts that hold the air filter housing to the butterfly housing, then a gentle arch over to the diagonally
opposite bolt. Make sure the butterfly moves freely underneath the arch before buttoning up the assembly. If the air
filter element decides to distort, the arch will keep it out of the butterfly.
The correct end of the K&N filter forward is not as critical, but you might as well get it right. The flat edge is a bit
longer on one end than on the other, and the longer edge goes towards the front of the car.
Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering says, “...we gave up using K&N filters some time ago because they fall to bits
around the edges where the air box clamps up. We raised the matter with K&N Europe, for whom we do consultancy
work on occasions, but they claim not to be aware of the problem...” AJ6 Engineering now offers their own design
permanent washable foam air filters.
Glen E. MacDonald notes, “Roger Bywater gave up using K&N filters because "they fall to bits around the edges where
the airbox clamps up". True enough. However, I was determined not to trash an otherwise perfectly acceptable (and
expensive to replace) pair of filters. The fix I found was to take four suitable lengths of windshield washer hose, split
lengthwise. These are then slid over the edges of the filter, after cleaning off whats left of the 'bits' Bywater refers to. I
made this alteration over 3 years ago and haven't had any problem since.”
Of course, K&N filters come with a “million mile warranty”, so another option would be to gripe to K&N about the
problem.
For some of us, performance is not the issue with air filters; the wear rate of an engine can be closely related to the
filtration of the air intake, and any risk of inferior filtration would not be worthwhile. K&N claims that a NASCAR
stock car fitted with its filters will outperform a car with no filters over a 500-mile event, since the deterioration of the
engine due to contaminated air over 500 miles will exceed the power loss due to the intake restriction of a K&N filter.
K&N claims excellent filtration -- although there have been some contradictory reports from other sources. K&N filters
107
contain a layer of cotton soaked with sticky oil; as the air passes through the cotton, particles should stick to the oil.
Such a system normally is not described as a particular size micron filter, since it really should stop all particles
regardless of size. The stock paper filter, on the other hand, is a porous media filter, and particles below a certain size
are free to pass right through.
Either K&N or the stock paper filter is probably acceptable from a filtration standpoint. However, speaking as an
engineer, I must express doubts about the filtration efficiency of most of the foam filters I have seen (I haven’t seen the
AJ6 Engineering foam filters). A foam filter works on a similar theory as the K&N, the foam providing a media for the
air to pass through that is coated with sticky oil. However, the passages between the cotton fibers on a K&N filter are
very tiny indeed, it’s hard to imagine how a speck of dust could get through without sticking, but some foam filters you
can see through. And even some of those you can’t see through appear to have passages that are quite large. And I’ve
also seen foam deteriorate, with crumbs of foam breaking off and going into the inlet. And even if the chunks of foam
don’t harm the engine, note that each chunk leaving leaves an opening for more dirt to pass through the filter
unimpeded.
OPENING UP THE AIR INTAKES: Each of the air cleaner housings has a long tapered tube with a relatively small
opening for the air intake. The purpose of the small intake opening is to accelerate the air to near Mach 1 at wide open
throttle. This prevents intake sound from coming forward through the intake. In other words, it makes the car quiet.
Unfortunately, the air is now moving fast, and there’s an air filter up ahead. If the air is allowed to simply run into the
filter, the energy associated with the speed will be wasted, and the result is a loss of pressure. Therefore, Jaguar
provides the tapered tube to gradually and efficiently slow the air down, recovering most of the energy and pressure.
Jaguar designed this tapered tube as long as they could fit under the hood.
Also unfortunately, once the air reaches Mach 1, the passage is “choked” and all the sucking the engine can manage will
not increase the amount of air flowing through it. The opening therefore forms an absolute control on the maximum
amount of air going into the engine -- and therefore the HP generated.
If you cut off this intake tube and form a large opening for the air intake into the air cleaner housing, you will eliminate
this restriction. If you interfere with the mounting of the temperature sensor in the left side intake tube, relocate it into
the housing itself (drill a hole and use a nut on the inside); it can sense the air temperature anywhere in there. Because
the EFI system detects manifold vacuum, the system will automatically compensate for the increased airflow; no tuning
modifications are required. There is no effect on emissions, so there should be no complaints from inspectors.
At part throttle (most of the time with an engine this powerful), the butterfly acts as an air-accelerating restriction, and
no sound gets out anyway. The car will sound like it did before. However, when you open it up, you will be greeted
with a sonorous growl from under the hood. This is a very sexy sound, but some Jag owners may not like it.
The performance improvement goes along with the noise. In any situation where there is still no sound, there is no
change in performance either. When the engine growls, there is more airflow than there was before.
This mod will have no effect on fuel economy, except when you hear the growl; at that point, increased fuel use
accompanies the increased airflow and increased power.
You can give this mod a trial run without much effort. Unscrew the air temperature sensor, then reconnect the wire to it
and tape it down anywhere convenient. Then, remove both air filter covers and tie the air filters in place with some wire.
This setup will provide the same performance (and a little more noise) than the intake tube removal described above.
OPENING UP THE AIR INTAKES - VERSION 2: AJ6 Engineering (page 713) has gone through several variations
on air filter housing intakes attempting to provide an optimum balance between unrestricted flow and noise. What they
now offer with their induction upgrade kits are replacement covers that appear largely unchanged from OEM except that
there is an additional intake opening on the bottom with a hose leading to another little bellmouth intake mounted in the
vicinity of the front anti-sway bar. Perhaps AJ6 Engineering will sell these covers separately, or perhaps one could just
adopt the idea and fab similar additional intakes.
108
OPENING UP THE AIR INTAKES - VERSION 3: FasterJags (page716) offers a replacement air intake system called
the Growler. It replaces the entire air filter housing assembly with a pipe that curves forward and has a cylindrical K&N
filter mounted on the front end.
COLD AIR INTAKE: Any engineer will tell you that an internal combustion engine will run more efficiently (more
power and better fuel economy) on cooler intake air. Most automobiles nowadays (including some Jaguars) have hoses
directing cool outside air into the air cleaners rather than the hot air of the engine compartment. The XJ-S is a notable
exception; perhaps they felt that the hoses would make their engine compartment less attractive.
While opening up the intakes on the air filter housings as described above, a flange can be provided for an intake hose.
The author’s installation used 3” exhaust pipe, but 2½” pipe would work nearly as well (still four times the area of the
stock inlet) and would probably be easier to install. Intake hoses in many sizes can be found at most parts stores, and
some have built-in clamps. Remember to provide flexibility in the system, since the engine moves around on its mounts.
All of that was easy. The hard part is routing the intake hoses somewhere. One possibility on the XJ-S is the back end
of the headlight compartments. By making a hole and providing a flange for the hose (2½” or 3” pipe again), cool air
can be routed from existing openings just inside the grille through the space behind the headlights and into the intakes.
An opening must be made in an unseen panel within the headlight compartment to permit air flow. The modification will
also require relocating the headlight relays. Be sure to clean up the intake path as well as possible when you’re finished,
and check your air filters for debris after driving a while.
On cars with ABS brakes, the air cleaner assemblies are essentially unchanged except that they are moved forward to
avoid the brake system. The same basic mod works; the intake hose just needs to be a bit shorter.
The good news here is that this mod will reduce the noise from the Version 1 mod. The intake hoses, as well as the
sheer length of the intake path, will help dampen the growl.
Since the EFI temperature sensor will detect the cooler intake air temperature, once again no tuning mods are needed.
The cooler air provides improvements at all operating conditions, and will improve fuel economy. There is even less
tendency to overheat. The only effect on emissions is a reduction in nitrogen oxide emissions.
Peyton Gill reports, “I used a Dremel to cut the horn out of the air filter cover and then rounded the “not so perfect
hole” with a grinding stone mounted in a drill press. I did not use the exhaust pipe Kirby mentioned, I went to Home
Depot and got 2 inch gray PVC couplings. The ones I got came from the electrical dept. The couplings I used have
threads on one side and open for a PVC pipe on the other. The conduit works good because you can get a “nut” that
fits the threaded side. This nut I’m talking about is more like a threaded ring, it is very common in the electrical conduit
world. The rounded hole you leave when you cut the horn out is close to the same size as the threaded side of the
coupling and the nut inside the air filter holds the coupling tightly in place. The hole I cut was not perfect so I sealed any
openings with black RTV (silicon). I did have to relocate the ballast resistor pack on the right hand side and managed
not to have to relocate the relays on the left hand side.
“I used a hole saw ( maybe 2 1/4 inch) or whatever size slightly larger than the conduit coupling threads to cut holes in
the panels behind the headlights. Since the hole was only slightly larger than the threads so they screw fairly tightly in
plus a little more RTV to be sure they hold. I got a flexible hose from Pep Boys (they have hoses made for air filter
intakes). I took my conduit coupling with me and found a hose that fit snugly over the pipe side. The hoses have
clamps that snap into place and one of the hoses fit my conduit perfectly.
“All that was fairly easy; the good part comes when you attack the “hidden panel” described in Kirby’s book. This panel
is between the headlight opening in the front and where the hole was cut in the engine compartment. You can see it
easily enough when the headlight assembly is removed. Seeing the panel is one thing, cutting a hole in it’s another.
There is not much room to work or cut. I got a 12 inch extension for my drill and put the hole saw on this and cut a
couple 2 inch holes in the panel.
“The air temp sensor also has to be relocated. I drilled a hole in the air filter cover and placed the sensor in the direct air
109
path. I did not have a nut with the same size threads as the sensor so I cut the fitting off the old horn and used it as a
nut. I don’t think the threads are anything special, I just did not want to make a trip to the hardware store to get one. I
had to extend the wires a little.”
Pictures of both the author’s, Gill’s, and several other installations can be viewed at
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/ColdAirIntake.html
John Goodman reports that sometime in the early 90’s an access panel was provided within the front wheel wells to
enable changing the headlight bulbs without removing the assemblies from the front. On the earlier cars, such an access
wouldn’t have helped because that panel inside the compartment would have blocked access anyway. So, in conjunction
with providing the access panel, the unseen panel was also changed; it now has a “hand hole” in it. That being the case,
the task of providing this cool air intake scheme might have gotten easier, since the hand hole should serve for an air
passage.
COLD AIR INTAKE - VERSION 2: Scott Horner, apparently before he became aware of this book, designed his own
cold air intake system: “I based the cold air intake on my car on a friend’s XJ-S race car’s set-up. He has approx. 4”
tubing going into the front of the inner guards, with the air filters mounted within that panel (in front of the wheels). But
this is a bit rough for a road car as all you can hear is induction roar...
“For my car, I visited a panel beater friend to modify the guards, etc., as I wanted the mod to look as if it had come out
of the factory...
“I’ll try and describe this without pictures...We used 2 1/2” tubing which is bent to come out of the inner guard and face
up to the original air intakes, which have been cut down (with new tubing) to just a stub and attached via flexible tubing.
“Within the guard, the tubing is bent down (to vertical) which then meets up with another piece of tubing (via flexible
hose) that is welded into the valance on the outer corners. These tube holes are cut just under the bumper, so are fairly
unobtrusive and with the angle of them look fairly sexy anyway...
“The great thing about them (apart from the cold air), is if you get someone to give the engine a rev while you’ve got
your hand over one of the intakes, you can really feel the engine sucking! There’ll be hell to pay the day I hit a
sparrow!”
COLD AIR INTAKE - BOLT-ON VERSION: John Goodman reports: “My (unmodified) ’89 XJR-S 6.0 has different
air cleaner boxes (part numbers SPE 1008 and SPE 1009 ) with large bore intakes. These take I believe the standard air
filters and fit the standard intake manifolds. In other words it’s all simple bolt-on improvements for any V12.
“Even more interesting is a special very neatly designed radiator top crossbeam (part number SPD1164) which has quite
large smooth oval air intakes incorporated in it. The air intakes in this crossbeam line up perfectly with the air boxes.
“It all looks very neat, but they are JaguarSport parts and won’t come cheap!!!”
Regarding that top crossbeam SPD1164, Goodman adds: “I think the part no. has been superseded with SPD 1428.
This is the part no. listed for '93 XJR-S (American spec). The only difference AFAIK 2 is that this part has mounting
holes for the location of the Ign power amp, (necessitated because the manifolds were different) and rubber connecting
hose. There is a good picture of this component in Jaguar World vol.2 no.2; anybody handy with a welder could modify
a standard one.”
IMPROVED THROTTLE BORES -- HOME MACHINIST VERSION: If you have access to a machine shop, you
can make a minor improvement in intake airflow with little fuss. Remove the air filter housings, and remove the butterfly
housings. You will need a #30 Torx screwdriver to remove the butterfly housings. NOTE: The ports the hoses
connect to may look similar, but they may be different! Be sure to carefully record which hose connects to which port
2
AFAIK is Internet shorthand for “As far as I know”.
110
prior to disconnecting the hoses.
Referring to Figure 8, machine a rounded edge on the inlet into the butterfly housing. This modification should not be
attempted by hand, as smoothness and consistency is important. It is important that the radius blend smoothly into the
inner surface of the passage, but it will form an edge with the air filter mounting surface.
Before starting, ensure that the machining will not interfere with the butterfly seat nor with any of the vacuum ports near
the butterfly seat; by avoiding machining more than 3/8” into the throat, problems should be averted. Also, avoid cutting
into the openings for the two bolts that hold the butterfly housing onto the manifold; while doing so wouldn’t cause any
leakage, it may cause a whistle as the air flows past the opening. Keeping the outer diameter at 2-13/16” should be
acceptable.
111
A IR F IL T E R
BUTTERFLY
H O U S IN G
H O U S IN G
G ASKET
R E M O V E M A T 'L
AS SHO W N
3 /8 "
R 1 /2 "
1 /2 "
Figure 8: Butterfly Housing Airflow Improvement
Enlarge the opening in the air filter housing to 2-13/16”. The gaskets typically are already this size, but final trimming
can be done after assembly by using a razor knife before installing the filter.
This modification has not yet been tried, so performance improvements are unquantified. In theory, this mod can
provide an airflow improvement (and hence a horsepower increase) of several percent. Considering the proximity of the
blanked-off section of the air filter, the improvement may be even more significant. There should be no change in
112
performance other than at wide-open throttle. Since the ECU senses and corrects for changes in manifold vacuum, no
tuning changes are required.
ENLARGED THROTTLE BORES: AJ6 Engineering (see page 713) offers revised butterfly housings on an exchange
basis in which the entire bore is enlarged from 2-1/2” to 2-7/8” (32% airflow area increase) and larger butterflies are
fitted. Note that their kit includes low-loss foam filters and air filter housings with additional intake openings, fulfilling
some of the other suggestions above. The kit also includes an electronic gadget to revise the ECU response, since the
larger butterflies will have different airflow characteristics than the stock ones relative to throttle position. AJ6
Engineering claims a 20-25 horsepower increase with this kit.
Roger Bywater describes the product: “We produce the large disks ourselves by firstly, cutting blank disks out of brass
sheet, then, using a special fixture we machine them to exact size and to get the correct closing angle in the enlarged
throttle bore. They are not simply turned disks and it is important to get the geometry right so that the correct signal is
generated across the throttle edge vacuum ports which are themselves critical on size and position. Boring out the
throttle bodies exposes a larger diameter portion of the tapping so we install new tapping inserts drilled to produce the
required vacuum signal from the larger passage.
“We also machine the spindle slots which otherwise would not accept the larger throttles and we then rebuild the whole
assembly with new bearings and seals, centralise the disks and adjust to the requisite 0.002" closing gap.
“The radiused entry which we machine on the throttle body is important to ensure that the throttle bore passes the
maximum flow by not creating turbulence at the entry point - which is what happens with square edged entry of the
standard throttles. We supply a set of specially made gaskets to match the large bore where it joins the manifold and
also for the larger radiused entry joint to the filter assembly.”
Chris Carley says, “I bought just the throttle bodies without the filters or cans. I had to drill out the backs of the filter
cans to 3-1/8" and also to my surprise had to grind out the tops and sides of the manifolds to match the ID of the throttle
bodies. Note the bigger throttles will jam against the standard air filter at wide open - AJ6 & K&N clear though.”
INTAKE MANIFOLD MODIFICATION: AJ6 Engineering (page 713) offers an enhancement called the Plus Torque
Conversion where they cut the intake manifolds open and install little intake horns into the openings into each runner,
then weld the manifolds back together. This apparently not only provides a smooth entry into each runner inside the
manifold, but it also makes all 12 runners the same length -- by making the shorter ones (the middle four) as long as the
longer ones (the outer two), thereby increasing the Helmholtz resonance benefits for all and enhancing the EFI system’s
feedback strategy to keep all six cylinders on each bank operating at an optimum fuel/air mixture.
David Buchner claims that the revised intake manifolds introduced in the early 90’s -- identifiable by the huge “Jaguar
V12” lettering across the top -- already have the improvements offered in the Plus Torque conversion.
Other Modifications
OIL COOLING: The standard oil cooler on an XJ-S is a “relief” unit, meaning it only cools the oil that doesn’t go
through the engine. However, as pointed out by Bob Tilley, the XJ-S sold in Germany is fitted with a “full flow” oil
cooler system, and the parts are available through Jaguar. We can make assumptions about why the German cars would
be different than other cars, possibly involving those Autobahns.
John Goodman adds, “It’s worth pointing out to others who own later model V12’s who may not be aware that all V12
HE engines after engine no. 8S44317 had full flow oil cooling, can’t remember the year this was introduced.”
Both oil systems, as well as almost any other in automotive use, work like this: Oil is drawn from a pickup in the sump
into the oil pump. The oil pump is a positive displacement pump, meaning it will move a particular amount of oil for
each rotation, regardless of how much pressure it has to apply to move it; if something gets plugged up or the oil is
113
really thick, the oil pressure could skyrocket, blowing seals, pipes, whatever. So, the oil goes straight from the pump to
a pressure relief valve, which relieves enough of the oil flow to prevent excessive pressure in the system. The relieved
oil goes back to the sump, while the remaining pressurized oil goes through the filter (which has its own relief bypass in
the event of clogging) and into the galleys that feed the bearings, cam followers, and other parts of the engine requiring
lubrication.
In the basic relief oil cooling system in the Jaguar V12, only the oil that is relieved by the pressure relief valve is piped to
the oil cooler in front of the radiator, and from there back to the intake of the oil pump. In the full flow system used in
German cars, the oil destined to go to the galleys is piped to the oil cooler at the front of the radiator and then back to
the filter head assembly to continue through the filter and into the galleys.
Physically, the distinction is like this: in the relief system, oil feeds out of the outlet elbow at the bottom front of the filter
head to the right side of the cooler. From the left side of the cooler, it goes to a fitting on the bottom front of the
sandwich plate on the crankcase. It doesn’t simply return into the sump here, but instead goes directly into the inlet
elbow on the bottom of the oil pump. Hence, the oil pump actually draws suction from two places: the sump pickup and
the return from the cooler.
The front of the full flow filter head has a pair of fittings that don’t exist on the early style relief filter head and are sealed
off on later style relief filter heads -- the change probably due to the desire to use the same casting for both relief and full
flow filter heads. In the full flow system, oil to the cooler starts at one of these fittings on the filter head itself instead of
the outlet elbow; the outlet elbow still exists, but the port on the front is sealed off. The oil feed is piped to the right side
of the cooler. From the left side of the cooler, it goes back to the other fitting on the filter head. The oil pump therefore
has only one intake, from the pickup in the sump, and the bottom of the sandwich plate either has no hole or has a blankoff cover on it.
The relief system has an inherent shortcoming in that it tends to vary the amount of cooling incorrectly. When the oil is
cold, it is also thick, and the pressure relief valve has to relieve a great deal of it in order to limit the pressure. As a
result, flow through the cooler is high -- precisely when not needed. On the other hand, when the oil is hot and thin,
very little or none at all is relieved, and hence flow through the cooler is minimal -- precisely when it is most needed.
The full flow system always flows the oil through the cooler before it goes through the engine, so there is always
cooling. And, the coolest oil in the system is the oil fed to the galleys, so it can be expected to reduce the incidence of
burned bearings.
The relief system has another trait that causes consternation. In order for a relief valve to work properly, it really needs
to relieve to a place of zero pressure -- such as directly into the sump. Because this system relieves through the oil
cooler, there may be a significant amount of pressure on the back side of the relief valve -- the backpressure caused by
the flow of thick, cool oil through the tiny passages in the cooler. The pressure of the oil the engine sees -- and therefore
the gauge sees -- is the relief pressure of the valve plus the backpressure of the oil cooler. The backpressure of the oil
cooler will vary greatly with oil temperature; when cool and thick, the pump will be trying to push a great deal of oil
through it, but when hot and thin it may see little or no flow at all. The combination of the viscosity changes and the
flow changes make for extreme backpressure differences. As a result, the oil pressure registering on the gauge will vary
quite a bit more between cold and hot than on most cars. This doesn’t seem to cause any harm, but it does cause
owners to get overly concerned.
If you wish to retrofit the full flow cooling system to a car that came with the relief cooling system, you will need the
following parts. The corresponding part numbers for the relief system are also shown:
Part
Relief p/n
FF p/n
Oil Suction Pipe
Oil Suction Elbow
Oil Suction Elbow Gasket
Relief Assembly
Relief Outlet Elbow
Oil Cooler
C35512
C33869
C31063
C42796 or EAC7755
C38802
C43923
EAC6424
EAC6422
C31063
EAC6398
EAC6789
CBC2692
114
Oil Feed Pipe
Oil Feed Pipe
Oil Return Pipe
Oil Return Pipe
Retainer
Bracket
Clamp
Sleeve
Bracket
EAC1380
C38074
C38075
N/A
N/A
N/A
C34608 (1)
N/A
EAC1381
EAC8954
CBC2690
CBC2691
EAC8956
EAC6413
EAC6414
EAC6800 (2)
EAC6790 (2)
EAC6419
Plus a few bolts, nuts, O-rings, etc., all of which can be purchased locally. If you’re the industrious type, you can
probably improvise all those clamps and brackets too.
You might also be able to avoid buying the relief outlet elbow; you can reuse the old one if you can plug the opening in
it. You will have the part that screws into it, oil feed pipe EAC1380, laying around doing nothing if you want to cut the
fitting off and make a plug out of it.
The 1987 Parts Catalogue shows the same sandwich plate used for both systems; a square blank-off plate EAC6420 and
gasket EAC6421 are used to cover the unused hole under the oil pump elbow on cars with full flow cooling. In all
probability, later on when all cars were fitted with full flow oil cooling, the sandwich plate was altered to omit the hole.
But anyone doing the retrofit is probably going to prefer simply bolting on the blank-off plate to replacing the entire
sandwich plate. And they could easily make a blank-off plate and gasket rather than buy them.
To replace all these parts would require pulling the sump off the engine to replace the oil suction pipe and the oil suction
elbow. However, in theory anyway, these replacements may not be necessary, and the retrofit might be accomplished
without pulling the sump. The difference in the oil suction elbow is that the one for the relief system has the second inlet
on it, and this inlet is readily accessible via the opening in the bottom of the sandwich plate. If this second inlet is
securely plugged, it will serve the purpose of the EAC6422 part. This can be done by making a suitable part that plugs
both the second inlet on the oil suction elbow and the opening in the sandwich plate, or by using a separate plug -perhaps like the rubber expansion-type freeze plugs -- on the suction elbow, along with a simple blank-off on the
sandwich plate. In fact, the original sump inlet adapter C37882 can be used if you find a way to plug it. Going this
route would not only reduce disassembly requirements, but it also eliminates the need for purchasing a new oil suction
pipe, oil suction elbow, and oil suction elbow gasket -- as well as bottom end gaskets you’ll have to replace when you
open it up.
Note that the difference in the oil suction pipe -- which is, in fact, the pickup -- is unknown. But there is no reason to
believe the one designed for the relief system won’t work properly for the full flow system. Perhaps the design was
changed slightly to fit the revised oil suction elbow.
OIL PRESSURE RELIEF HOSE: While fiddling with the sandwich plate off, Karl Huff was told by a Jaguar shop that
“while I'm in there I should replace the oil filter pressure relief hose (?) with a new one from the 6 litre engine.” This is
probably referring to the question mark shaped line.
OIL FILTRATION MODS: Much of the following was pilfered from an article by Nigel Calder in the March/April
1994 issue of Ocean Navigator magazine. It was primarily about auxiliary engines for sailboats, but the issues discussed
here apply to any piston engine.
Oil contamination is divided into two categories: chemical and physical contamination.
Chemical contamination degrades the oil, causing a loss of lubricating properties, and also may introduce substances that
attack engine parts. Heat and age can cause oil to oxidize and thicken, encouraging the formation of sludges and
varnish. Water can be introduced even in a tight engine by condensation within the crankcase, and causes emulsification.
If there happens to be any sulfur in the fuel, some can find its way past the rings and combine with water to form sulfuric
acid which promptly attacks engine parts. Unburned fuel coming past the rings also dilutes the oil, lowering its viscosity.
115
Chemical contamination is combated by additives in the oil. Eventually, however, the additives are consumed and fail to
counteract the contaminants. At this point, the oil needs to be changed.
Physical contamination refers to metal particles and dirt in the oil. The metal particles come from wear between moving
parts. The dirt comes through the intakes, and a portion makes it past the rings. The problem is obvious in that such
particles will increase the wear on bearings and the like.
It is tempting to take comfort that the oil filter is preventing the particles from getting into the workings of the engine.
Unfortunately, it is not as effective as one could hope. The typical paper-element oil filter will catch particles down to
about 30 or 40 microns, but damage is caused by particles down to about 2.5 microns. These smaller particles build up
in the oil and pass right through the filter, cycling through the engine again and again.
The full-flow filter cannot be made with a tighter mesh because the restriction to oil flow would be too great. In
addition, if the filter gets clogged, either the element breaks open (dumping all the dirt into the engine), or the flow is
inhibited. Usually a relief valve is provided to allow oil to bypass a clogged filter, allowing crud of all sizes to circulate
through the engine.
There are two excellent ways to combat physical contamination. The first is by installing a bypass filter. A small
percentage of the pressurized oil from the outlet of the full-flow filter is diverted into a separate filter with a tight mesh
element to stop particles down to 2.5 microns, and from there right back into the sump. An orifice is provided to
prevent an excessive amount of oil from taking this route, which might starve the engine. If the filter gets plugged, no
problem -- the flow stops, and 100% of the oil goes through the galley as before. But as long as a small amount is going
through the bypass filter, within only a few minutes all of the engine oil is cycled through it and the amount of
suspended particles is greatly reduced.
The other method is essentially the same, except that the bypass filter is replaced by a centrifuge that causes the particles
to collect on the inside of a spinning cylinder. These are typically only available for larger engines.
These solutions are even better than changing oil at short intervals. Even with frequent oil changes, particles appear in
the oil immediately and continue to build up. The bypass filter, however, continuously keeps such particles from causing
engine wear.
Note that a bypass filter does not address chemical contamination. Such an installation would be effective at reducing
engine wear, but the oil needs to be changed at the same intervals to prevent the additives from failing.
An outfit called TF Purifiner (page 719) offers a package that includes a bypass filter system along with a small heater
that boils off water, fuel, and coolant to minimize the chemical contamination so the additives last longer.
Surfing the WWW, Mike Claus found that other products are available from Baker Precision Bearing (page 714), Fram
and Amsoil. “Fram offers an automotive by-pass filter in its product line that features a pleated-paper element and easy
“spin-on” replacement similar to original-equipment-type units. Ask for the Fram “PB50” with mounting hardware.
“Amsoil’s bypass unit is connected to the oil pressure sending unit and returns oil to the pan, thus requiring some
mechanical ability or the services of your mechanic for the initial installation. The company states that its bypass unit,
which employs a user replaceable, pressed-fiber element, refilters all the oil in an engine every five minutes, and keeps it
analytically sparkling clean for the (recommended maximum) element life of 25,000 miles! It even extracts and contains
any water that has (inevitably) condensed into the oil...which if allowed to remain in circulation will often result in the
formation of corrosive acids.”
Of course, one might immediately ask: if a bypass filter is such a good idea, why didn’t such a quality automobile as a
Jaguar come with one from the factory? Well, you have to consider the options the way the manufacturer does. The
lack of a bypass filter will not cause engine failure before some extended mileage, especially if the owner has been paying
the dealer for oil changes on a regular basis -- and even if the engine does fail due to dirty oil, the manufacturer is not
likely to incur any liability. The additional cost, multiplying the cost per car times the thousands of cars sold, is
significant. And the additional risk of failure -- one of the oil lines to a bypass filter blowing open or some such -- may
be more than the company wants to accept. Just having to tell prospective buyers that there are two oil filters that need
regular changing may be seen as a marketing disaster, especially in this era of drive-it-and-forget-it cars.
116
You, as the owner of the car, may think differently. You have a significant investment in your car, the risk of a blown
high-pressure oil hose is no big deal to you (messy, but not particularly expensive), and you are the guy who will have to
pay for a new engine when this one wears out. Basically, if you are the type to own a Jaguar for the life of the car, a
bypass oil filtration system would be a wise investment. Of course, if you plan on selling the car soon, or plan to crash it
rather than wear it out, it’d be a waste of money.
PRE-OILING BEFORE STARTUP: A lot of the wear on any engine occurs at startup, when the engine must run for a
few seconds before oil pressure is established. Russ Lehman sends this tip: “I’ve got a “Pre-Luber” on my van because
it only gets driven about once a week or so, and the pre-lube brings the oil system up to pressure by pumping oil through
the engine before starting. These pumps are fairly common on marine engines for the same reasons.
“The pump is fed from a line attached to the oil pan and pumps into a tap where the oil pressure sender is attached. The
pump allows oil to pass through the normal routes for normal engine operation, while not allowing oil to pass backwards
through the pump (I think it’s a piston pump). The motor is switched through the ignition key in the aux position
(controlled by MOSFETS), and will stop when the engine ignition is switched on.”
There are other systems, including a simple pressure reservoir that holds pressurized oil after shutdown. During startup,
a valve is opened, pressurizing the system before the starter is engaged.
Note that such systems may be of limited benefit. While the bearings in the bottom end of the engine may experience
much less wear, it is not usually worn bottom-end bearings that require an engine rebuild. More often, it’s worn pistons/
rings/cylinders that eventually convince an owner it’s time for an overhaul, and a preoiler does little or nothing to reduce
piston/ring/cylinder wear.
ADDING EMISSIONS CONTROLS: Huh? Well, Germany now has a taxation system that penalizes cars without
emissions controls so severely that many German XJ-S owners are seeking to retrofit. For many years the German
version had no catalytic convertors or oxygen sensors even though they were provided in the US.
According to Jeffrey Gram, the following outfits (all in Germany) will install emission controls in cars that were not
originally equipped with them:
Ernst Apparatebau, Hagen, Tel +49 (0)2331 3600-0
GAT-Abgastechnik, Gladbeck, Tel +49 (0)2043 24021
Gutmann, Breisach, Tel +49 (0)7667 1091
G+M Kat, Gladbeck, +49 (0)2043 42410
HJS Abfgastechnik, Menden, +49 (0)2373 9870
Oberland, Garmisch-Partenkirchen +49 (0)8821 1036
Oettinger, Friedrichsdorf +49 (0)6172 7053-55
Walker, Viernheim, +49 (0)6204 738-0
Waschkuttis, Wiesenthau, +49 (0)9191 96495
Wurm, Stuttgart, +49 (0)711 420071.
IF ALL ELSE FAILS: Most Jaguar owners feel that if you want a Chevy, you should buy a Chevy. But there are those
who think otherwise, and for them there are several outfits that offer kits for replacing the Jaguar V12 with a Chevy V8. John’s Cars (page 717) offers two kits for the XJ-S, one for a small block Chevy and one for a big block. Another
outfit to check with is Jaguars That Run (page 717).
The 90° V-8 is an excellent engine layout; it has even firing order, and its primary and secondary imbalances are 100%
117
correctable by simply casting counterweights into the crankshaft. The problems with the classic Chevy “lump” are not
that it’s a V-8, or even that it’s cast iron; it’s problems are: A) It has pushrod-operated valves, which require
compromises in cam profile, which in turn generally means it’ll either produce lots of power or have a good idle but not
both; and B) It employs a timing chain with no tensioner, which results in an engine that runs rougher and rougher as it
wears. Both of these problems were addressed and corrected by all major European automakers in the 1960’s, and by
all Japanese automakers in the 1970’s. Both Ford and Chevy finally introduced V-8 engines with overhead cams and
intelligent camshaft drive systems in the 1990’s, apparently in response to competition from Lexus and Infiniti.
Sir William Lyons, founder of Jaguar, apparently didn’t like V-8’s. When Jaguar bought out Daimler in 1960, Daimler
had two V-8 engines in production, and Lyons scrapped one of these immediately and the other a few years later. When
it became apparent that the venerable Jaguar XK inline 6 would no longer cut the mustard, Lyons responded with the
V12.
If you must shoehorn a cast iron V-8 into your Jaguar, do yourself a favor and purchase some cast aluminum valve
covers. They will absorb a lot of the noise of the valve train. A cast aluminum timing chain cover will also help reduce
racket. Replacing the timing chain with something with less slop, like a set of gears, will make the engine run smoother.
Of course, a better idea yet would be to opt for the newer cast aluminum Y-block Chevy V-8’s. Not only are these
engines far superior mechanically to the cast iron models (despite retaining the pushrod valve train), they also come with
modern EFI and ignition systems and improved automatic transmissions.
IGNITION SYSTEM
SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT: Note that this task is much easier on the pre-H.E. because the spark plugs are
vertical. On the H.E., the plugs are tilted inboard just enough to make the job truly miserable. Most of the tips below
were developed to deal with the H.E.
First problem is getting the plug wires off -- and back on later. Jan Wikström, who owns a pre-H.E.: “I’ve made up a
pair of “pusher” tongs out of a bent piece of 4mm high-tensile fence wire. Same idea as the common barbecue tool, but
the jaws originated as a short piece of 9mm copper pipe split lengthwise and brazed to the wire. This gets a good grip
on the cable just above the rubber cap on the terminal. This tool needs to be bent to a slight angle above the jaws.” The
same idea might work on the H.E., but expect to have to vary the details to make it work well.
Another idea is to use a length of 1/4” steel tubing and some bicycle brake cable to make a “snake grabber”.
If you have access to a wet/dry vacuum cleaner, use the hose with no attachments to clean around the plugs before
removing them. Just poke the hose over the end of the plug. Compressed air can also be used. John Bertsche adds: “I
came up with a cool tool for cleaning out the crud around (and in) the spark plug holes. A turkey baster -- pull off the
bulb, duct-tape the other part to your shop-vac hose, and you’ve got a high-intensity, pinpoint (well, almost) vacuum
nozzle that’ll fit right into the spark plug hole. Works great! You can use it to scrape dirt and crud out of almost any
nook and cranny, and it won’t scratch the aluminum.” Note that you can purchase a set of small vacuum attachments at
Wal-Mart intended for cleaning things like computer keyboards, and those attachments would also work well here.
Using normal tools, it generally requires removing the cruise control actuator and unbolting the A/C compressor on the
H.E. to replace the 1A and 1B plugs. Matthias Fouquet-Lapar says, “Jaguar offers a tool, it's in the rear-section of the
XJ-S parts manual. It fits perfectly and you don't need to remove the A/C compressor.” Steve Holst says, “I ended up
using the official Jaguar spark plug removing tool that came with the tool kit to replace the plugs. It worked
wonderfully and I didn't need to move the A/C compressor one bit. I ended up unbolting the cruise bellows only. I'm
very glad I gave it a try.” This plug wrench (CAC5368) comes in the XJ-S tool kit, but it’s amazing how often used
cars don’t have a tool kit. If you need to buy the plug wrench, shop carefully; they supposedly can be had for under $20,
but Jaguar dealers have been known to ask much more than that.
118
Ah, but things are never that simple. Peyton Gill says, “The tool's socket well was too shallow for the NGK plugs I
installed.” Graeme Mawson concurs: “My car is an '85 V12 with NGK plugs; the tool provided does not fit over the
plug, i.e. the stem of the plug is too long for the barrel of the tool! Perhaps there are two different tools!”
After much discussion about differences between types of spark plugs, it turns out that Mawson is correct -- there are
two different tools. The earlier tool, CAC5368 -- used up until at least Peyton Gill’s ’86 -- will not fit a spark plug.
However, sometime later Jaguar revised the tool so it would fit a spark plug. The two wrenches appear to be identical in
construction, but the later version, CBC4096, has a hole in the top of the socket that goes all the way through; when a
spark plug is in place, you can peer in between the pivot joints and see the top of the electrode. Brian Schreurs says, “It
does not come with the T-handle so one would have to buy a piece of rod and cut to fit.” The T-handle is C36612/2, a
part number for a straight piece of steel rod.
Apparently, the spark plug tool part number was superceded again by CCC4813. It’s not known what that difference is.
It may be possible to modify the earlier tool by simply drilling a hole through it. You’d hope that it’s not -- you’d hope
the tool is made of harder steel than that -- but in fact it appears pretty soft and cheap and may be drillable. John
Bertsche says, “The factory tool I had in the trunk fit on them fine...just wasn't up to the stupendous amounts of torque
required to crack them loose.” David Littlefield says, “The factory tool is very cheaply made, frankly. Mine has a big
sticker on it with a British flag and says "Thanks for buying British!" I kept ending the phrase in my mind with "in spite
of the fact that you are spending half your weekend trying to change impossibly located spark plugs with the incredibly
cheap, POS tool we supplied you."”
There are T-wrenches sold for 5/8” spark plugs, and a good one might actually do the job. Unfortunately, all this author
has found are cheap ones -- even poorer quality than the Jag OEM tool -- and the swivel invariably breaks as soon as
torque is applied with the swivel in any position other than straight, which makes them worthless for this task. Mawson
says, “I have bought several box type tools to undo the plugs but as indicated above they always break or 'round off'
long before all 12 plugs have been removed. Furthermore on the V12 without removing the likes of fuel lines, A/C
compressor, cruise control, distributor or throttle mechanism, when the tool does break (with stupendous amounts of
torque applied) it is more than likely that other things get broken as well (usually fingers or knuckles).”
Littlefield says, “Another suggestion for an under-the-compressor tool might be to cut down an old spark plug socket
that has the flats on it, and maybe even enlarge the ratchet hole so it can fit further down the plug.” Using this idea,
Larry Barnes made a tool that actually works: “I took a regular spark plug socket and:
1.
Removed the rubber thing in the inside.
2.
Ground off both ends so an open-end wrench would still work on the top part, and the bottom would
still come to the "nut" part on the spark plug.
“I use this modified plug socket for plugs 1A and 1B only. Works great without removing the compressor.” On the
H.E., make sure to start with a 5/8” spark plug socket; most spark plug sockets are 13/16”. All in all, this is probably
the best way to go; it is easy to find a 5/8” spark plug socket in whatever quality you desire, they don’t cost all that
much, and most of them have an external hex on the top. Once you get the socket suitably cut down to fit past the side
of the A/C compressor and onto a plug, you can simply use a box-end or open-end wrench on the external hex to get the
plug loose. Most importantly, if you’re careful you can apply serious torque without the slightest sideways force on the
plug; many owners have ended up with plugs broken off at the top of the threads, which is not fun to fix.
There is one more possibility in spark plug tools. J Harper points out that Eastwood Tools (page 704) offers a
telescoping spark plug socket. This thing collapses into a little hockey puck which you position over the plug, and then
telescopes into a socket shape around the plug. Cute.
Even with a workable tool, you might want to move the compressor anyway. Fouquet-Lapar, despite having the plug
tool, says, “I still remove the compressor and the throttle pedestal, mainly to clean things up at the same time.”
Littlefield left the compressor in place and says, “after this experience, I think I know what surgeons go through during
an operation. Working through a narrow hole with long instruments, trying hard not to break something vital. I was
even using forceps to hold tubes and wires back to get to the areas I needed to go!” Craig Sawyers says, “I have that
Jag tool. However, I have always found it impossible to use under the aircon compressor. The problem is that the
119
swivel joint is operating very nearly through a right angle, and is very inefficient as a result. Besides which, even if it is
possible to get the plug out with the tool, it must be fraught with danger of cross-threading when putting it back, or
replacing with new. In fact, the last XJS I moved the compressor out of the way to do the plugs (my brother-in-law's)
had three chunks of broken plugs lurking under the condensor. So I now always move the compressor (a ten minute
job) and the throttle pedestal (a further ten minutes) and make the whole process more clinical. Besides which, after
vacuuming the crud from the centre of the V, you can then use a nice deep socket, and a torque wrench to get the things
in "by the book".”
If you decide to remove the throttle pedestal, John Napoli says, “Rather than removing the coil, throttle switch, etc.
separately, consider removing the whole ball of wax as one. Simply remove the four bolts holding the throttle stand to
the engine valley, and it all comes out as one.”
You may run into problems getting those four bolts out as well. It’s not too difficult to remove in the midst of an upperengine teardown when you’re taking everything out of the way anyway, but for the spark plug job you’d like to remove
just the pedestal without removing things like the oil pressure sender. The problem is the two bolts at the rear side of
the pedestal; they are easy to see, but not so easy to get a wrench on. First tip: obtain a 7/16” swivel socket -- or a
10mm swivel socket if the later engines have metric bolts here.
The first time you have the pedestal off, saw off the lugs on the right side that were apparently originally intended to
hold a coil. That will make access a little easier next time.
Napoli decided to make some access holes in the pedestal: “On my car, I modified the throttle stand further to lighten it,
improve airflow in the area, and make it easier yet to get in and out. I drilled a series of large holes all over. Cleaning it
all up and polishing a bit makes it look nice, improves gas mileage, reduces emissions, and decreases quarter mile times.”
Peter Cohen says, “The last time mine was out, I slotted the holes for the two rear bolts so that I could start the threads
and then mount the pedestal.”
As long as you’re going to the effort of taking the plugs out, it wouldn’t be a bad idea to go ahead and perform a
compression check. It’s a good way to keep a watchful eye on engine condition.
Before installing the new plugs, it is recommended the time be taken to carefully inspect the threads. Competition is
fierce among the plug manufacturers and they generally cannot afford to spend a lot of time and effort making perfect
threads every time. One small burr on a steel spark plug can wreak havoc on the threads in the aluminum head.
Be sure to use anti-seize compound on the threads. Do not use normal grease, as this may hamper proper grounding of
the plug, and it also may get hot and form a crust that makes it even harder to remove the plugs. And do not use a
graphite-based lubricant, as graphite may react with the aluminum and weaken it.
When installing spark plugs, it is helpful to use a piece of 3/8” hose to get them started. Press the hose firmly over the
top of the plug and use the hose to feed them into place and thread them in finger tight. Then the hose can be pulled off
and a socket used for final tightening.
There are warnings not to tighten the plugs past 8 ft-lb. of torque. 8 ft-lb. is not enough to turn the plugs loosely in the
threads unless they have been recently cleaned and chased, but the point is well taken. It is an aluminum head, and
tightening “three grunts” is both unnecessary and costly. Just tighten until you feel them seat, make sure they’re snug,
and quit.
SPARK PLUGS: A quick survey of a group of Jaguar experts clearly indicates that NGK is the plug to use. The study
may have been unscientific and the reasons may have varied, but the consensus was clear and overwhelming.
The H.E. engine uses taper seal plugs; the pre-H.E. engine uses washer-seal plugs. For the H.E., NGK used to make at
least two plugs, TR5 and BPR6EFS. Both were resistor type, but the TR5 was a “V-Power” plug with a little notch cut
in the center electrode. Jim Moore says, “They go by numbers now; an NGK 2238 is recommended by NGK for my '85
XJ-S, turns out it has TR5 written on other end of box and on the plug.”
There are many gimmicks used to sell spark plugs. One common feature that may be of some benefit: It is easier for a
120
spark to jump to an edge or point than to a flat surface. This is why lightning rods are pointed. Many of the cute
configurations of spark plugs result in there being more edges on the electrodes instead of flat surfaces. The notch in the
center electrode of the NGK V-Power plug is such a feature.
Supposedly, it’s actually more important that the sharp edges be on one electrode than the other. With old-fashioned
ignition systems, the center electrode was always the anode and the ground was always the cathode -- and the sharp
edges really need to be on the cathode, which means they’re on the wrong electrode with the V-power plugs.
Apparently NGK fixed that; Richard Mansell quotes from a Jaguar publication on the changes for the 1992 model year:
“A new design sparkplug, BR7EF, incorporating a V groove earth electrode, is fitted to improve efficiency and provide
better firing consistency.”
Note that very little else changed about the Jaguar V12 for the 1992 model year; one can safely conclude that the
upgraded spark plugs would work well in older H.E. engines.
NGK certainly isn’t the first company to offer multiple sharp edges on the ground electrode. ND plugs have had a
grooved ground electrode for years. A highly-advertised plug called the Splitfire charges several times as much as
regular plugs for providing a couple of extra edges for the spark to jump to.
If you happen to have a distributorless ignition with double-ended coils (only offered on Jaguar V12’s in the mid-90’s,
and only in the saloon) then half the plugs have their polarity reversed, and the sharp edges need to be on the center
electrode again! You can’t win.
Another idea in spark plugs that gained popularity in the 90’s is platinum electrodes. Platinum is an obscenely expensive
metal -- makes gold look cheap -- but it doesn’t take much of it to make a spark plug electrode, just the tiniest dot at the
gap. And that dot makes the plug last several times as long, which is the reason some modern cars can claim 100K miles
before the first tune-up. Note that while platinum-tipped plugs may cost considerably more than standard plugs, they do
not offer any improvement in performance at all; their entire benefit is in durability.
Following the crowd, NGK has introduced new plugs for the V12, similar to their earlier offerings but with platinum in
the tips. As a result, it is increasingly difficult to find non-platinum NGK plugs. David Buchner doesn’t like platinums
because he feels you should get in there and check things more often than every 100K miles, but even with such an
attitude one might be forced to use platinum plugs and just regap and reinstall them! Might wanna be careful about
filing the gap, though; platinum isn’t all that hard, a few passes with a file and the little dot might be gone!
Bosch Platinums were among the first platinum-tipped plugs to make a name for themselves -- and it was a bad name.
Randy Wilson says “I’ve found that Bosch standard plugs do not perform quite as well as Champions or NGK, but are
better than most common American plugs. I have, however, never had any success with their platinum plugs. If the
engine is running well, they don’t seem to make any improvement, and if the engine is not well, they foul easily and are
not cleanable.” But don’t let the bad reputation sour you on either platinum or Bosch plugs; Bosch has since introduced
the “Platinum +4” plug, which has four ground electrodes (more edges!) but also seems to have corrected the problems
the earlier Platinums had.
There is no appreciable disadvantage to using resistor plugs. The resistance limits the current flow, which in turn
reduces spark plug wear and radio interference. Prior to the actual spark, there is no current flow so the resistance has
no effect on the voltage available at the electrodes.
SPARK PLUG GAPS: The proper gap for the H.E. engine is 0.025” -- you can confirm this by checking the decal on
the underside of the hood. Most plugs come out of the box with a 0.032”-0.035” gap. The gaps must be checked prior
to installation. Oversize gaps can cause poor performance at high RPM, but worse they can contribute to rotor failure
and resulting catalytic convertor meltdown in cars equipped with Marelli ignition -- see page 161.
Reports are that some dealers are installing spark plugs with 0.035” gap. If your dealer is doing this, the least you
should do is never darken his doors again. Better yet, file a complaint with the EPA, since spark plug gaps are an
“emission critical” specification (that’s why it’s on the decal under the hood) and it is illegal for them to be violating it.
If you happen to suffer a catalytic convertor meltdown as a result, please sue the dealer and help put him out of
business.
121
STRIPPED SPARK PLUG HOLES: Since you have read this book, used anti-seize compound on the spark plug
threads, and didn’t overtighten, you will never strip spark plug threads. However, the PO3 or the idiot you’ve been
taking the car to for service may not be so careful and leave you with plugs that simply won’t come out without bringing
the threads with them. Aaargh!
The official Jaguar fix involves recessing, drilling and tapping the holes for larger threads, installing an insert, and
installing a small pin to prevent the insert from unscrewing. Note that the inserts will be different for H.E. and pre-H.E.
engines, since the pre-H.E. used washer seal plugs while the H.E. uses taper seal plugs. Generic inserts may work fine,
but regardless of insert used the head surface should be recessed prior to installation to ensure that the tip of the plug
will be positioned at the same level as before. If the surface is not recessed, the plug will seat in a slightly retracted
position and result in a lower compression ratio on that cylinder as well as possible effects on the swirl pattern in the
H.E.
Mike Morrin reports success using helicoils to repair the H.E. plug threads -- something one wouldn’t expect would
work, since it would appear to require drilling out the hole far enough to destroy the taper seat. “If drilled carefully,
about 30% of the taper seat is lost. I think the remaining seat is still enough for a good seal.”
SPARK PLUG INDEXING: Does “anal-retentive” have a hyphen? If you answered yes, you may be interested in
knowing that “indexing” spark plugs may improve performance in the H.E. engine. In the H.E. combustion chamber,
the compression stroke squeezes the fuel/air mixture out of the area over the inlet valve and into the area over the
exhaust valve, causing a swirl. This fuel/air mixture is swirling when the spark occurs. If the ground electrode on the
spark plug happens to be positioned with its back side into the swirl, then the spark is partially hidden from the fuel/air
flow, possibly hindering proper ignition.
To avoid this, mark the side of each spark plug with an indelible magic marker to indicate where the ground electrode is.
The position you want to avoid is with the back side of the ground electrode aimed toward the nearest end of the head;
in other words, you don’t want the electrode on the spark plugs in the front three cylinders on the forward side and you
don’t want the electrodes on the spark plugs on the back three cylinders on the aft side. If any end up in these positions
when installed, then exchange that plug with another.
Please do not use a lead pencil to mark the plugs. Graphite conducts electricity, and will cause “tracking” down the side
of the ceramic and short out the spark plug. Your engine will run much worse than before you indexed the plugs.
SPARK PLUG WIRES: If your ignition wires need replacing, there’s really no reason to buy the Lucas originals;
several companies offer aftermarket sets to fit the Jaguar V12. Or you can purchase two 6-cyl or 8-cyl ignition wire sets
from any auto parts store and combine them into a set for the V12. Here are some tips:
You can get anything from a roll of wire and a package of connectors all the way to completed, ready-to-install sets; I
used a “semi-tailored” set -- one end of each wire comes with the spark plug connector attached, but you cut the other
end to length and attach the distributor cap connector yourself. The wires on the V12 are shorter than most, and this
permits the right length so you don’t have lots of excess wire laying around.
Another feature to look for is the angle of the spark plug connector. Some are straight, some are 90 degree, a few are
45 degree. What the V12 needs is a slight bend; the ideal kit has connectors that are straight to begin with but can be
bent to whatever angle is needed. This allows providing different bends at different cylinders -- working on these plugs,
you need all the help you can get!
There is also the issue of bends at the distributor cap end of the wires. Some wires have straight connectors so they
come straight upward out of the cap, while others have 90º bends here so the wires come off the sides of the cap. Either
will work on the XJ-S, both are a pain to install and route.
3
"PO" is a car collector's term for "Previous Owner". It is often used with a derogatory connotation. Sometimes the
abbreviation “DPO” is used.
122
There is also the choice between 7mm and 8mm wires. Ideally, one would choose 8mm wires, since the Jaguar ignition
system is really hot and it’s all but impossible to route the wires away from other things. Magnecor (see below) offers a
10mm set!
Most aftermarket kits seem to be bright colors. Deal with it.
Jim Belkoff writes, “I found that Pep Boys can special order a custom set of 8mm silicone wires that are made in the US
by Borg-Warner. I paid the $45 in advance and picked them up a day later. They are of high quality and include three
wires with 90-degree plug boots (for the number one wires at the compressor and another location - your choice, I
guess). The kit even came with a tube of dielectric grease.
“For those of you who don’t like the bright aftermarket colors, take heart - this set has tasteful light grey wires, black
plug boots and dark grey distributor boots.
“The length was very close on most, and exactly spot on with some of them. Even the ones that were a shade long
weren’t so huge that they flopped every which way. I have had problems with aftermarket wires in the past (mostly
semi-custom 7mm sets) and these are the closest in length and the highest quality I have used so far.”
John Smith of Brisbane, Australia says, “I noticed that most parts shops have made up spark plug wires in a variety of
lengths. I bought a set, nice blue colour, that had 90 degree connectors for the distributor and straight connectors for
the plug ends - the same as the original wires.
“I measured the various original wire lengths and these are:
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
Coil
38cms
25
28
30
40
38
19
(15 inches)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(16)
(15)
(8)
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
43cms
35
17
25
38
46
(17 inches)
(14)
(7)
(10)
(15)
(18)
These wires were 8mm and fitted perfectly.”
Greg Benjock bought an 8mm Belden Wire set from NAPA and was not very happy with it. “The custom ordered kit
came with wrong terminations (all were 180deg). All 13 terminations on the distributor cap in fact must be 90 deg type.
And terminations and boots for plugs 1A, 6A, 1B, and 6B are best fitted with 90 degree units. It looked very much like
an inexperienced person put the job together.” Of course, maybe the cap connectors are a matter of opinion; this
author’s are all straight connectors and work just fine!
All that said, it should be noted that the original Lucas wires are usually not very expensive; the only valid reasons for
using aftermarket wires are availability, a need for a dash of color, and a healthy contempt for all things Lucas.
SPARK PLUG WIRE THEORY: When the 12V power to the coil is cut off, the magnetic flux causes a spike in the
voltage at the high tension lead. When that voltage rises sufficiently to jump the gaps in that circuit (one between the
rotor and cap in the distributor, another at the plug), current begins to flow.
Once a spark begins, the air is ionized at both gaps. This drastically lowers the electrical resistance of the gaps
themselves. With 50,000 volts or so to work with, the current flow can rise dramatically. If allowed to rise
unrestrained, this has several detrimental effects. First, the high current flow drains the energy stored in the coil quickly,
so the spark doesn’t last as long. Second, the high current flow tends to erode the spark plug electrodes faster than
necessary. And third, the high current flow causes a considerable amount of radio interference due to EMI radiating
away from the plug leads. Besides all these negatives, there are absolutely no positives. High current flow is not
beneficial to the ignition process, only the voltage needed to start the spark is necessary. Advertisements talk about
getting “energy” to the plug gaps (energy is voltage x current x time), but that’s usually a sign of a company trying to
peddle snake oil; the only place in an ignition system to be concerned about energy is in building up the field within the
coil (the energy the Lucas “Constant Energy Ignition” and the GM “High Energy Ignition” are referring to).
123
It’s easy to limit the current flow once the spark occurs, though: Put a resistor in the circuit. A resistor won’t affect the
onset of spark at all, because before the spark occurs there is no current and therefore the resistance is of no
consequence. But once the spark begins and current begins flowing, the resistor comes into play and limits the current
flow.
There are several places to put resistors in this circuit. Using “resistor” type spark plugs is common. Also common is
the use of spark plug wires with a carbon-impregnated core, which offers some amount of resistance per inch of lead.
Perhaps not so common, it is possible to purchase resistors that fit into the wire between the coil and the distributor.
Plug wires are all different lengths within the same car, so use of common plug wires will result in a different amount of
resistance between one plug and another. This doesn’t matter, as long as there is some resistance.
Some people think spark plug wires with copper conductors are a good idea. Clearly they fail to notice that such wires
are generally the cheapest available -- yet do not come on any cars as original equipment. If used with non-resistor
plugs, there will be no resistance in the circuit at all, and the plugs will be eroded quickly -- if the coil doesn’t burn up
first. Copper core plug wires should be avoided for all applications, except perhaps fitting a new lead to your timing
light; the copper is easy to solder.
A more recent development is the spiral core plug wire. The core of these wires has a very fine stainless steel wire
coiled into what looks like a long, skinny spring. Stainless steel isn’t an excellent conductor as metals go, but it
nevertheless would provide an essentially zero-resistance current path if it were straight; the current limiting factor here
is evidently the coiling. Magnecor (page 707) offers such wires but is mum about the theories on which they work,
claiming that too many competitors want their information. Judging from their descriptions, they appear they work like
this: The spiral core behaves as a long inductance coil. Before the spark occurs, there is no current flow, so the
inductance is of no concern -- same as the resistance in the standard setup. Once the spark begins, the high inductance
of the leads prevents the current flow from rising instantly but permits it to rise gradually instead -- and the ignition coil
runs out of energy before the current flow can rise to a dangerous level.
Magnecor claims several benefits to this design. One claim is that they will outlast the standard wires, because stainless
steel is more durable than the carbon-impregnated silicone core. Another benefit is that these wires are more flexible,
and several XJ-S owners have reported this is true and a blessing in the top of the V12. Perhaps the flexibility is a large
part of their longevity as well, since neither stainless steel or carbon-impregnated silicone should deteriorate before the
insulation layers do on either type wire, but bending the carbon-impregnated silicone wire too tightly will damage it for
sure.
Magnecor also claims reduced radio and electronics interference. This is important because modern cars with EFI can
get all screwed up if the spark plug wires emit enough EMI to cause spurious signals in pickup leads. The spiral core
wires have the theoretical benefit that the magnetic field generated is aligned with the lead rather than radiating away
from it in all directions. Franck Guilloteau says, “On their claims; the idle stumble that I had was reduced noticeably, but
my stereo has developed an annoying noise....so much for RFI shielding!!” Perhaps a good idea would be to use spiralcore wires in conjunction with resistor plugs, just to be sure.
CAP AND ROTOR RENOVATION: Most of us just buy new parts periodically, but Danny Rearden says, “High
tension ignition components such as distributor caps and rotors are generally only faulty if they are cracked, or have
carbon tracks on the surface. Even both of these conditions are usually repairable if you are prepared to invest a few
hours. My dad specialized in repairing obsolete vintage and racing ignition systems and magnetos where parts were
completely unobtainable.
“Clean the part, first with solvent cleaner, then with strong hot detergent solution and dry thoroughly. Inspect very
carefully, with a magnifying glass if your vision is not 20/20, looking for any surface marks which were not intended to
be there.
“If there is no visible sign of high voltage tracking, go to polishing. Otherwise use a hobby knife and scrape the surface
until you get to totally clean material, even if this means making a hole in the component.
“Grooves and holes can filled with epoxy filler. We always used Epiglass Low Density Filler, designed for boat repairs.
124
It seems to have very good thermal and electrical properties, and it does not run while curing. File and sand the repair
back to original profile.
“Polish out any marks (both in the original part and any repair), using abrasive paste, such as perspex polish or cutting
compound. These surface marks, if not removed, will be future failure points.
“If the part has a dull, porous look to the surface, a light spray of a suitable clear paint may be in order, but don't overdo
it. If the repairs were to a visible part, then coloured paint can be used.
“In the 25 years my dad was doing these repairs, I can only recall 1 or 2 items failing again, out of several hundred, and
these were subject to 'owner abuse'.
“The important things are:
• remove any trace of previous tracking
• polish or fill any holes, cracks or scratches which could accumulate dust and moisture
• stop moisture getting into the ignition in the future”
KEEPING THE IGNITION SYSTEM COOL: Possibly the worst area for heat problems is within the “V” on top of
the engine. Early XJ-S’s had so much trouble with cooking the ignition amp that Jaguar created a relocation kit to move
it out of this area. Cracked distributor caps have been a problem. Seized centrifugal advance mechanisms are a
problem. The wiring harnesses within the V always seem brittle. All of these are symptoms of excessive heat.
Maintaining a good airflow through the engine compartment does wonders for minimizing such heat-related problems on
components. However, airflow to the V is largely blocked -- not by the A/C compressor so much as by the plate
supporting the front of the compressor. See page 505 for notes on correct installation of this plate.
One simple way to improve things would be to cut a big hole in this plate. Be careful to leave enough metal to properly
support the compressor, but this will still allow a substantial opening. Since this area is directly behind the main fan, the
hole should allow some airflow under the compressor and throughout the V area.
IGNITION SYSTEM TYPES: There have been four distinct types of ignition system fitted to the XJ-S. The first two
were Lucas systems, so you can’t simply refer to the “Lucas ignition system” without causing confusion.
Up to 1982, the XJ-S was fitted with the same Lucas OPUS system that was used in the Series III E-Type. This system
uses a plastic disk with 12 ferrite inserts within the distributor to trigger the ignition. From 1982 to mid-1989, the Lucas
Constant Energy Ignition system (Lucas CEI for short) was used; this system uses a 12-pointed iron star wheel inside
the distributor. These two systems can be distiguished by the amplifier; the OPUS amp is a finned aluminum block that
may be located between the banks, on top of the radiator top support, or any of several other places; the Constant
Energy amp is a black, flat rectangular item bolted to the top of the left side intake manifold.
It must be clarified that the most obvious distinction within the Lucas distributors has nothing to do with ignition types.
Up until 1980, the XJ-S had a Bosch D-Jetronic EFI system that required a trigger board within the distributor and a
rotor with a magnet in the counterweight. From 1980 on, the Digital P EFI system was used, and it merely picked up
the ignition pulses -- no trigger board required. So, the same four screw holes in the distributor housing were used to
mount a clear plastic anti-flash shield, and a new rotor with no magnet was used. A different cap was introduced to go
with the new rotor. The OPUS ignition system, with the plastic wheel, continued in use for two more years.
The XJR-S was fitted with a Zytek ignition system.
In mid-1989, the Lucas Constant Energy Ignition system in non-XJR-S cars was replaced with the Marelli, which is an
all-electronic system -- there are no mechanical or vacuum advance mechanisms, the timing is handled by an electronic
control unit based on crank sensors. The Marelli system still uses a distributor, but it only serves to allow two coils to
fire twelve cylinders; it does not include any timing or triggering functions. This distributor is very distinctive in that the
cap has connections for two separate ignition coils, one at the center and one off-center, and has no vacuum advance
125
module.
There is a fifth type of ignition system fitted to the Jaguar V12, and that is a Nippondenso distributorless system used the
last year the engine was made. However, reportedly this system didn’t make it into the XJ-S; it was used exclusively in
the last year of the XJ12.
IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT: Replacing an ignition system isn’t automatically an improvement; exactly
what an ignition system replacement accomplishes depends on what you are replacing and the sophistication of the
system you’re installing. The pros and cons of ignition system replacement are therefore covered within the discussions
of each type of ignition system found on the Jaguar V12.
Lucas Ignition (OPUS and CEI - up to 1989)
IGNITION SYSTEM DESIGN: An ignition coil requires a certain amount of time to build up enough energy to
produce a spark. The faster an engine is turning, the less time there is between sparks, so the output of an ignition coil
starts to drop off. It is also apparent that the more cylinders there are, the less time there is between sparks, and the
output of the ignition coil drops off even faster.
Another lesson in physics is that the higher the compression, the more resistance there is for electricity to jump a spark
gap, so higher voltage is required.
The Jaguar V12 H.E. has 12 cylinders, turns at 6500 RPM, and has 11.5:1 compression, making it one of the biggest
challenges for an ignition system in production automobiles. To cope with this, Jaguar has incorporated some
sophisticated ignition technology. Also, Jaguar uses a spark plug gap of only .025” to make it easier for the electricity to
jump the gap.
ROTOR REPLACEMENT: Replacing the cap is straightforward enough, but getting the rotor off is likely to be
somewhat difficult since it tends to jam. All you can do is twist, rock, and pull, and hope you get lucky and don’t break
it. Or just have a spare on hand. On the Digital P cars, there’s not enough room between the rotor and the anti-flash
shield to get a good grip on it, so Ned Wesley says, “if you need to remove the rotor, the method I use is as follows:
make two loops of string or wire about equal in length to the rotor. Place one loop over the front of the rotor and the
other over the back. Bring the loops together so that pressure is applied equally to both sides of the rotor. Give the
loops a slight tug and the rotor will come off.”
If the rotor carrier shaft seems to want to come upward with the rotor, the rotor carrier shaft retainer is broken. You
need to try to hold the rotor carrier shaft down while pulling on the rotor by inserting a screwdriver through an opening
in the anti-flash shield or some such. This is a good idea anyway to avoid breaking the rotor carrier shaft retainer. Once
the retainer lets loose, pulling upward on the rotor carrier shaft will stretch the centrifugal advance springs far below,
and you will be in for a distributor recalibration.
IGNITION TIMING: The proper advance setting is indicated on a decal in the engine compartment. If it differs from
the book, believe the decal. The Haynes manual on page 329 seems to indicate that a N America 1981-on Digital P car
should be timed at 25 to 27° BTDC at 3000, which doesn’t seem to have any basis in reality; the underhood decals
always indicate 18° BTDC at 3000.
The next thing to confirm is that the woodruff keys that align the front pulley with the crankshaft are in good condition.
They are a known problem, and clearly if the pulley is allowed to reposition itself on the crank, use of the timing marks
will be a disaster. The woodruff key problem is discussed further on page 90.
Before you get under the car with the engine at 3000 RPM, you might want to note what the timing mark actually looks
126
like on the damper. There is a simple line with the letter A next to it. Unfortunately, the timing indicator plate covers
most of this up, so when you’re trying to set the timing all you see is the tip of each so it looks like VI. Trying to figure
out whether you’re supposed to be using the I or the point of the V to indicate the timing can be confusing. An
illustration in the Haynes manual makes it clearer: You must use the I mark.
On the Jaguar V12, the timing indicator itself is adjustable. If there is any chance it has been tampered with (the oil pan
and sandwich plate have been removed), then the position of the indicator must be calibrated before checking the timing.
The official method for setting this indicator is to do it when the right side (A bank) head is off. A dial position indicator
can be set up to determine when the 1A or 6A piston is at TDC. If a position indicator that will fit through a spark plug
hole is available, this same method can be used with the head in place by removing the spark plug from either cylinder
1A or 6A. Once TDC is determined, loosen the two sandwich plate bolts that hold the timing indicator plate in place,
and slide the plate on its slotted holes until 0° lines up with the mark on the pulley.
If you happen to have the 1A head off and are going through this setting procedure, Craig Sawyers has an idea to make
the setting more accurate -- or, conversely, to make it accurate enough using non-precision measuring tools: “The
manual says to set piston 1A at TDC by using a dial guage, but even this is highly inaccurate. If the dial guage has an
accuracy of 1 thou, this corresponds to a setting accuracy of 2 degrees for a 70mm stroke engine. If, with a screwdriver,
you can guesstimate to say 0.5mm, the angle error will be nearly 10 degrees, all of which makes the slotted holes on the
guage plate a bit of a joke.
“What I did when rebuilding my engine was this. When piston 1A is at TDC firing stroke, piston 6A is at TDC exhaust,
and pistons 2A through 5A are half way. I forget which stroke they are on, but two of them are on their way up, and
two are on their way down. So I set the crank up so that all four of these pistons were exactly the same distance down
from the top of the cylinder liners. If this can be measured to 1 thou, the crank angle error will be 0.04 degrees. The
trick is to carry out the measurement at the point of maximum sensitivity (half way down a stroke) rather than the point
of zero sensitivity (top of a stroke).
“I'm not sure how you could achieve this with the engine in and the heads on, but if you could fashion some feeler and
probe the piston positions in 1A to 5A with an accuracy of 0.5 mm, you could set the position of the gauge to an
accuracy of 0.8 degrees, which is more than adequate.”
There is an alternate method to set the timing indicator that doesn’t require the position indicator or removing the head.
All that is required is a device that will obstruct the motion of the piston near the top of its stroke. Such a device can be
made from an old spark plug by breaking the ceramic out of it and installing a bolt through the middle. Ideally, the
length of the bolt into the combustion chamber should be just enough for the piston to hit it only a few degrees from
TDC. If you make this device strong enough, it might also come in handy for removing the crankshaft pulley someday -see page 89 -- although for that purpose it would be better if it hit the piston farther away from TDC.
Turn the engine a ways past TDC, and then screw this obstructing device into the spark plug hole of either 1A or 6A
cylinder. Then turn the engine backwards until the piston hits the device and you can’t go any farther. Note the reading
from the timing marks. Then turn the engine forward through one complete revolution until the piston hits the device
again, and note the reading of the timing marks. The two readings should be exactly the same amount before and after
TDC. If they are different, loosen the sandwich plate bolts holding the indicator plate and move it an amount
corresponding to one half the difference between the two readings.
Bob Egerton provides another method of finding the true TDC: “Get an old plug and beat out the ceramic centre. Then
braze in a length of copper or other fairly small bore tube (you could probably use a really good-fitting bit of polythene
tube if you cannot get access to brazing kit) long enough to see from where you are when turning the engine over by
hand with your extra long wrench. Apply a small amount of soap or detergent solution to the end of the tube and slowly
turn the motor forwards. When the bubble is largest you are at TDC.” Note again that it may be easier to use the 6A
plug hole than the 1A. And, obviously, there are many possible variations on this idea, including threading a fitting into
the spark plug base and the use of a balloon instead of soap. Note that this method won’t work if you’re at the top of
the exhaust stroke instead of the compression stroke, so if you seem to be having trouble you might want to give the
crank one complete revolution and try again.
The ignition timing on the V12 is checked with the engine held at 3000 RPM. Although a pain, this method insures the
127
timing is accurate at operating speed rather than at idle, where timing is less critical. However, proper timing by this
method requires that the tachometer be at least reasonably accurate. It’s not very critical, since it would have to be in
error by about 300 RPM to cause an error of 1° in the timing. Nevertheless, if one ever finds his car hooked up to one
of those fancy, super-accurate computerized engine analysis machines, it is suggested that the location of the tachometer
needle be noted when the engine is running at a real 3000 RPM. That point can then be held whenever the timing is
checked in the future.
When checking the ignition timing on the V12, the vacuum line to the distributor vacuum advance must be disconnected
and plugged. The vacuum advance capsule is at the bottom rear of the distributor, making it quite difficult to get to this
line (the larger hoses connecting to the distributor cap itself are for the distributor ventilation system, and do not affect
timing). Do yourself a favor and cut the vacuum line somewhere convenient and reconnect it with a small piece of
tubing. From then on, all you have to do is disconnect it at the break and plug it when checking the timing.
Since the battery is in the trunk, connecting the power leads of the timing light requires ingenuity. Of course, you could
just use your jumper cables as an extension cord to connect your timing light to the battery, but perhaps that isn't
necessary. The ground lead can be connected anywhere on the car. The positive lead must go to 12V, which exists at
any solid brown wire. There are two terminals on the firewall adjacent to the valve covers, and a terminal on the back of
the alternator -- all difficult to get at. Peter Smith: “I connect my timing light to the 12V power source at the headlights
fuse box.”
David Littlefield says, "Another solution for your timing light problem was just "illuminated" on the MG list, since both
MGA's and MGB's have inaccessible batteries. One fellow attaches his timing light to his 10 amp battery charger. Says
he had done it for years with no ill affect. Perhaps a better solution than dragging jumper cables and C clamps around."
Since disconnecting the plug wire from cylinder 1A is difficult, disconnect the wire from the distributor cap instead;
make a small jumper from an old ignition wire to use to connect the timing light. Or, just buy an inductive timing light.
If it’s more convenient, you can also check the timing using the signal from cylinder 6A.
Since you must crawl under the front of the car while an assistant holds the engine at 3000 RPM to read the timing, it is
suggested you put an extra long ignition lead on your timing light so you can route it around the fender rather than
feeding it through the engine compartment. Interference with moving parts at 3000 RPM would be memorable. Cheap
ignition wire with metal conductor works well for making a long timing light ignition lead, and is available by the foot.
Steve Chatman came up with another idea: “When checking the timing on the XJ12, I discovered that I was either
going to extend the wire that clamps the plug wire or feed the light through the engine compartment. I didn't really like
those alternatives and instead simply ran the timing light over and down the outside right front wing. From there, I
could shine the light under the car, using my left hand. With my right hand, I held a mirror to reflect the light vertically.
Worked fine and seemed very safe. Of course, you should correct for the increased distance traveled by the light, but
you knew that. I was in a poorly lighted garage at night. Better lighting could make this approach difficult or impossible
to use.”
Michel Carpentier provides another way of dealing with the inconvenient location of the timing marks: “Make a pointer
out of sheet metal, which you fit under one of the water pump nuts (pointing from above towards the crank pulley).
Now position the crank so it is in firing position at 3000 RPM and put a dab of white paint opposite your pointer. From
now on you can check your timing from above.”
Timing is adjusted using a long screwdriver to turn a small eccentric cam on the side of the distributor underneath the
cruise control actuator. There is a locknut on the adjuster, and this is a place where a crowfoot wrench will come in
very handy.
The Jaguar V12 design eliminates most wear items that would normally cause ignition timing to vary, such as ignition
points or sloppy camshaft drive systems. The only remaining reason for the timing to change would be wear in the
timing chain itself, and the Jaguar timing chain normally wears so slowly as to be insignificant. If the timing in your car
is way off, it is highly recommended you determine why rather than simply readjust it. For example: If your centrifugal
advance unit seizes in the idle position, then when the car is revved to 3000 RPM the timing will be retarded by 15° or
more. If you merely adjust the timing rather than correcting the problem, then the timing will be 15° too far advanced at
idle!
128
If your eccentric cam timing adjustment won’t go far enough, the distributor base must be repositioned. Remove the
distributor cap and insert a long allen wrench to loosen the three mounting bolts at the very bottom of the unit. Rotate
the entire distributor housing in the direction needed, then retighten. Please remember that this much adjustment should
never be necessary, and causes should be investigated.
HOLDING A HIGH RPM: Michael Minglin sends a tip: “Every time I went to check the timing, alternator, etc. the
book says to set the rpm to such and such. Reaching down to that auxilary air valve when the engine is hot is not my
idea of fun. What I did was to weld a nut on top of a short bolt. Threading a longer bolt into this nut gave me a “T”
with a long top and short leg. The short bolt goes into the RHD throttle cable bracket (not used for anything on my ’84
XJ-S), Then I use the long bolt to adjust the bell crank to the rpm I want. To make it even easier, I forced a short piece
of vacuum hose onto the long bolt, at the head. This makes it easy to adjust the bolt with your fingers.” This plan will
work on either LHD or RHD cars, simply using whichever cable bracket is unused.
CENTRIFUGAL AND VACUUM ADVANCE DATA: When checking distributor advance versus tables, make sure
you are looking at the H.E. or pre-H.E. tables, as appropriate. The H.E. system develops less advance in the centrifugal
mechanism and more advance in the vacuum mechanism than the pre-H.E..
Page 05-1 of the ©1975 ROM and page 05-1 of the ©1982 Supplement list data for the centrifugal advance mechanisms
for the pre-H.E. engine. Both of these charts -- as well as the centrifugal advance data on page 112 in the Haynes
manual -- begin with a listing that says “No advance below 900”, which would seem to indicate that the entire chart is
talking about the amount the advance changes from idle or static settings. However, Roger Bywater points out that this
is not the case; the other entries in these charts are actual crank degree readings based on the proper 10° BTDC baseline
timing at 500 RPM. For example, the chart in section 86.35.29/4 says that the distributor should advance 6.0-8.0
degrees at 1000 RPM; since these are distributor figures, that corresponds to 12.0-16.0 degrees at 2000 RPM at the
crank, and when added to the 10 degrees of baseline advance we get the 22-26 degrees of advance listed in the charts.
The charts would have been clearer if they had simply said “10° below 900” instead of that “No advance below 900”
stuff.
Regarding the charts for pre-H.E. advance, Mike Morrin says, “I suspect the service manual only has data for one of the
distributor variants fitted (probably C44663). The parts book shows that there were 5 different models of distributor
fitted to pre-HE XJ-Ss, and I think that the only difference was the advance curves.
C.43735
C.44663
C.43735
C.44663
C.46173
DAC1609
DAC1380
Australia (this is the one with the peculiar vacuum retard system).
California to car 2W54183
California from car 2W54184
CDN/USA to engine 8S5461 (ie the 4460th engine what year??)
All other countries to engine 8S5202
CDN/USA from engine 8S5462
All other countries from engine 8S5203
California from engine 8S11161 and Australia from 8S11800
All other countries from 8S11262
“Note that my parts book does not cover the [pre-H.E.] Digital-P cars, so there are probably 2 more I have not counted.
“On reflection, I am surprised that there is not a clearly different distributor model (advance curve) for 8:1 and 9:1
compression engines. As far as I can see, the distributor seems to change according to degree of emission control, not
compression. For example: Australia (9:1) and California (8:1) get the DAC1609, all other countries presumably
including the UK (9:1) and the rest of the USA (8:1) get the DAC1380.”
For our information, Morrin also provides part numbers for the distributors on the Series III E-Type:
C33148
C37443
up to engine 7S4663 (emission control) or 7S4879 (no emission control)
from above.
129
“The carburetted distributors of course have no FI trigger assembly.”
TIMING THE PRE-H.E.: The procedure is described in the ROM, section 86.35.29/7. Basically, you disconnect the
vacuum advance, lower the idle to make sure you’re off the bottom of the centrifugal advance curve, and set the timing
at 10º BTDC. Much easier than the H.E. procedure!
Unfortunately, there’s probably a very good reason the H.E. went to setting the timing at 3000 RPM instead of at idle.
Roger Bywater speaks of distributor build quality problems: “Back in the early 1980's we encountered V12 distributors
which could over advance beyond spec by as much as 10 degrees at 6000 revs!” What this means is that with the timing
set correctly at idle, it may still be way off at highway speeds. You’re not likely to burn pistons at idle; it is far more
important that the timing is correct at highway speeds. The H.E. procedure minimizes the implications of the problem:
Even if the distributor isn’t quite within tolerances, the timing will be correct at 3000 and will merely be off at idle
instead. Much safer.
So, why don’t we adapt the H.E. timing procedure to the pre-H.E.? That way, those cars will enjoy proper timing at
highway speeds as well. Bywater: “What you are saying is absolutely correct and setting the timing at low speed before
any advance takes effect is just about the worst way of doing it, but to be honest I've never really thought much about it
before. In all normal operating conditions the advance could in theory be 4 degrees out yet still be within spec.
Allowing for wear and tear, not to mention questionable original build quality, the error could easily be more than that.”
All we need to do is figure out what the timing should be at 3000 (or some other point in the middle of the curve
somewhere) and set it there. The fact is, we could provide a spec for timing at 2000 or 4000; it wouldn’t make much
difference. As long as it’s set somewhere along the curve rather than at idle where you’re not even on the curve, the
advance will be much closer to correct where it’s important than it would have been with the timing set at idle. Bywater
suggests that it’d be best to check the timing right at the peak torque, since this is where it will be most critical due to
maximum cylinder pressures. Ideally, the timing should be checked at several places to make sure none exceed an
acceptable advance, but let’s not get carried away.
To generate mid-curve timing specs, we can combine the idle timing specs with the distributor advance mechanism
specs. The specs in the ROM for checking the distributor advance mechanism provide a 4º tolerance range. A 4º
tolerance band may be good enough for checking to see if the distributor is working but it’s not good enough for setting
the timing; we need to know what point within these tolerances is the optimum timing point. We could assume that the
tolerance is ±2º and specify timing based on the midpoint, but Bywater suggests this might not be right. “With regard to
the tolerance spread it is worth remembering that all engines must be safe with the worst possible condition which
implies that the most advanced point is the one to work from rather than mid-range. I am not sure how tangible the
benefits would be but if it makes it possible to run safely with 2 or 3 degrees more advance then the overall performance,
response and economy should be improved. I am sure it is worth trying but maybe a period of trial is called for with a
few willing volunteers who can report back before advocating it on a wider scale.”
Bywater went on to provide timing specs for all pre-H.E. V12’s:
Carburetted V12’s
35° BTDC @ 4000 RPM
D Jetronic:
33° BTDC @ 4000 RPM
10:1 CR pre-H.E. Digital P
24° BTDC @ 3000 RPM
Are these correct? You just can’t get a better authority than Roger Bywater; he was the guy leaning over a screaming
V12 in an engine testing room at Jaguar dialing the advance up and down by hand to develop these advance specs. But
anyone can make a mistake. So, after you set the timing using these guidelines the first time, check the timing at idle. If
it’s only different by a couple of degrees -- notably if it’s more advanced by a couple of degrees -- the spec was correct,
get in the car and drive. If it’s off by ten degrees, check to see if your advance mechanisms are working properly. If
they’re OK and the timing is really that far off, perhaps it’d be wise to rethink this whole idea before putting your foot in
it.
Yes, the numbers for the pre-H.E.’s sound like a lot more advance than the H.E.; that’s the nature of the beasts -- the
130
H.E. gets less advance from the centrifugal mechanism and more from the vacuum capsule than the pre-H.E.
So, for those unfamiliar with timing the H.E., here’s the procedure: Warm up the engine, disconnect and plug the
vacuum advance, have an assistant rev the engine up a little past the specified RPM and then come back down to it and
hold it there, and set the timing to the specified advance.
Of course, one problem is that the scale on the timing plate doesn’t go far enough. So, set the crank at 20° BTDC and
paint a new mark on the damper at 0°. Then you can use this new mark to set the timing at the spec minus 20°.
UNDERSTANDING THE VACUUM ADVANCE SYSTEM: Between August 1998 and June 1999, Kelsey
Publishing (page 723) published six issues of a magazine called XJS Bulletin. Issues 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 contain a series of
articles called “Advancing by Vacuum” by Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering (page 713) that are arguably the best
explanations of the vacuum advance systems used on the Jaguar V12 available. For those interested in obtaining back
issues, here is a brief synopsis of what each issue’s article covered:
Issue 1: General concepts of vacuum advance systems
Issue 2: 1976-80 V12 vacuum advance systems, including California and Australia
Issue 3: 1980-81 vacuum advance systems (pre-H.E. Digital P cars), Emission A and B
Issue 4: Advance concerns related to the H.E. engine
Issue 6: H.E. vacuum advance systems, Emission A and B
After June 1999, XJS Bulletin was discontinued as a separate publication and a distinct section of Jaguar World
magazine was provided instead, with pretty pictures of cars but little in the way of useful technical information.
VACUUM ROUTING DIAGRAMS -- WHICH IS WHICH? Good question. The following is an attempt to clarify
the applications of diagrams that appear in several documents; here’s hoping I don’t make any errors here, since that
would really compound the confusion!
In the ©1975 ROM, there are no vacuum routing diagrams. For the vast majority of cars of the time, the routing for the
vacuum advance was simple: Straight from the throttle edge tap on top of the right side butterfly housing to the
distributor. The air pump, where fitted, was apparently uncontrolled -- on all the time. In California and Australia, the
system was more complicated, but not covered in the ROM.
The ©1982 Supplement has two descriptions, one labelled “Emission B” and the other labelled “Emission A & C”.
These both apply to the H.E. only, but the Emission A & C version only applies through 1982; for 1983, a vacuum
regulator was added to the system.
The H.E. supplement in the back of the ©1984 Ed 4 includes a desccription of a system labelled “Emission A & C Federal, Canadian & Japanese Specification 1983 on” which includes the vacuum regulator omitted in the ©1982
Supplement.
The Haynes manual (©1986) actually contains a fair assortment of vacuum routing diagrams, enough to put the ©1975
ROM and ©1982 Supplement to shame. Of course, they’re not labelled clearly enough, so here goes: Figures 13.29
and 13.30 apply to the 1980-81 pre-H.E. engine with Digital P injection. Figure 13.31 applies to the pre-1983 North
American H.E. Figure 13.32 applies to the 1983-on North American H.E. Figure 13.33 applies to the Emission B (nonNorth American) H.E. Figure 13.33 is labelled that it applies to the Australian models, but it’s not the same system that
Bywater’s XJS Bulletin # 2 article shows for the 1976-78 Australian cars; presumably it’s for the later H.E. models.
VACUUM ADVANCE MODULE: On most cars, it is a simple matter to determine if the vacuum advance module is
intact: Connect a hose and, using your mouth, suck and watch the mechanism move. While in advanced position, put
your tongue over the end of the hose and see if it holds vacuum and stays in position.
131
On the XJ-S H.E., the first half of that test -- sucking and watching the mechanism move -- works, but the tongue test to
hold vacuum may not. On the H.E. there is a vacuum regulator in the line to the vacuum advance module, and such
regulators cannot be depended on to work properly with no flow. Therefore, the vacuum advance module on the mid80's XJ-S H.E. has a deliberate bleed hole; the module will not hold a vacuum even when in perfect condition.
Of course, there are several different vacuum schemes used in the XJ-S over the years and around the world, and even
some vacuum retard schemes. Many of these do hold vacuum; if the vacuum advance plumbing doesn’t include a
vacuum regulator, there’s no need to put an orifice in the diaphragm.
Roger Bywater says, “Of course the high temperature situation also gives the vacuum capsule a hard time and they
usually need replacing every couple of years or so but a lot of so-called mechanics seem to miss that one.”
Note that a vacuum advance module that isn’t leaking may still need replacement. Val Danilov says, “My diaphragm
was fried rock hard, I broke it trying to test the rod movement (CRRRACK!), so I think it wasn’t leaking.”
The earlier vacuum advance modules came with an adjustment screw on the top. This screw permits adjustment of
the limit of travel of the module -- but was supposedly set at the factory to the correct travel. This is not intended as
a user-adjustable feature; the only reason to be messing with it is a suspicion that someone else has already messed
with it. Later replacement modules don’t even have the screw.
VACUUM ADVANCE MODULE REPAIR: The following procedure for rebuilding a vacuum advance module is
credited to John Napoli and Val Danilov.
Before removing the vacuum advance module from the engine, you might want to take note of the best position for
the vacuum line connection when it is reassembled. And after removing the vacuum advance module but prior to
taking it apart, it is suggested that you first carefully measure the distance which the actuator rod extends out of the
unit. Also, push the rod back into the unit (fully retracted position) and measure that as well.
Raw material is a generic replacement vacuum advance from a Chevy V8 -- dirt cheap at any auto parts store. Take the
Chevy unit apart by prying open the case; Napoli suggests it may be easier to open the case by grinding the case all
around its periphery to weaken the metal, but be careful not to get it too hot and damage the diaphragm. What you
want to get ahold of is the diaphragm/rod assembly.
Open up the stock Jag vacuum advance by prying around the crimped-on case. In this case, you’d like to reuse
everything except the diaphragm/flat link assembly, so try to do as little damage as possible to the casing; if you’ll read
ahead to understand how you’ll be reassembling it, you may decide to simply cut or grind the lip off the edge to avoid
mangling the dome itself. Even though the diaphragm/flat link won’t be reused, keep it on hand for taking
measurements.
Cut the rod from the Chevy diaphragm/rod assembly to the same length as the Jag original, then set it down on an anvil
or something and pound a flat spot at the end with a hammer. No problem -- it’s a Chevy part, remember?
Reassemble the vacuum advance unit using the new diaphragm/shaft assembly and all the old Jag parts. If the casing
wasn’t damaged when disassembled, you may be able to simply clamp the unit togeher and gently bend/hammer the
dome shut. This works but the cannister will become work-hardened so you will never be able to do this repair this way
again.
If the edges were too mangled (or you cut them off), drill the body and dome for eight fasteners; Napoli suggests 3/4”
long 3-48 fillister head screws and nuts, but notes that the exact sizes aren’t critical. Sandwich the body, diaphragm
(poke a hole through for the screws with a needle), spring, and dome, and bolt it all together, being careful that the
flattened section of the rod is aligned properly. This method has the distinct advantage that it permits repeated repairs
later -- important, since the heat in the valley of the V12 will eventually bake the Chevy diaphragm as assuredly as it did
the original.
Check that the unit responds to vacuum and pulls the shaft in.
Measure carefully the extended length of the rod, mark, and drill a hole in the flattened area the same size as the hole on
132
the original part. Check the retracted length as well, and if there is an adjustment screw on the dome adjust it to provide
the same total travel (if your extended length was off a little bit, make the retracted length off by the same amount; the
variance can then be corrected by setting the timing normally). If you don’t have an adjustment screw, don’t worry
about it, the total travel will probably be close enough.
Reinstall on the distributor. Be sure to check the timing; the timing procedure requires that the vacuum be disconnected,
but the module still has an effect -- you might not have gotten that extended length as perfect as you thought you did.
Note that the original diaphragm may have had a tiny orifice built into it to provide a deliberate leak. This will usually be
evident as a tiny hole through the metal disks on either side of the rubber diaphragm itself. The vacuum advance
plumbing includes a vacuum regulator and such regulators don’t work reliably when there is no flow, so the orifice is in
there to provide a little flow. It appears that this orifice may not be necessary, since some genuine Jaguar replacement
vacuum advance modules reportedly don’t have it. If having an orifice proves to be necessary, it can be added anywhere
in that branch of the vacuum advance plumbing; you might wanna make the hole in the dome rather than in the
diaphragm itself. It might make more hiss, but you can seal it later if you decide to with a small piece of aluminum tape.
Or you may be able to fit a separate device with an orifice with a tee connection into the vacuum line. You could, for
example, take a piece of brass tubing, drill a tiny hole in the side, and connect it in the line to the vacuum advance
module.
If, for some reason, you are unable to reuse other parts of the original Jaguar vacuum advance unit, you may be able to
use the corresponding parts from the Chevy unit. Note, however, that doing so may result in differences in the advance
curve and/or limits. Use of a different spring will change the advance rate. Use of a different dome with a different
depth, and therefore a different place where the spring seats, will also affect the advance rate. And use of a different
dome may also affect the retracted length, allowing the diaphragm to travel too far or preventing it from travelling far
enough.
If the Chevy dome happens to include a limit adjusting screw, you may be able to adjust the full-retract position after
assembly to make sure it is the same as the original was. If there is no adjusting screw, you might actually be able to add
one, being careful to seal it when done to avoid vacuum leaks. If the Chevy dome is shorter and compresses the spring
too much, you may want to add a spacer ring between the diaphragm and the dome to space the dome back. If the
Chevy dome is taller and compresses the spring less, you might want to insert something within the dome for the spring
to sit on.
Napoli adds, “I have seen in this month’s Jeg’s catalog (see page 717) that Accel manufactures a replacement Chevy
vacuum advance that is adjustable. The ad copy states that the unit is adjustable for total advance and rate. It comes
with instructions. The unit looks just like the generic replacement I used, so the same repair approach should work.”
This fancy aftermarket Chevy part is still cheaper than the stock Jaguar vacuum advance module by a long shot.
If you tore things apart and then read the suggestions to take measurements first, Napoli sends some reference
measurements from a junk unit he had laying around: “For reference, the measurements were taken with 1/16” of the
adjusting screw exposed. That is, from the face of the adjusting nut to the top of the unmolested screw is 1/16”.
Also, this is a stock ’88 V12 advance (non-Marelli) from my donor engine and the unit does not operate (won’t build
vacuum). With the unit relaxed, the length from the end of the housing to the center of the hole in the actuating rod
is exactly 2 inches. Full compression of the rod reduces the length by 5/16” (i.e., 5/16” maximum travel).”
VACUUM REGULATOR AND DUMP VALVE: A vacuum advance mechanism applies more advance as vacuum
increases, which means there will be minimal advance at full throttle (to avoid knocking) and lots of advance at light
throttle (where knocking isn’t a problem, to provide optimum fuel efficiency). This also means a lot of advance at idle,
but this can be problematic. The manifold vacuum at idle may vary as the RPM rises or falls a bit, and this will move the
vacuum advance in a direction so as to accentuate those fluctuations. The result can be an unstable idle, sometimes even
stalling.
The time-honored fix for this is to use a “throttle edge tapping” for the vacuum source. The vacuum line to the vacuum
advance, rather than simply connecting to a port on the manifold, is connected to a port located near an outwardopening edge of the throttle butterfly. Whenever the throttle is open, the edge of the butterfly itself is on the air filter
133
side of this port, so the port is seeing manifold vacuum. As the butterfly approaches the closed (idle) position, however,
the edge of the butterfly passes over the port, leaving the port exposed to atmospheric pressure rather than manifold
vacuum. The result is no vacuum advance at idle. This results in a stable idle, and also makes it a bit easier to adjust the
timing -- you don’t need to disconnect the vacuum line first. This setup was very common on carburetted American
V8’s of old, and unfortunately resulted in an entire generation of mechanics who don’t believe it’s necessary to
disconnect the vacuum advance when setting the timing.
If you’d like your Jaguar V12 to operate this way, it’s very simple. Just throw away all the vacuum advance control
devices and connect a single hose from one of the ports on top of the right hand butterfly housing directly to the vacuum
advance module. This will work fine, although the total lack of vacuum advance at idle will make it use more fuel and
generate more waste heat when idling. This shouldn’t be a problem; the cooling system should be able to handle the
additional heat, and the fuel economy reduction is small -- especially if you don’t sit around idling much. It may affect
emissions tests, but ironically it may help them; in general, retarding timing seems to make it easier to pass emissions
tests. Note that most of the 1976-80 V12 models (except California and Australia) apparently did operate their vacuum
advance exactly this way, and some later models did as well except that they added controls to shut off vacuum when
the engine was cold to help it heat up quicker.
With later models, Jaguar used a better idea here. Rather than providing no vacuum advance at idle, they used a vacuum
regulator to provide some vacuum advance at idle. Because the regulator provides a fixed amount of vacuum regardless
of how the manifold vacuum is fluctuating, the instability problem is avoided. In such schemes, one hose to the
regulator comes from the manifold itself to provide a vacuum source, while another hose connects to the throttle edge
tapping to provide a “reference” to regulate to. When the engine is at idle, the manifold vacuum is high but the signal
from the butterfly housing shows no vacuum, and the regulator throttles the vacuum to the advance capsule down to a
fixed amount above that reference. When the engine is at part throttle, both the manifold vacuum and the signal from
the butterfly housing show high vacuum, so the regulator does nothing; the advance capsule gets full manifold vacuum.
At wide open throttle, both the manifold and the throttle edge tapping see very little vacuum, so the advance capsule
doesn’t get much either.
This is a really good system, providing a goodly amount of advance at closed throttle so the engine idles efficiently. It
also results in less of a step coming off of idle; rather than the vacuum advance going from no advance to full advance all
of a sudden, it merely goes from partial advance to full advance. The effect is smoother throttle response.
There is one problem, however: A vacuum regulator is a throttling device, and therefore cannot provide a great deal of
flow suddenly when needed. The specific case of concern here is when the throttle is suddenly floored. In a car with
simple hoses connecting to the vacuum advance capsule, the sudden lack of manifold vacuum would result in a similar
lack of vacuum advance just as quickly, and the engine could proceed at full throttle with the timing properly positioned
for that condition. But with this regulator in the line, a sudden opening of the throttle will require a second or two for
the vacuum to bleed off the advance capsule through the regulator. For that second or two, the engine will be running at
full throttle with too much advance, and the engine will be knocking something fierce.
The solution is another device, the dump valve. This is a vacuum-operated valve that merely opens the line to the
vacuum advance capsule to atmosphere when there is no vacuum in the manifold.
There is one other minor detail, and that is the fact that a regulator generally works better with a little flow through it; it
may have difficulty regulating vacuum in a deadheaded line. So, the vacuum advance capsule may have a tiny internal
bleed orifice, small enough that the vacuum system can still apply a vacuum but preventing it from holding a vacuum.
A little guidance on plumbing: The North American models use a vacuum regulator EAC5157, and it has three hose
connections. One connection is labelled “DIST”, and this line is connected to the vacuum advance capsule; a tee in this
line should lead to the dump valve EAC4069 and connect to the fitting farthest from the flat side. Another connection is
labelled “CARB”; this should be connected to the throttle edge tapping, which is a port on the top of the right side
butterfly housing. The third connection is labelled “DELAY”, and this one should be connected to the intake manifold;
it typically is connected through a whole series of valves and controls that provide less vacuum when the engine is cold.
Basically, the regulator and the dump valve are the only things in the vacuum advance control system that are operating
when the engine is warmed up; everything else in the plumbing has to do with cold starting.
134
Note that other markets use a different vacuum regulator, but the idea is the same.
The connection on the dump valve nearest the flat side should be connected to the intake manifold; in some cars it
appears to be connected to the bottom of the right side butterfly housing, but this fitting is a ways behind the butterfly
and will see manifold vacuum in all but nearly wide open throttle, and at wide open throttle it should see nearly
atmospheric pressure either way.
The various emission control diagrams available invariably show the controls for the air pump on the same diagram,
primarily because some of those vacuum control devices used for cold starting also affect air pump operation. Don’t get
confused; other than the fact that both systems are vacuum-controlled, they really have little to do with each other. The
descriptions above only apply to the vacuum advance system.
VACUUM REGULATOR CHECKING: Stephen Tyler says his vacuum regulator was bad; “At the top of the unit is a
metal disc & in that disc is a small hole. If you apply a vacuum to the input side of the unit, you cannot obtain a vacuum
out if the tell tale hole is sucking in air. The hole is for an indication if the internal diaphram is damaged. I removed the
metal top & found that the diaphram had a hole in it. There are probably many units like this, considering the age of
these cars.” This has grave implications for the fuel economy of a lot of cars out there.
15-MINUTE TIMER: The 15-minute timer is a feature of the “B Emission” H.E. cars, which means UK/Europe spec,
82-88 or so. If the coolant temperature is below 38°C when the car is started, the timer is engaged. This disables the
vacuum advance at idle and runs the part-throttle vacuum advance through a delay valve for 15 minutes. If the coolant
temperature is above 45°C when the engine is started, the coolant temp switch is open and the timer is not engaged.
38°-45°C is the “dead band” of this switch -- whether it’s closed or open depends on whether the engine was cooling
down or warming up when it entered this band.
15-MINUTE TIMER -- LOCATION: Everybody wants to know what this thing looks like and where it is. Craig
Sawyers reports: “It is a black box with ventilation slots, 2"x1.5"x1.5". It has a single fixing hole at one end, and an
edge connector at the other.
“Location in UK cars is:

XJ12 -- under the driver's side (rhs) underscuttle, up high. It is more or less behind the speedo, and a fight to find
and remove.

XJ-S -- under the passenger side (lhs) underscuttle, much lower and easy to get to.”
Steve S says, “the US 45 sec one would be located to the right of the passenger side small fuse box under the scuttle.
Nothing is fitted in this space in the UK spec. The UK 15 min job is to the left of the passenger side small fuse box but
located on a different plate to the small fuse box set closer to the firewall (bulkhead); US spec cars have something to do
with the seat belts located where the 15 min timer goes.”
15-MINUTE TIMER -- REPAIR: The timer itself is reportedly unreliable. Tony Bryant: “My '85 NZ Spec (= RHD
Euro) had this 15-minute timer in the LH side of the LH footwell. Cheap and nasty piece of trash. It's a pertronix unit,
based on a CD4020 cmos 14bit counter, and a CD4069(?) hex inverter with one of the inputs floating(!). Floating input
pins on CMOS are just begging for a blown up chip. I replaced it with the 74HC equivalent, and tied the unused input
to ground - before I ditched the whole system.”
15-MINUTE TIMER -- DITCHING: The 15-minute timer apparently causes really bad fuel economy during those 15
minutes, especially aggravating for owners whose driving patterns happen to have them within those 15 minutes most of
the time they are driving. Craig Sawyers says, “Admittedly, the V12 is thirsty, but a certain amount of that is to do with
135
the 15-minute timer on the vacuum advance. Before that cuts in I get 14 (UK) mpg. When it cuts out it comes back to
19-20.” Mike Morrin says, “My weekday commute is only 3.5 miles each way, the thermal switch operates after about a
mile and totally disconnecting the 15 minute circuit gave me a 2 MPG overall improvement.”
If you’re sick of using so much fuel, disconnect the timer! The car will run just fine with full vacuum advance when
cold, it just won’t warm up as quickly. Since the timer energizes the 3-way solenoid valve, the 2-way solenoid valve,
and the supplemental air valve (see page 304) and de-energizes them when the 15 minutes are up, you can merely
disconnect the wires from the timer or the coolant temp switch and the car will never lack vacuum advance again. The
easiest way to disable it is to just pull one of the wires on the thermal switch on the rear end of the right side coolant
manifold. This is obviously easy enough you can try it and see if you like it.
Once you decide to make this change permanent, you can make things neater by removing all of those valves and
plumbing up the vacuum advance system with the same routing that effectively existed after the 15 minutes had expired.
You can also trashcan the timer itself if you want, and replace the coolant sensor with a plug.
The 2-way solenoid valve and the 3-way solenoid valve are involved in killing the vacuum advance at idle during cold
starts, but the purpose of the supplemental air valve is to boost the idle RPM to compensate for the lack of vacuum
advance. Disabling the cold start solenoid valves theoretically eliminates the need for this idle boost (the Auxiliary Air
Valve is intended to provide idle boost for cold starting), but if you find the car idling too slowly when cold you might
consider leaving the supplemental air valve connected and disconnecting the solenoid valves only. In this regard, this
system may serve as a patch for a weak or deteriorating AAV (see page 265).
Also note that, on later cars, the same supplemental air valve was used to boost the idle when the A/C compressor was
engaged. This is a really nice feature, and one might consider keeping the supplemental air valve in place for that
purpose. If your car is an earlier model lacking this A/C idle boost, you might want to wire it up! See page 304.
15-MINUTE TIMER -- MODIFICATION: The only problem with ditching the 15-minute timer is how long the engine
takes to warm up. The vacuum advance makes the engine run efficiently, so it doesn’t generate as much waste heat.
Killing the vacuum makes the engine inefficient so it generates a lot of waste heat and warms up quickly. Richard
Mansell says, “I disconnected mine recently and found that it seemed to take a lot longer to warm up. It is now
reconnected. I may disconnect it again for the summer (if we actually get one this year).” Awwww, little Ricky’s gotta
have his heat!
Craig Sawyers suggests a compromise: “If you unplug the timer and link together the grey and pink/white wires, this
connects the 45°C switch directly to the valves. So the valves will operate until the engine reaches 45°C and then switch
off. I did this with my brother in law's XJS when his module blew.” This is a really neat fix, since it means the car will
get to 45°C in a hurry and then get good fuel economy from then on.
Of course, 45°C isn’t all that hot, so the heater will still not be working as well as some might like. So, there are other
possible fixes. The most obvious would be to replace the coolant temp switch with something with a higher cut-out
temp, like 70°C. It must be stressed that the switch really needs to cut out before the thermostat temp is reached;
otherwise, there’s a chance that the idle vacuum advance will remain disabled indefinitely!
Another idea would be to leave the timer in place but shorten that 15 minutes to something more reasonable. Sawyers
describes how to modify the OEM timer: “The counter is a 14-bit binary counter. The most significant bit is used to
trigger the valves. So you can select a delay of 7.5 minutes by reconnecting diode D1 internally to pin 2 instead of pin 3
on the MC14020 timer chip. Or if you connect to pin 1, you get 3.75 minutes.
Daniel Lethiais elaborates: “You will find inside this unit a small electronic plate with integrated circuits. Near the
HEF4020B is the diode D1. If you want a delay around 4 minute you just have to cut the connexion beetween pin3 to
D1 (with a cutter, knife...) and connect pin 1 to diode D1. It is very easy to do.
“Yesterday I have tried a connexion between Diode D1 and pin 15. I have checked my unit outside the car with a
separate power supply and an oscilloscope. The timer is now around 2,5 mn.”
136
Sawyers: “You can get intermediate times by changing the oscillator frequency. This is set by the values of either C3,
or R6/R7. The timing is in inverse proportion to the parallel combination of R6 and R7, and to C3. So halving the value
of either will double the time, etc. For instance, changing R6 from 820k to 470k (leaving other components unchanged)
will reduce the time from 15 minutes to 9 minutes.”
Of course, you could just try to find a replacement timer instead of getting into the schematics.
When considering shortening or eliminating the vacuum advance disable, one must consider its original intention.
Unfortunately, there’s no telling what that was. It looks like an emissions feature and in fact is part of the scheme called
“B Emissions”, but the UK and Europe supposedly had no emissions requirements at all when these cars were built. It
could be argued that its purpose is to get the engine warm quickly to minimize wear, but one would have to remember
why a cold engine has high wear: there’s too much fuel running through it. Since this system clearly increases the
amount of fuel running through it, it’s questionable whether it does any good in that regard. All in all, the entire purpose
of this system may be to make the heater work as quickly as possible. That’s an expensive heater, especially since this
thing provides 15 minutes of lousy fuel economy even in warm weather.
VACUUM ADVANCE MODULE -- PRE-H.E.: Mike O’Neill noticed that the vacuum advance module from an MGB
will fit the pre-H.E. distributor. However, John Nuttall found that the MGB advance unit -- as well as some units for
Triumphs -- look similar and will fit, but provide differing amounts of advance at different vacuum levels. So, if your
engine is largely stock and you want to keep it that way, you probably should seek a Jaguar advance unit. On the other
hand, if your engine is not stock and you need to provide nonstandard amounts of vacuum advance, this provides some
places to look. Also, these units might provide materials for rebuilding your old vacuum advance module in much the
same way Napoli used a Chevy part in the procedure described above.
VACUUM RETARD: According to the article “Advancing by Vacuum” by Roger Bywater in XJS Bulletin Issue #1, a
vacuum retard module is typically connected to a throttle edge tapping on the inward-opening side of the butterfly.
Hence, vacuum is applied at idle, but as the throttle is opened the edge of the butterfly passes over the port so it sees
ambient air pressure. The system therefore provides a few degrees of retard at idle, but does nothing at other throttle
positions. This helps make the engine idle better, since some engines have trouble igniting the charge at high vacuum;
according to Bywater, the carburetted V12’s fit into this category. By waiting until the piston is closer to TDC, the
charge is more concentrated and compressed when the spark occurs. Obviously, such a retard scheme would help
emissions at idle by ensuring good ignition.
Ian Macfarlane, regarding his 1985 XJ-S: “In Australia the distributor has a retard connection on the vacuum module
which is supposed to operate for about 15 min. after starting via a solenoid valve. But the wire leading to the solenoid
valve had been cut (as had the wire to the supplemental air valve). Thus, even though the distributor timing was correct
with the vacuum tubes disconnected, the engine ran at about 6 deg retarded under normal conditions.
“Although this would not exactly apply to other emission systems it is another option for those with an overheating
problem - if the vacuum system was not working properly it is feasible that overheating could occur due to retardation.”
Having the vacuum retard system activated when it shouldn’t be is a valid concern, but this author isn’t convinced that
cutting the wire to the solenoid valve will do it. According to the schematics of this system, the solenoid valve
controlling the vacuum to the retard side of the vacuum capsule is a “normally closed” type, meaning that cutting the
wires should render it always closed -- no vacuum retard.
Mark Jackson, who owns an ’87 Australian model, says, “I have been told (and have the proof on the car) that the local
dealers got so fed up with people complaining about poor performance on start-up, that they just bypassed the electronic
valve mounted under the RHS manifold by routing the vacuum pipes past it.”
CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE - SEIZING: At this point in this book, I used to report how the pre-Marelli Jaguar V12
centrifugal advance was highly prone to seizing. However, with more and more readers reporting back, I can say with
137
relative certainty: Unless your distributor has been overhauled, it is seized right now. Period. This has proven to be a
100% failure rate, every time, every car, there simply is no doubt anymore. And a seized advance unit results in low
power, overheating and major engine damage if not corrected. If you are not absolutely positive that your distributor
has been overhauled already, it is imperative that you schedule an overhaul as soon as possible -- and drive the car very
gently or not at all until it’s done.
Folks, this is probably the single most important item in this book. Centrifugal advance seizure may be the cause behind
most of the problems the Jaguar V12 has -- overheating, dropped valve seats, etc. -- and the reason behind most owner
dissatisfaction, low resale value, Chevy engine swaps, you name it. Is there any way I can convince you, the XJ-S
owner, to take action now? If it’ll make you feel better, give me a call, I’ll tell you in person: Overhaul the distributor
NOW.
Sad to say, reports are that this failure mode -- notorious as it is -- is not widely known among Jaguar dealers and
mechanics. Despite the frequency of charging customers $10K for a new engine, it has never occurred to many of these
shops that the engine failures were preventable. Some people have reported that their Jaguar dealer overhauled or
replaced several unrelated components before finally figuring out that the centrifugal advance was seized. Others never
figured it out. Perhaps their fancy diagnostic computers don’t blink “centrifugal advance seized”. Perhaps they just like
collecting those fees for new engines. Whatever, keep in mind that just because you have had your car “checked out” by
the dealer doesn’t mean you don’t have the problem. It’s not even a certainty that the advance is OK if you specifically
asked them to check it; some of these mechanics don’t even know how to check it. For those who have mechanical
abilities, it is highly recommended that you check your centrifugal advance yourself, or better yet simply go ahead and
overhaul it. If you aren’t the type to get your hands dirty, it probably would be money well spent to have an independent
shop confirm the first shop’s conclusions.
John Napoli confirms this: “I know or deal with about a half-dozen repair shops. Some are run by friends (no chicanery
ever) and the others, including my local Jag dealer, are pure business relationships. None of them ever heard anything
about the chronic Jag problem of seized centrifugal weights. Not even the Jag dealer, although maybe they do know and
don’t tell. I’ll go further and say that no Jag owner I’ve encountered has ever heard of it, either. You get these strange
looks when you bring it up (“If I don’t know, then it can’t hurt me.”). I find it hard to believe, but it looks like a lot of
the information regarding the idiosyncrasies of these cars never reaches the people who can use it most. Perhaps this is
part of the reason why so many Jag owners have bad experiences with repair shops.”
The usual indications of a seized advance mechanism are an XJ-S that lacks power at higher RPM and a nasty tendency
to overheat. In some cases, when the throttle is backed off suddenly there is a brief power surge before decelerating. If
your car doesn’t have the performance at higher RPM that it should, check the advance mechanism immediately; a
distributor seizure is easily fixed, but warped blocks, dropped valve seats and burned pistons are much more expensive
and are the inevitable outcome of continued operation.
To confirm for yourself that your advance unit is seized, remove the distributor cap. Attempt to turn the rotor
counterclockwise. If operating properly, you can easily turn it about 11° (H.E.) or about 13° (pre-H.E.) against a
spring. Note that this thing should feel really loose and rattly, and when you twist it and let go it should snap back with
a metallic clink; if at all sticky or gummy-feeling when turned, time to overhaul. The forces that move this thing are
balanced against each other, so a very slight difference is supposed to make it move; while the springs may seem mighty
strong when you’re fiddling with them, even a slight amount of drag or stickiness is enough to keep it from moving as it
should. It may be movable by hand but not as far as it should or not as freely as it should. Unfortunately, in a book such
as this it is difficult to convey adequately how to tell that an advance is gummy until a person has felt a properlyoperating advance for themselves. This might be an excellent topic for a monthly Jaguar club meeting -- to have
someone who knows what the advance should feel like check every V12 that shows up. Of course, if totally seized, the
problem is obvious; you cannot move it at all except for backlash in the drivetrain.
Another method of checking for a seized distributor is to compare the timing (with the vacuum line to the distributor
disconnected and plugged) at 2000 RPM with the timing at idle (under 900 RPM). The two readings should differ by at
least 12° (H.E.) or at least 22° (non-H.E.). If they are the same or very close, the centrifugal advance is seized. If the
advance at 2000 RPM is more than a couple of degrees different when you come up to that RPM from idle than it is if
you come down to that RPM from 4000, then the advance is sticky; overhaul it.
138
OK, SO IT’S SEIZED -- NOW WHAT? To prevent/correct a seized centrifugal advance mechanism, it’s necessary to
overhaul the distributor, clean out all of the original lubricant, clean up the parts, and reassemble with a reliable lubricant.
Roger Bywater says, “Most of them probably run for years without the cap being lifted so by the time anyone does get
round to it the spindle is likely to be running dry and getting built up with debris. Adding lube at that stage may well
loosen the debris and aggravate the situation so really it needs complete stripping to ensure that it will not jam at some
future time.” Bywater, having worked for Jaguar, can be expected to blame the seizures on poor maintenance -- and
perhaps he’s correct. I personally suspect the original lubricant used at assembly was lousy, based on what the stuff
looked like when I got my distributor apart! It really doesn’t matter what the cause; either way, the distributor has to
come apart.
Of course, you don’t have time for overhauling. You will probably want to try the easy fix: Remove the distributor cap
and rotor, and put some penetrating oil down the center and see if you can work it loose. If you are successful, it is
recommended that you check its operation regularly -- or better yet, just go ahead and overhaul it when you get the
chance. The results of operation with a seized centrifugal advance are simply too costly to ignore.
This is one place where getting a new part will probably not help. There is little wear in the distributor, and an
overhauled and properly lubricated used part can be expected to last the life of the car. But a new distributor may have
the same problem as the original distributor did. It is recommended that even a brand new in-the-box distributor be
overhauled prior to installation (to get that lousy lubricant outta there).
The good news: The reported incidence of centrifugal advances seizing after they have been overhauled is nil. This may
be because the original grease is the problem, and once it’s removed the problem goes away. It may simply be because
once the overhaul has been done the owner understands what’s going on and lubricates it regularly. Whatever, once the
distributor has been overhauled, there is apparently no reason to expect to ever have to do it again.
Randy K. Wilson points out that the problems with seized centrifugal advances on pre-H.E. engines may actually be
different in nature. “From what I’ve seen the gummy advance problem is unique to the V12 H.E. distributor. Earlier
distributors also had a problem with seizing, but these galled from a total lack of lubrication.” Of course, this could
mean that the H.E. only gets hot enough inside the distributor to turn the lubricant to varnish while the pre-H.E. got hot
enough to burn the lubricant away entirely. Or, it could mean that Jaguar added grease to the assembly in response to
the dry seizures, and the grease caused its own seizures.
DISTRIBUTOR REMOVAL: If the centrifugal advance is seized, or if you wish to prevent seizure in the future, the
distributor should be removed and disassembled. It’s not difficult, but it will help to read the following sections
thoroughly before tackling the job.
Note: If you prefer, it is possible to rebuild the centrifugal advance mechanism with the distributor in place. It’s easier
to take it out and do it on the bench rather than leaning over the fender, though.
Before removal, care must be taken to ensure the distributor can be reinstalled with the gears meshed correctly so the
rotor faces the same direction as before. If the crankshaft is not to be disturbed, this is very simple: Note the position of
the rotor prior to removal, so you can be sure it is in the same position when reinstalled. It’s a gear mesh and one tooth
off would be obvious, so just note the position well enough you can make sure you are on the same tooth when
reassembled.
Note: If you have the older Lucas OPUS ignition system, you are advised to position the engine at TDC on cylinder 1A,
which is where the timing marks on the crank pulley line up and the rotor is pointing at the front left headlight. If the
rotor is pointing at the right side door, you need to turn the engine around one full turn. The reason that this is
important is that the OPUS has a wheel within the distributor that has three slotted holes that line up with the distributor
mounting bolts in this position. Even if you can get it off without moving to TDC on 1A (by busting up the plastic
wheel, for example) you’re still gonna be in a pickle putting the rebuilt distributor back on without tearing it back apart
or turning the crank while the distributor is out.
If you turn the crankshaft while the distributor is out, you face additional problems. The distributor turns once every
139
time the crankshaft turns twice, and therefore the distributor must not only be lined up facing 1A while the engine is at
10° Before Top Dead Center (BTDC) but it must be on the correct stroke. If not, the spark plugs will fire at the end of
the exhaust stroke instead of the compression stroke, and the motor will not run.
To get the setting right, cylinder 1A must be on the compression stroke when the distributor is installed pointing to 1A
on the cap. If you know in advance you may be turning the engine, it is easy enough to avoid problems. While the
distributor cap is off and the rotor is pointing at 1A and the crankshaft is at 10° BTDC, remove the oil filler cap. Reach
beyond the front edge of the chain and mark the camshaft gear itself (the camshaft gear turns at the same rate as the
distributor). You can use a dab of paint, or stake it, or whatever will give you a clear indication.
You might also want to mark the position of the base of the distributor, since it mounts on slotted holes. Ideally, the
base should be mounted so the correct timing is near the center of the range of the eccentric adjuster, but to begin with it
will be easier to put it back where it came from. Peter Smith: “I find that using typist’s white out to paint across
components can be helpful. It can be applied over slightly greasy surfaces and if precise alignment is necessary I can
draw on it with a biro.”
You can insert an allen wrench through the openings in the distributor and undo three screws and remove the distributor
as a unit. However, for the purposes of doing the marking mentioned above, it may be preferable to proceed with the
disassembly described below with the distributor still on the engine until you’ve removed enough parts to be able to
mark the bottom of the housing on the inside.
DISTRIBUTOR DISASSEMBLY: Remove the rotor arm; see page 126.
Remove the EFI trigger board or anti-flash shield (whichever). The biggest problem with removing the anti-flash shield
will be dropping the tiny screws and washers, but the trigger board causes more trouble. It is mounted with four tiny
plastic screws, and Jan Wikström reports that the screws get stuck to the metal; “On my own experience of three
distributors, you can expect to get two out intact. If you’re very careful.” He also reports that he has used metal screws
in a pinch with no apparent problems. When installing the plastic screws, maybe it would be a good idea to use antiseize compound, even though it looks silly on tiny plastic screws.
Richard Dowling dealt with the trigger board screws differently: “I retapped the holes to M4 (about 2 times stronger)
and fitted bigger nylon screws.”
Next, remove whatever is used to trigger the ignition; on 1982-89 cars, you need to remove a C-clip, then slide off a
wavy washer, then pry out a U-shaped pin. Finally, you need to slide off the iron star-shaped inductor rotor, being
careful not to damage it or deform the points. Even more importantly, don’t just pull upward on a sticky star rotor,
because you may stretch the springs in the centrifugal advance mechanism underneath. Here’s a method that seems to
work: Lift gently on the star rotor a little bit and insert the claw of a claw hammer under the star rotor. Rest the head of
the hammer on the edge of the distributor housing, but do not pry. While holding the star rotor in its slightly elevated
position with the claw hammer, tap downward on the center of the rotor carrier shaft with a plastic-surfaced hammer.
Once the end of the rotor carrier shaft is flush with the surface of the star rotor, if it still won’t simply slide off you can
position a small socket with an OD slightly smaller than the rotor carrier shaft on top and continue tapping.
On the pre-1982 cars, a plastic disk with 12 ferrite inserts was used; according to Jan Wikström, “Its hub is about an
inch long (estimated; I’ve never seen an intact one) and all beneath the disk. It’s a tight fit on the spindle and in its
keyway. And the disk, which is all you have to apply force to, is about 3/16 in thick near the hub. On an old car like
mine, the only way to get the disk out would be by breaking it up.”
Fortunately, John Nuttall found a better way: “I discovered a technique for removing the circular plastic timing rotor
which, according to Jan W in your book, often breaks under extraction. The idea is to undo the three screws which hold
the movable part of the distributor body to the base. This can be done with the rotor in place. These screws have springs
on them to allow the body to rotate when the vernier is turned. It is then possible to push upwards on the rotor with the
body with the force being applied uniformly very close to the central shaft of the rotor - much better than pulling at the
edge.”
Unfortunately, Wikström counters: “It’s better than fingers, although it still bears on the thin part of the disk outside the
140
hub. But sure, it’s worth trying before you break the disk up. One hitch: If you don’t have the distributor with the little
screw inside the top of the shaft, lifting the micro housing (charming name, isn’t it?) will pull the centrifugal advance
mechanism apart without shifting the disk.” And stretch your advance springs beyond recognition. If you can’t rely on
the retainer to hold the rotor carrier shaft still, you must press down on the center shaft with your thumbs while pulling
up on the housing to get the disk off. Maybe some method involving tapping with a plastic-faced hammer will work
here, too.
Whichever distributor you have, you must remove the three screws with springs and lift off the movable portion of the
base to gain access to the centrifugal mechanism below. You could leave the pickup assembly in place, but on the 198289 it’s in the way for getting to one of the screws with springs; since it’s only two Pozidriv screws to remove the pickup
assembly, that’s the easy solution. Of course, it’s a good idea to inspect the vacuum advance mechanism as well as the
pickup module while you’re there.
Note how the centrifugal weights and springs are installed. Being careful not to stretch them, disconnect the springs
from the pivot posts for the centrifugal weights; Carlos Artal says, “Use a piece of strong, thin string (such as fishing
line, etc. -- I used dental floss) to take away the springs without damaging them or overextending them. It works for
mounting them too. Just get one extreme, and pull slightly outwards and up.” You don’t have to disconnect the springs
from the posts on the rotor carrier base plate if you don’t want to; you can just let them dangle. Yes, the two springs are
different, but it doesn’t matter which one goes on which weight.
Remove the felt from the top of the rotor carrier (if there is any) and observe the retainer underneath. This is a possible
cause of trouble. The early cars had a screw there, but on later cars there’s a nylon clip instead. The nylon clip is usually
brittle and cracked, sometimes allowing the rotor carrier to rise on the distributor shaft and possibly causing interference
damage down in the advance mechanism. If you don’t have a screw, the procedure for removing the rotor carrier is to
yank, which usually results in breaking the nylon clip.
Normally the rotor carrier shaft should slide off the distributor shaft at this point, but if it is seized some Liquid Wrench
or other measures may be called for. Please try not to bend the distributor shaft -- it is remarkably thin within the rotor
carrier. And don’t grab the rotor carrier shaft with pliers or vice grips -- the metal isn’t that hard, you’ll booger up the
surface, and then it will be difficult to get the plastic wheel or star wheel back on. Once apart, clean all the crud off the
bearing surfaces. Decide for yourself whether Bywater or I am right, whether it seized due to lack of lubrication (dry) or
a lousy lubricant (gummed or varnished).
There are photos of some of the parts within the distributor at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/Distributor.html
DISTRIBUTOR SERVICE KIT: A distributor service kit, part number DZB105, is available; it is often called an “antiflash shield kit” since the anti-flash shield is the most obvious part in the bag. The kit contains parts usable on all preMarelli distributors. Stefan Schulz points out: “It's a Lucas part number rather than a Jaguar one. My friendly not-solocal Jaguar parts man couldn't find it on his system.”
The mail order catalogs may not list what parts are supplied in this kit, so the list is provided here:
Clear plastic anti-flash shield (used on 1982-89 only)
Screws and washers for anti-flash shield (4 ea)
Ignition pickup mounting screws (2 ea - used on 1982-89 only)
Distributor cap gasket
U-pin for reluctor positioning (used on 1982-89 only)
Reluctor retaining clip and wavy spring washer
Replacement carbon contact for distributor cap, with spring
O-ring for distributor-to-engine joint
Nylon rotor retaining clip (see note under DISTRIBUTOR DISASSEMBLY above)
It may not really be necessary to obtain this kit to perform a distributor overhaul. The O-ring can easily be purchased
locally, and you’d be well advised to find a Viton one anyway. The rotor retaining clip, while not likely to survive
141
disassembly, can be replaced with a couple of small washers and a tiny O-ring -- see CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE
REASSEMBLY below. The existing anti-flash shield, screws, cap gasket, U-pin, retaining clip, wavy washer, and
carbon contact may all be reusable -- and if not, screws and washers can be purchased separately, a gasket can be
purchased separately from Jaguar (DAC4063) or cut from gasket stock, and a carbon contact can be pilfered from some
other type of distributor cap.
In fact, the only part of this kit you’re likely to really need is the anti-flash shield itself since the old one may be brittle
and cracking. You could try buying it separately from Jaguar; it’s part number AEU1722. Or you could try fabbing a
flat disc from clear plastic and installing it with four long nylon screws and some nylon nuts to support it at the same
level as the top of the original shield; you might drill the four holes in the housing out and tap them larger to permit using
stouter nylon screws. You could try fabbing a shield from the bottom of a plastic container of some sort, again finding a
way to hold it in place without creating an electrical path to ground. Finally, you could just omit the anti-flash shield
entirely, since it’s plausible that it’s entire purpose in existence was to provide a purpose for the four screw holes that
were originally intended to hold the trigger board on D Jetronic cars.
DISTRIBUTOR SHAFT SEAL: The Jaguar V12 distributor has had two common problems, centrifugal advance
seizing and cracking distributor caps. Both of these problems have been attributed to crankcase vapors entering the
distributor between the shaft and the housing. Supposedly the vapors condense into the type of varnish found inside
engines, seizing the advance mechanism. Vapors collecting within the cap are ignited by the arcing of the distributor and
cause an explosion which cracks the cap.
Both causes are in question. Hard deposits that seize the advance may very well be the original lubricant exposed to too
much heat. And Jaguar’s reported reason for venting the later distributor caps was to deal with high temperatures that
caused the caps to crack, although clearly the vent system could also remove collecting vapors. It is noteworthy that the
later, vented distributors are still prone to advance mechanism seizing, and the still later Marelli distributors are vented
even though they have no advance mechanisms to seize. And the real source of the explosive vapors is the incompetent
mechanic who has addressed a seized centrifugal advance by spraying WD-40 down the center of the shaft, which spun
out and was ignited on startup and blew the cap apart.
There is a seal between the shaft and the distributor housing, but it gets hard and brittle, probably due to the heat in this
area. If the distributor is being worked on, it might be a good idea to replace this seal. Note that removing the
distributor drive gear retaining pin requires some grinding, and reinstalling the pin requires a tack weld to hold it in
place. There’s a bearing in there, too, you might wanna renew it while you’re there.
RATTLY PARTS: Richard Chapman had another problem: “The pressed connection between the rotor shaft and plate
where the springs connect was loose. I brazed it very carefully and that made the timing reading stable rather than
flickering.” This is not a rare occurrence; be sure to check your rotor carrier for looseness before reassembly.
THINGY: Highly technical term referring to a specially-shaped plastic thrust washer at the bottom of the rotor carrier
shaft, just below the centrifugal advance weights. It has ears on it that appear to provide an inner stop for the centrifugal
weights, apparently to reduce noise but effectively limiting how retarded the timing moves at idle. It’s also a British
non-metallic part, so it may be cracked or broken. Note: If you have the early distributor held together with a screw
under the rotor instead of the nylon clip, you don’t have a thingy and don’t need one.
If you’re lucky enough to have an intact thingy, you need to take care to reinstall it properly during reassembly. If you
just look at it and line up the notches with the “wings” on the cam plate on the bottom of the rotor carrier shaft, there’s a
better than even chance you will have installed it wrong. There is a pair of pins on the thingy that hold it in position
relative to the cam plate, and the correct position of these pins is shown in Figure 9. Note that for clarity the thingy itself
is not shown, only its pins.
142
RIGHT
WRONG
Figure 9 - Locating the Pins on the "Thingy"
If your thingy is toast, bad news: This part is apparently unobtainable. It’s not included in the DZB105 kit. One
frustrated owner reported: “I phoned Lucas Aftermarket Operations, Parts and Service (note: See page 705).
Apparently, they have routine service parts which are readily available at most dealers, other service parts which they
can provide part numbers for and which are often available, and then there are non-service parts which of course the
thingy and the seal fall under. The parts did not show up on his drawings although he did have DZB105. He could
see the shaft bearings in the drawing, but no seal and no plastic thingy. I asked what happens to parts that are not on
their drawings anymore. I was advised that once it is not profitable to sell replacement parts, they are removed from
the aftermarket listing and so, to Lucas Aftermarket the part numbers are no longer available. He told me that the
part numbers could only be obtained from the factory drawings once they were declared non-service parts. He also
advised that they factory would not talk to me about this because that is what Lucas Aftermarket is for. So, Lucas
Aftermarket is apparently the only information source Lucas has for part numbers and they do not have these parts
listed anymore.”
You’re screwed. The only option -- and it’s a perfectly workable one -- is to install a generic 5/16” ID flat thrust
washer in place of this thingy. Val Danilov adds “I wouldnt use any washer there larger than 0.5in OD, as it may
interfere with the weights.” The thrust washer also needs to be at least .060” thick, although if thinner you could
merely stack two in there; the ideal thickness is around .078”, but you could probably install anything up to about .
120” without any problem. The loss of the inner stops for the centrifugal weights will evidently allow the timing to
retard a fraction of a degree more at idle than before (timing is set at 3000 RPM, well out of the influence of this
thingy, so timing anywhere except idle will be unaffected). There also might be some noise at idle with the weights
hitting the metal shaft instead of the plastic stops, although how you would ever hear it above the general din of the
engine idling is simply inconceivable.
Plastic, brass or bronze will work nicely; steel might gall against the other steel parts, and aluminum or copper may be
too soft and wear quickly. Danilov doesn’t like the idea of plastic, since this is the type of application where
choosing the wrong plastic will result in a part that gets hard and cracks with age; he found a porous bronze thrust
washer at an Ace hardware store with the 1/2” OD and was able to drill out the ID to the correct size. This sintered
bronze bearing material is ideal, since the entire purpose of the material is for use as a bearing between steel parts.
Another idea would be to buy a 5/16” ID - 1/2” OD bronze sleeve bushing and slice a suitable ring off one end of it
(if you find a place that sells them, you might want to pick up a couple more such bushings; see the section on throttle
143
linkage bushing replacement on page 269).
CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE REASSEMBLY: Do not grease the sleeve bearing area between the rotor carrier shaft
and the distributor shaft before reassembly; this bearing should be lubricated with full synthetic engine oil only. Steve
Holst shared his experience with the xj-s@jag-lovers.org discussion list: “I can vouch for having no grease put in the
rebuild. I had my distributor rebuilt by my previous Jag mechanic before I knew of this list. About two years later it was
seized up again. It didn't take long before that grease was gumming things up again. I have a feeling that most Jag
mechanics assume that slathering on the stuff is the way to do this job. I cleaned it out myself that time and haven't had
a problem since.”
It is recommended that the pivots for the weights be lubricated with dry graphite only. The ends of the springs and the
contact surfaces all the way around the cam plate on the bottom of the rotor carrier shaft may be lubricated with a high
temp light grease such as automotive contact grease, but make sure not to apply so much that there is any conceivable
way you could cause a seizure if this grease hardens. An unnamed source on the MG discussion list says, “Dupont
makes a line of synthetic greases under the Krytox brand name which use a PFPE (perfluoropolyether) oil thickened with
PTFE (Teflon). It is rated for continuous use up to 260°C and down to forty below zero and is chemically inert, so it
won't react with anything which may come into contact with it (gas, liquid or solid). I think the GPL-225 would
probably meet your needs, but something thicker (GPL-226) might be good, too. You should be able to get a 'sample'
tube of this stuff for about $10 or less. Check out:
http://www.lubricants.dupont.com/
Finding a replacement nylon clip apparently requires buying the entire service kit (see page 141), which you might want
to consider anyway. However, considering the clip’s failure tendencies, you may decide not to use it. It has been found
that an excellent method to retain the rotor carrier is to insert a couple of small metal washers that fit within the carrier
but around the top of the shaft, followed by a tiny, chubby O-ring. Snap the O-ring into the groove on the top of the
shaft so that it retains the washers in place, which in turn retain the carrier. David Johnson says, “I found a #61 O-Ring
at Home Depot was a perfect fit in the groove. It has the following dimensions: 9/32” x 5/32” x 1/16”. The O-Ring has
a slightly smaller diameter than the top of the shaft. When you get it on it seems to stretch until it is a perfect fit for the
groove.” For owners in the UK, Carlos Artal says, “The O-ring can be found in the generic O-ring packet they sell at
Halfords. There are 2 boxes, one with large rings and one with small ones ; in the small O-rings one, there's a perfect
sized O-ring.” It might even be a good idea to try to find a Viton O-ring in this size, although since sealing isn’t the
issue and you’d be willing to buy a new O-ring whenever you take the distributor apart perhaps you don’t care if it gets
hard and brittle.
Another suggestion: Roger Bywater says, “Pulling the spindle apart invariably destroys the plastic retainer at the top but
we find a small push on trim lock washer works just as well.”
The washers need to have an OD less than 13/32” (10.3mm) but larger than 5/16” (7.9mm), and the ID needs to be at
least 3/16” (4.8mm). Brass washers would be ideal; you don’t need yet another source of rust in this assembly. Johnson
says that Home Depot’s 5mm plain zinc washers fit perfectly. “They are in the pull out boxes and not hanging on peg
hooks. 4 per bag.”
If these parts are installed properly the carrier should have a slight amount of up and down play, but if excessive there is
the possibility the rotor carrier shaft might be able to slide up far enough to disengage the pins on the thingy down
below. If the thingy moves while thus disengaged, the rotor carrier shaft might come back down and crunch it. This is
unlikely to happen while running, but it might occur when somebody is trying to replace the rotor. To avoid the
problem, install at least two washers under the O-ring. Better yet, do some trial fits while apart; first, try just the O-ring
and washers on the distributor shaft to see how many will fit, then trial assemble the rotor carrier shaft, thingy, washers
and O-ring without the centrifugal weights in the way and see if the pins on the thingy remain engaged when the rotor
carrier shaft is lifted. When through with the trial, it should be possible to simply pull the rotor carrier shaft off, popping
the O-ring without damage, but just in case it’d probably be a good idea to have a couple of spare O-rings on hand for
such trials.
Once the rotor carrier shaft is in place and retained, you can connect up the centrifugal advance springs. On the heavy
144
one, it is recommended that the elongated end be positioned on the outward post that a weight pivots on rather than the
inward post on the rotor carrier shaft baseplate. It might not make any difference, but it’ll make sure the tip of the
spring doesn’t touch the side of the rotor carrier itself. It’ll probably be easier to assemble this way, too.
If there is no felt plug in the top of the rotor carrier shaft, install one -- or just jam a cotton ball in there. Something
needs to hold some oil.
DISTRIBUTOR OVERHAUL -- PAY SOMEONE ELSE VERSION: Jeff Elmore points out that British Car Service
(page 706) will overhaul your distributor for you. “I called them and they said that they do the whole seals, bushings
and new springs. They said that they have an assortment of springs and they keep trying until they get the right advance
curve.”
DISTRIBUTOR INSTALLATION: Since you read this book first and marked the parts correctly, installation is a snap.
If the crankshaft has not been disturbed, reinstall the distributor with the rotor pointing in the same direction it was
before removal (Note: Correcting a seized advance mechanism may make the rotor point slightly differently, but it’s
real close. You’ll know if you miss by one tooth on the drive gear). If the crankshaft was turned, remove the oil filler
cap, turn the engine until 10° BTDC and the mark you made on the sprocket is showing, and install the distributor with
the rotor pointing towards the 1A contact on the cap.
If you didn’t plan ahead and the engine has been turned, it is not so easy. If you just take a blind shot at this you only
have a 50/50 chance of getting it right. There is a mark on the jackshaft, but the jackshaft turns at the same rate as the
crankshaft, twice the rate of the distributor, so that mark is of no help.
To ensure correct positioning, the 1A spark plug can be removed and the engine turned over with a thumb over the hole;
the compression stroke can easily be determined. However, getting the 1A plug out and a thumb over the hole is
difficult on the H.E. (it’s much easier on the pre-H.E.). You might try Bob Egerton’s bubble trick described in the
section on timing starting on page 126. There are also whistles sold that can screw into the plug hole to report when
you’re on the compression stroke.
Craig Sawyers says, “...look down the hole. If it is on exhaust, you can just see the exhaust valve if you shine a light
down the hole. If it is on ignition, you won't see any valve (they'll both be shut).”
Mike Morrin says, “There is an easier way. Set the engine to TDC according to the mark on the crankshaft, get a short
length of hose which will seal up against the spark plug hole, and blow into it. On the compression stroke, you should
go red in the face.”
Alternatively you can check cylinder 6A (right rear cylinder), which may be easier for any of the methods described
above. This cylinder fires exactly one complete crankshaft rotation before and after 1A. Therefore, you can find the top
of the compression stroke on 6A and then turn the crankshaft through one complete turn. Or, you can leave it there and
install the distributor such that the rotor points to the 6A contact instead, exactly opposite the 1A contact.
To place the distributor housing in the right place on the slotted holes so the vernier adjustment has a usable range,
merely align it with the marks you made before you took it out. You didn’t mark it? Tsk, tsk. Read on.
Michael Neal claims, after working on these cars daily, that the optimum location of the distributor body on the three
slotted holes is always the same. The correct position “is with the distributor body set at 3.5 degrees retarded at the
adjuster. The centerline of the rotor will be 75% past the No. 1 line on the inner shield. The slots for the holddown
allen bolts will be 2/3 past the allen heads. The tooth on the pickup will be roughly 5 degrees past the center of the
pickup point. Note that the distributor turns anti-clockwise. This setting will give you near perfect timing almost every
time with adjustments both ways. Other settings tend to give too much retard or advance with no adjustment.”
PREVENTING THE DAMN THING FROM SEIZING AGAIN: After you’ve overhauled the distributor and fixed the
seized advance, the rotor carrier/distributor shaft interface must be lubricated regularly; the Lubrication Chart in the
145
ROM says two or three drops of clean engine oil in the felt under the rotor every 6,000 miles (every oil change - no,
Quickie Lube is not likely to be doing this!). This is not easy, as it requires removing the distributor cap, which in turn
requires removing the cruise control unit and all the ignition wires. This lubrication procedure is obviously very
important; it is recommended that owners do it themselves, or make very sure their mechanic isn’t skipping this part of
the maintenance. Jan Wikström suggests installing a new felt pad, then taking it in for service. If the pad is dry when
checked afterward, cease doing business with that shop. Perhaps good advice, but has a significant probability of
eliminating every shop in the area from consideration!
Note that many XJ-S distributors don’t seem to have any felt. Considering the known problems here, it’d probably be a
good idea to put some in. Or, just a wad of cotton.
Since the seizing appears to be caused by the lubricant getting baked, normal “clean engine oil” might not be the best
idea. I recommend that a synthetic engine oil be used, since it won’t tend to varnish or sludge and withstands higher
temperatures without breaking down. Soak the felt or cotton thoroughly every time you’re in there, and make sure
you’re in there often enough. It might not need to be as often as every 6,000 miles -- especially if you’re using synthetic
motor oil -- but it’s better to be safe than sorry here, so make sure you do it often until you personally have confidence
that you can go longer between oilings without the thing drying out or gumming up.
It is suggested that spray lubricants of the flammable variety be avoided within the distributor. When running, there are
sparks between the rotor and the electrodes in the cap; vapors will be ignited upon starting, ruining your day.
DISTRIBUTOR CAP REPLACEMENT: Randy Wilson has a low opinion of the aftermarket products, and
recommends buying only the genuine Lucas parts: “The last time I checked, there was only one aftermarket cap
available. I ordered in a lot of them... and every single one was defective in one way or another. Missing center buttons,
missing vent tubes, pre-cracked, molded oval... Flimsy pieces. They’re about 1/3 the price of the Lucas pieces... and not
worth it.” Note that the author has also purchased one of these aftermarket items, and in fact had trouble with the vent
tubes simply falling off. Rendering it usable required careful application of JB Weld.
Jason Korke says, “I have found when I installed a replacement cap & rotor from "Standard" brand, they worked OK
but the vent tubes broke off. I reinstalled the Lucas cap, and found no spark! Eventually I found the Standard cap &
rotor will work and the Lucas cap & rotor will work, but do not mix the two brands.”
DISTRIBUTOR CAP VENTING: The 82-89 distributor cap has two fittings for a positive ventilation system. Air is
drawn through a small filter, through the distributor, and into the engine side of the air filter housing. The filter is
normally found laying against the left wing at the crossbrace attachment, and sometimes concerns owners because it
appears to have been disconnected from somewhere.
Reportedly this system was incorporated because the earlier distributor caps were cracking due to excessive heat,
although some suspect removal of flammable vapors was the real reason -- see comments under DISTRIBUTOR
SHAFT SEAL on page 142.
The connection to the air filter housing is not actually to the housing directly, but rather to a hose between the housing
and the auxiliary air valve (see page 265). This is therefore a special molded hose with provision for a tiny fitting. The
fitting itself is a plastic elbow, and is often found to be broken. It is not to difficult to find a suitable replacement,
though, and you might even find a brass one. Or, you can forget the whole thing and install a generic piece of hose
between the air filter housing and the auxiliary air valve, and install a small fitting right onto the inner side of the air filter
housing for connecting the vent line from the distributor.
The filter itself is no more complicated than it looks. Any generic fuel filter will serve as a replacement. Unfortunately,
some people actually have trouble finding one; David Littlefield says, “These used to be widely available as a generic fuel
filter. However, when I looked for one recently they were nowhere to be found. I finally ran across one at my local
auto parts store, but not with the automobile fuel filters -- it was in the lawnmower parts!” Others suggest asking for a
fuel filter for a VW. Peter Havas got carried away and made a filter from a plastic film container stuffed with generic
filter material (cotton, some types of vacuum cleaner filters, a coffee filter, or the crankcase ventilation filters sold in auto
146
parts stores will serve). He cut lots of little holes in one end, and cut a hole in the other end just a hair smaller than the
OD of the hose and stuffed the hose into it. This arrangement allows him to service the filter by opening it up and
cleaning or replacing the “element”.
Obviously, optimizing airflow and cooling would be a good idea, so replacing this filter before it gets significantly
plugged up is recommended. If you drive in dusty conditions, take note.
If you would like to help this system out, reroute the intake filter to somewhere in front of the radiator. This will draw
cooler air, and will also draw more air since this is a high pressure area. The cooler air should also help the electronic
ignition pickup last longer.
It’s possible that this ventilation scheme was retrofitted to earlier cars. It may also be possible to drill the older cap and
fashion suitable fittings, one in the side for an inlet and one out the top for an outlet. A few pieces of hose, a fuel filter,
and a connection to the engine side of an air filter housing and it’s done.
Lucas OPUS Mark 2 (pre-1982)
LUCAS “OPUS” MARK 2 IGNITION -- DESCRIPTION: This is a brief description of how the pre-1982 ignition
system works, based on the more detailed description in SAE paper 720163 on the development of the engine.
The pickup within the distributor consists of an E-shaped transformer with one input coil and two output coils. The
input coil is on the center leg of the E and is fed a 600KHz input signal from the amplifier. The two output coils are on
the outer legs of the E and are wired in series so that their outputs cancel -- provided the two sides of the transformer
are equal.
When one of the ferrite inserts built into the plastic rotor in the distributor aligns itself with one side of this transformer,
it magnetically completes the circle on one side of the E. Since the output coil on this side is now more closely coupled
with the input coil than the other output coil, its output is greater -- and the two no longer cancel each other. A
transistor in the amp is toggled by the resultant output signal, triggering a spark.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Jan Wikström sends this procedure for testing the OPUS ignition system:
1.
Pull the lead from coil to distributor out of the distributor and jam it under a fuel pipe so there’s a gap
of about 1 mm (.04in) between the brass and the nearest engine part.
2.
Crank the engine. Do you get fat, blue sparks in the gap? Then the ignition is OK and you need to
troubleshoot the injection system. If not, continue:
3.
Pull the spade connector off the coil terminal marked (+). Turn the ignition on, then test the power
with a spare light bulb between the connector and engine bare metal (this is better than a voltmeter,
because it will reveal a poor contact with insufficient current carrying capacity). Is the lamp bright?
Then continue; if there’s no voltage, check the ignition switch and all its wiring including the ballast
resistor.
4.
Touch the connector quickly several times to the terminal. Do you get a spark now? Then the pickup
coil in the distributor or its wiring, or (less likely) the amplifier, may be faulty. If there’s no spark,
turn the ignition off and continue:
5.
Get a test lead with alligator clips. Clip one end to bare metal on the engine, pull the tubular
connector off the (-) terminal of the coil and clip the other end to that terminal.
6.
Repeat test 4. If you get a spark now, the amplifier or its wiring is faulty. If you get no spark, the
coil is dead.”
147
OPUS IGNITION AMPLIFIER RELOCATION: The OPUS ignition amplifier is a finned aluminum block that was
originally mounted down within the galley between the cam covers. It gets cooked, primarily after the engine is shut off
and all that heat from the block rises. Dick Russell says that intermittent failures characterized by the tach reading zero
even when the engine is still turning are a sure sign the amp has failed.
Jaguar makes a kit to relocate this amplifier to the plate across the top of the radiator so it stays cooler. The kit includes
a new amplifier and a new pickup for inside the distributor, and costs over $300.
It is possible Jaguar includes the amplifier and pickup simply because the only time their mechanics get a call to relocate
the unit is after the original unit has fried. On the other hand, perhaps the reason the unit was originally located in such a
sorry place was because the wiring needed to be as short as possible, and the replacement amp and pickup have updated
circuitry necessary for the longer wires. According to Jan Wikström, the plugs and wires used on the replacement kit
are different than the original, indicating you’re supposed to replace the amp and pickup together. However, he simply
spliced wires and used his old pickup, and it worked fine. He notes, however, that the wire color codes changed; it is
necessary to open the amp and verify where the wires go to ensure they are connected correctly.
Clearly, crosstalk between the 600 KHz input signal and the output wire back to the amp would be detrimental to
operation, and such crosstalk could be easily caused by the wires merely being located too close to each other for too
great a distance. Also, the output wire picking up any other signals -- such as interference from the ignition wires -would be ungood.
Reportedly, some owners have relocated their original amps by simply lengthening the wires, and have been successful.
Others have not been successful. At least one owner reports that the official Jaguar relocation kit caused the wires to
pick up so much interference from the spark plug wires that the car wouldn’t run, and he couldn’t get the system to
work until he shortened the wires back to the length of the original.
Russell recommends that ribbon wire with five or more conductors be used to relocate the amp. By using every other
conductor, the unused conductors in between provide adequate spacing between the active conductors to prevent
crosstalk and interference.
Russell also recommends relocating the amp to the firewall rather than the top of the radiator. In his car, the amp was
affected by water and crud thrown up from cars in front of him. Fortunately, he was able to repair it by resoldering
some connections inside.
Perhaps another solution is to leave the amp in the valley and attempt to keep it cool there. Fashioning a heat shield
from sheet aluminum for underneath it will help. Also, see the suggestion on page 125 about cutting a hole in the A/C
compressor mounting plate.
British Auto/USA (see page 692) claims to have “reinvented” this amp using modern electronics. The amp they offer,
part number JLM368/R, looks exactly like the original and is supposedly durable enough that it may be located within
the V; apparently some concours judges will subtract points if the amp isn’t in its original location.
Of course, if you don’t care about concours points, the best relocation idea is to relocate that OPUS system to a
dumpster and replace it with an aftermarket ignition system. See page 150.
If you have a 1982-89 car with a black plastic amplifier mounted on top of the left intake manifold, you have the Lucas
CEI ignition rather than the Lucas OPUS. There is no need to worry about relocating the amp.
IGNITION AMPLIFIER -- REPAIR: Referring to the OPUS finned aluminum ignition amp, Jan Wikström says: “As
for the amplifier itself, there is precious little pottery involved. I opened up the suspect one (four small hex-head screws
underneath) and found that while there’s a silicon blob at the cable entry and a silicon slurp for a seal around the lid, the
inside is empty and there is complete access to PC board and power transistor. No need to $pend up on a new one if it
goes belly up; this unit is eminently repairable.”
Phil Stuart says, “There are four transistors in the early Lucas Opus ignition amplifier, one is a big one in a TO-3 casing
for amplifying and 3 smaller ones for switching. I burnt up the smaller switching transistor. It's fixed and running now;
the transistor we finally put in was a ECG128, NPN type. Cost $2.95 CND. The original one was Germanium NPN;
148
the replacement is silicon NPN.”
PICKUP WIRING: Wikström warns: “One problem I’ve had on both cars is an intermittent break in one of the three
ignition trigger wires coming out the front of the distributor, right in the moulded grommet. This seems inherent to the
design, as the big, heavy three-pin connector flops around on loose wires and should cause metal fatigue as the wire
bends back and forth. I have replaced the wires (solder joints inside the distributor) and applied spade connectors
instead of the three-pin job.”
COIL LOCATION: If you can’t find it, you’re in trouble. If you have the Haynes manual, the caption on the
photograph labelled 10.2 on page 118 says it’s “at the rear of the throttle pedestal” but it lies, it’s at the front.
BALLAST RESISTOR PACK: The ballast resistor pack is shown as item 164 on the Jaguar wiring schematics. On
earlier schematics, it is illustrated as a simple rectangular box with six wires connected to it, but on later schematics they
show three resistors inside. It would probably have been better if they hadn’t done that, because the simplistic 3-resistor
illustration is incorrect and misleading.
Section 86.35.29/3 of the ©1975 ROM is titled “Ballast resistor check”, and provides a simplistic continuity test. It
provides a more detailed illustration of the ballast resistor pack -- also incorrect. Section 86.35.29/4, “Coil voltage
check”, Step #4 includes values for the resistors in the ballast resistor pack, but they’re numbered “Resistor 1” through
“Resistor 3” and “Connection 4” and “Connection 5” with no clue whatsoever what connections they’re talking about.
In section 86.35.29/10, in the latter half of Step #4, inexplicably buried in the midst of a coil/amplifier check procedure,
the resistance values are repeated and the illustration is provided again -- this time with Connection 4 and 5 labelled, but
you’re still left to guess at the resistor numbers. The Haynes manual doesn’t have any illustrations of the ballast resistor
pack innards, just photos of the outside. Is it any wonder that this book has grown to over 730 pages? Anyhow, the
easiest thing to do is to simply provide a new illustration, so please refer to the figure here instead of any of the
illustrations in the manuals.
7.6- 9.2 OHM
AMPLIFIER
100 OHM
SW
0.72- 0.80 OHM
START
Mike Morrin explains the tach connection: The power
from the center left terminal through the 7.6-9.2Ω resistor
to the upper right terminal on the ballast pack diagram
(which connects to the W/U wire) “...is the drive current
for the output switching transistor. So, the tachometer
gets its drive direct from the amplifier, not from the coil
circuit.”
TACHO
It should also be noted that some of the diagrams in the
Haynes book have differing color codes on the wires; for
example, Fig. 4.1 shows a UW wire where the XJ-S has a
W/U, and a WU wire where the XJ-S has a W/SU.
0.9- 1.0 OHM
“According to the parts books I have here, there was an
early version, used 1971-72 which apparently did not have
the tachometer connection, and the later version, which
was used 1972-80.” Morrin provides part numbers:
E-type C35883
until engine 7S7559
E-type C37759
from engine 7S7560
XJ-S
all
C37759
Figure 10 - OPUS Ballast Resistor Pack
“C37759 is apparently Lucas 47229.”
There is some discrepancy about the resistor serving the tach. The XJ-S ROM reports it as 100Ω, but the SIII E-Type
149
ROM reports it as a straight-through connection, no resistor. This actually probably wouldn’t make any difference to an
electronic tachometer; the resistor merely limits current in the event of a short circuit or something. Could the part
number change with engine 7S7560 reflect the resistor? Morrin: “Either way there is a mistake, it says:
"Connection 5 - Tachometer terminal and straight through internal connection (incorporated in later
units marked 47227)."
That 47227 part is apparently a typo in the E-Type manual; it should say 47229, which is what is actually marked on the
ballast packs.
“On reflection, I think the early unit probably had the straight through connection and the later unit the 100 ohm resistor.
There does not appear to be any change in the vehicle wiring coinciding with the change in ballast.”
Note that 86.35.33 describes how to remove the resistor pack. Evidently rocket science, don’t tackle this job unless you
are a very experienced mechanic. At least Jaguar didn’t put any serious errors in this procedure.
If your ballast resistor pack has failed, it shouldn’t be terribly difficult to put together a collection of generic resistors to
replace it. After some discussion about a ballast resistor pack in which that 7.6-9.2Ω resistor had blown, Gary Johnson
suggested “Radio Shack (Tandy). They sell a 10 or 20 watt 8 ohm non-inductive resistor that sounds perfect for this
application.” For the main resistor serving the coil, there are a wide variety of ballast resistors available at any parts
store since just about all cars used them up until the 80’s; it should be easy to find one that will work.
TACHOMETER PROBLEMS: Both John Holmes and Jan Wikström had tachometers that didn’t work, and both
arrived at the same corrective action: they disconnected the tach signal wire from the ballast pack and connected it to the
- terminal on the coil, where it’s connected on every other car ever made. Holmes: “I just know how this is wired in
other cars and did the simplest circuit possible to see if the tach worked. When it did, why change it again?”
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM UPGRADE: As mentioned above, British Auto/USA (see page 692) offers a
replacement amplifier for the OPUS ignition system that supposedly is more reliable than the original. Supposedly.
Steve S reports, “I had of those BA updated amps bought from SNG in UK fitted to my V12 E. The original OPUS
amp did 20 years and 90k miles in the V and was still working when I took it out after hearing that it was unreliable. I
thought I was going to "decrease chance of a breakdown". The SNG updated unit lasted about 3 years and 7K miles
before failing in the classic opus failure mode - dies suddenly when hot. Fortunately because this was a USA inspired
device it came with a lifetime guarantee (as against a UK guarantee of guaranteed until it breaks).”
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT: If you have any trouble with the original Lucas OPUS
ignition system, it is recommended that you simply replace the entire system with a modern aftermarket ignition system.
There are several available, and most of them can be purchased in entirety for less than replacing any defective part of
the OPUS system. And the owners who have opted for such upgrades have universally reported better performance
from their cars. Note: this recommendation does not carry over to cars with the Lucas CEI ignition; that is an excellent
system and there is rarely any cause to ditch it.
Lucas designed the plastic wheel within the OPUS distributor with three slotted holes that enable the mechanic to insert
an Allen wrench, loosen the three screws at the very bottom, and remove the distributor as a unit. If you install some
sort of aftermarket system, you might want to consider whether or not you will be able to get that Allen wrench past or
through whatever is used to trigger the pickup. Of course, it might not be your highest priority; you could always simply
disassemble the distributor in place far enough to remove the wheel to gain access to the screws.
None of the common aftermarket systems will replace the EFI trigger board. The EFI is a separate system that just
happens to have its trigger board inside the distributor. After you’ve removed all the OPUS junk and installed an optical
wheel and pickup or whatever, you will need to put that trigger board right back in. If your trigger board is toast and
you’ve priced a new one, that is definitely bad news. However, Jaguar’s upgrade trigger board -- which uses Hall effect
transistors instead of the reed switches used in the original -- seems to be reliable, so usually you only need to buy it
150
once.
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT -- ALLISON/CRANE XR700: Allison was acquired by
Crane. By whichever name, their XR700 is a popular replacement for the OPUS. Derek Hibbs reports: “My ign amp
died as a result of convected heat last year. A reliable replacement unit was not available so the workshop installed a
Crane Cams unit. The unit itself is located on the RHS air cleaner and it came with replacement pieces for the
distributor because it uses an optical pickup.”
Andrew Holley says, “I removed the Lucas (Prince of Darkness) system and fitted the Crane XR700-0300 system, took
all of about 2 hrs. The car starts first time every time, and seems to run a bit more crisply. It has improved fuel
consumption slightly, but the major benifit is that it now starts instantly , no matter the conditions.”
Steve Douglass says, “After fighting problems (mostly heat related) with the original OPUS system on my car, I replaced
it with a Crane Fireball system that I got from Terry's for $124.00. The kit came with everything I needed to do the job
along with good instructions. The system has an optical pickup that goes in the distributor and an amplifier that mounts
on the firewall. Pretty much like what it replaces. I was able to install the thing in about 2 hrs and the car fired right
up.”
Paul Clarkson had a hell of a time with pickup mounting brackets inside the distributor and ended up having to fab and
modify stuff, but he’s apparently the only one; everyone else claims the system is a simple bolt-in. Emin Morali replied:
“Try to assemble the optical pick-up unit without using any bracket. You use only two screws and it will fit perfectly in
the place of original pick-up unit.”
There is some confusion about which coil to use with the XR700. Clarkson reported, “I invested in a Crane Cams
XR700 amp and PS91 coil. Here is a reply I received from the tech. dept. at Crane Cams in reply to my query about
lengthening the pick-up leads (so I could locate it in a cool place):
"The XR700 is to be used with our PS20 or PS40 coil with the supplied ballast resistor that
comes with them. The PS91 coil has such a low resistance that two ballast resistors are
needed to keep the XR700 from overheating. This also kills off some of the spark power to
the point of being worse than it would be if the proper coils were used. If you wish to keep
the killer coil you will need to use the XR3000 amp that is designed to use the higher
output coil. Please fix this before proceeding. You hook it up just as you see in the
instructions and everything should be fine. You can also add to the length of the wires on
the amp if they are of the same gauge and type of wire. Hope this helps. Tech support,
Steve 4208..."
Again, Emin Morali responds: “When I fit Crane XR700, the car was hesitating to exceed 5000-5200 rpm with misfire
at the engine. So I changed the PS20 with PS91 keeping the same OEM ballast resistor pack of my car, but adding a
serial resistor of 1.4 ohm to protect XR700. No result, the same problem continued. This time I throw the 1.4 ohm
resistor away and used PS91 with OEM resistor pack. My problem finished. However the possibility of damaging the
amplifier pushed me to replace PS91 with a Bosch blue coil (also low primary resistance) by adding a serial resistor and
no problem at all.”
Clarkson says the XR700/PS91 setup was recommended by (now defunct) GT Jaguar. Paul Squire: “Quoting their
website: "Gran Turismo worked very closely with Crane on these systems. The tech questions they receive about their
systems for Jaguars are referred to us because they know we have more knowledge in this area than even they do."”
Terry’s Jaguar (page 696) offers the Crane system, or you can also get it directly from Crane.
The Crane system comes with a disk with suitable slotted holes for access to the screws in the bottom of the distributor.
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT -- ALLISON/CRANE XR3000: Emin Morali says, “I had
called a Crane dealer in Florida to ask him if I can use XR3000 with PS91. After he discussed the subject with a Crane
tech., he told me that it won't work. I did not understand the reason why, however I had seen before in Crane web site
151
that XR3000 may have compatibility problem with OPUS systems and was not recommended.” Gee, it seems the Crane
tech support keeps telling us not to do things that work fine; Bernard Embden installed the XR3000 and it seems to have
worked out, although he put a lot of effort into locating the amp inside the car and making a bracket he liked for the
optical pickup inside the distributor. You can view his installation at
http://bernardembden.com/xjs/ingamp/index.htm
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT -- LUMENITION: Welsh Enterprises (page 697) offers at
least two different models of Lumenition electronic ignition system for the XJ-S, each featuring an optical pickup and
compatible with their engine rev limiters.
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT -- LUCAS CEI: The later Lucas CEI system makes an
excellent upgrade for the Lucas OPUS. Buying the Jaguar parts new would be more expensive than just going with one
of the aftermarket systems above, but if you can find what you need in a junkyard you might get off pretty cheap. If you
can’t find the CEI ignition amp for a reasonable price, you can build one with a GM HEI module, a couple of resistors, a
capacitor, a zener diode, and a suitable box to mount them in. You can use the Lucas CEI distributor, but you must
install the vacuum and centrifugal mechanisms from the original distributor in it to maintain the correct advance curves
for the pre-H.E. engine. You’ll also need to omit the anti-flash shield used in the CEI distributor to mount the D
Jetronic EFI trigger board, but they use the same mounting holes so that’s easy. Make sure to use the earlier “green
stripe” rotor as it has the magnet in it that drives the EFI trigger board.
Alternatively, you can reuse your OPUS distributor. You will probably need to modify it to install the CEI pickup,
though. On the CEI cars, the pickup mounts on a metal plate that can rotate with the vacuum advance; on the OPUS
cars, there’s a fragile micarta part that rotates and holds the pickup. The body of the OPUS distributor includes a center
section that this micarta part rotates around, and on the CEI distributor body this center section is gone.
According to John Testrake, SNG Barratt (page 696) developed a way to upgrade to the Lucas CEI while maintaining
the appearance of the OPUS under the hood. “They have marketed it for Ser III E-types which are, of course,
carburetted. I called them last year and asked if they could do it for an EFI engine. They said yes and that they were
just bringing that to market. I think mine was the first one.
“They completely rebuilt the dist. from my car with all new parts and refitted it with the CEI reluctor and pickup. Then
they swapped the internal parts of my amp with CEI parts and built in a heat resistant mounting. It's all designed to
operate with the D-jet EFI and has all the original advance curves, trigger board and what not.
“And it uses one coil. It's a Lucas coil with bare aluminum case about 6" long and a white cap where the leads connect
that says LUCAS. It mounts to the front of the throttle pedestal like the original. Pretty standard issue, I think and it
comes as part of the kit.
“Everything looks like OPUS. Nobody can tell it has CEI inside. I'm hoping for a JCNA North American class 11
Championship with this car. So that's why all the fuss over originality.”
Steve S, who reported above that he had purchased the British Auto/USA-upgraded OPUS amp from SNG Barratt and
it failed on him: “SNG being good people exchanged it for one of the CEI units in the OPUS case - although the lifetime
guarantee is not available with this new one. I gather the original unit was withdrawn because it was unreliable. With
the kit you also get a new aluminium U-shaped resistor pack identical to the original and decent fitting instructions. You
have to send your old distributor back in part exchange. The coil, OPUS style alloy box, and resistor pack have stickers
on them in inconspicuous places warning that this is an updated system with a reference number for maintenance in
future so standard parts do not get swapped back in.”
LUCAS OPUS IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT -- $$$: You could just go hog wild and install a fancyschmancy modern high-tech ignition system. See the ideas for upgrading the Marelli on page 172; any of those systems
can be used to upgrade the OPUS as well.
152
Lucas Constant Energy Ignition (1982-89)
LUCAS CEI IGNITION -- DESCRIPTION: The triggering mechanism for the Lucas CEI ignition system consists of a
“star wheel”, a wheel with 12 points on it, mounted on the distributor shaft with a “pickup” adjacent to it. There is a
magnet and a coil in the pickup. A magnetic field is established in which the flux passes from one pole of the magnet
through the coil, through the star wheel, and back to the opposite pole of the magnet. When a point on the star wheel
aligns with the core of the coil, this magnetic flux has a nearly continuous path of iron and is therefore at its strongest.
When the point is far away from the core of the coil, the magnetic flux is at its weakest because there is so much air
space in its path.
Since a voltage is generated in a coil with a changing magnetic flux through its core, a voltage is generated in the pickup
by the increasing strength of the magnetic flux as a point on the star wheel approaches the tip of the core. A voltage is
likewise generated by the decreasing strength of the magnetic flux as a point on the star wheel moves away from the tip
of the core -- but this voltage will be opposite in polarity from the first one. The pickup will therefore produce a voltage
that suddenly reverses polarity as a point on the star wheel passes the tip of the core. The electronics within the
amplifier module sense this voltage reversal to break the ground connection to the coil, triggering a spark.
But that’s not all this system does. It waits a varying amount of time before reestablishing the ground connection to
begin charging the coil for the next spark, getting the charging started ASAP at high RPM but waiting a bit longer to get
started under idle conditions so as to minimize coil heating. It also monitors the current flow to the coil to make sure
that it does not exceed a set limit, which might happen at low RPM when there is more than adequate time to build up a
charge in the coil. If the current rises too much, the amp begins to cut back on the voltage applied, holding the current
constant and preventing the coil from overheating.
Prior to systems with such features, coils had to be designed to handle high-current conditions at low RPM and had
ballast resistors to limit the current. With the current control features, coils can be designed more compact and without
the oil inside that was needed to keep them cool. They could also be designed with very low impedance in the primary
coil without worrying about current overload problems, allowing much faster charging on 12 volts. Unfortunately, such
coils weren’t available when the Lucas CEI was introduced, so two conventional coils were wired together to
accomplish the task. Later, after suitable coils became commonplace, Jaguar would replace the dual-coil setup with a
single modern coil whenever a coil needed service.
During most operation, the ignition amp is merely switching the current on and off and is dissipating very little heat.
However, at low RPM when it’s having to cut back the voltage to limit the current in the coil, it’s having to dissipate
that extra power. It gets hot under such conditions. The amplifier is bolted to the aluminum intake manifold to try to
dissipate some of this heat to the manifold and to the cool air passing within.
Roger Bywater: “The 12.5:1 compression of the H.E. was too much for OPUS to fire and in any case it was getting
to be a bit primitive by that time as it had no means of current control other than via the ballast resistor.”
TROUBLESHOOTING: Randy Wilson sends this procedure: “With the engine cranking, check for:
Power to the ballast source
Power to the coil + post
Ground switching on coil - post (if so, you should have spark)
Ground to amplifier case
“If everything passes except the ground switching on the coil, then it’s in the amplifier or its wiring.
“A scope put on the pickup leads should give a modified sine wave pattern typical of magnetic induction sensor. At
crank speed, I think it’s around 1.5V peak-to-peak. No scope pattern is a bad pickup.”
153
“I’ve never personally seen the pickup go bad, but have run into cracked wires in the pickup harness. Quite often
jiggling the harness will cause the problem to “correct” itself; sometimes for many years. Everything working fine after
doing the scope check is bad pickup wires.”
If your car runs well when cold but gets uppity when hot and you suspect the ignition amp, you might try pouring some
water on it to cool it off. If the car runs well again, you have definitely narrowed the search for a cause down to
something in that little black box!
IGNITION AMPLIFIER -- REPAIR: The Lucas Constant Energy ignition amplifier is a black plastic box mounted on
top of the left intake manifold. This unit is clearly labeled “Lucas” and “Made in UK”. The mail-order catalogs call for
a part number DAB106, and want serious $$$ for it.
If you unbolt this unit from the intake manifold, turn it over, remove four tiny screws and remove the cover, you will see
four components inside. The predominant component is a GM High Energy Ignition (HEI) module. This unit is so
common that you can find it on a bubble card hanging from a hook in any department store with an automotive section
-- for around $20. Usually this amplifier can be repaired by simply replacing the GM HEI module for considerably less
than the cost of replacing the whole unit.
Simple? Maybe not. Dave Johnson says, “The amp on my ’84 died on me several years ago. I replaced the module
with the equivalent GM module and it lasted 3 months. I replaced the zener and the capacitor with equivalents. I again
replaced the module. This one lasted 1 month. I gave them one more chance (lifetime warranty) and it's worked for 4
years now. The moral of the story? I believe the modules available from discounters are marginal and you have to keep
trying to get a good one. Since I didn't even consider buying a new amp from the dealer I can't rate their failure rate but
a GM mechanic friend of mine kept after me that the modules I was getting were junk. He was right and I now have a
working one. No more intermittent problems. Try another one.”
Tom Drakos concurs: “After buying 3 different control modules all made by Wells, DR100, I got 3 different types of
results, all of which were terrible, to the point of undrivable. I knew the original was made by GM, so I searched the
internet looking for a similar application. I ended up with a control module made by AC Delco, part # D1906, even has
the GM stamp on top like the original. Price was a little more, $41.00 from Discount Auto, but well worth it. The car
runs like new, smooth as silk at all engine speeds and idle.
“My advice to anyone experiencing a problem with a control module would be not to use WELLS D100...these things
are crap!!”
Terry Pegler apparently disagrees about the part number. “The replacement modules that I am using are AC Delco #
10482820 from the GM Dealer. It is made in singapore...” Doug Dwyer adds that there were earlier part numbers for
the module, starting with 1875990 in early years, but the 10482820 replaced them.
Just because you spend the big bucks on the Delco doesn’t guarantee you’ll get a good unit. Owners have reported bad
ones of those, too. Just keep trying.
Shafi Keisler claims that the standard GM HEI module is rated for 6 amps but the one in the Jaguar V12 is a special unit
rated at 8 amps. Nobody has been able to confirm that claim, though. The standard HEI works great, once you get a
good one.
Reportedly some modules come with a packet of heat sink compound. Tom Bennett says, “I just bought a GM module
from AC Delco, came with a pack of silicone heat transfer goo. I am familiar with the usual white heat sink paste; this
stuff is very different, it's labeled silicone grease and contains 90% polysiloxane 10% silica.” Hmmm. Might not be heat
transfer goo; might just be goo. Dunno why they’d provide a packet of goo, though.
Heat sink compound might not be a bad idea; applying it between the module and the ign amp housing might help the
module run cooler. Even if the module you get doesn’t come with the stuff, you can get it at electronics shops. The
best way to apply heat sink compound is with a single bead, so that when you bring the parts together you squeeze the
compound so it spreads out. This way you avoid air pockets in it.
John Robison says, “Advance Auto has an electronic gizmo they can plug the GM unit into. It simulates loading at both
154
low and high rpm (somehow) and then gives a pass/fail indication for both conditions.” While it may hardly seem
worthwhile to check a $20 part rather than simply replacing it, such a test may go a long way toward confirming
diagnoses. You might even consider testing the new one you just bought before you leave the store.
Joe Bialy adds: “There are 5 connections on the GM HEI module. The fifth terminal is the ground for the module
which is actually one of the mounting holes on the module itself. All of the coil current passes through this connection.
If the ground terminal on the module itself is not secure, ignition problems will occur.” Peter Havas adds, “The HEI's on
GM engines sit atop the distributor cap, and the replacements must have a second ground wire or they burn up. I don't
know why, but having had many GM trucks which suffered spontaneous HEI failure, it was revealed by the local GM
garage that you must run a straight ground as well as the little flat strip to the HEI to keep it from burning up. This
applies only to replacement units, and I have no idea why. It works though.” There don’t seem to be similar problems
in the Jaguar V12 application -- perhaps since the module is securely bolted to the aluminum intake manifold rather than
to the distributor cap -- but it couldn’t hurt to make sure the ground is solid while you’re in there replacing a module.
Becky Amason says, “Anyone having repeat failures of your ignition modules should check the wires from the stator in
the distributor for damaged insulation. This is a known problem with GM HEI ignitions. The wires flex as the vacuum
advance moves back and forth, eventually breaking the insulation and shorting out the ignition module.”
The other components inside the amp housing are a 1 microfarad condenser, a couple of resistors buried in a white
rubber blob, and a zener diode mounted in the top of the case so the upper surface is actually visible from outside. The
condenser may actually be a common source of trouble; there are at least two reports of it shorting out when warm, so
the engine runs OK when cold but has trouble when warm. Since the condenser is connected to 12V, it shorting out
causes it to get even hotter. Pouring cold water over the amp fixes the problem for a few seconds.
The condenser is apparently only a noise reducer, being connected to the +12V side of the coil. As such, just about any
condenser would probably work. If you’re looking for a replacement condenser, you might consider the one intended
for use with the GM HEI ignition system. Auto parts stores sell a part labelled a “capacitor”, but it’s more than that.
This part is a little harness that has a 2-terminal connector on one end that plugs onto the HEI module, a 3-terminal
connector at the other end that plugs into the GM distributor, and a capacitor attached to the 2-terminal connector. One
such part is made by Standard, part number RC-4. Joe Bialy says, “More than likely, the cap in the connector will work
as well as the Lucas cap if it is wired identically. Noise suppression caps are not the most critical components in a
system. Typically, -20/+80% tolerance items. I'd even bet an old "points" type would work just as well too.” Peyton
Gill says, “I replaced the condenser (capacitor) in the ignition amp about a year back. I used a condenser from a Chevy
inline six distributor. As memory serves, it required removal of the mounting bracket which was soldered to the
condenser body. It is a little longer but the diameter was about the same.”
About the resistors, Walter Petermann says, “The white piece of rubber has 2 resistors in it. One is 10k, the other 6.8k.
They are connected together at one end to terminal C of the GM module. This same terminal goes to the coil minus and
the large diode. The other end of the resistors go to tach and fuel ECU (white/gray wires)” The 10K resistor connects
to the tach and the 6.8K connects to the EFI ECU. On the ignition amp, both wires are the same color but the tach wire
has a male terminal and the ECU wire has a female terminal; the wires they connect to are clearly distinguishable, since
the ECU lead is a shielded cable and the tach wire is a plain W/S/U wire. Craig Sawyers points out that the 6.8K
resistor is actually shown on the fuel injection system wiring diagrams. You can easily test the resistors without even
unbolting the amp from the manifold; just disconnect the W/B wire from the ignition coil and the leads to the ECU and
tach and measure from the W/B wire to each. If the resistor feeding the tach fails the only symptom would be a
nonfunctional tach, but a failure of the resistor feeding the ECU will stop the car with conviction.
The trick to testing the zener diode is in recognizing that it only exists to protect the amp against overvoltage, which
normally occurs only when the system is operated with a spark plug wire disconnected. Under normal conditions, it
does nothing. So, to find out if it is causing trouble, merely disconnect it. If nothing changes, the diode is probably not
the problem. If the problems go away, you can consider finding a replacement zener diode or simply leave it
disconnected; if you choose the latter option, you might want to be careful not to operate the ignition with any spark
plug wires disconnected from then on.
155
FIDDLING WITH THE GM HEI IGNITION MODULE: This author found a warning inside a Lucas CEI ignition
amp that read:
CONTAINS
BERYLLIA
DO NOT OPEN
Judging from the fact that this label was attached to the surface of the GM HEI module itself, the beryllia referred to is
probably inside that module; there is nothing else within the Lucas ignition amplifier that appears to be this type of
substance.
Beryllia is the oxide of Beryllium, and is used in a type of ceramic used to mount or encase electronic parts. This
ceramic conducts heat very well, helping keep the part cool, while being an electrical insulator -- an unusual
combination. Unfortunately, beryllium is really as dangerous as indicated. If you are inside the box repairing your amp,
just remove and replace components. Don’t go sawing open the GM module, the dust created can kill you.
Mike Morrin adds, “There is actually very little of it used in anything built in the last 20 years except high power
transmitters and some specialised power modules. I am not sure about the GM ignition module, but if there is any, it is
likely to be a pad under the power device about 2mm square and .5mm thick. Beryllium Oxide is very expensive, so the
semiconductor manufacturers avoid it where possible, the safety aspects not withstanding.”
MORE TECHNICAL INFO ON THE GM HEI: Motorola once offered a publication MC3334/D which provided
“analog IC device data” on a chip they made, MC3334 (and a couple of variations) which was described as a “High
Energy Ignition Circuit” and was apparently used within the GM HEI module. This document was very informative, not
only on the circuit itself but on the entire ignition system it’s used in. Unfortunately, such info is apparently NLA;
perhaps Motorola no longer makes that chip, leaving it to the aftermarket businesses.
ELECTRONIC IGNITION PICKUP: The electronic pickup used in the Lucas CEI distributor involves a magnet that is
mounted with two screws. Be careful tightening these screws; the ceramic magnet is much more brittle than metal
items, and can easily crack. If already cracked (notably around one of the screw holes), do not be concerned, it will not
affect operation. However, be sure not to leave any chips in there that could come loose and move around within the
distributor. It is better to discard small bits of the magnet that have broken away.
The pickup itself is apparently quite reliable, but there are a couple of indications that it may develop intermittent
problems. Don Lawson of Northeastern Classics had a customer with a car that would run fine and then suddenly quit,
and after a considerable amount of frustration they finally simply replaced the distributor in entirety -- and never had the
problem again. The original distributor was sent to this author for analysis, but nothing could be found wrong with it.
The pickup was monitored while immersed in water being brought to a boil, and it showed no problems. It’s possible
the problem was elsewhere in the V and it was accidentally corrected while changing distributors.
Martin Walker had similar problems. “Mine would run fine if I kept moving, but let it idle for 30 minutes, or run it in
slow traffic for a long time in hot weather and it would suddenly die. It would then not start for about 2 hours, and
would then fire up OK and run well again. This cost me much time, money and aggravation, as it eventually did this
some distance from home. The AA trailered it to the nearest Jag main dealer, who spent lots of my money in man-hours
trying - and failing - to find the problem. I paid to have it trailered back to my garage, and replaced the ignition amp
before turning to the pickup. I took it out and mounted it on a soldering iron - and at a consistent temperature (80-odd
degrees, I recall) it would simply go open-circuit.”
Keith Morris concurs: “I believe that the epoxy in the pickup heats up and breaks a close tolerance gap. I have
experienced this problem on an MGB and a Jaguar. A simple replacement of the part solved the problem.”
If you have decided that the pickup is a problem, don’t replace the entire distributor; the pickup itself is available at most
auto parts stores, made by several different aftermarket brands. It’s not cheap -- over a hundred bucks -- but it’s
cheaper than a new distributor.
156
Considering how many different cars use the same GM HEI ignition amp, it may be possible to find a cheap pickup that
fits some other car and make it fit the Jag distributor. The ones that fit Chevy V8’s of the same era look totally different,
but there are other pickups in the catalogs that do look fairly similar.
PICKUP GAP ADJUSTMENT: David Littlefield says, “The Haynes manual calls for readjusting the gap between the
magnetic pickup and the iron star wheel with a plastic or non-ferrous feeler gauge. Believe it or not, these are readily
available. I found some at Pep Boys hanging on a card beside other feeler gauges, I think they were made of brass.”
Note: brass corrodes easily, and polishing removes a little metal so your feeler gauges would get progressively less
accurate. It is recommended that you spray a little WD-40 or something similar on each blade before tossing it back in
the tool box, or take some other measures to prevent corrosion.
“Also, the Haynes manual says to turn the crank until one of the points on the star is next to the pickup so you can check
the gap. Unnecessary!! Just remove the U-shaped thingy holding the star wheel in place and it will turn on the rotor
carrier so you can get a point of the star in the proper position.”
CONNECTORS: Mark Whitnell reports, “For the last several months the only way I could get it started was to use
starting fluid. I checked out the spark since that was an area recommended by Kirby. The spark was very small and I
suspect that the small spark could not ignite the gas but could ignite the ether (lower vapor pressure).
“I checked the distributor pick-up coil for the proper resistance according to Haynes (2.2K to 4.8K). I checked at the
connector attaching to the ig amp first...very high megohms. Then I pulled the connector apart at the distributor.
Checked the continuity of the wiring to the ig amp...checked ok. Then measured the resistance at the connector to the
distributor...high resistance. Looking at the two prong connector...visually it looked fine. I went ahead an cut off the
connector and measured resistance of the two wires to the distributor pick-up. Measured resistance... 3000 ohms within
the range described in Haynes. Replaced the connector. Voilà, starting problem solved.. good spark, etc.”
COILS: The Lucas CEI system uses two conventional ignition coils wired in parallel. The high-tension lead of the
secondary coil is sealed off, and only the lead from the main coil is connected to the distributor. Between firings, energy
is built up in both coils. When the 12V supply is broken (“the points open” in the lingo of the pre-electronic age), the
energy stored in the secondary coil cannot escape through the high tension lead because it is sealed off, so the energy
comes back through the 12V leads instead. The primary coil then not only has to release the energy it has stored itself,
but also the energy coming back from the secondary coil. These two energies add to produce a powerful output at the
high tension lead on the primary coil.
The secondary coil, located in front of the radiator, is not a spare or a backup; it is designed into the system for
producing a good spark. If the secondary coil goes bad or gets disconnected, the performance will suffer; typically, the
engine will top out at around 4500 RPM and won’t go any faster. The secondary coil is not special, however, and can
be replaced with a conventional coil provided the high tension connection is covered so that it cannot arc to ground.
Since mid-1989, XJ-S’s have gone to a Marelli ignition system that also uses two coils. However, the Marelli coils are
not wired together; each one fires only six cylinders.
According to Alan Jenks, “Jaguar now recommends replacing both coils with a single “solid” (not oil filled) coil (#DAC
6093) that fits in place of the main coil. The aux coil and wiring is removed.” Roger Bywater says, “The best coil to use
on Lucas HE V12s is DAC 6093 (Ducelier coil - 0.62 ohms primary); only one needed and works well in place of earlier
twin coil set up. If you can find another coil with primary winding resistance of 0.5 - 0.6 ohms maybe it is worth a try.
If the resistance is any more than that it will not be able to build up enough coil energy to fire a spark at the higher end of
the rev range when the coil “on time” is very short (about 1.4 milliseconds at 6000 revs). It might also struggle around
the peak torque point. Although the V12 constant energy ignition module is fairly tolerant (it runs OK with the blanked
second coil removed - albeit with a loss of spark energy) I have encountered some that behave very oddly if the coil is
not the correct load match. The DAC 6093 might be a bit expensive but it does the job...”
157
He adds that the original parallel coil arrangement was “conceived when coils of sufficiently low resistance were not
available.” That's no longer true; it's not too difficult to find coils with a 0.6 ohm primary impedance today.
From an unidentified owner: "It looks to be apparent that a single coil either epoxy or oil filled will do the trick. I found
the coils listed along with several other brands in a copy of the Performance Corner parts catalog. On the catalog cover
is a web address of
http://www.performancecorner.com
In the catalog are listed the MSD 8207 coils which have been suggested by others. The brand name of the coils I've been
asking about is PerTronix. Their Flame-Thrower coils are rated at 45,000 volts (45001 is 0.6 ohm Chrome oil filled,
45011 is 0.6 ohm black oil filled and the epoxy 0.6 ohm one in black only is 45111). The Xtreme coil 0.6 ohm is the one
rated at 60,000 volts in chrome is 60060 and 60061 for black."
John Goodman defends the earlier parallel coil setup: “The only difference (between the two coils) is the HT socket is
sealed on the aux coil, and is no longer stocked by Lucas. The primary coil is still available from a Lucas distributor and
is cheaper than the universal coil Jaguar sells to replace the two V12 coils. I am experiencing coil/ignition related
problems on my car and have tried a few of these Ducelier coils (original equip on the XJR-S). I am convinced it is the
coil causing intermittent starting and cutting out problems, thinking of resorting to the early twin Lucas coil system
which never gave any trouble on previous cars.”
The choice is yours. You can switch to a single coil of 0.6 ohm primary impedance or you can go with two coils of 1.2
ohm primary impedance each. Both setups work equally well, which is excellently. You don't need genuine Jaguar or
Lucas coils for either scheme; any coil with the correct impedance will work. The two 1.2 ohm coils are likely to be
cheaper than the single 0.6 ohm coil, since we're talking about conventional oil-filled bottle-shaped coils that are
available in any parts store for just a few bucks each.
Ignore the claims of how many thousands of volts the coils are "rated" for. This is a completely meaningless claim; the
voltage generating the spark is a function of the spark plug gap and combustion chamber pressure and has nothing to do
with the coil.
Jim Isbell: “BTW, if you measure the primary, be careful because when you remove the meter the secondary sparks and
it can really make you jump; also, when the field collapses you can feel the bite on the primary as well.”
LUCAS CEI IGNITION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT: There is rarely any good reason to replace the Lucas CEI
ignition system. The performance is excellent, and replacing with aftermarket rarely results in any improvement. The
centrifugal advance mechanism is prone to seizing, but that’s easily avoided with regular maintenance. The vacuum
advance module fails after a few years in the heat in the vee, but it’s not that expensive to replace; besides, most
reasonably-priced aftermarket ignition systems continue to rely on the original centrifugal and vacuum advances anyway.
Repairing a failed amplifier costs $20 with parts available everywhere. The two coils are reasonably-priced and easily
obtainable (or you can spend bigger bucks for a modern single coil). The only parts that are even remotely expensive to
replace are those in the distributor, the star wheel and the magnetic pickup, but they rarely cause any trouble. The
pickup itself is available at regular (non-Jaguar) auto parts stores for around $100.
Terry Pegler: “I ordered the Crane XR/700, part number 700-0300 conversion system; it arrived the other day. The
instructions on Page 1 state "If the distributor has a 3 terminal connector it is an OPUS system and you can proceed. If
the distributor has a 2 terminal connector, it is not an OPUS system and you must use Crane HI-6R part number 60006400."” Unfortunately, Pegler was replacing his CEI system due to a severely mangled star wheel and therefore had to
wait until he could obtain that additional Crane part to get his car running again.
Of course, if you’re a performance enthusiast, you might wish to replace the Lucas CEI with something more
sophisticated or flexible. Most owners would not be enthused about upgrading to the later Marelli system because it’s
too expensive and failure-prone, but there are modern aftermarket systems that have all sorts of features. See the
discussions on upgrading the Marelli on page 172; any of those systems could replace the Lucas CEI as well.
158
Marelli Ignition
MARELLI IGNITION: In this age of electronic wizardry, many modern cars have done away with the mechanical
centrifugal and vacuum advance mechanisms and do the whole job with microprocessors. In some cars, the distributor is
done away with altogether, and separate ignition coils are used instead.
Since Jaguar incorporated the Marelli ignition system in 1989, this is essentially the type of system used. There is no
centrifugal or vacuum advance mechanism; the timing is all done electronically. However, rather than using lots of
separate coils, the distributor was kept, using two coils and directing the spark mechanically. This distributor is clearly
lacking many of the internal parts of the earlier models, since it no longer handles the timing functions. The rotor is
actually two rotors in one, and the cap is two six-cylinder caps in one, so each coil is operated as though it is running a
six-cylinder engine. The computer that handles the timing is located near the passenger’s feet, and has a vacuum line to
it.
The source:
Magneti Marelli S.p.A.
Viale Aldo Borletti, 61/63
20011 Corbetta (Milan) - Italy
+39-2/972001
FAX:
http://www.marelli.it/
+39-2/97200355
As of this writing, this WWW site doesn’t have anything on the XJ-S ignition system; only general info on the company.
MARELLI OR NOT? If you don’t know if you have a Marelli ignition system or not, measure the diameter of the cap.
If it’s around 4-1/4”, it’s a Marelli; the Lucas cap is about 5-1/2” in diameter. You can also check the height from the
mounting surface of the cap to the top of any one of the 12 spark plug wire connectors around the edge; the Lucas will
measure about 2-1/4” while the Marelli will measure about 3-1/8”.
If these descriptions aren’t good enough, you can try looking at pictures at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/LucasMarelli.html
EFI TRIGGERING: The Digital P fuel injection system, in use on the Jaguar V12 since 1980, is triggered by the
ignition system. With the Lucas OPUS and later with the Lucas CEI, this signal was taken from the - terminal of the
coil, with a resistor in the line to limit spikes to the electronics. The Marelli has two coils, each of which only see six
cylinders of pulses, so the ignition ECU itself includes circuitry to provide a suitable signal to the EFI. Don Neff says,
“This signal is carried by a small shielded wire from pin 24 of the ign ECU to pin 17 of the EFI ECU.
“The power amps above the radiator do not have any feedback, but the two ign coils each have one. The feedback from
the A-bank coil goes to the tach and the feedback from the B-bank coil goes to the diagnostic socket. The engine
continues to run if either ign amp is unplugged.” As a result of the tach getting a signal from only one coil, a six-cylinder
tach is used.
SIII XJ12: For some reason, the Marelli ignition system was not introduced in the XJ12 until the XJ40 version model
came out in 1993. Roger Bywater adds, “What may not be so obvious is that the saloon standardised on the low
compression engine at the same time that Marelli was introduced on the XJ-S. It is interesting that while the non-cat
Marelli XJ-S used a completely different fuel map (DAC 6338) from other engines the non-cat saloon stayed with the
same mapping (DAC 6336) that was used for the previous high compression engine. The cat saloon used the same ECU
as had been used on the pre-Marelli / Lucas / cat low compression XJ-S (DAC 6335).”
159
CAP VENTING: The Marelli distributor is vented in the same manner as the Lucas distributor (see page 146), except
that the vent connections are on the base rather than on the cap. Since there are no centrifugal or vacuum advance
mechanisms, there are fewer reasons that Jaguar would have decided to provide this system. Either the cap needs
cooling to prevent cracking, or explosions can be the result of fumes building up.
TUNE-UP PARTS: There is supposed to be a gasket under the Marelli cap, but the new cap doesn’t come with one.
Part # JLM-1910. Reportedly atrociously expensive, just like the cap itself.
IGNITION AMPLIFIERS: Everything about the Marelli ignition system is expensive, including the two amplifiers,
DAC11520. However, reasonably-priced substitutes are available. Pete Bainbridge-Clayton says, “I was surprised to
find that both my amps were different, and neither seemed to be the 'correct' one. One is a Unipart GIM5002, the other
one is a Bosch 0 227 100 139. Discovered that there was an Intermotor 15000-c which was an equivalent. The Bosch
was running fine, and I managed to find a stockist of the Intermotor part - in fact they are available off EBay, the seller is
cashfromthechaos and they charge a whopping GBP10!! Yes, ten pounds plus postage - quite a difference from the
Jaguar part! All I can say is that it is running fine, the amp doesn't get hot, and I am very happy with it!”
TIMING: You don’t really wanna adjust the timing on this thing, do you? Randy Wilson describes the XJ40, which is
similar: “Spark timing is not easily adjustable. This car has a crank triggered digital ignition system. Timing changes
would require moving the pickup and/or modifying the ECU.”
On the other hand, there are two different timing maps built into the ignition ECU. Michael Neal says: “There is a nifty
little jumper on the harness at the back side of the left intake manifold. Pull this sucker and your timing retards, perfect
for those trips to Mexico. Usually the connector is red.”
Mike Wilson quotes from a Jaguar manual: “Map Link Selector- This link permits the selection of either of (2) ignition
maps contained in memory. If the link is in place the ignition map suitable for 95 Octane fuel is selected, and if the link is
removed the ignition map suitable for 91 Octane fuel is selected.”
Mike Wilson continues, “To find this "link" look behind the lefthand intake manifold. This link (barrel shaped and with
two wires coming out of it. One is yellow, the other black) is usually wire tied to the Diagnostic Socket.”
DISTRIBUTOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT: Randy Wilson, still talking about the AJ6 engine: “Jaguar has a special
jig for doing this, but it’s not really needed. The whole purpose is to make sure the rotor is pointing to a wire lug no
matter what the current computer-chosen timing is. On normal dizzies, the centrifugal advance moves the timing up...
but it also advances the rotor by the same amount, as they are attached. No such luxury with the crankfire system.
“First mark the dizzy body directly in line with the #1 and #6 plug wires (note: 1A and 6A on the V12). Then remove
the cap. Bring the engine up to TDC, noting which way the rotor turns. When you reach TDC, the rotor should be
pointing at one of the two marks. It doesn’t matter which one (why we marked both). Now turn the dizzy body until
the mark is just past the trailing edge of the rotor contact. Just past it, not more than a degree or two. In this position,
the rotor contact will line up with the wire lug in cap in the timing range of about 5 to 40 degrees before TDC; the
operative timing range of the engine.
“If the adjustment is off very far, the results will be subtle. The most likely thing is the rotor and cap will tend to burn a
little uneven...biased against the direction of misadjustment. The cap and rotor will “wear out” a little faster. If the
misadjustment is extreme... and I’m not sure it’s possible on the AJ6, there will be a misfire at the extreme end of the
timing curve as the spark has to jump a pretty large gap inside.
“Next time, mark the position before you remove the distributor. This is one of those rare cases where “close” is good
enough.”
Regarding the Marelli on the XJ-S: “Yep, ‘tis the same ideas and principles. I’ve never actually had to pull a Marelli
160
distributor, so I can not comment on the exact position. You would mark 1A and 6A... and set things so the rotor
sweep-by happened in the 10 to 30+ before range.”
MARELLI-CAUSED DISASTERS: The combination of Marelli ignition and catalytic convertors can, and often will,
result in the destruction of the catalytic convertors and possibly the whole car. This is not a section of this book to be
glossed over lightly! If you have a car with Marelli ignition and catalytic convertors, you need to take a proactive role in
making sure your car doesn’t become a burned-out hulk in a junkyard somewhere.
CATALYTIC CONVERTOR MELTDOWN/FIRE (ONE-BANK FAILURE): While any misfire is a cause for concern
with catalytic convertors (see page 318), the Marelli ignition system provides a unique and especially threatening
possibility: running on six cylinders. While the various Lucas ignition systems were single 12-cylinder ignition systems,
the Marelli is actually two separate 6-cylinder ignition systems. Hence, it is possible -- probable, even -- that sooner or
later one of these ignition systems will fail while the other continues working. Since each half of the ignition system
operates one bank of the engine, one entire half of the engine, along with its dedicated catalytic convertors and oxygen
sensor, may see no spark all of a sudden while the other bank continues to run normally.
The V12 can be accurately described as two six-cylinder engines; each bank has the same firing order and the same
natural balance as an inline six-cylinder engine (note: conversely, a V8 is not two four-cylinder inline engines). Hence,
the V12 actually runs smoothly on six cylinders, and drivers who have not read this section may make the fatal mistake
of trying to press on to the next exit or the next gas station. According to LaRue Boyce, symptoms to look for include:
“Loss of power, more gas smell but no noise, just the no power feeling. Oh, the loss of vacuum also causes the
transmission not to want to shift. You will know when it happens, there is no power, just enough to get you to 45mph
on flat ground.” Julian Mullaney says, “When my car started running on 6 it was very noticeable. I thought that the
tranny was slipping at first because I had to give it so much throttle to get it moving.” Note that, with the typical failure
mode described below, this happens all at once; there is no intermittent operation where it runs well most of the time and
drops to low power on occasion. Once a bank shuts off, it’s gone for good.
Running a non-cat V12 with no spark on one bank fills the inop side of the exhaust system with fuel -- a disaster looking
for a place to happen. Since the XJ-S exhaust system loops up and over the rear suspension, it should be able to hold
several gallons of fuel before it starts pouring out the tailpipe! Since there is no spark in that bank at all, the owner
might just get away with it -- but he’d better hope his ignition system doesn’t mysteriously start working again! The
same goes for a cat-equipped car that had an ignition failure when started from cold; the cats won’t work when cold, so
the fuel in the exhaust system on that side may never be ignited.
If the car is equipped with catalytic convertors and they were at operating temperature when the ignition failure
occurred, the cats will burn the fuel as it arrives, and things will getting considerably hotter in a big hurry. What’s
worse, if the car continues to be driven, more throttle will be applied to get any speed out of it, so even more fuel and air
will be dumped into these cats. The inevitable result will be a cat meltdown within seconds. What’s worse, often the
cherry red-hot catalytic convertors will ignite something, perhaps by melting through the fuel hoses that are above and
not too far away. The car is immolated so fast you’ll barely have time to pull over and get out.
You don’t want to be driving on six cylinders, not even for a minute.
If you were dozing when you read those last few paragraphs, pinch yourself, clear your head, and go back and read them
again.
DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR PROBLEM: Unfortunately, a one-bank ignition failure turns out to be a common occurrence
on Marelli-equipped V12 Jags. Although anything that kills one side of the Marelli ignition system can cause the car to
run on six cylinders and threaten a cat fire, there is one possible cause that clearly outweighs all others in terms of
frequency of occurrence. Randy Wilson: “The most common failure, the one that kills the A bank, is the center post of
the rotor burns through, allowing a ground path from the rotor contact straight to the distributor shaft.” This
characteristically results in a fire or meltdown in the right side cats only, since it is always the A bank ignition system
161
affected. For a photo of a cut-away rotor that suffered this failure, see
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/Marelli_pix.html
WHAT TO DO: If you have a Jaguar V12 with Marelli ignition, take the following action immediately: Remove the
distributor cap. Remove the distributor rotor, which is held in place with two screws. Looking at the top of the
distributor shaft where the rotor attaches, you will see the flat plate that the two screws thread into, and you’ll see the
hexagonal stub of the shaft itself sticking up above the center of this plate. Cut or grind that stub off, down to nearly
flush with the plate. Obviously, you will want to make sure to collect all metal particles generated. This hexagonal stub
helps center the rotor while you install the screws, but that’s not really necessary. You can, if you wish, leave just a bit
of it above the plate to help center the rotor, but really it’s better if you just hack it completely off and let the screws
locate the rotor.
That was Step 1. For Step 2, hold the rotor upside down and notice the opening in the bottom; it’s shaped something
like an asterisk. Fill this opening completely with clear silicone sealant, the stuff used to seal windows. Try to make
sure there are no air bubbles down in the recesses. Then, while the sealant is still wet, install the rotor and secure it with
the two screws. If done properly, you will have a bit of sealant squeeze out the edges as you’re tightening the screws
down. Simply wipe away the excess. Of course, allow the sealant to set up before driving the car.
As of this writing, I have received no reports of a Marelli ignition system suffering a one-bank failure due to shorting
through the rotor after having done this “silicone squirt”. It appears to be a 100% effective fix. It was even tried once
on a rotor that had already failed just to demonstrate how effective it is, and it did in fact render the rotor functional
again -- but obviously using the method to resurrect failed rotors is not recommended, it should only be used to protect
against failures in the first place.
Just do it. And remember to do it again each time you install a new rotor.
The “silicone squirt” was originally suggested by Julian Mullaney. Marelli owners everywhere will forever be indebted
to him.
CHEAP AFTERMARKET PARTS? The frequency of the rotor failure has been blamed on aftermarket rotors. It is
true that some of the aftermarket rotors are highly susceptible to failure, and have been known to fail within minutes of
installation. Note, however, that similar rotor failures have been reported in genuine Marelli parts as well -- it just takes
longer. No matter which rotor you obtain, you need to perform the silicone squirt.
It is a simple matter to tell if you have genuine Marelli parts: they say “Marelli” right on the part. Being marked “Made
in Italy”, coming from a Jaguar dealer in a Jaguar box with a Jaguar part number, or costing a king’s ransom are not
indications of the genuine article, because many of the knockoffs are made in Italy (the genuine Marelli items may
actually be made in the UK!), Jaguar apparently offers any and all of them under their part number, and they are all
expensive.
Rumors have been circulating for years that Marelli has ceased making the genuine articles and once the stock is used up
only the aftermarkets will be available. These are apparently false rumors as of 2002. It’s bound to happen eventually,
though; even if Marelli is still making caps and rotors now, they will cease making them sooner or later -- the V12 has
been out of production for years.
SPARK PLUG GAPS: The correct spark plug gap on a Jaguar V12 with Marelli ignition is 0.025”. Period. Use of
larger gaps causes higher electrical stresses on the rotor and everything else in the ignition system. And remember that
the gaps tend to grow with wear.
There are two problems here. First, there are spark plug catalogs that claim that the gap should be 0.035”. Donald
Anthony says, “I've been checking around for parts for the last few days and all (100%) of the spark plug sellers (napa,
oriellys, pep boys, and all the local foreign parts guys) told me the proper gap is .035". I even saw it on their computer
162
screens for all brands of spark plugs.” Ignore them, they are wrong, and they are wrong in a very big way.
The other problem is the fact that new spark plugs for the Jaguar V12, just like most other new spark plugs, come out of
the box with a 0.035” gaps. They must be regapped prior to installation. Interrogate your mechanic, making sure to use
the word “lawsuit” when asking if he made sure the gaps were 0.025” before he installed them.
See page 121.
AFTERMARKET DISTRIBUTOR CAP PROBLEM: Besides the problems with the rotor, there are also problems
with Marelli distributor caps. However, these problems appear to only occur with aftermarket caps, and only certain
ones; some care when purchasing should avoid trouble, as discussed below.
The problems with the cap soon become obvious: the cap chars and melts from the inside out around the base of the
center post where the A bank coil wire plugs in. To see some photos of such problems, see
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/Marelli_pix.html
On the cheaper aftermarket cap, the carbon brush fits into an opening in the plastic of the cap at the top on the inside.
There is a spring behind this carbon brush to hold it against the top center of the rotor. Inside the hole, there is an
aluminum terminal built into the plastic that the spring pushes against and the wire snaps into on the topside. So, the
spark from the coil comes through the wire, into the aluminum, through the spring, into the carbon, and on into the
rotor, all by direct contact. The only arcing going on in the vicinity is out at the tip of the rotor.
The primary problem with the aftermarket cap is that the spring behind the carbon brush on the center electrode isn’t
long enough. If this brush is pushed all the way up into the cap, it barely comes back down to flush with the surrounding
plastic. As a result, the carbon won’t actually contact the top of the rotor, and the ignition pulses will be arcing from the
carbon to the rotor -- perhaps aggravating the already weak rotor.
But the worse problem results if the carbon brush is not pushed up into the cap. Since the spring is too short, it doesn’t
make it all the way to the aluminum terminal. Instead, a wide spot in the spring fits snugly against the ID of the hole in
the plastic, and acts like it is securely installed. Although it looks good to the mechanic, the ignition pulses will now
have to arc inside the hole between the aluminum terminal and the upper end of the spring. This will chew up the spring
in a hurry, making the gap get larger and larger -- and the arcs will heat things up in that little chamber, eventually
melting the plastic and burning through the cap.
Obviously, as a minimum fix, the carbon brush and spring should be pulled out of the cap, separated, and the spring
stretched. The spring is a loose fit in the hole at both ends, but there is a wide portion in the middle that fits snugly in the
hole. You will find that twisting the spring counterclockwise makes it easier to remove and reinstall in the hole; a
counterclockwise twist pulls the coils a little smaller. To get the carbon brush to snap in and out of the spring, turn it
clockwise; a clockwise twist makes the spring coils larger. When done, the carbon should protrude at least 1/4” from
the plastic each time it is pushed back and released. If you have a VOM, check the ohmage between the carbon itself
(without compressing it back into the cap) and the electrode up on top. It should be well under 1Ω, but it won’t be zero
because carbon isn’t really that good a conductor. If it’s an open circuit (infinite ohms), you didn’t get that spring seated
against the electrode; pull it apart and try again.
While the spring stretch might render the cheap aftermarket cap workable, there is a far better fix: making sure the hole
for the brush features a metal sleeve rather than simply being a hole in the plastic. Thus, the spring will make a good
contact with the terminal whether it reaches the bottom of the hole or not; the wide portion contacting the sides of the
hole serve as electrical contact. It also protects the plastic from heat, wear, etc. And the spring seems to be easier to
install properly, since the wide portion is sliding on smooth machined metal rather than molded plastic.
This is an easy fix on the part of the manufacturers; they merely have to redesign the aluminum terminal to include a
sleeve that extends all the way to the inside surface of the cap. And, believe it or not, they have made this fix. Andy
Klopfenstein reports that “Apparently the manufacturer discovered the apparent flaw we have seen in the cap. This new
cap has a different inner aluminum cross section. The new inner aluminum shank now comes all the way to the bottom
of the center post (inside cap). You can see it when you look at the contact button. The contact button now slides up
163
and down in the aluminum shank.” Hey, even the aftermarket caps aren’t cheap; since you’re spending good money,
make sure you can see aluminum around the carbon brush within the cap as Klopfenstein describes before paying for a
new cap.
If you are unable to find an upgraded cap or have a relatively new pre-upgrade cap and don’t wanna throw it away just
yet, the following fix to the pre-upgrade aftermarket cap is easy: Remove the carbon brush and spring. Fit a 9/32” bit
into the drill, preferably a variable-speed critter so it can be run slowly. A drill press might also be helpful here. Drill
right down the center hole inside the cap until you get to aluminum. Keep drilling until you are drilling the bottom of the
hole, not just the sides. Then take a piece of 1/4” ID brass tubing (available at better hobby shops) and bevel one end’s
OD edge with a file. Poke this end into the hole, set the cap down on a firm surface, and tap the other end of the tube
with a hammer until it seats securely in the bottom of the hole. If it fits tight, great; if it fits too loosely, pull it back out
and apply a little JB Weld around the outside of the tube about 1/2” from the end (not at the very end!) so that it is
smeared into the edge of the plastic as the tube is driven home. Let it dry. Then, using a Dremel with a cutoff wheel in
it, cut the tubing off flush with the surface of the plastic. Clean up the edges a bit, then reinstall the spring and brush.
Regardless of what type cap you end up with -- even a genuine Marelli -- it wouldn’t hurt to stretch the spring as
described above, just in case.
THAT’S NOT ALL: George Schulte says, “I came out of a store after 15 min of shopping to see smoke billowing out
of my hood. When I opened it the flames were pretty well involved. Luckily a fire extinguisher was close at hand. The
fire began from the center of the distributor cap. The lighter cap besides being cheaper and lighter is also flammable. I
noticed some arcing around the center hi voltage lead but didn't think too much at the time because the car was running
fine. The plastic is not hi temp and the entire cap caught fire which spread to the rest of the wires in the area which
spread out and melted the fuel hoses.”
REPLACING THE DISTRIBUTOR: Perhaps the easiest and cheapest way to avoid the problems with the Marelli cap
and rotor is to replace the entire Marelli distributor while keeping the rest of the Marelli ignition system, which has no
significant problems. Any 12-cylinder distributor (or even two 6-cylinder distributors, if you can figure out how to
mount them) will take the spark from a coil and distribute it to 12 cylinders; you’re not worried about timing advance
curves because the Marelli electronics will still be handing that.
The distributor of choice is obvious: the Lucas distributor! It’ll bolt right in.
There is one problem, however: connecting the outputs of two separate ignition coils to the single center post on the
Lucas distributor cap. You can’t just splice them together; a spark generated in one coil would backfeed into the other
coil rather than jumping the gap at a spark plug. Charlie Welkie points out that there’s a product on the market for this
job: an MSD Automatic Coil Selector, part number 8210. It’s a diode pack with two inlets and one outlet for
connecting two ignition systems to one distributor cap. Its original intention is to allow racers to install main and backup
ignition systems in their race cars, and when the main one fails simply switch on the backup system and keep going. Jeff
Strom of MSD reports: “There are 8 diodes in each unit, 4 per side.” Each diode is rated at 12KV, so it will block a
48KV spark -- which is plenty for ensuring the spark goes to the plug instead of to the other coil.
Even though it’s not involved in timing, you should maintain the centrifugal advance mechanism in the Lucas distributor.
It’s helpful to have the centrifugal mechanism keeping the rotor tip aligned with the terminals in the cap throughout the
advance range. You can discard the vacuum advance hardware and plug the opening. You can discard the Lucas CEI
pickup and star wheel. If you happen to use an early model distributor, you can discard the OPUS pickup and plastic
rotor. You can discard the trigger board if there is one. Of course, rather than simply discarding all this stuff, you can
sell it on EBay.
Before removing the Marelli distributor, position the crank at TDC on 1A, which is indicated by a mark on the front
damper lining up with the sensor at the bottom. Pull the cap off and make sure the lower tip on the rotor points towards
the notch in the housing; if it points the opposite way, turn the crank one full turn.
You need to position the Lucas distributor correctly, and you won’t be able to use a timing light to do it. With the crank
164
at TDC on 1A, position the distributor so that the trailing corner of the rotor tip lines up with the 1A terminal in the cap.
It doesn’t require great precision since it’s not determining actual ignition timing; it’s just making sure the rotor is
positioned close enough that the spark can jump the gap.
Note that the spark plug wires do not go in the same places on the Lucas cap as on the Marelli cap. On the Lucas
cap, the 12 wires go in firing order. They do not on the Marelli; they are switching back and forth across the cap.
#1A is marked on the Lucas cap, and the firing order is counterclockwise looking down on it:
1A-6B-5A-2B-3A-4B-6A-1B-2A-5B-4A-3B
The distributor ventilation scheme connects to the base of the Marelli distributor, but connects to the cap on a Lucas.
Reconnect accordingly.
After you’ve driven the car a while, pop the distributor cap back off and check where the arcing is etching the tip of
the rotor. If it’s distributed along the tip of the rotor, just put the cap back on. If the arcing is concentrated on one
corner, turn the distributor a bit to try to get it towards the center of the tip. Clean the tip up a bit so you can check
it again later. It may take a couple of tries to get the position right, but once you do you should be able to forget it
for the life of the car.
“Slover Jr” performed this mod on his car with great success: “Yes, I'm using the exact twin coil separator
mentioned in your book which btw has been so helpful in my years of ownership! I purchased one off E-Bay from a
racer and it's been working flawlessly. The swapping to a Lucas dist only required a small modification to the coil(s)
mounting to make room for the larger cap and new wires as the original marked ones did not reach their respective
plugs (you could maybe make them work but I needed new ones anyway) and you need to find/make some short ones
with 90° boots on one side, straight boots on the other for the extra coil/cap connections to the separator but other
than that it was no problem.
“Also using the method you described in lining up the Lucas unit after replacing the dist and running the car for a bit I
looked inside the cap and the rotor was making contact right on spot, not bad for a w/e hack like me. It's such an
easy mod I don't know why I didn't do it sooner as I drove with fears of pyromania for too long!”
Not only will this “retro retrofit” avoid the Marelli rotor and cap problems, but it’s also likely to save the owner some
money! A used Lucas distributor plus the MSD Automatic Coil Selector probably won’t cost much more than a new
Marelli cap and rotor, so it can be done instead of the next scheduled tune-up. And the next tune-up will be a bunch
cheaper -- and you can even postpone it a long time, since the Lucas cap and rotor lasts nearly forever.
Slover Jr says, “...my shopping list was as follows:

Used Lucas dist with cap & rotor (very nice condition ready to run) $75

Used coil separator (could have went new for $60) $25

New V12 wires set (used some of my old ones to make the short leads for the coil separator) $70
“Once I had it all done and verified it was running perfectly I sold the Marelli unit for $50 (It had 70K on it, was in
real nice shape, and I had no plans to ever go back) so my total cost was $120.
“Even if I want to sell the car I will not worry about being able to put it back to original; most people would not even
be able to notice and someone who knows these cars that well would have to agree it was a clever thing to do!”
DETECTING IGNITION FAILURES: As soon as the Marelli failure mode was discussed and understood on the
online xj-s discussion list, several members proposed methods to detect such a failure and thereby avoid disaster.
Andrew Corkan promptly designed a dirt-cheap circuit for detecting whether or not there are sparks going to each bank
and providing a warning indication if they are not -- see Figure 11.
165
Figure 11 - Ignition Failure Sensor
Corkan describes his creation: “The circuit detects a spark in either bank by means of an induction pickup placed on a
plug wire, similar to the ones used by tune-up timing lights. When a spark pulse is detected it shorts out an RC circuit
that would otherwise cause an LED to light up.”
“You have to make your own inductive pickup using a so-called RF choke (really just a two-part inductor core) and
magnet wire. Open the core and remove half of it from the plastic holder. Wrap 50 loops of magnet wire around the
half of the core still in the plastic holder. You do not want the magnet wire exposed in the engine so solder regular wire
to it and pot that half of the pickup sensor, magnet wire and solder joint in RTV. The wires you solder on should be
long enough to reach into the car where you will place the circuit. Replace the rest of the choke when you install it
around the plug wire. The choke will fit around the plug wire, no need to remove the plug wire.
“There are two options for hooking up indicator lights (see dotted lines in circuit schematic). The first option is to use
LED's. Just wire them as D2 and D4 and bring the wires into the interior. Kirbert 4 suggested a second option of using
the 'trailer' bulb in the dash as an indicator light. For this option you can wire up D5 and D6 to the base of Q3, which
will in turn power up a 12 volt lamp.” Note that in this latter case, a spark failure in either bank will light the same light;
arguably, the driver doesn’t really care which bank just failed, as long as the light tells him a bank just failed (with the
Marelli rotor failures, it’s always the A bank that fails). The owner may choose to use the trailer warning light, the seat
belt warning light, or any other 12V light he wishes, and he may want to relabel the indicator accordingly, color it red,
etc.
“All references in the schematic to "+12V" are to a switched (accessory) power source. When you hook things up you
4
“Kirbert” is Kirby Palm’s online pseudonym.
166
should see the lights come on when you move the key to 'accessories' but they should turn off as soon as you start the
engine.” Hence, no need to provide a separate bulb check circuit.
“All the parts for this circuit are available from Radio Shack (but our overseas friends should have no trouble finding
these parts). In addition to what is listed here you will need wire to run from the sensors to the box you put the stuff in,
and wires to run the LED's or the signal light into the dash (if you use that option). You will also want to get a small
circuit board or breadboard and a little plastic box to put the circuit into; a 3 in. x 4 in. box is just fine.”
Part #
R1
R2
R3,R5
R4,R6
C1,C2
Q1,Q2
Q3
D1,D3,D5,D6
D2,D4
L1,L2
LAMP1
Magnet wire
Wire
Box and board
Value/type
9.1K
2.2K
22K
40K
470uF, 16v
IRF510, N-Channel MOSFET
TIP31 NPN Transistor (option B)
Germanium Diodes
LED, any kind will do (option A)
RF choke (two part inductor cores)
Lamp on the dash (option B)
any kind will do
any kind will do
any kind will do
Radio Shack #
272-957
276-2072
276-2017
276-1123
273-104
278-1345
“It is easy to build, all you need is a soldering iron. It will monitor both banks and turn on a light if there is a Marelli
boo-boo.”
Different colored D2 and D4 LED’s may be used for the indicator lights to indicate which bank, or red could be used for
both to indicate trouble. As shown, the circuit monitors one plug wire (chosen at random) on each bank. One plug wire
on each bank would be enough to detect the common Marelli failure (really, you might as well save your money on
circuit components and just build one circuit to monitor the A bank), although you could get carried away and build 12
circuits instead of the 2 shown and install a complete set of 12 LED’s if you wanna really be sure you detect any possible
problem.
Corkan goes into more detail for those interested: “The circuit uses two identical channels for each bank. Pulses from
the inductive pickups trigger the MOSFET transistors (Q1, Q2), which are sensitive to voltage. They are pretty
standard N-channel MOSFETS that will trigger at about 3.0 - 3.5 volts. To make sure they work reliably with the faint
pulses coming from the sensors, R1 and R2 provide an offset voltage of about 2.5 V. (If you can not locate the right
MOSFET you may have to change the values of R1 and R2, they should be selected so they bias the sensor pickups to
1.0 V less that the MOSFET needs to trigger.)
The diodes (D1, D3) are very important. The diodes keep the voltage pulses from going back down the sensor wire,
forcing it to drain more slowly through R3 or R5. Germanium diodes have a small voltage drop, unlike standard diodes.
If you do not use Germanium then you will need to increase the bias voltage on the sensors by about 0.5 V to make up
for the additional voltage loss.
Each time the MOSFET's fire they short out the RC circuit formed by R4 and C1 (also R6 and C2). This RC circuit
takes about two seconds to charge, and when it does voltage then flows into D2, lighting it up and warning the driver
(or flowing through D5 to the NPN transistor which lights the lamp, etc...). When a pulse hits Q1 (or Q2) it drains C1
(or C2) preventing the indicator circuit from ever getting enough voltage to light. As long as there is a steady supply of
pulses the RC circuit never charges and the light never lights.”
The polarity of the pickups on the plug wires makes no difference, since the pickup will put out a voltage pulse in one
direction when the spark starts and a very similar pulse in the opposite direction when the spark stops. Corkan: “...and
thus the reason for the first diode. In fact the circuit is sensitive enough that polarity will not make a difference, even
though you can see a small difference in the signal on an oscilloscope.”
167
An alternative warning system idea would be to detect the overheating of the cat itself, as discussed on page 318. This
has the advantage of indicating a problem no matter what the cause.
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN: Once you have some sort of failure detection system that will tell you that the Marelli
has quit firing one bank, there is still the question of what to do with the indication. You could provide an idiot light,
but anyone that drives despite a sudden lack of horsepower may likewise drive despite a warning light; some XJ-S
owners allow others to drive their cars and don’t want to have to lecture them on the importance of a particular idiot
light each time. Another possibility is to have the sensor shut down the car. If Corkan’s ignition monitoring circuit can
light one of the dash indicators, it could just as well be used to operate a relay to shut off power to the ignition -- but
you’d have to install the relay so that it doesn’t cut off the ignition when the ignition switch is in the “start” position or
you’ll never get the car started. The OEM starter relay has a contact that will work perfectly, left over from the days
when a ballast resistor was used with a coil but was bypassed during starting; just use the same contact to bypass the
cutout relay.
A better idea, though, is to use the relay to shut off power to the EFI system or to the injectors themselves. That way
starting won’t be a problem; as soon as the starter turns the engine over and the system detects some ignition pulses, the
EFI will be enabled and the car will start.
LIMP-HOME MODE: Automatically shutting off the engine in the event of six-cylinder operation protects the car but
aggravates the driver, especially if it happens in traffic or in a bad neighborhood. A better idea is to shut off fuel to the
bank that has lost spark, thereby making it safe to drive the car on six cylinders. That same relay idea should work for
this, using Corkan’s circuit with two separate Q3’s (you can omit diodes D5 and D6 if each subcircuit controls its own
Q3) to control separate fuel injector shutoff relays for each bank. Starting should take care of itself; as soon as sparks
are detected in each bank, that bank’s fuelling will be enabled and the engine will start.
The idea of shutting off fuel to one bank and continuing to run does have one important benefit: it is likely to provide a
better cooldown of the overheated parts. Several owners, having already been made aware of the Marelli problems,
nevertheless reported that the right side cats were cherry red hot by the time they figured out what was happening, shut
it off, and got the hood open. When the engine is simply shut off under such conditions, the residual heat within the cat
may nevertheless fry nearby rubber parts, sensors, wires, etc. If the fuel is shut off and the engine continues to run,
cooling air continues to flow through the engine compartment, and air continues to flow through the cylinders of the
inop bank and out through the exhaust system. A running cooldown is better on the engine and ancillaries than a hot
shutdown. Perhaps even if a sensor provided only a warning light indication, a switch could be provided to manually
shut off fuel to the inop bank to allow the car to continue moving.
CATALYTIC CONVERTORS -- MELTDOWN/FIRE (SENSOR-CAUSED): Greg Maddison lamented a large loss to
his wallet: “The front two had melted into a solid mass and the debris ruined the back two.” Obviously, this symptom
differs from the typical Marelli six-cylinder operation described above, since the Marelli failure will toast the cats on one
side only.
“It seems there is yet another reason the Marelli system can cause a misfire that brings the cats up to kiln temperatures.
This would be problems with the TDC sensor/magnets. There are 3 equally-spaced bar magnets around the crank
damper and a sensor that "looks" at the magnets and sends a pulse directly to the Marelli computer. There is a specific
air gap between the magnets and sensor that must be maintained for the system to work properly.
The Jag dealer replaced the damper/magnet assembly on my car saying the rubber had split. This caused the air gap to
be too wide between one of the magnets and the sensor. They first tried to grind down the other two magnets and move
the sensor closer (sounds like the damper deformed and became eccentric), only lasted 600miles so I had to have damper
replaced. The dealer's mechanic explained to me that each magnet produces a timing pulse for 4 cylinders. If one of the
pulses are missing, 4 cylinders don't get spark and send unburned fuel through the cats. The mechanic said that a
different damper is fitted to cars with the 100-amp alternator (like mine) and fails more often than the older cars.” Note:
168
the 100-amp alternator requires a grooved belt instead of a V-belt, and the alternator belt is driven by the damper itself
rather than the bolt-on pulley, so the 100-amp alternator does require a different damper. Perhaps it fails more often
because of the increased torque load of the alternator being applied to the rubber.
“After removing the crank pulley they found the woodruff key sheared and cone split, pulley had rotated 6 degrees on
the shaft. Mechanic says the Marelli computer can vary the timing up to +/- 28 degrees. So, at this point I don't know if
they misdiagnosed the sheared key problem as a damper problem (they are claiming both are toast) all along. I can
certainly understand how having the pulley rotate on the shaft can introduce timing errors on a Marelli car.”
There are a few problems in the explanation offered by Maddison’s mechanic. First off, the tabs on the pulley are
attached to the center portion, not to the outer portion held in place by the rubber -- but they might still be damaged by
the rubber shearing. Chris Carley explains: “The timing tabs are a ring with 3 tabs sticking out every 120 degrees bolted
to the back of the pulley attached to the solid middle section and then the tabs are bent over the edge of the pulley.
There is a 1/2 inch of pulley behind the alternator belt (ribbed), where these are bent over. If the rubber sandwich breaks
down then the outside ring of the pulley will slop around and bash the tabs out, which could then hit the sensor (.028
to .042 gap). Whether that problem sheared the key - who knows?” Whatever, make sure your pulley is in good shape
and securely torqued down (see page 90); somehow, problems here can evidently toast your cats.
CATALYTIC CONVERTORS -- MELTDOWN (SECONDARY DAMAGE): Greg Maddison says, “Also check the
engine speed sensor located on the flywheel housing. It is a $40 part located very near one of the catalysts. Mine
melted when the catalyst overheated. After that the speed sensor became temperature sensitive, car ran well when it was
cold. After it warmed up the car wouldn't develop any power and couldn't go over 40 MPH.”
Tim Jones had another secondary problem. After having the cats replaced and the car put right, it started issuing white
smoke from the right exhaust pipe. This is an indication of a blown diaphram in the vacuum modulator on the GM400
transmission; the vacuum line sucks transmission fluid out of the transmission and into the right manifold, causing the
smoke in the right bank only. Apparently the catalytic convertor meltdown generated enough heat to roast the vacuum
modulator.
INTERMITTENT FAILURES: Greg Maddison suffered from electrical connections: “Occasionally when warm/hot
the engine just stops. It will usually restart after a few tries or if left for a couple of minutes. It turned out to be the
crankshaft sensor connector. I could jiggle the crank sensor and car would start again. If you have the Marelli digital
ignition system you will have a crankshaft sensor and a flywheel sensor; engine will not run if the signal is interrupted
from either. Look for a two-wire connector on the left front top of the engine; wires should be in a hard plastic wire
protector running down the front of the engine to the back side of the crankshaft pulley. I found the contacts in this
connector to be green and nasty. Cleaning with spray-on relay and contact cleaner cured the problem. Run the engine
and wiggle this connector and see if it stops. Also check the flywheel sensor connector, it’s on the rear top left of the
engine, looks like the crank sensor connector and hard to get to.”
Steve Sarmanian had the same problem, only different. “In the 2-wire upper connector of the front crank sensor (1
white wire, 1 blue), about 8 inches back into the top harness the white wire connects to the wire braid that surrounds the
sheathing around the blue wire by a solder connection. That connection is protected by a clear plastic sheath (rubbery
plastic tubing about an inch long). The connection is bad, and bad from the factory. It fooled me the first time around
because underneath the clear tubing the wiring looked good. But this time I split open the tubing with a razor blade and
the white wire fell off the braid. There's no good mechanical connection there; when the loom is built they apparently
just strip the end of the the white wire, lay it on top of the braid and melt on the solder. The tubing holds the joint
together. I confirmed that that was the cause of my problem: touch the wires, the car will start; separate them and the
engine dies.
“The fix is to twist the sheath into a secure mechanical connection with the white wire, crimp it with a slip connector and
then resolder. Problem disappeared.
“I unwrapped the rear sensor to check the braid connection on that one (near the firewall) and saw that someone had
169
been in there before me with a mechanical fix, but no solder. I fixed it.”
John J. Lynch had similar symptoms, but the cause turned out to be the crank sensor itself: “The problem went
something like this:
1) Car started fine
2) Ran normally for 15 minutes
3) Died completely due to spark failure
4) Engine cooled down for 1-4 hours
5) Repeat step 1
“Turns out the Engine Speed Sensor was the real culprit. The specs say that the sensor should read about 700 ohms but
when I measured it after the engine died I noticed it was only reading about 260 ohms. Since I had previously tested the
sensor with an O-Scope and saw that it was producing the square wave I was expecting, I thought everything was fine.
I was wrong. For some reason when the engine warms up the sensors resistance is dropping below 700 ohms causing
the voltages that are delivered to the ignition computer to be way out of spec. Consequently the computer was shutting
down the ignition amps. For kicks I decided to put a 500 ohm resistor in series with the sensor to validate my new
conclusion and sure enough the car ran fine. As soon as I removed the resistor, the car died again. Problem solved!!!”
LACK OF OOOMPH: Jim Householder reports on “a problem I had with my 1991 XJS; cost me a lot of money and
stumped all the Jag mechs. At 4500 RPM the engine would just flatten out and go no more, but ran quite well up to
this speed. The story is long and sad about trying to get it fixed but decided I would try it myself. Turns out that the
number 2 coil was bad, not a big deal but seems none of the Jag pros had run into this problem.” Interestingly, running
out of juice at 4500 RPM is exactly what you would expect from a secondary coil failure on the earlier cars with Lucas
CEI ignition, but it’s not obvious how it can occur with the Marelli.
1992-ON: Richard Mansell quotes from a Jaguar Publication on the changes for the 1992 model year:
“The Marelli digital ignition ECU has been software upgraded.”
REPLACING THE MARELLI IGNITION SYSTEM: Since the Marelli has some serious problems that can cause
fires, obviously there is incentive to replace this system as a preventative measure. Those fires sometimes destroy
considerable portions of the Marelli system itself, though, and Marelli hardware is quite expensive, so owners having
already suffered such fires also seriously consider a change of system -- not only to avoid a repeat but because they have
a budget for such a replacement.
If your objective is to avoid even the slightest possibility of a fire, you’re out of luck; any car with any ignition system
can have a fire if things go too far wrong. If your objective is to eliminate even the slightest possibility of having a onebank failure of the type the Marelli system is infamous for, the only way is to replace the Marelli system entirely; as long
as there’s effectively two six-cylinder ignition systems, there will always be the possibility that one will fail while the
other keeps working. Before you latch onto that for a solution, though, you might wish to review the first fact and
realize that the Marelli, if you can fix the rotor and cap problems, may actually be relatively safe. This author suggests
your money might be better spent on an overtemp sensor for the catalytic convertors.
If you have decided that two six-cylinder ignition systems are totally unacceptable, there are two other types of system
that will work on a V12: a single 12-cylinder system or a distributorless system.
REPLACING THE MARELLI IGNITION SYSTEM PART I: The only replacement ignition systems that will
eliminate the problems with the Marelli distributor are ones that eliminate the Marelli distributor. One idea is a
distributorless system -- six double-ended coils, each connected directly to two spark plugs.
One source is Electromotive; see page 716. The installation manual for their HPV-1 includes instructions on how to
170
install two six-cylinder systems on a V12. You are once again back to two six-cylinder systems, one of which can fail!
But at least you won’t have the Marelli rotor to worry about any more.
Another source is...Jaguar. As discussed below, the final few months of XJ12 production came with a Nippondenso
distributorless ignition system. Yeah, that’ll be a cheap retrofit. Judging from Roger Bywater’s and Rick Wilder’s
descriptions of this system, it‘s two six-cylinder systems again!
A distributorless system can have a failure in one part of the system; for example, one of the six double-ended coils could
fail, killing two cylinders in one bank. But that would cause a lumpy-running engine, hopefully getting the driver’s
notice. It wouldn’t keep running smoothly as the Marelli one-bank failure does unless the three coils serving one bank
happened to fail together, which is highly unlikely. But if the distributorless system actually consists of two six-cylinder
systems -- as apparently many of them are -- you obviously could lose one control circuit and have a one-bank failure,
just what you feared with the Marelli.
If the system you install happens to be a “total engine management” system (ignition and EFI together), you may be in
luck. It’s still likely to be two six-cylinder systems, but the ignition pulses from each six trigger the injectors for each six.
So, if the ignition for one bank fails, it might cause the injectors for that bank to quit operating -- providing a safe limphome mode.
REPLACING THE MARELLI IGNITION SYSTEM PART II: Another idea is to retrofit the earlier Lucas CEI system
into the later cars. It’s kind of a shame to replace the high-tech electronically-controlled Marelli with the comparatively
archaic Lucas with its mechanical advance controls, but it will definitely eliminate the possibility of one-bank ignition
failures. If anything in the Lucas ignition system quits working, the car stops; one-bank failures are simply not possible.
Note that the centrifugal advance mechanism in the Lucas distributor should be attended to prior to installation, as
described beginning on page 137. This mechanism then requires periodic maintenance (oiling) to make sure it doesn’t
seize, but this isn’t really a problem unless you don’t do it.
This retrofit has the additional benefit of saving money on future tune-ups. The Lucas caps and rotors aren’t cheap, but
they’re cheaper than the Marelli items.
Whit Coleman at British Parts International (page 692) reportedly has assisted several owners with installing Lucas
ignition systems in Marelli-equipped cars -- after the fire. The motive was cost, pure and simple; after the car has
suffered an engine compartment fire, it’s cheaper to convert to a Lucas system than it is to buy the Marelli parts needed
to get it going again -- possibly because the Lucas stuff is more readily available at junkyards. Coleman claims that
people usually obtain an entire donor car to do this job.
Coleman asserts that the change requires replacing the EFI ECU and the associated wiring harness with the items used
with Lucas ignition systems. He’s not entirely sure why, but if you’re using a donor car you’ve got those items on hand
anyway. He also points out that you can then turn around and sell the EFI ECU that worked with the Marelli, possibly
recouping a considerable portion of the cost of the donor car.
This author is not convinced that retrofitting the Lucas ignition system requires changing the EFI ECU and the harness.
If I didn’t have the replacement ECU and harness handy, I’d try running a shielded wire from the Lucas CEI ignition
amp to the footwell where the Marelli ECU was and connect to the suitable pin in the harness for sending the trigger
signal to the EFI system and see if it works.
If that works, it’ll also be possible to use the early OPUS distributor along with an aftermarket ignition pickup and amp
like those suggested on page 150 -- but you’ll want to recurve the distributor advance mechanisms to the curves used
with the H.E. engine. If the ignition system doesn’t provide a dedicated trigger signal lead, connect a wire to the terminal on the coil and run it through a 600Ω resistor for a trigger signal.
Coleman also points out that this conversion will require changing out the tachometer, since a six-cylinder tachometer is
used with the Marelli ignition. Again, if you have the donor car, this is no problem -- unless you have the later style dash
and the earlier tach won’t fit.
171
REPLACING THE MARELLI IGNITION SYSTEM PART III: As mentioned below, the XJR-S came fitted with a
Zytek engine control system which utilizes a gutted Lucas distributor. The XJR-S is not a common model and the Zytek
system controls both EFI and ignition, so installing this system in a regular XJ-S is likely to be costly. The Zytek system
is supposedly programmable -- you’ll probably need to reprogram it to work with a non-XJR-S engine -- but it’s
reportedly difficult to get the programming software from Zytek. All in all, this retrofit is probably not a reasonable
option from a cost standpoint unless you happen to need a new EFI system as well, and even then it’s not likely to be the
cheapest alternative. Of course, if you happen to have a junked XJR-S laying around...
UPGRADING THE MARELLI IGNITION SYSTEM: Aside from fire avoidance and/or fire repair, some might opt to
replace the Marelli system (or the Lucas systems, for that matter) simply to improve performance. There are several
features that might be worth seeking. Some of the better aftermarket ignition systems have electronically-controlled
advance, making them ostensibly similar to the Marelli -- but they almost invariably are programmable in order to be
adaptable to different cars. This programmability might be of considerable value, especially if the engine is being
modified. Some systems include knock sensors which will allow better optimization of the advance curves as well as
automatic compensation for differing tankfuls of fuel. Some systems use six double-ended coils, thereby eliminating the
need for a distributor.
The ultimate, perhaps, is the “total engine management” system. Such systems replace both the ignition system and the
EFI ECU with an integrated, programmable control system. Some even integrate electronic control of an automatic
transmission -- but obviously you’d need to upgrade the transmission to take advantage of that.
XJR-S Ignition
John Goodman reports that the XJR-S uses a Zytek ignition/fuel injection system -- see pages 307 and 721. “Basically
it is a modified Lucas distributor; even the rotor arm is standard. However the vacuum and mechanical advance
mechanisms have been removed (ECU-controlled vacuum sensor and programmed advance).
“It has a magnetic "Hall effect" engine speed sensor and a similar timing sensor. The 'Hall' effect thing has an inner
and outer wheel. The inner one has one notch and is the timing signal/ speed sensor, similar to the Marelli crank
sensor, the outer star like wheel has twelve notches/spikes to control injectors.
“It appears that to set the timing exactly you really need the dealer to plug in the "JaguarSport magic laptop". In the
set up screen there is a function <reference ignition timing>. This is where you set the distributor to the 10 degrees
BDC at idle for the ECU to get its base line input. After exiting the screen the ignition timing reverts to the control
of the ECU.
“So, under the ECU control, at idle you should be seeing 3.5 degrees and at 3000 rpm it should be around 18 degrees
if the timing is right. It is a damn inconvenience not being able to check or set the ignition timing without the software.”
The Zytek system continued to use the altered Lucas distributor even when the baseline XJ-S was fitted with the
Marelli ignition.
172
Distributorless Ignition
The Jaguar V12 was fitted with a distributorless ignition system for a short time just before it was discontinued, but
didn’t make it into the XJ-S; Roger Bywater of AJ6 Engineering (page 713) says, “It was on the 300 range saloon and
we have a dealer technical guide telling all about it. There were two amplifier modules driving two coil modules each
containing 3 double ended coils for a bank of 6 cylinders. All driven by a Nippondenso Engine Management system.”
Rick Wilder, who owns a ’95 XJ12, says, “I had the impression that the distributorless ignition was only added in the
1996 MY. That erroneous impression was reinforced by alldata.com, which shows the Marelli ignition on my MY. I
just took the valley cover off to see what's up and found the 2 coil packs, each with 6 spark plug wires attached, and no
distributor.”
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM DESIGN: In most “water-cooled” cars, the cooling system consists of a circuit wherein a fluid is
pumped into the portion of the block surrounding the cylinders, then up into the heads, then on to a thermostat, and
from there through the radiator and back to the pump. The thermostat and housing are usually designed so that, when
the thermostat is closed, the fluid is not deadheaded but rather bypassed to allow the fluid to circulate around between
the engine and pump without going to the radiator.
The Jaguar V12, of course, is different. It has two thermostat housings, one at the front of each bank. The XJ-S
radiator is a side-flow radiator divided into a top third and a bottom two-thirds; the end tank on the left end of the
radiator either has an internal baffle one third of the way down, or actually consists of two separate end tanks. The
coolant coming from the left bank, via the left side thermostat, enters at the top left and flows left-to-right through the
top third of the core. Then the coolant from the right bank comes in, mixing with this already-cooled fluid. The mixture
then flows right-to-left through the bottom two thirds of the core and on to the pump. Each thermostat also controls a
bypass directly back to the pump inlet via a “cross pipe”; as the thermostats open to allow coolant to the radiator, these
bypasses are closed off by a disk on the bottom of each thermostat.
It is unknown why Jaguar contrived a dual-thermostat system, but it was probably just to reduce plumbing -- not having
to get the fluid from both banks back to a single thermostat housing.
Because the mixed fluid goes through the pump and to both banks, both banks are always seeing the same incoming
coolant temperature. When the thermostats are closed and the fluid is bypassing into the cross pipe, both banks will also
see the same flow rate, and therefore will warm up at the same rate. When the thermostats are fully open and the
bypasses are closed, however, the left (B) bank will always see a lower flow rate than the right (A) bank, and therefore
will run warmer. This is due to the radiator design; the fluid from the left thermostat outlet has to pass through the
upper third of the radiator core to get to the exact same place the fluid from the right thermostat outlet goes to directly.
As a result, the backpressure at the left radiator inlet will always be higher than the backpressure at the right radiator
inlet. Since the flow to both banks is from the same pump and it is not a positive displacement pump but a centrifugal,
most of the flow will naturally take the easier route through the A bank.
The action of the thermostats may accentuate the differential flow at operating temperatures. When the thermostats are
only partially open, the bypass leads directly back to the pump inlet while the route through the radiator has a higher
backpressure. As the higher backpressure begins to slow the flow in the left bank, the coolant arriving at the left
thermostat begins to get warmer. As a result, it closes off the bypass some more, further reducing the flow in the left
bank! Some have advocated installing a colder thermostat in the left side to compensate for the warmer running bank,
but this would seem to be the exact wrong thing to do; it could arguably be better to put a warmer thermostat in the left
side so the bypass stays open and flow is maintained through the bank. Flow will be reduced in the radiator, though,
possibly causing the entire engine to run hotter.
173
As long as the cooling system is clean and operating properly, the differential cooling flow between banks doesn’t seem
to cause any problem. However, there are three implications the XJ-S owner should be aware of:
1) The coolant temperature sensor for the EFI system is on the left thermostat housing. Since this side is running
warmer than the right and the EFI system will be adjusting the fuel mixture for the entire engine accordingly, the right
bank is likely to be running a little leaner that the left. Of course, on cars with Digital P EFI and oxygen sensors, the
system will automatically correct the mixture on individual banks -- as long as you’re in closed-loop mode. When you
put your foot in it, you go into open-loop mode -- and when your foot is in it is precisely when you don’t want to be
running lean! You can only hope that the open-loop scheduling includes enough enrichment to overcome the effects of
the temperature differential between banks. Again, as long as the system is clean and operating properly, there doesn’t
seem to be a problem.
2) The coolant temperature sensor for the gauge on the dash is on the right thermostat housing. This means that the left
bank can have zero flow and be overheating severely, and the driver would have no indication from the dash as long as
the right side still had good flow.
3) While the system works fine when clean and operating properly, the double-pass radiator scheme seems designed to
accentuate any problems that develop. While the coolant flow is always lower through the left bank, the radiator getting
obstructed internally seems to increase the difference in flow -- possibly because the flow from that bank has to go
through twice as many passes of the obstructed radiator, or perhaps just because the thermostats are closing off the
bypass fully. Whatever, the incidence of dropped valve seats or other overheating damage is much higher for the left
bank.
Roger Bywater has a different theory about why the left bank seems to drop more valve seats: “If the V12 overheats for
any reason B bank is likely to suffer more than A bank and I believe this is because A bank is fed from the low side of
the water pump whilst B bank is fed from the top. Therefore any condition which might promote cavitation at the pump
will have a more damaging effect on B bank.” There are even those who suggest that the left bank suffers more than the
right because the big belt-driven fan is blowing air over the right bank, although this is a minor factor at best. Rather
than trying to decide which theory is correct, note that all these theories might have some validity! The B bank is
definitely the one at risk.
Bywater relates “...an observation from when I first started doing Japanese Heat Damage Tests, which involved an
extremely arduous simulated incline run. The test was carried out on a chassis dynamometer in a temperature controlled
environment with airflow coupled to road speed. The punishing part was a simulated gradient lasting (going from
memory) 20 minutes at high load and moderate speed in which the airflow through the radiator is barely adequate to
cool the engine.
“Before we added supplementary fans to live with the test most cars would overheat badly towards the end and I
remember that a V12 dropped a few valve seats on one occasion. The dropped seats were in the left hand head. This
was a test fleet car in sound condition so all those theories like radiator or heater blocking are not relevant. I do not
accept that airflow around the engine is a significant factor.
“I think just about any car would have overheated in the circumstances. A pair of electric fans mounted in front of the
radiator kept the problem under control (I cannot be sure if that was done on the V12 but it certainly was on the 4.2) so
maybe that should be suggested to anyone whose driving pattern gets into similar territory. Personally I was dubious
about the fans making much difference but the engineer in charge of cooling systems assured me it would work and he
was right. The setup was used in production on XJ6s for the Japanese market only (it is shown on the parts slide) but I
don't think the V12s ever had it.”
RECOMMENDATIONS: Despite the proven shortcomings of the cooling system design, many experienced XJ-S
owners insist you can avoid trouble by scrupulously maintaining your cooling system. This author does not agree. If
you put any stock in what I say, you will make four changes to your cooling system immediately:
1) Install coolant filters in the upper radiator hoses. I recommend the Tefba’s, although the Ganos also work fine. See
page 190. Note that you might also want to install a convenient coolant drain to aid in servicing these filters.
174
2) Modify the banjo bolt in the air bleed port at the top right corner of the radiator so that it actually allows air
through. See page 44.
3) Install a “flushing tee” in the highest point in the heater hose, and use it whenever you’re changing coolant. See
page 180.
4) Install foam weatherstripping in every nook and cranny where air might get around the radiator rather than going
through it. See page 226.
Those are all easy. They'll only cost you a few bucks and won’t take more than a couple of hours. In addition to those
four items, there are two things that should be done when the opportunity presents itself:
1) If the radiator ever must come out for any reason, convert the system to single-pass. If that radiator is going back
in, have the radiator shop modify it first. If a new radiator is going in, make sure it’s a single-pass radiator. See
page 198.
2) If you ever have any trouble with that belt-driven fan, chuck the whole thing and install an electric fan in its place.
See page 219.
HOW HOT IS TOO HOT? Just about the first question everyone asks is just how high the needle can get before it’s
time to start worrying. Unfortunately, all too often owners ask people who should know, including supposedly certified
Jaguar mechanics, about their gauges reading halfway between N and H, and are told, “That’s OK, they read there all
the time, don’t worry about it.” These people are liars, and you can tell ‘em Kirby Palm said so. Many, if not most, of
the maintenance headaches occurring on Jaguar V12’s can be traced to overheating -- not just one-time overheating, but
long, persistent, chronic overheating, the type that can only happen when the owner is ignoring the gauge -- usually
because someone told him it was OK. If anyone tells you your temp readings are OK, ask him if he will guarantee that
and agree to pay for engine repairs when the valve seats drop.
Trying to get a handle on just what constitutes a reason to panic on the XJ-S temperature gauge has long been difficult,
since reports from owners seemed inconsistent or contradictory. The gauge being an example of British electrics has
only added to the uncertainty. However, by noting many such reports on the internet discussion list and following
several of them while the owners checked things and made corrections, this author has been able to derive the following
guidelines. Note that these descriptions apply to the vertical or “barrel” coolant temperature gauge found in the pre-’91
XJ-S; those with later cars with round gauges will most certainly see similar behavior in general, but I can only offer a
few reports on where the needle sits when the car is running properly -- see below.
Some vertical gauges reportedly have temperature scales in degrees, while others have merely a C at the bottom, an N
dead center of the scale, and an H at the top. This description will refer to the C-N-H scale but both type gauges are
apparently identical except for the paint.
There are basically four situations that the vertical gauge will indicate:
1)
If your car has a properly-operating cooling system fitted with 190°F (88°C) thermostats,
the needle will always be sitting on the N when the car is warmed up. Perhaps just a hair to
the high side of the centerline of the scale, but always within the width of the letter itself,
never above it.
2)
If your car has a properly-operating cooling system fitted with 180°F (82°C) thermostats,
the needle will always be sitting about 1/4” below the N when warmed up.
3)
If your needle seems to wander around a lot, you have air in your cooling system. See the
section on filling and bleeding on page 179.
4)
If your needle is above the N, your car is overheating. If your needle is halfway between the
N and the H, your car is severely overheating. And don’t worry about the needle being on
the H; it will never get that far.
Note that these guidelines apply to the XJ-S as configured from the factory -- with the gauge sender located in the right
175
side thermostat housing. As mentioned above, it’s the left side that is likely to have overheating problems -- which may
explain why trouble occurs when the gauge reads just above the N where any reasonable person would presume it’s still
within normal operating range. If the sender were moved to the left thermostat housing as proposed below, perhaps the
gauge would have to be reading closer to the H to indicate serious trouble.
Believe it or not, it appears that the vertical gauge is actually quite reliable. In many (but not all!) of the reported cases
of the needle being above the N due to problems with the gauge or sender, it was plainly obvious that there were gauge
problems -- often with all four gauges, and sometimes pegging them against the upper end of the gauge seconds after
cold start. More subtle faults in the electrics, such as corroded connections, always seem to cause the needle to read low
(often all four gauges at once -- see page 591) or to not read at all, staying at the C end. A high temp reading that
appears even remotely plausible is usually a cause for concern.
A lot of owners describe the situation when talking about their temp readings, such as how hard they’ve been driving
down the freeway or how hot it is outside today. Unfortunately, such qualifiers are usually an indicator of trouble.
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by the thermostats, and should not vary beyond their control range regardless
of conditions. And their control range (from fully closed to fully open) is pretty tight indeed; it has been described as
“three needle widths” of travel on the gauge. Since the cooling system should always have some margin (excess cooling
capacity) so the thermostats can control the coolant temp, the indication should always be within this control range. If
the gauge ever indicates more than a couple of needle widths above the regular operating temperature with whatever
thermostats are installed -- including reading on the N with 180°F thermostats -- it means that the thermostats are no
longer in control, they are wide open, and it’s absolutely everything the cooling system can do to hold the temperature
indicated. Obviously, if things get just a hair worse -- the outdoor temperature rises a couple of degrees, one more tube
inside your radiator gets plugged up, you sit in traffic a few more minutes, whatever -- the temp is going to rise some
more. Overheating damage is imminent, you need to be taking corrective action now.
The only way “corrective action” would include replacing thermostats is if the thermostats are bad. Merely switching to
colder thermostats is not corrective action; if the cooling system can’t hold 190°F, it won’t be able to hold 180°F either.
Replacing 190°F thermostats with colder thermostats won’t fix anything unless the 190°F thermostats were defective.
HOW HOT IS TOO HOT? - LATER XJ-S ROUND GAUGE: James Teston says, “I have a '92 with the round
temperature gauge. (Not the barrel gauge)! It looks like this:
C
\
N
^
|
/
H
And this is where the needle stays (Between the N and the right hash mark).”
Steve Gallant says, “My 93 XJR-s with 6.0L engine runs the same regarding temperature -- middle of the N to just
slightly to the right. It has been this way since I purchased the car with 5k miles on it.”
Howard Gladman concurs: “My 95- 6.0L exhibits same reading. Once the the needle reaches about a needle width to
the right of N the Aux fan switches on and the needle stabilizes. 56,000 on the clock and running strong.”
It’s a pretty safe bet that all three of the above cars are running 190°F thermostats. If you’re running colder thermostats,
expect readings farther left than these -- and if you don’t see them, fix your cooling system.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR RELOCATION: As mentioned in the description of the cooling system
above, the coolant temperature sensor for the EFI system is on the left thermostat housing while the coolant temperature
sender for the gauge is on the right thermostat housing -- and both are on the wrong side. It would be better if the EFI
coolant temperature sensor was on the right side and the gauge sender was on the left side, for two different reasons. As
a result, an owner could rationally decide to move the EFI sensor from left to right, or the gauge sender from right to
left, or to move both, essentially exchanging the two. All moves are covered here; make your own choice.
It’d be really nice if both sensors were the same thread so you could just swap them. Unfortunately, the gauge sender is
176
Smiths with a 5/8” UNF, 18 threads per inch, while the EFI sensor is Bosch, metric, 12mm x 1.5mm thread.
To move the gauge sender to the left thermostat housing, you’re gonna have to drill and tap a 5/8”-18 hole. This will
require two tools you probably don’t have: a 9/16” drill bit, and a 5/8”-18 tap. 9/16” drill bits are not too difficult to
find, but note that they are only available to fit 1/2” or larger drills! They make 1/2” drill bits with reduced shanks all the
way down to 1/4”, but the idea of a drill bit any larger than 1/2” reduced to 3/8” shank seems to have completely eluded
the market. A 14mm drill bit might also work, but they aren’t available to fit a 3/8” drill either.
One possibility is obviously to rent a 1/2” drill. Another idea: you can carefully grind six flats on the bottom 1/2” of the
shank of the bit. Then you can chuck up a socket driver in your 1/4” or 3/8” drill, snap a socket onto the socket driver,
and insert the hex on the bottom end of the drill bit into the socket. It might be a little wobbly, but if you drill the hole as
large as possible with conventional drill bits beforehand (1/2”), this hokey arrangement should do an acceptable job of
enlarging the hole.
This author bought a 9/16” bit with a 1/2” shank and three long flats to help it fit securely in a chuck. By grinding three
short flats in between the existing flats, a 12mm socket fit quite well -- and doesn’t hurt the bit one iota, since the
original flats are intact and would still fit properly in a 1/2” drill.
Another option, of course, would be to replace the OEM gauge sender with a generic sender with similar electrical
characteristics but threads that fit the existing EFI sensor port on the left thermostat housing. Good luck. If you wish to
try this, note the OEM sender registers 412Ω at 40ºC.
You can install the gauge sender anywhere in the left thermostat housing that will see coolant flow from the heads. It
should not go in either the bypass passage or the passage to the radiator, since either may be closed off at one time or
another. On a pre-8S44060 engine, the obvious place to put it is on a flat that was clearly intended for such a boss but
never drilled, right on top and near the rear end of the housing. From engine 8S44060 on, there’s already a hole here
with a sensor in it, so this location isn’t an option.
There’s another flat surface apparently intended for a boss just rearward of the EFI sensor, but this port location
connects to the bypass passage. Also, the boss is too small for drilling and tapping a 5/8” hole.
Another option, of course, is to just drill out the EFI coolant temperature sensor boss and retap it for the gauge sender.
That leads to the next problem: you now need somewhere to put the EFI coolant temperature sensor. And over on the
right side is ideal.
There are at least two existing ports on the right side; the one where the gauge sender goes, and the one where the
thermotime switch goes. On the author’s ’83, there is no thermotime switch; there is a plug in the hole. Doesn’t help,
unfortunately; both holes are too large for the EFI coolant temperature sensor. So, you have two options: either drill
and tap one of the existing holes out to a significantly larger size, install a plug, and drill and tap the plug to fit the EFI
sensor; or just install a suitable plug in the old gauge sender hole and drill and tap an entirely new hole in the coolant
manifold for the EFI sensor. There are a couple of locations that will serve. Note that the EFI sensor could just as
easily go on the rear coolant manifolds.
For a plug for the old gauge sender port, I’d suggest: another sender. In fact, just leave the original sender there and
buy a new sender DAC2583 for the left side. The senders are less than ten bucks each.
In fact, as long as you have two gauge senders, just install another wire and a switch somewhere so you can switch from
one to the other to monitor both sides of the engine with the same gauge. If you go this route, you might want to
replace an original C40106 sender with another DAC2583 just to make sure any difference in indicated temp is due to a
real difference in temperature rather than a difference in sender.
If you have just read through this section and have decided to make this mod, note that unless you can figure out how to
use taps and drills down in some fairly tight places, you will need to remove the thermostat housings to do the drilling
and tapping. Probably the easiest way to do that will be to remove the air filter housings and then unbolt the entire
manifold assembly -- thermostat housing, coolant connecting pipe, and rear coolant manifold -- and move the entire
assembly rearward far enough to disengage the hose connecting the thermostat housing to the crossover pipe. So, while
you’re preparing for this job, go ahead and buy a total of eight coolant manifold gaskets EBC 9634, two air filter
housing gaskets EBC 9635, and both thermostat cover gaskets EBC 8330 and EBC 8331. You may also want to get
177
four “top hat” seals C37990 for the coolant connecting pipe, and maybe an AAV gasket C42165 or whatever a newer
gasket number is. And you will want to get a new copper washer for reinstalling the EFI sensor, C2296/3, although you
can probably find a suitable sealing washer locally. Reportedly a new gauge sender comes with a washer, so if you don’t
remove the existing sender you won’t need to buy one separately.
BLOWING COOLANT: In general, if you are blowing coolant, your car is running too hot. If you have a pre-H.E.,
pressure relief at the radiator cap on the header tank on the left wheel well will blow coolant or steam out the little tube
into the wheel well. Note that, if you fill the system right up to the cap, it will blow a little coolant the first time you run
simply due to expansion. You should be able to tell when it’s actually overheating, since it will blow much more
energetically.
If you have an H.E., pressure relief at the radiator cap on the header tank on the left wheel well will cause coolant or
steam to blow into the plastic “atmospheric catchment tank” within the compartment behind the left front wheel. This
tank, in turn, overflows via a tiny tube out the bottom of the car at the very rear of the left front wheel well. If the tank
is empty or nearly empty, you may not be able to tell that the cap is relieving pressure; steam may condense within the
plastic tank, and nothing visible comes out the tube. If the overflow tank is totally full -- which it can get to if the owner
continues to top up the system on a regular basis -- any pressure relief can push liquid out of this tube, even if it’s steam
that’s coming out of the header tank. And, again, if the system is topped up, it may push a little liquid out the first time
it’s run without overheating.
Finally, as noted on page 186, the overflow tube coming out of the atmospheric catchment tank is a classic example of
poor design, so more than likely any flow out of this tank will be all over the inside of that compartment and come
leaking out of nooks and crannies, such as out the joint between the rocker panel and the fender.
OVERHEATING DAMAGE: In any aluminum-block engine, severe overheating can result in a warped block or
warped heads, which in turn normally call for an engine replacement. In the Jaguar V12, a more common symptom of
an overheated engine is a dropped valve seat. Since the heads are aluminum, the valve seats are sintered iron rings that
are pressed into the aluminum. Since iron and aluminum have different coefficients of thermal expansion, overheating
will cause a loose fit and the seat can just fall out. After that, it holds the valve part way open and bangs around in there.
Amazingly, reports of broken valves are rare; more often the owner who continues driving despite the annoying ticking
under the hood allows the valve to beat the seat to pieces, which in turn bang up the piston, the other valve, and the
head.
Do not continue to drive when the car is overheating. If no other options are available, drive it short distances at a time,
shutting it off and allowing it to cool before starting again. And don’t continue to drive if it sounds like a Chevy with
bad lifters, either -- you’ve already dropped a seat, but you might as well quit before you do even more damage.
If at all possible, don’t shut off the engine when the car is overheating; many have reported that’s when the valve seats
drop -- when the engine is stopped. Instead, find a water hose and leave the engine running as you hose down the
radiator through the front grille. Once the temp gauge comes down, then shut it down -- and call a tow truck, do not
start it again until you have addressed its overheating problems.
OVERHEATING -- H.E. vs. PRE-H.E.: Roger Bywater indicates that the pre-H.E. cars had some tendency to
overheat: “With regard to the marginal cooling at sustained high speeds the H.E. had a slight advantage in that the
higher compression ratio raised the thermal efficiency and reduced the heat losses to the coolant. It was also
noticeably over-fuelled at high revs which must have helped further and the problem, slight though it was, seemed to
be solved. Distributor build quality was also better by this time.”
OVERHEATING -- CAUSES: Believe it or not, the XJ-S H.E. does not overheat when it’s running right -- and this
from an owner who lives in Florida! If yours tends to overheat, don’t ignore it. Check the following, all of which are
178
described further in this book:
1) The cooling system must be properly filled with no air in it.
a)
The system must be filled with the proper coolant mixture and bled correctly to begin with, which requires
disconnecting a hose at the heater valve (not mentioned in the manuals).
b) The automatic air purge system must be working properly to keep air out.
i)
The banjo fitting on top of the radiator is probably plugged if it hasn’t been modified.
ii) The line to the atmospheric catchment tank may be obstructed or kinked.
2) The radiator must be clear, no blockage or sludge; unfortunately, this is difficult to check conclusively on the XJ-S
without removing it from the car and removing the end tanks. Crud in the radiator will cause overheating under all
conditions, but usually more at speed than at idle. Experience indicates that any radiator maintained following the
owner’s handbook guidelines for more than ten years is likely to be plugged.
3) Suspend the thermostats in a pan of water on the stove and bring them to a boil. Do not let them contact the
bottom of the pan. If the thermostats are not visibly wide open by the time the water boils, replace them. Their
usual failure mode is to open only slightly.
4) Retarded timing will cause overheating under all operating conditions. See the sections on ignition timing beginning
on page 126.
a)
A seized centrifugal advance mechanism may be seized at any position from idle to max advance. Usually, it
will be correct at one particular RPM, retarded everywhere above that RPM, and overadvanced everywhere
below. Conditions with retarded timing will cause overheating. Conditions with overadvanced timing can also
cause overheating but usually not as severe; the more obvious problem is knocking. See page 137.
b) A blown vacuum advance module will cause timing to be retarded at low throttle while correct at full throttle,
so the car will overheat more when driving gently.
5) There may be debris obstructing airflow through the radiator, such as dirt and leaves -- either plugging the fins
themselves or within the space between the A/C condenser and the radiator. See page 202.
6) A bad fan clutch causes overheating only in stop-and-go traffic or other conditions where motion of the car doesn’t
provide enough air flow. See page 215.
7) The fan shroud needs to be properly installed and sealed up against the back side of the radiator. See page 226.
8) The fan shroud flaps should be intact and free to flap as intended. If they are missing, overheating when stopped
and idling is likely.
9) There needs to be foam surrounding the radiator to prevent air from bypassing it. See page 226.
10) Front spoiler -- it must be there, and it must be properly mounted. See page 227.
11) Automatic transmission problems can be putting too much extra heat into the radiator. See page 324.
While all of the above items point to common faults, it must be said that far and away the most common cause of
overheating on XJ-S’s that are ten years old or more is a plugged radiator. If you are having cooling problems, address
the easy items first, but you might as well go ahead and plan to remove the radiator and have it rodded, recored, or
replaced.
FILLING THE COOLANT SYSTEM: The ROM and the Haynes both provide a detailed coolant fill procedure and
give dire warnings about engine damage caused by hot spots if the procedure is not followed. Allow me to add: they
ain’t kidding. Reportedly, one indication that the system has not been properly filled and bled is that the coolant level
light comes on every now and then while driving. Another is a temp gauge that seems to wander around.
Of course, you could just take your car to the Jag dealer and let the experts change the coolant so you don’t have to
179
worry about it, right? Get real. Stefan Schulz: “In my experience (in the bad old days, that is, when I still let garage
mechanics near my car), they never seemed to follow this procedure because the coolant level light would behave as you
describe after they messed with the cooling system. When I started doing my own maintenance and followed the
procedure to the letter except for the leak sealer I never got the low coolant light on when the engine was running.”
Steve Gallant: “Same for me here. My car was serviced by a very reputable main dealer as part of a pre-purchase
service. After receiving the car, I noticed the low coolant light came on on my first drive. I performed the factory
procedure for filling/bleeding, and the light was extinguished. I must have added close to a quart of coolant. So even
dealers don't take the necessary time to perform this operation 100% successfully.”
Wally Magathan: “My car was also serviced by a reputable dealer, but I didn't know it was routine for them to ignore
the bleed procedure until now. I've now bled the system, put in almost a gallon, and hate to think what's been going on
in the engine in the month since they "fixed" my radiator hose.”
Jim Isbell provides a great tip on filling the coolant system: “Getting the water into the system has always been a
problem on the XJS because of the two fill points. I always tried to do it on level ground before and spent many minutes
shaking the car to get all the air out of the system. Today, just by accident, I was parked in the driveway with the nose
of the car elevated and I didn't feel like moving it. So I pulled the cap on the header tank and filled the car (about two
quarts) then I pulled the cap on the crossover pipe and added another quart. The air bubbled out quickly and the car
was completely full in no time. I recapped both vents and it's finished. From now on I will park the car with the nose
uphill when I fill the radiator.”
The engine is deliberately designed for the coolant to flow upward with no air pockets, but when parked on level ground
it just barely flows upward. Tilting the nose up should make the air clear out a lot better. Offhand, it’s probable that
you can’t have the nose too far up until the air bleed port on the top left of the radiator is higher than the fill opening on
the crossover pipe.
Be sure to bleed the air out of the heater circuit while filling the cooling system. See below.
AIR BLEED VALVE: At the top left corner of the radiator is a small fitting used to allow air out while filling. Mike
Morrin says, “The first few XJ-S (1975 model year) left the factory with a threaded plug.” Then they switched to a little
winged valve for most pre-H.E. cars -- but for H.E.’s, they went back to the plug. Morrin: “The owner’s handbook and
manual give instructions for both types of fitting.” Both items were the same thread, 1/8” BSPP -- so if you’re here in
the US, don’t lose that plug! If you’d prefer the convenience of the valve, C45587, it will fit where the plug fits; the
valve sits a little higher and therefore closer to the hood, but this doesn’t seem to be a problem.
AIR BLEED AT THE HEATER VALVE: There is none, but there should be. Since the line comes out of the right
side coolant manifold, goes upward until it gets to the heater valve and then downward until it connects to the bottom
left corner of the radiator, it forms a big bubble when filling the coolant system. Therefore, you need to disconnect a
hose at the heater valve to let the air out when filling. A disconnected hose creates two openings, one on the end of the
hose and the other on the end of the fitting it was attached to. As you fill, coolant will start to pour out of one of the
openings first; put a thumb over that opening and continue to fill until coolant starts to pour out of the other opening,
then reconnect the hose.
Of course, it’d be more convenient if there were actually a bleed port. Douglas Dahl says, “2 clamps and a $0.99 5/8"
connector at any auto parts store. It is the same as the T's used in the flushing kits out there and comes with a screw
top.” These black plastic “flushing tees” are commonly available in 1/2”, 5/8”, and 3/4” size, and you’ll need the 5/8”
for this job. The straight section of the tee has hose barbs of the specified size while the connection off the side is a male
garden hose fitting, and it comes with a blank-off cap with a rubber washer inside. It really could not be any simpler to
install or use. If your local auto parts store doesn’t sell these flushing tees individually, it may sell the flushing kits which
contain three tees -- one of each size -- plus one cap and a few other items, all for less than five bucks so it still won’t
break you. Note: you might want to check the passages inside the tee for plastic mold flashing before installing.
Please note that installation and use of an air bleed in the heater circuit does not mean you don’t need to follow the
180
prescribed procedure for filling and bleeding the cooling system. You will still get air in the system when filling; we just
hope that you will trap less air in the system by bleeding air from the heater circuit.
When filling the cooling system, it is suggested that you run the car for a few minutes with the climate control system
off. With it off, the heater valve will remain open, so the cooling system will have a chance to push the air pockets out
of the heater circuit. With the system on, it may just close that heater valve as soon as the engine is started unless it’s
cold enough inside the car for the system to call for heat.
ANTIFREEZE: Don’t operate the Jag or any car without antifreeze in the cooling system. The name “antifreeze” is an
unfortunate misnomer, and pure water is a totally unacceptable coolant -- even in Hawaii. Antifreeze not only prevents
freezing, it also retards corrosion and crud buildup, helps prevent boilover, and serves as a water pump seal conditioner.
Running pure water will result in early water pump seal failure. Also, replace the antifreeze annually, because the
inhibitors in it wear out and it becomes corrosive.
Scott Fisher sends the following wisdom: “In the context of the automotive cooling system ethylene glycol is not an
anti-corrosive agent; it is in fact corrosive. To offset this fact, manufacturers add anti-corrosives (inhibitors) to the
glycol. These preparations, while in good condition, perform well in both minimizing corrosion and preventing freezing
of the coolant. However, over the life of the coolant the anti-corrosion properties of the inhibitors are depleted.
“Water aids corrosion in three main ways: 1) bringing free oxygen in close contact with the metals so that corrosion
(oxidation) can occur. 2) Water is conductive. Once water has been flowing in your cooling system for some time, its
conductivity will rise as it picks up metal ions. The water may serve to promote electrical activity which may erode
metals by galvanic action. 3) Some of the metal ions in the water may also react directly with the metal surfaces.
“Apart from supporting the above three processes, ethylene glycol has the added unfortunate property that it oxidizes
through several stages to oxalic acid. The products of ethylene glycol oxidation by oxygen and subsequent reactions
include: aldehydes, carboxylic acid, nitric acid, glycolic acid, glyoxylic acid, oxalic acid, formaldehyde and formic acid.
Most of the series of oxidation products to and including oxalic acid are directly corrosive to metals. Added to this,
oxalic acid is highly toxic.
“To combat the above acids and other corrosion activity, antioxidants and alkaline formulations are added to the glycol
mix. These include many compounds which are used in cooling systems where antifreeze properties are not required
and include primary, secondary and tertiary amines; organic and inorganic phosphates, silicates cresols and other
phenolic substances; a wide variety of sulfur compounds; soaps; alkali metal salts; and borates.
“These inhibitors slow down the corrosion process caused by the glycol and the water. They may coat the metal
surfaces and prevent corrosion by passivation. Passivation is the process where the a protective film forms on the metal
which prevents further contact with the solution. Unfortunately, in all coolant preparations (with or without glycol) the
inhibitor system (during engine operation) is being continuously depleted in the performance of these actions. For this
reason, proper cooling system maintenance is critical.
“One aspect of cooling system maintenance that we can all easily follow is to minimize “aeration” of your coolant.
Aerating accelerates the uptake of free oxygen from the atmosphere. As free oxygen is one of the essential ingredients
for corrosion, the importance of minimizing it’s uptake is clear. To this end you should make sure all your hoses are in
good condition and clamped tightly. “Closed systems”, where an expansion tank and recovery system closed to the
atmosphere is used, also help in this regard.
“If you overheat (boil) glycol-based coolants they must be replaced immediately as this accelerates the oxidization
process of the glycol to acids.”
LONG LIFE COOLANT: Peter Cohen says, “I noticed that the manual called out “phosphate free” coolant. The
statement I am referring to is on Page 26-03 of Volume 2 of the XJS Service Manual (JJM 10 04 06) under the heading
“ANTIFREEZE”. The V12 HE motor is essentially unchanged since long before the existence of non-phosphate
coolant. Ergo, the Jaguar V12 has been doing fine on normal coolant for all these years, so why ask for non-phosphate
181
now?”
“After much searching, the only non-phosphate stuff I could find at the time was Prestone 460 Long Life coolant. The
Prestone 460 has the distinct disadvantage of being brown, so now coolant leaks are the same color as oil leaks (and the
same color as rusty old coolant). I have since found Texaco Havoline Long Life, which is orange.”
Jim Belkoff answers, “Beyond the phosphate-free issue and the long-life issue, Texaco DEX-COOL (and I assume the
Prestone equivalent) contains no silicates. From what I understand, silicates are abrasive and gradually eat away at
water pump seals. Texaco and GM have done tests to prove this new coolant results in fewer water pump replacements.
“The reason the new coolant lasts so long is the carboxylate inhibitor system that’s added to the base ethylene glycol. I
would suggest taking a look at Texaco’s website (www.texaco.com).
How important is phosphate-free coolant? Apparently we should ask the folks at Saturn. Cohen: “In their first year of
production, Saturn recalled and destroyed all of the first cars they sold because "they were shipped with the wrong
coolant, which could destroy the engine block". Given that they could simply have issued new motors, this was an
impressive waste of money.”
Peter Cohen says, “DEX-COOL apparently eats silicone sealants. If you are replacing your water pump, do not use
silicone sealant on the gasket. Either use no additional sealant, or use Permatex.”
LONG LIFE COOLANT -- MAYBE NOT: That orange long life coolant sure sounds good, but eventually enough
negative reports appeared to convince many owners to stick with the traditional green stuff. In fact, enough negative
reports appeared to convince many auto mechanics to avoid the orange stuff like the plague. Gary Penovich says,
“Chevrolets and other late model GM cars have been affected by brown sludge. It seems that extreme driving conditions
and/or low coolant situations lead to a gelatin-like thickening of the stuff.”
Wally Plumley, on the Porsche 928 discussion list, discussed coolants with Texaco reps and learned that long life
coolants are not suitable for “open” cooling systems in which air is present in the cooling system. In other words, it’s
not suitable for systems that don’t have a coolant overflow tank -- such as the pre-H.E. XJ-S. It’s also not suitable for
systems that leak. “Silicates in conventional coolants will "plate out" or coat metal surfaces inside the cooling system. If
the cooling system gets low on coolant, the plated silicates will give some corrosion protection to the metal that is then
exposed to hot, moisture-saturated air. DEX-COOL has no silicates, so if the coolant level gets low, the metal exposed
to hot, moisture-saturated air has no corrosion protection, and will corrode relatively quickly.” Of course, this wouldn’t
matter to anyone whose car never got low on coolant.
Bernard Embden argues that DEX-COOL is not only inappropriate for systems that don’t have an overflow tank, but for
system with unpressurized overflow tanks -- which would include all Jaguar XJ-S’s. “On my 88 Grand Prix with its
non-pressurized expansion tank, (tank does not have a "pressurized radiator cap") a nasty sludge built up around the
expansion tank filler cap with DEX-COOL installed. The crap was hard and not easily removed. Based on my
experience, it appears that DEX-COOL reacts with the atmosphere to form this sludge. GM agrees that low coolant
resulting in radiator contamination is the death bell of DEX-COOL. A "low coolant" condition creates an "air pocket"
within the radiator that allows a deposit accumulation unique to DEX-COOL. Once this deposit attaches itself to the
radiator cap, the cap loses its sealing ability and a vicious cycle of low coolant/more deposits starts.
“Without a pressurized radiator cap, the cooling system has a large and variable "air pocket" in the non-pressurized
expansion tank. This allows DEX-COOL deposits to start to build up immediately in the expansion tank and is
ultimately drawn to the radiator cap. Once on the radiator cap sealing surface it prevents proper sealing. From this
point on your radiator is on borrowed time.”
RETROFITTING OLDER CARS WITH LONG LIFE COOLANT: Jim Crider says, “A few years ago, someone
thought a long-life coolant (original plan: life of vehicle) would be a Good Thing. This leads to Organic Acid
Technology coolant (OAT), which is marketed as "DEX-COOL" by GM and has been factory-fill in their products
(except C4 Corvette -- not sure about C5 Corvette) since 1995. It's the orange or orangy-red stuff. Someone along the
182
line decided the word "acid" was a Bad Thing to try to sell, so OAT was recursively changed to Organic Additive
Technology. It can go 5 years/100K or 150K miles -- provided it's not mixed with other coolant. OAT has less
cavitation resistance than silicate-based coolant, and can attack certain sealing materials, so it's not a good idea to
convert a green-coolant car over to OAT unless the manufacturer says it's okay. OAT also has a tendency to stain
translucent plastics in things like overflow bottles and pressurized de-gas bottles with a funky brown crud. Oh, and
OAT from one manufacturer isn't necessarily compatible with OAT from a different manufacturer. Texaco is GM's
OEM supplier and is licensed to use GM's "DEX-COOL" trademark on their aftermarket packaging.
“Many European automakers use a hybrid of OAT -- HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology -- clever, huh?),
which is the OAT package with a small amount of silicates added to increase the cavitation resistance and make it less
aggressive against those seals and gaskets. This is often pale yellow in color. This stuff seems to offer pretty much the
best of both worlds -- it's not quite as long-lived as straight OAT, but it is much better behaved in operation than OAT,
much like conventional coolant.
“Note that these three different additive packages are not really cross-compatible. No, they won't eat the insides of your
radiator if you mix a little of one in with another in a pinch, but you'll be better to get the system flushed out and a fresh
mix of 50/50 whatever your car needs put back into it.
“If I owned a car that came with OAT or HOAT from the factory, I'd likely stay with it. The anti-corrosion additives, in
particular, leave residues on the walls of the various coolant passages (that's how they work -- the residues coat the base
metal and prevent corrosion), and it's tricky to convert an engine that's been run with one style of package to use another
package and get the full benefit.
“Switching from conventional to OAT, for instance, requires a mild acid flush of the cooling system after removal of the
conventional coolant and before pouring in the OAT if the long-life corrosion benefit of the OAT coolant is to be
realized. Just pouring the OAT in after draining the conventional won't gain the full measure of added coolant life the
OAT marketers (notably Texaco) like to use as selling points.”
Somewhere in the midst of all this, the labelling on the containers of DEX-COOL quietly changed, making far more
modest claims for durability and combatibility.
Quoting from the Popular Mechanics web site: “Now let's look at "retrofit" and "drain and fill" and explain what you
can and can't do safely, and a bit of why. If a vehicle has a copper-and-brass radiator, forget a retrofit, says General
Motors, because the organic acid (orange) antifreeze may not provide adequate protection for the lead solder in that
radiator. The Chrysler orange hybrid combination of silicates and organic acids is meant to provide special protection
for the water pump. Sorry, you can buy it only at a Chrysler-brand dealer.
“Prestone believes you can retrofit to its organic acid orange almost any vehicle with an aluminum radiator and cooling
system that has been well-maintained and is in good condition, if you do it right. However, the antifreeze maker
recognizes the possibility of a problem with Dodge truck 5.9-liter V8 water pumps, for which green or yellow/gold U.S.
antifreeze is recommended–if you don't get Chrysler's specific orange.”
A 1998 magazine article quoting Applied Chemical Specialities Co. (a competitor of Havoline) put the retrofit issue
more strongly: “DEX-COOL is an excellent antifreeze to be used in brand new cars in which traditional
phosphate/silicate antifreeze has never been used. However, if any traditional antifreeze has ever been used in your car's
cooling system, it is strongly advised to avoid using DEX-COOL. This is because, short of a dangerous strong acid
cleaning or complete replacement of ll parts within the cooling system, it is physically impossible to remove all residuals
of phosphates and silicates - even with repeated flushing. If DEX-COOL is used in such a system, deposit formation will
be almost instantaneous and will seriously affect your car's cooling system efficiency and performance. Because most
corrosion occurs under such deposits, it will also affect the long-term corrosion prevention in such a system as well.”
In a more Jaguar-specific vein, Al Askevold reports some problems with DEX-COOL: “Besides the bad report about
DEX-COOL from the radiator shop who did my recore, I could not remove my rad caps without damaging the rubber
seals, and my Tefba filters - I had to remove them and clamp them in a vice to remove the tops. I tried several different
kinds of lubricant on the parts with no effect. I finally flushed the DEX-COOL, I am now using a different brand, so far
no problems.”
183
WATER: The antifreeze needs to be mixed approximately 50/50 with water, but if you care about your cooling system
you might want to be careful about what water you use. The garden hose may be convenient, but it’s not necessarily
healthy for the car. The biggest problem to be concerned with is dissolved solids, that stuff that’s left in a pot after you
boil water away. Since boiling is often going on alongside the hottest parts of the engine (cylinder liners, head), this
same stuff is left there. As a scale on the metal surfaces, it can insulate them from the coolant and make the cooling
system less effective. When the scale flakes off in chunks, it can find its way into the radiator and plug up some of the
tiny tubes. Finally, the scale is somewhat abrasive, and therefore is not particularly good for the seal in the water pump.
This problem might be considered minor. There are only about two gallons of water introduced to the system at each
coolant change, and that amount of water only has a finite amount of dissolved solids in it. This appears to be the
attitude the auto manufacturers take, since there are no radiator hose filters in a car from the factory (see page 190).
However, if you change your coolant often or use really crummy water, you might be contributing to the plugging of
your radiator. If your car loses coolant and you add water daily from a garden hose, you might as well go ahead and
pull your radiator and have it rodded out.
To minimize problems with dissolved solids, you should use distilled water, deionized water (also known as
demineralized water), or water that’s been purified using a reverse osmosis process. All three types are generally
available at the local grocery store for perhaps 75 cents a gallon; at some places, you can take your own jug and get it
even cheaper from a dispensing machine. Deionized water is sometimes called “purified water”, and is usually labelled
that it “serves distilled water uses”.
Grocery stores also sell various types of drinking water, including spring water. These may not be any better than the
tap water, since they may contain lots of dissolved solids -- they just contain dissolved solids that taste good.
Other processes advertised include ozonated water, which is a process to kill germs, and carbon filtered water, which is
a process to remove volatile compounds that affect the flavor. Neither process has any significant benefit for cooling
system use. The first time the engine is warmed up to operating temperature, the germs will be dead and the volatile
compounds will have boiled away and been removed from the system by the air purge system.
There are arguments about using rain water or condensate from an A/C system. The argument is that they are both
“distilled”; however, the other side of the argument is that they apparently pick up quite a load of dissolved solids
somewhere along the way, either from pollutants in the air or from dust or whatever. Look at the container that collects
the water and judge for yourself if it’s OK for the inside of your cooling system to have similar stuff in it.
Peter Smith reports from “...a series of brochures from Tectaloy. It says "the preferred water is demineralised. Do not
use spring or bore water." The brochure illustrated that the corrosion effects on welded aluminium were serious, and
that as little as 1 volt earthing through the cooling system could chew out an aluminium radiator in weeks (probably do
the cylinder head a power of no good as well). It also notes that true distilled water is getting harder to obtain due to the
cost of production and the energy required in the distillation process. Also "if you believe rain water is the answer just
reflect for a second on the damage it does to gutters and tanks, and they're usually galvanised against corrosion. Spring
water is totally unsuitable as it is full of minerals and salts". Summary was that distilled, demineralised or reverse
osmosis water were the most suitable.”
One thing you should definitely not use is “softened” water from one of those water softeners that is recharged with salt.
Dave Lokensgard says, “Never use softened water in a cooling system containing aluminum. Water softeners are ionexchange units, not de-ionizing units. The main bad actor coming from the water in aluminum corrosion is the chloride
ion, and water softeners work by replacing all anions in the water (negatively-charged ions, like phosphate, sulfate, and
so on) with chloride, and all positively-charged ions with sodium ion. This is why they are recharged with salt (sodium
chloride). So softened water is the worst thing you can use in a cooling system.”
Jason Korke: “The coolant I bought was designed to be mixed with water. It was made by Castrol which in Australia is
I believe fairly well regarded. It wasn't cheap! The bottle said, "Mix with demineralized or soft water."” It is unknown
why Castrol’s directions would say such a thing; perhaps they meant naturally soft water (water with few minerals) as
opposed to softened water (water in which the minerals have been exchanged for salt).
184
If you work in a science lab, an electric power plant, or some other type of industrial facility that uses clean water, you
may actually be able to get ahold of some really pure water -- something chemically much closer to unadulterated H2O
than the distilled, deionized, or RO stuff you can buy locally. Believe it or not, this may not be good. Pure water is a
solvent; it would actually be quite effective at corroding your aluminum, iron, and brass parts if it weren’t for the
protective additives in the antifreeze. So, although the total lack of dissolved solids is nice, perhaps it’d be better if you
added some dissolved solids before using; drop a few chunks of scrap aluminum and copper into the jug and let it sit a
while before using it in your cooling system.
If you want to learn more about water, there is a “WaterNet” forum on the Internet.
RADIATOR CAPS: The XJ-S H.E. has two radiator caps, but only the one on the header tank (left side of the engine
compartment) is actually meant to operate as a conventional radiator cap; namely, to control the pressure in the system.
The one on the cross pipe (at the top right of the engine) is really just a place to add coolant, using a standard radiator
cap because they’re available. If one or both of the caps go bad, they may be replaced with standard coolant-recovery
radiator caps.
The early XJ-S H.E. originally came with two different caps that were chained in place to make absolutely sure you
didn’t mix them up. However, as Alex Dorne points out (and Jaguar eventually figured out), there is no opening out of
the chamber between the lower seat and the upper seal in the fitting on the cross pipe. As a result, it doesn’t really
matter what pressure rating the cap is you install there; the upper seal will totally seal that opening, no pressure relief is
possible. The cap on the header tank will always establish the pressure limit within the cooling system. So, Jaguar now
offers two identical caps as a replacement so it doesn’t matter if you mix them up.
Nowadays all radiator caps are coolant-recovery type, but I will point out the difference anyway. In non-recovery
systems, any coolant that was relieved by the radiator cap merely blew overboard, and when the system cooled back
down air would be drawn back in. Radiator caps made for non-recovery systems usually had a brass diaphragm under
the top cover that primarily served as a spring to keep the cap from rattling; it didn’t matter if it didn’t seal, since coolant
was just going overboard and air was being sucked in anyway.
In a recovery system, coolant released is collected in a reservoir and sucked back into the system on cooldown. While
the configuration of the radiator opening hasn’t changed, it now becomes more important that the top cover of the cap
actually seal. When the engine is cooling down and drawing coolant back in, any leaks at this joint will cause it to draw
air instead. So, modern coolant-recovery caps have a rubber seal in place of the brass diaphragm. Since this type cap
works just fine on non-recovery systems, it is doubtful if anyone actually makes the older style anymore.
COOLANT RECOVERY SYSTEM: Hey, all cars have them nowadays, it’s not rocket science. Each time an engine
heats up, the expansion and pressure buildup blows air, gasses, and coolant past the radiator cap and into a recovery
tank, where the air and gasses bubble to the top. When the engine cools down, the contraction draws coolant back from
the bottom of the recovery tank. However, on the XJ-S the coolant return line from the pressure cap to the
“atmospheric catchment tank” behind the left front wheel is unusually long. Since the expansion/contraction of an
engine only moves a little water at a time, it requires several thermal cycles to purge the air out of the hose (unless you
overheat and blow steam). Each time you open the pressure cap, you allow the water to drain into the atmospheric tank
and the line to fill with air. If you keep opening the pressure cap to check the level, it will never get a chance to work
properly.
Even the tiniest leak in the coolant circuit will screw up a coolant recovery system. You may not be concerned about a
very slight loss of coolant, but you should be. The engine takes several hours to cool down, so the rate at which coolant
is drawn back from the recovery tank is glacial indeed. With even a tiny leak in the system, this suction will draw in air
from outdoors instead. Once you have pockets of air in the system, the next event in your life will be an engine rebuild.
Steve Haley says, “I found that even being a cup and a half low on coolant makes a big difference in the location of my
gauge needle.”
185
ATMOSPHERIC CATCHMENT TANK: On the H.E., the atmospheric catchment tank is a plastic container located
directly behind the left front wheel, within the bodywork. “Atmospheric” means that it’s not pressurized; it’s basically an
open container to pour coolant into. To get to it, remove the left front wheel and remove the sheet metal panel at the
rear of the wheel well.
The vent on the atmospheric catchment tank is somewhat unusual. On most cars, the coolant recovery container is
within the engine compartment, and when it overflows (like, when your car is overheating big time), the fluid coming out
the vent just dribbles out onto the ground. In the XJ-S, however, such leakage would result in antifreeze throughout the
bodywork -- unacceptable. So, the container has a vent line that is routed out the bottom of the car. For this vent to
work as intended, the container must be airtight. The design is really lousy, however, and it is likely to leak throughout
the bodywork when overheating anyway.
To prevent such localized flooding, try this idea: install a pan underneath the atmospheric catchment tank to catch any
coolant that spills out of it, and provide a drain from this pan out the bottom of the car.
According to Mike Morrin, the pre-H.E. doesn’t have an atmospheric catchment tank; relief from the radiator cap on the
header tank just drains into the wheel well. He suggests that an overflow tank might be a useful retrofit. Considering
the problems with the OEM tank noted above, it might be wiser to simply purchase a generic “coolant recovery system”
such as those offered by J.C. Whitney. Note, however, that such generic tanks may be designed to overflow all over the
place rather than out a tube; either mount them somewhere that this isn’t a problem, or provide a tray to catch the
overflow and route it out the bottom of the car. Tank volume may also be a concern, so if given a choice get the largest
container you can find.
ATMOSPHERIC CATCHMENT TANK FILLING: Ideally, you’d like to have a minimum of a couple of inches of
coolant in the bottom of the atmospheric catchment tank. However, you’ll notice there’s no convenient way to put any
coolant in it! Apparently, Jaguar expects you to just add coolant at the header tank, and eventually some of it will get
into the catchment tank eventually. Or maybe you’re supposed to disconnect the hose from under the cap on the header
tank, put a funnel in the end and hold it high and fill it that way.
Steve Haley had a better idea. “I added a fill hose which I ran back out through the same hole as the others.” This
would give you a filler location in the left rear corner of the engine compartment. Note that the point where this hose
enters the atmospheric catchment tank should be airtight, so if it overflows the excess coolant will come out the vent line
behind the LF wheel rather than pouring all over everything.
Even with such a nifty filler scheme, you still don’t have any good way to tell what the level is. If you arrange your filler
hose to end about two inches above the bottom of the tank, you can find out by blowing into it. If you hear bubbling,
the level is at or above the end of the hose, and you don’t need to add coolant. If the blowing just whooshes into the
tank freely, you need to add coolant. If you think you might have too much coolant in it, you might even connect a
siphon and drain the excess through this hose; when it gets down to the two-inch level, it will suck air and automatically
quit siphoning.
COOLANT RECOVERY HOSE: The line from under the radiator cap on the header tank to the atmospheric
catchment tank is anything but simple -- or reliable. In the engine compartment, where you can see it with the hood
open, it is a sturdy thick-walled 5/16” hose. When it gets into the compartment behind the LF wheel well, where you
can’t easily inspect it, it connects to an adapter that steps the size up to 3/8”, which then connects to a length of thinwalled rubber tubing (which actually appears smaller than the 5/16” hose). This 3/8” hose then bends downward 90º
and into the atmospheric catchment tank.
One common problem is that the thin-walled tubing may get kinked making that 90º bend -- sometimes because
somebody has fiddled with the hose in the engine compartment and pushed more of it into the hidden compartment,
tightening up the bend. Michael Aiken says, “My coolant recovery hose was kinked as it enters the atmospheric bottle.
This made the recovery system totally inoperable and could lead to more severe damage anywhere in the cooling system,
as this is the only way pressure is vented as the coolant expands.
186
“It can easily be tested by disconnecting the hose at the top of the neck of the expansion tank and blowing in the hose. It
should offer little resistance to air flow and you should hear a gurgling sound behind the LF wheel. I applied 30 lbs of
pressure and no flow. It was really kinked. It could also possibly be broken which is not as severe but could lead to
slow coolant loss. The hose is a soft rubber and makes two 90º turns in 5 inches. The second turn (the one that kinked)
has a radius of less than an inch. I cut the hose off just above the bottle cap, installed a 90º 3/8" heater elbow (plastic)
and a non-crimping heater hose back to the original connector. Cost less than $4.
“If I were reading this I would take the 2 minutes and check it out. Unlike most cars this recovery system is completely
out of sight and problems are likely to go undetected. This hose is really flimsy (unlike the hose from the tank neck into
the wheel well which seems very strong) and just fell apart as I took it off.”
Another problem is the little adapter, which is steel and therefore subject to corrosion. Craig Sawyers reports, “Mine
was rusted solid inside, and so totally inoperative.” Steve Haley says, “The short metallic slightly conical connector was
completely plugged with corrosion. The hose into the tank crumbled in my hands...and the metal brackets were rusted
and in pieces.”
Yet another concern: The end of the rubber hose inside the atmospheric catchment tank obviously needs to be open,
both to allow coolant out and to suck coolant back in. In some cases, the hose blows coolant just fine, but when sucking
the tip of the hose gets sucked onto the bottom of the tank (or even onto the side, if someone is really unlucky). It then
can’t pull in any more fluid even though surrounded by fluid, so the system pulls in some air from somewhere else
instead -- or starts sucking radiator hoses flat, which is also trouble.
The fix is easy: pull the hose out of the atmospheric catchment tank, and redesign the tip of the hose so it can’t possibly
get sucked onto a surface. One idea is to punch a 1/4” hole through the hose crossways about a half inch from the tip.
This will prevent the hose from sucking up the bottom 1/2” of the fluid in the atmospheric catchment tank, but typically
you’d rather not suck up the dregs anyway.
When fooling with the coolant recovery hose, remember that the hole where it enters the top of the atmospheric
catchment tank is supposed to be airtight so that fluid won’t overflow out that point if the tank gets full.
AIR PURGE SYSTEM: When coolant is added to a cooling system, there is always some air diffused in the liquid.
Over time, this air will come out of solution and rise to the top of the liquid, forming air pockets. To avoid creating hot
spots (since the air won’t cool the metal adjacent to it as well as the liquid would), the idea is to design the system so the
air will collect in a spot where it won’t do any harm so the owner can deal with it at his leisure.
In old pickup trucks, the top of the radiator was the highest point in the cooling system. As a result, any air in the
system would tend to collect right under the cap; all the owner had to do was top it up on occasion and the rest of the
circuit would remain air-free. Unfortunately, when Jaguar designed the XJ-S, the hoodline of a 1950 Ford pickup was
not considered acceptable; not only would the top of the radiator have to be so low that it would not be the highest point
in the system, but it wouldn’t have a cap on it either. Hence, more elaborate measures were necessary to continuously
purge air out of the system.
These measures changed with the introduction of a second radiator cap on the bypass pipe with the introduction of the
H.E. Mike Morrin says, “The Pre-H.E. XJ-S has only the cap on the header tank. The level of the cap is marginally
below the radiator vent valve (with the car on level ground).” There was a small tube from the top right corner of the
radiator over into the top of the header tank on the left wheel well. The bottom of the header tank was connected into
the return line from the heater line, which is essentially the suction side of the pump. The pump operation would
therefore draw a flow from the top of the radiator into the header tank. Within the header tank, the air would tend to
rise out and collect under the radiator cap while liquid coolant went out the bottom back into the circuit. The owner
simply tops up the system every now and then to keep air out.
With the H.E., it was decided to add a second fill cap on the bypass pipe. This formed another high spot where air
would collect. So, the air purge tubing from the top of the radiator to the header tank was modified to include a hose
connection for a line from a tap just under this second cap. Unfortunately, this complicated matters; the bypass pipe is
connected to the suction side of the pump, so it’s at low pressure. So, the coolant and air is likely to flow into the fill
187
connection rather than out toward the header tank. To make the air purge system work right, connections to the header
tank were revised. Rather than simply relying upon the suction side of the pump to draw coolant, an ejector was
incorporated into the air purge tubing to provide even more suction so as to pull air out of the cap fitting on the bypass
pipe. To operate this ejector, a hose was provided from the left side thermostat housing (high pressure) and there’s a
special connection on the bypass pipe directly into the suction side of the pump to get the lowest pressure possible. The
high flow resulting is routed through the ejector to provide as much suction as possible. The connection to the heater
return line was eliminated; the heater line merely passes underneath the header tank on its way to the radiator outlet.
Correction: The ©1982 Supplement, page 26-1, Fig. 2 showing the cooling system schematically shows the ejector
(item 18) incorrectly; the line from the radiator and the line from the left side thermostat housing are interchanged.
Simply look at the tubing on your car to see the correct scheme. The same schematic with the same error is included in
the Haynes manual, page 334, Fig. 13.6.
The XJ12 with carburetors has a second radiator cap on the bypass pipe, but lacks the ejector-based air purge scheme.
Its air purge scheme operates similarly to the pre-H.E. except that it’s connected to the coolant passages in the induction
housings rather than to the top of the radiator.
On the H.E., in addition to the ejector scheme, a “water valve” EAC4168 was installed in the air purge connection to the
bypass pipe. This is basically a check valve that allows air to flow out towards the header tank but won’t allow coolant
to flow from the top of the radiator into the bypass pipe. This water valve is built into the fitting on the bypass pipe
itself. This requires a 3/8” fitting at that end, and since the air purge tubing is 1/4”, Jaguar uses a special hose that’s 1/4”
on one end and 3/8” on the other. Of course, if you want to replace the hose, you can use a piece of 1/4” hose, a piece
of 3/8” hose, and an adapter. Tony Bryant says, “I've brazed a 3/8" fitting onto the bleed pipe to be able to use
"standard" 3/8" heater hose here.”
If your water valve is toast and you can’t find a replacement, you can use a generic in-hose check valve, but be sure that
the unit you select opens very easily since the ejector will not provide enough suction to overcome a heavy spring. Bob
Lovell points out that McMaster-Carr (http://www.mcmaster.com/) offers a wide selection of check valves; the best
choice would probably be number 47245K23. However, better yet would probably be to make a check valve from
three successive sizes of brass tubing and a steel ball. Most commercially-available check valves consider a positive
closure of utmost importance, but in this case total cutoff is not as important as ease of opening. Don’t install a
spring in your assembly, just let the ball roll back and forth, and install it nearly horizontally.
If the air purge system doesn’t seem to be keeping air out of the space under the cap on the bypass pipe, it may be a
sign that the radiator is plugged. A plugged radiator will cause the pressure at the top right side of the radiator to be
higher than it should be. As a result, coolant will be coming out the banjo fitting faster than it should, possibly
overwhelming the air purge ejector and preventing any purge from the bypass pipe connection.
In either the pre-H.E. or H.E., the air purge system is attached to the radiator at a banjo fitting at the top right. This
banjo fitting has a design defect in that the hole through the side of the bolt itself is too close to the head, so it doesn’t
line up with the annular groove in the fitting properly. This exact same flaw is found in the banjo bolts on the back end
of the tappet blocks and is discussed at length beginning on page 44; the same modification should be done here to
improve flow, reduce the tendency to get plugged up, and make sure the air purge system works as intended. The banjo
fitting on the radiator is longer and has finer threads than those on the tappet blocks, but it is the same diameter.
If you don’t want to modify that banjo bolt yourself, Ron Kelnhofer (page 718) offers a replacement banjo bolt of his
own design. It is made of brass rather than steel, and it has the cross hole correctly located when used with the included
copper washers. You can look at a pic of this bolt at
http://neptune.spacebears.com/cars/engr/banjorad.html
While the defective banjo bolts on the oil lines don’t seem to cause obvious problems, this one tends to get plugged up
and completely shut off the air purge system from the radiator. David M. Johnson says, “After Kirby's info on the banjo
bolt being blocked, I took note and disassembled the bolt this weekend. Guess what, the holes in the bolt were blocked
with crud. One of my cars was making a disgusting moaning sound for the first minute after start up; the moaning sound
(trapped air) is now gone. Thanks Kirby, I would not have found that on my own.”
188
Craig Tims had more serious problems. After having the radiator rodded and the thermostats replaced at the dealer, the
car continued to overheat. He eventually found that the new thermostats had no jiggle pins and the banjo fitting was
totally plugged. After clearing and modifying the banjo fitting and correcting the thermostats, his temp gauge stays
where it should be. While such details may sound minor, Tims’ example should illustrate just how important it is to have
a working air purge system to keep air out of the coolant circuit.
Using thick sealing washers under the head makes the hole misalignment worse, so Jaguar provides really thin washers
that tend to leak. Once the modification to the bolt is done, the thick copper washers commonly found in auto parts
stores can be used for better sealing. This banjo fitting requires three seals, and the plug at the top left for venting the
radiator when changing coolant requires one more of the same size. If your local auto parts store has a rack of red cards
titled “Help!”, it probably has a package of sealing washers that are perfect for these fittings: part number 66272,
labelled “Brake Hose Bolt Washer”. It says they are ID 25/64” and OD 5/8”.
Depending on personal preference, you might consider fiber washers instead of copper. This might be especially
advantageous on the plug at the top left of the radiator, since you may be opening that one more often and fiber washers
can be reused if care is taken while copper washers must be replaced (or annealed) each time to seal properly. 3/8” fiber
washers may be difficult to find in an auto parts store even though they carry lots of larger ones for oil drain plugs.
Lowe’s carries suitable fiber washers in its specialty fasteners section, part number 838050.
LEAK SEALERS: Mike Wilson says, “Here is what my 1990 XJ-S Drivers Handbook (publication number: JJM 18 02
03/00) states on page 176: “Two 135 ml bottles of Jaguar Radiator Leak Sealer or Barrs Leaks must also be mixed with
fresh anti-freeze”.
Folks, this horrible recommendation is probably the single biggest reason Jaguar didn’t make it on its own and had to sell
out to Ford. Many Jaguar mechanics owe their livelihood to this terrible advice, since a high percentage of their work is
traced to this stuff plugging up the bottom half of the radiator and contributing to Jaguar’s reputation for overheating
problems. Please, do not use any leak-sealing substance within the V12 cooling system. If the system leaks, fix it.
To make sure no Barrs Leaks gets in there, you’re gonna have to keep the car’s cooling system away from Jag dealers.
Craig Sawyers reports: “Here's a horrible thing. I bought Jag antifreeze, determined I wasn't going to run the risk of
damaging my glitzy re-built V12 with the wrong stuff. Anyway, my dealer casually tossed in a Jaguar box marked
"2xJLM 636". "What is this?" say I. "Oh - corrosion inhibitor". That sounds good I think, particularly given the recent
thread on water types for radiator use, and electrolytic corrosion. Well, guess what is in the box? Two nicely packed
bottles of (unmarked) Barrs Leaks. AAARGH! Will they never learn! Needless to say, they are still in the box, and will
never even have sight of my rebuilt rad.”
If the car is more than a few years old and having overheating problems, it’s not a bad idea to just take the radiator to a
shop and have it rodded to restore its effectiveness -- especially if you’re not the original owner and the previous owner
may have been using leak sealers. John Napoli reminds you to clean out “the engine block, heater core and don’t forget
to remove and flush the expansion tank -- these are commonly forgotten repositories of Barrs Leaks.”
OTHER THINGS PLUGGING YOUR RADIATOR: Another major source of particles for plugging the tubes in the
radiator is rust scale, which primarily comes from four items in the XJ-S cooling system: the header tank, the cross pipe,
and a coolant connecting pipe on top of each head. Replacing some or all of these items with non-steel substitutes
would reduce or eliminate this source of crud. See pages 204, 208, and 211.
GURGLE SOUNDS: Paul Burke says, “I had a gurgle which was coming from around the heater matrix. It started
fairly quietly and only became audible when the car was stopped. I thought it was probably the air-conditioning system ha. The sound became loader over time and more apparent under acceleration. The noise turned out to be virtually
(well maybe not all, but more than normal) the full pump output going through the right hand bank of the engine, out the
back, through the heater matrix, along the hose that runs along the left hand side of the engine, into the small "T" into
the bottom hose and back to the pump thereby effectively bypassing the left hand side of the engine and the radiator.
189
My radiator had become partially blocked...”
FIXING A PLUGGED RADIATOR: Once you come to the realization that your radiator is plugged, there are
generally five things you can opt to do about it. The first is to go down to the store and buy some product intended for
“flushing” cooling systems and use it according to the directions. A quick survey of owners on the internet indicated
that this never does any good. Paul Bachman says, “I was told by a good source (must have been good 'cause I can't
remember who it was) that since the advent of aluminum engines and aluminum radiators there are no longer any
radiator flushing products that do anything useful at all. It seems the chemicals that used to do a fairly good job of
cleaning out a brass/copper radiator cause serious corrosion to aluminum. Soo... rather than face complaints (lawsuits?)
from people who don't read directions, all such useful products just quietly disappeared from the shelves about 15 years
ago. I believe he went on to state that the antifreeze additives that were capable of keeping a brass/copper radiator free
from blockage were deleted at about the same time.... thus the reason why most of our radiators are blocked or
becoming blocked. From my experience (from before 15 years ago), I have to say that this theory seems to have merit.”
Unfortunately, the next four options all involve removing the radiator. Deal with it.
The second option is to have the radiator “boiled”. This involves dunking the radiator in some kind of vat full of
chemicals and cooking it for a while. Again, a survey of owners indicates that this only rarely works with the XJ-S
radiator, possibly because of the types of junk that typically plug it. Considering how much effort it was to get it out and
put it back in, you might want to rethink this option.
The third option is to have the radiator “rodded”. In this case, the radiator shop removes the covers on each end of the
radiator and rams a rod through each tube from end to end, cleaning all the accumulated deposits out. He then solders
the covers back on and pressure checks the assembly. This usually does the trick, although there have been a few
reports when it didn’t; it may depend on how skilled your local radiator shop is. Jim Isbell says, “Some shops don't
know that to properly clean it both tanks have to be removed. If they only do one and you don't see any improvement it
just might be because it wasn't cleaned properly.”
Keep in mind that rodding does not render your radiator as good as new; the passages are unplugged but not all deposits
can be cleaned away, and some parts may be stressed or weakened during the procedure. Sometimes the shop will even
report that the radiator is toast and cannot be rodded, and suggest option number four.
The fourth option is to have the radiator “recored”, which means they take the end covers off and solder them onto a
new center section entirely. Apparently all brass radiators are made of comparable configuration cores, so the shop will
be able to find a suitable core. You need to ensure the new core is at least as good -- and possibly better -- than the
original was. Any upgrade generally involves the number of “rows” the core has. There is also a difference in fin
spacing, but if given a choice you should probably opt for the bigger fin spacing; the amount of cooling capacity is a
secondary concern compared to the likelihood of the fins getting plugged with debris, and it’s difficult enough to hose
out the radiator on this car.
The fifth option, of course, is to have the radiator replaced. You can opt for an OEM radiator -- but in this author’s
opinion, you’d be nuts to do so. As long as you’re buying a radiator anyway, take the opportunity to convert to a
single-pass arrangement as described on page 199.
If you’re doing any of this work on your radiator, you should be installing coolant filters to make sure that it doesn’t get
plugged again -- probably within seconds of starting, as all the crud sitting in your block is promptly flushed into your
freshly-cleaned radiator. Also consider the other items on the checklist on page 198.
COOLANT FILTERS: Everybody who has taken their XJ-S radiator to a shop and had it rodded out has been told that
it was really plugged up. The Jaguar recommendation to use Barrs Leaks in this system is often blamed, but there are
apparently other contributors as well. Rust scale coming off the inside of the header tank and cross pipe is a source of
crud. Some mechanics use too much silicone sealant so it leaves a bead around the joint, and later on this bead peels off
and starts looking for a passage to plug. And those who replace their coolant often but mix it with hard tap water are
introducing a whole new supply of minerals with each change; when the engine heats up, all these minerals deposit on
190
hot engine parts as a scale, and then break off in chunks and reconvene in the radiator.
Why don’t they make a “last chance” filter to install in the upper radiator hose to catch all this junk before it can get into
the radiator and plug things up? There are no small passages in the engine, the chunks could just flow right through the
block, but catching them before the radiator should greatly extend the time between roddings.
They do. In fact, it’s a fairly popular idea among car enthusiasts, so there are several different model coolant filters
available. Peter Smith identified one excellent brand: “The manufacturer is
Tefba
122/124 Silverdale road
Silverdale NSW Australia 2752
Phone: 02 4774 2022
Fax:
02 4774 2777
“It consists of a black nylon moulded body which resembles a jam jar approx. 2 inches (50mm) diameter by 2 inches
high. It has a screw lid and the inlet and outlet pipes come in at base level such that the side elevation resembles an
inverted "T". When you unscrew the lid you look down inside and see a stainless steel filter screen placed across the
flow path of the coolant. The filter screen is bent to form a delta shape or arrow head pointing in the direction of the
flow. This provides a filter element size effective of approx. 6 square inches. The filter mesh hole size is about twice the
size of the tea strainer we have in the kitchen.
“I have installed two of these on my XJC and they look pretty neat. It is easy to check the screens by undoing the screw
tops and there is a spigot which is attached to a disc which sits at the bottom of the pot. You use this spigot as a handle
which lifts out the disc with the screen sitting on top plus the crap."
The Tefba housing is not transparent, so you can't inspect the element for accumulated crud without opening the top.
However, by installing the Tefba filters in the highest horizontal portion of each upper radiator hose, owners have found
that they can check the screens without draining any coolant first -- and so are able to check them regularly. The fact
that the element is huge means it's not that important to check them very often anyway.
In the US, you can get Tefba filters from Fasterjags (page 716).
There have been at least three significant issues discovered with the Tefba filters. The first is that the element didn’t
come all the way up to the cap; when the cap was screwed on tight, there was a gap between the top of the screen and
the bottom of the cap. Debris -- especially debris that floats -- could thus circumvent the screen and enter your radiator.
Ashcroft found an easy fix for the Tefba elements being too short: “the element does end about 3/16" below the cap, but
the disc is about 5/16" below the in/outlet. I just put a 3/16" thick O-ring under the disc, raises the screen to the cap.”
Chip Wikan adds, “a trip to the local Advance Auto Parts found an O-ring, part # 64630.1, dimensions 30mm x 36mm x
3mm which elevates the "grudge" tray perfectly flush with the top of the filter.”
This author went a bit farther and fashioned a thin strip of stainless steel sheet metal into a wavy shape and set it in the
bottom of the housing before dropping in the tray with the screen on it. This bit acts as a spring that holds the element
against the cap. One must be careful to shape the sheet metal so no edges dig into the plastic.
The second issue is that the screen is clearly shown to be formed into a V shape in the exploded view diagrams, but the
one actually delivered in the filter is merely warped into a U shape. In operation, this U shape can be blown up against
the outlet side of the housing. Ken Gray reports: “I decided to check mine after doing the equivalent of 6 or so Italian
tuneups (testing the newly installed Crane system). I found a distinct dish in the filter elements exactly the same shape as
the exit hole.”
If this happens, the effective screen area is reduced from the entire screen down to just the portion covering the outlet
itself -- and if there’s any debris in there to speak of, flow is nearly entirely cut off, perhaps quite suddenly. This is bad.
It is therefore imperative that all Tefba users carefully fold their screens into a crisp V shape as shown in the diagrams,
which will prevent any such disasters.
The third issue is that the screen doesn’t sit properly against the bottom of the tray, which can allow crud to slip under
the screen and into the radiator. This problem may be made worse by folding the screen into the crisp V shape. The
191
recommended fix is to carefully cut notches in the edge of the plastic tray until the screen sits against the bottom as it
should.
Despite these issues, the Tefba filter has proven to be the item of choice. All three problems are easily rectified once you
know about them, and since you are reading this book, you know about them.
One other nice thing about Tefba filters: somebody out there must be listening, because many of the problems seem to
be getting fixed. The later models reportedly come from the manufacturer with a stainless steel spring attached to the
bottom of the tray to hold the screen up against the lid. And Richard Francis reports that the screen has been fixed, too:
“Today's Tefba's are delivered with a stronger screen...shaped like a baseball field backstop...very difficult to bend and
smaller holes.”
The only remaining complaint about the Tefbas is that the cap sometimes becomes really difficult to get loose, which
some owners blame on the lack of lubricity of long-life coolant. Applying a little water pump lubricant or some such to
the threads might help some, but you might also consider this when installing and arrange the filter such that you can get
a big pair of pliers or an oil filter wrench onto the cap. And, of course, don’t overtighten the caps; Don Buresh suggests
it’s like installing an oil filter, “go 1/4 turn past seated and no more, otherwise it will be a real bear to get off.” Dave
Harvey says, "I apply Teflon grease to the threads and gasket surface, the same stuff plumbers use on gas fittings. This
makes tightening and loosening the lids a much easier task. And I use a strap wrench. My strap wrench was originally
intended for removing the oil filter on my (long gone) Ford Courier pickup. It works very well in a confined space since
it has a 3/8" socket drive."
The Tefbas are so popular with XJ-S owners that can I even forward suggestions on what upper radiator hoses to buy.
Al Askevold says, "I found two preformed hoses that can be used. On the right side I used a hose from Napa p/n 8303
from the t-stat housing to the filter, and a short piece of 1-1/4" hose on the other end. The 8303 Napa hose was used for
clearance around my cold air intake mod, but should work for the OEM setup too.
"The OEM hose that I cut to fit for the b-bank is not the way to go! After clamping everything together both inside
corners on the oem hose were bent just enough to cause a restriction, not much but not a good thing for the b-bank. So
back to Napa, this time I came up with a Napa hose p/n 7737."
Brian Schultetus found another source of coolant filters:
Gano Filter Company
1205 Sandalwood Lane
Los Altos, California 94024
+1 (650) 968-7017
This company makes a filter that is essentially a conical screen in a tube. The basic model is a clear plastic tube so you
can see the filter getting crudded up and know when to take it out and clean it, but some people don’t like plastic so they
offer a brass tube model as well. They also claim that the screen is made of the same copper alloy as the radiator itself,
so it also serves as a monitor for corrosion. And they point out that merely having the clear tube can provide
considerable information on what is going on in the cooling system; you can watch the little "window" while the engine
is running.
The filter comes in three sizes, and of course they expect most customers to buy one per car. The V12 has two upper
radiator hoses, though, so you will need two filters. The hoses are 1-1/4” ID, which corresponds to Gano’s “small” size
filter.
If you’re worried about flow rates through those screens, Damrel suggests using the next size up Gano filter, the
“medium” size filter. “I made up a couple of custom hoses and put the old hose over the radiator and thermostat
housing nipples to make up the difference.” This author uses the small Gano filters with no problem, but it certainly
couldn’t hurt to be using the next larger size.
Gano filters do a great job of keeping the radiator clean, but because the element is much smaller than the one in the
Tefba they must be cleaned out periodically to keep from becoming obstructions themselves. Removal, cleaning, and
reinstallation is a snap, except that it requires draining about one gallon of coolant and replacing it afterward. If you
have the later XJ-S with no radiator drain, this could prove a pain. So, if you have the radiator out to be rodded (!) it’s
192
suggested you have a drain port added. Another option might be to install a fitting in the lower radiator hose to facilitate
easier draining. An even better idea might be to tee into the heater hose at the bottom left corner of the radiator, install a
short hose out the bottom of the car and put a plug in the end.
Even if you have an earlier car with a drain valve, periodic cleaning could prove messy and wasteful of coolant. Hence,
the idea presented in the section starting on page 195 of providing a fitting with a piece of hose with a plug at the end is
recommended. This makes it very convenient to just drain a gallon into a clean jug, service the Gano filters, then put the
gallon right back in.
Tony Glavocich points out that the clear Gano filters can be helpful in diagnosis: “If you have Gano filters, you might
just tie some white string to the screen filter, then you can monitor when the stats are opening. That is how I discovered
my problem. I was also able to see a difference in flow between the two sides by observing the string. The string thing
is something that I would suggest to anyone with Gano see-through filters.”
There are yet other sources of coolant filters. John Goodman says, “I noticed on the AC Delco website they have
screw-on coolant filters (like oil filters). Paper filter with mesh so if they do clog up the paper busts leaving the slightly
coarser mesh to still catch the big bits...”
There’s another product made in Australia by:
Coolfilter Australia
151 Bushmead Road
Hazelmere WA 6055
Unfortunately, one customer had problems with the Coolfilter product. “It consists of a conical plastic material which
has a series of steps. The idea is you cut it off at the appropriate shoulder to suit the ID of your hose. I fitted new hoses
and the there was no appropriate shoulder; one shoulder was too big and caused the filter to buckle and the next
shoulder too small. The step sizes go from 1.1" to 1.3". The new hoses I have are 1.2" ID. The Coolfilter is very
flimsy and cannot push the hose out to accommodate the 1.3" step and of course the 1.1" step is too loose.
“Also, I believe the holes are too large (tea leaves would go straight thru), it would only filter out large particles. The
Coolfilter has slots which are 13mm long by 1.5mm wide tapering down to 1mm. The slots are in between each size step
and running lengthwise. I have run the vehicle with the Coolfilters installed (as best as achievable) for about 50
kilometers and they have captured no crap at all. Either I have a clean system or they pass the crap thru the slots and
gaps created by the buckling of the OD.”
Tom Bennett says, “Make your own filters! I bought a couple of very fine mesh SS tea strainers, a little bit of cutting
and shaping, ended up with 2 "chili" shaped strainers that fit into the top inlets of the rad. Work great! I open them up
about once every 3 months, although the crud is getting less. First time I looked, there was about a teaspoonful of crap
in each!”
You can look at some coolant filter installation photos at
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/CoolantFilters.html
One easy mistake to make is to service the radiator now and worry about installing coolant filters later. If you’re having
your radiator rodded or replaced, you should go ahead and put in coolant filters now to protect it from the junk that’s
still sitting in your engine waiting to get at it! Don’t wait until after you reinstall the radiator and run the engine -- in the
first five minutes of running, a whole pile of crud will get pumped into your nice clean radiator. Much of the crud in the
cooling system is heavier than coolant, and so sits in low spots within the engine and won’t move unless the flow is
really high -- but your radiator is plugged, so the flow is never high enough to move it. Then you clean the radiator, and
the first time the thermostats open there’s more coolant flow through the system than it’s seen in years! It stirs up all the
crud laying around and pumps it right into the radiator.
Bob Gallivan: “I bought these some months ago & finally got around to putting them in & already I can see what looks
like a gray crud through the filter. I'm sure that the new rad at this very moment is harboring this crap that has migrated
there before I installed the filters.”
Richard Damrel: “Had my radiator rodded out in May of this year, now it seems to need it again according to my
193
mechanic. The radiator shop says it's not uncommon for a massive build-up of scale or corrosion to be transferred from
the block to the radiator. Seems to me that it should be much easier to change a few filters every now and then rather
than pull the radiator twice a year.”
Douglas Dahl: “I had to have my radiator rodded right after I got the car (about 6,000 miles ago). This last week, it
was pulled again. No Barr's leak is allowed within 50 yards of the beast and I put the Gano filters on this time. I just ran
it for less than five minutes and both filters seem to be completely clogged. Tomorrow, after it cools, I will clean them
out and see how long it takes to clog them again, and so it will go until they need no further cleaning.”
Chris Reed reports, "Several times since I had my radiator rodded and fitted TEFBAS, I have never found any debris in
the filters. I cleaned my filters today (after a 400Km spirited run) and they were 75-80% covered in debris. I won't say
'blocked' as there was obviously water flow but the filter had a circle of particles the diameter of the hose, and I'll swear
on a stack of bibles it was SAND! So regardless of how many times you check the filters and find them clean do not
discard them - the crap I had in mine would not have been good news for the radiator!"
David Hodges says, "Rebuilt engine myself, spotless inside, hot tanked, etc. Reconditioned radiator, all new hoses etc.
Flushed heater and crossover pipe, also header tank. Fitted Tefba's and still found crud within a week. After engine was
carefully 'run in' and filters stopped showing crud, after the first real run down the track and the engine cooled there was
more crud in the filters. I honestly do not know where it came from but can only assume the heat loosens scale or
whatever from places mere humans cannot reach. I personally would not run without them."
A couple of owners have expressed concern that they will never be able to drive their cars for more than a few miles
without having to clean coolant filters. When first installed, it’s a good idea to check them within the first five minutes
after the thermostats open, and continue to check them in relatively brief intervals until they look like they’re willing to
remain unplugged for a while. Rest assured, sooner or later you will get most of the crud out of the system and they will
run clean for months at a time.
HEATER HOSE FILTER: Gano (see above) also offers a small filter assembly for installation in the line to the heater
core, pointing out that the same crud that plugs radiators can also plug heater cores. Your immediate reaction might be
“Who cares? If the heater core gets plugged, it doesn’t damage the engine.” However, you might want to rethink that
reaction. The heater core getting plugged might not damage the engine, but it’d still be no picnic to fix.
Unfortunately, the Gano heater hose filter assembly is only available in brass -- no clear plastic version offered -- and
therefore must be disassembled to check for pluggage.
On the plus side, you don’t need to get this item from Gano; it’s available in any hardware store! All it requires is a pair
of fittings for a 5/8” garden hose, and one of those hose washers with the built-in conical screen intended for supply
hoses for washing machines and dishwashers.
Garden hose fittings generally come in three flavors: The plastic junk, the slightly better “corrogated” brass (made of
brass sheet metal formed to shape), and high-quality fittings machined from solid brass. Besides being considerably
more durable, the solid machined brass items also typically have flats around both male and female fittings, making it
much easier to tighten and loosen. This being the US, most consumers are morons who buy the cheapest junk available
and most retailers are also morons who cater to this stupidity rather than making the slightest effort towards educating
their customers on why a better product is the wiser buy. So, the solid machined brass items can be a little hard to find.
Home Depot carries an excellent set. Made by Nelson, item N-1558 B, “5/8" Brass Hose Repair -- Extra Heavy Duty
Rod Brass” contains a male fitting, a female fitting, two SS worm screw hose clamps, and one rubber washer -- in other
words, everything you need except that you’ll need to pitch the simple washer and install a screened washer instead.
This set costs about $5, and the screened washers are perhaps 3 for $1. With a little shopping you can actually find
screened washers in two or three different screen grid sizes; the ones with the biggest holes are suggested -- the fine
ones are really fine. After screwing the two fittings together with this screened washer in the middle, just cut the heater
hose between the engine and the heater valve and install this assembly with the clamps.
Wal-Mart also sells the top quality machined brass items, believe it or not. They offer the male and female fittings
separately.
194
Despite the temptation to use big wrenches on the flats on the machined brass fittings, be careful not to overtighten. It’s
not too difficult to cut right through the rubber outer circumference of the screened washer. After all, the washer was
designed for the fittings to be hand-tightened, so it’s really soft rubber.
Cleaning this filter is easy, since you can easily install the fittings at the very highest point in the system and not even
have to do any draining. Just unscrew the two hose fittings from each other, clean out the screened washer, and
reassemble. In actual practice it often proves easier to loosen the hose clamps and remove the entire assembly for
cleaning than to just unscrew the halves in place.
Will the screen in the line reduce flow to the heater core? Perhaps. Here in FL, we couldn’t care less; any flow at all is
enough, and most of the time we’d rather have less flow. But you guys who live in the less habitable climates might be
concerned about installing this screen. I have this suggestion: Install the screen assembly, and then when winter
approaches unscrew the fittings and replace the screened washer with a normal hose washer. That way, you get
filtration in the summer, full flow in the winter. With any luck at all, the filtration in the summer will take enough of the
crud out of the system that there won’t be any pluggage during the winter.
Such a screen installed in the heater line might actually save your radiator! Since this essentially becomes a “bypass
filter” arrangement, eventually this tiny screen should remove most of the crud circulating around the closed coolant
circuit. The only problem will be the crud that jams tubes in the radiator before ever going through the heater hose, but
if you’re concerned you should be buying the radiator hose filters described above. The other shortcoming is that, since
this screen is so small, it’s likely you’ll have to clean it out a lot of times right after installing it until you get the system
pretty well cleared up.
RADIATOR DRAIN: Up until somewhere around 1988, the XJ-S was fitted with one of the most obnoxiously
overdesigned radiator drain cocks in automotive history: a metal drain valve at the bottom right corner of the radiator,
operated by a lever that extended up to just below the upper hose fitting. Evidently, the image of luxury is supposed to
include being able to drain your coolant while standing erect beside the car in a tuxedo. For all this effort and expense,
Jaguar couldn’t bring themselves to provide an outlet out the bottom of the car, so opening the drain valve causes
coolant to pour all over the structures in the area and dribble out wherever the catch pan isn’t. The end of the valve is a
spherical shape with a funny flange, making it rather difficult to attach a hose, but it’s possible with enough
determination.
Before you get too involved with that drain cock, let me provide a description of what you’re getting into. The drain
cock itself is a solid brass tapered plug valve that turns 90º from full open to full shut. There is a spring on the bottom
that “loads” the tapered plug to keep it sealed; the seal is brass-to-brass, there are no elastomers inside the valve. There
is also a little diamond-shaped washer that fits on a shoulder with two flats that limits motion to 90 degrees. This valve
is probably repairable from most of its typical failure modes, which is an option you may want to keep open; read on
before doing anything irreversible.
Unscrewing the valve from the radiator may be the first irreversible thing you do. It is not a tapered thread; it is sealed
by a fiber washer. But when tightening down, the valve must end up oriented properly to align with the remote handle.
To accomplish this interesting feat, Jaguar appears to have used two tactics: First, the fiber washer may in fact be two
or more fiber washers, indicating the assembler may have added washers as required to get the proper alignment.
Second, the fiber washers are thick and compressible, so there is some considerable range of tightness that will ensure a
seal; the assembler can tighten until it lines up, and leave it. If you take it out, what do you suppose are the odds that it
will line up properly and seal reliably when you reinstall it? Fortunately, the size washer needed is the same as those
used on many oil drain plugs, so you should be able to obtain a good supply of fibre washers of various thicknesses from
local auto supply houses.
If you decide to go ahead and unscrew it, here’s a tip: the hex size is 19/32”, but if you don’t have a wrench that size a
15mm makes a good fit. It may be helpful to unbolt the fan shroud and back it away from the radiator a bit to permit
use of an open-end wrench, since even a crowfoot won’t work well in this space.
Before you reinstall the drain cock, here’s another tip: The hole in the end of the valve is 5/16” to a depth of about a
quarter inch, and then 1/4” the rest of the way through the valve. With a propane torch, it is a fairly simple matter to
195
solder a short length of 5/16” OD brass tubing into the end of the valve to provide something to attach a hose to. The
hose can then be routed out the bottom of the car, making draining the coolant a lot neater and easier to collect and
dispose of properly. Since there are no nonmetallic parts inside the valve, you don’t even need to take it apart to solder
on it, but you almost might as well -- it’s only one cotter pin. Something to keep in mind: the radiator moves around a
little on its rubber mounts, the oil lines move around a little with the engine moving on its rubber mounts, and the front
subframe moves a bit on its rubber mounts. Make sure there is adequate clearance around the valve and attachments so
they aren’t subject to impacts or rubbing due to these various motions.
Let’s say your radiator drain valve is toast and you have decided to replace it. Ed Sowell ordered one from Jaguar:
“Problem is, it is not the same as the original, even though the part number is correct. Apparently Jaguar found a new
source. The valve is different in several ways. In fact, the only similarity is that it is a 1/4" BSNB thread, about the same
length. The plug is held with a nut rather than a spring and cotter pin. The important differences are:

The diameter of the bore is 3/16", whereas the original is 5/16". Slower drain time, but would work. Also, with the
original I can jamb a 5/16" plastic hose barb fitting into the outlet to allow coolant recovery (as opposed to washing
down the front suspension and splashing on the floor). With the 3/16" bore, it appears impossible to attach a hose.

There is a handle instead of the tongue on the stem. Consequently, the extension for above-car operation of the
valve cannot be attached. Very bad. You have to get under the car to operate it, and there appears to be no way to
avoid being drenched when you open it! Could be used, but nobody would want to. Might as well just slash the
lower hose!

Due to the height and length of the handle, it can not be installed in the radiator while it is in the car. No matter
which way I set the handle, it bumps into something, e.g., the sub frame, or the oil cooler line. It might work if it
was screwed in before dropping the radiator into the car.
“I find it hard to believe Jaguar would say this was a replacement for the original. They must be blind.”
So, now you’re in the market for something non-Jaguar to fit that hole. Go ahead and measure the threads; they are
13.16 mm OD and 19 threads/inch. As mentioned above, it is not a tapered pipe thread; it’s a washer-sealed installation
like an oil pan drain plug. Tony Bryant in NZ says this drain fitting is “1/4" BSP (British Standard Pipe). Very common
in this part of the world. Cost me less than $1 for a brass plug. Any competent hydraulic fitting supplier should be able
to find one, or at least a thread adaptor. BSP is extremely common here, but NPT is a lot more difficult, but still
possible.” Well, here in the Bubba Belt in the good ol’ USA, my local hydraulic fitting shop calls it BSPP (British
Standard Pipe - Parallel, as opposed to a tapered version) and charged over $5 for a fitting for connection to a 1/4” hose
-- and only had that one type of fitting on hand to choose from. The hole through the middle is only about 1/8”, so it
would drain very slowly indeed; this fitting was clearly designed for hydraulics, not radiator drains.
The closest thing you’re likely to find in auto parts stores in the US is a 1/4” NPT (tapered), but it will not fit properly -it’s 18 TPI.
Bryant also suggests that the coolant drain plug on the block (note: not the one on the radiator) of many Japanese cars is
BSP, although the tapered version. Still, the tapered plug may be usable to plug the parallel fitting on the XJ-S radiator.
Another option: find a way to use the original valve as a plug. It’s solid brass and very meaty (weighs about five
pounds, I think) so it should be easy to work with. One possibility is to cut the valve portion off, just leaving the hex
and threads, so it looks like a plug except it has a 1/4” hole through the middle. So, you can put a stainless steel or brass
bolt through the middle and tighten a nut down on the other end, and use the assembly as a conventional plug -- just
remove the whole thing when you want to drain the coolant. If you wanna get fancier, you can tap the hole in the center
for a threaded plug instead of using a bolt.
Of course, using a simple threaded plug as a radiator drain is messy. For neater work, you can solder a piece of brass
tubing into the hole in the plug, connect a piece of hose to it, route the hose out the bottom of the car, and plug the end
of the hose with something. Then when you want to drain the coolant, you don’t even need to open the hood -- just
reach underneath and remove the plug from the end of the hose. You can stick with the 1/4” hole in the plug, but it
might be a better idea to enlarge the hole to 5/16” and use larger tubing and hose; it’ll drain quicker and larger chunks of
crud can pass through.
196
A similar idea might be to drill and tap the hex portion and screw in a common fitting. It’s too small to fit a 1/4” NPT
fitting, but a 1/8” NPT will fit nicely. One might think that draining through a 1/8” NPT fitting would take forever, but
believe it or not you can find fittings with 1/8” NPT on the outside and a clear hole through the middle that’s larger than
1/4”! One such fitting is made by Brass-Tite!, part number 43275, and has a 1/8” male NPT on one end and a 3/8” hose
fitting on the other; it is perfect for this task.
Yet another option would be to make the piece of the original valve into an adapter to fit a standard drain cock. This
would involve drilling and tapping for the threads of whatever drain cock you buy. Most of the universal ones seem to
fit a 1/4” NPT, but you’ll need to choose a smaller drain cock with a 1/8” NPT. You also need to choose your drain
cock carefully, since many of them have a moving plug at the inner end that would require more space inside the hole
than you’ll be able to provide within that chunk of the original valve.
If you have the radiator out, you can get more radical: toss the original drain cock in the trash and drill out the threads in
the boss on the radiator and retap it for something readily available. The fitting on the radiator appears to be pretty
meaty, so it could be drilled and tapped for something considerably larger than the stock drain cock.
WHAT RADIATOR DRAIN? Somewhere around 1988 -- possibly coinciding with the introduction of long-life
phosphate-free coolant -- Jaguar went from the overdesigned drain cock to no drain cock at all. On later cars, it is
necessary to disconnect the lower radiator hose to drain the coolant. Wearing a tux is not recommended. In fact, this
author once suggested to an owner that he do this task au naturel, and just jump in the shower afterwards.
Joe Montgomery suggests another way to get most of the coolant out of later cars: “Having seen at the local shop the
way coolant goes everywhere when the bottom radiator hose is pulled and since the storm drain that would collect it is a
straight shoot to the bay, I found a better way. I got about 2 feet of 1/4" copper tube and 4 feet of plastic tube that
would fit over the end from Home Depot. By inserting the copper tube through the bleed hole on the right hand side of
the radiator I was able to syphon better than 3 1/2 gallons into a bucket for recycling.”
Another suggestion: if you can locate a suitable tee, you can cut the bottom radiator hose and install the tee with two
hose clamps and use the tee to drain the coolant. There is a similar tee used for adding a coolant heater in subfreezing
climates; perhaps that tee could be used.
Something to note: the lower radiator hose does not connect to the bottom of the radiator in an XJ-S. It’s perhaps four
inches from the bottom at the left side. So, if the only way to drain and flush the coolant is by disconnecting this hose,
you will never get the junk outta the bottom four inches of the radiator! And the connection is on the downstream side;
anything larger than the tiny passages in the radiator core will pile up on the upstream side indefinitely. Hence, if you
have the radiator out for service, you might consider having a drain fitting added at the bottom right corner.
RADIATOR REMOVAL: Both the official Jaguar manual and the Haynes manual state that removing the radiator
requires discharging the air conditioner freon circuit. They lie. In fact, as Jim Isbell reports, “In the Haynes manual
there are 21 steps under section #21 that describe the removal. Steps 1, 3, 5, 9, 10, and 11 are all unnecessary.” Most
are merely extra work, but discharging the freon is a waste of serious money.
Both manuals also provide the same illustration which shows the radiator sitting on top of the oil cooler. This may be
the case for cars that weren’t equipped with air conditioning, but for the rest of us the oil cooler is in front of the
radiator, and the A/C condenser is on top of it.
Forget the manuals and just dive in. The radiator comes out vertically upward, leaving the A/C condenser and oil cooler
in place. Drain the coolant and disconnect the hoses, remove the air purge system tubing from the top of the rail over
the radiator, unbolt the A/C dryer from the rail and leave it hanging, unbolt the fan shroud, and remove the rail. Either
remove the hood, or simply remove the grille, disconnect the struts, and tilt it forward until it rests on the bumper.
Disconnect the hoses from the transmission cooler and the wire from the coolant level sensor (early models only) and
whatever other little things are hanging on, and pull the radiator out straight up.
Now, if you have an early model such as Bernard Embden’s ’78, things are a bit more difficult. “The radiator has two
197
brackets welded to the bottom. The oil cooler is bolted to these brackets. To remove the radiator the oil cooler lines
must be disconnected and the radiator and oil cooler removed as one unit. Once removed, the oil cooler can be unbolted
from the radiator brackets.”
Embden recommends changing things while you’re in there. “Why does the damn oil cooler have to be bolted to the
radiator? After removing the radiator I decided I was not going thru this again. I went over to the radiator and sawed
off the two tits (sorry, "oil mounting brackets") that the oil cooler bolts to. Now properly motivated, I fabbed two
brackets out of 1/2 inch wide, 1/8 thick flat iron available at any hardware store. I offset the brackets (wider). Made
two 1-1/4 inch straps. Bolted one end to the oil cooler mounting bracket, the other to the brackets that I fabbed up.
This was so the brackets would fit below the still existing part of the bracket that remains on the bottom of the radiator.
(I was concerned about clearance). Two bolts per side, drilled the holes thru the boxed lower radiator support.
Brackets had to be angled slightly (hammer took care of that). Now the oil cooler and A/C condenser sit where they
should be with the radiator out.”
RADIATOR WORK CHECKLIST: If you have to pull the radiator out for any reason, you should take advantage of
the opportunity to do all of the following:
1)
Rod, recore, or replace the radiator.
1a)
Consider converting to a single-pass system; see below.
1b)
If the coolant level sensor is located in the radiator, have the radiator shop plug the hole and relocate
the sensor to the header tank -- see page 207.
2)
Clean fins of A/C condensor and oil cooler.
3)
Consider revision of radiator drain scheme -- see page 195.
4)
Revise air bleed banjo fitting -- see page 187.
5)
Install foam in all undesirable air paths -- see page 226.
6)
Install coolant filters -- see page 190.
You might also consider the opportunity to replace the front oil seal on the engine or to check that the bolt holding the
crank damper on is properly torqued (page 90).
IMPROVING THE ONE-AND-A-HALF-PASS RADIATOR SCHEME: As mentioned in the cooling system
description beginning on page 173, the OEM radiator in the XJ-S will result in the left bank running warmer than the
right. If you’d like both banks running at the same temperature, it will be necessary to revise the system so that both
thermostat outlets see the same backpressure. Perhaps the simplest and most straightforward method to accomplish this
would be to increase the backpressure on the right side thermostat outlet. Performance outfits like Summit Racing
(page 720) offer flow restrictors for cooling systems, but their intentions are different and the parts may be difficult to
adapt to the Jaguar V12. Perhaps the better tactic would be to simply adopt the idea, and provide a simple orifice in the
upper right radiator hose or radiator inlet. We have no idea what size the orifice should be, unfortunately; if someone
wants to take the effort to install pressure taps and experiment, the orifice should be just the right size that the pressure
at both thermostat outlets is exactly the same -- but even with that criteria, the desired orifice size may vary with radiator
condition and possibly even engine RPM.
This author installed a 1/2” stainless steel washer in the right side radiator hose as an orifice. The OD of a standard 1/2”
flat washer proved to be exactly the same as the OD of a 1-1/4” Gano filter (see page 190), so a couple of tiny holes
were drilled in the edge of the washer and it was screwed to the inlet end of the Gano filter with the existing screws that
hold the Gano filter together. The ID of the 1/2” washer is 14mm. The car ran fine and stayed cool, as evidenced by the
gauge sender in the right side thermostat housing; thus we can conclude that a 14mm orifice is large enough, although
we really cannot decide if it is small enough without measuring the effect on the left bank temperature.
198
Note that the installation of such an orifice doesn’t merely make the cooling of the right bank as bad as the left. It
actually improves the cooling of the left bank. It accomplishes this by increasing the pressure loss in the right bank,
which reduces the pressure in the right side end tank on the radiator. Since the flow through the upper 1/3 of the
radiator is a function of the pressure difference between the left side inlet and the right side end tank, lowering the
pressure in the right side end tank will increase the flow in the upper 1/3 of the radiator -- and hence in the left bank.
ELIMINATING THE ONE-AND-A-HALF-PASS RADIATOR SCHEME -- HOME VERSION: The optimum fix for
the XJ-S cooling system would be to eliminate the one-and-a-half-pass scheme altogether and plumb this cooling system
the way Jaguar should have in the first place. If you’re handy with a propane torch or have a radiator shop willing to do
some fiddling, you may be able to modify the OEM radiator to make it a single-pass. You will need to remove and cap
the upper left inlet, and install a second inlet on the right side header tank just under the existing inlet. Remove and
throw out that hokey radiator drain lever if your car has it (see page 195 for ideas on the radiator drain). Also, you need
to make the left end of the radiator into a single tank the full height of the core. The radiator on this author’s car has a
single left end tank with a partition hidden inside, so you can remove the tank, remove the partition dividing the upper
1/3 from the lower 2/3, and reinstall the tank. Other owners have reported their radiators have two distinct tanks, an
upper 1/3 and a lower 2/3. This latter type would obviously require more effort to convert into a single left side tank,
such as perhaps adding a pipe between the two. Once you’ve got the radiator converted to a single-pass, see the
plumbing issues below.
A testimonial from Joe Bialy: “With two electric fans and the original two pass scheme, the fans would run for a long
time after shutdown. Sometimes cycling on and off a few times too. With my one pass scheme, only one fan runs for a
minute or two after shutdown, never cycling on and off afterwards. This car absolutely runs cool as can be now, far and
away the best it's ever been.
“Yank the radiator, slice out the baffle, solder it back up, buy a couple of 1'' copper fittings and two radiator hoses, put it
all back together and fergettaboutit. This will be your best weekend investment under the hood ever and it'll only set
you back $50 or so.”
Alternatively, you can convert to a single-pass system without modifying the radiator at all -- or even removing it from
the car! Rather than removing the partition in the left tank, simply install a tee in the lower radiator hose and route a
hose from the left inlet (which will now be a secondary outlet) down to it. Tee the two thermostat outlets together and
feed them into the single 1-1/4” inlet on the right side; this inlet has been proven large enough to handle all the flow.
ELIMINATING THE ONE-AND-A-HALF-PASS SCHEME -- AFTERMARKET VERSION: The simplest way to
fix the OEM cooling scheme would be to replace the one-and-a-half-pass radiator with a suitable single-pass radiator
from some other application. It just so happens that one application springs to mind: the Jaguars that are converted to
Chevy power. Chevy engines have only one thermostat outlet, so it makes no sense to try to use that one-and-a-half
pass radiator with it. Besides, that would result in the Chevy overheating as readily as the V12 did! So, as one might
expect, the outfits that offer Chevy conversion kits are a good place to go looking for a bolt-in single-pass radiator for
the XJ-S. John’s Cars (page 717) offers two such radiators, one intended for use with a small-block Chevy and a
“super-duty” intended for use with a big block Chevy. Either one has plenty of capacity for a Jaguar V12. Both are
quite reasonably priced -- meaning they are considerably cheaper than a new Jaguar radiator. John’s Cars uses exactly
the same radiators for either the XJ-S or the Series I/II/III XJ6/12 saloons, all years, indicating that the profusion of part
numbers in the Jaguar parts books all involve minor detail distinctions.
Note that John’s Cars may also offer radiators -- both regular and “super-duty” -- intended to be used with the Jaguar
V12 engine, meaning they have the same 1-1/2-pass arrangement as the OEM radiator. You do not want one of these.
Make it very clear that you want a radiator intended for use with a Chevy engine.
Another application also comes to mind: the Jaguars with 6-cyl engines. The 6-cyl Jaguars, whether they be XK, AJ6,
or AJ16 engines, all use single-pass radiators. The radiator from a 6-cyl XJ-S is one obvious possibility, while a radiator
from a pre-1988 XJ6 should also fit.
199
The only question mark is whether or not the 6-cyl radiator has enough capacity to keep a V12 cool -- and that’s a
serious question mark. The 6-cyl engines are a bit smaller and a bit less powerful than the V12, so in theory Jaguar
could get by making their radiators with fewer rows or fewer fins or whatever. On the other hand, perhaps Jaguar just
used the same cores for both type radiators and the only differences are in the end tanks and hose connections. Only
someone who had both radiators in hand could tell whether the 6-cyl rad is lighter duty or whether it has comparable
capacity to the V12 rad, and so far I have not gotten any reports.
Another idea would be to buy (or make) a single-pass radiator designed specifically for use in the V12 Jaguar
XJ-S/XJ12. Chad Bolles and Bradley Smith have both blazed this trail, and their costs for a custom-made aluminum
single-pass radiator actually compare favorably with buying a new OEM radiator from Jaguar!
Bolles and Smith had to discuss the radiator design at length with the people building it for them -- but you don’t have
to! Be Cool now offers aluminum radiators to fit the XJ-S; they are still “custom” in that they are designed specifically
for the XJ-S and they are not actually made until you order one, but they already have the design on record -- you just
order the part number of the radiator you need. Be Cool actually offers four part numbers, all of which end in 082
which is apparently Be Cool’s indication that it fits an XJ-S. 62082 is the radiator that most XJ-S owners will need; it is
a bare aluminum radiator for an XJ-S with an automatic transmission. 63082 is the same radiator, except that the
aluminum is polished (Be Cool caters to the show car crowd, so all of their radiators are available with a polished finish).
60082 is a radiator for a manual transmission car, lacking the transmission cooler and therefore a few bucks cheaper.
61082 is the manual transmission radiator in polished form. All of these are single-pass radiators with a single large inlet
at the top right, since Be Cool would have nothing to do with that silly one-and-a-half-pass idea.
I know what you’re thinking: “The Jaguar parts books indicate that many different radiators were used over the years.
Which one does the Be Cool radiator replace?” The answer: all of them. To illustrate, the following are the differences
in the Jaguar OEM radiators:

The very early cars had the oil cooler supported by the radiator. However, this is a really horrible arrangement to
work on, and most owners who get in there find a way to convert the oil cooler mounting scheme to be more like
the later cars; see page 197.

The low coolant sensor was installed in the right front corner of the radiator up until sometime in the mid-80’s, then
was relocated to the header tank. Regardless of where yours presently is, it would be a good idea to relocate it to
the header tank; see page 207.

Up until the mid-80’s, the transmission cooler had barbs protruding from the back side of the right header tank and
the lines from the transmission were connected by sliding the hoses over the barbs and clamping. Later cars had
threaded holes, and pipe thread fittings on the ends of the transmission lines were screwed in. The Be Cool
radiators for automatic transmission cars come with threaded holes, which allows the owner of an older car with
hoses and clamps two options: he can screw standard fittings into the holes and connect up the hoses with clamps,
or he can replace his lines with the later lines with threaded fittings at the ends.

Sometime in the late 80’s, Jaguar eliminated the hokey drain cock and provided no drain at all! Be Cool took an
interesting approach here; they provide a drain scheme based on the early radiators, complete with the cute little
lever -- but they also provide a rationally-designed drain on the left end of the radiator.
It’s probably possible to fit the Be Cool radiator to an XJ12, but that hasn’t been confirmed.
Finally, note that there were apparently radiators with either three-, four- or five-row cores, and owners get very
concerned about how many rows they end up with when recoring or replacing a radiator. Well, the Be Cool radiator is
two-row -- but that only illustrates the shortcomings of this method of specifying a radiator. With brass radiators, each
tube is perhaps a half inch wide by 1/8” thick, so a core that is two inches deep can fit four rows. However, Be Cool
uses tubes that are a full inch wide and also a bit thicker than 1/8”, so two rows provides at least as much surface area as
four rows of the tiny brass tubes. Also, the brass tubes are so tiny and flat that you’d be lucky to fit a fingernail file into
one, but the aluminum tubes have much larger passages so they are far more difficult to plug up.
Be Cool guarantees a 20-40º temperature drop over 4-5 row brass radiators. Just how you’d ever make such an
evaluation is uncertain, but at least they appear willing to stand behind their product. By their estimation, this radiator
200
should be good for up to 600 cubic inches and 1000 hp.
As of this writing, Be Cool reportedly does not offer any help in connecting the two 1-1/4” thermostat outlets into a
single radiator inlet; apparently you are on your own there, although it wouldn’t be a great surprise if they start making a
suitable accessory. See below for ideas on making a tee.
Be Cool’s web site is at http://www.becool.com. Their products can be ordered through Summit Racing, page 720.
A few other comments about aluminum radiators: Aluminum conducts heat better than brass, although the walls of the
aluminum tubes are thicker than the walls of brass tubes which negates some of that advantage. Brass radiators are
soldered together, though, and solder doesn’t conduct heat well at all. Aluminum radiators are welded together, so they
are all-aluminum (the mass-production aluminum radiators on some cars have plastic end tanks, but that’s not important
here).
Some people also value the fact that an aluminum radiator weighs less than a brass radiator, but to make a fair
comparison one would have to consider the volume of coolant inside as well as the weight of all the attachments and
fittings involved; for most of us, this concern is not foremost in our minds at this point anyway.
Finally, note that an aluminum radiator apparently cannot be rodded or recored, so if you don’t keep your cooling
system clear of obstructions the next cleanout will involve replacing the radiator again.
The author will take this opportunity to express an opinion: it may not be worthwhile to run right out and purchase a
single-pass radiator to replace a good condition OEM radiator, but if the original radiator is done for, anyone paying
Jaguar prices for a new OEM radiator when new single-pass radiators are available for the same money or less ought to
have his head examined. The annual sales of new OEM Jaguar radiators should be zero.
ELIMINATING THE ONE-AND-A-HALF-PASS SCHEME -- PLUMBING: Whichever single-pass radiator you
choose, you will need to plumb it up. Obviously, you need to route the outlets from both thermostat housings over to
the same side of the car. A simple pipe or hose supported along the back edge of the upper radiator support is one idea.
If your single-pass radiator has two 1-1/4” inlets, one right over the other, you simply need to route one hose from each
thermostat outlet to them. When plumbing the two inlets, take care not to create air pockets; having the coolant going
downhill to enter the radiator might trap air in the hose. It will probably work best to connect the nearest thermostat
outlet to the lower of the two inlets. If you cannot devise a routing that will push air bubbles on into the radiator inlets,
you will need to provide an air bleed port at the high point where a bubble might get hung up.
It’s more likely your single-pass radiator will have one larger inlet rather than two 1-1/4” inlets. Hence, you will need to
tee your two upper radiator hoses together. One idea would be to have a weld shop make up an aluminum tee. Another
idea would be to make a tee out of brass or copper pipe fittings. And yet another idea is to just have a local radiator
shop slap together a tee out of standard brass radiator fittings. Byrnal Haley did this: “All good rad shops stock inlet
and outlet pipes for rad repair. I drew a diagram of what I needed and the rad guy fabricated it from stock parts. You
just need to tell him which size pipes to use.” The result simply couldn’t have been prettier. You can take a look at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/SinglePassRadiator.html
An improvement on a tee would be to make it a wye for better flow characteristics. Another idea would be to actually
make a manifold that reaches across the engine compartment, so you only need short pieces of hose to connect it up.
And yet another idea would be to create a tank or container of some sort with two 1-1/4” lines in and one larger line out;
a photo of a racing XJ-S in the May 2000 issue of Jaguar World shows such a tank, and it has a radiator cap on top -and the radiator cap on the crossover pipe has been omitted.
Coolant filters are still recommended with a single-pass setup, but you now have the choice of one or two filters. Two
filters, one connected to each thermostat outlet, has an advantage in diagnostics in that you can tell what crud came from
which bank. Also, you may use the coolant filters as couplings to connect radiator hoses together to accomplish the
routing required for this job. But using two filters also has the disadvantage that the B bank filter could get plugged
without the temperature gauge sender in the A bank telling you about it. Hence, it’s better to go with a single coolant
filter plumbed in after the two lines are teed together if possible.
201
If you are using Gano filters, it’s suggested that you either use two or use one that’s 1-1/2” or larger and step the hose
sizes up to meet it; a single 1-1/4” Gano would probably be too restrictive for the total coolant flow of this engine. This
isn’t an issue with the Tefba filters, though, since the filter elements are the same size, it’s only the connections that vary.
If the new radiator’s bottom outlet isn’t in exactly the same place as it was on the OEM radiator, you’ll need to abandon
the OEM molded bottom hose in favor of a flex hose -- which is a better hose anyway.
You’ll probably need to revise the air purge system across the top of the radiator. If the flow in your new single pass
radiator is left-to-right, it can stay pretty much unchanged, but if the flow is right-to-left you’ll probably want to reverse
it and put the banjo fitting at the top left and the air bleed plug or valve at the top right. Simply exchange the banjo
fitting with the air bleed port. You can cut the long metal tube and reconnect it with a piece of 1/4” hose and a pair of
EFI clamps, making it a lot shorter than it was. You will also need to figure out how to route the connection from under
the center radiator cap over to this location. It may be possible to cut the tube near the tee at the left side and flip the
whole thing over and reinstall it, putting the banjo fitting at the left but leaving the long tube going across the top of the
support rail and connecting to the hose from under the radiator cap in nearly its original position. The short tube that
originally connected the hose from under the radiator cap to the banjo fitting can now be used to connect the banjo
fitting back to the tee at the left side with a short piece of hose.
If you get rid of the one-and-a-half-pass scheme, you can forget about relocating the coolant temperature sensors as
described on page 176. The only reasons to do that were due to the differential cooling, which you will have eliminated.
Of course, if you’ve already done it, you can leave it alone; for similar reasons, there’s no point in changing it back.
ELIMINATING THE ONE-AND-A-HALF-PASS SCHEME -- OTHER IDEAS: Another option would be to replace
the one-and-a-half-pass sideflow radiator with a simple custom-made downflow radiator. This would result in an upper
header tank all the way across, so the two inlets could be right where they are. The bottom outlet would probably have
to change; it’d add complexity to try to get the outlet several inches up the left side where the OEM outlet is. It’d
probably be easier and better to just provide an outlet at the bottom and use a generic flex hose to connect it to the pump
inlet. Flex hoses are usually better in this location anyway.
Believe it or not, the Series III E-Type used a downflow radiator exactly as described. It’s not known why Jaguar
decided to cause all sorts of trouble by providing the XJ’s with the one-and-a-half-pass sideflow radiator instead.
RADIATOR MOUNT BUSHINGS: The radiator is mounted on four rubber bushings, two at the bottom (C43577) and
two at the top (C38333). If you wish, you may replace these by visiting your local discount auto parts store and looking
through the selection of PCV valve grommets that are usually on a display rack in bubble packs. There is one intended
for a Toyota that will serve quite nicely in both positions. It doesn’t have as large a weight-bearing surface as the Jaguar
originals, but it’s not made of British rubber either.
By the way, there are several possible explanations for why the radiator is mounted on rubber bushings, including to
allow for thermal expansion and to protect the fragile radiator from chassis flex and vibration. However, one plausible
explanation is that it is to electrically isolate the radiator from chassis ground. Since the radiator is largely brass or
copper while the engine block is aluminum, and the engine must be grounded, grounding the radiator would complete a
circuit through the coolant causing electrolytic corrosion somewhere -- probably inside the block! Several owners have
checked and confirmed that their radiators are not grounded; the rubber mounts, the rubber hoses, the foam packing, the
fact that the fan shrouds are bolted to the rail instead of the radiator itself, all add up to complete electrical isolation.
Unfortunately, the heater core -- also brass -- is quite effectively grounded.
RADIATOR OBSTRUCTIONS: One possible cause of overheating problems is that the outside of the coil or the
spaces between the fins has been plugged with crud so air can’t flow through. Since the fins in the A/C condenser coil
and the oil cooler are coarse but the fins in the radiator itself are much finer, the blockage may be dirt jammed in the
radiator fins while the condenser and oil cooler still look clean. One great way to avoid this problem would be to spray a
garden hose through the radiator from the engine compartment forwards every time the car is washed to prevent any
202
buildup. Unfortunately, the design of the fan shrouds and the tightness of the engine compartment conspire to make this
task all but impossible, so more likely it’s going to have to be addressed by a periodic disassembly and service.
Worse yet, Jaguar does a poor job plugging the gaps around the condenser and oil cooler, so really big things like leaves
get blown through the gaps and into the space between the condenser and radiator (see page 226). The result is often a
massive collection of debris between the condenser and the radiator, where it’s really miserable to get to.
John Bertsche provides a procedure: “Well, I really didn't feel like pulling the radiator this weekend. I came up with an
alternate plan, which may or may not be useful to those of you with my problem.
1)
Put the front of the car on ramps. Take off the spoiler, if you're lucky enough to have one. Take out the lower
splash panel/lower center valence, or whatever you prefer to call it, if it hasn't rotted into swiss cheese from all
the wet leaves that have collected between it and the oil cooler after all these years.
2)
After liberal use of Liquid Wrench, use your sturdiest pair of vice grips to loosen the two large Phillips-head
screws holding the oil cooler to the brackets attached to the frame. Once they're loose, you can try using an
actual Phillips-head screwdriver to take them all the way out. (Ed. note: they’re not Phillips, they’re Pozidriv -and using the correct tool may eliminate the need for the vice grips.)
3)
Carefully pry (on the brackets, please, not the cooling fins!) the oil cooler away from the radiator just enough
(about 1/4 inch) to get a straight piece of coat-hanger wire (a foot long or so) up in between the oil cooler and
the radiator, and gently gently use the coat hanger wire to brush the debris out of the space. If your car is like
mine, it will look like the tobacco inside a cigarette (about a carton's worth).
4)
Use a blower, like your shop-vac, to blow forward through the radiator (like back-flushing the air flow) to
loosen any crud that's trapped in the radiator fins. You can hold the oil cooler away from the radiator a little bit
while you're doing this with sticks or whatever (again, levering only against brackets, not cooling fins!). You'll
be surprised at the amount of junk that flies out. Thousands of insect wings, bits of leaves, styrofoam, paper,
etc.
5)
There's quite a bit of space between the A/C condenser and the radiator, but virtually none between the oil
cooler and the radiator (at least on my car). So, as you clean out the bottom section, the debris from up above
will fall down into the gap you're creating. Make sure you alternate between using the blower and the coat
hanger a few times to get everything cleared out.
6)
Put it back together and take the car out for a beer. You should notice a big improvement in cooling. I
estimate my radiator was about 30-35% blocked.
“I'm pretty sure this took longer to write than it did to do (except for step 6). It may be worth a try (easy fixes first!)”
Instead of the coat hanger wire, Paul Gill says, “A plastic mini-blind slat is great for this.”
Matt Dillon suggests another method: “Take the top holder off of the radiator so that you can spread it apart from the
A/C condenser and clean out the junk that's in between them. I found a whole boatload of stuff in there.” Removing the
upper rail requires removing the air purge tubing, which in turn requires draining a little of the coolant. Think of it as an
opportunity to modify the banjo fitting on the air purge system (see page 187) and install foam to prevent it getting
plugged again (see page 226).
Before you decide that you’re done, try to shine a light through the radiator. You might try laying a piece of paper on
one side and see how much light shines on the paper. The task may still require a mirror and/or a tiny, bright light on the
end of a long, bendable wire, or maybe you can shine enough light through the condenser and oil cooler. If you still
can’t get the enough of the crud out to see light everywhere, it may be necessary to drain all the coolant and pull the
radiator out to clean the fins themselves. Think of this as an opportunity to have the radiator rodded (see page 189) and
to revise the drain scheme (see page 195).
PREVENTING RADIATOR OBSTRUCTIONS: Colleen Melton suggests you install a screen in front of your
condenser/oil cooler to keep crud from plugging things up. “A simple piece of fiberglass window screen (darker color
203
such as charcoal or black look less obtrusive) run in front of the heat exchangers works great at keeping leaves, bugs,
etc., from clogging up the works. My car has such a screen installed, we've done it on all our vehicles for quite a few
years. Ours is secured at the top by clamping under the A/C drier clamps, and at the bottom by pinching between the
panel below the lower grille and the radiator lower support. Cost is next to nothing and we have more time to work on
other things, rather than cleaning out crud to prevent the dreaded overtemp blues.”
Of course, you could just opt for one of those bug screens that wraps around the nose of the car and clips onto the front
wheel wells.
HEADER TANK: The header tank is susceptible to rust perforation. The good news is that the later and cheaper tank
fits better. The filler is curved to clear the air cleaner that is set forward to clear the ABS unit. The newer tank is about
half the price of the older one and has studs instead of bolts to mount it.
Unfortunately, it is still made of steel, which means it will eventually rust through again and the rust flakes will plug up
your radiator. Better idea: Call Cathouse Spares in Sydney, Australia (page 693) and order their stainless steel version.
This is one example where an international phone call and overseas shipping are definitely worthwhile.
Mike Morrin went another route: “I could not find a supplier of pre-H.E. expansion tanks. So I eventually had a local
radiator shop make me one in brass, using the original fittings and brackets. He quoted (and I paid) US$130, but I think
he lost money on it because of the labour involved.”
As Morrin notes, there are minor variations between header tanks. Most notably, the pre-H.E. has a fitting on the
bottom for teeing into the line from the heater core to the radiator outlet, while the later cars have a upward-angled
fitting at the bottom front corner for connecting to a fitting on the later crossover pipe right at the suction side of the
pump. If you obtain the later type header tank, you can fit it to the earlier car by simply installing a generic tee in the
heater hose and running a hose from the upward-angled fitting to it -- or you could spring for a new crossover pipe at
the same time (also in SS from Cathouse Spares) and hook it up as in the later cars.
On later models, the coolant level sensor was located in the header tank instead of the earlier location at the front right
corner of the radiator. If your new header tank doesn’t have a hole for the sensor, drill one about 3” up from the
bottom. If your car has the sensor in the old location in the radiator, relocate it. If you can’t get around to doing the job
properly just now, buy a new sensor and grommet and install them in the header tank and leave the old sensor where it
is. Sooner or later, you’ll probably have the radiator out for rodding and you can have the original sensor location
sealed up at that time.
THERMOSTATS: The early OEM thermostats had “jiggle pins”, a pin with a rubber ball on one end, loosely retained
in a hole in the flange. They are supposed to be installed with the jiggle pins on the top side. These probably aid in
either letting the air out while you’re filling the system with coolant, or helping the air find its own way out during
operation. Clearly, they’re supposed to do more than provide a small leak; a hole would do that. The jiggle pins
evidently act as a sort of check valve, allowing fluid or air through one way but sealing tight the other way. Mike
Morrin provides a theory: “I always thought the jiggle pins were designed such that with the engine stopped, and no
pressure differential across the (closed) thermostat, any air on the engine side of the thermostat could bleed out to the
radiator, but with the engine running the pressure differential would push the pin (or ball) into the hole, blocking any
flow of water until correct temperature is reached.”
It has also been suggested that the pin, jiggling around in the hole, prevents the hole from being obstructed by a small air
bubble. Or that the ball, being much heavier than air but only marginally heavier than water, will reliably fall open when
surrounded by air but can be held shut by the slightest pressure differential when surrounded by water.
Morrin points out that the design got upgraded along the line: “I recently bought a pair of 88 degree thermostats for my
1986 V12 and they are Waxstats and came in genuine Jaguar packaging. The jiggle pin has however been replaced with
a ball in a cage.” Same thing only different, either design will work. Some aftermarket thermostats reportedly also
feature this caged ball (no aftermarket thermostat apparently ever featured the jiggle pin). Jaguar isn’t the only
manufacturer to specify such features in their thermostats; you can find caged balls in several different thermostats on the
204
rack in the auto parts stores these days.
Try not to buy thermostats without jiggle pins or air bleed valves. If you tell the parts clerk the model year of your car
and he returns with thermostats without such features, try giving him a later model year -- say, 1991. The design of the
cooling system didn’t change, but for some reason some of the computer listings in the parts stores list thermostats
without air bleed valves for early cars and with air bleed valves for later cars. If you must buy aftermarket thermostats
that have no wiggle pins, drill a 1/8” hole in the flange; the small leak might keep the engine from warming up quite as
fast, but at least it won’t drop valve seats due to air pockets. Michael Bucklew suggests “a small cotter pin can be
used.”
The Jag V12 also requires thermostats that have a post on the bottom with a spring-loaded disk for closing the bypass
passage when the thermostat is open. Believe it or not, there are aftermarket thermostats purportedly intended for this
car that don’t have these attachments. Do not buy any such thermostats. There are acceptable aftermarket thermostats
available; if you don’t find them at first, try another store.
NOTE: Don’t operate this engine without thermostats. The thermostats must be in place to prevent the coolant from
taking a short circuit and bypassing the radiator. Incidentally, it’s not really a good idea to operate any liquid-cooled
engine without a thermostat.
If you’re in the market for thermostats, make sure to check the computer or applications listing to get the correct type
for the Jaguar; don’t just pick up something that looks right. Julian Mullaney says, “First time around went to Pep boys
and got some new t'stats that looked exactly like the originals. It wasn't until after putting them in water and looking at
the amount of travel they open and the amount of spring compliance on the back close-off disc that I noticed they were
different. They look identical, but they move differently. This is real important because that disc has to close off the
crossover pipe properly. Went back and got some other t'stats that looked the same but had the right amount of travel.
You can check it by taking it out of the package and just forcing it thru the motions to check travel length, etc.”
This is not to say they must look identical to the originals. Bob Gallivan: “Just received a set of 88 deg C t-stats
(Calorstat made by Vernet in France). These appear to be different than the 88 deg t-stats I replaced last year (Waxstat).
1:
the vernet came with rubber ring gaskets that fits the outer edge of the disk.
2:
overall length:
Vernet is 51 mm.
Waxstat is ~49.55 mm.
3:
the valve (?) width
Vernet is ~23.25 mm
Waxstat ~17.8mm”
THERMOSTAT TEMPERATURES: The bulbs in thermostats work by taking advantage of the step increase in
volume that accompanies a phase change, in this case when wax melts. Before the wax begins to melt, there is little
plunger movement. As the wax melts, the volume of the wax increases, pushing the plunger out of the bulb and opening
the poppet. Once the wax is completely melted, the plunger stops moving. The temperature at which the plunger
moves is a function of the specific compound of wax used. The small changes in volume with changing temperature
when the wax is entirely solid or liquid are insignificant, and since the bulb itself is changing volume at a comparable
rate, they may not move the plunger at all.
The proper way to mark a thermostat is to indicate its “control range”, the temperature at which it cracks open and the
temperature at which it is fully open -- which, on the Jaguar V12 thermostats, is the point at which the bypass port is
fully closed. However, the thermostat manufacturers generally don’t do this; thermostats are commonly rated with a
single temperature, with no indication whether this indicates the crack-open temperature, the fully-open temperature, or
some temperature in between. The Jaguar literature (including the Haynes manual) does, however, specify “opening”
and “fully open” temperatures for thermostats -- leaving the owner trying to figure out which thermostat in the store
205
corresponds to the specs. The general consensus seems to be that the “early cars” were originally fitted with 180°F
(82°C) thermostats, while the “later cars” were fitted with 190°F (88°C) thermostats. The change may have coincided
with the introduction of the H.E., but it may have changed at different times between North America and other markets.
The ambiguity in the rating scheme seems to allow for some funny stuff, though. The Robertshaw thermostats offered
by Discount Auto Parts are available in 160°F (71°C), 180°F (82°C), or 195°F (91°C) ratings; their computer describes
the 195°F items as being “closest to OEM specification”, and these are the ones generally kept in stock. Peter Cohen
says, “195°F is the standard opening temp for American cars nowadays. Those responsible for spec-ing products at
certain manufacturers are probably just going on automatic pilot.” More likely, they’re just making thermostats for the
Jag using the same wax bulb used on their products for other cars rather than having to make a separate line of wax
bulbs. Cohen continues: “Beck-Arnley, Motorcraft, and Motorad list 192 degree thermostats.” Perhaps the same idea,
except these companies chose to split the difference between 190°F and 195°F for their wax bulbs!
James Teston says, “F.Y.I: A '92 has as standard (owners manual) 90°C (194°F) but you can get up to 205°F 'stats for
this year. There are no listings this high for the '83.” I just love it when application listings give totally different data for
an ’83 than a ’92, ignorant of the fact that the engine is totally unchanged.
You can apparently forget about relying on the thermostat manufacturer’s qualitative description of the temperature
rating. A review of the offerings of several companies’ 180°F thermostats revealed that many of them described this as
“standard temperature” or “O.E.” (which it is neither for most XJ-S’s), a few described it as “medium temperature”,
while a great many described it as “high temperature” -- an interesting outlook, since it is the coldest thermostat that
should ever be considered for this engine.
There is really little functional difference between 180°F (82°C), 190°F (88°C), 192°F(89°C), and 195°F (91°C)
thermostats, although as noted on page 175 they will result in different gauge readings when the cooling system is
working properly. In theory, the warmer thermostats should provide better fuel economy, and those who live where it
snows report they will make the heater work quite a bit better.
There are also 160°F (71°C), 165°F (74°C), and 170°F (77°C) thermostats available, generally described by the
manufacturers as “low temp”. None of these should be used in the Jaguar V12. They certainly won’t help anything in
any car, but in this case they might actually cause problems; they may cause the engine to run cold enough that the EFI
system is working on an enriched part of the fuelling map that it was never intended to use continuously, and you may
get bad fuel economy, low power, spark plug foulling, etc. If it gets too far onto the cold fuelling map, it may actually
run rich enough for excess fuel to rinse the oil off the cylinder walls, greatly reducing the engine life. Also note that the
AAV (page 265) won’t fully close until 80°C, so you may also get an inconsistent idle trying to run colder.
The fact that the EFI coolant temp sensor and the AAV are both on the left bank and the left bank runs warmer than the
right bank may confuse this issue a bit. Some people have installed low temp thermostats with no apparent ill effects,
but this might be due to the fact that the left bank is running warm enough to put the EFI in a viable control mode and to
fully close the AAV anyway. If the EFI sensor is moved to the right bank as discussed on page 176 or the cooling
system is modified to eliminate the differential cooling between right and left bank as discussed on page 198, the EFI
sensor and AAV may actually start seeing temperatures as cold as the thermostat spec -- and might start showing
symptoms of running too cold. If this happens, the solution is obviously to replace the thermostats with units in the 180195°F range.
THERMOSTAT SEATS: Jan Wikström reports that “The seat of the thermostat bypass (supposed to close when the
thermostat opens) in the thermostat housings is subject to erosion. Inspect and fit a bronze seat if necessary.” It’s not
known how common this erosion is, but if significant erosion is present it will definitely reduce cooling efficiency. Jan
made a bronze seat by machining a pipe fitting and then machining a suitable recess in the thermostat housing to press it
into. Other options would include building up with weld material and remachining or simply replacing the thermostat
housings.
Rob Weiss-Malik says, “When I took the t-stats (which I had recently replaced) out again and inspected them I found
that the somewhat spherical washer (valve?) at the back end of the t-stats (the one that seats against the coolant return
opening when the t-stats open) had very faint off-center circular wear scratches on it. Upon checking the recessed
206
sockets that the t-stat flanges seat into I found that they contained gritty deposits of a grayish material that I could
scrape off by using a small flat screwdriver.
“After seeing this I temporarily reinserted the t-stats back in the sockets and it immediately became apparent that they
were not seating perpendicular to their sockets!!! This resulted in the back valves not seating the right way against the
back opening when the t-stats opened and in turn causing the ring shaped seating marks (scratches). These conditions
apparently lead to some of the flow not going to the radiator but going straight back to the engine with a concurrent rise
in temperature. Please note that the amount of gritty material at the seats was very small, and yet it caused a large of
amount of deflection in the alignment of the t-stats (sufficient to cause bypass of flow). I also religiously maintain the
proper proportions of antifreeze in the cooling system, and the radiator was re-cored about 15K miles ago.
“The fix consisted of thoroughly scraping (without scratching) the recessed sockets with a flat screwdriver to remove all
of the deposits. This was followed by light sanding with very fine (600 grit) sandpaper. Then the t-stats went back in.
Now my gage sits below N and does not creep up into the gray-hair zone.
“By the way, the symptoms of this condition were that the gauge would first stabilize a quarter way below N and then
would very slowly creep up past the N setting over a period of 15 to 30 minutes. The physical evidence for this
condition were the deposits themselves (you can see them easily, assuming you can cram your head that low under the
bonnet!!!) and the ring shaped seating marks on the back valve. This was an easy fix and I would recommend it as a
routine maintenance procedure whether or not your cat is overheating.”
NOT-SO PRESS FITTINGS: Stefan Schulz found that the 1/4” connection on the top of the left side thermostat
housing had come loose. This fitting is connected to a hose that goes to the air bleed piping on top of the radiator, and
normally operates at cooling system pressure. Once it comes loose, it really comes loose: “The only thing that held it in
place was the slight force exerted by the hose pressing on it from above!”
The ideal fix here would be to drill and tap the hole in the thermostat housing for a NPT and then screw in a suitable
fitting, and throw that pressed-in thing away. Trouble is, it might be a bit difficult to do with the thermostat housing on
the car. It's not horribly difficult to get the thermostat housing off the car, but it does complicate matters.
Unfortunately, Schulz is not the only owner to suffer this same failure. In fact, it appears to be fairly common. All in all,
if you have that thermostat housing out for any reason, you might want to preemptively replace that pressed-in fitting
with a screwed-in fitting just so you don't have to worry about it any more.
BADLY LOCATED FITTINGS: The right rear coolant manifold casting has locations for three bosses. On this
author’s ’83, the manifold has a vacuum switch in the front boss and the hose supplying the heater is connected to a boss
in the second; the third is blank, undrilled. On Jason Philbrook’s ’89, however, there are sensors in the first two bosses
and the heater hose is connected to the third. This puts the hose fitting too close to the insulation on the structure of the
car, and the engine moving on its mounts caused the corner of the insulation to wear a hole in the hose and cause a leak.
See COOLANT CONNECTING PIPE below for ideas on providing new taps along the pipe itself, allowing you to plug
this one and not use it any more.
COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR: On early cars, it’s at the front right side of the radiator, where it’s very hard to find
unless you have the hood off. Sometime in the early 80’s, it was relocated to the header tank, where it’s a lot easier to
get to. If you have a car with the earlier sensor location, at a convenient opportunity you should relocate the sensor to
the header tank. Simply drill a hole in the header tank about 3” above the bottom and insert the existing sensor with a
new grommet, and find some way to seal the hole in the radiator.
This sensor is nothing more than a pin that makes electrical contact with the fluid itself. The resulting ohmage reading is
processed by an electronic gadget, C42294, into an on/off signal to the dash indicator light. If this gadget fails, note that
some GM cars use exactly the same type of level sensing system. Their sensor won’t fit the Jag, but the electronic box
should work.
207
FINDING LEAKS: Michael Bucklew says there’s a product to help. “The item is for checking for coolant leaks on the
whole system. A kit comes with a ultraviolet dye that is circulated through system. Shut down, and hand pump up the
pressure. With a blacklite the coolant leaks look like neon lights. Typically, kits comes with the lite and dye. I think the
price is around 60 bucks at "better auto stores".”
COOLANT CONNECTING PIPE: On top of each head there is a coolant pipe, C42595, that connects a manifold at
the rear of the head to the thermostat housing at the front. It is a straight steel pipe with a small shoulder at each end to
hold itself and the sealing bush in place.
Of course, being steel it is subject to rust and corrosion. The outside merely looks ratty; the inside, which usually rusts
worse than the outside, dumps flakes of rust into the coolant circuit and helps plug up your radiator.
There is an easy way to make a nice replacement. Drop by an air conditioning repair shop or supply house, and pick up
a length of 5/8” ID (3/4” OD) copper tubing as well as a fitting or two. Note: air conditioning systems typically use the
odd eighths sizes of tubing to differentiate them from water piping.
Cut the tubing the same length as the original. Cut the fittings to make rings and use a propane torch to solder them
onto the tubing to form shoulders. If you take the effort to polish it up a little, having the copper tube across the top of
each head looks really snazzy. Since this tube is mounted in rubber at both ends and has no direct contact with
aluminum parts, galvanic corrosion is no more of a concern than in the copper radiator.
If you need additional openings into the cooling circuit for adding or relocating sensors or taps, one possibility would be
to assemble copper coolant connecting pipes as described. Then, carefully noting where there is room for such things,
you can install a tee in one of these pipes. A simple “sweat” tee would make an excellent connection for the heater hose,
leaving the threaded openings in the manifold itself available for sensors. Or, you could solder in a cast bronze tee with a
threaded connection. And, of course, you can install more than one tee if it would be helpful.
Al Askevold has another idea: Make pipes from Schedule 40 pipe. But wait a minute! In copper piping we needed
5/8”, but Schedule 40 only comes in 1/2” and 3/4”. Fortunately, 1/2” Schedule 40 has no dimensions anywhere near
1/2”. Askevold: “Schedule 40 is OD 0.840, ID 0.622, with a wall thickness of 0.109.” So, cut 1/2” pipe to length and
then machine the OD down to 3/4” at the ends to fit the seals.
But Schedule 40 is ugly! Yeah, it’s typically galvanized cast iron, and the black iron is just as ugly. But if you shop
around, you can find it in solid brass or stainless steel. The stainless steel Schedule 40 is not very pretty since it is
unfinished, but as long as you’re machining it anyway you could give it a skim cut over its entire length to polish it up.
Askevold points out that stainless steel pipe is available from McMaster-Carr (page 711), but the shipping will probably
bankrupt you; better to buy locally if you can find it.
COOLANT CONNECTING PIPE SEALS: Part number C37990, commonly referred to as a “top hat seal”, is actually
the same seal used on the electric fan control thermal switch on the early XJ-S, and may even be used on other types of
British cars. This seal can be used only once -- it says so right on the seal itself. When installed and the engine is run,
this seal seems to bond itself to the pipe and makes a very effective seal. Unfortunately the steel pipe will then rust,
eventually breaking this seal. So, every time you’re working in this area, you’ll probably be well advised to replace these
seals while there, cleaning up the OD of the pipe before reinstallation.
Unless you go with the copper pipe replacement described above. In this case, the seal bonds itself very well to the
copper, it never rusts, and it can be a real pain to try to pull apart during the next overhaul. Solution: don’t ever take it
apart again! Since it will never leak if undisturbed, every time the engine is worked on simply remove the entire water
rail assembly -- thermostat housing, pipe, and rear manifold -- as a single unit and set it aside for reinstallation later.
The top hat seals are expensive if purchased from Jaguar. There are aftermarket versions available for only a couple of
bucks each, though; they reportedly don’t have the writing on them. It’s not known if there is any functional difference
in the rubber compound, but the cheap items are likely to work fine here -- this is not a difficult connection to seal once
208
the rusty pipe issue is dealt with.
COOLANT CONNECTING PIPE SEAL REPLACEMENT: Odysseus Marcopolus passes along this idea: “Many
thanks to Phil Prince's tip about not having to remove either of the manifolds to get the pipe out. All I needed to do
was:
1. Drain coolant.
2. Remove air filter housing.
3. Grab pipe w/vicegrips and shove it into the back manifold until the front end was free; then pull forward and
out. (I needed to whack the vicegrips a couple of times w/ a hammer to get the pipe moving.)
4. Remove seals from manifolds.
5. Cleanup pipe with grinder/wire wheel (just didn't have time to fab something new).
6. Place new seals in position.
7. I coated the pipe ends with gasket dressing.
8. Push pipe into rear manifold until there's enough room to get the front end in and position the pipe.
9. Refill coolant and replace air filter housing.”
Of course, this is not likely to work as well with the copper pipe described above as it does with the OEM steel pipe; not
only will you bugger up the copper pipe with the vicegrips, but the soldered-on shoulders will make it quite difficult to
push the pipe into the rear housing to remove. You could, of course, simply leave the shoulders off, since the pipe
should remain in place just fine without them and then you could replace the seals using this method. Mark the pipe with
a marker so you can tell when it’s positioned properly at installation.
This replacement method should work with the stainless steel pipe if you machine the OD of the stainless steel pipe to
the same dimensions as the OEM steel pipe. You could even taper the step in diameter to make it work even easier.
Of course, when all is said and done, it’s not really all that difficult to remove the thermostat housing. And having either
the copper or stainless steel pipe in place is likely to avoid the need to replace those top hat seals nearly as often.
RADIATOR HOSES: The hoses in the Jag are not significantly different than any other car. For locations where the
shape of the hose is not too critical, go to the local parts shop and ask to look over their selection of molded hoses. Find
one with the right diameter, and with a section that will fit where you want it to. It is helpful to have the car there, and a
shop that will let you take the hoses out to the car and look at them. Buy the hose and cut it to the length and shape you
need and discard the rest. This method is usually cheaper than either buying the Jag hoses or using flex hose, and is very
aesthetically pleasing. Note: You will probably not find a hose with the exact same shape as the original. All that is
important is that the two ends will connect properly, and that the hose doesn’t run into anything in between. Also keep
in mind that the engine moves around a little on its mounts, while the radiator stands still; a little room for flexibility in
the radiator hoses is helpful.
Peter Smith: “the top left hose is the same shape as (in Australia) a Holden 186 or Mazda 929 late 80’s.”
Peter Cohen says that the Goodyear catalog lists “a single XJS radiator hose, the one for the upper left. Goodyear part
number 61267, cost $6.39. It has a slightly tighter S bend than the original, and appears to be about an inch too long at
the front end (so was the Mackay). Same wall thickness as the original. The Goodyear catalog also had a note that this
item is also available in "Hi-Miler".”
Cohen also provides Beck-Arnley hose numbers:
Upper Left
142-4555
Upper Right
142-4548
209
Lower
142-0702
Cohen also ran across an Australian brand. “I didn’t like them much. The upper left developed a hole, and the lower
was not shaped quite right, so it rubbed on a bolt on the motor, and began wearing a hole in itself. It had to be tie
wrapped out of the way.”
Auto parts stores offer a wide selection of molded heater hoses too. The question-mark-shaped section of hose that
connects the heater return pipe to the outlet of the radiator, CAC 5125, can be neatly replaced by a hose number
303675.
Regarding the lower hose, Richard Dixon shopped around. He found one place that offered him P/N C41102 for a
reasonable price, and another place that offered him P/N CCC6993 for an unreasonable price. He was given conflicting
information on whether the later P/N fit only the 6.0 cars or superceded the earlier numbers. “Called a local import parts
store and she said $US 14.96 and I can have it tomorrow. When it comes in, guess what part number it has on it? Both
C41102 and CCC6993. And it fit perfectly. Go figure!!!”
By the way, one big issue on lower radiator hoses is collapse. It’s on the suction side of the water pump, and under
some conditions (such as a plugged radiator -- and it’s not like that never happens on a Jaguar XJ-S!) the suction can
suck the hose flat -- which is really bad for coolant flow! The time-honored fix here is to install what looks like a big
coil spring inside the hose; many lower radiator hoses come with such coils. The problem there is that they aren’t
stainless and eventually rust, which not only allows the hose to collapse but also puts chunks of spring steel into the
coolant loop. If this type of thing is in your car, it is suggested that you replace this hose on a maintenance schedule
rather than waiting for trouble.
Another solution seems to be to make the walls of the lower hose itself really tough. The problem here is that,
eventually, hoses soften up, and may eventually start collapsing -- and you have a really tough time figuring out what’s
wrong with your car, since it’s clearly having cooling problems but you can’t find the fault. The hose looks fine when
the engine’s shut off. Again, replace the hose on schedule rather than waiting for trouble.
Marty Sullivan came up with the unthinkable solution: a flex hose. Flex hoses are widely considered unacceptable for
some reason, but for a lower radiator hose they have some definite benefits. There is a coil of wire built into the casing
of the hose itself, where it isn’t in contact with the coolant, won’t rust, and won’t get chunks into the coolant circuit.
Some people seem to feel they don’t flow well, but there’s little basis for this contention; certainly Sullivan didn’t have
any problems with flow. The biggest issue is that, when really old, sometimes a flex hose will delaminate, leaving the
outside casing and the enclosed wire coil looking fine while the inner lining pulls away from it, collapses internally, and
plugs the passage -- but this probably doesn’t happen any sooner than the problems with molded hoses described above.
Sullivan claimed the flex hose he found fit beautifully and was much easier to get into place than a molded hose would
have been.
If you want the best possible setup, though, the thing to do would probably be to get a good quality molded hose and
make a stainless steel wire coil to go in it (whether it originally had a coil or not). You wouldn’t have to worry about
that hose until it actually sprung a leak.
If you have an engine heater in the lower hose, all of the above still applies except we’re talking two short hoses instead
of one long one. See page 685.
GENERAL WATER HOSES: Harry Trafford suggests better-than-stock cooling system hoses: “Gates makes a
cool flexible, wire-inserted hose for bends that would kink regular hose. I think the old name was “Red Stripe”, but
don’t know if the name has changed. The other type I’m using is is Gates “Vulco”. No wire, but extremely strong.”
WATER PUMP REMOVAL/CROSS PIPE INSTALLATION: What the Jag manual calls the “cross pipe” is the pipe
that connects the two thermostat housings to the water pump inlet, and has the fill cap on top. It is variously called a
crossover pipe, a bypass pipe, and several unprintable names. Note that the air balance pipe at the top rear of the engine
connecting the two intake manifolds is also called a crossover pipe; try not to get confused.
210
The repair manuals indicate that the crank pulley must be removed to remove the water pump, but the cross pipe can
stay where it is. However, according to Jim Isbell, “The water pump will come out and go back in without removing the
crank pulley. But the pump will not go back on with the crossover pipe connected if the pulley is still on as you have to
snake it in over the pulley and the crossover pipe would be a big impediment.
“So having said that and realizing that you are now going to replace the crossover pipe with the water pump already
installed, there is only one way:
“Lubricate all three of the pipe connections (on the two thermostat housings and the water pump) liberally with 3M
water hose sealer. Then lubricate the three matching pipe ends on the crossover pipe with the 3M stuff. Now slip the
new, cut to the proper length, hoses onto the crossover pipe. Put two clamps onto each of the three hoses, not tight,
just enough so they don’t slide off. The two clamps on the right side should be placed so the screw is on top when
installed and slightly back. The clamp on the thermostat housing on the left side should be so that it is on the bottom and
slightly back so there is enough room for a screwdriver angled down below the header tank. The two clamps on the
water pump hose should be on the left side of the hose slightly back so the screwdriver is angled to the left side of the
car. If you set the clamps up this way you will save a lot of grief later on.
“Now push the hoses up onto the crossover pipe as far as they will go. Next place the center (water pump), hose onto
the water pump tilting it and the crossover into position. It will take a little pushing and prying with a screwdriver, but
it’s not too bad and the hardest part is done.
“Now, pull all the three hoses into approximately the correct position and lightly tighten the clamps. Now make sure
the small pipe on the top of the crossover is clear of the big bolt on the block so that the hose to the overflow tank
can be put on without being in a position to rub a hole in it. Tighten all six clamps and you are done.”
Lenny Berk did this job, and had the following suggestion: “Removing the engine breather filter housing (two bolts)
made my life a little easier to get the crossover pipe in.” The breather housing is the thing on the front of the left
head, just forward of the oil filler.
Berk also was less than satisfied with the lubricating qualities of hose sealer when fitting the cross pipe. Suggestions
for alternatives include water pump lubricant, intended as an additive to coolant. Care must be taken when selecting
a lubricant, since the wrong stuff may attack the hose material or otherwise screw up the cooling system.
This author found another way to install this pipe: remove the engine breather housing, and unbolt the A/C
compressor and shift it rearward a couple inches. Then, fit the left end of the cross pipe to the hose on the B bank
thermostat housing with the right end of the cross pipe up in the air. Then swing the pipe down, inserting the fitting
into the hose on the water pump as you do. Finally, connect up the right end, which is easy. Tighten the clamps and
reinstall the breather housing and the A/C compressor.
When installing this cross pipe, try not to insert it too far into the hose connecting it to the water pump. Positioning
the cross pipe a hair too low makes it considerably more difficult to get a socket on the bolts holding the front
support plate for the A/C compressor. With the cross pipe properly located, the bolts holding the bottom of the
support plate to the engine are easily accessible below the pipe, and the bolts holding the compressor to the support
plate are easily accessible above it.
A/C V-BELT RUB: If the V-belt rubs against the cross pipe, it’s because the cross pipe wasn’t installed correctly.
There are no brackets to hold this cross pipe in position; it is held only by the hoses connected to it. If it rubs the Vbelt, the ends of the cross pipe were not inserted far enough into the hoses connecting to the thermostat housings.
Usually, the clamps can simply be loosened and the pipe pushed into the proper position, and the clamps retightened.
Note Jim Isbell’s warning above to take care not to install it too far rearward causing the small hose to the header
tank to rub on the crankcase breather mount bolt.
CROSS PIPE REPLACEMENT: If you’ve had the cross pipe out, you’ve probably been alarmed at its condition.
It’s cheap steel, and usually is so pitted and corroded that it’s amazing it doesn’t leak like a showerhead. It also is
211
reportedly atrociously expensive from Jaguar, and you really don’t want to be searching the junkyards because the
ones you find there are likely to be just as corroded. Mark Jackson suggests an alternative: “Cathouse Spares offers
a third-party solution. Cathouse can provide stainless steel rails acquired from an anonymous source for about
$AUS135 (~$US95) plus the usual costs of mail & handling. I've seen one and it looked pretty good - had all the
bells and whistles - just a little "choppy". The angles from memory were mostly welded instead of smoothly bent, but
it looked pretty spiffy anyway.” Cathouse Spares is listed on page 693.
Of course, it’s just plumbing. You could conceivably make your own. One possibility is to find suitable copper
piping and fittings and solder or braze the whole mess together. The fill cap might be a bit of a challenge, but there’s
no good reason it has to be a conventional radiator cap; any opening with a suitable watertight cap should work. Or
perhaps you could rip a radiator cap connection off the top of a brass radiator and solder it on. The trickiest part may
be at the pump inlet itself, where the connection from the header tank seems to protrude down the center of the pump
inlet connection. It’s not known how critical this is, since all lines lead to the pump inlet sooner or later; perhaps a
simple cross fitting would work.
You might even be able to replace the entire cross pipe assembly with straight sections of tubing, tees, and suitable
hoses and clamps. Note that this is the suction side of the pump, so it might be a good idea to use hoses as short as
possible and insert metal coils to prevent collapse.
CROSS PIPE HOSES: John Napoli decided to cut pieces from commonly available hoses to connect the cross pipe.
“I did find Dayton hose numbers D71458 (smaller ID hose [to heads]) and D71316 (large ID hose [to water pump]).
These were fairly inexpensive. They may not be the cheapest or the best donor hoses to use, but they seem ok. The
smaller hose has enough material to cut at least four hoses, and the other two, so I will have a complete set of
spares.” All of the cross pipe hoses are short, straight sections, so it’s probable there are dozens of readily-available
hoses that can be cannibalized similarly.
WATER PUMP LUBRICATION: On the top of the water pump is a setscrew with a locknut on it. This setscrew is to
prevent the outer race from rotating in the housing, and either inserts into a hole in the bearing or tightens onto a flat. If
it inserts into a hole, you can remove the setscrew and screw in a zerk fitting (available at any hardware or auto parts
store -- yes, it’s even the right thread), and then you can grease the bearings with a grease gun. Be sure to reinstall the
setscrew when you’re done.
WATER PUMP SEAL FAILURE: In the water pump housing there is a small drain hole that leads from the space
between the seal and the bearing out the bottom of the pump. As a result, when the seal fails the coolant comes out the
bottom rather than through the bearing. This is actually fairly standard practice in water pump design.
WATER PUMP REBUILD PARTS: If you are visualizing a water pump seal as similar to, say, the simple crankshaft
lip seal on the front of the engine, allow me to improve your mind. A water pump seal is considerably more involved.
It consists of a non-rotating face that is spring-loaded in the axial direction (parallel to and surrounding the shaft) to hold
it against a rotating seat. These two parts run against each other with spring pressure holding them in contact, so they
are made of materials that should provide long wear as well as a good seal: a carbon face against a stainless steel seat in
good ones, a plastic face against a brass seat in cheap ones. And, of course, the level of polish of both surfaces is
important, so the rotating seat is replaceable and is sold as part of the seal.
There is an elastomer involved, but only to connect the spring-loaded face to the seal housing so that it is free to move
axially to contact the seat but fluid won’t leak around behind it. The elastomer is therefore not really a wear item,
although it certainly can be the item that deteriorates!
The housing material is sometimes specified, commonly either brass or stainless steel. It’s hard to care; the housing isn’t
going to be the part that fails. I suppose it may be important in industrial applications with corrosive fluids.
212
The Jag water pump seal is an industrial standard; it can be found in any industrial equipment supply store, such as
Grainger, as a type 68 shaft seal. In fact, Grainger offers two seals that will fit: Catalog #1R306, which has a black
plastic seal face and a Buna diaphragm and is rated -40° to 225°F, and #1R324, which has a carbon seal face, a Viton
diaphragm, and is rated -20° to 350°F. The Viton one costs ten bucks more than the Buna. Both of these Grainger
seals have stainless steel rotating seats. After buying a rebuild kit to get the bearing, Sean Straw described the seal
included as having “...the characteristic plastic seal ring material, meaning these are likely the Buna version. The seal
face is very different in quality vs. the Viton one I purchased. If you're a stickler for precision, get the Viton one -- the
differences are not just in the seal rubber - the face of both the seal and the seal washer are much better in precision on
the Viton - it's polished, whereas the Buna is a bit more coarse looking (it doesn't look super porous, but it is obviously
not polished). How much of a difference it'll really make in this application is questionable, but for the cost of parts, I
think it is worth it.”
Straw goes on to report that the seal has an industrial standard designation: RS 80613. “That's the Buna version -append a V for the Viton one.”
When the author’s pump needed rebuilding, it was because that diaphragm in the seal had failed; it’s unknown just how
prevalent this failure mode is, but why not go with the Viton seal and not worry about it any more? 225°F isn’t all that
far from the operating temperature of this engine, not even considering its tendencies to exceed that operating
temperature. Meanwhile, if you ever exceed the -20º limit on the Viton seal, you’d better have a good antifreeze mix.
The bearing is also a fairly standard item, similar to those used in many common water pumps. In case you’re not
familiar with water pump bearings, the outer race is a long cylinder as though there are at least two rows of balls or
rollers inside. The shaft itself is part of the bearing, and presumably the inner race is machined directly onto this shaft.
Straw provided the critical dimensions for the Jaguar part: the bearing outer race is 1.500” OD and 2.1280” in length.
The shaft is 4.9025” long overall, with 1.7745” of this protruding from the rear of the bearing. The portion of the shaft
protruding from the rear has an OD of 0.6300” to fit the seal and to press fit into the impeller. 1” of the shaft protrudes
from the front of the bearing, and this portion has an OD of 0.7500” to press fit into the pulley flange.
Finding a bearing supplier may be difficult, however. The easiest way to get one may be to purchase a rebuilt water
pump for another type car from a discount auto parts store and remove the new bearing (and perhaps the seal as well)
from it. After rebuilding your water pump, return the disassembled pump along with your old bearing for the core
refund.
When used in a Chevy or some such, this bearing would be press fit into a cast iron housing. On the Jaguar V12 water
pump, however, apparently a press fit into aluminum wasn’t considered reliable, so in addition to the tight fit a small
threaded stud is screwed into the side of the housing and into a recess in the side of the bearing outer race to positively
hold it in place. All such bearings seem to have a hole or notch that will work, possibly originally intended to line up
with grease fittings in other applications; if you happen to find one that’s totally smooth, you could easily grind a small
flat on it.
Rebuild kits for this pump are available at reasonable prices. Straw reported that the kit he received from XK’s
Unlimited (page 697) included the bearing, seal, impeller (cast iron), two gaskets, and a replacement stud and nut for
holding the bearing in the housing. The author purchased a kit elsewhere and received only the bearing and seal, so take
note and ask what is included before ordering.
Despite all the above availability, Dan Jensen suggests you forget about rebuilding the pump yourself and simply buy a
rebuilt pump. It isn’t that much more money, and unless you have things like presses around it’s easy to screw up a
DIY rebuild job. Don’t even ask Jaguar for a new pump, though -- you can’t afford it.
WATER PUMP REBUILDING: Some, but apparently not all, water pumps have a single countersunk Pozidriv screw.
According to Thomas Alberts, it is a common mistake to overtighten this screw, resulting in a fracture of the aluminum
casting surrounding it. Apparently the casting was designed for a non-countersunk bolt, and adding the countersinking
makes the metal too thin for serious tightening. If you wanna make sure the pump doesn’t leak, use a good sealing
compound; don’t overtighten this screw.
213
WATER PUMP CORROSION: There is apparently some history of the water pump housing getting corroded; nobody
seems to know if it is as a result of pump cavitation, bad antifreeze mixture, or what. Randy K. Wilson says, “The place
at which they corrode away is at the lower part of the water pump cavity. This is behind the impeller area, but not the
working side of the impeller. The area should be a fairly low flow area on the high pressure side of the pump. But it’s
close enough to the output side of the impeller that turbulence could be present.
“Whatever the cause, I do see the corrosion pitting often enough. There may be a clue in that it’s not very often when
merely changing water pumps; I see it on engines being rebuilt. Engines get rebuilt because they have done some high
mileage, or have been abused/neglected.”
FAN TIP RUB: If the tips of the blades on your fan show signs of rubbing, the problem may be in the transmission
mount -- see page 342. If you have a metal fan, you can hear it happen: you nail it from a standing start, and get a
deafening screech from under the hood like all hell broke loose. A bad, or an incorrectly assembled, transmission mount
allows the engine to pivot around on the engine mounts, causing the fan to rub.
A fan tip rub may also be caused by a failure of the left side motor mount. When stomping it in low gear, a lot of torque
is applied to the drive shaft. According to Newton, this means that the same amount of torque is applied to the
engine/transmission assembly in the opposite direction. The engine tries to tilt to the right, applying tension to the left
motor mount that was really designed for compression only. If this rubber mount is torn, the entire engine will lift right
up off its mount, causing the fan to rub.
PLASTIC FAN CRACKING: Issue 68 (June 1996) of Australian Jaguar Magazine: “Graham Cummins has recently
found that the main plastic fan on the H.E. is prone to cracking and breaking up which can cause immense damage under
the bonnet.” Any guesses as to how Mr. Cummins discovered this problem? Are you gonna find it the same way?
Mark D. Stoner did. “My yellow fan decided to explode one day when shifting at full throttle from 1st to 2nd gear. Put
a nice dent in the top of the hood along with shredding the steel fan shroud and blowing a huge hole in the radiator.”
Lee Opausky wrote: “Yes, the yellow plastic fan is cracked at the front. When questioned, the shop foreman of one
prominent Jag dealership told me not to worry, the crack on his XJ-S is ½” wide!” More proof that you can’t trust the
dealers for good advice.
Jim Isbell ordered a replacement fan, and reports that the fan he was shipped did not look like the original. “It is
black and has a flat center metal piece. The old one was white (now yellow) and the center piece was dished. The
old one had a lower aspect ratio (short and fat) to the blades while the new one has the higher aspect ratio (long and
skinny). The black flat one makes up for the “dishing” by offsetting the plastic instead.” With any luck at all, this
means that Jaguar has recognized the problem and redesigned the fan, and this new one won’t have cracking
problems. By the way, some of us believe the original fan was yellow to begin with, not white.
The black plastic fan may be an improvement, but to be safer still it may be preferable to just go ahead and replace the
belt-driven fan with electric fans as described beginning on page 219.
FAN CLUTCH TYPE -- EARLY VS. LATE: The early XJ-S fan clutch mounts with one bolt, the later with four.
Mike Morrin points out that his ROM (Ed 4) appeared to have the two confused. “On page 26-3, section 26.35.21
appears twice, once titled “FAN AND TORQUATROL UNIT (Early Cars)” and then titled “FAN AND
TORQUATROL UNIT (Later Cars)”. The diagrams and text for these sections appear to be transposed, as the section
for “later cars” matches my 1975 car (as well as the illustration in the 1980 edition of the parts catalogue).”
On second thought, maybe not. Morrin continues: “I am now sure that the version with the 4 bolts holding the clutch on
to the pulley is the early version used on the carburetted XJ12 (and never on the XJ-S), as I now have one of these
(XJ12) engines with fan clutch. My “spare” 1973 XJ12 engine has a fan clutch with 4 bolts holding the clutch to the
214
pulley. The clutch has “HOLSET HUDDERSFIELD” cast on the front of it. The illustrations both clearly show metal
fans.”
So, apparently, this is what we have: The early XJ12 had a 4-bolt fan clutch with a metal fan. When the XJ-S was
introduced, it came with a 1-bolt fan clutch and a metal fan. In 1979, this was replaced with a 4-bolt fan clutch with a
plastic fan.
There are photos of the guts of a 1-bolt fan clutch at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/FanClutch1.html
And there are photos of the guts of a 4-bolt fan clutch at:
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/FanClutch.html
OPERATION -- 1-BOLT CLUTCH: The 1-bolt fan clutch is a study in simplicity; the hub that is bolted to the pulley is
a simple disk inside an aluminum housing filled with thick goo. There aren’t even any bearings; the disk itself serves as a
goo-lubricated bearing.
FAN CLUTCH CHECKING -- 1-BOLT CLUTCH: It would appear that the only plausible failure mode would be
for one of the seals to fail and the goo to escape, and there are reports of such failures; the goo leaves a track on the
outside of the clutch and perhaps spattered around the engine compartment. Such a failure should be apparent when
turning the fan by hand; either the resistance is “jerky” or inconsistent, indicating some of the goo is gone, or it spins
effortlessly, indicating all of the goo is gone.
It’s plausible, though, that the goo make break down with time or mileage. Typically, a highly viscous fluid has long
molecular chains, and subjecting such a fluid to shear gradually breaks those chains and makes the fluid less viscous; this
is one of the reasons you change your oil regularly. If the same thing happens to the goo in a fan clutch, it may lose its
effectiveness as mileage is added up even if the seals remain intact. Ed Sowell says, “I am a great fan (no pun intended!)
of changing the clutch. It had a very good effect for me, even though there was no external evidence of mine being worn
out. It is my opinion that the commonly cited fan clutch tests are meaningless.”
OPERATION -- 4-BOLT CLUTCH: The later 4-bolt fan clutch is a thermostatic type, meaning it engages more firmly
to blow more air when the air coming through the radiator is hot. As opposed to the simple 1-bolt fan clutch, this thing
is remarkably complicated. It functions by having a chamber at the front, divided from the driving impeller by a panel.
When the engine is cold, two thermostatic elements -- one obvious coil on the front and a simple bimetal strip inside -conspire with centrifugal force to move the goo out of the impeller area and into this chamber, thereby largely
disengaging the clutch. When it gets hot, the thermostatic elements allow the goo to move back into the impeller area,
providing a firmer engagement and faster fan speed.
FAN CLUTCH CHECKING -- 4-BOLT CLUTCH: If the problem isn’t obvious (totally seized, freewheeling, etc.) it’s
very difficult to tell when a thermostatic fan clutch is bad. How it feels when turned by hand depends largely on how hot
the clutch was when the engine was last turned off, since the goo won’t move from chamber to chamber when the
engine isn’t running. Just playing with it when cold can move some of the goo around, causing it to change feel while
you’re studying it. Reportedly the best indication the clutch is bad is that the car is running hot in stop-and-go traffic -although, obviously, that might be caused by any of several other problems. Typically it’s when the owner can’t find the
problem and replaces the clutch in desperation and the car quits overheating that we learn that the clutch was bad.
The thermostatic clutch may be complex, but it still involves thick goo -- and therefore the goo may be subject to the
same molecular breakdown as that described for the 1-bolt clutch above. Hence, it may make sense to replace it every x
miles (perhaps every 60K miles or 100Km) whether it looks bad or not.
215
Of course, if the clutch is completely locked up, it’s shot. This is often the result of a bearing failure; the 4-bolt clutch
has a single ball bearing in it. Some people are tempted to continue driving with a seized fan clutch, because it moves so
much air and keeps the engine cool. However, it is not recommended for three reasons. First, it makes a lot of noise.
Second, it uses a lot of energy, enough that you will be able to notice a drop in fuel economy if you’re following the
numbers closely. And third, if it’s the plastic fan, it’s likely to come apart since the fan will be turning a lot faster than it
is intended to. When a couple of plastic blades bounce off the bottom of your hood and leave a nice dent, you’ll wish
you had sprung for a new fan clutch.
There is, believe it or not, at least one more failure mode of this fan clutch. Marty Sullivan had the bearing fail in his fan
clutch so it didn’t hold the fan centered properly. At highway speeds the unbalance vibrated the entire car. This was
tricky to diagnose since it looked OK when the engine was off and felt OK when turned by hand; it was only by
watching it wobble at idle you could figure it out. Of course, this problem is likely to damage the fan support bearing if
not corrected quickly.
The difficulty in determining whether a fan clutch is operating properly is just one reason why replacing the belt-driven
fan with an electric fan as described on page 219 makes sense. You can easily tell when an electric fan is operating
properly.
FAN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT: If it is determined that the fan clutch is a problem, there are several possible
courses of action: the fan clutch can be replaced with a new one; it can be replaced with a substitute; or the entire
belt-driven fan scheme can be chucked and electric fans installed. Your local parts shop is unlikely to carry a Jaguar
fan clutch, so you will have to consult a Jaguar parts supplier (and spend some serious cash) to exercise that option.
Substitutes are discussed below. Replacing the belt-driven fan with an electric fan is discussed starting on page 219.
Of course, you could bolt on a fixed or flex-blade fan and eliminate the fan clutch altogether. However, this results in
slightly worse fuel economy and a considerable amount of noise (whine). Most would consider the noise unacceptable
in a car such as the XJ-S.
The electric fan is probably the best overall solution, and will result in better fuel economy and more power. There may
be slightly more noise at idle (depending on the fan you use), but much less noise at higher RPM. It is unknown why
Jaguar doesn’t use this system to begin with; perhaps they don’t like the sound an electric fan makes. Or, perhaps they
wanted to minimize the use of Lucas and Bosch components.
FAN CLUTCH INSTALLATION -- ONE-BOLT TYPE: Graeme Adamson says, “I replaced the fan clutch several
months ago. Having done it one before, I figured I was an expert. Only problem is, second time round, I didn't fasten
the nose bolt tightly enough, nor did I use Loctite on the thread. As a result, I was driving home one day when I heard a
"clatter clatter" sound. Switch off real fast, but the damage was done - the bolt had come out and fallen down the
shroud, and the fan and clutch had spun off into the radiator.
“As it happened, the clutch was fine, I happened to have a spare fan, and I had to pay to have the radiator replaced.”
FAN CLUTCH INSTALLATION -- FOUR-BOLT TYPE: Dan Jensen suggests that, when reinstalling the fan
clutch, “Use nyloc nuts on the fan-to-pulley studs. It is a real pain to install both a lock washer and nut on the end of
the four studs with very little clearance. Having just a nut to worry about dramatically lessens the problem. I have
never had them come loose in any of my three Jags.”
FAN CLUTCH SUBSTITUTION -- ONE-BOLT TYPE: The early XJ-S, from introduction through 8/79, was fitted
with a fan clutch, part no. T55C, with a single bolt on the front to hold it on. These also used a metal fan blade,
C39831.
Mike Morrin notes: “The early XJS fan clutch appears to be identical to the unit used on a Rover 3500 SDI. This might
216
not be very helpful in the USA, but they are relatively common in the UK and some other countries. When the fan
clutch on my XJ-S was found to be seized, I bolted on the Rover part (no modifications) and have had no problems.
The Rover plastic fan is different to the Jaguar’s.”
It might be possible to retrofit the later type clutch EAC4751 and plastic fan EAC3265 (or the substitutes suggested
below) to the earlier XJ-S by purchasing the pulley EAC3438 and the bearing EAC3437. You might also need bushing
EAC4382. The question is whether or not the bearing housing is the same, or will at least position the fan properly.
FAN CLUTCH SUBSTITUTION -- FOUR-BOLT TYPE: Later XJ-S’s used a fan clutch that mounts with four bolts
to the front of the drive pulley. This is the prevalent style on US automobiles, leading one to consider the possibility of
low-cost substitutes. However, the fan clutch market is full of niggling little details, so one must check several
dimensions carefully to make sure a substitute will fit:
A)
The pilot hole in the center of the shaft must fit snugly around the stub in the center of the mounting
flange. A hole too small won’t go on, and a hole too big won’t center the shaft properly.
B)
The mounting bolt pattern must be workable. This generally isn’t too critical, because they all seem
to use four bolts and the aftermarket clutches provide radial slots to fit nearly any pattern.
C)
The shaft must be of comparable length. Too long will press the fan into the back of the radiator.
This dimension doesn’t need to be exact, merely close enough to prevent interferences and keep the
fan within the shroud for maximum efficiency.
D)
The bolt pattern for mounting the fan to the clutch must match.
E)
If the fan has a recess for the clutch housing, the clutch housing must fit within the opening.
The auto parts houses normally have a cross-reference chart that lists the above dimensions for the fan clutches available.
If you compare the clutch from your car to their chart, you can determine what can be used.
If you find a clutch that is suitable except the pilot hole is too big, it would be a simple matter for a machine shop to
fabricate a bushing to adapt. Some Jaguars come with such a bushing, EAC4382; perhaps this bushing can be used to
adapt an aftermarket clutch. Its ID is 5/8”, OD is 3/4”. Michael Neal suggests you be sure the bushing is correct and
necessary before pressing it into the clutch, since it can be difficult to remove.
David M. Johnson found a substitute, a Hayden 2747. “This is a Ford/GM heavy duty clutch, all the dimensions match
except it is a little longer, i.e. the clutch bolts on directly with no modifications. The existing fan will bolt directly to the
clutch. The advantage of this clutch is that it will turn at 90% of the pulley RPM. The standard duty units only turn at
75% of the pulley RPM.”
Now, if you have replaced your yellow fan with the later design black plastic fan -- or wisely plan to (see the section on
fan cracking on page 214) -- Johnson has bad news: “The two fans (yellow and black) are interchangeable if you have
the original Jag fan coupling. The GM fan coupling I stated was a replacement only works with the yellow fan because
the centre boss is a larger diameter (approx 7.5 inches). The black fan is OK with the jag clutch coupling, but will not fit
the GM fan clutch substitute, because the black fan centre boss is only 6.5 inches diameter, i.e. the GM fan clutch fouls
with the fan blades. I went out this weekend in search of a clutch coupling for the black fan, but cannot get an exact
match with the Jag original, because all the ones that fit the bolt holes and centre boss are more than 6.5 inches in
diameter.” Understandably, the original style fan is no longer available, so obtaining a new one of the crack-prone
design is not an option.
Of course, another option would be to find a fan from some other car and make it fit the clutch and the car. One
possibility: the XJ6 fan! This fan looks just like the original white XJ-S fan, complete with the hub that provides enough
space for a substitute clutch, but the OD is larger -- 17-3/4” as opposed to the 17” fan used on the XJ-S. So, you’ll
have to trim 3/8” off the tip of each blade and then rebalance it.
Another possibility may be to modify the later design black plastic fan. The design of this fan involves a plastic cylinder
with the blades protruding outward, but the blades also protrude inward perhaps a half inch. It’s these inward217
protruding stubs that cause the interference with the larger generic fan clutches. Emile Desroches reports that carefully
marking and trimming these stubs will permit fitting the Hayden 2747 clutch described above: “I used a Dremel
"MotoTool" which is a small hand held grinder designed for hobby work and a small circular saw blade, but it can be
done with a sharp knife or a file if you're patient. This procedure takes about an hour. I feel the results (needle well
below N) are more than worth the grief of the installation.”
Another alternative for using a non-OEM fan clutch: You can usually find a way to use whatever fan was originally
designed to mate to the clutch you are using -- which means you don’t have to restrict yourself to clutches with the same
fan bolt pattern. A procedure is described below.
1.
Go to your local junkyard and buy a fan that fits the clutch, basic Ford or Chevy; preferably with
unequally-spaced blades (reduces whine) and preferably with aluminum blades (easier to cut).
2.
Trim the tips of the new fan until it is the same diameter as the original. After cutting, round the
corners and file the edges for safety.
3.
Bolt the sucker together and check for interferences. Noted possible interferences include the water
pump pulley and an oil line across the bottom. The oil line may be bent and repositioned, or both
interferences may be corrected by trimming or notching the blades. Obviously, trim all blades exactly
the same way. It’s helpful to cut out a cardboard template the shape of one blade and use it to mark
each blade for trimming.
4.
Remove the fan from the clutch. Set the fan on razor blades centered on opposing bolt holes to check
the balance. Trim a little metal from the blades on the heavy side until it balances. Rotate 90° and
balance the other way. Make sure it balances both ways when completed.
A fan clutch that has the same pilot hole diameter, a slightly longer shaft length, and a different fan bolt pattern was
found at AutoZone. It is made by Imperial, part number 215038. Since the offset of the mounting flange of the
junkyard-purchased fan was less, the fan blades themselves end up in exactly the same place. The longer shaft also
makes it a lot easier to get the mounting bolts in. It is believed this clutch, with a modified fan from a junkyard, will fit
all the XJ-S’s from 8/79 on.
Since the aftermarket clutch was designed to turn a 19” fan while the original turned a 17”, the aftermarket clutch
engages more forcefully than the original. This assembly will therefore make more noise (whoosh) than the original.
But it will reliably keep the engine cool.
Some aftermarket fan clutches come with a lifetime warranty. But even if yours doesn’t, you still can replace it much
more easily next time, since you will already have a suitable fan and/or bushing.
FAN BEARING: The fan on an XJ-S is mounted on a dedicated bearing instead of on the water pump as in most frontengined RWD cars. The bearing appears to be similar to those found in several types of water pump, except the shaft on
one end is too short to mount anything on. Perhaps a suitable water pump bearing can be found and the unused portion
of shaft cut off (be careful not to get the shaft too hot and damage the seals!). Since finding the bearing itself may be
hard, perhaps the most expedient procurement method would be to buy a suitable rebuilt pump, remove the bearing,
throw the remains of the new pump along with the shot Jag bearing back in the box and return it for the core refund.
Some rebuilt pumps available in auto parts shops are really cheap.
A better alternative is to chuck the engine-driven fan and install an electric fan as described below.
IDLER PULLEY BEARING: The repair manuals indicate that the idler pulley for the fan drive belt is attached to its
support arm with a nut within a recess on the back side. On the author’s ’83, the assembly looks just like the pictures
except there is no nut; the end of the shaft is flush with the surface within the recess. Apparently the bearing itself is not
intended to be replaceable; the parts suppliers offer only the entire arm/pulley assembly, EAC8097.
Bernie Embden reports that the early arms were made of aluminum; later idler arms are iron. Bernie's car is a '78 (and
218
has a nut), so apparently the early design was used at least that late. Mike Morrin has two early cars and one has a nut
and the other does not, but both have aluminum arms, so there are apparently at least three configurations: Aluminum
with nut, aluminum without nut, and iron without nut. “The 1980 XJ-S parts catalogue shows the part number of the
assembly as being C39875, with no separate part numbers for the pulley or arm (and no nut).” This might be the
aluminum without nut part number, with the EAC8097 reflecting the change to iron.
Daniel Pontes had a shot bearing in the idler pulley, and rebuilt the water pump thinking that’s where the noise came
from. “This pulley mounts on the water pump so a stethescope is useless. Disconnecting belts and running the
engine is also a waste of time. The only way to track the source is a manual shake with your hands on each and every
pulley.
“A few phone calls later I find out that this pulley is very costly and very hard to come by. Since it is only the bearing
that goes I thought it should be no problem to put a new one in. Yea right!! My fix1.
find a new FAG bearing # W52315-1.
2.
Have your machine shop press out the old bearing out of the pulley, mark which side faces the
front.
3.
The shaft is only peened onto the arm, it comes out easy enough.
4.
The new bearing has a long and short shaft on either side of the outer race. This is a water pump
bearing and the shaft is the inner race.
5.
Have the machinist chuck the long end into a lathe and dress the short shaft to fit into the idler arm.
6.
Press the pulley back on with the front side facing the front.
7.
The goal is to get the pulley as close as possible to the arm without rubbing.
8.
Press the pulley with the new bearing into the idler arm.
9.
Do not peen this bearing onto the arm. It will break. TIG weld it into place-- it can always be
drilled out if it fails again.
10.
Cut the long end of the bearing shaft as close as possible to the outer race of the bearing and dress
it .
11.
Install your new idler.”
Of course, welding is not likely to be good for the seals and lubricants within that bearing or the temper of the shaft -and would be especially difficult if the arm is aluminum. Perhaps while the machinist is working on dressing that shaft,
he can provide a retention scheme -- like threading it for a nut.
Note that the fan clears the front of this assembly by only a small amount, so it may be advisable to check the clearance
of the new assembly by spinning the fan around by hand before starting the engine.
Michael Aines wrote: "I have had 2 of these go out in 115,000 miles. My last replacement came from Welch
Enterprises. It is not the original part, and requires some fiddling to install. However, it has a replaceable bearing,
unlike the original, so not only is it cheaper to buy, it can be repaired even more cheaply in the future."
This may start sounding like a broken record, but rather than repair the idler bearing, you might consider tossing the
entire engine-driven fan scheme and installing an electric fan as described below.
ELECTRIC FAN SUBSTITUTION FOR BELT-DRIVEN FAN: The best solution for fan clutch problems, cracked
fan blade problems, and idler pulley problems is to install a large electric fan (or two large electric fans) and remove the
fan, clutch, mounting assembly (shaft & bearings), belt, and idler pulley altogether -- and perhaps the little stock electric
fan as well. The Jag V12 is a hot beast, so the biggest electric fans that will fit should be used; a single 16”, dual 14”s,
etc. One benefit: we have all heard stories about how much power the belt-driven fan uses or even how much the belt
itself uses, but the 16” electric fans typically draw about 10 amps -- meaning they use only about 1/8 horsepower when
219
they are on. And if you control them properly, they’re not on when not needed.
There are lots of places to purchase electric fans. Most local auto parts stores carry them, as well as J. C. Whitney (page
694). Some of the best selections are from Jeg’s (page 717) or Summit Racing (page 720). Harry Trafford points out
there are at least two retailers on the www that specialize in electric fans:
Fluidyne:
http://www.fluidyne.com/
Scotts Cooling Fans:
http://scottscoolingfans.com/
1-800-272-3267
If you are shopping for a new fan, note that the Imperial brand electric fans are reportedly unreliable; you’d be well
advised to avoid that make. Ed Hyatt: “I have had two Imperials fail and the problem was the glue that they use to hold
the magnets to the case. The glue fails and the magnet attaches itself to the rotor, shorting out everything and blowing
the fuse.”
Also note that Hayden 16” fans come in two models, one with considerably higher airflow than the other. The high
airflow model has comparable airflow to most other aftermarket 16” fans, but is more expensive than most. The lower
airflow model is comparably priced with the others, but its airflow is pathetic by comparison. Haydens are reportedly
very quiet, though, perhaps due to their sickle-shaped blades. One more concern here is that the two different models
are visually almost identical, and on store shelves it’s entirely possible that someone has switched fans around in the
boxes in order to get the high airflow fan for the lower price -- leaving you to pay the higher price for the low airflow
model without even knowing you’re getting gypped.
One thing to look for in electric fans: a grille to keep your fingers out of it. Some have it, some don’t. If you’re the kind
of person that worries about such things, you might want the grille. The rest of us most definitely do not want the grille,
since it reduces the airflow by a considerable amount.
Peter Cohen offers another possibility: “Went shopping in the wrecking yard the other day. I came home with a 16"
electric fan from an '83 Buick Regal ($20). This fan has a ring on the outer edge that is attached to the fan blades, and
rotates with it. It is secured by three metal rods that go from the motor housing to two points on the lower radiator
support brace, and one to the upper support brace. Interestingly, it also uses a ballast resistor, and 3 wires. One wire is
ground, one goes through the ballast resistor, and one bypasses the ballast resistor, presumably to make a two speed
fan.” This author visited his local junkyard and found similar fans in a Delta 88, a LeSabre, and a Toronado, except that
they had plastic support structures instead of the metal tripod. All had the same resistor arrangement for two speeds.
The key is apparently to look for large FWD GM cars with a transverse-mounted V6, but note that the exact same fan
can also be found on the V6 Pontiac Fiero. Smaller FWD GM cars have a 14” electric fan, and RWD GM cars use beltdriven fans. The GM electric fans are not very compact; the total depth is around 5 inches, as compared to about 3
inches for a typical aftermarket electric fan, but once the stock belt-driven fan and support are removed there is plenty of
room in the XJ-S. Tip: take a 10mm socket and ratchet with you to the junkyard. Note: the GM fans do not have a
grille to keep fingers out.
When you buy an electric fan from a reputable junkyard, they will typically mark it. That way, you can take it home, test
it and see if it works properly, and bring it back if it doesn’t and exchange it for another. This is actually a better policy
than some stores that sell new parts, since many places have a no-return policy on electrical stuff. Needless to say, you
are advised to test any and all electric fans as soon as you can, perhaps using jumper cables; you don’t want to fabricate
shrouds, bracketry and wiring and then find out the fan doesn’t work.
Electric fans can sometimes be mounted on the front of the radiator (if you can deal with the diagonal strut on the XJ-S),
opening up considerable working room in the engine compartment. Many aftermarket fans are designed to be installed
on either side of the radiator; to mount in front, typically the blade must be removed, turned around, and reinstalled, and
the wiring must be reversed to run the motor in the “blow” direction rather than the “suck” direction. Note that a fan on
the front side and blowing should have a minimal shroud so as not to block air flowing into the radiator due to vehicle
motion, but a fan on the back side and sucking needs a larger shroud to draw air from a large area of the radiator. The
shroud that’s integral with an aftermarket electric fan is usually inadequate for use on the back side; what’s really needed
is a rectangular shroud to cover the entire radiator -- or, if multiple electric fans are used, an entire section of the
radiator.
220
Installation of electric fans requires more thought than simply slapping a fan in there. For example, consider the space
between the A/C condenser and the radiator: with a blower fan in front, the air might come through the condenser, go
sideways within this space, and come back out forwards through a different part of the condenser -- providing excellent
A/C but leaving the engine uncooled. Similarly, a sucking fan can pull air from the engine compartment through the
radiator backwards, across the space, and back through the radiator to the fan -- leaving the A/C condenser without
airflow, and eventually overheating the engine from recirculating the same air over and over. If the space between the
condenser and radiator is open to outside, things get even worse. In the XJ-S, one tempting possibility is to mount one
16” electric fan in the existing shroud on the right side of the radiator (replacing the stock belt-driven fan), and a second
16” fan on the left front of the radiator blowing through the A/C condenser; this would make sure that both coils get
airflow. Another possibility is to just replace the belt-driven fan with an electric and leave the small electric fan and the
entire shroud assembly as stock.
John Napoli went this latter route, and reports on the process: “Removing all the stock stuff is a bit of a pain -- there is
not much room to work, the process is iterative -- but it all comes out. You’ll have to replace a couple of the water
pump bolts that went through the idler pulley bracket with shorter bolts. Remove the radiator while you are at it to
clean out the leaves in between the rad and the condenser -- I seem to recall that if you pull the rad first it is easier to get
out the stock fan.
“I kept the stock electric fan and added the second inside the shroud of the old mechanical fan. The fan shroud is split
from the factory (little fan and big fan) so this is real easy. I used an ‘S’ bladed fan from a Hot Rod supplier - 1-800-strtrod or some such - it is the largest one they had (17” or 18”). Any fan of similar size should be fine; you can get them
from Pep Boys or JCWhitney. Be sure to run the fan before installing it. Some are out of balance. Mine was, and you
would not believe how annoying it is! I had to balance the blade (wrapped solder around the light spots and used
weatherstrip adhesive to lock it in place) but it would have been better to start with a perfect unit.
“I made brackets to hang it off of the stock shroud. It fits in there nicely and the underhood appearance and access is
improved. Do not under any circumstances attach the fan to the radiator core with those silly little plastic thingies! The
Jag radiator is softly mounted to absorb vibration. Use those shortcuts, and the new fan will quickly work loose.
“Performance has been fine as measured on accurate mechanical water temperature gauges. I like overkill, though, and
may some day add one or two little pushers in front of the condenser.” Note: a better way to evaluate fan adequacy
would be to measure the temperature of the air coming through. A marginal capacity fan may keep the coolant within
limits but the air coming through the radiator will be really hot, while an excessive amount of airflow will reduce how
much the air heats up. Of course, comparisons would have to be done on similar days with the engine running under
similar conditions.
This author also installed a 16” electric fan in place of the belt-driven fan, but went a slightly different route than Napoli.
Rather than adapting an electric fan to the opening in the existing shroud, a new section of shroud was fabricated. This
is remarkably easy, since the XJ-S shroud is actually two sections, with the left 1/3 containing the small electric fan and a
set of flaps while the right 2/3 has the hole for the belt-driven fan. By keeping the left 1/3 but making a new right 2/3, it
was possible to provide a hole the correct diameter to fit the electric fan. The right 2/3 piece of the shroud was made at
a sheet metal shop by merely folding three sides of a flat piece of sheet metal, and cost $20. There are photos of this
installation on the www at
http://www.jag-lovers.org/xj-s/book/ElecFan.html
Duncan Williamson: “I dumped the fan clutch / fan from my car and used a pair of electric fans from a Honda (I think it
was an Integra). They came complete with the plastic mounting frame which is the same size as an XJ-S radiator. The
whole assembly is attached to the radiator frame with 6 large nylon ties. I also picked up the thermostatic switch and
soldered it into the bottom of the radiator (near the bottom hose). I now have really good cooling in traffic and the
whole fitting exercise took about half a day. The fan motors are very flat so fitting/clearances were not a problem. They
cost next to nothing, look very tidy and may well be a viable option.”
If you are removing the stock mechanical fan bearing support, you will need two studs 4-1/4” long with 5/16”-18
(coarse) threads on one end to continue to hold the water pump properly. The other end of each stud can be either
coarse or fine thread, since it gets a nut and you can use whatever nut matches. Good luck finding such studs!
221
Alternatively, you can use threaded rod cut to length, or you can cut the original stud shorter and thread it. Or, you can
just stack washers on the existing stud if you don’t need clearance in the area for the motor on your electric fan. You
will also need two 5/16”-18 bolts 1” long, but those are easy to find.
Even though the addition of an electric fan may reduce the total hp drain on the engine, it will definitely add to the load
on the alternator. If you have a Lucas alternator with 66 or 75 amp capacity, this mod may push the total electrical load
over the alternator capacity; when the A/C compressor kicks on and brings on both electric radiator fans with it, the
system voltage drops and the lights dim. Hence, it might prove necessary to replace the Lucas alternator with the later
115-amp Bosch (see page 574) or a 100+ amp GM (see page 576) to maintain voltage under all operating conditions.
CONTROLLING ELECTRIC FANS: Electric fans can be controlled by either of several mechanisms. The simplest
method is to wire the fans to run whenever the ignition is on. This is wasteful, however, since the fans are only needed
when the car is standing still or moving slowly. It also may cause the engine to run cold, or take too long to warm up, in
cold weather.
The electric fans could also be connected to the existing electric fan control system, which automatically operates when
the engine is hot or when the air conditioner compressor is operating. Note that replacing the single tiny fan with a
couple big ones requires more electrical work than simply installing a larger fuse in the #1 position in the headlight
fusebox; the stock wiring, even if it doesn’t burn up, will provide too much resistance and the fans won’t run as fast as
they should. Some suitably heavy wiring should be run from the bus on the firewall to the new fans, using a separate
relay for each fan. Napoli: “I wired the new fan simply: I added a relay that is picked up by the stock (ie, little) fan
coming on. The power for the new fan is routed through the relay from one of the 12 volt feeder wires located near the
relays at the upper rear corner of the right fender. You can get fancy and route alternative feeds from the A/C
compressor or a dashboard switch, but if you do you may need a diode to prevent backfeeding something else.”
Yet another possibility is to add another fan switch into the coolant system. Jaguar makes a suitable housing for a
switch for the Mk III E-type, C34005, that fits into a radiator hose, or maybe you could get lucky and find a switch that
will fit one of the unused ports in the water rails on top of the heads. Or, there are switches sold for electric fans that
just strap to the outside of a pipe, so you could just attach it to one of the coolant pipes -- or oil pipes, for that matter.
With any such switch, one of two fans can be connected to the stock wiring and the other to a separate switch. This
would result in the two fans operating separately, and only one running when only a small amount of airflow is needed
(since one fan will always come on before the other). The dual circuit also provides a measure of redundancy, since one
of the fans would provide some cooling in the event of the failure of the other circuit.
The fans could also be controlled via an air temperature sensor in the air coming through the radiator. This method is
often used by the aftermarket fans, providing a switch that mounts right on the fan housing. Note that if the fans are
mounted in front of the radiator, the sensor must be moved to behind the radiator to work properly. This method scares
me, since I always wonder what would happen if there is no air coming through the radiator -- like, the car is stuck in
traffic and there’s a slight breeze from behind.
Yet another control system would be to provide a “paddle” switch that shuts the fans off when the airflow due to car
motion is adequate. There don’t appear to be any such items commercially available, but making one would not be
difficult. A pivot with a paddle on one side and a tiny counterweight on the other, balanced to eliminate inertia effects,
could be installed in the area behind the front grille. The arrangement could be rigged to operate a conventional
microswitch with contact ratings sufficient to operate the fans directly, or a relay could be incorporated. Using an
ohmmeter or a light bulb, the car can be tested and the switch adjusted until it operates at a suitable speed, about 30-40
mph. This system would still operate the fans when the engine was cold, but would function properly with the air
conditioner; the air conditioner requires airflow when running even when the engine is cold, but the motion of the car
above 30 mph will be adequate; turning the fans off is OK.
Finally, remember that you can use a combination of the above schemes; for example, you could use a paddle switch
along with a temperature sensor to prevent the fan from operating when moving fast or when the engine is cold.
If the control scheme used allows any possibility that the fans will be off when the car is idling, be sure to incorporate
circuitry to run at least one fan (preferably all fans) whenever the air conditioner compressor is operating (similar to the
222
present wiring for the small stock electric fan). On some later XJ-S’s, the small stock electric fan does not come on with
the compressor, but remember that this is assuming a belt-driven fan that is always turning; regardless of the stock
wiring, if the belt-driven fan is removed you must provide fan operation when the A/C compressor is engaged, regardless
of engine temperature or outdoor temperature.
One final note: another nice feature of electric fans is their ability to run after the engine is shut off. The biggest heat
problem in the XJ-S is heat soak after shutdown. The small electric fan already can provide some relief if the coolant is
hot enough for it to be on when the car is shut down, but having multiple electric fans and multiple control schemes
provides more possibilities for addressing this issue. It might even make sense to provide an air temperature sensor at
the upper rear of the engine compartment to control post-shutdown fan operation. Or, maybe using a hot-start sensor in
the fuel rail to control a fan would help with hot starts more than the way it’s normally used (to alter fuelling).
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN: Here we’re talking about the small OEM electric fan, not the replacements for the belt
driven fan described above. Yes, the original Bosch fan is atrociously expensive. But it doesn’t do anything any other
12V, 11” diameter electric fan won’t do; substitutions are in order. Ideally, you’d like to include a system of rubber
mounts, similar to the Jag originals, to minimize noise.
One possibility is to buy the 11” electric fan from J. C. Whitney, 38xx3020A, remove the fan/motor from the shroud it
comes in and figure out how to mount it. Depth won’t be a problem, it’s really flat. But you don’t really have a good
opportunity to look at it before you buy it to decide if you can make it fit.
John Himes says, “I am using a Hayden pancake style fan & motor. Their 12" model fits inside of the current shroud for
the 11" Bosch fan. There are four mounting points on the Hayden that I had to remove. I used a few self-tapping
screws to secure the fan inside of the shroud. It has been in use for three years or so with no problems.”
If you’d rather shop at the junkyard, a Subaru fan will work with minor blade trimming and a homemade mounting
adapter plate. In fact, there are probably dozens of electric fans from small cars that can be used here. Many small
Japanese cars come with two small electric fans, one that’s standard for the car and another that comes with the air
conditioning option -- and these two fans are different, giving you two options from the same car.
Alex Dorne fit an electric fan from a Saab 900 Turbo and says it “replaced, and even looked better, than the original
when in place. The diameter was perfect, giving about 1/4 of an inch air around the propeller. And after removing a
metal protective ring around the prop I could use what was left of the mount and bolt the fan to the shroud using the
upper rh and lower holes. I also think this fan flows more than the original since it’s designed to cool a Turbo engine all
by itself.”
“The Turbo fan motor is flatter than on the non-Turbo because the lack of space between the radiator and the engine...
the flatter design leaves even more space between the fan and the engine in the Jag than the original fan did.”
The author used a fan from a Mercedes sedan of some sort. This was a “puller” style fan, but in the Mercedes it had
been installed in a “pusher” location, in front of the radiator. It was the only fan cooling the Mercedes; small but
extremely powerful, far more powerful than the OEM Jaguar fan. It was also very ruggedly constructed. It did require
some bracket fabrication to hold it in place.
Duncan Smith says, “UK list subscribers may be interested to know that the fan from an MGB will fit with only a couple
of minor mods (the shaft needs shortening and a hole drilling through it). The substitute fan was £40.
“One (big?) drawback is that the rear of the motor housing is open, unlike that on the Jag motor (not that its being
sealed protected mine from corroding and finally seizing!). My mechanic sealed it up with tape which he swore would
be good for the life of the car (maybe he's dropping a hint ;-). I am not entirely convinced, but given the price of the Jag
part and the age of my car I am not too bothered...”
John Goodman reports that the XJR-S has a different 11” fan than the basic XJ-S: “Seven blades high CFM part no.
EBC 4553. No part no. listed for the fan shroud so would imagine it could be retrofitted.” You can draw your own
conclusions about why Jaguar would go to the effort of providing a different fan.
223
ELECTRIC RADIATOR FAN SWITCH: There are apparently at least three different switches that have been used in
the XJ-S. Up through VIN 101854 (mid-’79), switch EAC1322 pressed into a rubber grommet in the water pump inlet.
I think this type of switch is called an “otter switch”. From VIN 101855 to VIN 151087, switch EAC2510 threaded
into roughly the same location on the pump inlet, so clearly the pump inlet was changed to provide a threaded hole.
After VIN 151087, switch DBC2145 was used. It is unknown what the difference between the last two switches is,
since they both fit into a threaded hole; perhaps they turn the fan on at different temperatures. Peter Cohen says, “The
thermal fan switch from my ’89 XJ-S says 85º C. It also says 909-6 and EAC2510.”
The difference between EAC2510 and DBC2145 might also be in the connector styles. Cohen reports: “Beck-Arnley
lists the same part number for the 85-91 XJ-S V12 as for the 88-90 XJ40. This part is actually an XJ40 part. It has two
wires that are potted into the switch itself, leading to a cylindrical plastic connector (2 inches long by 1 inch diameter).
This part can be used in the XJ-S V12 by cutting off the connector, and attaching blade connectors to the switch wiring.
This part may also be correct for the 92-96 4.0L XJS 6 cyl.
“The Jaguar dealer quoted $122.50 for the XJ-S switch. The Beck-Arnley part is just under $30. Here are the catalog
listings for some other sources for XJ40 fan switches that should be in the same price range:
Beck-Arnley
XJ40 and 85-91 V12
201-1151
Four Seasons (Division of Standard Motor Parts)
XJ40
36538
NAPA
88-90 XJ40
FS-222
Note that the original switch has connectors right on it -- which is a real pain to get the spade connectors on and off of.
Since this XJ40 switch has wires that you put spade connectors on the end of, it should be easier to connect the harness
to.
Would the XJ40 switch replace both the DBC2145 and the EAC2510? Unknown. However, Cohen claims the elbow
itself, EAC3195, apparently didn’t change, so it should thread in.
If you have an early car, do you really want to put in a new otter switch? Well, if it were my car, I wouldn’t. Instead,
I’d consider buying a new pump inlet EAC3195 (or threading the hole in the original inlet where the rubber grommet
went) and fitting the later switch. Failing that, it may be possible to wrap a piece of bailing wire around the inlet elbow
to securely hold the otter switch in place, but make sure that the bailing wire doesn’t short out the connectors on the
switch.
ELECTRIC RADIATOR FAN RELAY: As mentioned on page 563, the electric radiator fan relay is an SPDT relay
(red to indicate it’s different), meaning it has a central fifth terminal labelled 87a - a NC contact. In this particular
application the 87 contact is 12V power and the 87a contact is connected directly to ground. As a result, if a relay with
two 87 terminals or one 87 and one 87b terminal is plugged in, a direct short will result and fuse #1 in the headlamp
fusebox will blow immediately.
The NC contact shorts the fan motor to ground when not operating. It’s not known why Jaguar did this. If a 4-terminal
relay that has no center spade terminal is installed, the system seems to work fine; the fan operates normally when on,
and the fact that the fan is not grounded when off doesn’t seem to make any noticeable difference. However, it seems
unlikely that Jaguar would have gone to the effort of supplying the grounding circuit without a good reason.
ELECTRIC FAN DIODE PACK: The blue item mounted on the top left side of the engine compartment just rearward
of the diagonal strut looks like a relay, and has the same spade terminal layout as a relay, but it’s not a relay at all; it’s the
diode pack for the electric fan. The terminals are numbered simply 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. You can easily pry the box open
224
with a small screwdriver and inspect the layout inside.
Diodes merely allow current in one direction only. When testing this pack, you should be able to get current to flow
from terminal 3 to terminal 1 but not the other way around. You should also be able to get current to flow from
terminal 5 to terminal 4 and from terminal 2 to terminal 4, but not the other way on either. This description uses the
accepted definition of current as flowing “from” a + terminal to a - terminal. Note that some meters may not incite a
diode to flow in either direction when set to a standard ohmmeter setting; if the meter does not have a setting for testing
diodes, it might be better to use a battery and a light bulb to test.
In case you haven’t developed a healthy disrespect for Lucas engineering yet, here’s another example of their
handiwork: the wires that connect to terminals 1 and 3 are both GN, but they are different and you’d better not mix them
up! Likewise, the wires that connect to terminals 2 and 4 are both LG, but don’t mix those up either!
If you’ve already disconnected them and gotten confused: on the author’s ’83, the GN wire that connects to terminal 1 is
actually two wires attached to the same spade connector, while the GN that connects to terminal 3 is a single wire.
Likewise, the LG wire that connects to terminal 2 is actually a pair of wires, while the LG that connects to terminal 4 is a
single wire. Here’s hoping other cars are the same!
I will describe more elaborate tests, in case the above proves inadequate. If you apply 12V to a GN wire and the electric
radiator fan starts running, that wire connects to terminal 1. If the clutch on the A/C compressor engages, it connects to
terminal 3. If the engine is cold and you turn the ignition on and read 12V at a LG wire, it connects to terminal 2; if not,
either a fuse is blown or it connects to terminal 4.
Just when you thought you had these things figured out, Jaguar goes and does something totally unexplainable. Michel
Carpentier reports on the diode pack in his Daimler Double Six: “The blue box is clearly the same as described in your
book: one diode with anode in 3 and cathode in 1; two diodes with anodes in 2 and 5, common cathode in 4. But it
provides the logic for the headlamp wash/wipe system. 2 is connected to a blue/red wire (high beam), 5 to a blue/white
wire (low beam), 4 goes to terminal 85 of the wash/wipe relay via a blue/red wire. 1 has a green/blue wire going to one
of the washer pump terminals. 3 has two green wires, live when ignition is on. Terminal 86 of the headlamp wash/wipe
relay is connected to the other terminal of the washer pump (common to windshield and headlights) and to the
windshield washer switch. When you push the windshield washer switch, terminal 86 of the headlamp wash/wipe relay
is grounded and the pump operates via diode 1/3. If the headlights are off you get normal windshield washer operation.
If they are on (either low beam or high beam) 4 is live so the relay is energized: the headlamp wiper motors kick in and
valves open, squirting fluid on the outer headlights. Much ado for a perfectly useless gadget!
“Back to the cooling fan. Against the radiator is a small harness which comprises the following: A green/brown wire
running from a connector on the RHS of the radiator (said connector linked to A/C compressor clutch) to terminal 86 of
the red fan relay. Somewhere in between, this wire is cut and a small PCB (about 30x8mm) holding a diode soldered in,
with the cathode towards the relay. Terminal 86 of the red fan relay is also connected to the thermostatic switch by a
green/white wire. A black wire connects terminals 85 and 87A to ground. A brown/green wire comes from the main
harness on the LHS (live at all times) and goes to terminal 87. Another small PCB (exactly 32x10mm) is also buried
inside the harness. It holds two diodes with a common cathode connected to the thermostatic switch by a green/orange
wire. One anode has a red wire going to terminal 30/51 and thence to the fan motor. The other anode is connected to
the main harness by a green wire (live when ignition is on). This harness is held together by the usual weaving:
outwardly there is no way you can tell that it is so electronically sophisticated as to contain 3 diodes!”
Craig Sawyers says, “Curiously, it seems that some detail went into the choice of diodes in the fan control and headlamp
wiper circuits (the blue box with four terminals). The diodes are all soft recovery devices, which are specifically
designed to eliminate fast voltage spikes when they switch off (caused by junction capacitance in the diode itself). I took
the lid off just out of curiosity some time ago, and they are all quite distinctive (BUV something or other). When I
looked them up they are quite specifically soft recovery diodes each with different ratings, designed to reduce the
transient interference when they switch off. I was quite surprised at the obvious care that had been taken in the choice of
components.”
Peter Cohen talks about the later cars: “The facelift model cars have a different setup to the 1991 and earlier cars. The
later cars have a completely different diode pack. It will be in approximately the same location. Most relays are
225
manufactured by Hella or Bosch. If you see a component made by someone other than Hella or Bosch in that general
vicinity, it is worth a look. It will have one BG and two LG wires.”
LATE MODEL ELECTRIC FAN OPERATION: Bruce Segal reports: “I believe Jaguar changed the design in 89 so
that the fans no longer come on with the A/C compressor.” Wise? Many owners don’t think so, and rewire the fan the
way the earlier cars were wired so the small electric fan comes on with the compressor. You can read all about the
benefits of optimum airflow through the A/C condenser on page 516.
FAN SHROUDS: The fan shrouds ensure that air drawn by the fans comes through the radiator rather than other
places. If the fan shroud is not installed properly and held securely against the back of the radiator, then air from the
engine compartment can be drawn in by the fans. This short-circuits the airflow and reduces the amount of air coming
through the radiator.
Anytime there are two fans and one may be on while the other is off, it is also important that the fan shrouds provide a
separation between the two so that air draw by the running one doesn’t simply come backwards through the non-running
one.
FAN SHROUD FLAPS: At the lower left corner of the XJ-S fan shroud are a couple of rubber flaps. These are
designed to allow air to flow rearward through the openings in the shroud but not forward. At speed, the air coming in
the front of the car and through the radiator merely blows these flaps open. At a standstill, when the fans are trying to
draw air through the radiator, these flaps shut to prevent the fans from drawing air from the engine compartment instead.
They’re as simple as they look. If they are damaged or missing, it is easy enough to make replacement flaps from an old
inner tube, or even old shoe leather.
FOAM IN AIR PATHS: In order to ensure that air coming in the front of the car goes through the radiator, any
passages around the radiator must be plugged; air would much rather take an easy route, so even a small gap will allow
a large portion of the airflow to bypass the actual heat transfer area. Also note that the space between the radiator and
the A/C condenser/oil cooler must be sealed all around, so that the fans draw air through the A/C coil and oil cooler
rather than in through a leak path. And, of course, air coming in the front of the car should be compelled to go through
the A/C condenser/oil cooler rather than sneaking past it as well.
There is a second reason to apply the foam in the nooks and crannies around the A/C condenser and oil cooler. As
mentioned on page 202, the space in between the condenser/oil cooler and the radiator itself is often found to be
plugged up with debris. While the difference in coarseness between the condenser/oil cooler and the radiator may permit
a particular range of grit sizes to get in there, the fact is that this space is usually found to be full of leaves -- far too large
to have passed through the condenser coils. They can only be getting in there by sneaking through openings that should
have been plugged with foam.
Jaguar used foam to plug some of these openings -- a British nonmetallic material. If your radiator seems to have no
such foam anymore, Thomas Alberts says, “Most of the mail order places do not carry these "gaskets" (as they are called
in the parts book), however they can be purchased from Jaguar dealers for a few bucks. The part numbers (for my 1987
XJ-S) were CAC2321 for the side and CAC3821 top & bottom.”
Alternatively, go to the building supply store and purchase one package of 2-1/4” x 2-1/4” x 42” foam intended for
sealing window air conditioners and at least one package (maybe two) of 1/2” thick 3/4” wide weatherstripping foam
tape. For the tape, you may have a choice between “open-cell poly” and “closed-cell vinyl”; either will probably work
fine. You may also buy a couple other thicknesses of foam weatherstripping while you’re there, just in case.
Doing a proper sealing job is easier if you have a lot of stuff apart in this area. For example, having the fan shrouds
removed helps, and having the radiator upper support rail off is also a big help. Ideally, do this job while you have the
226
radiator itself out. But if you’re not doing that kind of work today, don’t postpone sealing the openings until you do; do
your best with what you can, and if necessary buy some more foam later when you have things apart.
If you have the radiator out, start by applying the foam tape to seal the bottom of the radiator between the rubber
support grommets and outboard of the grommets to prevent air from sneaking by under the radiator.
Cutting the 2-1/4” foam with a razor knife, install a piece on either side of the radiator to fill the huge gaps there. Install
the foam in front of the radiator itself, beside the A/C condenser/oil cooler. If positioned properly, it will seal against
both by fitting snugly against the ends of the A/C condenser and against the front of the header on each end of the
radiator. Make sure the pieces stand high enough that the upper radiator support rail sits down on them when installed.
The foam can be fit behind the supports for the front bumper crash absorbers all right, but you’ll have to end it where the
pipes connect to the oil cooler. Then cut a couple more chunks from the remainder of the 2-1/4” foam to fill in the
openings under the pipes to the oil cooler.
From the remainder of the 2-1/4” foam, cut a piece about 6” long and then cut it lengthwise at a slight angle to create
two wedge-shaped pieces of foam. Use these to fill in the space on each side near the top where the 2-1/4” foam wasn’t
fat enough to completely fill in the space. If you have wiring or hoses passing through here, you can arrange them to go
between the pieces of foam so they are nicely supported. You can cut suitable recesses in the pieces of foam to make
way for the freon line coming around the top right end of the radiator.
Looking through the lower grille in front of the car, you will notice that there are two more gaps created by the fact that
the oil cooler is not as long as the A/C condenser. Cut two blocks of foam and insert them by reaching right through the
grille.
There is also a gap between the bottom of the A/C condenser and the top of the oil cooler. This gap should be plugged,
even though it never was originally. This seems counterintuitive, since it’s directly in front of the radiator and it would
seem that plugging this gap would reduce airflow through the radiator. That’s not the problem, though; the problem,
besides allowing air to bypass the A/C condenser and the oil cooler, is that this gap allows leaves and other debris to
pass through and get lodged in the space between the radiator and the oil cooler. This has proven to be a far more
serious concern for XJ-S owners than any reduction in airflow that might result from sealing this gap. Fortunately,
sealing the gap is really easy; just cut a piece of weatherstripping to a suitable length and cram it in there. If you use
weatherstripping that’s perhaps twice the width of the gap, it’ll stay in place just by friction; there’s no need for the
adhesive on the weatherstripping to stick to anything.
If the upper radiator support rail is off, make sure to seal it against the top of the radiator, against the top of the A/C
condenser, and against the top of the fan shroud before reinstalling it. The top of the A/C condenser in particular may
have such a huge opening that it doesn’t even appear sealable; you may need to stack 1/2” foam tape two or three layers
high to fill the hole.
FRONT SPOILER: It’s important to have the front spoiler in place. Engine cooling relies on air coming in through the
radiator, and it must have a place to go. The XJ-S does not have vents through the hood or out the sides, so all this air
must go out the bottom. The front spoiler is designed to direct air either into the radiator or around the sides of the car,
and to restrict air from going under the nose of the car as much as possible. This results in low pressure under the car,
so the air going through the engine compartment can easily flow out that way.
However, if the spoiler is missing, air can flow right under the nose of the car unimpeded. This increases the pressure
under the front of the car, which in turn resists the outflow from the engine compartment. The air coming in through the
radiator cannot escape as easily, and builds up pressure in the engine compartment. The resulting backpressure prevents
as much air flowing through the radiator. It also tends to cause significant lift on the front end (try multiplying a very
small pressure over the entire area of the front half of the car; the total lift can be very large indeed) and can cause the
car to “wander” at high speed.
HEATER CONTROL VALVE: See page 495.
227
Post-Shutdown Cooling
It it commonly acknowledged that the worst cooling problem the XJ-S has is not when running but after shutdown. The
small electric fan runs after shutdown if the thermal switch has it running when the engine is shut off, but once the switch
cuts out -- which it does all too soon, since it is reading coolant temperature at radiator outlet -- it will not come on
again. 700 pounds of hot engine plus hot exhaust manifolds and hot catalytic convertors tend to raise the underhood
temperatures after shutdown considerably higher than they ever were while running, and there are indications that parts
of the engine itself get hotter after shutdown as well.
There are three problems generally associated with post-shutdown heating: Dropped valve seats, hot start difficulties,
and heat-stressed engine compartment components. The exact mechanism of dropped valve seats is unclear, but several
owners have suffered dropped seats after a hot shutdown rather than while running. The other two problems are
clearer, and result from the high temperature of the air surrounding the engine -- and all the extraneous components that
are heated by the air. Since there is no longer fuel flow in the rail, the fuel sitting in it gets hotter and hotter, causing
serious hot start problems that Jaguar has addressed with a coupla different types of fuel rail temp sensor providing fuel
enrichment. The post-shutdown underhood temperatures are clearly a key cause of deteriorated hoses, brittle wiring,
short-lived electrical components, and a host of other traditional Jaguar afflictions.
This section includes several ideas for dealing with the post-shutdown temperatures. Most address primarily the
temperature of the air within the engine compartment, which may or may not have a significant effect on the
temperature of the heads themselves in the vicinity of the valve seats.
HOOD VENTS: Just the ticket for letting the heat rise naturally out of the hood after shutdown. It’s a body
modification, so it’s discussed further on page 473.
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN BOOTSTRAP CIRCUIT: The electric fan includes a “bootstrap” circuit, so that if the
coolant is hot enough for the fan to be running when the engine is shut off, the fan will continue to run until the coolant
temperature switch shuts it off. Once off, the bootstrap circuit drops out and the fan cannot start again, no matter what.
Other cars -- notably Japanese and other FWD 4-bangers -- have cooling fans that cycle on and off for quite a while
after the engine is shut off. Clearly, they are wired so that the fan will run if the thermostat calls for it, regardless of
whether the ignition is on or not. It is also evident that they come on -- indicating that once they shut off the first time,
they may still be needed again. Probably the engine heat soaking through the compartment.
Why did Jaguar provide this bootstrap circuit, rather than just wiring the fan to run when needed like the Japanese cars?
There would be two possible results if the bootstrap weren’t in there: 1) The fan would never come on after shutting off
the first time -- meaning that the bootstrap circuit was unnecessary; or 2) the fan would come on after shutting down,
which means it needs to come on and the bootstrap circuit is contributing to the cooking of the engine parts!
The only plausible explanations: A) Jaguar was afraid the Lucas thermostat would fail in the on position and kill the
battery; B) they didn’t feel that a fan kicking on and off in the parking lot was in keeping with the proper Jaguar image;
or C) they were worried about liability from someone having their fingers in there when a fan came on unexpectedly.
Stuart Barnes adds D) “Many car alarms are voltage sensing and although they can cope with a voltage rise (to allow an
electric fan to run and then stop) a lot of the aftermarket varieties can’t cope with the voltage drop that would occur
when the fan came back on.”
For those of us who are more concerned with the life of our machines, keep our fingers out of moving machinery as a
force of habit, and don’t have such alarm system concerns, it might be a good idea to rewire that circuit to run the fan
whenever necessary. It’s easy to do: On the left side of the engine compartment is a small blue box that looks like a
relay, but it’s the diode pack (see page 224). Pull the LG wire off of terminal 4 and connect it to a 12V power supply.
228
There is a 12V supply available at the solid brown wires at the headlight fusebox just a few inches forward of the diode
pack.
Note that, if you have headlight washers and wipers, the blue box might not be the fan diode pack. See page 224.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT AIR TEMP SENSOR: Another way to get the electric cooling fan to run longer after
shutdown might involve adding an air temperature thermostat within the engine compartment -- preferably high and
rearward, where the post-shutdown cooking problems are the worst. This thermostat could be set at a much lower
temperature than the one in the coolant and still wouldn’t come into play while the car is moving or the engine-driven
fan is circulating air. But if the air starts getting hotter after shutdown, it can come on -- even if the coolant in the water
pump isn’t that hot -- and flow some cool air through the engine compartment.
Imperial makes a dandy little “Adjustable Thermostat for Electric Cooling Fans”, number 226203, available at Discount
Auto Parts. It’s really an air temp thermostat. It has a remote bulb sensor and includes instructions for mounting right
on the back side of the radiator core, but you could mount it anywhere -- even on the underside of the hood! The
thermostat is adjustable from 248°F to 32°F, and the contacts are heavy enough to control fans directly without relays.
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN POST-SHUTDOWN TIMER: Michael Aiken’s plan: forget relying on temp sensors and
simply provide a timer that runs the fan for a fixed amount of time after shutdown. Aiken used one of the existing 10minute seat heater timers to provide this fan operation, and provided the wiring scheme shown in Figure 12 which
automatically starts the fan running on the timer whenever the engine is fully warmed up and shut off. Aiken points out
that this is not an unheard-of idea; the Nissan 300ZX uses a similar scheme with a 17-minute timer.
229
Figure 12 - Post-Shutdown Cooling Fan Timer
Aiken describes this scheme: “The timer is activated by grounding pin 1 and then releasing it. It will not activate if pin 1
is held to ground. I left the manual switch (on the side of the console) wired in so the light would show when the fan is
on, but that is optional.” Having the pushbutton may have an additional benefit: you can push the button to force 10
minutes of fan operation whenever you wish. This might be handy if, for example, you get stuck in downtown traffic;
you can simply tell the fan to run continuously for 10 minutes rather than cycle on and off with the thermostatic switch
operation.
“The capacitor is a 2000µfd electrolyte and the diode is 3 amp. The capacitor attaches to ignition key 12V output in
position 2 and 3. This is important to keep the fan from coming on during startup (position 3).” Ed. note: the wires
that meet this criteria are white, as has been indicated on the schematic. They are connected to terminal 3 on the ignition
switch.
“When 12V is applied to the capacitor it charges through the diode. When the ignition is turned off the capacitor
discharges back through the relay momentarily (about .5 seconds) activating it and starting the timer relay. The fan runs
for 10 minutes and then shuts off. The thermostat in the ground leg prevents the capacitor discharge if the engine is not
yet warmed up. The capacitor does hold the charge and will discharge later if the temp reaches the set temp -- even
several minutes after shutdown. I set my temp at 180ºF.”
The schematic shows the output of the timer (pin 4) connected through a diode to the wire from terminal 1 on the diode
pack to the fan relay, so it will directly close the relay and operate the fan. Radio Shack catalog number 276-1661 will
serve nicely for this diode as well as the other one used in this scheme. In this application on the timer output, the diode
only serves to make the indicator light show that the timer is engaged. If this diode is omitted, the system will still work
just dandy but the light will be on whenever the fan is running, even if it is the A/C compressor control or the stock
230
coolant switch operating it.
If you happen to have one of the later cars where the A/C compressor does not bring on the electric fan (as Aiken has),
you don’t have to buy a new diode for this task; there’s an unused one in the diode pack. Just connect pin 4 of the timer
directly to terminal 3 of the diode pack.
Aiken also points out that this scheme doesn’t have to control the small stock electric fan; it could be used just as well to
control an aftermarket electric fan, or anything else electrical you’d like to run for 10 minutes after shutdown. The use
of a marine bilge vent fan has even been suggested. It’s probably not a good idea to operate a large fan or multiple fans;
it shouldn’t take much airflow to keep the underhood temperatures within reason, and you don’t want to strain the
battery. The fact is, the stock Jag small fan is probably perfect for this job.
Since Aiken used the seat heater controls, the schematic shows the timer and the pushbutton with indicator light as they
appear in the Jaguar seat heater schematics. Of course, if you’d rather leave your seat heaters wired as originally
intended -- or if you have an earlier car that doesn’t even have seat heaters -- you can simply buy a new timer from
Jaguar, or perhaps a generic timer (or maybe the one from a Nissan!). You can simply leave the pushbutton and
indicator light (and the related diode) out of the circuitry altogether if you wish and connect terminal 30 of the relay
directly to pin 1 on the timer. Or, you can buy any generic momentary pushbutton switch; don’t let the excessively
complicated Jaguar illustration fool you, that heater switch is just a normal momentary single contact switch with a builtin indicator light. If it’s only the indicator light you want, you can skip the switch altogether and simply buy any generic
12V indicator and connect it to pin 4 on the timer and to ground and mount it anywhere convenient -- or you could wire
it to one of the unneeded warning lights in the dash.
Aiken apparently left his timer where it was originally mounted behind the dash, but if you’re installing a new timer you
can pretty well choose anywhere to install it. Other than 12V power -- any brown wire -- the only thing you really need
is access to a suitable white ignition wire, and they are all over the car -- even going to the EFI power relay in the trunk.
There is also one to the ignition system on the engine, so it’s possible to install all of this stuff someplace near the fan
itself -- perhaps in front of the radiator, or in the compartment behind a headlight -- and not have to run any wires into
the passenger compartment, provided you don’t want a pushbutton or indicator light.
231
FUEL SYSTEM
The D-Jetronic XJ-S fuel system involves a fuel tank with a drain that feeds a small surge tank. A screened pickup in the
surge tank leads to a soft-mounted fuel pump just below and to the right of the spare tire. The line leads to a fuel filter
and then to two separate fuel rails on the engine, one for the left bank and one for the right. A pressure regulator on
each rail directs excess flow through a fuel cooler and then back to the tank.
The Digital P uses a similar system except that the two separate fuel rails were replaced with a single rail. There are still
two pressure regulators, but in this case one is a supply regulator and one is a return regulator. Supposedly the return
regulator, the one on the LF corner of the engine, is the only one that actually does anything. While the D-Jetronic
regulators held rail pressure constant, the Digital P regulators vary rail pressure with intake manifold vacuum and
therefore have vacuum lines connected to them.
The earliest saloons are fitted with carburetors, which use much lower fuel pressure than EFI. The EFI saloons have
fuel systems resembling those in the XJ-S. The most notable difference in the saloon fuel system, though, is that the
Jaguar saloons have two fuel tanks and a switchover system so the driver can choose which tank to use.
In 1992 the XJ-S fuel system changed markedly. The external fuel pump was replaced with a submersible pump inside
the tank. The fuel rails were redesigned to connect to the injectors with O-rings instead of short hoses. The worthless
supply regulator was omitted.
Fuel Fires
Besides the usual general concerns about fuel fires -- fuel lines left in place too long until they rot, etc. -- there are also a
couple of specific worries:
EARLY D-JECTRONIC FUEL RAIL: The early Digital P XJ-S’s (early 80’s) had a problem with engine fires. There
was a recall to address the problem in which the fuel rail on the engine was replaced; the newer design is indicated by
rectangular tubing, while the pre-recall rail was made of round tubing. All Digital P XJ-S’s were subject to this recall,
but indications are the recall was not as conscientiously applied outside the US. Unfortunately, word is that the recall is
“closed” and dealers will no longer perform it. If you have a Digital P with round tubing in the fuel rail, you probably
should consult your favorite junkyard and collect all the parts that look different and perform the recall yourself. Note
that the D Jetronic still uses fuel rails with round tubing.
Leaking fuel in an engine compartment is remarkably difficult to ignite. Usually there have been obvious odors and
visible leakage for some time. Please do not ignore fuel odors; the XJ-S shouldn’t have any.
MARELLI IGNITION WIRES: The later XJ-S with Marelli ignition also has a reputation for engine fires. Peyton Gill
reports on “an XJ-S that had a little pyrotechnics under bonnet. I asked the guy about it and he said that the fire was put
out within 30 sec (owner had a fire extinguisher) and the estimate to repair was $2000.00. There was not that much
damage. The cause of the fire was the ignition coil wire was about 1/4 inch from one of the fuel injection lines (between
rail and injector). The ignition wire had been arcing to the line and eventually worked its way through. I guess the
physical damage and ozone created by the arc eventually broke down the line.”
Julian Mullaney adds, “There was a recall for cracked injector hoses and injector bodies. Ozone from the distributor
leads causes the perished plastic. The recall replaces the lead with a shorter one, and replaces the injector. They looked
up my car (vin no.) in their database and the fix had already been done a long time ago, however the problem persisted.
232
“The problem was ozone deteriorating the injector hose on the right bank second cyl. from the firewall. It produces a
cracked surface of the rubber hose. You should look carefully for this, it's not easy to spot.
“The dealer said that they were instructed to look for visual damage to the hose and replace injector if needed. "If" is
the key word here. However, if it looked good, they could get away with only changing the HT lead to a shorter one
(thus not close to the injector) and leave the original injector hose. This leaves the chance that damage could have
occurred to the hose but it's not visible yet, leading to the following chain of events:
upon initial recall they only replace the HT lead
then the hose continues to deteriorate from initial ozone embrittlement;
then you see the damage to the hose a year or two later;
pyrophobia sets in;
then you call the dealer;
then they tell you sorry, the fix has already been done;
then you find that the recall was done sloppily;
then you get pissed off;
a)
then you think about fixing the problem yourself
b)
you call the dealer again and insist they fix it again properly
then dealer calls Jaguar to authorize 2nd repair
they say OK
you get it fixed for free
“Option b) worked fine with me, my local dealer was very good about it.”
Ron White adds, “I checked the recall database and the recall only affects 1989-91 XJ-S models; this is a result of: "The
high tension lead from the ignition coil can move from the production location closer to the #4A fuel injector hose.
Vehicle description: coupes and convertibles with Marelli ignition systems."”
MTBE: Stephen Wood says, “We starting in Spring 1996 having a substance called MTBE -- methyl tutol-buytol
ethanol, something like that -- blended with our gas to help reduce emissions. Hopefully they will be taking it out soon,
as there has been a major hubbub about it here. You see, it also melts things, like fuel lines, carburetor gaskets,
(especially the old rubber/cork type), fuel tanks, brazing material solder, etc.
“Last summer car fires were up significantly all over the state, including my brother’s ’69 Camaro (it was restored).
MTBE melted through the carb gaskets on his vintage Holley and poof.
“At that point it got serious, and I checked my fuel lines, and sure enough, they were going way squishy from the inside
out. In other cars we have seen it also has melted injector seals.
“If you ask the insurance companies they have had a slight increase but nothing to worry about. No problem, right?
Wrong! Most of the cars affected are cars that the insurance industry won’t provide fire, theft and vandalism coverage
on anyway. If you ask the CHP and the firemen, they know that last summer was a major problem.”
So, you need a new type of fuel hose, right? “The problem with the hose issue is that the rubber manufacturers are not
going to gear up for a California-only issue. However, some of the new cars have fuel lines made out of a tygon
derivative, a newer plastic that is more resistant to these blended fuels (New LT1- LT4- and LS1 GM motors). I don't
think there is a crossover app. as of yet, tygon is a bitch to work with and has the characteristics of polypropylene
tubing, i.e., firm and not clampable. You have to use special fittings with it.
“There is supposed to be some new silicone-based flexible "rubber like" fuel line coming out soon from Gates or
233
Goodyear but I haven't seen it. So for now, I have been keeping an eye on the situation and checking all pressurized fuel
lines every month, and replacing them every 6 months (I have done this three times now). Vent lines are ok from when I
replaced them 6 months ago. I have been changing fuel filters every 45-60 days (preventative mania), making sure to cut
open the old filter to see if anything weird develops like little bits of rubber hose.
“I will have to take my gas tank out this summer, and have it boiled and welded or just put in a new one. The corrosion
around the outlet is growing and I think it is melting through the solder. I may just JB Weld it or something.”
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: After reading this book, you have probably come down with a healthy dose of paranoia
regarding fires in the XJ-S. A fire extinguisher is cheap, and may come in handy.
Ron White had a fire in his car, and thanks to having a fire extinguisher in the trunk and knowing how to use it, his car
survived with almost no damage. “I have seen engine fires in other cars and have seen people make the mistake of
flinging their hoods (these were American cars) open, only to have the fire flare up 5 or 6 feet because of the added
oxygen. I opened the bonnet just enough to get the nozzle of the extinguisher in, and gave it a good squirt. I then
cautiously opened the bonnet up and seeing no flames opened it up all of the way and gave it a real good squirt!”
White’s extinguisher happened to be a Halon type which works wonderfully and leaves no crud on the engine but is bad
for the ozone layer and is in the process of being outlawed. Experts seem to feel that a common powder type fire
extinguisher would probably work just as well, the only disadvantage being that you’d have a job getting all the powder
out of the engine compartment afterward.
One more note: White’s car is an ’86, meaning it’s late enough to have had all the updates to correct the early fuel rail
problems and too early to be covered by the recall for the later cars with the Marelli ignition. “It appears that the cause
was a cracked body on an injector, and it was squirting fuel directly on the distributor!” That fire extinguisher is
sounding like a better idea all the time, isn’t it?
John Napoli suggests a built-in system like those found on race cars: “It should be a lot easier to extinguish a fire within
the closed confines of the engine compartment with the bonnet closed, and you could certainly react a lot quicker than,
say, opening the bonnet, saying "Oh, sh$t", running for the boot, trying to find the fire extinguisher that is underneath all
your luggage, meanwhile the bonnet is open and the flames are getting higher...” Of course, keeping the extinguisher on
the floor in front of the front seat may help.
Emile A. DesRoches says, “If anybody is really interested in a real "racing car" fire control system (sanctioning bodies
require a system plumbed in to spray at the engine, fuel cell and driver's lap area), they can be obtained from such
organizations as Racer's Wholesale in Atlanta. From experience as an SCCA tech inspector, I can say that they may
make a mess, but they work and clean up is inevitably less expensive than replacing a fried V12 motor.”
Fuel Odors
FUEL ODORS: To state what should be obvious: Jaguars are not supposed to smell like fuel.
One excellent suggestion is to trot the car right down to your local Jaguar dealer, or anyone else with the equipment to
test automotive emissions. The testing equipment includes a probe that is inserted in the tailpipe to detect unburned
hydrocarbons (fuel). This probe is real handy for finding fuel leaks anywhere in the car.
There is a relay in the trunk through which the EFI controls the fuel pump; it’s the one without a red paint mark on it.
You can remove the relay and jump connectors 30 and 87 in the socket to run the fuel pump. This is useful for
searching for fuel leaks without having to leave the engine running. Of course, you’ll kill your battery if you do it for too
long.
234
FUEL ODORS IN TRUNK: The trunk smelling of fuel is a common problem with many common causes:

fuel-soaked carpet padding (see page 235)

leaking hoses either in the trunk or over the IRS (see page 235)

leaking compression fittings (see page 236)

someone installed the wrong type hose in your fuel system (see page 238)

there may be a bad O-ring in the fuel filler connection (see page 244)

a plugged or disconnected drain from the fuel filler compartment (see page 245).

a tank that develops a hole by rubbing on a steenkin’ rivet (see page 245)

a tank that has developed stress cracks (see page 245)

a tank that has simply rusted through (see page 245)
Note that you can greatly reduce the possibility of fuel leaks or odors by addressing all of these concerns at once! Take
the tank out, coat it outside and in, replace all fuel and vent hoses with new, and reassemble. It would take a few days,
largely because lining and coating the tank require several steps of cleaning and coating and letting them dry overnight.
If you’re not willing to try lining the inside of the tank yourself, doing all the other tasks would still be worthwhile.
Don’t overlook the possibility that fuel odors in the trunk aren’t originating in the trunk. The author had a leak in a line
under the car, and couldn’t smell it outside the car but it stank somethin’ awful inside the trunk. I couldn’t even imagine
how the fumes got into the trunk. Likewise, a malfunctioning vapor recovery system (see page 259) that’s releasing
fumes into the bodywork up at the front of the car may result in the fumes migrating into the trunk. In fact, even a
cylinder misfiring and releasing unburned fuel out a tailpipe has been known to cause fumes to collect inside the trunk.
People who correct problems with the vapor recovery system often report that it cures odor problems in the trunk. If
the problem was a stuck-open (or missing) Rochester valve overloading the carbon canister and as a result odors were
coming from the carbon canister up front and were working their way through the bodywork to the trunk, they may be
truly cured. Likewise, if the problem was a leak from the vapor recovery system somewhere, it may be truly cured. But
if the problem was a plugged vapor recovery system causing excessive pressure in the tank, the problems are not cured,
they’re just no longer as apparent. The vapor recovery system is supposed to prevent excessive pressures within the
tank, and if it fails the pressures may reach levels that force fuel through leaking fittings or even crack the tank. If the
vapor recovery system is fixed and the pressures are no longer excessive, there may be far less fuel coming through the
leaks -- but the leaks are still there. And any cracks that may have started in the tank are still there, too. If you could
smell fuel, that fuel was getting out somewhere, and it would behoove you to find out where.
SMELLY CARPET PADDING: The fuel filter is the size of a Coke can and is located behind the spare tire in the
trunk. When this filter is replaced, it is all too easy to spill its contents within the trunk. The nature of the foam padding
under the carpet is such that once this happens, your trunk will smell of fuel for all eternity. The only suggested fix is to
replace the carpeting and padding. It is recommended that before the filter is replaced, and before any repairs to the fuel
system in the trunk are carried out, the carpet be removed.
When changing that filter, unscrew the mounting bracket from the floor first. Then you can hold the filter over a catch
pan when disconnecting the hoses.
LEAKY FUEL LINES: As described on page 243, there are several fuel lines that include a piece of hose in the middle
of a metal tubing assembly. When old, these hoses often weep fuel rather than burst outright. In fact, they may leak so
slowly that they never appear wet; the fuel evaporates faster than it leaks. Just about the only indication of trouble is the
odor.
Two of the hoses that need attention are not in the trunk, but rather under the car and over the rear suspension. The line
235
over the right rear axle is the pressure line to the engine, and the line over the left rear axle is the return line to the tank.
If the hose section of either line develops leaks, it seems to cause odor in the trunk more than anywhere else for some
reason.
Check all of these lines with the pump running, and replace any hose you even suspect of being the cause of odors.
Better yet, just replace the hose sections if they are older than ten years or so.
Both hose sections over the IRS are actually fairly easy to replace. Both lines connect at threaded fittings at the forward
corners of the trunk floor, and both have couplings just forward of the IRS. Before removing the right side one,
depressurize the fuel system, and before working on either, pinch the appropriate fuel lines in the trunk and in the engine
compartment (if the tank hasn’t been removed and the system totally emptied).
This author found the one on the right side a bit easier to do than the one on the left, because there were more other
things in the way on the left side -- but some of these things, like the handbrake cable, may switch sides on a RHD car so
others may have different challenges. On the author’s ’83, the fuel line assembly on the right side came out as a unit, so
it could be rebuilt and reinstalled easily enough.
The line on the left side takes a little more thought. First, there is a plastic clip up at the top of the arch holding it in
place. If it’s not broken to begin with, it’s easy enough to break it; it is only too apparent that it’s not necessary to hold
it in place. Second, the short section of metal tubing on the rear end is hook-shaped, so it isn’t likely to feed out over
the IRS. Instead, after disconnecting both ends of the line, pull it rearward a bit and use a razor knife to slice through
the hose itself. Then remove the rear section rearward and the front section forward.
To rebuild and reinstall it, start by cutting a piece of new hose a couple of inches longer than the original hose. In fact,
note how much of the straight section of the hook-shaped metal portion is exposed beyond the end of the hose, and cut
the new hose longer enough to cover almost the entire straight section. Install this new hose on the front metal section
of the line with an EFI clamp, making sure that the screw portion of the clamp is positioned downward and a little
inward because the top and outer side will be against the inside of the bodywork. Stick a plug in the end of the hose,
then feed the hose into position from the front until the end of the hose comes out on the back side of the IRS where you
can get ahold of it. Clean the entire straight portion of the hook-shaped section in preparation for having a hose slid
onto it. Put an EFI clamp over the tube, remove the plug in the end of the hose, then push the tube into the hose and
continue to push until things begin to line up. Loosely assemble the coupling at the forward end. When the tube has
been pushed into the hose far enough that the threaded end lines up properly with the fitting on the trunk floor, position
the clamp near the end of the hose and tighten it down. By using a longer piece of hose here, the clamp is located such
that it can easily be tightened below the corner of the chassis and the screwdriver can be held within the wheel well.
When you tighten the threaded end into the fitting on the trunk floor, you will need to have an assistant hold the end of
the line on the inside of the trunk in the correct position. Failure to hold the lines in position while tightening will result
in distortion of either the hose over the IRS or the hose in the trunk or both.
COMPRESSION FITTINGS: In the author’s ’83, there are seven places in the rear end of the car where a metal fuel
line is attached via a brass nut and a brass compression seal. Three of these are on the main fuel tank itself: the main line
to the surge tank, the vent line from the surge tank, and the return line from the front of the car. The other four are in
two elaborate bulkhead fittings where the supply line and the return line run through the floor of the trunk.
These fittings are assembled by sliding the nut onto the tube, then sliding the brass compression seal onto the tube, then
inserting the tube into the fitting and tightening down the nut. As the nut is tightened, the brass ring is compressed onto
the steel tube, forming a reliable seal and also securely holding the tube in place. Typically, the thin-walled steel tube is
soft enough that the compression of the seal necks the tube, although this isn’t strictly necessary for sealing or retention.
The bad news is that these type connections are meant to be assembled once and left alone. If you unscrew the nut, you
can remove the nut/tube/seal assembly out of the fitting, but you cannot get the seal off the tube -- and you’ll only get
the nut off if it can slide off the other end. If you simply slide the thing back together and tighten it down, there’s only a
moderate chance it will seal; the tube and the compression ring apparently work-harden, and there’s no further
compression available to allow it to reseat. Applying sealing substances is a waste of time, and can result in chunks of
236
sealant plugging up your fuel system. To ensure a proper seal, both the brass ring and the steel tube must be replaced
whenever such a fitting is disassembled.
The good news is that the brass compression seals themselves are common in the US and are available at any hardware
store or industrial supply house. They are also often available in auto parts stores, in the bins with brass fittings. Note,
however, that there is a similar type of compression seal intended for use with copper or plastic tubing, and the
compression ring itself is a bit different; it has a collar around the middle. It might work here, but obviously you might
be well advised to seek out the same type as was originally used to ensure it seals properly in these fittings.
Suitable steel tubing is also available in sizes up to 3/8”, sold in auto parts stores in straight lengths with flared ends and
nuts in place; just cut the flares off and chuck the nuts, they won’t work here, all you want is the straight length of
tubing.
You can purchase a tool in any auto parts store that will help you bend metal tubing without crimping it. Note that
cheap tubing benders often don’t work very well; it is recommended that you spring for a good one. Also note that
you’ll want to put the bends in your tubing before you cut it to length.
You can make a barb for attaching a hose to the steel tube using a tool sold at most auto parts stores. It’s called a
“double flaring tool”, and its purpose is to make those flared ends that you just cut off the tubes you bought. The
intended use of the double flaring tool involves two steps. The first step forms a little bulb on the end of the metal tube,
and the second step folds the outer end of this bulb back inwards to form the double flare. Forget the second step, just
perform the first step, and it leaves a neat, professional-looking barb on the end of the tube for attaching a hose. One
example of this tool is the AmPro T73360.
Anyplace that sells the compression seals probably also sells the nuts that are used with them -- but that won’t help you.
This is a Jaguar, so the fittings are some oddball thread. In the US, you’d go nuts (!) trying to find a new nut of the
same thread; if you need a new nut, just go ahead buy an entire new hose assembly from Jaguar. Fortunately, the old
nuts are usually reusable; just cut the old tube in half to recover them.
When you assemble a compression fitting with a new section of tubing and a new compression seal, you’ll know what
they are supposed to feel like. You can feel a smooth crush as the seal is compressed onto the tube.
Now that you’re an expert in rebuilding those compression fittings, let’s discuss some special cases. First, the Rube
Goldberg bulkhead fittings going through the floor of the trunk: if these things are leaking, don’t even think of trying to
reassemble them with new compression fittings and new tubing. Instead, yank the entire contraption out of there and
install a simple rubber plug to fill the hole in the trunk floor. Cut a hole through this plug the size of the steel tubing
involved. Bend a piece of steel tubing to a suitable shape and insert it through this hole, and connect the hoses to each
end of it with suitable clamps. Presto, a simple, logical fuel line assembly with minimal opportunities for leakage.
“If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it” is a good credo, but you could actually justify removing those bulkhead assemblies on the
basis of the weight savings alone.
I’d suggest you throw those bulkhead fittings as far as you can, but remember to save the nuts from them first; they
might actually fit two of the connections on the tank itself -- although that’d be an unreasonable expectation from the
British, they probably deliberately made them different to make sure you couldn’t connect the wrong line to the wrong
place!
If your problem is that you’ve boogered up one of the smaller nuts threaded into the tank itself, you might be able to
save yourself the trouble of trying to find such an oddball nut by simply performing this bulkhead fitting replacement and
getting the nuts from there.
Finally, the big problem: the main line from the main tank to the surge tank. On the author’s ’83, this is a hook-shaped
1/2” tube that screws into a 90º fitting on the tank. I certainly hope they changed this design on later cars. The
incompetence of the designer was so awe-inspiring that you can’t even get a wrench on that nut without removing the
tank from the car! Anybody exhibiting this level of skill should be operating a broom rather than a pencil -- and only if
you’re not too picky about how clean the floor is.
This fitting is the most likely one to be leaking because of the hook-shaped tube. Getting a hose connected to that tube,
237
maneuvering the other hoses in the area, even replacing the battery or getting the spare tire in and out is liable to apply
some stress to the end of the hook, all of which is likely to bend the tube right at the fitting and cause the compression
seal to start leaking.
So, once you finally figure out this is where your trunk odors are coming from, you need to get that fitting apart. Drain
the tank (see page 245). Disconnect the straps holding the tank in place. Insert some sort of broad pry bar between the
gas tank and the deck it’s sitting on and see if you can lift the tank up a bit. If you can’t, use a machete to slice through
the foam under the tank so you can. Once the tank is liftable, it’s actually possible to get a box end wrench on the nut by
sliding it on from the other end of the hook-shaped tube and holding the tank lifted as you maneuver the wrench to the
nut and turn it. Hence, you can fix your leak without totally removing the tank, disconnecting all those other lines,
removing the battery tray, etc.
1/2” brass compression seals are actually not too difficult to find, but 1/2” thinwall steel tubing is. The auto parts stores
only carry steel lines up to 3/8”. You might try a place that carries parts for large trucks. Other places that may carry
1/2” steel tubing, including hydraulic shops, typically have thicker-walled tubing -- which will work fine in the
compression fitting but is difficult to bend or to form a barb on for connecting the hose.
The solutions here come together. First, you don’t want to install another hook-shaped tube. Instead, what you want to
do is install a very short straight tube, providing a hose barb right there at the fitting on the tank. Then you can use a
longer piece of 1/2” fuel hose to connect it to the surge tank. Hence, you probably already have the tubing you need -in the old tube. Just cut off the old compression seal and cut off the hook end, leaving a straight section of steel tubing
about 3” long. Apply the old nut and new compression seal and install. Be sure to clean up the outside of the section of
tubing with some fine sandpaper so it forms a good seal.
Of course, if you try to use the double flaring tool to provide a hose barb on a tube this large, you may mess it up -- and
you have no backup tubing. Solution: don’t bother providing a barb here. The maximum pressure this hose will ever
see is about 3 psi, nowhere near enough to push a clamped hose off a smooth tube.
If your hook-shaped tube is too messed up to obtain a clean straight section from, you can use thicker-walled tubing
since you’re not bending it and you’re not forming a barb. The thicker-walled stuff might even be advantageous in
providing a more secure attachment with more resistance to bending or deformation.
STINKY FUEL LINES: Believe it or not, one reported cause of fuel odors in the trunk is apparently the use of the
wrong type fuel hoses. They’re not leaking; the odor seeps through the material of the hose itself. You can tell this is
the problem by wiping your finger on the surface of the hose, walking a few feet away, then smelling your finger. If it
smells like fuel, that’s the problem.
Fuel Lines
FUEL HOSE MAINTENANCE: If you have any doubts about the condition of the fuel hoses in your car, replace them.
Based on experience from the online discussion list, it would be an excellent idea to replace all of the fuel hoses in the
car at least once every ten years; you can do it every five years to be on the safe side.
In some locations, there is a fuel line assembly that consists of hose crimped onto metal lines; in such cases you can just
buy new Jaguar fuel line assemblies, but it’s cheaper to buy generic hose and install it in the existing lines with suitable
clamps (see below). The hardest part would be getting the original crimped fittings off, but the second time you do the
job it’ll be easier since you’ll only need to loosen clamps. Don’t overlook the sections of hose in the lines looping over
the rear suspension on each side of the car.
In other places, you will be replacing pieces of hose with clamps on the ends. In yet other locations, you may need to
replace hoses that don’t seem to be attached at all -- they are merely pressed onto the fitting. Please read the following
238
sections to understand how these work before tackling the job.
FUEL HOSE SIZES - D-JETRONIC: Bernard Embden found that the nipples on the D-Jetronic fuel rail are
measurably smaller than standard 5/16” nipples. “Putting 5/16" hose on the Pre-H.E. fuel rail resulted in a less than
satisfactory connection. The clamps had to be tightened excessively and bunched the 5/16" hose just to prevent leakage
at the required 30 lbs. fuel pressure. Even in this unsatisfactory condition, the 5/16" hose could be rotated easily on the
rail. I fitted the 9/32" hose. This was the only size hose that fit the nipple correctly.”
FUEL HOSE SIZES - DIGITAL P: The D Jetronic fuel rail and injectors truly need 9/16” hose, a fairly unusual size.
The original hoses on the Digital P fuel injectors appear to be 7mm or 9/32” as well -- but in this case it’s the wrong
size. The injectors themselves are made by Bosch -- and have barbs designed to fit an 8mm hose, a very common size.
The barbs on the square-tubing rail and on some of the lines to and from the rail are also designed to fit an 8mm hose.
When you have the old hose off, it is a simple matter to measure the diameter of the straight-sided portion of the barb
between the ridges to confirm what size hose is needed. 5/16” is 7.93mm and will fit an 8mm barb just fine.
The problems begin when the novice mechanic finds out how easy it is to push the new hoses onto these barbs. They
just slide right on. That just doesn’t seem right, and smaller hose is purchased and crammed onto the barbs with great
effort and sometimes even boiling the hose prior to installation or other extreme measures that are only too likely to
damage the hose or shorten its life.
Resist such thinking. The hoses are supposed to slip on easily. Why would Bosch design an attachment scheme that
requires lots of effort on an assembly line? When 5/16” or 8mm hose is used on the clampless connections on the XJ-S,
they simply do not leak. There is no problem there; the fuel leaks the car is plagued with come right through the hose
when it dries up and cracks.
Some people have found 8.5mm hose -- sometimes at a Jaguar dealer. Don’t use it on the XJ-S; there are no fittings on
this car that call for this oddball size.
FUEL HOSE TYPE: The XJ-S features Electronic Fuel Injection, and EFI systems operate at higher fuel pressures than
carburetors did: 30-50 psi vs. 5 psi. Ordinary “fuel hose” was designed for 5 psi -- do not use it anywhere in this fuel
system. Most auto parts stores now carry “EFI hose”. It is more expensive, but a fuel fire is no fun. The basic generic
EFI hose looks like standard hose; you will need to read the printing on the rubber surface to know you’ve got the right
stuff. Look for either “EFI” or “Fuel Injection” or some such clear indication of its suitability for fuel injection systems,
or for a working pressure rating higher than 100 psi.
If you have clampless hose connections (see below), generic EFI hose will work fine -- but there is yet a better idea. If
you find an industrial hose distributor or hydraulic hose shop, they can sell you what they refer to as “push-on hose”,
hose that was designed specifially for these type connections. Push-on hose is available in two different styles: smooth
rubber surface or cloth surface. They both have basically the same specs; in fact, nobody seems to know why anyone
would choose one over the other. It probably has something to do with abrasion resistance or some such.
The rubber surface push-on hose usually has a bunch of markings on it, including a pressure rating in the order of 350
psi, but it probably does not use the term “EFI”. There is a spec number on there, and you’re supposed to look it up in
reference books to determine suitability for particular applications. It is suitable for automotive EFI systems.
The cloth surface hose this author found has far less text on it. Duh! It’s harder to write on cloth! The letters are really
big to be readable, and all it says is “WEATHERHEAD 5/16 H10005 D 09/14/98”. The pressure rating on this hose is
actually lower than the rubber surface hose (250 psi) even though it looks a lot tougher than the rubber surface hose.
You cannot squeeze this hose flat with your fingers. Weatherhead H100 series hose has a nitrile inner liner suitable for
use with non-oxygenated automotive fuels.
Note that there are a few places on the XJ-S where one end of a hose is a push-on connection and the other end requires
a clamp. The push-on hose is suitable for these applications; it can be reliably clamped on suitable barbs.
239
The Weatherhead cloth surface hose is more expensive than the rubber surface: $2/foot. Don’t be intimidated by the
fact that Jaguar wants many times that much for their “original” hose; it’s no better, and it’s arguably not as good.
Weatherhead is one of the most respected names in the industrial hose business.
Another good reason to be shopping at the industrial hose supplier is that you can buy this Weatherhead H100 hose in
1/2” size. There are a couple of 1/2” fuel hoses in the trunk of the XJ-S, but there aren’t many auto parts stores that
carry 1/2” fuel hose.
Of course, you can buy fancier hose. Bill Fernandez says, “There is a lot of stuff available out there, aero hoses, rubber,
etc. High quality cloth braided German fuel injection rubber hose is what I ended up using. This is the same equipment
used in BMW and Mercedes, they don't go bad period. I have a 1975 CSi (BMW) with the original cloth braided hoses
with 325k original miles and not a single leak or hint of gas yet.
“The H.E. Bosch injectors are designed to use slip-on rubber injector hoses. The areo style will require lots of
modification to both the injectors and the fuel rail to get them to work. The areo stuff is very pricey and just not worth
it aside from looks.”
Hose to avoid: Based on several reports from owners, do not use Goodyear blue lined hose. Vans says, "My Goodyear
fuel injection hoses 5/16'' (blue lined) have failed in just 2 years. They would only leak when side pressure was applied
to the fuel rail or hoses, they would squirt out a small amount of fuel. No leaks while running without side pressure.
"Just replaced all injector hoses with Dayco 7.9mm (5/16) from my local parts supplier. While removing the Goodyear
hoses some were able to just pull off. When installing the Goodyear 2 years ago they were very tight and could not be
pulled off. This is not a job I want to do every couple of years. My advise is to avoid Goodyear for these engines at all
costs."
Ed Sowell adds: "I had the same problem with Goodyear hose. I redid the rail with Gates hose, which most auto parts
stores no longer carry. NAPA does."
FUEL HOSE CLAMPS: Some fuel line connections, especially on earlier cars, came with crimped collars that
compressed the hose against the barb. If you remove a hose with a crimped collar, you can replace it with new hose
with a clamp -- provided you use the correct type clamp. If you live in the US and walk into an auto parts store and ask
for a hose clamp, you will be handed a stainless steel band with a series of angled slots through it and a worm screw
attached to one end. These “aircraft type” clamps are excellent -- for lines about 3/4” in diameter and larger. Although
they do sell small clamps in this style, they do not work well on hoses as small as the fuel lines on the XJ-S. There are
simply too many “corners” within that circle as it is snugged up, and although it may seal at first while you’re looking it
may leave local areas that aren’t securely compressed against the fitting and will start leaking later when you’re not
looking.
If you live in the UK and ask for a hose clamp, you might get a “Jubilee” clamp or something similar. These are also
stainless steel worm screw clamps, but instead of angled slots in the band it has little raised lips for the screw to engage.
These are better than the US aircraft type clamps on small diameters, but still not good.
To assure a good, reliable seal, you’re going to need some clamps that securely compress the hose onto the fitting
uniformly all the way around. While the worm screw types are not recommended, there are several other types that will
work fine. Many auto parts stores sell “EFI hose clamps”, which consist of a steel band with a small screw and nut that
draws it tight. They come in various sizes, and you need to carefully select the size you want; these type clamps will
only fit the size hose intended, you cannot just keep screwing them down smaller like a worm screw clamp.
Unfortunately, you’re not likely to find these type clamps in stainless steel, so it is advisable to carefully apply anti-seize
compound to the threads on that tiny screw if you ever want to get it loose later.
Sometimes EFI clamps are offered in a package with the hose; make sure you have suitable clamps on hand or can buy
them separately before buying EFI hose without the clamps. Jim Taylor says, “I replaced the originals on my (then) 16year-old '76 XJ12C. I obtained two Volvo FI hose replacement "kits" (part number 273680-9). Each kit contained the
appropriate number of short rubber hoses and neat little black painted hose clamps (not worm gear type) for a Volvo six
cylinder car. This fix didn't cost very much. My receipt (dated 3/4/92) shows I was charged the grand sum of $6.11 per
240
kit.” Of course, similar kits may be available from other car makes as well.
John Ashcroft, who lives in Australia, says, “If you have screw (worm drive) clamps and have an engine fire, the
insurance company will not pay. You have to have EFI clamps on fuel lines.”
There is also a type of clamp that works similarly to the EFI clamp described above, except that it has two loops of wire
in place of the steel band. These seal pretty well, but they’re not very pretty and they really mangle the hose. They
don’t seem to come in stainless steel either.
Greg Price says, “The Series III XJ6 has some nice fuel injection hose clamps, and my local Jag tech recommends
Mercedes fuel injection hose clamps.”
Stefan Schulz says, “Here in the UK, Farnell offer stainless steel hi-torque hose clamps which are The Biz. Highly
recommended. Farnell Industrial are on telephone [+44] 113-2636311.” Schulz adds that he does not recommend the
fuel injection clamps from a Volvo.
Tom Mackie says, “I find most conventional "clamps" to be a little unsightly. So.. There is a clamp used in the repair of
shop air hoses as well as on oxy/acetylene hoses (if that's not a high fire hazard application, I don't know what is). These
clamps do not have a screw/nut on them. They are a single usage item. They are a formed metal band, with an outward
flare/dimple/nipple (I have no idea what to call it) on each side. These simply slide over the hose, are placed into
position, then using pliers, these nipples are squeezed, compressing them, which in turn tightens the clamp. No
screw/nut sticking out, getting in the way, cluttering appearances etc. Definitely not self loosening. Removal is with side
cutters.. Just snip off one side and bend it open. These are cheap.. so making them disposable is not a big deal. This I
would use on the injector end.
“I was considering another crimp style, but for the fuel rail end. There is what I'll describe as a "cup" shaped unit, which
I believe is sorta an aeroquip fitting. I have to confirm this yet, but I believe you could use any hose with the appropriate
size "cup" and have it crimped into place. The minor catch is that you either need the special tool which applies pressure
to about 6 locations at the same time, or you have the fittings shop do it by taking them the fuel rail. These are semipermanent, and removal is with a hack saw, which destroys the hose. This is why I'm thinking of using these on the fuel
rail side, and the removables on the injector side. Again, no screws sticking out, etc. Nice-n-neat.”
Note that the problem of worm screw clamps causing leaks is not unique to the EFI fuel system. One should also take
note of the types of clamps used on the fuel tank vent system, the power steering hoses, the transmission cooler hoses,
and just about anywhere else that small diameter hoses are clamped. Leaks at some of these locations may be less
disastrous than a fuel system leak, but you’d still rather not have any leaks.
CLAMPLESS HOSE CONNECTIONS: The section above describes what clamps to use on fuel hoses. Now let’s
discuss not using them! There are two types of hose barb used in the fuel systems on the XJ-S, and one of them must be
clamped while the other should not be clamped.
DO NOT CLAMP
CLAMP REQ'D
Figure 13 - Fuel Hose Barbs
With the barb shown at left, the hose is installed by merely pushing it onto the barb. It works kinda like a Chinese finger
trap; the hose slides on easily, but if you try to pull it off it grips onto the barb and won’t let go. These fittings typically
come with a dished washer or cup that must be slid into place before pushing the hose on, but these items do nothing
241
more than hide the cut end of the hose to make the installation look neat. Hydraulic hose shops have push-on fittings
with flimsy plastic dished washers.
Proper use of a hose clamp requires the smooth cylinder of the type shown at right for the clamp to compress the hose
against. If a clamp is applied to the barb shown at left, it will compress the hose against the points on the ridges and
possibly damage the inner liner of the hose. There are clampable barbs that have a series of small ridges in this clamping
area, presumably to help ensure a reliable seal, but they are usually rounded and easily distinguishable from the large,
toothy grips of the clampless barb.
Believe it or not, the non-clamped type provides a much more reliable seal. This is apparently because it allows the
rubber hose to flex and seals more securely as it does, whereas the clamped connection will often start to leak as soon as
any pulling or twisting is involved.
Typically, you will know which type you’re dealing with before removing the old hose by looking at what’s on there
from the factory. If there’s no clamp, it’s the type that doesn’t use a clamp. If it’s the type that needs a clamp, there will
be some form of clamp -- or a cup-shaped piece of metal that is “swaged” or “crimped” onto the end of the hose to
compress it onto the barb. The decorative cups on the non-clamped barbs sometimes look similar, but it is obvious that
they are not swaged; in fact, you can spin them around with your fingers.
The problem, of course, with relying on the existing situation as an indication of barb type is that someone may have
gotten in there before you and added clamps where there shouldn’t be any.
Note that you may have a mix of clamped and clampless fittings. The early D-Jetronic cars use clamps everywhere.
John Ashcroft says that his ’80 needs clamps on the rail but not on the injectors. On the author’s ’83, the entire injector/
rail assembly uses clampless fittings, but the connections at the fuel cooler still require clamps.
Regarding pressure ratings and the security of push-on connections: A shop frequented by this author has a tester, and
in their spare time they test things to failure just for grins. The 5/16” cloth-surface push-on hose described above was
tested, installed as intended on a push-on fitting. It held to 1200 psi, and then the hose ruptured near the end of the barb.
The push-on connection never leaked or came apart.
INJECTOR HOSE REPLACEMENT -- D JETRONIC: Injector hose replacement on the D Jetronic is pretty selfexplanatory: Loosen clamps, disassemble, reassemble with new hose, tighten clamps. If there are crimped metal collars
(you have original crimped collars after all these years?), you will need to cut through one side of each collar and spread
it a little to get it off; replace the collars with EFI clamps when reassembling. Ed Sowell adds, "It is not sufficient to
tighten the hose joints just once. I am absolutely sure they were all tight and non-leaking when I rebuilt the injection
system last summer. Yet, in April of this year they were nearly all loose. I believe this is due to the hoses deforming
under clamp pressure and setting in the compressed state due to high temperature. Then they will be loose when the
engine is cool."
INJECTOR HOSE REPLACEMENT -- DIGITAL P: This job is not self-explanatory since there are no clamps, but it's
still pretty easy. The guidelines below are for replacing the hose without even pulling the injectors, but you might want
to remove them as a set to save your back and also to replace the injector seals at the same time. Either way, you will
need to depressurize the fuel system. You will be spilling a little fuel, so take suitable precautions. Disconnect the inlet
and outlet lines to the rail, and remove anything that goes over the rail.
Cut all twelve old hoses through the middle. Any fuel remaining in the rail itself will dump out, so you might want to
choose a suitable hose to cut first and quickly aim it into a jar. You might then try cutting a hose at the other end of the
rail and blowing through it to clear out as much fuel as possible. After cutting the hoses, lift off the rail, leaving the
injectors in place.
Remove the pieces of the old hose from both rail and injectors. Don’t lose the dished washers. Try to do as little
damage to the barbs themselves as possible. The basic idea is to use a razor knife of some sort -- a boxcutter blade or
utility blade, X-Acto knife, whatever -- to “shave” down one side of the hose, cutting just deep enough to slice through
242
the reinforcing cord inside the hose but being careful not to cut so deep as to penetrate the inner lining of the hose and
contact the metal barb inside. Cut too shallow the first couple of times just for practice; you can always cut deeper, but
once you’ve cut too deep you’re faced with barb damage. Once the reinforcing cord is severed -- possibly two or more
places around the barb -- the hose can be pulled off.
The problem, of course, is the dished washers get in the way. You can only slice so far down the side of the hose before
the blade hits the washer, leaving the last 1/8” of the cord uncut. It’s trying to get that last part cut, using a corner of the
blade or whatever, where frustration sets in, and the frustration can result in damaged barbs. Richard Fields says, “I
used an X-Acto knife (available at any hobby shop) to remove the hoses, after fighting them with a razor knife. The XActo blade I used was shaped like a cats-Jaguar?-claw and could get in behind the washers very easily. It made cutting
the hoses off a snap!”
Note that while the clampless barbs all are similar in configuration, the ones on the injectors are made of much softer
metal than the ones on the rail. You might want to work on the ones on the rail first so you get the hang of it before
tackling the much-easier-to-damage ones on the injectors.
If the barbs get a little dinged up, believe it or not they can usually be repaired quite effectively. The trick is to make
sure there are no “notches” in the edge of each ridge, so that the edge of the ridge contacts the inside of the hose all the
way around to form a leakproof seal. If there’s a notch, you can grip the barb gently with a standard pair of pliers while
you rotate the injector (you probably need to remove the injector from the engine to do this properly) so that the teeth
on the pliers scrape off the edge of the ridge all the way around until the notch is cleaned up. You still don’t want to use
a clamp on this hose connection unless you had to clean the ridges completely off to get rid of notches -- in which case
you probably should spring for a new injector.
Others suggest not using a razor knife at all. John Ashcroft says, “Used a electric soldering iron to burn the old hoses
off of injectors with no damage to barbs.” Ken Gray elaborates: “You poke the hot tip of the iron into the fuel line just
above the top barb and push it down the length of the fuel hose and into the seemingly useless cupped washer at the base
where you just work the tip around a bit to completely severe the hose. The whole process takes a few seconds due to
the very hot tip of the weller. You can grab hold of the barbs immediately after hose removal and they are barely warm.
I would not use any other method now as the soldering iron works perfectly without any damage to the barb or internal
plastics of the injector. You do however need to use the correct soldering iron; I ended up using a Weller electric iron
which seems to have a temperature control in the tip. I must also say that I have not been able to reliably regenerate the
tip for soldering purposes. This is not a problem because the tips are readily interchangeable.”
David Johnson suggests a wire wheel: "My plan of attack is to cut all the hoses in the middle between rail and injector.
Then I use my bench grinder which is set up with a wire rope wheel. It makes quick work of the remnants of the hose
on the injector and does not gouge the barb end. The wheel's strands are flexible enough to get under the cup. As for
the rail I have an air die grinder which I use with a similar, though smaller and slower, wire wheel and it is simply a
matter of abrading the material off. Actually took me less than 3/4 hour to do all 12 recently."
Cut suitable 8mm or 5/16” (7.9mm) EFI hose into ten pieces 1-3/4" long. Make doubly sure that all ten hoses are the
same length; different lengths can cause problems with the clampless barb connections. Install the ten pieces of hose
onto the rail first; remember to put the dished washers in place. Use no lubricants on either the hoses or the barbs; they
should be assembled dry, and they should push on easily. Position dished washers onto the injectors, and then push the
entire rail down onto the injectors one bank at a time. After pressing the rail down onto the injectors, pull upward
forcefully on the rail to help the hoses establish a good grip on the barbs. Leave the 1A and 1B hoses until last, and cut
those hoses to whatever length seems to fit right. Reconnect the fuel inlet and outlet, and then turn the ignition on for
two seconds at a time for several cycles so the fuel pump can repressurize the system. Start it up and check for leaks.
HOSE ASSEMBLY REBUILDING: Many of the lines (fuel, power steering, etc.) in the Jag consist of metal tubing
with threaded connectors and a short length of hose in the middle somewhere, all sold under one part number. When it’s
been in there too long and has dried up and started leaking, the section of hose can easily be replaced with suitable hose
along with suitable clamps. It is suggested that before you cut the original hose off, you place measured marks on the
tubes on either side of the hose so that when you reassemble, the same overall length can be established. You should
243
also put alignment marks, so the new assembly won’t be twisted. Finally, if the hose is within sight of the exhaust
system or other hot parts, it might be better to wrap it with some aluminum foil to prevent the radiant heat from cooking
the new hose.
Some hose assemblies in the fuel system have clampless barbs to connect metal tubing to hose, similar to those fittings
on the rail described above. However, these may have a deep cup covering the end of the hose instead of the dished
washer used on the injector hoses; this deep cup looks like a crimp collar except that it isn’t crimped. The deep cup can
make it a bit more difficult to get the old hose off, since getting the razor knife on the hose will be all but impossible and
getting a soldering iron tip in there will be no picnic either. To make life easier the next time you replace hoses, you
might want to order some of the dished washers used on the injectors, EAC7876, and reassemble the fuel lines with
these instead of the cups. That will also make disassembly easier this time, since you can just cut the cups off to get
them out of your way.
The author’s solution here worked well. I used a hacksaw to cut these deep cups circumferentially, separating each one
into a sleeve and a shallow cup -- obviously being careful not to saw all the way through the hose and damage the barb
underneath. I was then able to simply slide the sleeve up the hose out of the way and slice the hose away using the same
method as with the hoses on the rail with the dished washers. When reassembling with new hose, I reinstalled the
shallow cup (cleaned up a little) and discarded the sleeve. The finished assembly looks good, arguably better than the
dished washers at the rail.
If you get those cups off intact and intend to reuse them, note that when putting the new hose on you may have trouble
telling if it’s on all the way. So, prior to assembly, slip the cup onto the end of the hose and mark on the hose so you’ll
know when it is full